JP6512068B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In the gaming machine of the pachinko machine or the like, there is shall perform the Starring unloading indicating the value of Jo Tokoro (Patent Document 1).

JP 2012-179176 A

  However, in the above-described pachinko machine, further improvement in interest has been desired.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to improve the interest of a game.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve the object, from at least a first aspect, among the plurality of second aspect is different from the first embodiment, and cause variable effect is produced to either the second aspect A first effect execution means for executing a first effect, a position setting means for setting an execution position of a second effect different from the first effect, and the second effect at the execution position set by the position setting means and a second demonstration execution means for executing said first demonstration execution means, wherein to hide the second effect when the execution position of the first effect overlaps the execution position of the second effect the is intended to execute one effect, the second effect execution means, and execution position of the first effect when the first effect is Ru Tei is performed in the first embodiment and the execution position of the second effect is The first state becomes the overlapping first state, and the first effect That the execution position of the first effect and the execution position of the second effect is to execute the second presentation to the execution position where the second state hardly overlap than the first state when run second aspect , and the said first effect is performed while running in the first mode the second effect, the first effect that is running on the first aspect is variable to the second aspect If that, the Ri first Monodea executed by the second demonstration execution means so the state becomes the second state, said position setting means, the first being performed by the first demonstration execution means depending on the variable aspect of 1 effect, Ru settable der at different running position of the second effect.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 , further comprising discriminating means capable of executing predetermined discrimination, wherein the second effect executed by the second effect executing means is the discrimination. Suggested information is suggested to indicate the discrimination result of the means .

According to claim 1 the gaming machine described in the at least a first aspect, among the plurality of second aspect differ from its first aspect, performing a first effect causes the variable one of the representation embodiment to the second embodiment A first effect executing means for performing, a position setting means for setting an execution position of a second effect different from the first effect, and a second for executing the second effect at the execution position set by the position setting means comprising directing execution means, wherein the first demonstration execution means executes the first effect to hide the second effect when the execution position of the first effect overlaps the execution position of the second effect It is those, wherein the second demonstration execution means comprises a first state where the first effect is the execution position of the first effect and the execution position of the second effect overlap when Ru Tei is performed in the first embodiment And the first effect is executed in the second mode Are those with execution position of the first effect and the execution position of the second effect is to execute the second presentation to the execution position where the overlapping hard second state than the first state when said first The second effect executed while the effect is executed in the first mode is the second effect when the first effect executed in the first mode is changed to the second mode. Ri Monodea executed by the 1 state so that the second state second demonstration execution means, said position setting means, the variable aspect of the first effect that is performed by the first demonstration execution means Correspondingly, Ru configurable der at different running position of the second effect.

Therefore , there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, the second effect executed by the second effect execution unit includes the indication information that suggests the judgment result of the determination unit. There is .

Therefore, there is an effect that the rendering effect can be enhanced.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation | movement unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of a slide unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a slide unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a slide unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a left slide member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a left slide member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a right slide member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a right slide member. It is a front view of a slide unit. It is a front view of a slide unit. (A) is a front view of the upper unit, and (b) is a rear view of the upper unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an upper unit unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an upper unit unit. It is a front view of an upper unit unit. It is a rear view of an upper unit unit. It is a front view of a lower unit unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a lower uniting unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a lower uniting unit. It is a front view of a lower unit unit. It is a front schematic diagram of a drive arm in a retreat rotation position, a horizontal rotation position, a perpendicular rotation position, and a overhang rotation position. It is a partial enlargement front schematic diagram of a drive arm at the time of being rotated from a retreat rotation position to a projection rotation position. It is a front view of an upper unit unit and a lower unit unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a protrusion unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a protrusion unit. It is a front view of a base member and a raising and lowering base. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a raising / lowering base and a rotation member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a raising / lowering base and a rotation member. It is a front view of a raising / lowering base and a rotation member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rotation member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a rotation member. It is a front view of a rotation member. (A) is a front view of the drive body in the state arrange | positioned in a 1st rotation position, (b) is a front view of the drive body in the state arrange | positioned in a 2nd rotation position. It is a front schematic diagram of a rotation member. It is a front schematic diagram of a rotation member. (A) is a front view of a lifting unit, (b) is a rear view of the lifting unit, and (c) is a side view of the lifting unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a raising / lowering unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of the raising / lowering unit in a 1st state. It is a front view of the raising and lowering unit in a 2nd state. It is a front view of the raising / lowering unit in a 3rd state. It is a rear view of the raising / lowering unit in a 1st state. It is a rear view of the raising / lowering unit in a 2nd state. It is a rear view of the raising / lowering unit in a 3rd state. (A) is a front view of the transmission member, the slide member, and the link member in the first state, (b) is a front view of the transmission member, the slide member, and the link member in the second state; ) Is a front view of the transmission member, the slide member and the link member in the third state. It is a front view of the operation unit in a union state. It is a schematic cross section of the operation unit in the LIV-LIV line of FIG. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of each rotation member of a slide unit, the raising / lowering base of a protrusion unit, and a rotation member. (A) And (b) is a front view of each rotation member of a slide unit, the raising / lowering base of a protrusion unit, and a rotation member. (A) And (b) is a front view of each rotation member of a slide unit, the raising / lowering base of a protrusion unit, and a rotation member. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a slide unit, an upper unit unit, and a lower unit unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a slide unit, an upper unit unit, and a lower unit unit. (A) is a schematic diagram of the slide unit in the arrow LXVIIa direction view of FIG. 65 (a), the upper unit and the lower unit, and (b) is the slide unit in the arrow LXVIIb direction of FIG. 65 (b) It is a schematic diagram of an upper unit unit and a lower unit unit. (A) is a schematic diagram of the slide unit in the arrow LXVIIIa direction view of Fig.66 (a), an upper unit, and a lower unit unit, (b) is a slide unit in the arrow LXVIIIb direction of Fig.66 (b). It is a schematic diagram of an upper unit unit and a lower unit unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the slide unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a slide unit. (A) is a rear view of a transmission gear, (b) is a side view of a transmission gear. (A) is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit in the state where the rotation transmission member and the transmission gear meshed in a front view, (b) is the state in which the meshing of the rotation transmission member and the transmission gear was cancelled. It is the schematic diagram seen from the slide unit front. (A) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the slide unit in the LXXIIIa-LXXIIIa line | wire of FIG. 72 (a), (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the slide unit in the LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb line | wire of FIG. 72 (b). It is a disassembled front perspective view of the slide unit in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view of the slide unit in a state in which the left rotation transmission rack gear of the main body base member and the transmission gear are in mesh, and (b) is a bottom view of the main body base member due to displacement of the housing member. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit in the state in which the mesh | engagement with the side 1st rack gear and the transmission gear was cancelled | released front view. (A) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the slide unit in the LXXVIa-LXXVIa line of FIG. 75 (a), (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the slide unit in the LXXVIb-LXXVIb line of FIG. 75 (b). It is a front view of a base member in a 4th embodiment. It is the model which looked at the slide unit in the state where the left rotation transmission rack gear of the base member and the transmission gear meshed is a front view, and (b) is the tooth engagement of the left rotation transmission rack gear of the base member and the transmission gear released. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit in the state of being seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the left slide member in a 5th embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a left slide member. (A) is a schematic view of the left slide member in a state before the switching plate is operated, and (b) is a front view of the left slide member in a state after the switching plate is operated It is a schematic diagram. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the left slide member in 6th Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a left slide member. (A) is a schematic view of the slide unit in a state before the switching plate is operated, and (b) is a schematic view of the slide unit in a state after the switching plate is operated is there. (A) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the slide unit in the LXXXVa-LXXXVa line of FIG. 84 (a), (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the slide unit in the LXXXVb-LXXXVb line of FIG. 84 (a). It is a disassembled back perspective view of the slide unit in 7th Embodiment. It is the model which looked at the slide unit from the front. It is the model which looked at the slide unit from the front. It is the model which looked at the slide unit from the front. It is a front view of the slide unit in 8th Embodiment. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a slide unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a slide unit. It is the model which looked at the slide unit from the front. FIG. 93 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCIVa-XCIVa in FIG. 93 (a), and FIG. 93 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. 93 (b); (C) is a schematic cross section of the slide unit in the XCIVc-XCIVc line of FIG. 93 (c). It is a disassembled front perspective view of the slide unit in 9th Embodiment. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a left slide member. It is a front view of a slide unit. FIG. 97 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCVIIIa-XCVIIIa in FIG. 97 (a), and FIG. 97 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb in FIG. 97 (b); (C) is a schematic cross section of the slide unit in the XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc line of FIG. 97 (c). (A) is a front view of the raising / lowering unit in 10th Embodiment, (b) is a rear view of a raising / lowering unit, (c) is a side view of a raising / lowering unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a raising / lowering unit. It is an operation unit in the united state. (A) is a schematic cross section of the operation unit in the CIIa-CIIa line of FIG. 101, (b) is a schematic cross section of the operation unit in the CIIb-CIIb line of FIG. (A) is a front view of the drive in a state where the drive in the eleventh embodiment is disposed at the first rotation position, and (b) is in a state where the drive is disposed at the second rotation position. It is a front view of a drive body. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a variable winning prize device in the first control example. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning apparatus of the La-La cross section in the first control example, (b) is a Lb-Lb cross-sectional view, (c) is the variable winning apparatus in the first control example FIG. (A)-(b) is a rear view of a part of variable winning prize apparatus in the 1st example of control. (A) is a figure which showed typically area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen in the 1st control example, and (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen in the 1st control example. . (A) is a figure which showed the area division of the display screen in case reach reach production is displayed, (b) is a figure showing an example of the production display mode of reach reach production. (A)-(c) is the figure which showed an example of the production | presentation display aspect of reach navigator production. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of a ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of a RAM in the main control device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first random number counter C1 and the jackpot determination value in the special symbol, and (b) is the jackpot type in the first symbol type counter C2 and the special symbol And (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table, (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of a jackpot variation pattern table, and (c) is a schematic view It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table, and (d) is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table typically. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the structure of RAM of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus typically. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the navigation effect selection table, (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the first navigation effect selection table, (c) is a schematic view It is the model which showed the content of the 2nd navi presentation selection table typically. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in the main control in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit operation setting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st example of a control. It is a flowchart which shows the reach navigation effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 1st control example It is a flowchart which shows V interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example It is a flowchart which shows stop classification command processing. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot-related command processing for display performed by MPU in a display control device in the 1st example of control. (A) is a flowchart which shows the opening command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is a round performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 1st control example It is a flowchart which shows several command processing. (A) is a flowchart which shows the ending command processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is V which is performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 1st control example It is a flowchart which shows production command processing. (A) is a flowchart which shows a back image change command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 1st control example Is a flowchart showing error command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the display setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the warning image setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the pointer update process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is a resident performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 1st control example 7 is a flowchart showing an image transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal image transmission setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is a figure showing an example at the time of the compound press production in the 2nd control example being started, (b) is a time of reaching the production setting timing D3b in the composite touch production in the 2nd control example It is a figure showing an example. (A) is a figure showing an example at the time of reaching timing press period Db1 in compound press production in the 2nd control example, (b) is in timing press period Db1 in the composite push production in the 2nd control example It is the figure which showed the other example of the reaching point. (A) is a figure showing an example at the time of operating frame button 22 in a timing press period in the compound press production in the 2nd control example, (b) is a figure in the compound press production in the 2nd control example It is the figure which showed an example at the time of reaching 2 double hit periods Dc. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the continuous slot effect performed by the 2nd example of control. (A)-(e) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed by the continuous slot effect in a 2nd control example. (A) is a figure which showed the example of a display of "the normal mode" in the example of 2nd control, (b) is the figure which showed the example of a display of "the sugoroku mode" in the example of the 2nd control. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows the main display area Dm in a 2nd control example, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation display of the point production in a 2nd control example. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) schematically shows the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the second control example It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the pressing scenario table in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the normal pressing scenario in the second control example (C) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the long press and hold scenario in the second control example, and (d) schematically shows the content of the combined press and scenario in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the character selection table, (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the hit character selection table, and (c) is a disengagement It is the model which showed the content of the character selection table typically. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the point selection table, (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the hit point selection table, and (c) is a disassembly It is the model which showed the content of the point selection table for pictures typically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the point presentation setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the pressing production | presentation setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the auto-press production | presentation setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the slot production | presentation setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process in the first time slot effects performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process in the normal slot effect performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process in the 1st shortening slot presentation in process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process in the 2nd shortening slot presentation in process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process during extension slot effect performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the depression production related command processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 2nd control example. (A) is a flowchart showing pressing command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example, and (b) is a length executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example It is a flow chart which shows push command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing automatic pressing start command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example 1 is a flowchart showing an auto pressing command process. (A) is a flowchart which shows the automatic depression end command processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 2nd control example Is a flow chart showing release command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the slot presentation command processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the point presentation command processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 2nd control example. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the pressing scenario table in the first modified example of the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first combined pressing scenario It is a figure and (c) is a mimetic diagram showing typically the contents of the 2nd compound press scenario. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the slot presentation setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of a 2nd control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 2nd modification of the 2nd control example. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the frame button control apparatus in the 2nd modification of the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the frame button control apparatus in the 2nd modification of a 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a display of each production performed in each example of control. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a display of each production performed in each example of control. It is the model which showed typically each mode used for the point production in the 3rd control example. (A) is a figure which showed the example of a display of "normal mode A" in the example of 3rd control, (b) is the figure which showed the example of a display of "the sugoroku mode" in the example of the 3rd control. (A) is a figure showing a display example of "a normal mode" in the 3rd example of control, (b) is a figure showing a display example of a "bingo mode" in a 3rd example of control. (A) is a figure which showed typically an example of the layer in which the character in the 3rd control example is displayed, (b) shows typically an example of the layer in which the point in the 3rd control example is displayed. FIG. 14C is a view schematically showing an example in which a plurality of layers in the third control example are synthesized. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device in the third control example, and (b) shows the configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device in the third control example It is a schematic diagram shown typically. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the internal level selection table in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the internal score selection table in the third control example FIG. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the number selection table in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the hit number selection table in the third control example It is a figure and (c) is a mimetic diagram showing typically the contents of the number selection table for times of omission in the 3rd example of control. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of a use score selection table in the third control example, and (b) schematically shows the configuration of a final display mode selection table in the third control example It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the final first display mode selection table in the third control example, and (b) shows the contents of the final second display mode selection table in the third control example It is a schematic diagram shown typically. It is the model which showed typically the content of the last 3rd display mode selection table in a 3rd control example. It is the model which showed typically the content of the character display selection table in a 3rd control example. It is the model which showed the content of the display data table in the 3rd control example typically. It is the model which showed typically the content of the transfer data table in the 3rd control example. It is the model which showed the content of the drawing list in the 3rd control example typically. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the point presentation setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the point presentation initial-setting processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the mode transfer process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the display mode change process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the point presentation mode setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing 3 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 3rd control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the point production related command processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 3rd control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 3rd control example 5 is a flowchart showing point command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the indicator command processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 3rd control example. (A) is a figure which showed typically another example of the layer in which the character in the 3rd control example is displayed, (b) is another example of the layer in which the point in the 3rd control example is displayed And (c) is a view schematically showing another example in which a plurality of image layers in the third control example are synthesized. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of reach navi production performed by the 4th example of control. (A)-(c) is the figure which showed an example of the production | presentation display aspect of the reach navigation effect in a 4th control example. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) shows the configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example It is a schematic diagram shown typically. It is the model which showed typically the content of the 2nd internal level selection table in the 4th control example. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the effect scenario storage area in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the effect scenario selection table in the fourth control example FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the reach navigation effect setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. (A) It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the modification 1 of a 4th control example, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 2 of a 4th control example typically. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the modification 3 of a 4th control example, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content displayed in the modification 3 of a 4th control example. (C) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content displayed in the modification 3 of a 4th control example. (A)-(e) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed by the continuous slot effect in a 5th control example. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display mode displayed in the slot effect in the 5th control example, (b) is a timing showing the flow of the display mode displayed in the slot effect in the 5th control example It is a chart. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example, and (b) shows the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example It is a schematic diagram shown typically. It is the model which showed typically the content of the display mode memory | storage area in a 5th control example. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the display mode selection table in the fifth control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the winning display mode selection table in the fifth control example It is a schematic diagram, and (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the contents of the display mode selection table for deviation in the 5th example of control. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the stop mode selection table in the fifth control example, and (b) schematically shows the content of the hit stop mode selection table in the fifth control example It is a schematic diagram, and (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the contents of the stop mode selection table for separation in the 5th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process 2 during the first time slot effects performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process 2 during the normal slot effects performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process 2 during the 1st shortening slot presentation in process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process 2 during the 2nd shortening slot presentation in process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process 2 during the extension slot effects performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. (A) And (b) is an example of the schematic diagram of the display mode of the back surface image in the 6th control example. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the compound press production performed in the 6th example of control. (A)-(c) is the figure which showed an example of the background change operation aspect of the composite press production performed in a 6th control example. (A) is a timing chart which shows the flow of the compound press production performed in the 6th example of control. (B) is a schematic view showing button operation contents and an effect mode which are executed in a composite press effect executed in the sixth control example. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the pressing production 2 in the composite pressing production performed in a 6th control example. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 5 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the auto-press production | presentation setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring and presentation process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 6th control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows another example of the pressing production 2 in the composite pressing production performed in a 6th control example. It is a timing chart which shows the flow where the additional production in the 7th control example is set. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a display displayed on a 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 7th control example. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a display of the additional effect displayed on a 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 7th control example. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the internal configuration of the variation pattern selection table in the seventh control example, and (b) schematically illustrates the contents of the first variation pattern selection table in the seventh control example It is the schematic diagram shown, (c) is the 2nd fluctuation pattern selection table in the 7th control example, (d) shows the contents of the 3rd fluctuation pattern selection table in the 7th control example typically. It is a schematic diagram. It is the model which showed typically the content of the additional presentation selection table in the 7th control example. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device in the seventh control example, and (b) schematically shows the configuration of an effect counter in the seventh control example It is a schematic diagram. It is the block diagram which showed the electric constitution of the display control in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 6 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring and presentation process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing 4 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 7th control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows change pattern command processing 2 performed by MPU in a display control device in the 7th example of control. (B) is a flowchart which shows the additional production command processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the pointer update process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a timing chart which shows the flow in which the additional production in the modification of the 7th control example is set. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the background change presentation in the modification of the 7th control example. (B) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the additional effect in the modification of the 7th control example. (C) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the background change presentation in the modification of the 7th control example. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram which shows the modification of additional presentation. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the presentation in the 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring and presentation process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring and presentation process 5 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 8th control example.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 42, an embodiment in the case where the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 1 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 has an outer frame 2 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 2 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. And an inner frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 2, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis The frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 4, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In the inner frame 4, a ball emitting unit 112 a (see FIG. 4) for emitting a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding the ball emitted from the ball emitting unit 112 a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an open / close shaft 5 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front door 5 is formed by assembling a decorative resin part, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 5c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates 8 is disposed on the back side of the front door 5, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with a top surface opened and projecting upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination thereof guides the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the effect of super reach. Ru.

  The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 5c. In the pachinko machine 1, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front door 5 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a display lamp 34 is provided which incorporates a light emitting means such as an LED and can display the payout of the prize ball and the occurrence of an error.

  A small window 35 is formed on the right side below the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be viewed. 2) is made visible from the front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, in the pachinko machine 1, in order to create more refreshingness, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33.

  Below the window portion 5c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball emission unit 112a, an emission stop switch 51b for stopping emission of the ball during the pressing operation, and rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) or the like for detecting the amount of movement operation (rotational position) by a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of the turning operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (ballistic strength), whereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the emission stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, and rails 76 and 77. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1) Mounted on the back side of the The base plate 60 is made of wood laminated with thin plate materials, and various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side are formed so as to be invisible to the player. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by tapping screw etc. from the front side.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window 5 c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front of the game board 13, an outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and at the inner position of the outer rail 77, a strip-shaped metal plate is formed like the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 76 and the outer rails 77, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 76, 77 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails (a winning opening etc. is provided and launched). Area where the ball flows down).

  The two rails 76, 77 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 76, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. Rubber rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a certain amount of momentum hits the rubber pair 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed in the lower left side of the game area in the front view (the lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B perform display according to each control performed by the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 4), and display of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly performed. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, and when the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 1 is in a steady change, a time-short or a normal, by means of LEDs, or indicate whether it is in fluctuation by means of an on-light condition. The stop symbol indicates whether the symbol corresponds to the probability variation big hit or the symbol corresponding to the normal big hit or not by the lighted state, or indicates the number of holding balls by the lighted state, and by the 7-segment display device, the round of the big hit Display numbers and errors. In addition, a plurality of LEDs are configured such that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors may indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 1, a lottery is performed when one of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 has a winning. The pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not the jackpot is successful in the lottery (a jackpot lottery), and when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot, the jackpot type is also determined. As jackpot types determined here, 15R probability variation jackpots, 4R probability variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. Not only is it shown whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as the stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown .

  Here, "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 round jackpots, and "4R probability variation jackpot" is a maximum number of round jackpots with 4 rounds It is a probability change jackpot to shift to a high probability state after. Also, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after jackpots of 15 rounds and for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuation numbers) becomes a short time state. is there.

  Also, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (during a definite change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special gaming state The state of The high probability state (in a definite change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 140 by increasing the probability of hitting a second symbol to be described later. The term "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of change is not positive, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that of probability change. Moreover, with the time saving state (time saving) of the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased with the jackpot probability unchanged, and the second winning opening 140 To say the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is normally medium is a gaming state (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol is increased) which is neither a definite change nor a time reduction.

  During a definite change or during a short time, not only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time for which the first motorized symbol 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened is changed, and it is longer than normal. The time is set. When the first motorized part 140a is in the open state (opened state), the second winning opening 140 is compared to the case where the first motorized part 140a is closed (closed state). It will be easy to win the ball. Therefore, the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 140 during a definite change or during a time cut, and it is possible to increase the number of times the jackpot lottery is performed.

  In addition to changing the opening time of the first motorized symbol 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 or changing the opening time thereof during a definite change or during a time cut, a single hit is made. In this case, the number of times the first motorized prize 140a is opened may be changed to be larger than that in the normal mode. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol does not change during positive or negative, and the first motorized symbol 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened and the first motorized symbol is held once At least one of the number of times of opening 140 a may be changed. In addition, during a definite change or during a short time, the first motorized symbol 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened, or the first motorized symbol 140a and the second motorized symbol 82 are opened at one time. The number of times it does not occur may be changed so that only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased as compared with the normal.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is triggered by a winning (start winning) of either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140, while being synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third A third symbol display device 81 configured of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display of symbols, and an LED that variably displays the second symbol using a passage of a ball of the first through gate 66 as a trigger And a second symbol display device (not shown).

  Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible from an opening opened at the center of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling these third symbols for each symbol row It is supposed to be. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment is the first symbol display device 37A, 37B in which the display of the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed, but the first A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device alternates a symbol of “o” as a display symbol (a second symbol (not shown)) and a symbol of “x” for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the first through gate 66 It is a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the third symbol in the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 1, when the variable display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of "o"), the first motorized symbol 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is It is configured to be activated (opened) only for a predetermined time.

  The time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the definite change and during the short time, it is possible to perform the winning lottery more frequently than in the middle. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities for the first motorized prize 140a of the second winning opening 140 to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140 during the definite change and during the short hours.

  In addition, the second winning opening during positive or negative time by other methods, such as increasing the probability of hitting, increasing the opening time and opening frequency of the first motorized part 140a per hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize at 140 and the third winning opening, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter during the definite change or during the short time than during the normal time, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, and a single hit The opening time and the number of times of opening of the first motorized steering wheel 140a with respect to the game player may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured to allow passage of a part of the ball that flows down the game board among the balls launched to the game board. When the ball passes the first through gate 66, a lottery for winning the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, the symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out For example, the symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball passes through the first through gate 66 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and the second symbol hold lamp (not shown) Also in), it is lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the first through gate 66 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). . Further, the number of through gates assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol holding lamp may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, there is disposed a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can be won. When the ball is won in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A lottery for a big hit is made at (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, below the first winning opening 64 in a front view, a second winning opening 140 in which a ball can win is disposed. When the ball is won in the second winning opening 140, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the gaming board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 (see FIG. In FIG. 4, a jackpot lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

  In addition, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is winning in the second winning opening 140 are configured the same. The number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second winning opening 140 has the ball, for example, to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when the player wins a prize may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball has won to the second prize opening 140 may be set to five.

  The second winning opening 140 is accompanied by a first motorized symbol 140a. The first motorized prize 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first motorized prize 140a is in the closed state (reduced state), and the ball is less likely to win the second prize opening 140. There is. On the other hand, as a result of the fluctuation display of the second symbol performed triggered by the passage of the ball to the first through gate 66, when the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the first motorized symbol 140a is The ball is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball is likely to be awarded to the second winning opening 140.

  As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal condition, and the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is short as compared to the normal, and therefore, in the variable display of the second symbol The symbol of “” is easily displayed, and the number of times that the first motorized accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) is increased. Furthermore, during a definite change or during a short time, the time during which the first motor-operated part 140a is opened also becomes longer than normal. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win a prize at the second winning opening 140 as compared to normal time or during a definite change.

  Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in either the low probability state or the high probability state in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case in which the ball has won in the second winning opening 140. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected when jackpot is higher is higher in the case where the ball has won the second winning opening 140 than in the case where the ball has won the first winning opening 64 It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first motorized prize 140a as in the second winning opening 140, and the ball is always in a state where it is possible to win.

  Therefore, during the normal operation, there are many cases where the motorized prize associated with the second winning opening 140 is in the closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140, and therefore, it is directed to the first prize opening 64 without the electric jack. Launch the ball so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and the winning of the first winning opening 64 gives a lot of opportunities for a big hit lottery and becomes a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim at things.

  On the other hand, by passing the ball to the first through gate 66, the first motorized prize 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is likely to be in the open state during definite variation or time, and the second winning opening 140 is won. The ball is shot so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display unit 80 toward the second winning opening 140 (so-called “right-handed”), and the first through gate 66 is passed. It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming a 15R certainty variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 140 as well as opening the first motorized prize 140a.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment emits a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 (is it in the process of being changed, is in the middle of a short time, is in the normal state). You can change the way of “right-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because it can change the way of hitting the ball.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a substantially long rectangular shaped special winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided substantially at the center. In the pachinko machine 1, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 becomes a big hit, the stop of the big hit after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to become a symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of a big hit is shown. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area, which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time The game state that the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period of time for a predetermined number of times during the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more (for example, three) may be disposed, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right of the first winning opening 64, for example, The left side of the variable display unit 80 may be used.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label or the like is provided, and a seal paper stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. It can be viewed through 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball which flows down the game area and which has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 140, 82 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. Ru. The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115 and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  Also, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 for dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 1 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results on the second symbol display device by the MPU 201 Run.

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area in which various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc. are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply unit 115 even after the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on due to the power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before the power interruption based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specified winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 described later. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured such that a backup voltage can be supplied from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. . The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. To the input / output port 225, a main control unit 110, a display control unit 114, an audio output unit 226, a lamp display unit 227, other units 228, a frame button 22 and the like are connected. Other devices 228 include drive motors 441, 475, 476.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81, or super reach It instructs the display control device 114 to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display effect variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226 by outputting the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by the display command. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is output to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (not shown) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 98. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200. As shown in FIG. 7 to 9 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

  In FIG. 7, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are retracted to the maximum in the direction away from each other, and the upper displacing member 530, the lower displacing member 640, the rotating member 730 and the elevating member 820 are respectively at retracted positions. In FIG. 8, the left slide member 430 is slidingly displaced toward the right slide member 450 and the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member 640 are displaced to the extended position in FIG. 8 from the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 9, the state in which the rotating member 730 and the raising and lowering member 820 are displaced to the extended position is illustrated in FIG. 9 from the state illustrated in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 includes a rear case 300 formed in a box shape, and in the inner space of the rear case 300, a slide unit 400, an upper combining unit 500, a lower combining unit 600, The protruding unit 700 and the lifting and lowering unit 800 are rotatably accommodated.

  The rear case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edge of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 to the front, and the respective wall portions 301 and 302 It forms in the box shape which one side (front side) was open | released. In the bottom wall portion 301, an opening 301a in a front view rectangular shape is formed at the center thereof, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is made possible.

  The slide unit 400 has a base member 410 having a rectangular shape in a front view rectangular shape and disposed in an upper portion of the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and an upper end portion is slidably displaceable on the base member 410. Left slide member 430 and right slide member 450, and each slide member 430 is independently provided in the left and right direction on the front side of the opening 301a of the back case 300 (that is, the third symbol display device 81). An effect of slidingly displacing in the longitudinal direction of 410) can be implemented.

  In this case, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are formed to be able to abut, but in the present embodiment, when the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 abut, they are broken. A restraining structure is employed. Details of the structure will be described later.

  In the lower portion of the opening 301 a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, a guide member 419 having a rectangular shape in a front view rectangular shape is disposed in a posture parallel to the base member 410, and the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450. The lower end of each of the slide members 430 and 450 is slid and guided between the facings of the guide member 419 and the bottom wall portion 301 when it is slid in the left-right direction. Thereby, it can suppress that the lower end side of each slide member 430, 450 shakes back and forth.

  The upper combination unit 500 includes a base member 510 which is disposed in front of the base member 410 in the slide unit 400 and has a rectangular front view rectangular shape, and an upper displacement member 530 which is disposed displaceably on the base member 510. On the other hand, lower united unit 600 includes base member 610 having a substantially L shape in a front view disposed on the left side portion and the lower side portion of opening 301 a of bottom wall portion 301 of rear case 300, and lower base member 610. And a lower displacing member 640 disposed displaceably.

  The upper displacing member 530 is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position retracted to the back side of the base member 510 and an overhanging position projecting to the front side of the opening 301 a of the back case 300, and the lower displacing member 640. Is displaceably formed between a retracted position retracted to the front side of the base member 610 and an extended position extended to the front side of the opening 301a of the back case 300, and the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are formed. When it is projected to the overhanging position, the side surfaces (the upper abutment portion 533 and the lower abutment portion 643) of the two displacement members 530 and 640 abut (join) each other.

  In this case, when the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member 640 displaced in the direction approaching each other are in contact with each other, an impact may be generated and the posture may become unstable, for example, they may bounce back. In the present embodiment, a structure for suppressing such an impact at the time of contact is employed. Details of the structure will be described later.

  The projecting unit 700 includes a base member 710 which is disposed in a lower portion of the opening 301 a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300 and which has a rectangular shape in a front view, and elevating and lowering members disposed on the base member 710. The elevation base 720 includes a base 720 and a rotation member 730 rotatably disposed on the elevation base 720. The elevation base 720, together with the rotation member 730, retracts to the front side of the base member 710. It can be displaced (lifted) between an overhanging position projecting toward the front side of the opening 301a.

  Further, the projecting unit 700 is provided with a projecting member 735 disposed so as to be able to slide in and out (sliding displacement) to the rotating member 730, a swinging member 732 pivotably provided to the rotating member 730, and the projecting members 735 and And a drive motor 763 (see FIG. 37) for driving the swing member 732.

  The projecting unit 700 drives the projecting member 735 and the swinging member 732 by one drive motor 763. Therefore, since the driving force necessary for driving the projecting member 735 and the driving force necessary for the swinging member 732 overlap, the load becomes large and there is a possibility that the durability of the drive motor 763 may be deteriorated. In the embodiment, a structure for suppressing the load of the drive motor 763 is employed. Such a structure will be described later.

  The lifting unit 800 includes a base member 810 which is disposed in front of the base member 510 in the upper uniting unit 500 and which is rectangular in a front view rectangular shape, and a lifting member 820 which is disposed on the base member 810 so as to be able to move up and down. The raising and lowering member 820 is displaceable (elevated) between a retracted position retracted to the front side of the base member 810 and an extended position extended to the front side of the opening 301 a of the back case 300.

  Next, the detailed configuration of the slide unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 18. First, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12, a structure for slidingly displacing the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 with respect to the base member 410 will be described.

  FIG. 10 is a front view of the slide unit 400. FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 400, and FIG. 12 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 400. 10 to 12 show the state in which the left slide member 430 is disposed at the retracted position (the position farthest from the right slide member 450).

  As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the slide unit 400 includes a base member 410 disposed on the bottom wall 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300 and a slide rod disposed on the base member 410. Sliding displacement of the member 420 and the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 slidably coupled to the slide rod member 420, and the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 along the slide rod member 420 And a drive mechanism for driving the motor.

  The base member 410 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, and the slide rod member 420 is disposed on the front side along the longitudinal direction. Further, in the base member 410, a plate-like projecting plate portion 411 horizontally protrudes from the lower portion of the sliding rod member 420 toward the front side, and the upper surface of the projecting plate portion 411 (facing the sliding rod member 420) And the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are engraved on the lower surface of the projecting plate 411. As shown in FIG.

  The slide rod member 420 is a metal rod-like body having a circular cross section for guiding the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450, and is inserted into the slide holes of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450. These slide members 430 and 450 are slidably held. The sliding rod member 420 is fixed at its both ends to the base member 410 by a pair of holding members 415.

  The base side rack gear 412, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are rack gears extended along the longitudinal direction of the sliding rod member 420 (that is, the sliding direction of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450). The first side pinion gear 432 of the left slide member 430 is meshed with the base side rack gear 412, and the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450. The transmission gears 437a and 457a (see FIGS. 13 to 16) are meshed respectively.

  The left slide member 430 includes a first member 431 having a rectangular shape in a front view, a first side pinion gear 432 rotatably disposed on the first member 431, and a second side in which the first side pinion gear 432 is engaged. A front view rectangular horizontally long second member 433 having a side rack gear 433a, a front view rectangular vertically long base member 434 suspended downward from the tip end side of the second member 433, and a front side side of the base member 434 Transmission member for transmitting movement (slide displacement) of the base member 434 relative to the base member 410 to the rotation member 435. And gears 437a to 437f.

  The first member 431 is provided with a slide hole extending along the longitudinal direction of the first member 431 and having an inner peripheral surface having a circular cross section, and the slide rod member 420 is inserted through the slide hole. The sliding rod member 420 can slide (slide) along the axial direction (longitudinal direction). That is, the first member 431 is slidably disposed on the base member 410 via the slide rod member 420.

  A first side rack gear 431 a is engraved on the upper surface of the first member 431. The first side rack gear 431a is a rack gear engaged with a left drive gear 471 described later, and is extended along the longitudinal direction of the first member 431. Therefore, as described later, when the left drive gear 471 is rotationally driven, its rotational movement is converted to linear movement by the first side rack gear 431 a, and the first member 431 is slid along the sliding rod member 420. Ru.

  In addition, as described above, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotatably disposed (axially supported) on the first member 431, and the portion where the first side pinion gear 432 is disposed (front side of the first member 431) The cover 431b having a rectangular plate shape in a front view is disposed on the lower surface of the cover. That is, the first side pinion gear 432 is disposed in a state of being provided behind the cover 431 b.

  The first side pinion gear 432 is meshed with the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410. Therefore, when the first member 431 is slidingly displaced along the sliding rod member 420, that is, when it is slidingly displaced relative to the base member 410, the first side member 431 receives an action from the base side rack gear 412 in accordance with the sliding displacement. Thus, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated.

  The second member 433 is disposed (connected) displaceably to the first member 431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole on the tip end side, so that the second member 433 is relative to the first member 431. Sliding (sliding displacement) is possible along the sliding rod member 420 while being displaced. The slide hole has an inner peripheral surface with a circular cross section, and is extended along the longitudinal direction of the second member 433.

  In this case, a second side rack gear 433 a is engraved on the lower surface of the second member 433, and the second side rack gear 433 a is meshed with the first side pinion gear 432. Therefore, as described above, when the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated with the slide displacement of the first member 431, the first side pinion gear 432 receives an action (that is, the rotation of the first side pinion gear 432 is The second member 433 is displaced relative to the first member 431 by being converted into linear motion by the second side rack gear 433a and then transmitted to the second member 433).

  That is, since the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 431 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410 and the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 433, the second member 433 is A driving force associated with the linear movement of the first member 431 and a driving force associated with the rotational movement of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied. As a result, when the first member 431 is slid relative to the base member 410, the second member 433 is slid relative to the base member 410 in a state in which the speed of the second member 433 is higher than that of the first member 431. Can.

  A left slide member 430 and a right slide member 450 are slidably disposed on the slide rod member 420, and the movable ranges of both slide members 430 and 450 are set in an overlapping manner. Therefore, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 can be in contact with each other. In this case, in the present embodiment, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are formed such that the first member 431 and the rack member 451 are in contact with each other and the second member 433 is not in contact with the rack member 451. Ru.

  The right slide member 450 is rotatable to the front side of the base member 454 and the rack member 451 having a rectangular shape in the front view rectangular shape, the base member 454 having a rectangular shape in the front view rectangular shape suspended downward from the base end side of the rack member 451. To transmit the movement (slide displacement) of the base member 454 relative to the base member 410 to the rotating member 455. The transmission gears 457a to 457f are mainly provided.

  The rack member 451 is provided with a sliding hole extending along the longitudinal direction of the rack member 451 and having an inner circumferential surface with a circular cross section on the base end side, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted through the sliding hole Thus, it is possible to slide (slide displacement) along the axial direction (longitudinal direction) of the slide rod member 420. That is, the rack member 451 is slidably disposed on the base member 410 via the sliding rod member 420.

  A rack gear 451 a is engraved on the upper surface of the rack member 451 along the longitudinal direction of the rack member 451. A right drive gear 472 described later is meshed with the rack gear 451a. Therefore, as described later, when the right drive gear 472 is rotationally driven, the rotational motion is converted into linear motion by the rack gear 451a, and the rack member 451 is slidingly displaced along the sliding rod member 420.

  The drive mechanism includes a left drive gear 471 and a right drive gear 472 rotatably supported in front of the base member 410, and a left pinion gear 473 and a right pinion gear 474 engaged with the drive gears 471 and 472 respectively. A left drive motor 475 and a right drive motor 476 whose drive shafts are connected to the respective pinion gears 473 and 474 are mainly provided.

  The left drive gear 471 and the right drive gear 472 are respectively meshed with the first side rack gear 431a of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) and the rack gear 451a of the right slide member 450 (rack member 451). Therefore, the left drive gear 471 and the right drive gear 472 are rotationally driven by the left drive motor 475 and the right drive motor 476 via the left pinion gear 473 and the right pinion gear 474, thereby via the first side rack gear 431a and the rack gear 451a. Thus, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) and the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) can be slid and displaced independently of each other.

  A cover member 416 is disposed on the front of the base member 410, and the drive gears 471, 472 and the pinion gears 473, 474 are rotatably held between the facing surfaces of the base member 410 and the cover member 416. . The drive motors 475 and 476 are fastened and fixed to the front side of the cover member 416. In this case, an insertion hole is bored in the cover member 416, and the drive shaft of each drive motor 475, 476 is connected to each pinion gear 473, 474 through the insertion hole.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16, a structure for rotating the rotation members 435 and 455 in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 will be described.

  FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member 430, and FIG. 14 is an exploded back perspective view of the left slide member 430.

  As shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the base member 434 is provided (covered) on the front side of the back side base member 434 a connected to the second member 433 and the back side base member 434 a. The transmission gears 437a to 437f are rotatably held (axially supported) between opposing surfaces (internal spaces) of the back side base member 434a and the front side base member 434b. The front side base member 434b is provided with a circular axial support hole 434b1 in a front view.

  As described above, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are a gear group for transmitting the movement (slide displacement) of the base member 434 with respect to the base member 410 to the rotating member 435, and they are connected (engaged) in series. A gear train (gear train) is formed with the transmission gear 437a at the top and the transmission gear 437f at the rear.

  As described above, the leading transmission gear 437a is engaged with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the base member 410, and the rotation shaft 435a of the rotating member 435 is coaxially fixed to the trailing transmission gear 437f.

  Therefore, by sliding the left slide member 430 (base member 434) relative to the base member 410, the leading transmission gear 437a is rotated by the action of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the base member 410, and the rotation is The rotary member 435 can be rotated by the transmission of the rear transmission gear 437f through the transmission gears 437b to 437e.

  The rotation member 435 includes a rotation shaft 435a and a support shaft 435b coaxially protruding from the rear surface. The rotation shaft 435a is a portion serving as a rotation shaft when the rotation member 435 rotates with respect to the base member 434, and is rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 434b1 of the front side base member 434b. In this case, the transmission gear 437f is coaxially connected to the rotation shaft 435a so as to be non-relatively rotatable. Therefore, as described later, the rotating member 435 is rotated relative to the base member 434 by rotating the transmission gear 437f.

  The support shaft 435 b rotatably supports the displacement member 436 rotatably on the back side of the rotation member 435, and is rotatably inserted into the pivot hole 436 a of the displacement member 436. In addition, the E ring is fitted in the fitting groove recessedly provided at the front-end | tip of the support shaft 435b, and the removal prevention of the displacement member 436 from the support shaft 435b is formed.

  The displacement member 436 is a member disposed displaceably on the back side of the rotation member 435, and includes a shaft support hole 436a, a relief hole 436b, and a curved rack gear 436c. As described above, the support shaft 435 b of the rotation member 435 is inserted into the shaft support hole 436 a, whereby the displacement member 436 is rotatably supported by the rotation member 435.

  The relief hole 436 b is formed as a groove-like opening curved in an arc shape by dividing an annular shape centering on the axial center of the pivotal support hole 436 a at a predetermined central angle, and the groove width thereof is of the rotating member 435 The size is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the rotation shaft 435a. Therefore, when the displacement member 436 is displaced (rotated around the support hole 436a) with respect to the rotation member 435, the rotation shaft 435a can be displaced along the relief hole 436b, and the displacement of the rotation member 435 with the rotation member 435 is possible. Interference with the member 436 can be avoided.

  The curved rack gear 436c is formed as a rack gear inscribed along a circumferential surface centered on the axial center of the shaft support hole 436a. Here, the drive motor 441 is disposed on the rear surface of the rotating member 435, and the pinion gear 442 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 441, and the pinion gear 442 is engaged with the curved rack gear 436c. Therefore, by rotating the pinion gear 442 in the forward or reverse direction by the drive motor 441, the displacement member 436 is rotated relative to the rotation member 435 in one direction or the other with the support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as a rotation center. It can be done.

  In this case, the rotational member 435 is formed in a substantially elongated shape whose dimension in the length direction is large relative to the dimension in the width direction, and the position where the rotating member 435 is approximately the center in the length direction and the width direction The rotation shaft 435a is disposed at The front view shape of the displacement member 436 is formed in the shape which divided the rotation member 435 into substantially 2 by the center of the length direction. Therefore, by rotating the displacement member 436 in one direction with the pivot hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as the rotation center, the displacement member 436 is concealed on the back side of the rotation member 435 to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize. Can.

  Further, in the rotating member 435, the drive motor 441 is disposed on the opposite side to the displacement member 436 with the support shaft 435b interposed therebetween. Therefore, in the structure in which the displacement member 436 and the drive motor 441 are disposed on the rotation member 435 The position of the center of gravity can be close to the rotation axis 435 a of the rotation member 435. Thus, the rotation of the structure relative to the base member 434 can be stabilized.

  In the present embodiment, in the state where the displacement member 436 is rotated in one direction with the pivotal support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as the rotation center (the displacement member 436 is hidden behind the rotation member 435), the rotation member The center of gravity of the structure in which the displacement member 436 and the drive motor 441 are disposed at 435 is substantially aligned with the rotation shaft 435 a of the rotation member 435. Thus, the rotation of the structure relative to the base member 434 can be stabilized.

  On the other hand, in a state in which the displacement member 436 is rotated in the other direction with the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as the rotation center (a state in which the displacement member 436 is visible to the side of the rotation member 435), Because of the overhang of the displacement member 436, the center of gravity of the above-described structure can be separated from the rotation shaft 435a of the rotation member 435. Thus, the position of the center of gravity can be adjusted according to the rotation direction of the rotation member 435, and the initial operation can be smoothly performed.

  That is, when the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is started from the stop state, the driving force becomes large due to the influence of the inertial force. In this case, the center of gravity of the above-described structure in a state in which the displacement member 436 extends to the side of the rotation member 435 moves downward in the direction of gravity at the start of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (that is, the rotation of the rotation member 435). When the displacement member 436 is positioned on the side to be displaced, the displacement member 436 is extended to the side of the rotation member 435 (it is rotated in one direction), so that the above-described rotation action by the weight of the structure The rotation can be assisted. As a result, the load on the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) can be reduced, and slide displacement from the stopped state of the left slide member 430 can be smoothly started.

  On the other hand, the center of gravity of the above-described structure in a state in which the displacement member 436 extends to the side of the rotation member 435 is displaced upward in the gravity direction at the start of slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (ie, rotation of the rotation member 435). If the displacement member 436 is hidden on the back surface of the rotation member 435 (it is rotated in the other direction), the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure is brought close to (coincident with) the rotation shaft 435a. Thus, it is possible to suppress an increase in the load (see FIG. 11) of the left drive motor 475. Thereby, the slide displacement from the stop state of the left slide member 430 can be smoothly started.

  Further, the center of gravity of the above-described structure in a state in which the displacement member 436 extends to the side of the rotation member 435 is displaced upward in the direction of gravity when the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (that is, the rotation of the rotation member 435) stops. In the case of being positioned on the side where the rotation is performed, the rotation can be easily stopped by the weight of the structure described above. Thus, when the drive of the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is stopped, the left slide member 430 can be stopped promptly.

  FIG. 15 is an exploded front perspective view of the right slide member 450, and FIG. 16 is an exploded back perspective view of the right slide member 450. The base member 454 includes a back side base member 454a connected to the rack member 451 and a front side base member 454b disposed (covered) on the front side of the back side base member 454a. Transmission gears 457a to 457f are rotatably held (axially supported) between opposing surfaces (internal spaces) of the member 454a and the front side base member 454b. In the front side base member 454b, a pivotal support hole 454b1 having a circular shape in a front view is bored.

  As described above, the transmission gears 457a to 457f are a gear group for transmitting the movement (slide displacement) of the base member 454 relative to the base member 410 to the rotating member 455, and they are connected (engaged) in series. A gear train (gear train) is formed with the transmission gear 457a at the top and the transmission gear 457f at the rear.

  As described above, the leading transmission gear 457a meshes with the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 of the base member 410, and the rotation shaft 455a of the rotating member 455 is coaxially fixed to the trailing transmission gear 457f.

  Therefore, by sliding the right slide member 450 (base member 454) relative to the base member 410, the leading transmission gear 457a is rotated by the action of the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 of the base member 410, and the rotation is The rotating member 455 can be rotated by the transmission to the rear transmission gear 457f through the transmission gears 457b to 457e, and the rotation of the rear transmission gear 457f.

  The rotation member 455 includes a rotation shaft 455a and a support shaft 455b coaxially protruding from the rear surface. The rotation shaft 455a is a portion serving as a rotation shaft when the rotation member 455 rotates with respect to the base member 454. The rotation shaft 455a is rotatably supported by a shaft support hole 454b1 of the front side base member 454b. In this case, the transmission gear 457f is coaxially connected to the rotation shaft 435a so as not to be relatively rotatable. Therefore, as described later, the rotating member 455 is rotated relative to the base member 454 by rotating the transmission gear 457f.

  The support shaft 455 b rotatably supports the displacement member 456 rotatably on the back side of the rotation member 455, and is rotatably inserted into the shaft support hole 456 a of the displacement member 456. Note that the E ring is fitted in a fitting groove recessed at the tip of the support shaft 455b, whereby the displacement member 456 is prevented from coming off the support shaft 455b.

  The displacement member 456 is a member disposed displaceably on the back side of the rotation member 455, and includes a shaft support hole 456a, a relief hole 456b, and a curved rack gear 456c. As described above, the support shaft 455 b of the rotation member 455 is inserted into the shaft support hole 456 a, whereby the displacement member 456 is rotatably supported by the rotation member 455.

  The relief hole 456 b is formed as a groove-like opening curved in an arc shape by dividing an annular shape centering on the axial center of the pivotal support hole 456 a at a predetermined central angle, and the groove width thereof is of the rotating member 455 The dimension is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the rotation shaft 455a. Therefore, when the displacement member 456 is displaced (rotated around the support hole 456a) with respect to the rotation member 455, the rotation shaft 455a can be displaced along the relief hole 456b, and displacement with the rotation member 455 is made. Interference with the member 456 can be avoided.

  The curved rack gear 456c is formed as a rack gear inscribed along a circumferential surface centering on the axial center of the shaft support hole 456a. Here, a drive motor 461 is disposed on the rear surface of the rotating member 455, and a pinion gear 452 is fixed to a drive shaft of the drive motor 461. The pinion gear 452 is engaged with the curved rack gear 456c. Therefore, by rotating the pinion gear 452 in the forward direction or the reverse direction by the drive motor 461, the displacement member 456 rotates in one direction or the other direction with respect to the rotation member 455 with the support hole 456a (support shaft 455b) as a rotation center. It can be done.

  In this case, the rotary member 455 is formed in a substantially elongated shape whose dimension in the length direction is large relative to the dimension in the width direction, and the rotation shaft 455a is on one end side in the length direction. The drive motor 461 is disposed at the other end side. In addition, since the displacement member 456 is disposed on the rotation member 455 on the opposite side of the drive motor 461 with respect to the support shaft 455 b, the rotation member 455 and the drive motor 461 are disposed on the rotation member 455. The position of the center of gravity can be disposed at a position eccentric to one end of the rotating member 455 (a position separated from the rotating shaft 455a).

  Therefore, at the start of slide displacement of the right slide member 450 (that is, rotation of the rotation member 455), the center of gravity of the structure in which the displacement member 456 and the drive motor 461 are disposed on the rotation member 455 is displaced downward in the gravity direction. By positioning on the side, the weight of the structure can be exerted in the direction of rotating the structure itself. Thereby, the load on the right drive motor 476 (see FIG. 11) can be reduced, and slide displacement from the stop state of the right slide member 450 can be smoothly started.

  On the other hand, when the slide displacement of the right slide member 450 (that is, the rotation of the rotation member 455) is stopped, the gravity center of the above-mentioned structure is positioned on the side displaced upward in the gravity direction. It is possible to make it easy to stop the rotation of the structure value. Thus, when the drive of the right drive motor 476 (see FIG. 11) is stopped, the right slide member 450 can be stopped promptly.

  Further, as described later, the right slide member 450 is retracted by the left slide member 430 (first member 431) coming into contact (collision) with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) (FIG. 10 right side) When the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure is located on the side which is displaced upward in the direction of gravity, the weight of the structure acts as a resistance, and the cushioning effect by the rotation of the structure value is exerted. It can be done.

  Next, the operation of the slide unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIGS. 17 and 18 are front views of the slide unit 400, and the transition state when the left slide member 430 is slid is illustrated. FIGS. 17 and 18 illustrate a state in which the cover member 416, the guide member 419, the left drive motor 475, and the right drive motor 476 are removed.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, in a state where the left slide member 430 is disposed at the retracted position, the second member 433 is displaced relative to the first member 431 in the extension direction to the maximum, and the base member 434 is movable. It is disposed at the left end of the range (the left side in FIG. 17A, the position farthest from the right slide member 450). When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is driven in the positive direction from this state, the first member 431 moves to the right with respect to the base member 410 by the action of the left drive gear 471 and the first side rack gear 431a. 17 (a) slide toward the right slide member 450).

  In this case, as described above, the second rack gear 433a of the second member 433 and the base rack gear 412 of the base member 410 are disposed to face each other in a mutually parallel posture, and the second rack gear 433a and the base side Since the first side pinion gear 432 axially supported by the first member 431 is interposed in a state of being engaged with both of the rack gears 412, when the first member 431 is slidingly displaced with respect to the base member 410, By the action of the base side rack gear 412, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated while being slide-displaced with the first member 431, and the rotation of the first side pinion gear 432 is applied to the second side rack gear 433a. Is slid in the same direction as the first member 431. That is, the second member 433 is slidingly displaced with respect to the base member 410 in a state in which the second member 433 is accelerated more than the first member 431.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 17 (b), the second member 433 which has a slide displacement speed faster than that of the first member 431 catches up with the first member 431, and the second member 433 against the first member 431 The members 433 are partially overlapped (the total length in the longitudinal direction of the first member 431 and the second member 433 is shortened).

  From this state, the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is further driven in the positive direction, and the first member 431 further moves to the right with respect to the base member 410 (in FIG. 18A, the second member 433 is relatively displaced relative to the first member 431 in the shortening direction, and the base member 434 is at the right end of the movable range (FIG. 18A). (A) The right side, the position closest to the right slide member 450), that is, the extended position.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18 (a), when the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is driven in the reverse direction opposite to that described above from the state where the left slide member 430 is disposed at the extended position. The first member 431 is slidingly displaced with respect to the base member 410 in the left direction (the left direction in FIG. 18A, the direction away from the right slide member 450) by the action of the left drive gear 471 and the first side rack gear 431a. .

  Also in this case, as in the case described above, the operation of the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410 and the first side pinion gear 432 axially supported by the first member 431 Thus, the second member 433 is slidingly displaced relative to the base member 410 in a state in which the second member 433 is accelerated more than the first member 431.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 17B, the second member 433 whose slide displacement speed is relatively faster than that of the first member 431 precedes the first member 431, and the first member 431 is advanced. The second member 433 is relatively displaced in the extension direction (the entire length in the longitudinal direction of the first member 431 and the second member 433 is extended more than the entire length in the extended position).

  From this state, the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is further driven in the reverse direction, and the first member 431 is further separated from the base member 410 in the left direction (FIG. 17A, the second member 433 is displaced relative to the first member 431 in the extending direction at maximum relative to the first member 431, and the base member 434 is at the left end of the movable range (FIG. 17A). (A) It is disposed at the position farthest from the left and right slide members 450), that is, in the overhanging position.

  In the present embodiment, a detection target is formed at the tip of the second member 431, and a detection sensor for detecting the detection is disposed on the base member 410 (all not shown). In this case, when the second member 431 (left slide member 430) is disposed at the retracted position, the detection sensor is disposed at a position at which the detection portion of the second member 431 can be detected. When the left slide member 430 is disposed at the retracted position, the drive of the left drive motor 475 is stopped.

  On the other hand, when stopping the drive of the left drive motor 475 at the overhang position, cumulative addition of the number of drive steps of the left drive motor 475 after the start of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 from the retracted position to the overhang position. It is done by doing. That is, when the cumulative addition value reaches the predetermined value, the driving of the left drive motor 475 is stopped assuming that the left slide member 430 is disposed at the overhanging position.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the movable range (the range from the retracted position to the extended position) of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 has a portion overlapping the movable range of the slide displacement of the right slide member 450. Therefore, the movable range of the two can be enlarged to enhance the rendering effect.

  However, when the movable range is overlapped in this manner, the control defect (for example, Due to the occurrence of the error of the cumulative addition of the number of drive steps, the left slide member 430 which is slide-displaced to the extended position abuts against the right slide member 450, which may cause breakage. On the other hand, if the speed of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is reduced in order to suppress breakage, the rendering effect associated with the slide displacement is lost.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, damage to the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 can be suppressed while securing the rendering effect accompanying the slide displacement of the left slide member 430.

  That is, as described above, the second rack gear 433a of the second member 433 and the base rack gear 412 of the base member 410, and the first pinion gear 432 supported by the first member 431 act as a second member. The base member 434 can be slide-displaced relative to the base member 410 in a state in which the speed of the 433 is higher than that of the first member 431, and the base member 434 (the rotation member 435 and the Since the displacement member 436) is connected, the speed of the slide displacement of the base member 434 can be increased, and the rendering effect associated with the slide displacement can be secured.

  On the other hand, as described above, the left slide member 430 causes the first member 431 whose slide displacement speed is relatively slower than that of the second member 433 to abut on the right slide member 450 (rack member 451). The impact at the time of the contact can be weakened to suppress the breakage of both.

  In the present embodiment, the right slide member 450 is kept on standby (stopped) on the side closer to the retracted position than the extended position of the left slide member 430, and the left slide member 430 is moved toward the extended position. At the same time, the left slide member 430 is brought into contact with the right slide member 450 and the right slide member 450 is pushed by the left slide member 430 in the direction of slide displacement to effect the slide displacement of both in an integral state. be able to. Also in this case, since the first member 431 whose slide displacement speed is relatively slower than that of the second member 433 can be made to abut on the right slide member 450 (rack member 451), The impact of both can be reduced to prevent both from being damaged.

  The right slide member 450 is disposed slidably on the base member 410, and the direction of the slide displacement of the right slide member 450 is parallel to the direction of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430. That is, in a state where the right slide member 450 is disposed at a position capable of coming into contact with the left slide member 430 disposed at the extended position (see FIG. 18A), the direction away from the left slide member 430 (see FIG. 18 (a) has a movable range for sliding displacement to the right), and the direction in which the right sliding member 450 can slide can be changed to the left sliding member 430 when the left sliding member 430 is abutted. It is considered to be in the direction to allow the slide displacement of

  Therefore, when the left slide member 430 abuts on the right slide member 450 (see FIG. 18A), the right slide member 450 is retracted (retracted backward) while receiving the slide displacement of the left slide member 430. Thus, the buffer action can be exhibited (see FIG. 18 (b)). As a result, breakage of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 can be easily suppressed.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the directions of slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are made parallel, when the left slide member 430 abuts on the right slide member 450, the right slide member 450 is produced. It is possible to make the fleeing operation smoothly. Therefore, the buffer action can be reliably exerted, and the breakage of both can be easily suppressed.

  Further, in this case, by sharing the slide rod member 420 between the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450, the directions of the slide displacements of the both are made parallel, so the overall size can be reduced. . That is, when the sliding rod member for guiding the left slide member 430 and the sliding rod member for guiding the right slide member 450 are juxtaposed with different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement. In that case, the space is increased, which leads to an increase in size. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the space efficiency can be improved and downsizing can be achieved by using the two slide members 430 and 450 as one slide bar member 420.

  As described above, the right slide member 450 has a movable range in a direction away from the left slide member 430 disposed at the extended position (right side in FIG. 18A). It can be disposed at a position where it abuts. That is, a state in which the left slide member 430 is not in contact with the right slide member 450 can be formed.

  Therefore, when the left slide member 430 is slidingly displaced at a relatively high speed, it is easy to assume that the stop position of the left slide member 430 extends beyond the target position due to the above-described variation and control failure. When the right slide member 450 is positively abutted against the slide member 430 (functions as a stopper) and the slide position of the left slide member 430 is moved relatively slowly, it is easy to make the stop position coincide with the target position Therefore, by disposing the right slide member 450 in a position not in contact with the left slide member 430, the number of times of contact can be reduced, and fatigue associated with the contact can be reduced. As a result, the service life of both slide members 430 and 450 can be improved.

  Here, in order to accelerate the second member 433 relative to the first member 431, the left slide member 430 separately provides these two members 431 and 433 and also the base side rack gear 412 and the second side rack gear. Since it is necessary to interpose the first side pinion gear 432 between 433a and the like, and the number of parts and the sliding portion increase, the weight and the driving resistance become large. Therefore, the force required to drive the left slide member 430 is relatively large.

  In particular, at the time of the initial operation of the left slide member 430 (when the slide displacement is started from the stop state), the force required for driving is maximized by the influence of the inertial force. Therefore, the initial operation (the initial velocity when the slide displacement is started from the stopped state) becomes slow, and there is a possibility that the rendering effect associated with the slide displacement may be inhibited.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the right slide member 450 is formed to be able to abut on the left slide member 430, and the direction in which the left slide member 430 is pushed back to the retracted position (FIG. 18 (a 2.) It is formed so as to be slidably displaceable in the left direction). Therefore, the initial movement of the left slide member 430 (the movement to start slide displacement from the stopped state) can be assisted by the slide displacement of the right slide member 450. Thus, the left slide member 430 can be quickly slide-displaced from the stop state. As a result, it is possible to accelerate the initial operation (initial speed) and improve the rendering effect associated with the slide displacement.

  Further, the right slide member 450 abuts on the first member 431 of the left slide member 430 when it is slidingly displaced in the direction to push the left slide member 430 back to the retracted position (left direction in FIG. 18A). (The first member 431 is pushed back), the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the left slide member 430 can be enhanced.

  That is, the right slide member 450 abuts against the first member 431 whose slide displacement speed is slower than that of the second member 433 of the left slide member 430 and pushes back the first member 431. The time during which the assisting force is applied to the left slide member 430 (first member 431) (ie, after the start of pushing back the left slide member 430 in the stopped state), the velocity of the left slide member 430 exceeds the velocity of the right slide member 450 The time until the displacement of the left slide member 430 precedes the displacement of the right slide member 450 can be made longer, and as a result, the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the left slide member 430 can be enhanced.

  Here, a mechanism (the left pinion gear 473, the left drive gear 471, and the first side rack gear 431a) that slides the left slide member 430 (first member 431) by converting the rotational drive force of the left drive motor 475 into linear motion. And the rotational drive force of the right drive motor 476 into linear motion to slide the right slide member 450 (rack member 451). The gears of the mechanism (right pinion gear 474, right drive gear 472 and rack gear 451a) The ratio is set to a different gear ratio, and in the present embodiment, the gear ratio in the former (left slide member 430) is set to a gear ratio larger than the gear ratio in the latter (right slide member 450).

  In the present embodiment, since the left pinion gear 473 and the first side rack gear 431a are formed in the same shape as the right pinion gear 474 and the first rack gear 431a, the number of teeth of the left drive gear 471 is the same as that of the right drive gear 472. The number of teeth is set to be larger than the number. That is, when the gear ratio is large, the displacement of the rack gear (first side rack gear 431a or rack gear 451a) in the direction of the slide displacement when the drive shaft of the drive motor (left drive motor 475 or right drive motor 476) makes one rotation. It means that the quantity is large.

  Thereby, the left slide member 430 can be easily slide-displaced from the stopped state quickly, and after the start of the slide displacement, the speed of the slide displacement of the left slide member 450 (second member 433) can be increased. As a result, it is possible to improve the rendering effect associated with the slide displacement.

  That is, by setting the gear ratio in the right slide member 450 to a relatively small gear ratio, a larger driving force can be exhibited, so the force by which the right slide member 450 pushes back the left slide member 430 is strengthened. Thus, the initial operation of the left slide member 430 (the start of slide displacement from the stopped state) can be reliably assisted. Therefore, the left slide member 430 can be linearly displaced quickly from the stop state.

  On the other hand, by setting the gear ratio of the left slide member 430 to a relatively large gear ratio, the speed of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) can be increased, and accordingly, The speed of slide displacement of the second member 433 can be increased. Therefore, the improvement of the rendering effect accompanying the slide displacement can be aimed at.

  When the gear ratio of the left slide member 430 is reduced to smoothly perform the initial operation (start of slide displacement from the stopped state) of the left slide member 430, the initial operation becomes smooth, but the end of the initial operation In the later steady state, the speed (maximum speed) of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (second member 433) decreases. On the other hand, if the gear ratio of the left slide member 430 is increased to increase the speed (maximum speed) of slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (second member 433) in the steady state after the initial operation, the maximum speed can be increased. Initial operation (start of slide displacement from stop state) is inhibited (become slower). That is, the compatibility between performing the initial operation of the left slide member 430 smoothly and increasing the speed (maximum speed) of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (second member 433) in the steady state after the initial operation is Such a combination of the right slide member 450 and the left slide member 430 is possible for the first time because the right slide member 450 pushes back the left slide member 430.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30, the detailed configurations of the upper combining unit 500 and the lower combining unit 600 will be described. First, the upper unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 19 (a) is a front view of the upper combining unit 500, and FIG. 19 (b) is a rear view of the upper combining unit 500. FIG. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper unit unit 500, and FIG. 21 is an exploded back perspective view of the upper unit unit 500. Note that FIG. 19 illustrates the upper displacement member 530 in the retracted position.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 to 21, the upper combination unit 500 is connected to a base member 510, a rack member 520 slidably disposed in an inner space of the base member 510, and the rack member 520. An upper displacement member 530 and a drive mechanism for slidingly displacing the rack member 520 are provided.

  The base member 510 includes a rear base 511 having a rectangular front view rectangular shape, and a front base 512 having a rectangular front view rectangular shape disposed (covered) on the front side of the rear base 511, and the rear base 511 and the front base The rack member 520 is slidably accommodated between the opposed surfaces 512 (internal space).

  The rear surface base 511 includes a connection hole 511a formed as a groove-shaped opening extending linearly, a guide hole 511b formed as a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc shape, and a rack member projecting to the front side And a support shaft 511 c inserted into the guide groove 522 of 520.

  The connection hole 511a is an opening for connecting the rack member 520 and the upper displacement member 530, and is formed along (in parallel with) the longitudinal direction of the back surface base 511 (that is, the sliding direction of the rack member 520). The connecting shaft 531 of the upper displacement member 530 is slidably inserted into the connecting hole 511a.

  The guide hole 511b is a portion through which the guide pin 532 of the upper displacing member 530 is slidably inserted, and when the upper displacing member 530 is displaced in accordance with the slide displacement of the rack member 520, As the guide pin 532 is slid along the guide hole 511b, the attitude (direction) of the upper displacement member 530 is changed.

  The rack member 520 is formed as a shaft supporting hole 521 which is a circular hole in a front view for rotatably supporting the connecting shaft 531 of the upper displacement member 530, and a groove-shaped opening extending linearly. It has a guide groove 522 and a rack gear 523 cut along a direction parallel to the extending direction of the guide groove 522, and is formed as a rectangular horizontally long plate-like body.

  The support shaft 511 c of the back surface base 511 is slidably inserted into the guide groove 522. When the support shaft 511 c of the back surface base 511 is inserted into the guide groove 522 and the guide pin 532 of the upper displacement member 530 is supported by the shaft support hole 521, the extending direction of the guide groove 522 is It is parallel to the extending direction of the connection hole 511a. Therefore, the direction of the slide displacement of the rack member 520 is defined in the extending direction of the connection hole 511 a of the back surface base 511.

  The upper displacement member 530 is provided with a connecting shaft 531 and a guide pin 532 which are provided to project from the front side. The connecting shaft 531 is a cylindrical body having a circular cross section and rotatably supported by the pivot hole 521 of the rack member 520 via the connecting hole 511 a of the back surface base 511, and the guide pin 532 is of the back surface base 511. It is a cylindrical body having a circular cross section which is slid along the guide hole 511b.

  A collar C1 having a diameter larger than the shaft support hole 521 and a collar C2 having a diameter larger than the groove width of the guide hole 511b are fixed to the distal ends of the connecting shaft 531 and the guide pin 532, respectively. . Further, an upper contact portion 533 is formed on the side surface of the upper displacement member 530. The upper contact portion 533 is a portion that is in contact with the lower contact portion 643 (see FIGS. 25 and 26) of the lower displacement member 640, and on the side surface (tip end side) opposite to the connecting shaft 531 and the guide pin 532. It is formed.

  The drive mechanism includes a drive gear 541 rotatably supported at the front of the rear surface base 511, a pinion gear 542 engaged with the drive gear 541, and a drive motor 543 having a drive shaft connected to the pinion gear 542; Prepare. The drive gear 541 is meshed with the rack gear 523 of the rack member 520. Therefore, by rotationally driving the drive gear 541 via the pinion gear 542 by the drive motor 543, the rack member 520 can be slidably displaced along the extending direction of the connection hole 511a via the rack gear 523.

  Next, the operation of the upper unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23 are a front view and a back view of the upper unit unit 500, and the transition state when the upper displacing member 530 is displaced between the retracted position and the extended position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 22A and 23A, in the state where the upper displacement member 530 is disposed at the retracted position, the connecting shaft 531 and the guide pin 532 are one end side of the connection hole 511a and the guide hole 511b. The upper displacing member 530 is disposed in a state of forming a horizontal posture and being hidden behind the base member 510, as shown in FIG.

  From this state, when the drive motor 543 is driven in the positive direction, the connection shaft 531 is horizontally displaced along the connection hole 511a in accordance with the slide displacement of the rack member 520, and the guide pin 532 is guided by the guide hole 511b. As shown in FIGS. 22 (b) and 23 (b), the upper displacing member 530 is horizontally inclined (while being rotated about the connecting shaft 531) as shown in FIGS. 22 (b) and 23 (b). It is displaced to. That is, the tip end side (upper contact portion 533) of the upper displacement member 530 is lowered while drawing a curved locus.

  When the drive motor 543 is further driven in the forward direction, the upper displacement member 530 is displaced in the horizontal direction while being further inclined obliquely (while being rotated about the connecting shaft 531), as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 23 (c), a vertical posture in which the tip side (upper contact portion 533) is directed downward is formed. That is, it is disposed at the overhanging position (first position).

  Next, the lower combining unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 29.

  FIG. 24 is a front view of the lower combining unit 600. FIG. FIG. 25 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower combining unit 600, and FIG. 26 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower combining unit 600. Note that FIG. 23 shows the lower displacement member 640 in the retracted position.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 to 26, lower unit 600 includes a base member 610, a drive arm holding member 620 disposed below the front side of base member 610, and a base end of drive arm holding member 620. Attached to the drive arm 630 whose side is rotatably held, the lower displacement member 640 to which the tip end side of the drive arm 630 is connected, the connection arm 650 which couples the lower displacement member 640 to the base member 610, and the drive arm 630. A biasing spring 660 for applying a force and a drive mechanism for applying a drive force to the drive arm 630 are provided.

  The base member 610 is formed as a plate-like body having a substantially L-shaped front view, and a projecting base 611 which is provided to project from the front at the lower end of the substantially L-shaped member And a connecting shaft 612. The protruding base portion 611 is a portion for arranging the drive arm holding member 620 at a position where it protrudes from the front surface of the base member 610 (bulked to the front side), and along the edge at the lower end of the base member 610 It is provided in a projecting manner.

  The drive arm holding member 620 is a back side holding member 621 disposed on the projecting base 611 of the base member 610 and a front side holding member 622 disposed on (covering) the front side of the back side holding member 621. The drive arm 630 and the transmission gears 671a to 671c are rotatably held (axially supported) between opposing surfaces (internal spaces) of the back side holding member 621 and the front side holding member 622.

  The drive arm holding member 620 is disposed on the tip end of the projection base 611 of the base member 610 on the back surface side of the rear side holding member 621, and therefore, the projection height of the projection base 611 is equal to A predetermined space can be formed between the rear surface of the drive arm holding member 620 (rear surface holding member 621) and the front surface of the base member 610. In the present embodiment, since the lower displacement member 640 disposed at the retracted position is formed so as to be accommodated in the space, the outer shape of the lower combination unit 600 can be reduced accordingly.

  The drive arm 630 has a plurality of teeth engraved along the outer peripheral surface of a shaft support hole 631 rotatably supported by the drive arm holding member 620 and a cylindrical portion concentric with the shaft support hole 631. A long member having a gear portion 632 and a connection hole 633 formed at the end opposite to the gear portion 632 and in which the axial support hole 631 and the connection hole 633 are separated by a predetermined distance. It is formed.

  The lower displacing member 640 includes a drive arm connecting shaft 641 and a connecting arm connecting shaft 642 protruding from the front side. The drive arm connection shaft 641 is a cylindrical body having a circular cross section circularly coupled to the connection hole 633 of the drive arm 630, and the connection arm connection shaft 642 is rotatably connected to the connection hole 651 of the connection arm 650. It is a cylindrical body with a circular cross section. The lower displacement member 640 is interposed between the drive arm 630 and the connection arm 650, and is displaced relative to the base member 610 by the rotation of the drive arm 630.

  In the lower displacement member 640, a lower contact portion 643 is formed on the side surface. The lower contact portion 643 is a portion that is in contact with the upper contact portion 533 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) of the upper displacement member 530, and is an imaginary line connecting the drive arm connecting shaft 641 and the connecting arm connecting shaft 642. It is formed on the side surface of the side separated to the overhanging direction side (right side in FIG. 24). In the present embodiment, the lower contact portion 643 is formed as a surface in a direction substantially orthogonal to an imaginary line connecting the drive arm connecting shaft 641 and the connecting arm connecting shaft 642.

  The connection arm 650 includes connection holes 651 and 652 formed on one end side and the other end side, and the connection arm connection shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 and the connection shaft 612 of the base member 610 are connected to the connection holes 651 and 652. Are connected rotatably. Therefore, when the drive arm 630 is rotated and the lower displacement member 640 is displaced relative to the base member 610, the displacement locus of the connection arm connecting shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 is set to the connection shaft 612 of the base member 610. It can be defined as a center arc shape.

  The biasing spring 660 is a metal torsion spring and causes one leg extending from the winding portion to engage with the drive arm holding member 620 and the other leg to engage with the drive arm 630. Is urged in the rotational direction from the retracted position toward the extended position. That is, when the lower displacing member 640 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 27A), the elastic deformation (torsion deformation) of the biasing spring 660 is maximized, and the elastic recovery force causes the drive arm 630 to be displaced. 27A is biased in the rotational direction (rightward rotation in FIG. 27A) for displacing 640 from the retracted position to the extended position. Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor 672 is assisted, and the initial operation in the extension direction of the lower displacement member 640 can be smoothly performed.

  The drive mechanism includes transmission gears 671a to 671c disposed inside drive arm holding member 620, and a drive shaft connected to transmission gear 671a and is disposed on the front of drive arm holding member 620 (front side holding member 622). A drive motor 672 is provided. The transmission gears 671a to 671c are a gear group for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 672 to the drive arm 630, and by connecting (engaging) in series, the transmission gear 671a is at the top and the transmission gear 671c is at the rear. A gear train (gear train) is formed.

  The rear transmission gear 671 c is meshed with the gear portion 632 of the drive arm 630. When the drive motor 672 is rotationally driven, the rotational drive force is transmitted from the leading transmission gear 671a to the trailing transmission gear 671c, and the trailing transmission gear 671c is rotated. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 671 c acts on the gear portion 632 to rotate the drive arm 630.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the operation of the lower combining unit 600 will be described. FIG. 27 is a front view of the lower combining unit 600, and illustrates a transition state when the lower displacement member 640 is displaced between the retracted position and the extended position.

  As shown in FIG. 27A, in the state where the lower displacing member 640 is disposed at the retracted position, the drive arm 630 is maximally rotated counterclockwise in a front view (FIG. 27A left rotation direction) It is positioned at a rotational position (hereinafter referred to as “retracted rotational position”), and is inclined downward from the base end side (rotation center, ie, the axial support hole 631) to the distal end side (connection hole 633). Further, the connecting arm 650 is in a vertical posture in which the direction connecting the connecting holes 651 and 652 is substantially parallel to the vertical direction. Therefore, the lower displacement member 640 is disposed at the position where the horizontal position is at the leftmost position (the position spaced farthest from the overhanging position in the horizontal direction, left in FIG. 27A), and the vertical position is at the lowermost position. It is disposed at a position where it is most separated from the overhanging position in the vertical direction, that is, the lower side in FIG. 27 (a).

  When the drive motor 672 is driven in the positive direction from this state, the drive arm connecting shaft 641 of the lower displacing member 640 is near the drive arm 630 as shown in FIG. 27 (b) as the drive arm 630 rotates clockwise. Of the lower displacement member 640 is displaced to the right (right side in FIG. 27A).

  When the drive motor 672 is further driven in the positive direction from the state shown in FIG. 27B, the drive arm connecting shaft 641 of the lower displacement member 640 is further moved along with the clockwise rotation of the drive arm 630 as viewed from the front. While being displaced upward, the vicinity of the connection arm connecting shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 is further displaced to the right. As a result, as shown in FIG. 27C, the lower displacing member 640 is disposed at the extended position.

  In the extended position, the drive arm 630 is located at a rotational position (hereinafter referred to as “overhanging rotational position”) which is maximally rotated clockwise as viewed from the front (the right rotation direction in FIG. 27C). In the rotational position, the drive arm 630 is disposed such that the distal end side (connection hole 633) is beyond the vertical line passing through the proximal end side (rotation center, i.e., the pivot hole 631). In addition, the connecting arm 650 is in a tilted posture in which the connecting hole 651 is lifted up. Therefore, the lower displacement member 640 is disposed at the position where the horizontal position is the rightmost position (the position spaced farthest from the retracted position in the horizontal direction, right side in FIG. 27C), and the vertical position is the uppermost ( It is disposed at a position farthest away in the vertical direction from the retracted position, a position slightly lower from FIG. 27 (a)).

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29, the displacement speed of the lower combining unit 600 will be described. FIG. 28 is a schematic front view of the drive arm 630 at the retracted rotational position, the horizontal rotational position, the vertical rotational position, and the projecting rotational position. FIGS. 29 (a) to 29 (d) are partially enlarged front schematic views of the drive arm 630 when it is rotated from the retracted rotation position to the extended rotation position.

  Here, as described above, the drive arm 630 is rotated between the retracted rotational position and the extended rotational position, but in the following, the drive arm 630 is rotated by an angle θ1 from the retracted rotational position and the horizontal attitude of the drive arm 630 is achieved. The rotational position at which the virtual line connecting the axial centers of the shaft support hole 631 and the connection hole 633 is parallel to the horizontal direction is referred to as “horizontal rotational position” and rotates by an angle θ2 from the horizontal rotational position. The rotational position at which the drive arm 630 is in a standing posture (a posture in which an imaginary line connecting the axial centers of the shaft support holes 631 and the connection holes 633 is parallel to the vertical direction) is referred to as "vertical rotation position". The overhanging rotational position is a position rotated by an angle θ3 from the vertical rotational position.

  In this case, FIG. 29 (a) corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section (range of the angle θ1) between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position, and FIG. 29 (b) shows the drive arm 630 in the horizontal rotation position. 29 (c) corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section (range of angle θ2) between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position, and FIG. 29 (d) shows the drive arm in the vertical rotation position. 29 (e) corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section (range of angle θ3) between the vertical rotation position and the retracted rotation position.

  The driving state (power supply) of the drive motor 672 is maintained constant, and hence the rotational speed of the drive arm 630 is constant. In this case, it can be assumed that the transition period until the drive arm 630 reaches a constant rotational speed through rotation from the stop state is sufficiently small, and there is no transient response.

  As shown in FIGS. 28, 29 (a) and 29 (b), the drive arm 630 axially supports the connection hole 633 in the section between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position (range of angle θ1). The connection hole 633 is displaced upward as it is rotated downward from the retracted position toward the horizontal rotation position, so that the speed V of the connection hole 633 (the arc shape of the connection hole 633 The tangential velocity) in the displacement trajectory of (1) is such that the upward velocity component (velocity Vv) is gradually increased and maximized at the horizontal rotation position. That is, in such a section (range of angle θ1), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced upward, and its upward velocity is gradually increased.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29 (b) to 29 (d), in the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (range of angle θ2), the drive arm 630 axially supports the connection hole 633. The connecting hole 633 is displaced upward as it is inclined from the horizontal rotation position to the vertical rotation position, so that the velocity V of the connecting hole 633 is directed upward. The velocity component (velocity Vv) is gradually reduced to zero at the vertical rotation position. That is, in such a section (range of angle θ2), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced upward, and the upward velocity thereof is gradually reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 28, FIG. 29 (d) and FIG. 29 (e), in the section between the vertical rotation position and the overhang rotation position (range of angle .theta.3), the drive arm 630 pivotally supports the connection hole 633. Since the connection hole 633 is displaced downward as the drive arm 630 is rotated from the horizontal rotation position toward the vertical rotation position, the velocity V of the connection hole 633 is It has a downward velocity component (velocity Vv). That is, in such a section (range of the angle θ1), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced downward.

  As described above, the lower displacement member 640 abuts (joins) the upper displacement member 530 at the retracted position, as described later, because the velocity component Vv directed upward of the lower displacement member 640 is reduced in the vicinity of the retracted position. When being used, the occurrence of the impact can be suppressed. Therefore, it can suppress that the lower displacement member 640 and the upper displacement member 530 are rebounded to each other, and the postures of both the displacement members 530 and 640 can be stabilized.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29 (a) to 29 (d), the velocity V of the connecting hole 633 is in the section between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position (range of angle θ1), While the velocity component Vh toward the left is gradually increased, in the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (range of the angle θ2), the velocity V of the connecting hole 633 is the velocity component Vh toward the right It will be gradually increased.

  Accordingly, the lower displacement member 640 is displaced toward the left in the section between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position (range of angle θ1) in the vicinity of the connection hole 633, while the displacement direction is horizontal The position is reversed at the rotational position, and in a section between the horizontal rotational position and the vertical rotational position (range of the angle θ2), it is displaced toward the right (in the direction toward the retracted position).

  That is, after the lower displacement member 640 is horizontally displaced toward the left and stopped at the leftmost end (after the horizontal velocity component Vh is set to 0), the direction of the horizontal displacement is reversed, and the right It can be horizontally displaced in an accelerated state gradually toward the direction. As a result, an operation of bending and extending the lower displacement member 640 in the horizontal direction can be revealed, and an effect can be performed in which a dynamic feeling is given to the operation of the lower displacement member 640.

  In particular, according to the present embodiment, in the section (range of angle θ1) in which the velocity component Vh in the horizontal direction is decreased, the velocity component Vv in the vertical direction is increased while the velocity component Vh in the horizontal direction is increased (angle In the range of θ 2), the velocity component Vv in the vertical direction is reduced, so that the above-mentioned operation of bending and stretching in the horizontal direction can be emphasized, and as a result, the player feels the dynamic feeling of the lower displacement member 640 stronger. You can make an impression.

  On the other hand, as described above, the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (range of the angle θ2 in order to suppress the impact when the lower displacement member 640 abuts (joins) the upper displacement member 530 In the configuration in which the speed component Vv directed upward of the lower displacement member 640 is reduced to 0), the rendering effect associated with the displacement of the lower displacement member 640 may be hindered. On the other hand, in such a section (range of angle θ2), the horizontal velocity component Vh can be increased, so the lower displacement member can be displaced by the displacement in the horizontal direction (rightward) instead of the upward displacement. The effect 640 can be performed, and as a result, the effect can be secured.

  In this case, according to the present embodiment, the lower displacing member 640 has the connecting arm 650 at a portion (connecting arm connecting shaft 642) separated upward from the connected portion (the driving arm connecting shaft 641) of the driving arm 630. As it is connected, the upper part of the lower displacement member 640 (near the connecting arm connecting shaft 642) can be horizontally displaced rightward with the rotation around the connecting hole 652 of the connecting arm 650. . Therefore, as described above, when the operation for bending and extending the lower displacement member 640 in the horizontal direction appears, the operation for bending and extending is enlarged by the amount of horizontal displacement to the right with the rotation of the connecting arm 650, The dynamic feeling of the lower displacement member 640 can be made larger. Moreover, instead of the upward displacement, when performing the effect of the lower displacement member 640 by the displacement in the horizontal direction (rightward), the displacement in the horizontal direction (rightward) is increased to produce an effect Can be secured easily.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, an abutment (merging) operation at the overhanging position of the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member 640 in the upper combining unit 500 and the lower combining unit 600 will be described.

  FIG. 30 is a front view of the upper combining unit 500 and the lower combining unit 600, and illustrates a transition state when the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member 640 are displaced between the retracted position and the extended position. .

  As shown in FIGS. 30 (a) to 30 (c), the upper displacing member 530 is moved from the retracted position hidden behind the base member 510 to the distal end side as the drive motor 543 is driven. The upper contact portion 533 is lowered while drawing a curved trajectory, and is disposed at the overhanging position in a state in which the vertical posture with its tip end side (upper contact portion 533) directed downward is formed. On the other hand, the lower displacement member 640 is pushed up by the drive arm 630 as the drive motor 672 is driven from the retracted position where the horizontal position is at the leftmost position and the vertical position is at the lowermost position. It is placed at the exit position.

  As a result, the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member 640 disposed at the overhanging position are united in a state in which the upper abutting portion 533 and the lower abutting portion 643 abut. Thus, both can be integrated to form a predetermined character. In the present embodiment, the upper displacement member 530 is formed in the shape of a horse's head, the lower displacement member 640 is formed in the shape of a horse's trunk, and the connecting arm 650 is formed in the shape of a horse's leg. Thus, a jumping horse character is formed at the retracted position.

  Here, when the descending upper displacing member 530 and the ascending lower displacing member 640 are abutted in the retracted position, the impact generated at the time of the abutment causes them to bounce back in the direction of separating from each other. The posture (that is, the shape of the character) becomes unstable. On the other hand, when the displacement speed of the upper displacing member 530 and the displacing member 640 is reduced in order to weaken the impact at the time of abutment, the time until the two displacing members 530, 640 are integrated to form one character Is bulky and protracted, so the effect of the presentation is hindered.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the lower displacing member 640 is displaced to the extended position, the velocity toward the upper side (that is, the upper displacing member 530) of the velocity components of the lower displacing member 640 Since the component Vv is decreased when approaching the overhanging position, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an impact when the lower displacing member 640 abuts on the upper displacing member 530. Therefore, it can suppress that the lower displacement member 640 and the upper displacement member 530 bounce back in the direction which mutually estranges, and can stabilize the attitude | position of these both displacement members 530 and 640.

  In addition, since the decrease of the velocity component Vv toward the upper side of the lower displacement member 640 is gradually performed in the section from the horizontal rotation position to the vertical rotation position (range of angle θ2), the lower displacement member 640 as a whole. The velocity component Vv directed upward can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time until the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are integrated to form one character, and it is possible to suppress the extension. As a result, the effect of the presentation can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the tip (connection hole 633) of the drive arm 630 is connected to the lower displacement member 640 and the lower displacement member 640 is lifted by the rotation of the drive arm 630, the connection portion (connection hole 633). Is configured to gradually reduce the upward velocity component Vv, so that the decrease in the upward velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is determined by setting the drive state of the drive motor 672 constant. Can be done as. That is, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as increasing or decreasing the drive state of the drive motor 672 according to the position of the lower displacement member 640. Therefore, the control of the drive motor 672 can be simplified to reduce the control cost and improve the reliability.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the extended rotational position of the drive arm 630 (that is, the extended position where the lower displacement member 640 is in contact with the upper displacement member 530) is set to a position further rotated from the vertical rotation position. (See FIG. 28). Therefore, the velocity component Vv toward the upper side (that is, the upper displacement member 530) of the velocity components of the lower displacement member 640 can be set to a negative value at the overhanging position. That is, in the section (range of angle θ3) between the vertical rotation position and the overhang rotation position, the velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 in the vertical direction is directed downward (in a direction away from the upper displacement member 530). It can be an ingredient.

  As a result, when the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member 640 are brought into contact with each other in the retracted position, the lower displacing member 640 can be released (retracted) downward from the upper displacing member 530. Can be suppressed more reliably. Therefore, it can suppress that both displacement members 530 and 640 bounce in the direction mutually estranged, and can stabilize those attitudes.

  Further, as described above, the lower displacement member 640 is disposed at the overhanging position in a state where the velocity component Vv toward the upper side (that is, the upper displacement member 530) of the velocity components of the lower displacement member 640 becomes a negative value. By adopting the configuration, even if displacement occurs at the position where contact (merging) occurs due to dimensional tolerances, assembly tolerances or control variations in the drive mechanism of lower displacing member 640 or upper displacing member 530, etc. Since the range in which the velocity component Vv directed upward of the displacement member 640 is reduced can be widened, the upper displacement member 530 can be easily brought into contact with the region within a range where the impact can be suppressed.

  Next, the protruding unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 42. 31 is an exploded front perspective view of the projecting unit 700, and FIG. 32 is an exploded back perspective view of the projecting unit 700. FIG. 33 is a front view of the base member 710 and the elevating base 720, and shows a transition state when the elevating base 720 is moved up and down with respect to the base member 710.

  Protruding unit 700 has a base member 710, an elevating base 720 disposed movably up and down on the base member 710, a rotating member 730 rotatably disposed on the elevating base 720, and the base member 710. A drive mechanism for raising and lowering the elevation base 720 and a drive mechanism for rotating the rotation member 730 with respect to the elevation base 720 are mainly provided.

  First, with reference to FIG. 31 to FIG. 33, a structure for raising and lowering the elevating base 720 with respect to the base member 710 will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the base member 710 is provided with an insertion hole 711 opened as a circular hole in a front view substantially at the center in the lateral width direction, a support shaft 712 protruding from the front, And two support shafts 713 and 714. The rotation shaft 771 a of the drive arm 771 is rotatably inserted into the insertion hole 711. In addition, a shaft support hole 719a of the connecting arm 719 is rotatably supported by the front support shaft 712, and transmission gears 772b and 772c are rotatably supported by the support shafts 713 and 714 on the back surface. .

  The lifting base 720 includes a back base 721, a front base 722 located in front of the back base 721, and the back base 721 and an intermediate base 723 interposed on the lower end side of the front base (FIG. 34 and FIG. See 35). The rear base 721 and the front base 722 are opposed to each other by a predetermined distance on the lifting base 720 by the thickness dimension of the middle base 723, and the rotating member 730 is disposed between the facing surfaces of the rear base 721 and the front base 722. Is rotatably accommodated (disposed).

  The back surface base 721 is connected to the base member 710 via slide rails SL at one side in the width direction. The slide rail SL is a telescopic linear guide mechanism, and is disposed in a vertical posture in which the telescopic direction is along the vertical direction. The slide rail SL is provided between the proximal rail disposed on the front of the base member 710, the distal rail disposed on the rear of the lift base 720 (rear base 721), and the proximal rail and the distal rail. And an intermediate rail provided to allow relative displacement of the proximal rail and the distal rail relative to each other in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, by elevating the slide rail SL, the lift base 720 can be raised and lowered along the vertical direction with respect to the base member 710.

  The rear surface base 721 of the lifting base 720 has a sliding groove 721a extending linearly along the width direction, and a support hole 721b for rotatably supporting the rotation shaft 731a of the rotation member 730. The opening is formed. The slide pin 719 b of the connection arm 719 is slidably inserted into the slide groove 721 a via the collar C. As will be described later, the connection arm 719 is driven by the drive arm 771, and the slide pin 719b of the connection arm 719 is slid along the slide groove 721a, whereby the elevating base 720 (back surface base 721) is moved up and down. Ru.

  The connection arm 719 protrudes from a front surface of a shaft support hole 719a rotatably supported by the support shaft 712 of the base member 710 and an end portion opposite to the shaft support hole 719a. And a driven groove 719c linearly extending along a direction connecting the shaft support hole 719a and the sliding pin 719b. . The drive pin 771 b of the drive arm 771 is slidably inserted into the driven groove 719 c via the collar C. As will be described later, when the drive arm 771 is rotationally driven, the connection arm 719 is rotated about the pivotal support hole 719a.

  The drive mechanism for raising and lowering the elevation base 720 with respect to the base member 710 includes a drive arm 771 in which a rotation shaft 771a is rotatably supported in the insertion hole 711 of the base member 710, and a rotation shaft 771a of the drive arm 771. The drive shaft is connected to the transmission gears 772a to 772d to which the rear transmission gear 772d is connected, and to the lead transmission gear 772a of the transmission gears 772a to 772d, and the drive disposed on the front of the base member 710 A motor 773 is provided.

  The transmission gears 772a to 772d are a gear group for transmitting the drive force of the drive motor 773 to the drive arm 771. The transmission gears 772a are at the top by connecting (engaging) in series. To form a gear train (gear train) with a tail.

  Therefore, for example, when the drive motor 773 is rotationally driven in the forward direction from the state where the elevating base 720 is disposed at the lowermost position (retracted position) (see FIG. 21A), the rotational driving force transmits the leading end. The power is transmitted from the gear 772a to the rear transmission gear 772d, and the rear transmission gear 772d is rotated in one direction. As a result, the drive arm 771 connected to the rear transmission gear 772d is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 33A) with the rotation shaft 771a as the rotation center. As a result, the connecting arm 719 is rotated in the standing direction (clockwise in FIG. 33 (a)) with the pivot 719a as the center of rotation, and the elevating base 720 is raised to the top (projecting position) (FIG. 21 (c). )reference).

  On the other hand, when the drive motor 773 is rotationally driven in the reverse direction from the state (see FIG. 21C) in which the elevating base 720 is disposed at the uppermost side (projected position), the rotational drive force is the transmission gear at the head. The transmission gear 772d is transmitted to the rear transmission gear 772d, and the rear transmission gear 772d is rotated in the other direction. As a result, the drive arm 771 connected to the rear transmission gear 772d is rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 33C) with the rotation shaft 771a as the rotation center. As a result, the connecting arm 719 is rotated in the tilting direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 33C) about the pivot hole 719a as a rotation center, and the elevating base 720 is lowered to the lowermost position (retracted position) (FIG. 21 (a). )reference).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36, a structure for rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the lift base 720 will be described.

  FIG. 34 is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730, and FIG. 35 is an exploded rear perspective view of the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730. Further, FIG. 36 is a front view of the lifting and lowering base 720 and the rotating member 730, and a transition state when the rotating member 730 is rotated with respect to the lifting and lowering base 720 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, the elevating base 720 includes a back base 721 and a front base 722, and an intermediate base 723 interposed on the lower end sides of the back base 721 and the front base 722, as described above. The rotary member 731a is rotatably supported between the opposing surfaces of the rear base 721 and the front base 722 by the rotary shaft 731a being pivotally supported by the support hole 721b of the rear base 721.

  The rotating member 730 includes a curved rack gear 731b disposed on the back surface thereof. The curved rack gear 731b is formed as a rack gear cut along a circumferential surface having a central angle of about 90 degrees centered on the axial center of the rotation shaft 731a, and the transmission gear 781a is engaged. Therefore, as described later, the rotating member 730 is rotated relative to the lift base 720 by rotating the transmission gear 781a.

  The driving mechanism for rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the elevation base 720 includes transmission gears 781 a and 781 b rotatably held between the back base 721 and the middle base 723 in the elevation base 720 and a transmission gear 781 b. The drive motor 782 is provided in front of the intermediate base 723 when the drive shaft is connected.

  Here, in a state in which the transmission gear 781a is engaged with the circumferential center of the curved rack gear 731b, the rotating member 730 sets the direction of the slide displacement of the projecting member 735 (the direction of projection or retraction at the time of It arrange | positions in the rotation position (Hereinafter, it calls "the center rotation position") (refer FIG.36 (b)).

  Therefore, when the drive motor 782 is rotationally driven in the positive direction from the central rotational position and the transmission gears 781a and 781b are rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the curved rack gear 731b, and the rotating member 730 rotates about the rotation shaft 731a. It is rotated in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 36 (b)). As a result, the rotating member 730 is disposed in a posture in which the sliding displacement direction of the projecting member 735 is inclined to one side (right side in FIG. 36C) (see FIG. 36C).

  From this state (see FIG. 36C), when the drive motor 782 is rotationally driven in the reverse direction and the transmission gears 781a and 782b are rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the curved rack gear 731b, and the rotating member 730 is It is rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36C) about the rotation center 731a. As a result, after passing through the central rotation position, the rotation member 730 is disposed in a posture in which the direction of slide displacement of the projection member 735 is inclined to the other (left side in FIG. 36A) (see FIG. 36A). .

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 37 to 42, a structure for displacing the projecting member 735 and the swinging member 732 in the rotating member 730 will be described.

  First, the entire configuration of the rotation member 730 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 37 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotation member 730, and FIG. 38 is an exploded back perspective view of the rotation member 730. Further, FIG. 39 is a front view of the rotation member 730, and shows a transition state when the projecting member 735 is protruded and retracted from the rotation member 730 and the rocking member 732 is rocked.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, the rotating member 730 includes a back surface base 731, a swinging member 732 swingably provided on the front surface of the back surface base 731, and the swinging member 732 and the back surface base 731. , A front base 734 disposed on the front of the back base 731, a projecting member 735 slidably disposed on the back of the front base 734, and the front base And 734 and a drive mechanism for displacing (sliding and swinging) the projecting member 735 and the swinging member 732 with respect to the rear surface base 731.

  The rear surface base 731 is formed in a container shape having a substantially circular front view with an open front, and a part of the outer peripheral wall (upper outer peripheral wall) is missing, and the bottom from the part where the outer peripheral wall is missing A part of the wall projects upwards. As described above, the back surface of the back surface base 731 is curved to be engaged with the rotation shaft 731a supported by the shaft support hole 721b (see FIG. 35) of the elevating base 720 and the transmission gear 781a (see FIG. 35). A rack gear 731 b is provided.

  Further, a pair of shaft support holes 731c for rotatably supporting the rotating shaft 732a of the swinging member 732 and a tip end of the acting shaft 732b of the swinging member 732 are slidably inserted in the rear surface base 731. A pair of guide holes 731 d and a slide hole 731 e through which the slide pin 733 b of the interposed member 733 is slidably inserted are formed.

  The shaft support hole 731c is formed as an opening having a circular cross section, and the guide hole 731d is formed as a groove-shaped opening curved in a circular arc about the axial center of the shaft support hole 731c. The vertical position is set to a different position. Therefore, by sliding the tip of the acting shaft 732d of the rocking member 732 along the guide hole 731d, it is possible to rock (rotate) the rocking member 732 such that the tip side moves up and down.

  The slide hole 731 e is formed as a groove-shaped opening extending linearly, the axis of the rotation shaft 731 a is positioned on the extension line in the extending direction, and the slide hole 734 a of the front base 734 described later It is formed in parallel. A pair of the shaft support holes 731c and the guide holes 731d are arranged symmetrically with respect to an imaginary line along the extending direction of the slide holes 731e.

  The swinging member 732 includes a rotary shaft 732a and a working shaft 732b formed as a cylindrical shaft, and the base end sides on which the rotary shaft 732a and the working shaft 732b are disposed face each other. A pair is arranged. The rotating shaft 732 a is rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 731 c of the back surface base 731, and the operated shaft 732 b is slidably inserted into the action hole 733 a of the interposition member 733 and the guide hole 731 d of the back surface base 731. Be done.

  The collar C is fastened and fixed to the end of the rotary shaft 732a, and the flange portion of the collar C serves as a retainer for the rotary shaft 732a, and the body of the collar C has the rotary shaft 732a and the shaft support hole 731c. It is slidably interposed between. Similarly, a collar C is fastened and fixed to the tip of the acting shaft 732d, and the flange portion of the collar C serves as a retainer for the acting shaft 732d, and the body of the collar C serves as the acting shaft 732d and the guide hole It is slidably interposed between 731 d and the action hole 733 a.

  The interposing member 733 is a plate-like portion interposed between the back surface base 731 and the swinging member 732 and includes an action hole 733a, a slide pin 733b, and a sliding wall 733c. The action holes 733a are holes for transmitting the vertical movement (sliding displacement in the vertical direction) of the interposed member 733 to the acting shaft 732b of the swinging member 732 and in a direction in which a pair is in the shape of a front view C. Arranged in line symmetry.

  As described later, when the interposed member 733 is raised (sliding upward), the inner peripheral surface of the action hole 733a pushes the operated shaft 732b upward, and the pivoting member 732 lifts the tip end thereof. When the interposed member 733 is lowered (sliding downward) while it is swung (rotated) to the lower side, the inner peripheral surface of the action hole 733a pushes the operated shaft 732b downward, and the swinging member 732 It is swung (rotated) in the direction of swinging down the tip side.

  The slide pin 733 b is a cylindrical portion slidably inserted into the slide hole 731 e of the back surface base 731, and a plurality of (two in the present embodiment) are projected from the back surface of the interposed member 733. In addition, it is disposed on the symmetry line of the pair of action holes 733a described above with a predetermined interval. Therefore, the interposing member 733 is raised and lowered along the extending direction of the slide hole 731 e of the back surface base 731 via the slide pin 733 b.

  The sliding wall 733c is formed to project from the front of the interposing member 733 as a plate-like portion having a bottom surface extending along the horizontal direction (direction orthogonal to the sliding displacement direction of the interposing member 733), The cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 in the drive mechanism described later is in contact with the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c.

  Therefore, when the driving body 761 is rotated and the cam portion 761b slides on the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b (the distance from the rotation center of the driving body 761 to the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c) In accordance with the change (increase or decrease) of, the interposing member 733 is moved up and down (sliding upward or downward). That is, when the cam diameter is increased with the rotation of the driving body 761, the interposed member 733 is pushed upward by the cam portion 761b, and when the cam diameter is decreased, the interposed member 733 is lowered by its own weight.

  An urging spring 791 formed of a metal coil spring is interposed between the rear surface base 731 and the interposed member 733 in an elastically extended state, and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 791 is , Acting as a biasing force in the direction of lowering (displacement displacement downward) the interposing member 733. That is, the lowering (slide displacement downward) of the interposed member 733 is assisted by the biasing force of the biasing spring 791 in addition to the action of gravity (the weight of the interposed member 733). As a result, as described later, the rocking (rotation) of the rocking member 732 in the tilting direction (the direction of lowering the tip) can be performed quickly.

  The front base 734 is a plate-like member having a circular shape in a front view, and is disposed on the front of the back base 731 (the end face of the outer peripheral wall). The front base 734 is formed with a slide hole 734a through which the slide pin 735a of the projecting member 735 is slidably inserted. The slide hole 734 a is formed as a groove-shaped opening extending linearly, and is formed in parallel with the slide hole 731 e of the back surface base 731.

  The projecting member 735 is a long plate-like body slidably disposed on the back side of the front base 734, and includes a slide pin 735a and a slide hole 735b. The slide pin 735a is a cylindrical portion slidably inserted into the slide hole 734a of the front base 734, and a plurality (two in the present embodiment) of the slide pin 735a is projected from the front of the projecting member 735. , And are disposed along the longitudinal direction of the projecting member 735 with a predetermined interval. Thus, the projecting member 735 is raised and lowered along the extending direction of the slide hole 734a of the front base 734 via the slide pin 735a. A holding plate 736 is fastened and fixed to the tip of the slide pin 735a to prevent the slide pin 735a from coming off.

  The slide hole 735b is a groove-shaped opening formed on one end side (base end side) of the projecting member 735 in the longitudinal direction, and the slide pin 761c of the drive body 761 in the drive mechanism described later is slidably inserted Ru. Therefore, when the driver 761 is rotated and the slide pin 761c is slid along the slide hole 735b, the inner peripheral surface of the slide hole 735b is pushed upward or pushed down by the slide pin 761c. As a result, the projecting member 735 is moved up and down (sliding displacement upward or downward) along the slide hole 734a.

  An urging spring 792 formed of a metal torsion spring is interposed between the front base 734 and the projecting member 735 in an elastically torsionally deformed state, and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 792 is It acts as a biasing force in the direction of lowering (sliding downward) the projecting member 735.

  The driving mechanism for displacing (sliding displacement and rocking) the projecting member 735 and the rocking member 732 includes a driving body 761 rotatably disposed in front of the rear surface base 731 and a driven gear of the driving body 761. A drive shaft is connected to the transmission gears 762a to 762e in which the rear transmission gear 762d is connected to 761a and the top transmission gear 762a of the transmission gears 762a to 762e, and is disposed on the rear surface of the rear base 731 A drive motor 763 is provided.

  The cam portion 761b of the driving body 761 is a portion formed as a disc cam whose curved surface corresponding to the rotational position of the driving body 761 is formed on the outer peripheral surface, and as described above, the outer peripheral surface (cam surface) By sliding on the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c of the interposing member 733, the interposing member 733 is driven (slidingly displaced). In addition, the slide pin 761c of the drive body 761 is formed at a position eccentric from the rotation center of the drive body 761, and as described above, acts on the inner peripheral surface of the slide hole 735b of the projection member 735 to project The member 735 is driven (slidingly displaced).

  The transmission gears 762a to 762e are a gear group for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 763 to the driving body 761. The transmission gears 762a are at the top by connecting (engaging) in series, and the transmission gear 762e To form a gear train (gear train) with a tail.

  Therefore, for example, when the drive motor 763 is rotationally driven in the positive direction from the state shown in FIG. 39A, the rotational drive force is transmitted from the leading transmission gear 762a to the trailing transmission gear 762e, The driving body 761 in which the driven gear 761a is engaged with the transmission gear 762e is rotated in one direction.

  When the driving body 761 is rotated in one direction, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761 b is reduced, and the interposed member 733 is lowered by its own weight. Along with this, the actionable shaft 732b of the swinging member 732 supported by the action hole 733a of the interposition member 733 can also be lowered, so that the swinging member 732 lowers its tip side by its own weight. It is swung (rotated) in the direction of displacement (see FIGS. 39 (b) and 39 (c)).

  In addition, when the above-described driving body 761 is rotated in one direction, the position of the sliding pin 761c in the vertical direction is raised. As a result, the slide hole 735b of the projecting member 735 is pushed up by the slide pin 761c, and the projecting member 735 is lifted (sliding upward) (see FIGS. 39B and 39C).

  On the other hand, when the drive motor 763 is rotationally driven in the reverse direction from the state shown in FIG. 39C, the driver 761 is rotated in the other direction. In this case, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761 b is increased, and the interposed member 733 is lifted, whereby the acting shaft 732 b of the swinging member 732 is pushed up by the action hole 733 a of the interposed member 733 The moving member 732 is swung (rotated) in the direction of displacing the tip side thereof upward.

  Further, when the driving body 761 described above is rotated in the other direction, the vertical position of the slide pin 761c is lowered. As a result, the slide hole 735b of the projecting member 735 is pushed down by the sliding pin 761c, and the projecting member 735 is lowered (sliding downward).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 40 to 42, the details of the structure for displacing the projecting member 735 and the swinging member 732 in the rotating member 730 will be described.

  Fig.40 (a) is a front view of the drive body 761 in the state arrange | positioned in a 1st rotation position, FIG.40 (b) is a front view of the drive body 761 in the state arrange | positioned in a 2nd rotation position. is there. 40 (a) and 40 (b), the sliding of the sliding wall 733c and the projecting member 735 of the interposed member 733 in the state where the driving body 761 is disposed at the first rotational position or the second rotational position. The hole 735b is schematically illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b), the cam portion 761b of the driving body 761 is a cam surface that abuts on the sliding wall 733c in a state where the driving body 761 is disposed at the first rotation position. The cam diameter (radius R1) at (position P1) is set to the maximum diameter, and the cam surface (position P2) abuts against the sliding wall 733c in a state where the drive body 761 is disposed at the second rotational position The cam diameter (radius R2) is set to the minimum diameter, and the cam diameter is formed so as to continuously decrease from the position P1 toward the position P2.

  As described above, the sliding wall 733c has a bottom surface (the lower surface in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b)) in the horizontal direction (the direction perpendicular to the sliding displacement of the interposed member 733), FIG. (A) and FIG. 40 (b) are formed in a straight line along the horizontal direction). Therefore, the vertical position of the sliding wall 733c (that is, the interposing member 733) is the highest from the top when the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotational position to the second rotational position by the action of the cam portion 761b. When the driver 761 is rotated from the second rotational position to the first rotational position, it is continuously raised from the lowermost position to the uppermost position.

  The slide hole 735b has a curved portion 735b1 extending from the one end side (right side in FIG. 40A) of the slide hole 735b to a predetermined range, and the other end of the slide hole 735b from the end of the curved portion 735b1. It is formed of a straight portion 735b2 extending in the range to the side (left side in FIG. 40 (a)).

  The bending portion 735b1 is formed to be curved in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the driving body 761 in a state where the driving body 761 is disposed at the first rotation position. In the first rotation position, the slide pin 761c is positioned at one end of the slide hole 735b. Therefore, while the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position toward the second rotation position by a predetermined rotation angle (that is, while the slide pin 761 c passes through the bending portion 735 b 1), the drive body 761 slides The driving force is not transmitted to the moving hole 735b (ie, the projecting member 735). That is, the vertical position of the slide hole 735b is not changed, and therefore, the protruding member 735 is kept stopped at the lowermost position.

  The rotational position at which the driver 761 is rotated from the first rotational position by a predetermined rotational angle (that is, the rotational position at which the slide pin 761c passes through the bending portion 735b1 and reaches the linear portion 735b2) We call it ".

  The straight portion 735b2 is formed in a straight line along the horizontal direction (the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement of the projecting member 735, and the left and right direction of FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b)). Therefore, while the sliding pin 761c passes through the linear portion 735b2, the vertical position of the sliding hole 735b (that is, the projecting member 735) causes the driving body 761 to rotate to the second rotational position by the action of the sliding pin 761c. When it is rotated toward it, it is continuously raised from the bottom to the top, and when it is rotated toward the first rotation position, it is continuously lowered from the top to the bottom.

  Here, in the present embodiment, in the state where the driving body 761 is disposed at the second rotational position (see FIG. 40B), the slide pin 761c does not enter the curved portion 735b1, and the predetermined on the linear portion 735b2 It is located at the position (the end on the connection side with the bending portion 735 b 1).

  That is, when the driver 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, the slide pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 and then enters the straight portion 735b2, and the end of the straight portion 735b2 After sliding toward the other end side (left side in FIG. 40A) of the dynamic hole 735b, the direction is changed at the end, and the linear portion 735b2 is slid toward the curved portion 735b1, but the curved portion 735b1 It is stopped just before entering (that is, on the straight portion 735 b 2). As a result, as described later, the driving force required for the drive motor 763 can be suppressed.

  FIG. 41 and FIG. 42 are front schematic views of the rotation member 730, and the transition state when the projecting member 735 is slid and the rocking member 732 is rocked is illustrated. 41 and 42, only a part of the configuration of the rotation member 730 is schematically illustrated. Further, in FIG. 41 (a), the state in which the driving body 761 is disposed at the first rotational position is as shown in FIG. 41 (b), and the state in which the driving body 761 is disposed at the predetermined rotational position is as shown in FIG. Then, in FIG. 42 (b), the state where the drive body 761 is disposed at the second rotational position is illustrated in the state where the drive body 761 is disposed at the rotational position between the predetermined rotational position and the second rotational position. Be done.

  In the state shown in FIG. 41A (that is, in the state where the driver 761 is disposed at the first rotational position), the tip of the swinging member 732 is positioned at the uppermost position, and the projecting member 735 is positioned at the lowermost position. Be done. When the driver 761 is rotated to a predetermined rotational position from this state, the cam diameter at the cam portion 761b is gradually reduced from the radius R1 which is the maximum diameter as shown in FIG. (See (a)) The intervening member 733 is lowered by its own weight, and in conjunction with this, the swinging member 732 is rotated by its own weight in the direction of lowering its tip.

  On the other hand, in the projecting member 735, as shown in FIG. 41B, the slide pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 of the slide hole 735b while the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the predetermined rotation position. Therefore, the driving force from the driving body 761 is not transmitted, and the stopped state is maintained at the lowermost position (that is, the same position as FIG. 41A).

  When the driving body 761 having reached the predetermined rotational position is further rotated toward the second rotational position (see FIG. 41B), as shown in FIG. 42A, the cam diameter at the cam portion 761b is further increased. By being reduced (see FIG. 40A), the interposing member 733 is lowered by its own weight, and accordingly, the swinging member 732 is further rotated by its own weight in the direction of lowering its tip. On the other hand, in the projecting member 735, the sliding pin 761c passing through the linear portion 735b2 of the sliding hole 735b is slidingly displaced upward by pushing up the inner peripheral surface of the linear portion 735b2 with the rotation of the driving body 761. Ru.

  When the driver 761 is rotated to the second rotational position from the state shown in FIG. 41 (b), as shown in FIG. 42 (b), the cam diameter at the cam portion 761b is reduced to the minimum radius R2. As a result (see FIG. 40 (b)), the interposition member 733 is lowered to the lowermost position by its own weight, and the rocking member 732 is further rotated by its own weight, and its tip is positioned at the lowermost position. On the other hand, the projecting member 735 is positioned at the top by pushing up the straight portion 735b2 to the top by the slide pin 761c.

  In contrast to the case described above, when the driver 761 is rotated in the reverse direction from the state shown in FIG. 42B (that is, the state where the driver 761 is disposed at the second rotational position), FIG. As shown in), the cam diameter in the cam portion 761b is gradually increased from the radius R2 which is the minimum diameter (see FIG. 40 (b)), and the interposed member 733 (sliding wall 733c) is lifted upward. Accordingly, the pivoting member 732 is rotated in the direction of raising its tip. On the other hand, in the projecting member 735, the sliding pin 761c passing through the linear portion 735b2 of the sliding hole 735b is slidingly displaced downward by pushing down the inner peripheral surface of the linear portion 735b2 with the rotation of the driving body 761. Ru.

  When the driving member 761 is rotated to the predetermined rotation position from the state shown in FIG. 42 (a), as shown in FIG. 41 (b), the cam diameter at the cam portion 761b has not yet reached the maximum diameter r1. The upward lifting operation of the mounting member 733 (sliding wall 733c) is continued, and along with this, the pivoting member 732 is also rotated in the direction of raising its tip. On the other hand, the projecting member 735 is positioned at the lowermost position when the linear portion 735b2 is pushed down to the lowermost position by the slide pin 761c.

  When the driving member 761 is rotated to the first rotation position from the state shown in FIG. 41 (b), the cam diameter at the cam portion 761b is increased to the radius R1 which is the maximum diameter as shown in FIG. 41 (a) As a result (see FIG. 40A), the interposing member 733 is pushed up to the top, and along with this, the tip of the swinging member 732 is positioned at the top. On the other hand, in the projecting member 735, since the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 of the sliding hole 735b, the driving force from the driving body 761 is not transmitted, and the projection member 735 is at the lowermost position (ie, FIG. It is maintained at the same position as).

  As described above, according to the rotating member 730, the two members (the swinging member 732 and the projecting member 735) can be displaced by one drive motor 763.

  Here, in the conventional product, when displacing the two members by the first drive motor, the driving force for driving each of the two members is overlapped, so the load on the drive motor becomes large and the durability thereof is lowered. There was a problem of causing On the other hand, in the configuration in which the two members are alternately displaced (one by one), the load of the drive motor can be reduced, but the state in which the two members are displaced can not be formed, and the rendering effect by the displacement is hindered.

  On the other hand, according to the rotating member 730, the first transmission means (the cam portion 761b and the interposing member 733) for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 763 to the swinging member 732 lowers the tip of the swinging member 732 The load of the drive motor 763 in the section (the section in which the driver 761 is rotated from the first rotational position to the second rotational position), the section in which the tip of the swinging member 732 is raised (the driver 761 is The load on the drive motor 763 can be smaller than that in the section to be rotated to the rotational position.

  On the other hand, the second transmission means (sliding pin 761c and sliding hole 735b) for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 763 to the projecting member 735 slides the projecting member 735 downward (second rotation of the driving member 761) Driving the load of the drive motor 763 in the section for rotating from the position to the first rotation position, in the section for sliding displacement of the projecting member 735 upward (section for rotating the driving body 761 from the first rotation position to the second rotation position) The load of the motor 763 can be made smaller.

  That is, according to the rotating member 730, when the first transmission means has a relatively high load, the second transmission means has a relatively low load, and the first transmission means has a relatively high load. The second transmission means can have a relatively low load. Therefore, since the load of the drive motor 763 can be dispersed, the load of the drive motor 763 can be reduced and the durability thereof can be improved.

  Furthermore, it is not necessary to displace the swinging member 732 and the projecting member 735 alternately (one by one), and since the swinging member 732 and the projecting member 735 can be displaced together, the load on the drive motor 763 can be reduced. It is possible to improve the rendering effect by the displacement of both members 732 and 735 while aiming.

  The first transmission means displaces the swinging member 732 by interlocking the cam portion 761b and the sliding wall 733c, and the second transmission means interlocks the projecting member 735 by interlocking the sliding pin 761c and the sliding hole 735b. It is displaced, and swinging per unit displacement amount of the cam portion 761b and the sliding pin 761c (that is, per unit rotation of the driving body 761) according to the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the sliding hole 735b. The displacement amounts of the member 732 and the projecting member 735 can be changed. In other words, the load of the drive motor 763 can be changed. Therefore, even when the drive state (power supply) of the drive motor 763 is maintained constant, a change can be given to the speed of displacement of the swinging member 732 and the projecting member 735. As a result, it is possible to enhance the rendering effect while suppressing the load of the drive motor 763.

  Further, this is a section in which the load of the drive motor 763 is reduced (in the first transmission means, a section in which the tip of the swinging member 732 is lowered (a section in which the driver 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position), In the second transmission means, a section in which the projecting member 735 is slid downward (a section in which the driving member 761 is rotated from the second rotational position to the first rotational position) It is formed by providing a downward displacement component, that is, utilizing displacement of the swinging member 732 or the projecting member 735 due to its own weight. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the sliding hole 735b from being complicated. This can reduce the cost of parts. In addition, by suppressing the complication of the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the sliding hole 735b, the speed of displacement of the swinging member 732 or the projecting member 735 can be easily made constant, and the driving motor 763 The burden can be reduced.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, since the cam portion 761b in the first transmission means and the slide pin 761c in the second transmission means are integrally formed, the cam portion 761b and the slide pin 761c are separately disposed. Therefore, the rotation member 730 can be miniaturized. Further, as compared with the case where the cam portion 761b and the slide pin 761c are formed separately, the displacement of the displacement of the swinging member 732 and the projecting member 735 is suppressed, and the synchronization accuracy of both members 732 and 735 is reduced. It can be enhanced.

  Here, when the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotational position, that is, when the slide displacement of the projecting member 735 in the stopped state is started, the drive motor 763 is affected by the inertial force. Because the load of is increased, the initial speed is delayed, and there is a possibility that the rendering effect may be hindered. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the curved portion 735b1 is formed in the sliding hole 735b of the projecting member 735, and in the curved portion 735b1, the projecting member 735 (sliding hole 735b) from the driver 761 (sliding pin 761c). The transmission of the driving force to) can be non-transmission. Therefore, while the slide pin 761c passes through the bending portion 735b1, the load on the drive motor 763 can be reduced, and the rotation of the drive body 761 can be accelerated by that amount. The upward slide displacement can be smoothly started.

  On the other hand, while the slide pin 761c passes through the bending portion 735b1 (that is, while the driver 761 is rotated from the first rotational position to the predetermined rotational position), the projecting member 735 is maintained in the stop state However, the swinging member 732 is rotated by its own weight in a direction to lower the tip downward (see FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b)). Therefore, when swinging the swinging member 732 while maintaining the projecting member 735 in the stop state, it is possible to suppress the driving force (load) of the drive motor 763 necessary for the swinging. As a result, since the momentum of the rotation of the driving body 761 can be made stronger, the sliding displacement of the projecting member 735 in the stopped state can be smoothly started.

  Further, as described above, since the swinging member 732 can be swung even while the protruding member 735 is maintained in the stopped state, both the protruding member 735 and the swinging member 732 are put in the stopped state. Can be avoided to improve the rendering effect by the displacement.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the curved portion 735b1 is provided in the sliding hole 735b, and when the sliding displacement of the projecting member 735 is started, the curved portion 735b1 is used to rotate the driving member 761. Force to smoothly displace the projecting member 735 from the stop state.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, after the slide displacement of the protruding member 735 is started, the rotational drive of the drive body 761 is stopped before the slide pin 761c enters the curved portion 735b1. That is, in a state where the driving body 761 is disposed at the second rotational position, the slide pin 761c does not enter the curved portion 735b1 and is at a predetermined position on the linear portion 735b2 (the end on the connection side with the curved portion 735b1) It is positioned (see FIGS. 40 (b) and 42 (b)). As a result, the load on the drive motor 763 can be avoided from becoming excessive.

  That is, by forming the guide groove of the crank contact member in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member, the driving force of the drive means can be made non-transferable (can form a non-transfer section). In the structure in which the guide part reciprocates in the guide groove, the shape of the non-transmission section is a convex arc toward the rotation center of the crank member from the state where the pin section passes through the non-transmission section and is turned at a predetermined position. It becomes. Therefore, when the pin part after changing the direction passes through the non-transmission section, not only the sliding resistance increases, but also the amount of sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 upward per unit rotation of the drive member 761 is rapid. The load on the drive motor 763 becomes excessive. Therefore, by stopping the rotation of the drive body 761 before the slide pin 761c reaches the bending portion 735b1, it is possible to prevent the load on the drive motor 763 from becoming excessive.

  Next, the lifting unit 800 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 43 to 52.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45, the entire configuration of the elevation unit 800 will be described. FIG. 43 (a) is a front view of the lifting unit 800, FIG. 43 (b) is a rear view of the lifting unit 800, and FIG. 43 (c) is a side view of the lifting unit 800. FIG. 44 is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating unit 800, and FIG. 45 is an exploded back perspective view of the elevating unit 800.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 to 45, the elevation unit 800 is disposed on the base member 810 of the upper combination unit 500 in front of the base member 510 in a front view and a horizontally long rectangular shape, and is movably disposed on the base member 810. And a drive motor 891 for applying a drive force to the lift member 820, a transmission gear 840 for transmitting a drive force for rotation of the drive motor 891 and one end thereof pivotally supported by a base member 810. A link member 850 is disposed rotatably about the pivot portion by rotation of the transmission gear 840, a slide member 860 connected to the link member 850 and slidably disposed by displacement of the link member 850, and A transmission member 870 is mainly provided to transmit the slide displacement of the slide member 860 to the elevation member 820.

  The base member 810 has slide holes 811, 812, 813 penetratingly formed in the front-rear direction at the central portion in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 43B), and pivot pins 814-817 projecting cylindrically on the back side. And are mainly formed.

  Each slide hole 811, 812, 813 is a hole for inserting a slide pin 861, 862, 863 of a slide member 860, which will be described later, into the inside to regulate the slide direction of the slide member 860. 43 (b) is formed in the shape of a long hole which opens long in the vertical direction). Therefore, the slide member 860 can be slidably disposed along the longitudinal direction of each of the slide holes 811 812 813.

  The slide holes 811, 812 and 813 are formed side by side, and the slide hole 811 is formed at the central portion, and the slide hole 812 and the slide hole 813 are formed on both sides of the slide hole 811. . In other words, the sliding hole 811 is formed between the sliding hole 812 and the sliding hole 813.

  The bearing pins 814 to 816 are projections inserted into the shafts of the gears 842 to 844 of the transmission gear 840 described later to rotatably support the gears 842 to 844. It is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the hole formed through.

  The pivot support pin 817 is a projection that is inserted into a through hole 851 that is formed through at one end of a link member 850 described later, and rotatably supports the link member 850, and has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 851. It is formed in a cylindrical shape.

  The drive motor 891 is a drive source that applies a driving force to the lifting and lowering member 820 as described above. The drive motor 891 is disposed on the base member 810 via a back cover 892 formed of a plate on the back side of the base member 810. The shaft of the drive motor 891 is inserted into a through hole 892 a formed in the back cover 892 so as to pass therethrough, and is internally fitted to the shaft of the gear 841 of the transmission gear 840 via the through hole 892 a. Therefore, when the drive force of rotation is applied to the drive motor 891, the gear 841 connected to the shaft of the drive motor 891 is rotated.

  The transmission gear 840 is a gear train configured by connecting the gears 841 to 844. As described above, the gears 842 to 844 are rotatable on pivotal support pins 814 to 816 projecting to the back side of the base member 810. Supported by Thus, when the gear 841 is rotated, its driving force is transmitted to the end gear 844 via the gear 842 and the gear 843. Accordingly, by driving the drive motor 891, the end gear 844 can be rotated.

  The gear 844 is formed with a projection 844 a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape on the back side. The projection 844a is a projection for transmitting the driving force to a link member 850 described later, and is formed so as to project a distance at which the tip end overlaps the link member 850 in the front-rear direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 43).

  The link member 850 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body. The link member 850 has a through hole 851 circularly penetrating at one end, a transmission side sliding groove 854 penetrated like a long hole substantially in the same direction as the longitudinal direction of the link member 850 at the other end, a through hole 851 and transmission. And a coupling side sliding groove 853 formed between the side sliding grooves 854.

  The through hole 851 is a through hole for rotatably supporting the link member 850 relative to the base member 810 by inserting the support pin 817 of the base member 810 inside as described above. The inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the pin 817. Therefore, the link member 850 is connected to the base member 810 so as not to be detached by inserting the pivot support pin 817 of the base member 810 into the through hole 851 and inserting the collar C3 from the back side and fastening with a screw or the like. Be done.

  At an edge portion of the through hole 851 in the link member 850, an annular portion 852 projecting in an annular shape is formed on the front side (the rear side in FIG. 43B). The annular portion 852 is a gap forming member for forming a predetermined gap between the base member 810 and the link member 850 and rotatably accommodating the transmission gear 840 in the gap. The protrusion dimension is set to be larger than the thickness width of the gears 841 to 844.

  Further, a torsion spring SP1 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the annular portion 852. The torsion spring SP <b> 1 is formed by winding a wire made of a metal material on a cylindrical spiral in an overlapping manner, and can exert a biasing force in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the annular portion 852 is set to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the inner edge of the helical spring of the torsion spring SP1. As a result, when the torsion spring SP1 is twisted, the state in which the torsion spring SP1 is wound around the spiral is broken, and the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 is the axial direction of the helical portion of the torsion spring SP1 (axial direction of the annular portion 852 Can be suppressed. Therefore, even if the cylindrical helical portion is a relatively large torsion spring SP1, the annular portion 852 can suppress the helical state from being broken and stabilize the biasing direction.

  That is, the annular portion 852 not only forms a space for disposing the transmission gear 840 between the base member 810 and the link member 850, but also serves to stabilize the biasing direction of the torsion spring SP1. Can.

  The torsion spring SP1 has one end engaged with the locking portion 855 protruding like a hook from the front side of the link member 850, and the other end connected to the locking part 818 protruding like a hook from the back side of the base member 810. It is engaged. Therefore, the torsion spring SP1 can elastically deform its shape by the rotational displacement of the link member 850, and exert an urging force on the link member 850 in the direction around the axis of the rotation axis.

  The connection-side sliding groove 853 is an elongated hole through which the protrusion 844a of the gear 844 is inserted, and the width dimension in the short direction of the inner peripheral surface is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the protrusion 844a. Therefore, when the protrusion 844 a is displaced by the rotation of the gear 844, the protrusion 844 a can slide on the inside of the connection-side sliding groove 853 to be displaced. Thus, the link member 850 can be rotationally displaced about the through hole 851 with the displacement of the protrusion 844a. The detailed displacement mode of the link member 850 will be described later.

  The transmission-side slide groove 854 is a hole through which the slide pin 861 of the slide member 860 is inserted to displace the slide member 860 in accordance with the rotational displacement of the link member 850, and the width dimension in the short direction Is smaller than the outer diameter of the slide pin 861. Therefore, the slide pin 861 of the slide member 860 inserted through the slide hole 811 of the base member 810 can be inserted into the transmission side slide groove 854.

  In addition, by fastening the collar C3 to the tip of the pivot pin 816 from the back side of the link member 850 with a screw or the like, the link member 850 and the slide member 860 can be coupled in a state of interposing the base member 810 therebetween. Therefore, the sliding displacement of the slide member 860 disposed on the front side of the base member 810 can be caused by the rotational displacement of the link member 850 disposed on the back side of the base member 810.

  The slide member 860 is formed in a plate-like body having a rectangular shape in the front view, and the length in the direction of gravity is set smaller than the length in the direction of gravity of the base member 810. Therefore, when the slide member 860 and the base member 810 are overlapped in the front-rear direction, the slide member 860 can be prevented from protruding outward from the outer edge portion of the base member 810. Thereby, the whole external shape of the raising / lowering unit 800 in a plain view can be made small.

  The slide member 860 has a plurality of slide pins 861 to 863 protruding in a cylindrical shape from the back side, a plurality of slide side slide holes 864 to 866 formed in the front-rear direction, and a circle protruding on the front side It is mainly provided with two columnar projections 867.

  As described above, the slide pin 861 is inserted into the transmission side slide groove 854 of the link member 850, and can be displaced according to the displacement of the transmission side slide groove 854. The slide pin 862 and the slide pin 863 are projections for regulating the displacement direction of the slide member 860, and are inserted into the slide holes 812 and the slide holes 813 of the base member 810, and the slide pins 862 and slide thereof. A collar C3 is fastened to the end of the moving pin 863 from the back side of the base member 810 by a screw or the like.

  Therefore, the slide pin 860 and the slide pin 863 of the slide member 860 are inserted into the slide hole 812 and the slide hole 813 which are formed in the base member 810 in the form of straight long holes. It is made non-rotatable with respect to the base member 810, and is slidably coupled in the direction of the long holes of the slide hole 812 and the slide hole 813. As a result, as the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 851, the slide member 860 can be displaced in the direction of gravity (the slide hole 812 and the slide hole 813 in the direction of the elongated hole).

  The slide side slide holes 864 to 866 are holes into which protrusions 871a to 871c of the second slide member 871 described later are inserted, and are formed in a long hole shape long in the gravity direction, and the width dimension in the short direction is It is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the projections 871a to 871c.

  The transmission member 870 is a member disposed on the front side of the slide member 860, and meshes with the rack 872 extending in the direction of gravity and disposed in a pair on the object, and the rack gear of each rack 872 Each pinion gear 873 and the second slide member 871 disposed between the pinion gears 873 are mainly provided.

  The rack 872 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in a front view, and is fastened and fixed to the front side of the base member 810. In addition, a pair of racks 872 is provided symmetrically about the central portion of the base member 810 in the lateral direction. A rack gear 872a is engraved on the opposite side of each rack 872, and is engaged with a pinion gear 873 described later.

  The pinion gear 873 is rotatably supported by the projection 867 of the slide member 860 and is meshed with the rack gear 872 a of the rack 872. Therefore, when the slide member 860 is slidingly displaced in the direction of gravity, the pinion gear 873 is similarly displaced in the direction of gravity. At this time, since the pinion gear 873 is rotatably supported by the slide member 860 and is meshed with the rack gear 872 a, the pinion gear 873 is rotated along with the displacement of the slide member 860.

  The second slide member 871 is formed in a vertically-long rectangular shape in a front view, a standing portion 871e bent at the lower end and erected on the front side, and a rack gear 871d engraved on the side surface on both sides in the left-right direction; A plurality of projections 871a to 871c protruding in a cylindrical shape are mainly provided on the back side.

  The erecting portion 871e is a wall portion to which an elevation member 820, which will be described later, is fastened to the erected tip end surface, and a connecting hole 871e1 for inserting a screw into the inside to fasten the elevation member 820 It is formed. Thus, the second slide member 871 and the elevating member 820 can be fastened.

  Further, the standing portion 871 e is a gap forming portion for forming a gap between the lifting and lowering member 820 and the base member 810 and arranging a decorative member 830 described later in the gap. The vertical dimension is set larger than the thickness of. Thereby, the decoration member 830 can be disposed between the lifting and lowering member 820 and the base member 810.

  The rack gear 871 d is a meshing surface that meshes with the pinion gear 873 described above, and is engraved on the left and right side surfaces of the second slide member 871. That is, the length dimension in the left-right direction of the second slide member 871 is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension between the two pinion gears 873.

  As described above, the plurality of projections 871a to 871c are inserted into the slide side slide holes 864 to 866 of the slide member 860, and each slide from the rear surface side of the slide member 860 on the tip end side of the projections 871a to 871c. The collar C4 is inserted inside the side slide holes 864 to 866 and fastened with a screw or the like. Thus, the second slide member 871 is rotatable relative to the slide member 860, and is slidably held along the longitudinal direction of the slide slide holes 864 to 866.

  Therefore, when the slide member 860 is displaced, as described above, the pinion gear 873 is rotated, and accordingly, the second slide member 871 meshing with the pinion gear 873 can be slid and displaced along with the rotation. Therefore, since the second slide member 871 slides in the direction of gravity with respect to the slide member 860, the second slide member 871 can be displaced with respect to the base member 810 at a displacement speed faster than the displacement speed of the slide member 860 The displacement distance can be larger than that of the member 860. Therefore, the size of the elevating unit 800 as a unit can be miniaturized, and the displacement speed and displacement distance of the elevating member 820 fastened to the second slide member 871 can be suppressed from being reduced.

  The elevating member 820 is a member that is displaced up and down with the displacement of the second slide member 871 as described above, and is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in a front view. The raising and lowering member 820 includes a protrusion 821 that protrudes to the back side.

  The protrusion 821 is a protrusion connected to the erected portion 871 e of the second slide member 871, and is formed to protrude at a position facing the connection hole 871 e 1 of the erected portion. In addition, a fastening hole 821a for screwing is formed in the protruding tip surface, and a screw inserted into the inside of the connection hole 871e1 can be fastened by the fastening hole 821a. Thereby, the second slide member 871 and the elevating member 820 can be fastened and fixed.

  A cover member 880 and a decoration member 830 are disposed on the front side of the transmission member 870. The cover member 880 is a plate member that restricts the displacement of the transmission member 870 to the front side, whereby the transmission member 870 can be suppressed from being displaced to the front side and colliding with the decorative member 830.

  The decorative member 830 is formed in a shape imitating a title or logo of a game machine, and an LED that emits light is disposed on the back side. As a result, it is possible to give the player an interest by emitting light from the title, logo or the like to the player side.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 52, the movable mode of the lifting and lowering unit 800 will be described.

  46 is a front view of the lift unit 800 in the first state, FIG. 47 is a front view of the lift unit 800 in the second state, and FIG. 48 is a front view of the lift unit 800 in the third state. . 49 is a rear view of the lifting unit 800 in the first state, FIG. 50 is a rear view of the lifting unit 800 in the second state, and FIG. 51 is a rear view of the lifting unit 800 in the third state. . 52 (a) is a front view of the transmission member 870, the slide member 860 and the link member 850 in the first state, and FIG. 52 (b) is a transmission member 870, the slide member 860 and the link member in the second state. FIG. 52 (c) is a front view of the transmission member 870, the slide member 860, and the link member 850 in the third state.

  The first state of the elevating unit 800 is a state in which the elevating member 820 is located on the top and is disposed on the front side of the decorative member 830 and the base member 810, and the third state is a state in which the elevating member 820 is In the second state, the lift member 820 is disposed at an intermediate position between the first state and the third state. is there.

  Further, in FIG. 51, displacement trajectories of the rotary members 435 and 455 placed at the end farthest from the rotation axis of the rotary members 435 and 455 are illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and a symbol of a virtual line KS3 is given. .

  As shown in FIG. 46, FIG. 49 and FIG. 52 (a), when the lift unit 800 is positioned in the first state, the other end side of the link member 850 (the side on which the transmission side sliding groove 854 is formed) Is positioned higher in the direction of gravity than the one end side (the side on which the through hole 851 is formed). In this case, in the transmission member 870, the pinion gear 873 is engaged with the upper end of the rack 872, and the pinion gear 873 is engaged with the lower end of the second slide member. That is, the second slide member 871 is in the upper position. Accordingly, the elevating member 820 connected to the second slide member 871 is also in the upper position.

  In the first state, an imaginary line KS1 connecting the shaft of the gear 844 at the end of the transmission gear 840 for transmitting the driving force from the drive motor 891 to the link member 850 and the projection 844a, and the axis of the through hole 851 of the link member 850 And a virtual line KS2 connecting the middle position in the width direction of the connection-side sliding groove 853 is orthogonal to the virtual line KS2 (see FIG. 49).

  That is, in the first state, the link member 850 and the gear 844 at the end of the transmission gear 840 are in a dead center relationship. Therefore, the raising and lowering member 820 can be held by the connection side sliding groove 853 of the link member 850 and the projection 844 a of the gear 844. Therefore, even if the driving force of the drive motor 891 is turned off, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the link member 850 by the load of the elevating member 820. As a result, since the first state can be maintained without applying power to the lifting unit 800 in the first state, energy consumption can be reduced.

  When power is applied to the drive motor 891 from the states shown in FIGS. 46, 49, and 52 (a) and the drive force of rotation acts, as described above, the gears 841 to 844 of the transmission gear 840 rotate and The driving force is transmitted. The projection 844 a of the end gear 844 is displaced in position as the rotation is driven. The protrusion 844 a is inserted into and coupled to the inside of the connection-side sliding groove 853 of the link member 850. Therefore, the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 851 in accordance with the displacement of the protrusion 844a.

  When the link member 850 is rotationally displaced, the slide member 860 in which the slide pin 861 is inserted and coupled to the transmission side slide groove 854 of the link member 850 is slide-displaced. Thereby, the pinion gear 873 of the transmission member 870 pivotally supported by the projection 867 of the slide member 860 can be displaced. Thus, the pinion gear 873 can be rotated by the rack gear 872 a formed on the rack 872 according to the displacement thereof. Therefore, the second slide member 871 disposed between the two pinion gears 873 can be slid and displaced. As a result, the lift member 820 can be displaced.

  As shown in FIGS. 47, 50 and 52 (b), in the lifting and lowering unit 800 in the second state, the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 851 by the drive motor 891 being rotated. State. Therefore, the raising and lowering member 820 can be displaced below the first state with respect to the base member 810.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 48, 51 and 52 (c). In the lifting and lowering unit 800 in the third state, the drive motor 891 is further rotated from the second state, and the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 851. Therefore, as with the displacement from the first state to the second state, the raising and lowering member 820 can be displaced below the second state with respect to the base member 810.

  In this case, the raising and lowering member 820 is disposed at a position adjacent to the lower side of the decoration member 830. Thus, the player can visually recognize the title or logo of the gaming machine formed on the decorative member 830. In addition, the raising and lowering member 820 can be adjacent to the lower side of the decoration member 830, so that the raising and lowering member 820 and the decoration member 830 can be combined to form one pattern (character). That is, by displacing the lift unit 800 from the first state of the initial position to the third state, a pattern (character) in which the lift member 820 of the lift unit 800 and the decoration member 830 are combined is displayed in front of the game area. it can.

  Furthermore, in the third state, the slide pins 861 to 863 of the slide member 860 are positioned at the lower ends of the slide holes 811 to 813 of the base member 810. Therefore, since the load of the elevation member 820 can be held by the three slide pins 861 to 863, the load of the elevation member 820 can be prevented from acting on the projection 844a of the gear 844 in the transmission gear 840. As a result, breakage of the gear 844 can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 53 to 61, the combined state of the movable units (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and lifting unit 800) will be described.

  First, with reference to FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, a state in which each movable unit is displaced and each movable unit is displaced to the central portion of the game board 13 will be described. FIG. 53 is a front view of the operation unit 200 in the combined state. FIG. 54 is a schematic cross-sectional view of operation unit 200 taken along line LIV-LIV in FIG.

  In the combined state shown in FIG. 53, the lifting base 720 of the projecting unit 700 moves up and down with respect to the base member 710, and the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced to the central portion. A state 820 is displaced downward with respect to the base member 810. Thus, one pattern (the movable base (the projecting unit 700, the slide unit 400, and the lifting and lowering unit 800) (lifting base 720, rotating members 435 and 455, and lifting and lowering member 820) are brought close to each other It can be made to be recognized by the player as the title, logo or character of the gaming machine 10).

  Moreover, each movable unit is formed in the shape which each member imitated the pattern. For example, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are formed in a shape imitating the wing of an animal, and the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the projecting unit 700 are formed in a bow shape. The lift member 820 is formed in a shape imitating the title of the gaming machine.

  Furthermore, as described above, since the lift unit 800 can combine the lift member 820 and the decoration member 830 to form one pattern (character), the lift base 720, the rotation member 435, and the like in the combined state (projected state). The 455, the lifting member 820 and the decoration member 830 may be combined to form a single character.

  That is, the lifting and lowering unit 800 not only combines the lifting and lowering base 820 and the decoration member 830 to form one display surface, but also other movable units (protrusion unit 700 and slide unit 400) disposed in the operation unit 200. Can be combined into one display surface. As a result, a plurality of display modes can be formed by making the displacement states of the movable units (lifting unit 800, projecting unit 700, and slide unit 400) disposed in the operation unit 200 different, and the player can be entertained. Can be given.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, in the combined state, the operation unit 200 includes the elevation member 820 of the elevation unit 800 and a part of the respective rotation members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 in the front and rear direction It is placed at the overlapping position. That is, the lifting and lowering members 820 and the rotating members 435 and 455 are disposed at different positions in the front-rear direction. The raising and lowering members 820 are disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 54) of the respective rotating members 435 and 455 (see FIG. 54).

  In other words, the operation unit 200 is formed to include the projecting unit 700, the slide unit 400, and the lifting and lowering unit 800 which are displaceably formed at the retracted position and the combined (overhanging) position. The unit 700 and the slide unit 400 are disposed at different positions in the front-rear direction. Therefore, since the projection unit 700 of the three movable units, the slide unit 400, and the elevating unit 800 can be displaced to form one pattern, a larger pattern (character) can be formed, and the rendering effect can be enhanced accordingly. it can.

  In this case, the raising and lowering members 820 of the raising and lowering unit 800 are arranged at different positions from the rotating members 730 of the protruding unit 700 and the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 in the protruding position. It does not abut the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455. That is, when the members are brought into contact with each other at the overhanging position or there is a possibility of coming into contact, it is necessary to set in consideration of damage due to an impact at the time of contact. And since it is not in contact with the rotating members 435 and 455, its displacement speed can be made relatively fast. As a result, for example, it is possible to form an aspect such as displacing the later moving up and down member 820 so as to catch up with the starting rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435, 455 at the overhanging position, etc. Can be enhanced.

  Further, the projecting members 735 of the projecting unit 700 are disposed on the rear side of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the sliding members 430 and 450 in the slide unit 400. Therefore, when the slide members 430 and 450 are displaced, when the displacement operation is continued without stopping at the original stop position due to a failure or malfunction, each of the rotary members 435 and 455 is a protrusion member 735. Contact can be suppressed. As a result, breakage of the projecting member 735 and the rotating members 435 and 455 can be suppressed.

  Here, when a plurality of movable units (lifting and lowering unit 800, slide unit 400 and projecting unit 700) move and unite in the space of the central portion of the gaming machine (the front of the third symbol display device 81) There is a gaming machine which makes them collide and unite. However, when the side surfaces collide and unite, the collision tends to form a flaw on the collision surface. Therefore, there is a problem that the design of the movable unit is easily impaired.

  Also, it is conceivable to slow the speed of the collision in order to suppress the formation of flaws on the collision surface, but since it is necessary to reduce the displacement speed of the movable unit, It has fallen. There is a problem that the player's interest is lost.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the plurality of movable units (lifting unit 800, slide unit 400 and projecting unit 700) are disposed at different positions in the front-rear direction, the movable units When displacing to the central space of the gaming machine and combining them, the sides of each other do not collide. Therefore, it can suppress that a damage | wound is formed in a movable unit, and can suppress that the designability of a movable unit is impaired.

  Furthermore, when the movable units are displaced into the central space of the gaming machine and united, the side surfaces do not collide with each other, so that the displacement speed can be made constant when the unit is displaced. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in speed of the combination operation of the prizes and to suppress the loss of the player's interest.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the left slide member 430 of the lifting and lowering unit 800 and the slide unit 400 is a two-stage rack (the lifting and lowering unit 800 is a pinion gear between the rack 872 and the second slide member 871). The slide unit 400 has a configuration in which the first side pinion gear 432 is interposed between the first member 431 and the second member 433 (see FIG. 13). The speed of the displacement operation can be improved compared to the rack of the formula (form consisting of only the rack and the pinion), and thus the movement speed can be improved to increase the movement speed (lifting unit 800, slide unit 400 and protrusion unit 700). As a result, it is possible to shorten the time during which the player can visually recognize the action of combining. It is possible to prevent the player's interest is impaired.

  Here, if the movable units (lifting unit 800, slide unit 400, and projection unit 700) are disposed at different positions in the front-rear direction, the dimensions in the front-rear direction become bulky and large. If the dimensions in the front-rear direction of the rotary member 730 and the rotary members 435 and 455 are respectively reduced (thinned) in order to suppress the dimension in the front-rear direction, it is difficult to secure the configuration.

  On the other hand, since the raising and lowering member 820 includes the second slide member 871 which is formed on the same side as the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 in the longitudinal direction, the whole (the raising and lowering member 820, rotation The longitudinal dimension of the lifting and lowering member 820 is increased while the size in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine 10 is reduced by suppressing the longitudinal dimension as the sum of the member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455, and the rigidity thereof is reduced. It can be secured.

  The elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is disposed at a position projecting to the front side by the second slide member 871, and the second slide member 871 and the respective rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are in the front-rear direction. It is disposed at the overlapping position. As a result, the space on the back side of the lifting member 820 of the lifting unit 800 can be made large, and the width that increases in the front-rear direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 54) can be reduced. That is, elevating unit 800 and slide unit 400 are arranged by disposing rotation members 435 and 455 of slide unit 400 at the same position as second slide member 871 having a smaller width in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 53). Can be reduced in width in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 54). Since the second slide member 871 is formed to have a small width in the left-right direction, the second slide member 871 and the rotation member 871 can be configured so as not to intersect the displacement trajectory of the rotation members 435 and 455. Collision during displacement can be suppressed (see the phantom line KS3 in FIG. 51).

  Next, displacement modes when the movable units (slide unit 400, projecting unit 700, and lifting unit 800) are displaced to the combined state will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG. 55 to 58 sequentially show the displacement mode when the movable units are displaced to the combined state with FIG. 55 as the initial position.

  The operation of each movable unit disposed in the operation unit 200 is switched at three predetermined timings. In this embodiment, the first operation, the second operation, and the third operation will be described in order from the initial position shown in FIG.

  In the first operation, the lift base 720 of the protrusion unit 700 is slid and displaced upward with respect to the base member 710. In the second operation, the projection unit 700 continues its operation from the first operation, the base members 434 and 435 of the slide unit 400 slide to the central portion of the gaming machine 10, and the rotation members 435 and 455 are about 45 degrees. As a result of rotational displacement, the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is slidingly displaced downward. In the third operation, the projecting member 835 of the projecting unit 800 is slidingly displaced upward, and the tip of the rocking member 832 is rotationally displaced downward.

  First, as shown in FIG. 55 and FIG. 56, the first operation is performed by the protrusion unit 700 slidingly displacing the lift base 720 relative to the base member 710. As a result, the lifting base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the projecting unit 700 are displaced upward. The detailed description of the displacement of the lifting base 720 is as described above, and thus the detailed description is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the second operation is performed by displacing the slide unit 400 and the elevation unit 800. At this time, the slide displacement distances of the left and right slide members 450 (base members 434 and 454) are set to be the same.

  The second operation is performed during the displacement of the lift base 720 of the protrusion unit 700 with respect to the base member 710. Therefore, the end timing of the displacement operation in which the lift base 720 of the protrusion unit 700 is displaced relative to the base member 710 can be made substantially the same as the end timing of the displacement operation of the rotary members 435 and 455 and the lift member 720.

  As described above, as the slide members 430 and 450 are slid and displaced, the rotation members 435 and 455 are rotationally displaced. Therefore, the rotation angle of each rotation member 435 and 455 is set to the central position of the game board 13 (Rotational center position in FIG. 57) is rotationally displaced to a symmetrical angle.

  Here, the first member and the second member formed to be linearly displaceable between the retracted position and the combined (projected) position are provided, and the first member and the second member are respectively displaced to the combined position. There is a gaming machine that effects bringing a first member and a second member into association (integrally) and causing a player to visually recognize them as one character by bringing the first member and the second member into close proximity or in contact with each other.

  In this case, in order to enhance the rendering effect, it is effective that a larger character can be formed when the first member and the second member are displaced to the extended position. For that purpose, it is necessary to form the 1st member and the 2nd member in a large size.

  However, if the first member and the second member are respectively displaced to the combined (projected) position by linear displacement, when the first member and the second member are enlarged, they are mutually displaced on the way to the combined position. May interfere with Therefore, the displacement of the first member and the displacement of the second member can not be performed at the same time, and it is necessary to shift the respective displacements. , The staging effect is hindered.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the elevating base 720 of the projecting unit 700 is linearly displaced so as to move up and down with respect to the base member 710, so that it is disposed at the united position and the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400, Since the 455 is disposed at the united position by being rotationally displaced from the retracted position, the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 disposed on the elevating base 720 interfere with each other during the displacement to the united position. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since the displacement of the elevation base 720 of the projecting unit 700 and the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 can be performed simultaneously, the time until the character is formed is shortened, and the rendering effect is enhanced. be able to.

  The displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 is a rotation locus not intersecting with the displacement locus of the elevation base 720 displaced linearly, and the end position of the rotation locus of the rotation members 435 and 455 is a displacement of the elevation base 720 It is set to a position adjacent to the end position of the trajectory. That is, with respect to the linear displacement locus of the elevation base 720, the rotational locus of the rotary members 435 and 455 is a rotational locus having at least a displacement component in the displacement direction of the elevation base 720, and the rotational locus is combined The displacement component of the elevating base 720 in the displacement direction is set to be reduced as it is displaced to the position.

  Thus, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be a displacement locus that wraps around from the outside with respect to the displacement locus of the elevation base 720. Therefore, by rotating and displacing the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 is made a displacement locus avoiding the displacement locus of the elevation base 720 of the projecting unit 700 for linear displacement of elevation. be able to. Therefore, even if the displacement timings of the rotating members 435 and 455 and the elevation base 720 are shifted, the trajectories do not intersect with each other, so interference between the members can be suppressed. As a result, the displacement of the lifting and lowering base 720 of the projecting unit 700 and the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 can be performed simultaneously, so the time until the pattern (character) is formed is shortened. The presentation effect can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 is a displacement locus that wraps around from the outside with respect to the displacement locus of the elevation base 720, so that the outer shape in the direction orthogonal to the displacement direction of the elevation base 720 of the slide unit 700 linearly displaced. Can be easily suppressed from interfering with the rotating members 435 and 455. Thus, the lifting base 720 can be increased in size.

  As described above, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are disposed on the slidable base members 434 and 454. That is, the rotary members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced in a combined manner of rotational displacement and linear displacement, and are displaced to the combined (projected) position. Accordingly, it is possible to easily form a curved locus on the rotating members 435 and 455. As a result, interference with the rotating member 730 can be easily suppressed while the rotating members 435 and 455 are displaced to the combined position.

  That is, since the rotation members 435 and 455 can move in the relationship with the projecting unit 700 while moving to the combined (projected) position by the linear displacement of the base members 434 and 454, the rotation to the combination position is performed. It can be used not as movement but as displacement for avoiding interference with the protrusion unit 700, and as a result, mutual interference can be easily suppressed.

  Here, in the case of only rotating the rotating members 435 and 455, since the position of the rotating shaft is fixed, the rotating shaft of the rotating members 435 and 455 is set to the end of the rotating members 435 and 455 In addition, when the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotated, the end opposite to the rotation axis is only rotationally displaced, so it is difficult to set the displacement distance of the elevating base 720 large. When setting the rotation axis of the rotation members 435 and 455 at the center of the rotation members 435 and 455, the tip of the rotation member collides with the rear case 300 when displacing from the retracted position to the extended position. It is difficult to dispose the rotating member at the retracted position.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotation axes of the rotation members 435 and 455 are formed at the central position of the rotation members 435 and 455, and the rotation axes of the rotation members are slatable on the base members 434 and 454. Because they are coupled, the rotary members 435 and 455 can be operated in combination of linear displacement and rotational displacement. Therefore, when rotating the rotation members 435 and 455, by applying linear displacement, the rotation members 435 and 455 disposed at the retracted position are prevented from colliding with the rear case 300 when the rotation displacement occurs. The displacement distance can be set large.

  Further, since the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced in a mode in which the rotational displacement and the linear displacement are combined, the attitude of the rotating members 435 and 455 at the retracted position is the attitude at the combined position. It can be defined independently. That is, in the case where the rotating members 435 and 455 are displaced only by rotation and displaced between the retracted position and the combined position, the posture at the retracted position of the rotating members 435 and 455 is defined by the rotation angle from the overhanging position. Since rotational displacement and linear displacement are combined, the rotational members 435 and 455 can be linearly displaced, so that the posture at the retracted position can be defined independently of the posture at the combined position. Therefore, the degree of freedom of the attitude of the rotary members 435 and 455 at the retracted position can be increased.

  In other words, in the retracted position (the position where the base members 434 and 454 are disposed outward), the rotating members 435 and 455 have their longitudinal direction parallel to the longitudinal direction of the retraction space at the retracted position. On the other hand, in the united position (the position where the base members 434 and 454 are displaced to the center), the direction is made substantially the same as the longitudinal direction of the third symbol display device 81 by rotating. As a result, the degree of freedom of the attitude of the rotary members 435 and 455 at the retracted position can be enhanced, and at the united position, the central portion of the game board 13 can be stretched.

  Furthermore, here, since the third symbol display device 81 formed in a horizontally long rectangle is disposed at the central portion of the gaming machine 10 (operation unit 200), the third symbol display device 81 is enlarged in size. , The space on both sides becomes smaller. Therefore, in the configuration in which the rotating members 435 and 455 are formed in a horizontally long shape and arranged in a horizontally long posture at the united (projected) position and the protruding unit 700 is formed together with the character, a large character can not be formed. I can not fully demonstrate the stage effects. That is, while the game area is formed vertically, since the third symbol display device 81 is formed horizontally, one side and the other side of the third symbol display device in the width direction of the game area are relatively narrowed. , It is difficult to secure the space for arranging the members. Therefore, in order to prevent the rotation members 435 and 455 from protruding into the display area of the third symbol display device 81 at the retracted position, it is necessary to form the second member in a small size.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating members 435 and 455 are disposed in the horizontally long attitude at the combined (projected) position, and are disposed in the vertically long attitude at the retracted position. The space for arranging the members on one side or the other side of the third symbol display device 81 can be effectively utilized, and the rotation members 435 and 455 can be enlarged accordingly, and as a result, they are formed together with the projecting unit 700 at the combined position. The pattern (character) can be made larger.

  That is, the evacuation space where the rotation members 435 and 455 are evacuated is made small to secure a space for the central portion (third symbol display device 81) of the gaming machine 10, and to the central portion of the gaming machine 10 at the united position. The amount of overhang can be secured. Therefore, the pattern (character) formed by the rotating members 435 and 455 and the projecting unit 700 can be enlarged.

  Further, as described above, the rotary members 435 and 455 are rotatably and movably coupled to the base members 434 and 454, and synchronize the rotational displacements of the rotary members 435 and 455 with the linear displacements of the base members 434 and 454. Therefore, the relative positional accuracy of the rotating member with respect to the projecting unit 700 can be enhanced. As a result, interference with the protruding unit 700 can be easily suppressed during the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 to the extended position.

  Furthermore, since it is not necessary to separately provide a drive means for rotating the rotation members 435 and 455, the rotation members 435 and 455 can be formed larger accordingly, and together with the projecting unit 700 in the combined (overhanging) position. The characters to be formed can be made larger. For example, even in an area where it is difficult to secure a relatively narrow arrangement space for a member, such as one side and the other side of the third symbol display device 81 in the width direction of the game area, the rotation member 435 , 455, and the rotary members 435 and 455 can be formed large.

  In addition, the projecting unit 700 includes the swinging member 732 in the rotating member 730. In the second operation, since the swinging member 732 is displaced upward with respect to the rotating member 730, it can be brought close to and abut on the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400. Therefore, the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be stopped by the contact with the rocking member 732. In this case, since the pivoting member 732 is in a state in which the tip thereof is displaced upward, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be reliably brought into contact with the pivoting member 732. A detailed description of the contact of the pivoting member 732 with the rotary members 435 and 455 will be described later.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, the third operation is performed by displacing the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700. That is, only the displacement of the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700 is performed at the end of the operation of each movable unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 700, and lifting unit 800). As described above, the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700 can displace the swinging member 732 with the displacement.

  Therefore, by displacing the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700, the tip end of the projecting member 735 is displaced to the back side of the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800. Therefore, since the projecting unit 700 and the elevating unit 800 are connected, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the state in which the movable units are united (in a united state), and to give the player an interest by displacement of the bonus.

  Furthermore, since the swinging member 732 can be displaced downward with the displacement of the projecting member 735, the space between the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide members 430 and 450 of the slide unit 400 and the swinging member 732 The space (space) can be made larger than that in the second operation.

  Thereby, when the rotation members 435 and 455 (slide members 430 and 450) are in the combined state, it is possible to secure a displaceable space. As a result, in the operation unit 200 in the combined state, it is possible to make the displacement to further rotate the rotating members 435 and 455 (slide members 430 and 450), and increase variations in displacement modes in the combined state of the operation unit 200. .

  That is, when the elevation base 720 of the projecting unit 700 is displaced to the overhanging position, the rocking member 732 is separated from the rotating member 730, and plays a role of receiving the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455. Can displace the swinging member 732 in the direction approaching the rotating member 730, and can use the space formed along with the displacement as the displacement space of the rotating members 435 and 455. Can be enhanced.

  Here, an example of a pattern (character) formed by combination of each operation unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 700, and lifting unit 800) is shown. For example, when the respective members (rotational members 435 and 455, the elevation base 720 (rotational member 730), the elevation member 820) of the operation units are combined, a shape imitating a bow and an arrow is formed. In this case, by making the rotating members 435 and 455 have a shape resembling a bow, the rotating members 435 and 455 are operated using the gap between the swinging member 732 and the rotating members 435 and 455 described above, and the bow It can be in a state of being pulled by an arrow or a state in which an arrow is released from a bow and the bending is released. The rotating members 435 and 455 are parts of both ends of the bow portion, and the elevating base 720 (rotating member 730) is a part of the rear end side (the side opposite to the arrowhead) of the arrow. Is the middle portion of the bow, and the decoration member 820 of the lifting unit 800 is a part of the tip end side (arrowhead side) of the arrow.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the case where the stop position of the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 is shifted in the excess direction will be described. 59 (a) and 59 (b) are front views of the respective rotation members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the elevation base 720 and the rotation member 730 of the protrusion unit 700. FIG. 59A and 59B illustrate transition states when the left rotation member 435 and the swinging member 732 collide with each other when the stop position of the left slide member 430 is shifted in the excess direction.

  In FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), only the left rotation member 435 collides with the swinging member 732 will be described, and when the right rotation member 455 collides with the swinging member 732 the left rotation member It is considered that it is the same as the case where 435 is disposed symmetrically about the center position in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 6) of the operation unit 200, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), the slide members 430 and 450 of the slide unit 400 in the combined state are defective due to poor control, rattling of the members, or an error in the mounting position of the sensor. There is a possibility that the side surface of each rotating member 435, 455 collides with the swinging member 732 of the projecting unit 700 without stopping at the stop position in the combined state. Therefore, there is a possibility that the swinging member 732 collides with the respective rotating members 435 and 455 to damage the part.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the rotating member 730 on which the swinging member 732 is disposed is rotatably disposed with respect to the elevating base 720, as shown in FIG. Thus, by rotating the rotation member 730 with respect to the elevation base 720, the impact when the rotation member 435 collides with the rocking member 732 can be mitigated. Therefore, damage to the swinging member 732 and the respective rotating members 435 and 455 can be suppressed.

  That is, the rotation member 730 of the protrusion unit 700 can be rotated relative to the lift base 720 to increase the variation of the displacement mode of the protrusion unit 700, and the left rotation member 435 and the swing member 732 collide with each other. Damage can be suppressed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), when the side surface of the left rotation member 435 collides with the swinging member 732 of the projecting unit 700 and the rotation member 730 is rotationally displaced with respect to the elevation base 720, The swinging member 732 colliding with the rotating member 435 and the swinging member 732 disposed in a pair rotate and abut on the rotating member 455 of the right slide member 450.

  Therefore, after the rotation member 730 is rotated to reduce the impact of the collision between the rotation member 435 and the rocking member 732, the driving force for the rotation member 435 to further rotate is applied to the rotation member 455 of the right slide member 450. be able to. Therefore, it can be restricted that the rotation member 730 is further rotated.

  That is, two pairs of the swinging member 732 and the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) are formed on the left and right, and when the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) abuts on the swinging member 732 in one set, Since the rocking member 732 is formed so as to be displaced to the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) in the other set along with the contact, for example, in one set, the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) When being displaced and abutted against the rocking member 732 beyond the reference position, the rocking member 732 is directed to the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) in the other set along with the abutment. It can be displaced. Therefore, in the other set, the swinging member 732 is brought into contact with the rotating member 455 (the rotating member 435), and thereby the contact of the rotating member 435 (the rotating member 455) with the swinging member 732 in one set is caused. The impact can be received not only by the swinging member 732 (rotating member 730) but also by the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) in the other set. As a result, kinetic energy can be dispersed, displacement of the rotation member 435 (rotation member 455) in one set can be easily stopped, and breakage of each member can be suppressed.

  Further, in this case, the swinging member 732 collides with the side surface of the portion in the direction of gravity (the upper side in FIG. 07B) with respect to the rotation axis of the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435). Since the driving force can be applied in the direction opposite to the rotational moment acting around the rotation axis of the rotating member 455 (rotation member 435) when abutting on the member 435), the rotation member 455 (rotation member 435) The rotation moment of the rotation member 730 can be restricted using the rotation moment of. Therefore, since it is not necessary to supply electric power in order to regulate rotation of rotation member 730, drive energy can be controlled.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the case where the stop positions of the slide members 430 and 450 of the slide unit 400 are shifted in the excess direction will be described. 60 (a) and 60 (b) are front views of the respective rotation members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the elevation base 720 and the rotation member 730 of the protrusion unit 700. FIG. 60 (a) and 60 (b) illustrate transition states when the stop positions of the slide members 430 and 450 shift and the rotary members 435 and 455 collide with the swing member 732.

  Here, when the stop position of each slide member 430, 450 is shifted in the excess direction, the swinging member 732 collides with each rotating member 435, 455, and the swinging member 732 or each rotating member 435, 455 Could be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the swinging member 732 is displaced downward by performing the above-described third operation at the end timing of the second operation (end timing of the displacement operation of the rotating members 435 and 455). Therefore, when the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the rocking member 732, the rocking member 732 can be displaced downward to reduce the impact of the collision. As a result, breakage of the swinging member 732 or the respective rotating members 435 and 455 can be suppressed.

  Further, in this case, since the impact when the swinging member 732 collides with each of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be the driving force for causing the projecting member 735 to project, the driving motor 763 for driving the projecting member 735 The load can be reduced. That is, the driving member 761 (see FIG. 40) is transmitted to the cam portion 761b of the driving member 761 by transmitting the impact when the swinging member 732 collides with the respective rotation members 435 and 455 via the sliding wall 733c. Can act in the direction of rotation. As a result, the load on the drive motor 763 for driving the projecting member 735 can be reduced.

  The third operation may be delayed for a predetermined time after the second operation is completed. In this case, when the stop positions of the slide members 430 and 450 are shifted in the excess direction and the swinging member 732 collides with the rotating members 435 and 455, the drive for displacing the swinging member 732 and the projecting member 735 The rotational resistance of the motor 763 makes it easy to stop the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 while displacing the pivoting member 732.

  Furthermore, since the load of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be applied in the rotation direction of the drive motor 763, the drive energy at the time of driving the drive motor 763 can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, displacements of the respective rotation members 435 and 455 in the third operation will be described. 61 (a) and 61 (b) are front views of the respective rotation members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the elevation base 720 and the rotation member 730 of the protrusion unit 700 in the third operation. In FIG. 61 (b), a state in which each of the rotary members 435 and 455 in the third operation is displaced is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 61A, the gap between each of the rotary members 435 and 455 and the rotary member 730 of the slide unit 400 in the third operation corresponds to that of the rotary member 730 when the displacement of the third operation is performed. The swinging member 732 is enlarged by being displaced downward (downward in FIG. 61A) in accordance with the displacement of the projecting member 735. Therefore, the rotating members 435 and 455 in the third operation can be displaced further than the second operation.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), by sliding the base members 434 and 454 of the left and right slide members 430 and 450 further to the central part of the gaming machine 10, the rotary members 435 and 455 can be rotated. The central portion of the gaming machine 10 can be displaced. As a result, a sense of unity can be further given to the combined (projected) state of the elevation member 820 and the respective rotation members 435 and 455 visually recognized by the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62 to FIG. 68, the second combined state of the operation unit 200 will be described.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64, displacement of the operation unit 200 to the second combined state will be described. 62 to 64 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG. 62 to 64 show transition states in which each movable unit of the operation unit 200 is projected to the position of the second combined state. Also, FIG. 62 shows the operation unit 200 at the retracted (initial) position, FIG. 64 shows the operation unit 200 at the second combined position, and FIG. 63 shows the operation unit 200 at an intermediate position between the retracted position and the second combined position. Are illustrated respectively.

  Furthermore, the respective members (rotation members 435 and 455, the elevation base 720 (rotation member 730) of the movable units (the slide unit 400, the projection unit 700, and the elevation unit 800) of the operation unit 200 described with reference to FIGS. And the elevation member 820) in the combined (overhanging) position will be described below as a first combined state. Further, in the first combined state, each movable unit of the first movable unit group (slide unit 400, projecting unit 700, and lifting unit 800) is associated (integrated), and one pattern is set as a first effect mode. It can be made to be recognized by the player.

  As shown in FIG. 62, when the operation unit 200 is in the retracted position, the slide unit 400 is in the retracted position (the position shown in FIG. 17A) and the upper combination unit 500 is in the retracted position (FIG. 22A). The lower unit unit 600 is disposed at the retracted position (the position shown in FIG. 27A) at the position shown in FIG. From the state shown in FIG. 62, the base member 434 of the slide unit 400 is slidingly displaced to the central portion of the game board 13 from the state shown in FIG. By being displaced downward and the lower displacement member 640 of the lower combining unit 600 being displaced upward, the state shown in FIG. 63 is formed. Next, the slide unit 400 is in the overhanging position (the position shown in FIG. 18 (a)), and the upper combining unit 500 is in the overhanging position (the position shown in FIG. 22 (a)). By being displaced to the position shown in FIG. 27C, the second combined state shown in FIG. 64 is obtained.

  In the second united state, the movable units of the second movable unit group (slide unit 400, upper unit unit 500 and lower unit unit 600) are associated (integrated), and one pattern is used as a second effect mode. It can be made to be recognized by the player. The pattern (character) formed in the second effect mode is, for example, a pattern (character) imitating Pegasus (a imaginative creature with feathers on the horse's trunk) and the like. In this case, a part forming the body of Pegasus is a lower uniting unit 600, a part forming a head of Pegasus is an upper uniting unit 500, and a part forming a wing of Pegasus is a slide unit 400.

  In the second united state, the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 has the base member 434, which is slidably displaceable, displaced to the extended position of the slide end position (the position shown in FIG. 18A). That is, the base member 434 in the first united state and the base member 434 in the second united state are arranged such that the sliding displacement distance from the retracted position is different. Further, since the rotation member 435 is connected to the base member 434, the positions where the rotation member 435 is disposed can be different between the first combined state and the second combined state.

  Furthermore, as described above, since the rotational displacement of the rotation member 435 is linked (synchronized) to the slide displacement of the base member 434, the base member 434 is from the retracted position in the first combined state and the second combined state. As the sliding displacement distance is different, the rotation angles (posture) of the rotation member 435 are arranged differently. In the present embodiment, the rotation angle (orientation) of the rotation member 435 is disposed in a posture different by approximately 180 degrees around the rotation axis in the first united state and the second united state.

  As described above, the operation unit 200 stretches each member (rotational members 435 and 455, elevation base 720 (rotational member 730) and elevation member 820) of each operation unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 700 and elevation unit 800). By displacement to the exit position, the members can be combined to form one pattern (character).

  That is, as the first effect mode, operation unit 200 only combines the respective members in the space at the center of operation unit 200 (the space in front of third symbol display device 81) to form one pattern (character). Instead, it is possible to combine each member in the space at the center of the operation unit 200 as a second effect mode and form a pattern different from the first effect mode.

  Therefore, since different patterns can be formed in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the player visually recognizes each of the first effect mode and the second effect mode by effect, time, etc. It can be done. Therefore, since the variation of the presentation can be increased, it is possible to show the various presentation to the player and give the player an interest.

  Here, the first movable unit group consisting of a plurality of movable units formed displaceably between the retracted position and the combined (projected) position, and the movable position formed between the retracted position and the projected position There is known a gaming machine provided with a second movable unit group consisting of a plurality of movable units.

  According to this gaming machine, when the movable units of the first movable unit group are arranged at the extended position, the movable units of the first movable unit group are associated (integrated) to form one pattern ( When the respective movable units of the second movable unit group are arranged in the overhanging position, the respective movable units of the second movable unit group are associated with each other, while making the player recognize the character as the first effect mode. An effect of causing the player to recognize another pattern (character) as the second effect mode is performed. That is, in the first effect mode, each movable unit of the second movable unit group is retracted to the retracted position, while each movable unit of the first movable unit group is disposed to the overhanging position. A first pattern (character) is formed in the game area by each movable unit group of the movable unit group of, and in the second gaming state, the first movable units are retracted to the retracted position, while the second movable unit is By arranging each movable unit of the group to the overhanging position, an effect of forming a second character in the game area by each movable unit of the second movable unit group is performed.

  In this case, in order to enhance the rendering effect, it is effective that a larger pattern (character) can be formed. For that purpose, it is necessary to form the movable units of the first movable unit group and the movable units of the second movable unit group large in size, respectively.

  However, when a plurality of characters (representation modes) are formed as in the above-described conventional technique, the total number of movable units required to form a plurality of characters increases accordingly, and each movable unit is retracted. There is a problem that it is difficult to increase the size of each movable unit because the area (space) to be kept is limited. Therefore, it is difficult to increase each character (representation mode).

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, one movable unit and the second movable unit group (slide unit 400, upper unit) of the first movable unit group (slide unit 400, the protrusion unit 700, and the elevating unit 800) are combined. Since the movable unit of the movable unit of the unit 500 and the lower combination unit 600) is also used, the movable unit required to form a plurality of (first and second) rendering modes The total number can be reduced, and the size of each movable unit can be increased. As a result, each pattern (character) can be enlarged.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400 causes the player to visually recognize the part of the pattern (character) which the player visually recognizes as the first effect mode and the second effect mode. As a part of the display unit, the movable units for forming the first rendering mode or the second rendering mode can be reduced accordingly. Therefore, a space is formed in the retraction space of the inner edge of the back case 300 (a space other than the space in the center of the retracted state shown in FIG. 62 (the space in front of the third symbol display device 81)). The unit 400, the upper combining unit 500, the lower combining unit 600, the projecting unit 700, and the elevating unit 800 can be enlarged.

  In addition, since the members (rotating members 435 and 455, upper displacing member 530, lower displacing member 640, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730) and elevating member 820) of the movable units can be increased in size, the first The pattern (character) formed by the presentation mode and the second presentation mode can be enlarged.

  Here, as described above, the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400 causes the player to visually recognize the second effect mode and a part of the pattern (character) causing the player to visually recognize the first effect mode. When it is arranged in the same position in the first effect mode and the second effect mode when it is shared as part of the), the movable common to the first effect mode and the second effect mode It becomes easy for the player to visually recognize that the member of the unit (the rotating member 435) is used, which hinders interest.

  In addition, when it is necessary to form the first effect aspect and the second effect aspect respectively using the members (rotational members 435) arranged at the same position, the degree of freedom is reduced accordingly. It becomes difficult to form the difference (shape and arrangement position) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 435 is disposed at the time of forming the second effect mode and the united (overhanging) position at which the first effect mode is formed. Since the position is different from that of the exit position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize that the rotating member 435 is used in both the first and second effect modes, and the interest is hindered. Can be suppressed.

  In other words, since the position where the rotating member 435 is arranged is different between the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the pattern (character) formed by the first effect mode and the second effect mode In addition, it can be made difficult for the player to visually recognize that the rotating member 435 is also used. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's interest from being disturbed.

  Moreover, since the rotation member 435 can be disposed at different positions (overhanging positions) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the degree of freedom can be enhanced, and the first effect mode and the second effect mode This makes it easy to form the difference (shape or arrangement position) with the above.

  Here, when the rotating members 435 are disposed in the same posture in the first combined state and the second combined state, the rotating members 435 are used in the first effect mode and the second effect mode. This makes it easier for the player to see things, which hinders interest. In addition, when it is necessary to form the first effect mode and the second effect mode respectively using the rotating member 435 in the same posture, the degree of freedom is reduced by that amount and the first effect mode and It becomes difficult to form a difference (a shape or an arrangement position) with the second effect mode.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotation member 435 has a posture at the time of forming the first effect mode and a posture at the time of forming the second effect mode different from each other. It can be made difficult for the player to recognize that the member 435 is used in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and it is possible to suppress the inhibition of interest. In addition, it is possible to easily form the difference (shape or arrangement position) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode.

  Therefore, as described above, since the rotating member 435 is disposed in different positions in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and in different attitudes (rotational angles) to be arranged, It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize that the first effect mode and the second effect mode are shared, and it is possible to suppress the inhibition of interest.

  That is, the rotary member 435, which is shared by the first effect mode and the second effect mode, is in a state in which either one of the position or the attitude at which the first effect mode and the second effect mode are arranged is different. In the first effect mode and the second effect mode, there is a possibility that the player may recognize that the rotating member 435 is used, but the rotating member 435 is not limited to the first effect. Since both the arranged position and the posture are different in the mode and the second effect mode, the player is notified that the rotating member 435 is used in the first united state and the second united state. It can be difficult to see.

  In addition, the rotation member 435 is rotatably disposed on the linearly displaced base member 434 so that the rotation displacement and the linear displacement are combined in a combined manner. Therefore, the degree of freedom of the overhanging position and posture (rotation angle) when forming the first effect aspect or the second effect aspect can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, since the rotation member 435 is interlocked (synchronized) with the slide displacement of the base member 434 as described above, the relative positional accuracy (posture) of the rotation member 435 with respect to the base member 434 can be enhanced. Therefore, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 can be associated (integrated) with each other to cause the player to recognize the whole as a predetermined pattern (character).

  In addition, since it is not necessary to separately provide a drive means for rotating the rotation member 435, the rotation member 345 can be formed larger accordingly, and the pattern (character) formed in the second effect mode can be made larger. Can be For example, even if there is an area where it is relatively narrow and it is difficult to secure a space for arranging members, such as one side and the other side of the third symbol display device 81 in the width direction of the game area, the rotating member The rotating member 435 can be formed in a large size while setting the position of the retracted state of 435.

  In this case, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are arranged in areas where the rotary members 435 of the base member 434 overlap in a front view in the retracted position, and accordingly, the other regions of the base member 434 (conversion mechanism Can be reduced in size in the front-rear direction of the region where Therefore, when the lower displacing member 640 and the base member 434 are linearly displaced, the lower displacing member 640 can be prevented from contacting the side surface of the base member 434.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68, displacement modes of the operation unit 200 forming the second combined state will be described in detail. 65 (a) to 66 (b) are front views of the slide unit 400, the upper combining unit 500, and the lower combining unit 600. FIG. 67 (a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 400, the upper combining unit 500 and the lower combining unit 600 in the arrow LXVIIa direction view of FIG. 65 (a), and FIG. 67 (b) is a view of FIG. It is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 400 in the arrow LXVIIb direction view, the upper unit unit 500, and the lower unit unit 600. FIG. FIG. 68 (a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 400, the upper combining unit 500 and the lower combining unit 600 in the arrow LXVIIIa direction view of FIG. 66 (a), and FIG. 68 (b) is a view of FIG. It is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 400 in the arrow LXVIIIb direction view, the upper unit unit 500, and the lower unit unit 600. FIG.

  In FIG. 65 (a) to FIG. 66 (b), displacement modes from the retracted state to the second combined state are illustrated in order. 65 (a) shows the slide unit 400 in the retracted state, FIG. 65 (b) shows the slide unit 400 in the first state, FIG. 66 (a) shows the slide unit 400 in the second state, FIG. Each of the slide units 400 in the retracted state is illustrated.

  Further, the displacement from the state of FIG. 65 (a) to the first state shown in FIG. 65 (b) is performed by sliding displacement of the base member 434 of the slide unit 400. That is, in the initial displacement operation from the retracted position to the second combined state, the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600 are stopped, and the slide unit 400 is displaced to the first state.

  66 (a) shows the slide unit 400, the upper combination unit 500 and the lower combination unit 600 at an intermediate position of the displacement from the first state shown in FIG. 65 (b) to the second combined state shown in FIG. 66 (b). It is a front view. In the transition to the second state shown in FIG. 66 (a), while the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 is continued from the first state, the upper combination unit 500 and the lower combination unit 600 are displaced. Is done. That is, the transition from the first state to the second state is performed by displacing the slide unit 400, the upper combination unit 500, and the lower combination unit 600 that form the pattern (character) of the second effect mode. The transition from the second state to the second combined state is performed by continuing the displacement operation from the first state to the second state.

  Furthermore, in FIGS. 65 to 68, the base member 510 of the upper combination unit 500, the base member 610 of the lower combination unit 600, and the rotation member 536 of the slide unit 400 are illustrated by dashed lines in order to facilitate understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 (a) and 67 (a), in the retracted state (in the retracted position), in the upper combination unit 500, the upper displacement member 530 is housed in the base member 510. The lower combining unit 600 is disposed at a position where the lower displacement member 640 overlaps the lower base member 610 in the front-rear direction. Further, in the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400, a part of the base member 434 is disposed on the back side of the lower displacement member 640, and the rotation member 435 is disposed in front of the lower displacement member 640. That is, the lower displacement member 640 is disposed between the rotation member 435 of the left slide member 430 and the base member 434.

  As described above, the base member 434 of the left slide member 430 is formed of the front side base member 434b disposed on the front side and the back side base member 434a (see FIG. 13) disposed on the back side. A stepped portion 434b2 is formed on the lower side (the lower side in FIG. 67B) of the shaft support hole 434b1 of the front side base member 434b.

  The stepped portion 434 b 2 is a portion that forms a recess for suppressing interference between the base member 434 and the lower displacement member 640 of the lower unit unit 600, and the entire lower side of the stepped portion 434 b 2 of the base member 434 is the back surface. By recessing to the side, the gap between the rotation member 435 and the base member 434 can be increased.

  That is, since the lower side of the stepped portion 434b2 of the base member 434 is recessed toward the back side, the gap between the base member 434 and the rotating member 435 can be increased, and the lower united unit 600 is placed in the gap. A displacement member 640 can be provided.

  Further, since the thickness in the front-rear direction on the lower side of the base member 434 is reduced, the gap between the base member 434 and the lower displacement member 640 can be increased. Therefore, when the base member 434 is slidingly displaced in the first state (state shown in FIG. 65B) described later, the lower displacement member 640 and the base member 434 can be prevented from contacting each other.

  On the other hand, transmission gears 437a to 437f (see FIG. 13) serving as transmission means for transmitting the drive to the rotation member 435 can be disposed on the upper side of the stepped portion 434b2 of the base member 434 by thickening the thickness in the front-rear direction. It is assumed.

  The base member 434 is connected to the upper end side (the upper side in FIG. 65) so as to be slidably displaceable relative to the base member 410 as described above and is suspended, and the lower end side (the lower side in FIG. Since it is slidably inserted between the guide member 419 and the guide member 419 (see FIG. 6), a force is applied when the base member 434 is slidingly displaced in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 65A). Since the thickness in the front-rear direction above the base member 434 can be increased, deformation of the base member 434 can be suppressed.

  Further, at the retracted position (the position shown in FIG. 65A), the rear surface side of the connection arm 650 of the lower combination unit 600 is in contact with the plane between the step 434b2 and the pivot hole 434b1. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the lower combination unit 600 in the retracted state falls in the front-rear direction.

  That is, since the lower displacement member 640 is formed to be long in the vertical direction, in the lower unit 600, the connection arm 650 connected to the upper side of the lower displacement member 640 and the base member 434 are located where the upper end tends to fall back and forth. In this state, the upper end portion of the lower displacement member 640 can be prevented from falling in the front-rear direction, and the position of the lower combination unit 600 at the retracted position can be stabilized in the front-rear direction. Therefore, when the base member 434 slides in the first state, contact with the lower displacement member 640 can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 (b) and 67 (b), when the left slide member 430 is displaced to the position of the first state, the rotary member 435 is rotationally displaced with the displacement of the base member 434. As a result, the base member 434 is displaced by a predetermined amount, so that the rotary member 435 can be rotated, and the rotary member 435 and the lower combining unit 600 can be positioned so as not to overlap in the front-rear direction. The united unit 600 can be positioned so as not to overlap in the front-rear direction.

  That is, it does not overlap with the lower base member 610 in the front-rear direction inside the region K2 (see FIG. 65B) surrounded by the base member 434, the rotation member 435 and the lower base member 610 of the lower combining unit 600 in front view. A lower displacement member 640 of the part is arranged.

  As described above, since the lower displacement member 640 of the lower unit 600 is formed to be long in the vertical direction, the lower displacement member 640 can be disposed inside the region K2 where the upper end portion is easily inclined in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, collision of the lower displacement member 640 with the base member 434 and the rotation member 435 can be suppressed.

  In the first state, the upper displacement member on the side (upper contact portion 533 side) away from the connecting shaft 531 for transmitting (rotational driving force) the base member 434 to displace the upper displacement member 530 of the upper unit unit 500 It is arrange | positioned in the position which overlaps with 530 and the front-back direction. Thereby, when displacing to the second state, collision of the upper displacement member 530 of the upper combination unit 500 with the rotation shaft 435a connecting the base member 434 and the rotation member 435 can be suppressed.

  That is, in the case where the slide unit 400 and the upper combining unit 500 are displaced at the same start time (timing) from the retracted position, the upper displacement member 530 collides with the rotation shaft 435b of the rotation member 435. By delaying the start time for starting the downward displacement rather than the start time for the left slide member 430 to start displacement, collision of the upper displacement member 530 of the upper combination unit 500 with the rotation shaft 435a can be suppressed.

  In addition, the downward displacement of the upper displacing member 530 to the extended position is started when the base member 434 is positioned on the back side of the upper displacing member 630. Thereby, when the upper displacement member 630 is displaced, collision with the side surface of the base member 434 can be suppressed.

  That is, since the upper displacement member 530 is connected to the base member 510 only at one end, the other end (upper contact portion 533 side) is easily displaced in the front-rear direction. Further, as described above, the upper displacing member 530 is rotated downward and projected and displaced as it is slidingly displaced in the left-right direction of the operation unit 200 (the central portion in the left-right direction in FIG. 66B). Therefore, when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced in a state where the base member 434 is slidingly displaced to the center side with respect to the upper displacement member 530, the other end side of the upper displacement member 530 is displaced to the back side than the front surface of the base member 434. Since the upper displacement member 530 is displaced when the base member 434 is positioned on the back side of the upper displacement member 530, the base displacement member 530 is displaced when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced. Collision with the side surface of the member 434 can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIGS. 66 (a) and 68 (a), in the second state between the first state and the second combined state, the base member 434 of the left slide member 430 is further in the left-right direction than in the first state. The slide is displaced to the right (right side in FIG. 66 (a)). Therefore, the rotating member 435 which is rotationally displaced according to the slide displacement of the base member 434 is also rotationally displaced. Thus, one end of the rotating member 435 positioned on the lower uniting unit 600 side (left side in FIG. 65) with respect to the rotating shaft 435a can be rotated and positioned above the rotating shaft 435a. Therefore, by sliding the base member 434 to increase the width of the region K2 in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 66A) and rotating the rotary member 435, the up-down direction of the region K2 (FIG. a) The width in the vertical direction can be increased.

  Accordingly, when the lower displacement member 640 of the lower unit unit 600 is displaced, it is possible to suppress collision with the base member 434 and the rotation member 435 when the upper end portion of the lower displacement member 640 is tilted in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the upper displacement member 530 of the upper combination unit 500 is displaced while maintaining a state of overlapping with the base member 434 in the front-rear direction. That is, at the time of displacement from the first state to the second state, the base member 434 can be disposed on the back side of the upper displacement member 530, so as described above, the other end portion of the upper displacement member 530 ( It can suppress that the upper contact portion 533 side is displaced in the front-rear direction and collides with the side surface of the base member 434.

  In other words, since the upper displacement member 530 is disposed at a position overlapping the base member 434 in a front view while being displaced from the first state to the second combined state, the upper displacement member 530 is displaced to a position forming a second combined state It can be suppressed that the upper displacing member 530 abuts on the side surface of the base member 434 until it is released.

  Furthermore, since the projecting position of the upper displacing member 530 is disposed between the base member 434 and the rotating member 435 facing each other, the rotating member 435 is positioned on the front side to make it easier for the player to visually recognize The displacement member 530 and the rotation member 435 can be associated (integrated) to make it easy for the player to visually recognize the whole as a predetermined pattern (character).

  As shown in FIGS. 66 (b) and 68 (b), in the second united state, the upper displacement member 530 of the upper unit unit 500 and the lower abutment portion 643 of the lower unit unit 600 are in contact with each other. In addition, a part of the rotation member 435 is disposed on the front side (the left side in FIG. 68B) of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower combination unit 600.

  As a result, the rotary member 435, the upper displacement member 530, and the lower displacement member 640 can be disposed close to each other, and can be viewed by the player as one pattern (character).

  Here, since the rotation member 435 has different overhanging positions and different postures (rotational angles) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and needs to form a plurality of stop states, control or The structure becomes complicated, and the state of stop (arrangement position and attitude) is likely to vary accordingly. Therefore, when the rotation member 435 of the slide unit 400 abuts on the upper displacement member 530 of the upper combination unit 500 and the lower displacement member 640 of the lower combination unit 600 when forming the second rendering mode, If the arrangement position or posture does not reach the target position, a gap is formed between the upper combination unit 500 and the lower combination unit 600, while if the arrangement position or posture of the rotating member 435 exceeds the target position, the upper combination The unit 500 and the lower combining unit 600 are pushed out to cause misalignment. Therefore, it becomes difficult to maintain the relationship between the upper unit unit 500 and the lower unit unit 600 in the united state.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the rotating member 435 has each movable unit (slide unit 400, upper unit unit 500, lower unit unit 600, protrusion unit 700). The movable units (upper displacing member 530, lower displacing member 640, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730), elevating member 820) of the elevating unit 800) are disposed at different positions in the front-rear direction and each movable unit in front view Since it overlaps with a part of the movable members of the above, even when the stopped state (the overhanging position or the posture) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode varies, the relation with each movable member of each movable unit It can be easier to maintain sex. That is, by partially overlapping in a front view, even when the displacement of the rotary member 435 is insufficient, formation of a gap between each movable unit and each movable member can be suppressed, and the position in the front-rear direction is By being different from each other, even when the displacement of the rotating member 435 is excessive, it is possible to suppress that the movable members of the movable units are pushed out to cause positional deviation. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the association between each movable unit and each movable member in the combined state.

  In the second effect mode, the upper abutting portion 533 of the upper displacing member 530 and the lower abutting portion 643 of the lower displacing member 640 are abutted and disposed, and the rotating member 435 is disposed in front of it. The upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, and the rotation member 435 can be associated (integrated) to make it easier for the player to recognize the pattern (character) formed in the second combined state.

  That is, in the second effect mode, since the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 can be at the same position in the front-rear direction, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 in the combined (projected) state can be Since it is possible to make it easy for the player to visually recognize in an integrated manner, it is possible to easily recognize the pattern (character) formed in the second effect mode to the player.

  In this case, as described above, the rotating member 435 is likely to cause variations in the stopped state (arrangement position and posture), and the upper displacement member is at the stopping position when the rotating member 435 forms the second effect mode. In the structure in contact with the 530 and the lower displacing member 640, a gap is formed between the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member 640 if the arrangement position or posture of the rotating member 435 does not reach the target position. ) Is inhibited.

  Similarly, since the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are pushed out to cause positional deviation even if the arrangement position or posture of the rotation member 435 exceeds the target position, the association (unification) is inhibited. That is, in the second effect mode, since the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member 640 are in contact with each other, the rotating member 435 is in contact with the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member 640. The upper displacement member 530 or the lower displacement member 640 is pushed out when the arrangement position or posture of 435 exceeds the target position. In this case, since the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member 640 are misaligned with each other in contact with each other, not only the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member 640 are misaligned with respect to the rotating member 435 Each member is displaced. Therefore, when the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member 640 are brought into contact with each other at the combined (projected) position, the rotating member 435 is disposed in front of the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member 640. Especially effective.

  Further, in this case, a part of the rotation member 435 is disposed on the front side of at least a part of a portion where the contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640 abut. The contact portion between the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member can be made less visible to the player by the rotating member 435. Therefore, the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, and the rotation member 435 can be easily recognized by the player as one pattern. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the player can not recognize the pattern (character) of the second effect mode and the interest is lost.

  Next, a slide unit 2400 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73.

  First, the overall configuration of the slide unit 2400 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. FIG. 69 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 2400 in the second embodiment. FIG. 70 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 2400.

  In the first embodiment, the rotation member 435 and the rotation member 455 are rotated according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450. However, the left slide member 2430 and the right slide member in the second embodiment The 2450 is switched between rotating and non-rotating the rotation member 435 and the rotation member 455 according to the slide displacement. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those in the above embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the base member 2410 in the second embodiment mainly includes a body base member 2480 and a rotation transmission member 2485 rotatably disposed relative to the body base member 2480. Configured

  The main body base member 2480 is formed of a plate-like body having a rectangular shape in a front view rectangular shape, and a protruding plate portion 411 is provided upright on the front side of the game board at the lower side edge. Further, on the lower surface side of both end portions in the longitudinal direction, a projecting portion 2481 is formed to project from the main body base member 2480.

  On the upper surface side of the projecting plate portion 411, a base-side rack gear 412 for imparting rotation to the first side pinion gear 432 disposed on the first member 431 in accordance with the slide displacement of the first member 431 is engraved.

  The protrusions 2481 are formed on both longitudinal ends of the main body base member 2480 as described above. The protruding portion 2481 is provided with a circular bearing hole 2481 a into which a shaft portion 2486 of a rotation transmission member 2485 described later is inserted. Further, a through hole 2481 b is formed to penetrate in the left-right direction in a projecting portion 2481 formed on one longitudinal end side (right side of the gaming machine) of the main body base member 2480.

  The bearing holes 2481a are recessed outward on the both sides of the main body base member 2480 from the longitudinal center of the main body base member 2480, and the respective axial centers formed at both ends are formed concentrically.

  The rotation transmitting member 2485 is formed in a substantially rectangular cross section, and is formed in a prismatic shape set to a size slightly smaller than the distance dimension in the longitudinal direction of the main body base member 2480. At both ends of the rotation transmitting member 2485, a rotating portion 2487 which is formed in a substantially circular shape in side view and has a predetermined thickness is formed, and a shaft portion 2486 of the shaft-like body is longitudinally outward from the shaft center of the rotating portion 2487. Are formed projecting.

  Further, on the lower surface side of the rotation transmitting member 2485, a left rotation transmitting rack gear 413 is formed on the other end side in the longitudinal direction (left side of the game board) and a right rotation transmitting rack gear 414 is formed on one side in the longitudinal direction (right side of the game board). It will be set up.

  Shafts 2486 formed at both ends of the rotation transfer member 2485 are concentric with each other. Further, as described above, since the shaft portion 2486 is inserted inside the bearing hole 2481 a formed in the protruding portion 2481, the diameter dimension of the shaft portion 2486 is formed smaller than the bearing hole 2481 a.

  Accordingly, when the shaft portion 2486 is inserted into the bearing hole 2481 a of the projecting portion 2481 and arranged in the main body base member 2480, the rotation transmitting member 2485 can rotate around the shaft of the shaft portion 2486.

  A circular rack 2487a is engraved on the side surface of the rotating portion 2487 formed on one side (right side of the game board) of the rotation transmitting member 2485. The rotation transmitting member 2485 is disposed on the main body base member 2480 in a state where the circular rack 2487a meshes with a pinion gear 2488 disposed on one longitudinal side (right side in front view) of the main body base member 2480.

  The pinion gear 2488 is a gear for transmitting the driving force of the rotational drive motor 2489 to the rotation transfer member 2485, and the shaft center thereof is fastened to the rotational drive motor 2489. The rotary drive motor 2489 has its rotational shaft inserted into the through hole 2481 b of the protrusion 2481 and the pinion gear 2488 is fastened from the opposite surface of the protrusion 2481.

  Therefore, by applying rotational driving force to the rotational drive motor 2489, the pinion gear 2488 is rotated, and the driving force is applied to the circular rack 2487a formed in the rotating portion 2487 of the rotation transmission member 2485. Thus, the rotation transmission member 2485 can rotate around the shaft portion 2486.

  The left rotation transmission rack gear 413 meshes with a transmission gear 2437 a disposed on the left slide member 2430. The transmission gear 2437a meshes with the transmission gear 437b, and when the transmission gear 2437a rotates, the driving force is transmitted to the plurality of transmission gears 437b to 437f. As a result, with the slide displacement of the left slide member 2430, a rotational drive can be applied to the rotation member 435.

  The right rotation transmission rack gear 414 meshes with the transmission gear 2457 a disposed on the right slide member 2450. The transmission gear 2457a meshes with the transmission gear 437b, and when the transmission gear 2457a rotates, the drive is transmitted to the plurality of transmission gears 457b to 457f. Thus, with the slide displacement of the right slide member 2450, the rotational driving force can be applied to the rotating member 455.

  Next, transmission gear 2437a and transmission gear 2457a will be described with reference to FIG. The transmission gear 2437a and the transmission gear 2457a have the same shape, and thus the detailed description of the transmission gear 2457a will be omitted.

  71 (a) is a rear view of the transmission gear 2437a, and FIG. 71 (b) is a side view of the transmission gear 2437a.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the transmission gear 2437a is formed to include a tooth portion 2437a1 having a constant tooth thickness and a bulging portion 2437a2 whose tooth thickness gradually decreases toward the rear side.

  The teeth 2437a1 mesh with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437b, and have a thickness substantially the same as the thickness dimensions (dimensions in the front and rear direction) of the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437b. It is formed.

  The bulging portion 2437a2 is a portion bulging in a shape in which the tooth thickness gradually decreases toward the center of the tooth thickness as it goes to the back side. The distance dimension by which the bulging portion 2437a2 bulges out from the tooth portion 2437a1 is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the tooth portion 2437a1 or smaller than the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the tooth portion 2437a1. Thereby, it can suppress that the rigidity of bulging part 2437a2 falls, and can suppress that bulging part 2437a2 is damaged.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73, the operation of the rotation transfer member 2485 will be described. In the following, the left slide member 2430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 2450 will be omitted.

  FIG. 72 (a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 2400 in a state in which the rotation transmission member 2485 and the transmission gear 2437a are engaged with each other, and FIG. 72 (b) is a rotation transmission member 2485 and the transmission gear 2437a. It is the schematic diagram which carried out the plain view of the slide unit 2400 in the state from which the meshing of this was cancelled | released. 73 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 2400 taken along line LXXIIIa-LXXIIIa in FIG. 72 (a), and FIG. 73 (b) is a slide unit 2400 taken along line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb in FIG. 72 (b). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram.

  In FIG. 72, a part of the rotation transmission member 2485 is illustrated by a broken line for easy understanding. Also, the transmission gear 2437a and the transmission gears 437b to 437f are illustrated in a see-through state.

  As shown in FIGS. 72 (a) and 73 (a), when the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the rotation transmission member 2485 is located downward (downward in FIGS. 72 and 73), transmission with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is performed. A state in which the gear 2437a meshes with the gear 2437a is formed.

  Therefore, when the left slide member 2430 is slidingly displaced with respect to the base member 2410, the transmission gear 2437a meshed with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is rotated. As a result, the driving force of the rotation of the transmission gear 2437a is transmitted to the transmission gears 437b to 437f, whereby the rotating member 435 is rotated.

  On the other hand, as described above, when the rotational transmission member 2485 is rotated upward by applying the rotational driving force to the rotational drive motor 2489, the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released. Ru.

  That is, as shown in FIGS. 72 (b) and 73 (b), when the rotation transmitting member 2485 rotates about the shaft portion 2486, the left rotation transmitting rack gear 413 formed on the rotation transmitting member 2485 becomes the rotation transmitting member 2485. Is displaced upward with the rotation of. Thereby, the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released.

  Therefore, even if the left slide member 2430 is slidingly displaced with respect to the base member 2410, the transmission gear 2437a does not rotate because the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a are disengaged from each other. As a result, since the driving force is not transmitted to the rotation member 435 from the transmission gears 437b to 437f, even if the left slide member 2430 is displaced, it can be configured not to rotate.

  That is, the first drive state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 2430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotary member 435 and the rotary member 435 is rotated with the slide displacement of the left slide member 2430; The displacement is not converted to the rotational movement of the rotation member 435, and the second slide movement state in which the left slide member 2430 is slid while the rotation member 435 is not rotated is stopped, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 2430 is stopped to rotate. It is possible to form a third drive state in which the rotation of the member 435 is continued by its inertial force.

  As a result, the number of combinations of movements (linear movement and rotational movement) of the left slide member 2430 and the rotational member 435 can be increased, and accordingly, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  Here, it is also conceivable to dispose a drive motor for applying a driving force for causing the left slide member 2430 to rotate the rotation member 435. However, when the drive motor is disposed on the left slide member 2430, the weight of the left slide member 2430 is increased, and the addition of the left drive motor 475 for driving (sliding displacement) the left slide member 2430 is increased. There was a point.

  On the other hand, according to the second embodiment, the second drive state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 2430 is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotary member 435 can be formed by the rotary drive motor 2489 disposed on the base member 2410. it can. That is, since it is not necessary to arrange the drive means for rotationally driving the rotation member 435 on the left slide member 2430, the load on the left drive motor 475 for driving the left slide member 2430 can be reduced accordingly. it can.

  In addition, the rotation transmission member 2485 including the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 for transmitting the driving force to the transmission gear 2437a is rotated along the rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, whereby the left rotation transmission is performed. The gear can not be engaged when switching from the second drive state in which the engagement is released to the first drive state in which engagement is performed if the rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a are disengaged from each other. There is a problem that the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a can not mesh with each other due to a collision.

  On the other hand, according to the second embodiment, since the bulging portion 2437a2 is formed in the transmission gear 2437a, the area of the side surface of the transmission gear 2437a can be reduced. Therefore, it is easy to insert the tooth portion of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 between the tooth portion and the tooth portion of the transmission gear 2437a when switching from the second driving state in which the tooth engagement is released to the first driving state in which the tooth is engaged. it can.

  Further, since the tooth thickness of the bulging portion 2437a2 is gradually reduced toward the rear surface side of the transmission gear 2437a, the tooth portion of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is guided to the tooth portion 2437a1 along the inclined surface which becomes gradually smaller. can do.

  That is, by forming the bulging portion 2437a2 in the transmission gear 2437a, it is possible to smoothly perform the meshing when switching from the second driving state in which the meshing has been released to the meshed first driving state.

  Preferably, the shaft portion 2486 in the second embodiment is formed on the front surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 in the first drive state. Therefore, when the rotation transmission member 2485 rotates and switches from the first drive state to the second drive state, displacement of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 toward the transmission gears 2437a and 2457a is suppressed. it can. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly switch the rotation transmission member 2485 from the first drive state to the second drive state.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76, a slide unit 3400 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 74 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 3400 in the third embodiment.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation member 435 and the rotation member 455 are rotated according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 430 and the right slide member in the third embodiment In accordance with the slide displacement, the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are switched between rotating and non-rotating states. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those in the above embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 74, the base member 3410 in the third embodiment mainly includes a main body base member 3480 and a housing member 3490 disposed in front of the main body base member 3480.

  The main body base member 3480 is formed in a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and a protruding plate portion 3411 is provided upright at an edge portion.

  On the lower side of the projecting plate portion 3411, a left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is formed on the lower surface side at the other end side (game board left side) in the longitudinal direction, and a right rotation transmission rack gear 414 is formed on one side in the longitudinal direction (game board right side). It will be set up. On the other hand, an insertion hole 3481c is vertically formed through the protruding plate portion 3411 on the upper surface side.

  The housing member 3490 is a member on which the first member 431 and the second member 433 of the left slide member 430 and the rack member 451 of the right slide member 450 are disposed, and is formed in a rectangular plate shape in a front view. At the same time, a projecting wall 3491 projecting from the edge to the front side of the gaming machine is formed, and the first member 431, the second member 433 and the rack member 451 are disposed on the inner peripheral surface of the projecting wall 3491.

  In addition, the housing member 3490 is formed such that the external shape in a front view is smaller than the shape of the inner peripheral surface of the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480. Thus, the housing member 3490 can be disposed inside the projecting plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480.

  The base side rack gear 412 is engraved on the inner surface of the lower projecting wall 3491 of the housing member 3490. On the other hand, in the upper projecting wall 3491 of the housing member 3490, a through hole 3491a penetrating in the vertical direction is formed.

  The through hole 3491a is a hole for inserting a bolt (not shown) from the inside of the housing member 3490 in order to fasten the shaft portion of the telescopic cylinder 3495 described later and the housing member 3490, and the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 The diameter is smaller than the diameter of.

  The cylinder 3495 is a member that causes the storage member 3490 to slide up and down by its drive, and by applying electric power, a shaft that protrudes from the inside of the cylinder 3495 is inserted into the inside of the cylinder 3495, and the shaft It is a member (solenoid) which displaces the protrusion distance of.

  The cylinder 3495 is fastened to the housing member 3490 in a state where the shaft portion is inserted into the inside of the insertion hole 3481 c formed in the projecting plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480. Further, the main body side of the cylinder 3495 is fastened and fixed to the projecting plate portion 3411 a of the main body base member 3480.

  Therefore, when power is applied to the cylinder 3495, the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 is displaced up and down, and the accommodation member 3490 fastened to the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 can be displaced up and down. That is, the housing member 3490 can be displaced in the vertical direction with respect to the main body base member 3480.

  Next, the operation of the housing member 3490 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. In the following, the left slide member 430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 450 will be omitted.

  FIG. 75 (a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 3400 in a state in which the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the main body base member 3480 and the transmission gear 437a are engaged with each other. FIG. 75 (b) is a housing member 3490. Of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the main body base member 3480 and the transmission gear 437a are disengaged from each other, and the slide unit 3400 is viewed from the front. 76 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 3400 taken along line LXXVIa-LXXVIa in FIG. 75 (a), and FIG. 76 (b) is a slide unit 3400 taken along line LXXVIb-LXXVIb in FIG. 75 (b). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. In FIG. 75, a part of the housing member 3490 and a part of the main body base member 3480 are illustrated by broken lines for easy understanding. Also, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are illustrated in a see-through state.

  As shown in FIGS. 75 (a) and 76 (a), when the housing member 3490 is at the upper position, the distance L1 between the bottom surface of the housing member 3490 and the inner surface of the projecting plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480 is While being arranged in a sufficiently secured state, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the main body base member 3480 and the transmission gear 437a mesh with each other.

  Therefore, when the left slide member 430 slides on the base member 3410, the transmission gear 437a meshing with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is rotated. As a result, the driving force of the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the transmission gears 437b to 437f, so the rotating member 435 rotates.

  On the other hand, as described above, when the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 is displaced so as to project from the inside of the cylinder 3495, the meshing of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a is released.

  That is, in a state where the housing member 3490 is positioned downward, the distance dimension L2 between the bottom surface of the housing member 3490 and the inner surface of the projecting plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480 is smaller than the distance dimension L1. A state in which the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the base member 3480 and the transmission gear 437a is released is formed (distance dimension L1> L2).

  Therefore, even if the left slide member 430 slides on the base member 3410, the transmission gear 437a does not rotate since the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a are disengaged from each other. As a result, since the driving force from the transmission gears 437b to 437f is not transmitted to the rotating member 435, a form that does not rotate even if the left slide member 430 is displaced can be formed.

  That is, the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotary member 435, and the first drive state in which the rotary member 435 rotates with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430; Is not converted to the rotational movement of the rotation member 435, and the second slide movement state in which the left slide member 430 is slide-displaced while the rotation member 435 is not rotated is stopped, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is stopped. It is possible to form a third driving state in which the rotation of 435 is continued by the inertial force. As a result, the number of combinations of the motion (linear motion and rotational motion) of the left slide member 430 can be increased, and accordingly, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In the third embodiment, the transmission gear 437a disposed on the left slide member 430 is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 formed on the main body base member 3480. The first driving state and the second driving state can be switched.

  Therefore, when switching from the second drive state to the first drive state, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a can be meshed smoothly.

  That is, when the phase of the teeth of the transmission gear 437a and the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 are out of phase, it is necessary to match the phases. However, when the transmission gear 437a is displaced in the direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, when the transmission gear 437a is brought close to the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 with a phase shift, the left rotation transmission rack gear Since the transmission gear 437a meshes while rotating along the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 while the tooth surface of the transmission gear 437a abuts on the tooth surface of the transmission gear 437a, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a There is no need to match the phase, and the meshing can be performed smoothly.

  Next, a slide unit 4400 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78. FIG. 77 is a front view of the base member 4410 in the fourth embodiment.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation member 435 and the rotation member 455 are rotated according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 430 and the right slide member in the fourth embodiment In accordance with the slide displacement, the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are switched between rotating and non-rotating states. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those in the above embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 77, the base member 4410 in the fourth embodiment is formed of a horizontally long plate-like member in a front view rectangular shape, and a protruding plate portion 411 is provided upright on the front side of the game board at the lower edge . On the bottom surface side of the projecting plate portion 411, a left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 for applying rotation driving force to the rotation member 435 and a right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 for applying rotation driving force to the rotation member 455 are formed.

  The left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 is formed on the left side in the longitudinal direction of the base member 4410. In addition, notches 4413a are formed at the both end portions and the central portion of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413. Further, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch 4413a are provided with small teeth 4413b whose external shape is smaller than the teeth not adjacent to the notch 4413a.

  On the other hand, the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 is formed on the right side in the longitudinal direction of the base member 4410. Further, on both end portions of the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414, notch portions 4414a in which the tooth surfaces are cut out are formed. Further, the teeth of the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 adjacent to the notch portion 4414a are provided with small teeth 4414b whose external shape is smaller than those of non-adjacent teeth.

  Next, the operation of the slide unit 4400 will be described with reference to FIG. In the following, the left slide member 430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 450 will be omitted.

  FIG. 78 (a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 4400 in a state in which the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 of the base member 4410 and the transmission gear 437a are engaged with each other, and FIG. 78 (b) is a schematic view of the base member 4410. FIG. 33 is a schematic view of the slide unit 4400 in a front view, in which the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a are disengaged from each other. In FIG. 78, a part of the base member 4410 is shown by a broken line for easy understanding. Also, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are illustrated in a see-through state.

  As shown in FIG. 78A, when the left slide member 430 is displaced and the transmission gear 437a is positioned below the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 other than the notch 4413a, the transmission gear 437a rotates left. A state of meshing with the transmission rack gear 4413 is formed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 78 (b), when the left slide member 430 is displaced and the transmission gear 437a is positioned below the notch 4413a of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, the transmission gear 437a is A state is released in which the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 is disengaged from the gear.

  That is, the rotary member 435 can be rotated with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 until the transmission gear 437a reaches the notch 4413a where the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 are missing. . On the other hand, when the transmission gear 437a reaches the notch 4413a where the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 are missing, the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is stopped to rotate the rotation member 435 by its inertia force. Can be continued.

  Therefore, the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotary member 435, and the first drive state in which the rotary member 435 rotates with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430; Is not converted to the rotational movement of the rotation member 435, and the second slide movement state in which the left slide member 430 is slide-displaced while the rotation member 435 is not rotated is stopped, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is stopped. It is possible to form a third driving state in which the rotation of 435 is continued by the inertial force. As a result, the number of combinations of the motion (linear motion and rotational motion) of the left slide member 430 can be increased, and accordingly, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  Further, switching between the first drive state and the third drive state is achieved by canceling the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a by dropping some teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413. Since it is not necessary to dispose a drive motor or the like on the left slide member 430 for releasing the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a, the weight of the left slide member 430 can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load of the left drive motor 475 for slidingly displacing the left slide member 430 can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the small-sized teeth 4413b are formed in the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch 4413a are broken when switching from the third drive state to the first drive state. Can be prevented, and the durability of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 can be improved.

  That is, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch 4413a are easily damaged because the teeth of the transmission gear 437a that has passed through the notch 4413a collide with each other.

  In this case, since the small tooth portion 4413b is formed in the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a mesh smoothly when switching from the third drive state to the first drive state. be able to.

  That is, in the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 not provided with the small tooth portion 4413b, when the phase of rotation with the transmission gear 437a is out of phase when switching from the third drive state to the first drive state, There is a possibility that the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 mesh with each other and can not mesh.

  In this case, when the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a are out of phase of rotation by forming the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch portion 4413a to be smaller than the other teeth. However, when the small teeth 4413 b and the transmission gear 437 a abut on each other, the transmission gear 437 a can be rotated to adjust its phase by suppressing meshing of the teeth with each other. As a result, the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a can be meshed smoothly.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81, the left slide member 5430 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective front view of the left slide member 5430 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 80 is an exploded back perspective view of the left slide member 5430. FIG. In the following, the left slide member 5430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the left slide member 5430 will be omitted.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation member 435 and the rotation member 455 are rotated according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 5430 and the right slide member in the fifth embodiment 5450 is switched between the state of rotating the rotation member 5435 and the rotation member 5455 and the state of non-rotation according to the slide displacement. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those in the above embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, in the left slide member 5430 in the fifth embodiment, the one-way clutch 5439 is disposed on the rotation shaft 5435a of the rotation member 5435.

  The one-way clutch 5439 includes an outer ring 5439b coupled to a shaft hole 5437f1 circularly formed through the shaft center of the transmission gear 5437f, an inner ring 5439c coupled to the rotation shaft 5435a of the rotating member 5435, and cam surfaces of the inner ring 5439c. Mainly composed of a plurality of rollers 5439d disposed in the housing, a holder 5439e for holding the respective rollers 5439d, and a switching plate 5439a connected to the holder 5439e to switch the phase of the roller 5439d with respect to the cam surface .

  A sliding groove 5439a1 penetrating in a long hole shape is formed in the switching plate 5439a, and a protrusion 5436d which is protruded to the front side of a displacement member 5436 described later is inserted into the inner peripheral surface of the sliding groove 5439a1. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the operation of the one-way clutch 5439 will be described. 81 (a) is a schematic view of the left slide member 5430 in a state before the switching plate 5439a is operated, and FIG. 81 (b) is a left in the state after the switching plate 5439a is operated. It is the model which looked at slide member 5430 from the front. In FIG. 81, in order to facilitate understanding, the drawing is simplified, and a part of the one-way clutch 5439 and the displacement member 5436 is illustrated by a broken line.

  As shown in FIG. 81A, when the displacement member 5436 is disposed on the back side of the rotation member 5435, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is disposed at the end of the cam surface, and the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b Bite into the wedge formed between. Thereby, the one-way clutch 5439 is brought into the driving state. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 81B, when the displacement member 5436 is displaced relative to the rotation member 5435, the position of the projecting portion 5436d formed on the displacement member 5436 becomes the rotation member 5435 in accordance with the displacement. Displace against Thereby, the switching plate 5439a is switched.

  When the switching plate 5439a is switched, the roller 5439d is disposed at the neutral position of the cam surface and separates from the meshing space of the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is brought into the neutral idling state. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is not transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

  Therefore, by displacing the displacement member 5436 connected to the rotation member 5435, it is possible to form a state in which the one-way clutch 5439 allows transmission of rotation and a state in which the transmission of rotation is shut off.

  That is, the slide displacement of the left slide member 5430 is converted to the rotational movement of the rotary member 5435, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 5430 is the first drive state in which the rotary member 5435 is rotated with the displacement of the left slide member 5430 Is not converted to the rotational movement of the rotation member 5435, and the second slide movement state in which the left slide member 5430 is slide-displaced while the rotation member 5435 remains non-rotation, and the one-way clutch when stopping the slide displacement of the left slide member 5430 When the left slide member 5430 is stopped, the third drive state in which the rotation of the rotary member 5435 is continued by the inertia force is formed by changing the state in which the transmission of the rotation is allowed from the state of 5439 to the state where the left slide member 5430 is stopped. be able to.

  Therefore, the first drive state, the second drive state, and the third drive state can be formed, and the number of combinations of motion (linear motion and rotational motion) of the left slide member 5430 and the rotation member 5435 can be increased. As a result, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In addition to the movement (linear movement and rotational movement) of the left slide member 5430 and the rotation member 5435, the displacement of the displacement member 5436 can be combined, so that the number of combinations can be increased. As a result, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In this case, since the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is operated by the displaced displacement member 5436, the displacement member 5436 can share the role of rendering by displacement and the role of operating the switching plate 5439a. That is, since it is not necessary to separately provide the left slide member 5430 with a drive motor or the like for operating the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439, the weight of the entire slide member can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load of the left drive motor 475 for driving the left slide member 5430 can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 85, the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment will be described.

  First, the entire configuration of the left slide member 6430 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. FIG. FIG. 82 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 83 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member 6430. FIG. In the following, the left slide member 6430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 6450 will be omitted.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation member 435 and the rotation member 455 are rotated according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 6430 and the right slide member in the sixth embodiment 6450 is switched between the state of rotating the rotation member 5435 and the rotation member 5455 according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430 and the right slide member 6450 and the non-rotation state by switching the one-way clutch 5439. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those in the above embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment is disposed on the rotation shaft 5435a of the rotation member 5435 in a state where the one-way clutch 5439 is inserted through the through hole 6434a1 of the back side base member 434a. Ru.

  The through hole 6434a1 formed in the back side base member 434a is a hole for inserting the one way clutch 5439 from the back side to the front side, and the hole diameter is formed larger than the outer diameter of the one way clutch 5439.

  In the one-way clutch 5439, the outer ring 5439b is connected to the shaft hole 5437f1 of the transmission gear 5437f, the inner ring 5439c is connected to the rotating shaft 5435a of the rotating member 5437, and the sliding groove 5439a1 of the switching plate 5439a is connected to an operation member 6438 described later Ru.

  The operating element 6438 is formed in a rod-shaped body having a rectangular shape in a front view. The operation pin 6438 has a connection pin 6438a projecting forward at an end portion on the lower side, and a through hole 6438b penetrating in the front-rear direction slightly above the center portion in the vertical direction.

  The through hole 6438b is a hole that is inserted into an insertion pin 6434a2 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the back side of the back side base member 434a in a cylindrical shape, and is formed to have a hole diameter larger than the outer diameter of the insertion pin 6434a2.

  Therefore, when the through hole 6438b of the operation element 6438 is inserted through the insertion pin 6434a2 of the back side base member 434a and the bolt T (not shown) is fastened to the tip of the insertion pin 6434a2, the operation element 6438 is through hole 6438b Are arranged on the back surface of the back side base member 434a in a rotatable state about the axis.

  The connection pin 6438a is a cylindrical body inserted into the sliding groove 5439a1 of the one-way clutch 5439, and its outer diameter is smaller than the groove width of the sliding groove 5439a1.

  Therefore, when the operating element 6438 rotates around the through hole 6438b while the connecting pin 6438a of the operating element 6438 is inserted into the sliding groove 5439a1 of the one-way clutch 5439, the position of the connecting pin 6438a changes. The switching plate 5439 a of the clutch 5439 can be displaced.

  Further, a torsion spring (not shown) is disposed between the through hole 6438 b and the insertion pin 6434 a 2. One end of the torsion spring is locked to the back side base member 434 a, and the other end is locked to the operating element 6438. As a result, the operating element 6438 is always urged in the right rotation direction about the through hole 6438 b in the front view. As a result, in a state in which no external force is applied to the operation element 6438, the one-way clutch 5439 can always be in a driving state (a state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430 is transmitted to the rotation of the rotation member 5435).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85, the operation of the one-way clutch 5439 will be described.

  FIG. 84 (a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 6400 in a state before the switching plate 5439a is operated, and FIG. 84 (b) is a slide unit in the state after the switching plate 5439a is operated It is the model which looked at 6400 from the front. FIG. 85 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 6400 taken along line LXXXVa-LXXXVa in FIG. 84 (a), and FIG. 85 (b) is a slide unit 6400 taken along line LXXXVb-LXXXVb in FIG. 84 (a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. In FIG. 84, in order to facilitate understanding, the one-way clutch 5439 and the operating element 6438 are shown by broken lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 84 (a) and 84 (b), the base member 6410 is provided with a projection 6411a at the slide end of the left slide member 6430 that protrudes from the bottom surface of the projecting plate 411 of the base member 6410. .

  As shown in FIGS. 84 (a) and 85 (a), when no external force is applied to the operating element 6438, the longitudinal direction of the operating element 6438 matches the longitudinal direction of the base member 434. Will be placed.

  In this case, the roller 5439 d of the one-way clutch 5439 is disposed at the end of the cam surface, and is engaged with the wedge formed between the inner ring 5439 c and the outer ring 5439 b. Thereby, the one-way clutch 5439 is brought into the driving state. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 84 (b) and 85 (b), the left slide member 6430 is slide-displaced, and the other end of the operating element 6438 disposed on the left slide member 6430 just before the end of slide displacement. The side surface of the side (upper side) in the right side in front view abuts on the projection 6411 a of the base member 6410.

  After the side surface of the operating element 6438 and the base member 6410 abut, when the left slide member 6430 is further moved to the terminal end, the operating element 6438 is displaced in the left rotational direction centering on the through hole 6438b.

  Accordingly, the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 connected to the connection pin 6438a of the operating element 6438 is rotated, and the driving state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched.

  When the switching plate 5439a is switched, the roller 5439d is disposed at the neutral position of the cam surface and separates from the meshing space of the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is brought into the neutral idling state. As a result, it is possible to form a state in which the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is not transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

  Therefore, by applying an external force to the operation element 6438 in accordance with the amount of displacement of the left slide member 6430, it is possible to form a state permitting transmission of the rotation of the one-way clutch 5439 and a state cutting off the transmission of the rotation. it can.

  That is, the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430 is converted to the rotational movement of the rotary member 5435, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430 and the first drive state in which the rotary member 5435 is rotated with the displacement of the left slide member 6430 When stopping the rotation, the one-way clutch 5439 is changed from a state allowing the transmission of rotation to a state blocking it, so that the rotation of the rotating member 5435 is continued by the inertia force in a state in which the left slide member 6430 is stopped. The third drive state can be formed.

  Thus, the first drive state and the third drive state can be formed, and the number of combinations of the movement (linear movement and rotational movement) of the left slide member 6430 and the rotation member 5435 can be increased. As a result, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, since the operation of the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is performed by the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430, there is no need to arrange a motor or the like for switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439 on the left slide member 6430. The weight of the left slide member 6430 can be reduced by a minute. As a result, the load on the drive means for driving the left slide member 6430 can be reduced.

  A seventh embodiment will now be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89. First, a slide unit 7400 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 7400 in the seventh embodiment. In the following, the left slide member 7430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 7450 will be omitted.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation member 435 and the rotation member 455 are rotated according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 7430 and the right slide member in the seventh embodiment 7450 is switched to a state of rotating the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5455 according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 and the right slide member 7450 by switching the one-way clutch 5439 and to a non-rotation state. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those in the above embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 86, on the back surface of the base member 7410, a recessed groove 7417 is formed in which a second slide member 7460 described later is disposed.

  The second slide member 7460 is held and held by a rack gear 7461 having a gear tooth surface formed on the upper surface, two plate members 7462 arranged opposite to the front and rear side surfaces of the rack gear 7461, and two plate members 7462 A shaft portion 7463, a roller 7465 disposed in a state where the shaft portion 7463 is inserted, and a drive gear 7464 disposed above the rack gear 7461 and meshing with the tooth surface of the rack gear 7461. Ru.

  The rack gear 7461 is formed in a laterally long rectangular shape in a front view, and a gear tooth surface 7461 a is formed on the upper surface side. Moreover, the stop hole 7461b penetrated in the front-back direction is formed in the approximate center position of the longitudinal direction in front view.

  The plate member 7462 is a member for holding a roller 7465 to be described later, and is formed in a plate-like body having a rectangular shape in a front view. In the plate member 7462, a sliding groove 7462a located on the rack gear 7461 side is longitudinally recessed in the vertical direction on the side surface, and a through hole 7462b is formed through the sliding groove 7462a in the front-rear direction above the sliding groove 7462a.

  The through hole 7462 b is a through hole for fastening to the rack gear 7461. The plate member 7462 is fixed by inserting a screw (not shown) into the through hole 7462 b and fastening the screw with the fixing hole 7461 b of the rack gear 7461.

  The shaft portion 7463 is a cylindrical member inserted into the inside of the sliding groove 7462 a of the plate member 7462, and has an outer diameter smaller than the width dimension of the sliding groove 7462 a. Further, the axial dimension is formed larger than the thickness (front-rear direction) dimension of the rack gear 7461.

  As a result, when the shaft portion 7463 is sandwiched and held by the two plate members 7462, the shaft portion 7463 can be slid and displaced in the vertical direction by the amount the sliding groove 7462a is recessed in the vertical direction. .

  The roller 7465 has a cylindrical outer shape, and an axial hole penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at the axial center thereof. The roller 7465 has the shaft portion 7463 inserted into the shaft hole and is disposed between the two plate members 7462.

  The drive gear 7464 is a member for meshing with the tooth surface 7461a of the rack gear 7461 to apply a drive force to slide the rack gear 7461 in the left-right direction, and is connected to a motor 7466 described later.

  The motor 7466 is a member for applying a driving force to the rack gear 7461, and is attached to the motor mounting plate 7467 in a state where the shaft of the motor 7466 is inserted through the through hole 7467a of the motor mounting plate 7467.

  Therefore, when a rotational force is applied to the motor 7466, the drive gear 7464 connected to the motor 7466 is rotated, and the rack gear 7461 can be slid and displaced in the left-right direction.

  In the plate member 7462 disposed forward of the two plate members 7462, a decoration (display of a symbol or the like) is provided on a plane disposed on the front side thereof. As a result, the second slide member 7460 can slide and displace from a position overlapping the left slide member 7430 in the front-rear direction to a position not overlapping with the left slide member 7430, thereby making it possible for the player to visually recognize the decorative surface.

  Next, state transition of the left slide member 7430 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89. FIG. 87 to 89 are schematic views of the slide unit 7400 viewed from the front.

  First, the left slide member 7430 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 87, the left slide member 7430 is the movable range of the switching member 5439a of the left slide member 6430 and the one-way clutch 5439 in the sixth embodiment, the position before displacement of the operating element 6438 and the through hole 6438b and the insertion pin. The only difference is that the biasing spring is not disposed between 6434a2 and 6434a2, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the operation of the one-way clutch 5439 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, as shown in FIG. 87A, in the state before the left slide member 7430 slides, the connection pin 6438a of the operating element 6438 is disposed on the left side in the left-right direction with respect to the through hole 6438b. That is, the other end side (upper end side) of the operating element 6438 is disposed to be inclined to the right.

  In this case, the roller 5439 d of the one-way clutch 5439 is disposed at the end of the cam surface, and is engaged with the wedge formed between the inner ring 5439 c and the outer ring 5439 b. Thereby, the one-way clutch 5439 is brought into the driving state. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

  Therefore, while sliding the left slide member 7430 to a position where the other end side (upper end side) of the operating element 6438 abuts against the roller 7465 (a position shown in FIG. 87B), the left slide member 7430 is moved. The rotary member 5435 can be rotationally moved with the displacement of.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), when the operating element 6438 contacts the roller 7465, the other end side (upper end side) of the operating element 6438 is a side surface upper than the axial center of the roller 7465. Abut. Therefore, since the other end side (upper end side) of the operation element 6438 is inclined to the right, when the left slide member 7430 is further slide-displaced, the operation of the operation element is performed while biasing the roller 7465 downward by the slide displacement. 6438 can be rotated about the through hole 6438b as an axis.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (a), when the longitudinal direction of the operating element 6438 is rotated to a position substantially coincident with the longitudinal direction of the second member, the other end side (upper end side) of the operating element 6438 is a roller 7465 Contacts the side surface of the roller 7465 positioned at substantially the same height as the axial center of the roller.

  Therefore, when the left slide member 7430 is further slide-displaced, it is possible to rotate the operation element 6438 around the through hole 6438 b as an axial center while biasing the roller 7465 rightward by the slide displacement.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (b), when the other end side (upper end side) of the operating element 6438 is arranged to be inclined to the right, the connection pin 6438a of the operating element 6438 is arranged on the left side of the through hole 6438b. Be done.

  Accordingly, the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 connected to the connection pin 6438a of the operating element 6438 is rotated, and the driving state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched.

  Thus, the roller 5439 d of the one-way clutch 5439 is disposed at the neutral position of the cam surface, and is separated from the meshing space of the inner ring 5439 c and the outer ring 5439 b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is brought into the neutral idling state. As a result, it is possible to form a state in which the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is not transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

  In addition, when the other end side (upper end side) of the operating element 6438 is rotated to the left side, the other end side (upper end side) of the operating element 6438 is in contact with a side surface lower than the axial center of the roller 7465 Contact. Therefore, since the other end side (upper end side) of the operation element 6438 is inclined to the left, when the left slide member 7430 is further slide-displaced, the roller 7465 can be urged upward by the slide displacement.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 89 (a), the shaft portion 7463 having the roller 7465 inserted therein is slidingly displaced upward. As a result, since the roller 7465 is positioned above the operating element 6438, the operating element 6438 can be displaced to the right of the roller 7465. Therefore, the left slide member 7430 can be displaced to the position shown in FIG. 89 (b).

  Further, as described above, the rotation of the rotating member 5435 when the left slide member 7430 is positioned to the right of the roller 7465 is in a state in which the one-way clutch 5439 blocks the rotation transmission. Can be maintained by the inertial force of the rotation of the rotating member 5435 when the sliding displacement is caused.

  Therefore, by applying an external force to the operation element 6438 in accordance with the displacement amount of the left slide member 7430, it is possible to form a state in which transmission of the rotation of the one-way clutch 5439 is permitted and a state in which the transmission of the rotation is shut off. it can.

  That is, the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 is converted to the rotational movement of the rotation member 5435, and the first drive state in which the rotation member 5435 rotates with the displacement of the left slide member 7430, and the displacement of the left slide member 7430 In the stopped state, rotation of the rotation member 5435 can form a third drive state in which the inertia force continues.

  Therefore, the first drive state and the third drive state can be formed, and the number of combinations of the movement (linear movement and rotational movement) of the left slide member 7430 and the rotation member 5435 can be increased. As a result, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  Also, in this case, by stopping the inertia force in the third drive state (for example, waiting until the time when the inertia force does not act), the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 is not affected by the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435, A second driving state can be formed in which the left slide member 7430 is slide-displaced while the rotation member 5435 is not rotated.

  Therefore, the first drive state, the second drive state, and the third drive state can be formed, and the number of combinations of motion (linear motion and rotational motion) of the left slide member 7430 and the rotation member 5435 can be increased. . As a result, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, since the operation of the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is performed by the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430, it is not necessary to dispose a motor or the like for switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439 to the left slide member 7430. The weight of the left slide member 7430 can be reduced by a minute. As a result, the load of the drive means for driving the left slide member 7430 can be reduced.

  Further, in the seventh embodiment, since the second slide member 7460 is disposed displaceably along the slide direction of the left slide member 7430, the position at which the state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched, that is, the rotation of the rotation member 5435 is It is possible to change the position at which the permitted state is changed from the permitted state to the restricted state or from the allowed state to the restricted state. Thereby, when the left slide member 7430 is slide-displaced, the rotation position of the rotation member 5435 is changed, or the position at which the rotation member 5435 is rotated with the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 stopped. It can change according to a game state etc. As a result, a rendering effect can be heightened.

  Also, in addition to the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430, the second slide member 7460 is also capable of slide displacement, so that the rendering effect can be enhanced by that amount, and such second slide member 7460 is displaced by displacement. Since the role of effecting and the role of switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439 are both used, it is not necessary to separately provide means for changing the position at which the state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Further, in the seventh embodiment, since the second slide member 7460 is disposed displaceably along the slide direction of the left slide member 7430, the state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched by displacing the second slide member 7460. be able to.

  That is, from the state where the second slide member 7460 is disposed in one of the left and right directions of the left slide member 7430, with the left slide member 7430 being stopped, the second slide member 7460 is moved to the other in the left and right direction. By displacing, the state of the one-way clutch 5439 can be switched.

  Therefore, without sliding the left slide member 7430, the state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 is converted to the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435, and along with the displacement of the left slide member 7430. The first drive state in which the rotation member 5435 is rotated and the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 are not affected by the rotational movement of the rotation member 5435, and the left slide member 7430 is slide-displaced while the rotation member 5435 is not rotated. Two driving states can be formed.

  Next, a slide unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 95.

  First, the overall configuration of the slide unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 90 to FIG. FIG. 90 is a front view of the slide unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 91 is an exploded front perspective view of slide unit 8400. FIG. FIG. 92 is an exploded rear perspective view of slide unit 8400. FIG. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those in the above embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 90 to 92, the slide unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment includes a base member 8410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300, and a slide rod disposed on the base member 8410. Mainly provided with a member 420, a left slide member 8430 slidably coupled to the slide rod member 420, and a drive mechanism for slidingly displacing the left slide member 8430 along the slide rod member 420. .

  The base member 8410 is formed in a laterally long rectangular shape in a front view, and the sliding rod member 420 is disposed on the front side along the longitudinal direction. Further, a projecting plate portion 411 is formed on the base member 8410, and a base side rack gear 8412 is formed on the upper surface side of the projecting plate portion 411.

  The base side rack gear 8412 is a rack gear extended along the longitudinal direction of the sliding rod member 420, and the first side pinion gear 432 and the second side pinion gear 8433d of the left sliding member 8430 are engaged with each other.

  The left slide member 8430 is provided with a first member 8431 having a rectangular shape in a front view, a base member 8431b having a rectangular shape in a front view which is suspended by the first member 8431, and a first member 8431 rotatably disposed. Front-view rectangular vertically-long second member 8433 having a side pinion gear 432 and a second-side rack gear 433a with which the first side pinion gear 432 is engaged, and a front-view rectangular vertically-long base member depending on the second member 8433 8434, a third member 8445 having a rectangular shape in a front view and having a second side pinion gear 8433d rotatably disposed in the second member 8433, and a third side rack gear 8445a with which the second side pinion gear 8433d is meshed And a base member 8446 having a rectangular shape in a front view rectangular shape and hanging down on the third member 8445.

  The first member 8431 is provided with a slide hole having an inner peripheral surface of a circular cross section extended along the longitudinal direction of the first member 8431, and the slide rod member 420 is inserted through the slide hole. In the axial direction of the sliding rod 420. That is, the first member 8431 is slidably disposed on the base member 8410 via the slide rod member 420.

  The first side pinion gear 432 is meshed with the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410. Therefore, when the first member 8431 is slidingly displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated by receiving an action from the base side rack gear 8412 in accordance with the sliding displacement.

  The second member 8433 is disposed on the first member 8431 so as to be displaceable, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted through the sliding hole at the upper end, thereby being displaced relative to the first member 8431. , And can slide along the slide rod member 420.

  In this case, a second side rack gear 433a is engraved on the lower surface of the second member 8433. Thus, the second member 8433 is displaced relative to the first member 8431.

  The second side pinion gear 8433 d is meshed with the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410. Therefore, when the second member 8433 is slidingly displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the second side pinion gear 8433d is rotated by receiving an action from the base side rack gear 8412 in accordance with the sliding displacement.

  The third member 8445 is disposed on the second member 8433 so as to be displaceable, and the slide rod member 420 is inserted into the slide hole at the upper end, thereby being displaced relative to the second member 8433. , And can slide along the slide rod member 420.

  In this case, a third side rack gear 8445a is engraved on the lower surface of the third member 8445. In addition, the third side rack gear 8445a is meshed with the second side pinion gear 8433d. Therefore, as described above, when the second side pinion gear 8433d is rotated with the displacement of the second member 8433, the third member 8445 is a second member by receiving the action from the second side pinion gear 8433d. It is displaced relative to 8433.

  That is, since the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the second side rack gear 433 a of the second member 8433, the second member 8433 is A driving force associated with the linear movement of the first member 8431 and a driving force associated with the rotational movement of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slid relative to the base member 8410, the second member 8433 is slid relative to the base member 8410 in a state in which the speed of the second member 8433 is higher than that of the first member 8431. Can.

  Further, since the second side pinion gear 8433d of the second member 8433 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the third side rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445, the third member 8445 is The driving force associated with the linear movement of the second member 8433 and the driving force associated with the rotational movement of the second side pinion gear 8433 d can be applied. As a result, when the second member 8433 is slid relative to the base member 8410, the third member 8445 is slid relative to the base member 8410 in a state in which the third member 8445 is accelerated more than the second member 8433. Can.

  Next, the operation of slide unit 8400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 and 94. 93 (a) to 93 (c) are schematic views of the slide unit 8400 as viewed from the front, and the transition state when the left slide member 8430 is slide-displaced is illustrated. 94 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 8400 taken along line XCIVa-XCIVa of FIG. 93 (a), and FIG. 94 (b) is a view taken along line XCIVb-XCIVb of FIG. 93 (b). FIG. 94 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view, and FIG. 94 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 8400 taken along line XCIVc-XCIVc in FIG. 93 (c). In FIG. 93, a state in which the cover member 416, the guide member 419, and the drive motor 475 are removed is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 93 (a) and 94 (a), when the left slide member 8430 is disposed at the retracted position, the second member 8433 is disposed inside the first member 8431, and the second member 8433 is disposed. The third member 8445 is disposed inside the

  In this case, the base member 8434 suspended to the second member 8433 is located in front of the base member 8431 b suspended to the first member 8431, and the base member 8446 of the third member 8445 is disposed forward to the base member 8434 Be done.

  That is, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434 and the base member 8446 are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction (in a state of being overlapped in the front-rear direction) (see FIG. 5A). Therefore, when the first member 8431, the second member 8433 and the third member 8445 slide, respectively, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434 and the base member 8446 can slide without interference. . In addition, the space for disposing the first member 8431, the second member 8433, and the third member 8445 can be suppressed to achieve downsizing.

  Furthermore, since the space for disposing the first member 8431, the second member 8433 and the third member 8445 can be reduced, the effect area K (FIG. 93A, the base member 8410) is formed in the center of the game board. (The overlapping region of the lower side and the left side of the base member 8446) can be secured.

  When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 91) is driven in the positive direction from the state where the left slide member 8430 is disposed at the retracted position, the left pinion gear 473 connected to the left drive motor 475 is rotated. The left drive gear 471 engaged with the pinion gear 473 is rotated.

  When the left drive gear 471 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first rack gear 431a of the first member 8431 meshing with the left drive gear 471, and the first member 8431 is slide-displaced.

  In this case, as described above, the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 8433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 8410 are disposed facing each other in a parallel posture, and the second side rack gear 433a and the base side Since the first side pinion gear 432 axially supported by the first member 8431 in a state of being meshed with both of the rack gears 412 is interposed, the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the second side rack gear of the second member 8433 Since the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is engaged with both the 433 a and the 433 a, the driving force accompanying the linear movement of the first member 8431 and the rotation of the first side pinion gear 432 with respect to the second member 8433 The driving force associated with the exercise can be given. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slid relative to the base member 8410, the second member 8433 is slid relative to the base member 8410 in a state in which the speed of the second member 8433 is higher than that of the first member 8431. Can.

  This shortens the time required for sliding the first member 8431 and the second member 8433 of the slide unit 8400 to the effect area K (blocked state) or retracting from the effect area K (opened state), thereby blocking It is possible to quickly switch between the state and the open state.

  In addition, the third rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445 and the base rack gear 412 of the base member 8410 are disposed in parallel to face each other, and both the third rack gear 8445a and the base rack gear 412 have teeth. Since the second side pinion gear 8433d pivotally supported by the second member 8433 in a combined state is interposed, both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the third side rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445 are Since the second side pinion gear 8433d of the second member 8433 is meshed, the driving force accompanying the linear movement of the second member 8433 and the driving force accompanying the rotational movement of the second side pinion gear 8433d are applied to the third member 8445. It can be granted. As a result, when the second member 8433 is slid relative to the base member 8410, the third member 8445 is slid relative to the base member 8410 in a state in which the third member 8445 is accelerated more than the second member 8433. Can.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), the second member 8433 can slide relative to the first member 8431. In addition, the third member 8445 can slide relative to the second member 8433.

  This shortens the time required for sliding the second member 8433 and the third member 8445 of the slide unit 8400 to the effect area K (blocked state) or retracting from the effect area K (opened state). It is possible to quickly switch between the state and the open state.

  As shown in FIGS. 93 (c) and 94 (c), in a state where the left slide member 8430 is disposed at the extended position, the second member 8433 leaves a part of the overlap from the inside of the first member 8431. The third member 8445 is disposed so as to protrude from the inner side of the second member 8433 leaving a partial overlap.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the side surface of the left side in a front view of the base member 8431b depending on the first member 8431 and the side surface of the right side in a front view of the base member 8434 depending on the second member 8433 It is arranged at the same position. Further, the side surface on the left side in the front view of the base member 8434 suspended to the second member 8433 and the side surface on the right side in the front view of the substrate member 8446 suspended to the third member 8445 are arranged at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction Ru.

  That is, no gap is formed between the base member and the base member. Therefore, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 can be disposed in the entire region of the effect area K.

  Next, a slide unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, the overall configuration of the slide unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96. FIG. FIG. 95 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 96 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member 9430. FIG.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the base member 434 is suspended to the second member 433 has been described, but in the slide unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment, the base member 9431b is suspended to the first member 431, and the second member 8433 is And a base member 9434 suspended therefrom. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those in the above embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the slide unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment includes a base member 8410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300, and a slide rod disposed on the base member 8410. It mainly comprises a member 420, a left slide member 9430 slidably coupled to the slide rod member 420, and a drive mechanism for slidingly displacing the left slide member 9430 along the slide guide groove.

  The left slide member 9430 is provided with a first member 8431 having a rectangular shape in a front view rectangular shape, a base member 9431 b having a rectangular shape in a front view rectangular shape suspended from the first member 8431, and a first member 8431 rotatably disposed on the first member 8431. Front-view rectangular vertically-long second member 9433 having a side pinion gear 432 and a second-side rack gear 433a with which the first side pinion gear 432 is engaged, and a front-view rectangular vertically-long base member depending on the second member 9433 Mainly provided with 9434, a slide rail 9443 disposed on the base member 9434, a base member 9446 having a rectangular shape in a front view rectangular shape connected to the slide rail 9443 and a thread wire 9444 which can be freely deformed. Is configured.

  The first member 8431 is provided with a slide hole having an inner peripheral surface of a circular cross section extended along the longitudinal direction of the first member 8431, and the slide rod member 420 is inserted through the slide hole. In the axial direction of the sliding rod 420. That is, the first member 8431 is slidably disposed on the base member 9410 via the slide rod member 420.

  The base member 9431 b is formed with a recessed groove recessed from the back side on the side surface on the upper side on the upper side in the front view left side, and a columnar connecting shaft 9431 b 1 extending upward and downward inside the recessed groove. Formed (see FIG. 98).

  The second member 9433 is disposed displaceably to the first member 8431, and the slide rod member 420 is inserted into the slide hole at the upper end, thereby being displaced relative to the first member 8431. , And can slide along the slide rod member 420.

  In this case, the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 9412 of the base member 9410 and the second side rack gear 433 a of the second member 9433. The driving force associated with the linear movement of the first member 8431 and the driving force associated with the rotational movement of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slid relative to the base member 8410, the second member 9433 is slid relative to the base member 8410 in a state in which the speed of the second member 9433 is higher than that of the first member 8431. Can.

  The base member 9434 is formed with a notch 9434c in which the front right side surface on the upper end side is cut away in the front-rear direction, and a disk-shaped roller 9434d is disposed rotatably inside the notch 9434c. In the base member 9434, a slide rail 9443 to be described later is disposed on the front surface on the upper end side in a state in which the expansion and contraction direction is the left and right direction.

  The roller 9434d is a member for assisting the displacement of the wire 9444 described later, and the position in the vertical direction is arranged substantially at the same position as the connecting shaft 9431b1 of the first member 8431.

  The slide rail 9443 is a member for slidably holding the third member, and is formed of two plates, and the plates are formed slidably. In addition, the slide rail 9443 has a coil spring (not shown) disposed therein, and is biased in the direction in which the plates are separated from each other.

  The base member 9437 is disposed slidably with respect to the second member 9433 by the rear surface side of the base member 9437 being fastened to the slide rail 9443.

  In the base member 9437, a concave groove recessed from the back side is formed on the side surface on the right side in the front view of the upper end portion, and a cylindrical connecting shaft 9446a extending in the vertical direction is formed inside the concave groove. Be done. Further, the connecting shaft 9446 a is disposed at a position substantially in the same direction as the connecting shaft 9431 b 1 of the first member 8431 in the vertical direction.

  The wire 9444 is a member for displacing the base member 9437 in accordance with the displacement of the first member 8431 and the second member 9433, and is formed of a piano wire, fishing line or the like. One end of the wire 9444 is connected to the connection shaft 9431 b 1 of the first member, and the other end is connected to the connection shaft 9446 a of the third member 9533. The wire 9444 is connected between the base member 9431 b of the first member 8431 and the base member 9434 of the second member 9433, and the roller 9434 d of the second member 9433 is connected to one end of the wire 9444. It arrange | positions in the state which the side and one part contact | abutted (refer FIG. 9).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98, the operation of the slide unit 9400 will be described. 97 (a) to 97 (c) are front views of the slide unit 9400, and the transition state when the left slide member 9430 is slide-displaced is illustrated. FIG. 98 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 9400 taken along line XCVIIIa-XCVIIIa of FIG. 97 (a), and FIG. 98 (b) is a view taken along line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb of FIG. 97 (b). FIG. 98 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a slide unit 9400 taken along line XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc in FIG. 97 (c). In FIG. 93, a state in which the cover member 416, the guide member 419, and the drive motor 475 are removed is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and 98 (a), when the left slide member 9430 is disposed at the retracted position, the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 are different in the longitudinal direction. Will be placed. Therefore, the base member 9431 b, the base member 9446, and the base member 9446 can slide without interference. The space for disposing the base member 9431 b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 can be reduced to achieve miniaturization.

  Furthermore, since the space for disposing the base member 9431 b, the base member 9434 and the base member 9446 can be reduced, the effect area K formed in the center of the game board can be secured.

  When the left slide member 9430 is disposed at the retracted position, the biasing force of the slide rail disposed between the base member 9434 and the base member 9446 causes the base member 9446 to move leftward relative to the base member 9434 The sliding force acts, but the wire 9444 is connected to the connecting shaft 9431b1 and the connecting shaft 9438, and the connecting path is between the base member 9431b and the base member 9434. 9446 can be prevented from sliding displacement with respect to the base member 9434 in the left direction.

  That is, by setting the length of the wire 9444 to the length in the left-right direction of the base member 9434 and the dimensions in the thickness direction of the base member 9431 b, the base member 9434 and the base member 9446, the base member A state in which the base member 9431 b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 overlap in the front-rear direction can be maintained.

  When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 95) is driven in the positive direction from the state where the left slide member 9430 is disposed at the retracted position, the left pinion gear 473 connected to the left drive motor 475 is rotated and the left pinion gear The left drive gear 471 connected to 473 is rotated.

  When the left drive gear 471 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first rack gear 431a of the first member 8431 meshing with the left drive gear 471, and the first member 8431 is slide-displaced.

  In this case, as described above, the first side pinion gear 432 supported by the first member 8431 in a state of being meshed with both the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 9433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 8410. Can be applied to the second member 9433. The driving force associated with the linear motion of the first member 8431 and the driving force associated with the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied to the second member 9433. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slid relative to the base member 8410, the second member 9433 is slid relative to the base member 8410 in a state in which the speed of the second member 9433 is higher than that of the first member 8431. Can.

  This shortens the time required for sliding the first member 8431 and the second member 9433 of the slide unit 9400 to the effect area K (blocked state) or retracting from the effect area K (opened state), thereby blocking the screen. It is possible to quickly switch between the state and the open state.

  Further, in this case, the positions of the base member 9431 b and the base member 9434 in the front-rear direction are shifted. That is, the overlap dimension of the base member 9431 b and the base member 9434 in the front-rear direction is displaced from the overlap dimension L3 shown in FIG. 9A to the overlap dimension L4 shown in FIG.

  Therefore, the wire 9444 can be loosened as much as the overlap dimension of the base member 9431 b and the base member 9434 in the front-rear direction is displaced from L3 to L4 (L3> L4). Therefore, the base member 9446 can be slide-displaced with respect to the base member 9434 by the biasing force of the slide rail 9443 as much as the wire 9444 is loosened. As a result, when the base member 9431 b is slide-displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the base member 9446 can be slide-displaced with respect to the base member 9434 in a state in which the speed is higher than that of the base member 9434.

  Thus, the time required for sliding the base member 9434 and the base member 9446 of the slide unit 9400 to the effect area K (shielded state) or retracting from the effect area K (opened state) is shortened, and the shield state is obtained. It is possible to quickly switch the open state.

  As shown in FIGS. 93 (c) and 94 (c), when the left slide member 9430 is disposed at the extended position, the side surface of the base member 9431b on the left side in front view and the right side of the base member 9434 in front view The side surfaces are disposed at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. Further, the side surface on the left side in a front view of the base member 9434 and the side surface on the right side in a front view of the base member 9446 are arranged at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction.

  That is, no gap is formed between the base member and the base member. Therefore, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 can be disposed in the entire region of the effect area K.

  In the ninth embodiment, the slide displacement of the base member 9446 can be performed by the slide rails 9443 and the wire 9444. Therefore, as in the eighth embodiment, the third member 8445 is disposed on the upper portion of the base member 8446. There is no need to Therefore, since the third member 8445 is not disposed, the distance dimension in the longitudinal direction of the base member 8410 and the sliding rod member 420 can be made smaller, and the space for disposing the base member 8410 is suppressed to miniaturize. Can be

  Next, referring to FIGS. 99 to 102, a lifting unit 800 in the tenth embodiment will be described.

  First, the overall configuration of the elevation unit 10800 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. FIG. 99 (a) is a front view of the lifting unit 10800 in the tenth embodiment, FIG. 99 (b) is a rear view of the lifting unit 10800, and FIG. 99 (c) is a side view of the lifting unit 10800. It is. FIG. 100 is an exploded front perspective view of the lifting and lowering unit 10800. As shown in FIG.

  In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the movable units (the slide unit 400, the projecting unit 700, and the elevating unit 800) disposed in the operation unit 200 are mutually disconnected at the combined (projected) position. In the tenth embodiment, the movable units (the slide unit 400, the projecting unit 700, and the elevating unit 10800) disposed in the operation unit 10200 are connected to each other in the combined state. The same symbols are attached to the part of and the description is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the lifting and lowering unit 10800 in the tenth embodiment is formed to include a lifting and lowering member 10820 disposed on the base member 810 so as to be capable of lifting and lowering. The elevation member 10820 is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in a front view, and mainly includes a protrusion 821 that protrudes to the back side and an engagement portion 10822 that protrudes from the back side.

  The engaging portion 10822 is a rectangular protrusion which is engaged with the respective rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700 when the operating unit 200 is displaced in the combined state. It protrudes from the back side of the 10820. The engaging portion 10822 has its left-right dimension set substantially the same as or slightly larger than the distance between the opposing rotating members 435, 455 in the combined state, and is larger than the rotating members 435, 455 of the slide unit 400. It is formed in the state protruded to the back side. Therefore, when the operation unit 200 is displaced in the combined state, the respective rotation members 435 and 455 can be brought into contact with the engagement portion 10822 (see FIG. 102A).

  Further, the engaging portion 10822 is formed in a rectangular shape so as to protrude from the rear surface side of the raising and lowering member 10820, and includes a through hole 10822a penetrating in the direction of gravity. The through hole 10822 a is a member through which the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700 is inserted, and is formed in an opening larger than the tip of the projecting member 735 in top view. Accordingly, when the operation unit 200 is displaced in the combined state, the tip end of the projecting member 735 can be inserted into the through hole 10822a (see FIG. 102B).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102, operation unit 10200 in the combined state will be described. 101 is an operation unit 10200 in the combined state, FIG. 102 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit 10200 along line CIIa-CIIa in FIG. 101, and FIG. 102 (b) is CIIb- in FIG. It is a schematic cross section of operation unit 10200 in a CIIb line.

  As shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are in contact with the side surface of the engaging portion 10822 in the lifting unit 10800 (lifting member 10820) of the operation unit 10200 in the combined state. (See FIG. 102 (a)).

  In the rear view, the engaging portion 10822 is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape whose width dimension is reduced as it goes downward. That is, the left and right (left and right in FIG. 99) side surfaces of the engaging portion 10822 are formed to be inclined toward the center in the left-right direction as they go downward.

  Further, as described above, the projecting member 735 is inserted into the through hole 10822 a of the engaging portion 10822. In this case, on the back surface side of the projecting member 735, an inclined portion 10735a whose projecting distance is formed to be larger toward the lower side is formed, and the inner wall of the through hole 10822a and the inclined portion 10735a are formed to be contactable. .

  Therefore, since the elevation unit 10800, the slide unit 400, and the projection unit 700 can be brought into contact (connected) by the engagement portion 10822, each movable unit (elevation unit 10800, slide in the combined state) It is possible to suppress the occurrence of misalignment in the arrangement of the unit 400 and the projecting unit 700). As a result, since the player can be given a sense of unity of the movable units in the combined state, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In addition, since the movable units are connected to each other, the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820 can be transmitted to the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700.

  More specifically, by causing the drive motor 891 for driving the elevating member 10820 to repeatedly exert a relatively small rotational drive in a reciprocating manner, the elevating member 10820 is vertically displaced (oscillated) by a relatively small distance.

  In this case, each of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 is in contact with the left and right sides (left and right in FIG. 99) of the engaging portion 10822. The side in contact with the joint portion 10822 can be displaced outward in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 101) of the operation unit 10200.

  At the combined (projected) position, a rotational moment is applied to the rotating members 435 and 455 in such a direction that the side in contact with the engaging portion 10822 by the center of gravity is displaced inward in the left-right direction of the operation unit 10200 . Therefore, the rotating members 435 and 455 that are rotationally displaced by the displacement of the elevating member 10820 can contact the engaging portion 10822 again by the rotational moment. As a result, it is possible to cause the rotating members 435 and 455 to perform cyclical repetitive displacement by the cyclical repetitive displacement of the elevating member 10820.

  On the other hand, in the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700, since the inclined portion 10735a is in contact with the through hole 10822a of the engaging portion 10822, periodical and repetitive displacement is given to the lifting and lowering member 10820. The inner surface of the through hole 10822 a of the engaging portion 10822 slides on the inclined surface of the Therefore, the distance by which the protruding member 735 is pushed forward (left direction in FIG. 102B) is periodically displaced by the inclination of the inclined surface 10735a. As a result, the lift member 10820 can be periodically and repeatedly displaced by causing the lift member 10820 to be periodically and repeatedly displaced. Therefore, the drive energy can be suppressed as much as it is not necessary to apply a drive force to the other drive motors 763, 475, 476.

  That is, in the combined (projected) position, the rotating member 730 and the raising and lowering member 10820 formed to be able to abut on the rotating members 435 and 455 are provided, and the raising and lowering member 10820 is formed to be capable of periodic displacement. The periodic displacement of the lift member 10820 can be used to periodically displace the rotary member 730 and the rotary members 435 and 455. In other words, it is possible to vibrate the pattern (character) formed by the rotating member 730 (lifting base 720), the rotating members 435 and 455, and the lifting member 10820, thereby enhancing the rendering effect. . Further, in this case, the periodic displacement of the elevation member 10820 is forcibly displaced by bringing the members into contact with each other, and a mechanism for periodically displacing the rotation member 730 and the rotation members 435 and 455 is provided. There is no need. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In addition, since the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 are separated (not in contact) with each other, cyclic displacement can be applied from the elevating member 10820 without being affected by each other. it can. That is, periodical displacement of the lifting and lowering member 10820 can be easily transmitted to the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455, respectively.

  Furthermore, the rotary member 730 and the rotary members 435 and 455 can be periodically displaced (vibrated) in different manners without being associated with each other. That is, since the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 have different configurations (the number of parts and the shape of each part), even if the same vibration is transmitted from the elevating member 10820, they are vibrated in different manners. Therefore, it is possible to vibrate the portion formed by the rotation member 730 and the portion formed by the rotation members 435 and 455 in one character in a different manner. Therefore, the effect can be enhanced by that amount.

  For example, in the case of the tenth embodiment, since the rotating members 435 and 455 are disposed rotatably with respect to the base members 434 and 454, the cyclic displacement of the raising and lowering member 10820 causes a circumferential direction about the rotation axis. The rotational movement of the rotary member 730 can be periodically repeated, and by the inclination of the inclined portion 10735 of the projection member 735, the rotational member 730 can periodically repeat the pushing operation in the front-rear direction.

  Further, since each of the rotating members 435 and 455 and the projecting member 735 are directly connected to the driving source that is displaced (vibrated), the transmission of the driving force can be efficiently performed.

  That is, when the projecting members 735 are connected to the rotating members 435 and 455, the driving force for displacing (vibrating) the projecting members 735 is transmitted through the rotating members 435 and 455. In the tenth embodiment, each of the rotating members 435 and 455 and the projecting member 735 are directly connected to the displacing (oscillating) driving source, thereby efficiently transmitting the driving force. be able to.

  Furthermore, since the elevation member 10820 is disposed at a position where the longitudinal direction position at the combined (projected) position is forward of the rotary member 730 and the rotary members 435 and 455, the elevator member 10820 is disposed closer to the player The lifting member 10820 can be periodically displaced (vibrated). That is, since the elevating member 10820 on the front side, which is easy for the player to visually recognize, vibrates the pattern (character) as a vibration source, it is possible to perform the effect of easily transmitting the force by the vibration to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 103 to 107, the operation unit 200 in the eleventh embodiment will be described.

  First, the driving body 11761 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 (a) is a front view of the drive unit 11761 in a state where the drive unit 11761 in the eleventh embodiment is disposed at the first rotation position, and FIG. 103 (b) is a second rotation of the drive unit 11761. It is a front view of the drive body 761 of the state arrange | positioned in position.

  In the first embodiment, the cam portion of the driving member 761 is lowered so that the interposition member 733 is lowered with the rotation of the driving member 761 for displacing the projecting member 735 to the projecting position (the state of projecting from the rotating member 730). Although the case where 761 b is formed has been described, in the eleventh embodiment, with the rotation of the driving member 11761 for displacing the projecting member 735 to the extended position (the state of projecting from the rotating member 730) The cam portion 11761b of the driving body 11761 is formed so as to ascend. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those in the above embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 103 (a) and 103 (b), the cam portion 11761b of the driving body 11761 of the eleventh embodiment is provided on the sliding wall 733c in a state where the driving body 11761 is disposed at the first rotation position. The cam diameter (radius R3) at the cam surface (position P1) to be abutted is set to the minimum diameter, and the cam abutted to the sliding wall 733c in the state where the drive body 11761 is disposed at the second rotational position The cam diameter (radius R4) in the surface (position P2) is set to the maximum diameter, and the cam diameter is formed so as to continuously increase from the position P1 to the position P2.

  Therefore, the vertical position of the sliding wall 733c (that is, the interposed member 733) is determined from the lowest position from the lowest position when the driving member 761 is rotated from the first rotational position to the second rotational position by the action of the cam portion 761b. When the driver 761 is rotated from the second rotational position to the first rotational position, the actuator 761 is continuously lowered from the lowermost position to the uppermost position.

  Therefore, when the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, the cam diameter in the cam portion 11761b is increased to the position P2 which is the largest diameter, and the interposing member 733 is pushed up to the top Accordingly, the tip of the swinging member 732 is positioned at the top.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107, displacement modes will be described when the movable units (slide unit 400, projecting unit 11700, and lifting unit 800) are displaced into the combined state. 104 to 107 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG. In FIGS. 104 to 107, displacement modes when the movable units are displaced to the combined (projected) state with FIG. 104 as the initial position are sequentially illustrated.

  The operation of each movable unit disposed in the operation unit 200 is switched at three predetermined timings. The tenth embodiment will be described as a first operation, a second operation, and a third operation in order from the initial position shown in FIG.

  In the first operation, the lift base 720 of the protrusion unit 700 is slid and displaced upward with respect to the base member 710. In the second operation, the projection unit 11700 continues its operation from the first operation, the base members 434 and 435 of the slide unit 400 slide to the central portion of the gaming machine 10, and the rotation members 435 and 455 are about 45 degrees. As a result of rotational displacement, the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is slidingly displaced downward. In the third operation, the projecting member 835 of the projecting unit 800 is slidingly displaced upward, and the tip of the rocking member 832 is rotationally displaced upward.

  First, as shown in FIG. 104, the projecting unit 11700 of the operation unit 200 at the initial position is disposed with the tip of the swinging member 732 in proximity to the rotating member 11730. Therefore, the space formed in the central portion of the operation unit 200 in the retracted state can be increased. That is, the arrangement space of each movable unit in the retracted state can be reduced, and the amount of extension at the time of extension operation can be increased.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, in the first operation, displacement of the projecting unit 11700 is performed. As shown in FIG. 105, the displacement of the projecting unit 11700 in the first operation is performed by sliding the elevating base 720 relative to the base member 710. As a result, the lifting base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the projecting unit 700 are displaced to the combined position. The detailed description of the displacement of the elevation base 720 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the second operation is performed by displacing the slide unit 400 and the elevation unit 800. At this time, the slide displacement distances of the left and right slide members 430 and 450 (base members 434 and 454) are set to the same distance.

  By the displacement of the second operation, the lift base 720 of the protrusion unit 11700 moves up and down with respect to the base member 710, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced to the central portion, and the lift member 820 of the lift unit 800 is the base The member 810 is displaced downward. In the third state, the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 1170 is accommodated in the rotating member 11730.

  Further, in this case, the tip end of the swinging member 732 of the rotating member 11730 is at a lowered position close to the rotating member 11730. Therefore, the rotating member 11730 is maintained in the state in which the swinging member 732 is in proximity to the rotating member 11730 until the rotating member 11730 is placed in the combined (projected position), so that the rotating member 11730 rotates in the middle of the displacement to the combined position. Interference of the members 435 and 455 with the swinging member 732 can be suppressed. Therefore, the time until the pattern (character) formed by each movable unit (lifting member 820, rotating members 435 and 455, and rotating member 11730 is formed can be shortened to enhance the rendering effect.

  Furthermore, since the tip of the swinging member 732 is at the lowered position close to the rotating member 11730, the gap between the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 can be increased, so that the rotating member 435, The 455 can be formed large. Therefore, a pattern (characters) formed by combining each member (rotation members 435 and 455, elevation base 11720 (rotation member 11730) and elevation member 820) of the movable units (slide unit 400, projection unit 11700 and elevation unit 800) ) Can be enlarged.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 and FIG. 107, the third operation is performed by displacing the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 11700 (rotating the driving body 11761). That is, only the displacement of the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 11700 is performed at the end of the operation of each operating unit (the slide unit 400 and the lifting unit 800). As described above, the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 11700 can displace the swinging member 732 in accordance with the displacement.

  Therefore, with the displacement of the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 11700, the tip end of the swinging member 732 can be raised in the direction of separating it from the rotating member 11730. Therefore, when the operation unit 200 is brought into the combined (projected) position, the elevating member 820, the rotating members 435 and 455, and the rotating member 11730 (elevating and lowering members are separated by separating the tip of the swinging member 732 from the rotating member 11730). The pattern (character) formed by the base 720) can be made larger.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the embodiments described above, part or all of one embodiment may be replaced or combined with part or all of one or more other embodiments to constitute a gaming machine.

  In the first embodiment, in the slide unit 400, the case where the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is brought into contact (collision) with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) has been described. Instead, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) may be formed in contact with the base member 410.

  In this case, the base member 410 is provided with an abutted portion, and the abutted portion is disposed at one end (end point) of the slide displacement range of the left slide member 430 (first member 431). When the stop position of the left slide member 430 (the first member 431) extends beyond the target position due to the dispersion of the dimensions of the second drive motor and the control of the left drive motor 475, etc. The member abuts (that is, the abutted member functions as a stopper for restricting the displacement of the left slide member 430). The first member 431 whose sliding displacement speed is relatively slower than that of the second member 433 is brought into contact with the abutted member, thereby weakening the impact at the time of the contact and suppressing the breakage of the both. be able to.

  In the first embodiment, in the slide unit 400, in the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) that is the contact object (member against which the first member 431 is in contact) of the left slide member 430 (first member 431). The case has been described where the displacement is a slide displacement (linear motion) and the direction of the displacement is parallel to the direction of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (first member 431), but it is not necessarily limited thereto. The object of contact of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) has at least a displacement component in a direction parallel to the direction of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (first member 431). For example, the form of the displacement is arbitrary. Therefore, the displacement of the contact object may be a rotational movement or a movement along a curve.

  Thus, if the contact object has at least a displacement component in a direction parallel to the direction of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (first member 431), the left slide member 430 (first member 431) When the contact is abutted, the object to be abutted can be retracted (released) by the parallel displacement component described above, and the buffer action can be exhibited accordingly. In addition, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is pushed back by the parallel displacement component described above by displacing the contact target in the opposite direction to the case of the contact, and the initial operation of the left slide member 430 ( The operation of starting slide displacement from the stopped state can be assisted.

  The contact object does not have to be driven by the drive means. Instead of the drive by the drive means or in addition to the drive by the drive means, it is formed to be biased by biasing means (elastic material such as rubber or urethane, spring such as coil spring or torsion spring) Also good. In this case, when the left slide member 430 (the first member 431) is abutted, by elastically deforming the biasing means, it is possible to exert the above-mentioned shock absorbing action and, in addition, to the elastic recovery force. By pushing back the left slide member 430 (first member 431), the initial operation of the left slide member 430 can be assisted.

  In the first embodiment, the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member 640 in the upper combining unit 500 and the lower combining unit 600 are arranged at substantially the same time at the extended position, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not a thing. For example, the upper displacing member 530 is first disposed at the overhanging position, and then the lower displacing member 640 is disposed at the overhanging position (ie, the lower abutment portion 643 is in contact with the upper abutment portion 533 in the stopped state). May be connected). Even in this case, as in the case of the above embodiment, the impact at the time of contact (collision) is weakened by the change (reduction) in the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target of the lower displacement member 640, and rebounding occurs. Can be suppressed.

  In the first embodiment, in the upper uniting unit 500 and the lower uniting unit 600, the upper displacing member which is the contact object of the lower displacing member 640 (the object to which the lower displacing member 640 is abutted (merged) at the extended position). Although the case where 530 is formed to be displaceable has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the contact object may be one that is stopped (not displaceable). Even in this case, as in the case of the above embodiment, the impact at the time of contact (collision) is weakened by the change (reduction) in the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target of the lower displacement member 640, and rebounding occurs. Can be suppressed.

  In the first embodiment, in the lower uniting unit 600, the case where the rotational position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacing member 640 is disposed at the overhanging position has been described as being the overhanging rotational position, It is not limited.

  For example, the rotational position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacement member 640 is disposed at the extended position may be set as the vertical rotational position. That is, the state in which the drive arm 630 is rotated to the vertical rotation position is taken as the extended position of the lower displacement member 640, and the lower displacement member 640 is formed to abut on the upper displacement member 530 at the extended position. It is good.

  Alternatively, the rotational position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacing member 640 is disposed at the extended position is the rotational position between the horizontal rotational position and the vertical rotational position (for example, the drive arm 630 is 80 degrees from the horizontal rotational position). It may be a rotated position). That is, the state where the drive arm 630 is rotated to the rotational position between the horizontal rotational position and the vertical rotational position is taken as the overhanging position of the lower displacing member 640, and at the overhanging position, the lower displacing member 640 is the upper displacing member You may form so that it may be contact | abutted to 530. FIG.

  With any of these configurations, the impact at the time of contact (collision) can be weakened by the change (decrease) in the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target of the lower displacement member 640, and the rebound can be suppressed.

  In the first embodiment, although the lower displacing member 640 is displaced by the rotation of the drive arm 630 in the lower combined unit 600, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and another structure may be employed. good. As another structure, for example, a cylindrical guide pin is protruded from the back surface of the lower displacement member 640 (the back surface at a position corresponding to the drive arm connecting shaft 641), and the guide pin can slide A structure is exemplified in which the lower displacement member 640 is displaced between the retracted position and the extended position by extending the base member 610 and sliding the guide pin along the guide groove.

  In the case of such a structure, the component of the displacement (speed) component of the lower displacement member 640 in the direction toward at least the contact object (the object to which the lower displacement member 640 is abutted (merged) at the extended position) is The shape of the guide groove is set to decrease at least in the vicinity of the overhanging position. Thus, as in the case of the first embodiment, a change (decrease) in the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target of the lower displacement member 640 weakens the impact at the time of contact (collision), and suppresses the rebound. can do.

  In the first embodiment, in the upper combining unit 500 and the lower combining unit 600, only the lower combining unit 600 (lower displacing member 640) is formed so that the velocity component in the direction toward the contact object can be reduced. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and alternatively or additionally, the upper unit 500 (upper displacing member 530) is formed so that the velocity component in the direction toward the contact object can be reduced. It may be done. In this case, the lower combined unit 600 may be vertically inverted and disposed as the upper combined unit 500.

  In the first embodiment, in the upper combining unit 500 and the lower combining unit 600, the drive state (supply power) of the drive motors 543 and 672 is constant (that is, the displacement speed of the rack member 520 and the rotation speed of the drive arm 630 are constant). However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the drive state (supplied power) of the drive motors 543 and 672 may be increased or decreased (ie, the displacement speed of the rack member 520 and the rotation of the drive arm 630). The speed may be increased or decreased. For example, the power supplied to the drive motors 543 and 672 is reduced so that at least the other component of the velocity component of the upper displacing member 530 or the lower displacing member 640 decreases in the vicinity of the overhanging position. An example of reducing the displacement speed of the rack member 520 and the rotational speed of the drive arm 630 is illustrated. The target for reducing the supplied power may be either one or both of the drive motors 543 and 672.

  In the first embodiment, in the projecting unit 700, the position where the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c in the interposed member 733 abuts on the cam surface of the cam portion 761b in the drive member 761 is the rotation of the drive member 761 in front view Although the case of being located on the vertical line passing through the center has been described (see FIG. 40), the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the position where the bottom surface and the cam surface abut is passed through the rotation center of the driving body 761 It may be set at a position separated from the vertical line to one side in the horizontal direction. In this case, when the swinging member 732 and the interposed member 733 are lowered by their own weight, the swinging member 732 and the interposed member are rotated so that the driving member 761 is rotated in the rotation direction for raising the projecting member 735. When the weight of the member 733 is applied to the driving body 761 and the projecting member 735 is lowered by its own weight, the driving body 761 is rotated in the rotational direction to raise the swinging member 732 and the interposing member 733, Preferably, the weight of the swinging member 732 and the interposing member 733 is applied to the driving body 761. This is because the load of the drive motor 763 can be suppressed by utilizing the weight of the swinging member 732 and the interposed member 733 and the protruding member 735.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 is continuously reduced from the maximum diameter of the radius R1 to the minimum diameter of the radius R2 in the projecting unit 700 has been described. It is not limited. For example, the cam diameter in a predetermined range from the position P1 in the state where the driving body 761 is disposed at the first rotational position may be set to the same radius as the radius R1. The central angle of the predetermined range is preferably set corresponding to the angle required for the slide pin 761c of the drive body 761 to pass through the curved portion 735b1 in the slide hole 735b of the projecting member 735. The timing at which the displacement of the swinging member 732 is started can be made coincident with the timing at which the displacement of the projecting member 735 is started, and the effect can be enhanced.

  In the first embodiment, in the projecting unit 700, while one of the swinging member 732 or the projecting member 735 has the upward displacement (velocity) component in the vertical (gravity) direction, the other is vertical (gravity) Has a downward displacement (velocity) component, and one of the rocking member 732 or the projecting member 735 has a downward displacement (velocity) component in the vertical (gravity) direction, the other is vertical (gravity) The case where the load on the drive motor 763 is equalized by forming the component so as to have a displacement (speed) component upward in the direction) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The cam portion 761 b of the drive body 761 The load on the drive motor 763 may be made uniform by combining the cam shape (cam diameter) in the above and the shape (distance from the rotation center of the drive body 761) in the slide hole 735b of the projecting member 735.

  That is, in a region where the load required to exert the action from the cam portion 761b to the sliding wall 733c is relatively large, the load necessary to exert the action from the sliding pin 761c to the sliding hole 735b is The shape of the slide hole 735b is set to be relatively small, and conversely, in a region where a load required to exert an action from the slide pin 761c to the slide hole 735b is relatively large, The shape of the cam portion 761 b is set so that the load required to exert the effect from the cam portion 761 b on the moving wall 733 c becomes relatively small.

  Although the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring 792 acts as a biasing force in a direction to lower the projecting member 735 (slide downward) in the projecting unit 700 in the first embodiment, this is not necessarily the case. However, the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring 792 may be made to act as a biasing force in a direction to move the projecting member 735 upward (slide displacement upward). In this case, the synergetic effect with the curved portion 735b1 in the sliding hole 735b described above can increase the initial speed when the projecting member 735 is slidingly displaced upward from the stopped state.

  In the second embodiment, in the slide unit 2400, the transmission gear 2437a includes the teeth 2437a1 and the bulging portion 2437a2. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the left of the rotation transmission member 2485 is The rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 may be formed with bulging portions whose tooth thickness gradually decreases. Also in this case, similarly to the second embodiment, the meshing can be smoothly performed when switching from the meshed second drive state to the meshed meshed first drive state.

  Furthermore, bulging portions may be formed on both sides of the transmission gear 2437a, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414, which are disposed in the vertical direction. In this case, since the bulging portions are formed in the respective gears engaged with each other when switching from the second drive state to the first drive state, the first drive engaged with the second drive state in which the engagement is released Switching to the state can be performed more smoothly.

  Further, in this case, by forming the bulging portion in which the tooth thickness gradually decreases on both sides of the gear to be meshed, the thickness dimension (the dimension in the gear width direction) of the bulging portion can be formed small.

  In the second and third embodiments, in the slide unit 2400 and the slide unit 3400, when the left slide members 430 and 2430 are displaced from the retracted position (position on the left side of the gaming machine) to the overhanging position (position in the center of the gaming machine) Although the case of displacement from the first drive state to the second drive state has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the left slide members 430, 430 extend from the retracted position (position on the left side of the gaming machine) When it is displaced to the center of the gaming machine, it may be displaced from the second drive state to the first drive state.

  In the fourth embodiment, in the slide unit 4400, the teeth adjacent to the notches 4413a and 4414a of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 are made small by forming small teeth, thereby making the rigidity thereof small. Although the case of raising the height has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the dimension of the tooth width of the teeth adjacent to the notch portions 4413a and 4414a may be formed large to increase the rigidity thereof.

  Also in this case, as in the fourth embodiment, when switching from the third drive state to the first drive state, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 adjacent to the notches 4413a and 4414a are damaged. Can be prevented, and the durability of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 can be improved.

  In the sixth embodiment, in the slide unit 6400, the case where the projection 6411a for giving displacement to the operating element 6438 is formed on the base member 6411 is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. And may be disposed to abut on the operation element 6438. That is, the position at which the protrusion 6411 a is formed is not limited to the base member 6411, and may be formed on a member on the displacement trajectory of the operation element 6438.

  In the sixth and seventh embodiments, in the slide unit 6400 and the slide unit 7400, when the left slide members 6430 and 7430 are displaced from the retracted position (position on the left side of the gaming machine) to the overhanging position (position in the middle of the gaming machine) Although the case where the first drive state is displaced to the second drive state or the third drive state has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the left slide members 6430 and 7430 are retracted positions (positions on the left side of the gaming machine) The second drive state may be displaced from the second drive state to the first drive state when being displaced to the overhanging position (position at the center of the gaming machine).

  In the seventh embodiment, in the slide unit 7400, the roller 7465 for displacing the operation element 6438 is provided on the second slide member 7640. However, the present invention is not limited to this. And the roller 7645 is displaced in the displacement direction of the left slide member 6430 in accordance with the slide displacement of the second slide member 7640 disposed on the base member 7410. It may be.

  In the eighth embodiment, by forming the outer shape of the second side pinion gear 8533d in the slide unit 8400 to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the first side pinion gear 432, the second member 8433 is the first member 8431. The relative displacement distance and the relative displacement distance of the third member 8445 with respect to the second member 8433 are substantially the same, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the outer shape of the second side pinion gear 8583 d The distance between the second member 8433 relative to the first member 8431 and the third member 8445 relative to the second member 8433 are smaller or larger than the outer shape of the first side pinion gear 432. The distance may be formed differently.

  In the eighth and ninth embodiments, in the slide units 8400 and 9400, when the first members 8431 and 9431, the second members 8432 and 9432, and the third members 8445 and 9445 are slidingly displaced to the effect area K, the effect area is produced. Although the case where K is made invisible is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, part or all of the first members 8431 and 9431, the second members 8432 and 9432, and the third members 8445 and 9445 may be used. Alternatively, it may be made of a light transmissive material, and part or all of the rendering area K may be seen through.

  In the eighth and ninth embodiments, in the slide unit 8400 and the slide unit 9400, the side surface on the left side in the front view of the base members 8431b and 9431b and the side surface on the right side in the front view of the base members 8434 and 9434 are substantially the same in the front-rear direction. The case where the side surface of the base member 8434 and 9434 on the left side in the front view and the side surface on the right side of the base member 8446 and 9446 in the front view are arranged at substantially the same position in the front and rear direction The side surface on the left side in the front view of the members 8431 b and 9431 b and the side surface on the right side in the front view on the base members 8434 and 9434 may be arranged to overlap in the front and rear direction. The side surfaces of the members 8446 and 9446 on the right side in the front view may be disposed so as to overlap in the front-rear direction.

  In the first embodiment, when the slide unit 400 and the projecting unit 700 are displaced to the combined (projected) position, the manner in which the rotating members 435 and 455 and the pivoting member 732 are in contact with each other is controlled or controlled. Although the case where the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swinging member 732 when both approach closer than the reference position due to the variation has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, when the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 are displaced to the combined position, they may be in a position where the both constantly collide.

  In this case, since the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be made to collide with the swinging member and be stopped, the displacement operation of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be stopped quickly. That is, since the rotating members 435 and 455 are displaced along with the displacement of the base members 434 and 454, the transmission path of the drive from the drive motors 475 and 476 is lengthened. Therefore, while it takes time to transmit the stopping operation of the drive motors 475 and 476, the rotating members 435 and 455 are brought into contact with the swinging member 732 to stop the displacing operation, thereby quickly stopping at the combined (overhanging) position. can do.

  In the first embodiment, the space formed between the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 is utilized when the slide unit 400 and the projecting unit 700 are displaced to the combined (projected) position. Although the case where the rotating members 435 and 455 are further displaced has been described, this is not necessarily the case. For example, in the space formed between the rotating members 435 455 and the pivoting member 732, rotate the second members 436 456 disposed on the rotating members 435 455 in the opposite direction to the first embodiment. You may extend it.

  In this case, the second members 436 and 456 are disposed in the space formed between the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 to move the rotating members 435 and 455, the rotating member 730 (lifting base 720) The size of the pattern (character) formed by displacing the member 820 and the combined position can be easily increased.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the rotating members 435 and 455 and the rotating member 11730 (elevating base 720) are separated when the elevating unit 800, the slide unit 400 and the projecting unit 11700 are displaced to the combined (projecting) position. Although the case where it arrange | positions in the state was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this, and the rotation members 435 and 455 and the rotation member 11730 (elevation base 720) may be arrange | positioned in the contact | abutting state . In this case, since the rotary members 435 and 455 and the rotary member 11730 are disposed in contact with each other, the rotary members 435 and 455, the rotary member 11730 (lift base 720) and the lift member 820 are displaced to the united position. The size of the pattern (character) can be easily enlarged.

  In the first embodiment, when the slide unit 400 and the protrusion unit 700 are displaced to the combined (projected) position and the rotating members 435 and 455 abut against the swinging member 732, the rotating member 730 rotates. Although the case of absorbing the impact when the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swinging member 732 has been described, this is not necessarily the case. For example, the elevating base 720 may be rotationally displaced with respect to the base member 710.

  In this case, the rotary member 730 is connected to a transmission path for transmitting a drive for rotating the lift base 720, so that it is difficult to rotate the lift base 720 with respect to the lift base 720. Since the rotating members 435 and 455 can be easily rotated by contacting with the swinging member 732 by rotating them, the impact when the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swinging member 732 can be easily absorbed.

  In the first embodiment, when the second effect mode is formed, at least a part of the contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640 in contact with each other. Although the case where it arranges on the front side was carried out, it is not necessarily restricted to this, and the whole of the portion in which the rotation member 435 was in contact with the contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640. It may be arrange | positioned in the aspect which covers the front side of. Moreover, you may arrange | position to the front side of the area | region which exceeds this.

  In this case, the contact portion between the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member 640 can not be visually recognized from the player by the rotating member 435. Therefore, the upper displacing member 530, the lower displacing member 640, and the rotating member 435 have one pattern. Can be easily recognized by the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the player can not recognize the pattern (character) of the second effect mode and the interest is lost.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 156. In the pachinko machine 10 shown in this control example, as shown in FIG. 2, the variable display device unit 80 is provided substantially in the central area of the game board 13, and the first winning opening 64 is provided below it. Furthermore, in the area on the right side of the game board 13 where balls fired so as to jump over the variable display unit 80 along the outer rail 77 (hereinafter referred to as the right area), the through gate 66, The second winning opening 140, the second winning opening 140 is attached to the second winning opening 140 can be changed into an open state where the ball can enter the ball and a closed state that makes it more difficult to enter the ball than the open state Closed position that makes it more difficult for the ball to enter than an open state in which the ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a and a specific winning opening 65a that is associated with the specific winning opening 65a and the specific winning opening 65a. A variable winning device 65 is provided which is variable.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example in which the game board 13 is configured, a lottery of a special symbol is executed based on the ball entering the first winning opening 64, and based on the lottery result The third symbol display device 81 executes variable display (dynamic display) of the third symbol. Then, when the third symbol variably displayed is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode (for example, “7.7.7”), a big hit game (a bonus game) which is advantageous to the player is executed.

  When the jackpot game is executed, an operation is performed in which the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times), so that the player aims the right area of the game board 13 The game is called “right-handed game.” The ball is entered into the specified winning opening 65 a of the variable winning device 65. When one ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls, so that the player can obtain many winning balls during the jackpot game.

  As described above, in the normal gaming state in which the big hit game is not being executed, in the normal gaming state, a game in which the ball is made to enter the first winning opening 64 is played, and in the big hit gaming state in which the big hit game is executed The aim is to aim at the winning device 65. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that he or she is playing a game by making the ball firing region different according to the game state.

  Furthermore, in the variable winning device 65 in which the opening operation is executed during the jackpot game, there is provided a probability changing switch 65e3 through which the ball entering the specified winning opening 65a can pass. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 108 to 110, the variable winning device 65 is provided with two paths through which the entering ball can pass, and the ball flowing down one of the paths is It is configured to pass through the positive change switch 65e3. Then, the ball passes the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit game, and the probability change gaming state (hereinafter referred to as the probability change state) in which the lottery result of the special symbol is likely to be a big hit as the gaming state advantageous to the player after the big hit game Is given).

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is provided with a right side area unit (not shown) into which a ball which has been fired by right-handed game and which has passed through the through gate 66 provided on the right side area of the game board 13 flows. There is. The right side area unit is provided with a clone having three discharge holes formed therein, through which the balls can pass, as distribution means for distributing the inflowing balls into a plurality of paths. Of the three discharge holes formed in this space, the ball that has passed through one discharge hole flows down the first path and is guided to the second winning hole 140. Then, the ball which has not entered the second winning opening 140 is led to a specified general winning opening (not shown) provided on the further downstream side of the first path. On the other hand, the ball that has passed through the other two discharge holes of the three discharge holes formed in the clough flows down the second path and is guided to the variable winning device 65. The ball that has not entered the specified winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is discharged from the second path as it is, passes through the first out port 71, and is discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 10.

  By configuring in this way, for example, a ball capable of entering the second winning opening 140 or a specified general winning opening during a jackpot game and a ball capable of entering the specified winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 simultaneously are generated simultaneously Since it becomes possible to make it possible to make the flow of the ball in the jackpot game complicated, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, in the configuration in which the winning balls are paid out for entering the second winning opening 140 or the specified general winning opening, the winning balls may be received for entering the plurality of winning openings during the jackpot game. Since this becomes possible, it is possible to increase the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player during a jackpot, and it is possible to make the player play the game eagerly.

  Furthermore, an effect based on a ball entering a specific general winning opening during a big hit game may be executed, for example, the number of balls entering a specific general winning opening during a big hit game exceeding a predetermined number It is good to execute an effect based on it. In this case, a jackpot (a jackpot having a large number of rounds, or a jackpot which is difficult to win in the specific winning opening 65a) can increase the number of balls entering the specified general winning opening, because the period for which the jackpot game is executed is long. There is an effect that it is possible to give a bonus to the player even if a state in which the ball is difficult to win in the specified winning combination opening 65a occurs during the jackpot game.

  In addition, during a period when the ball is difficult to enter the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game, that is, during a period when the variable winning device 65 is closed (opening period, interval period, ending period) You may comprise so that presentation may be performed based on having entered the ball. As a result, it is possible to execute a game in which the player keeps the ball firing continuously during the big hit game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine.

  As described above, other than the effect based on the ball entering the specified general winning opening during the big hit game, the effect (notification) is executed when the ball does not enter the specified general winning hole during the big hit game For example, it is possible to enter a ball that can enter the specified winning opening 65a and a specified general winning opening at a predetermined ratio (for example, 3 to 1) by playing a right-handed game during a big hit game If it is determined that the ball has not entered the specified general winning opening during one round game in the big hit game or in the big hit game when the sorting member to which the balls are distributed is provided, that effect May be notified. As a result, when the jackpot game is not executed due to the normal right-handed game, or an abnormality of various devices (distribution members etc.) provided on the game board 13 can be found early.

  In addition, in the middle of the route until the ball that has flowed into the right area unit (not shown) reaches the clone, the ball can be passed as drop position changing means for making the position at which the ball falls into clune indefinite. A moving member having a proper path is provided. This moving member is configured to reciprocate within a predetermined range (about 5 cm) in the left-right direction (the left-right direction as viewed in FIG. 2) of the game board 13 by a motor (not shown). It is possible to make different the position discharged (the position dropped to the ground) by. As described above, by providing the moving member as the drop position changing means above the clune as the distributing means, the movement of the ball on the clone can be complicated. The moving speed of the moving member described above may be set to such a speed that the falling position is separated by 10 mm or more when the ball fired continuously falls onto the clone. By setting in this manner, it is possible to suppress damage to the device due to collisions and bounces between balls that have dropped continuously on the claves. Furthermore, even if the separation distance between the clone and the moving member is shortened (for example, about 15 mm), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clog due to interference between the ball dropped first and the ball dropped later. It becomes possible.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, a clune-shaped mechanism is used as the sorting means, but any configuration may be used as long as the balls can be distributed to a plurality of paths. Alternatively, it is possible to use a flow path switching member in which the flow-down direction of the ball to be switched is switched, or a switching member to switch the flow path of the ball electrically. Furthermore, in the present control example, the moving member is used as the falling position changing means so that the ball does not fall to a fixed position at a certain position, but any configuration may be used as long as the falling position of the ball can be changed. The clune itself may be moved.

  Next, when the jackpot gaming state ends, when the ball passes the probability changing switch 65e3 provided in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game, the above-mentioned probability changing state is made, while the variable winning device during the jackpot game When the ball does not pass through the positive change switch 65e3 at 65, the normal game state in which the first winning opening 64 is aimed is achieved.

  Here, in the definite variation state in this control example, the probability that the result of the drawing of the special symbol will be a big hit is high as described above, and the drawing will be executed by passing the through gate 66. The probability is also set to be high. Further, the time until the lottery result of the special symbol and the normal symbol is determined (hereinafter, referred to as fluctuation time) is set to be shorter than the normal gaming state. In addition, the probability change state in this control example is set to continue until the result of the lottery of the special symbol reaches the lottery result other than the jackpot 100 times consecutively after the end of the jackpot game, and the lottery of the special symbol is 100 It is set to shift from a definite change state to a normal gaming state after being a jackpot other than consecutive times. Thus, by providing a restriction to a period during which the probability change state advantageous to the player continues, the player can be motivated to play the game so as to be a big hit, and the interest of the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to In addition, about the period which a definite change state continues, you may set it as the content except this, for example, you may make it continue until it wins the next big hit, and it is the same timing as the timing when the lottery of a special symbol is performed. A transition lottery may be performed to shift the definite change state to the normal gaming state. In addition, a period in which the positive change state continues may be set as time.

  Furthermore, in the definite variation state of this control example, the opening pattern of the electrically-driven accessory 140a that is driven open when the winning is won in the lottery of the normal symbol executed by passing the ball through the through gate 66 is the normal gaming state It is set to be an opening pattern more advantageous to the player. The detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 125, but the opening pattern of the motorized role piece 140a set in the definite variation state has a ball in the second winning opening 140 than the opening pattern set in the normal gaming state. It is set so that the period of the open state which can enter a ball becomes long.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example executes right-handed gaming in a definite change state, and is configured to be able to efficiently perform gaming by aiming the through gate 66 and the second winning opening. It is done. Therefore, the period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the definite change state may be performed by continuing the right-handed game, and the player can be provided with easy-to-understand game characteristics.

<About the variable winning device in this control example>
Here, the configuration of the above-described variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIG. 108 to FIG. FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 108, the variable winning device 65 is combined with an opening forming member 65b disposed so as to protrude to the front side of the game board 13 and a back side of the opening forming member 65b. Base member 65c for screwing to game board 13, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c for lighting LEDs to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the base member 65c There is an LED substrate 65d disposed, a back cover 65e for holding the LED substrate 65d with the base member 65c, and an open / close door 65f1 for opening / closing the specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65b. Opening / closing unit 65f, a flow path cover 65g which is combined with the back side of the back cover 65e to form a flow path, the back cover 65e, and the flow path cover It is disposed on the back side of a flow path cover 65g, a switching member 65h for switching the flow path of the game ball by protruding into the flow path formed by the body 65g, a link member 65i engaged with the switching member 65h The rear cover body 65j and the rear side of the rear cover body 65j are fixed to the flow path solenoid 65k for operating the link member 65i and the flow path solenoid 65k from the rear side and fixed to the rear cover body 65j with screws. And a cover body 65m for fixing.

  FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65. Fig. 109 (c) is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and Fig. 109 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 taken along Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 109 (b), the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a which is an opening through which game balls can enter. The specific winning opening 65a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and is inclined downward to the left so that the gaming ball passing through the opening is guided in the left direction of FIG. 109 (b). The bottom is formed. At the left end portion of the bottom surface, a detection port 65a1 formed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting winning of the game ball is disposed. The gaming ball having passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to the sorting flow path formed on the back side of the back cover 65e shown in FIG. 110 (b).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 109 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is an open state where the game ball can enter the ball by the open / close door 65f1 configured with a shutter mechanism that can appear from the game board 13 side. It is changed to a possible (closed difficulty) closed state. In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the open / close door 65f1, and the game ball can roll on the upper part of the open / close door. Further, in the open state, the open / close door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted to the inside of the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

  By configuring in this manner, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the gaming ball rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 and is guided to the second winning opening 140 side. Is configured. Therefore, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning port 140 while the player is in the right-handed state even during the time-saving game (including the probability variation game), and the game method is immediately turned left after the big hit game. It is possible to reduce the time and effort to change. Therefore, it is possible to play the game more easily.

  Further, in the open state, the plane orthogonal to the direction in which the gaming balls flow down can be configured as the openings of the variable winning device 65, so more gaming balls can be efficiently won in the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 109 (a) is a cross-sectional view of La-La shown in FIG. 109 (b). As shown in FIG. 109 (a), the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined to the distribution flow path side of the back cover 65e.

  With reference to FIG. 110, a configuration will be described in which the game balls guided to the distribution flow channel of the back cover 65e are distributed to a normal discharge flow channel 65e1 and a special discharge flow channel 65e2 described later.

  FIG. 110 (a) is a rear view of the back cover 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is actuated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge flow passage 65e2. As shown in FIG. 110 (a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the projection of the link member 65i is inserted and a guiding piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and a flow path cover 65g Is pivotally supported from the back side. Here, the flow passage cover body 65g is provided with an opening portion through which the induction piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h2 is rotated from the back side of the flow passage cover body 65g into the flow passage. It is possible to arrange as possible.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (a), the gaming ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the induction piece 65h2 disposed obliquely downward to the left and is guided to the special discharge channel 65e2. Ru. The game ball which has passed through the special discharge flow path 65e2 is detected by a probability change switch 65e3 constituted by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge flow path 65e2 and discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as a ball out. Be done.

  Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the game ball passes the probability change switch 65e3 described above during the big hit game, so that the gaming state after the big hit game is the high probability gaming state Game state) is set. That is, the probability changing switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for giving a probability changing gaming state. Further, the switching member 65h is configured to distribute the gaming state after the big hit to the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state) or the definite variation gaming state.

  As described above, since the gaming state set after the big hit game is changed by the flow-down route of the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a during the big hit game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player even during the big hit game . The time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge flow passage 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is at least one second. The operation timing and operation time of the switching member 65h are set according to the jackpot type. In this embodiment, when the jackpot A is won, the switching member 65h is operated for 5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the variable winning device 65 at the start of the thirteenth round. When the jackpot B is won, the switching member 65h is actuated for 0.5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the variable winning device 65 at the start of the thirteenth round.

  Thus, in the jackpot A, the game ball that has won the variable winning device 65 is configured to pass through the probability change switch 65e3, but in the jackpot B, it is configured to be impossible to pass the probability change switch 65e3 There is. Therefore, the probability variation application rate can be controlled by the jackpot type, and it can be configured such that advantages and disadvantages do not occur excessively.

  A case where the gaming ball is guided to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 will be described with reference to FIG. 110 (b). FIG. 110 (b) is a view showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is not operating and the opening piece of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 is blocked by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h.

  The gaming balls guided to the distribution flow path from the detection port 65a1 are guided to the upper surface of the induction piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and are guided to the normal discharge flow path 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge flow path 65e1, a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 formed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball is provided. As a result, it can be determined by the sum of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the probability change switch 65e3 whether all the game balls entered into the variable winning device 65 have been discharged.

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress a defect in which even if the jackpot B is a jackpot B, the probability changing switch 65e3 is a jackpot even in the jackpot B in a state where the gaming ball that has won a prize before the 13th round is not discharged.

  As described above, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on that, the player receives a bonus ball (15 for the one ball winning in this embodiment) as a bonus. Individual prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, it is possible to execute lottery of whether or not to apply the probability variation gaming state by configuring whether or not to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 using the gaming ball after the detection is possible . Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning opening for giving the probability variation gaming state separately from the variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

  Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 111 (a) is a view schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 111 (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten main symbols attached with the numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, and the main symbol with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) is The front of the wooden box is almost fully filled with large numbers. On the other hand, the main symbol with an even number (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached symbol imitating a character such as a furoshiki or helmet, which is almost full on the front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not aligned is performed.

  For example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit B", the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. Moreover, if it is a "big hit A", the change display with which the main symbol to which "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" which is an odd number is added aligns is performed. In addition, although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a combination of predetermined main symbols indicating a small hit (for example, on the effective line L1, a combination of main symbols from the left symbol row Z1 is "3" "4" “1”) is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 111 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two vertically, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, and others The upper 1/3 of the sub-display area Ds is used to display the notice effect, the character, the number of holding balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order in the left symbol row Z1, and the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed on the upper, middle, and lower three stages for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 at each game. Is displayed. A large hit moving image is displayed as a big hit if it is aligned with a combination of big hit symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of holding balls which is the number of balls (holding balls) for which the variation has not been executed among the balls entered into the first winning opening 64, and the small area Ds2 and Ds3 is an area for displaying a preview effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the state is more likely to shift to a jackpot than usual. In the central small area Ds2, usually, a predetermined character (a boy with a hachimaki in this embodiment) performs a predetermined movement, sometimes performs a special movement other than the predetermined movement, or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by taking out and the like.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first winning opening 64 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is suspended up to four times. The number of holding balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one holding ball number symbol is displayed per one holding ball number ball, and the number of holding balls is displayed according to the display number of the holding ball number symbol. That is, when one holding ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the holding ball number is one ball, and when four holding ball number symbols are displayed, the holding ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number-of-parked-balls design is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of balls-held is 0, that is, there is no ball-held.

  In this control example, ball entry to the first winning opening 64 is configured to be held up to four times at the maximum, but the maximum number of holding balls is not limited to four times, three times or less Alternatively, it may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times). In addition, instead of the display of the number-of-hold ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of number-of-hold balls is divided by a number into a part of the third symbol display device 81 or (For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls held may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which corresponds to the maximum number of holdings, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Further, in this control example, the display form of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be different depending on the effect display to be executed. Therefore, in the case where the same reference numeral is attached in the description of each effect to be described later, it indicates that it is a display or an area having the same function, and where the display or the area is arranged (display form) is different. Will be described with the same reference numerals.

  Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 112 and FIG. 113, a display mode of effects performed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 112 (a) is a diagram showing a display example of reach navigation effect executed when a predetermined fluctuation pattern (super reach or special reach) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the third symbol, and FIG. And FIGS. 113 (a) to 113 (c) are diagrams showing an example of an effect display mode of reach navigation effect. This reach navigation effect enables the player to visually grasp the progress of the aspect of the effect (main effect) to be executed by a predetermined variation pattern (super reach or special reach), and notifies or suggests it stepwise It is an effect (a side effect). As described above, the player is displayed to the player by displaying the contents of the main effect (the description of the main effect, the fluctuation time and the expectation for becoming a big hit) performed by the third symbol display device 81 using the sub-effect. It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 112 (a), the reach navigation effect is specifically described. As shown in FIG. 112 (a), when the predetermined variation pattern (super reach or special reach) is selected in the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is provided on the upper right side of the main display area Dm. It is reduced to a small area Dm5 and is variably displayed, and a main effect based on the fluctuation pattern is executed in the main display area Dm. Then, reach navigation effect, which is a sub effect, is performed on a small area Dm4 provided on the lower left side of the main display area Dm.

  In this small area Dm4, a time gauge Dm4a indicating a period during which the main effect is to be executed as an image configuring reach navigation effect, a character Dm4b as a movement display unit visually indicating the progress degree of the main effect, and A notification unit Dm4c for notifying at least a part of the effect result and guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e for guiding at least a part of the effect result of the main effect are displayed.

  The time gauge Dm4a is a gauge for indicating a period in which the main effect is performed, and is displayed so that the character Dm4b which is a movement display unit advances from the left to the right in the viewpoint of FIG. The notification unit Dm4c is displayed at the right end of the time gauge Dm4a, and when the character Dm4b moving corresponding to the main effect executed in the main display area Dm reaches the notification unit Dm4c, the notification content is notified to the notification unit Dm4c Is stopped. In the present control example, the time gauge Dm4a is used as a period display unit for indicating a period in which the main effect is performed, but other displays may be used. For example, a predetermined finished product (for example, an architecture) You may make it the structure which can display the process which produces a thing and cooking.

  The character Dm4b is a movement display unit that moves according to the progress of the main effect, and is displayed so as to move from the left to the right on the time gauge Dm4a at a constant speed on the viewpoint of FIG. Thus, by moving the character Dm4b at a constant speed on the time gauge Dm4a, it is possible to make the player predict the time until the character Dm4b reaches the goal (right end) of the time gauge Dm4a. Although only the image imitating a rabbit is displayed as the character Dm4b in the drawing shown in FIG. 112 (a), actually, a plurality of character images having different speeds moving on the time gauge Dm4a are stored and stored. The length of the time gauge Dm 4 a and the character to be selected are controlled to be set based on the length of the selected main effect (the length of fluctuation time).

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to reduce the amount of image data for displaying a sub-effect in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of change patterns (main effects) having different change times. In addition, the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the main effect being executed by changing the display mode (for example, color) of the character Dm 4 b which is the movement display unit or the effect attached to the character is a big hit Or may be configured to indicate the destination of the main effect according to the display mode of the selected character. As a result, it is possible to have both the function of informing the degree of progress of the main effect and the function of suggesting the result of the main effect, and it is possible to execute effect display with high effect.

  The informing unit Dm4c is for notifying of the effect result of the main effect, and a rotation display (see FIG. 112 (b)) rotating in the left and right direction on the small area Dm4 is performed. The notification unit Dm4c is configured to be able to display an index indicating the presentation result of the main presentation on both sides thereof, and the presentation result of the main presentation is displayed by the indicator that is stopped in the small area Dm4 when the rotation display of the notification unit Dm4c is stopped. Is notified.

  In this pachinko machine 10, "V" which is an index indicating that it is a big hit, and "X" which is an index which indicates that it is out as an index for notifying the presentation result of the main presentation "Development", which is an index indicating that the presentation is to be continued further, and "?", Which is an index indicating that the presentation result of the main presentation is not notified, are set, and two of these indices are set. The index is selected, and one index (for example, "V") is displayed on one side of the notification unit Dm4c, and the other index (for example, "?") Is displayed on the other side.

  By configuring in this manner, for example, when the informing unit Dm4c is rotationally displayed in a state in which the “V” index and the “×” index are displayed on both sides of the informing unit Dm4c, the character Dm4b notifies It will be informed in advance that there is no further development when it reaches department Dm 4 c, that is, grasp in advance the presentation time of this main presentation (the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the main presentation) in advance As a result, it is possible to display a main effect that the player can easily understand. Also, when the informing unit Dm4c is rotationally displayed in a state in which the index of "V" and the index of "progress" are displayed on both sides of the informing unit Dm4c, a big hit occurs when the character Dm4b reaches the informing unit Dm4c. In order to notify in advance that the main effect is to be developed or the main effect further from there, the player expects a predetermined timing (the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the notification unit Dm4c) However, I can see the main effects with confidence.

  In this control example, a configuration is used that allows the player to grasp by rotating and displaying a plurality of indicators, but it is also possible to make the player grasp the plurality of indicators using other configurations. For example, using a configuration in which a plurality of indicators are switched and displayed on the notification unit Dm4c, or a configuration in which a plurality of indicators are simultaneously displayed on the notification unit Dm4c and an indicator to be selected in the present effect is deleted over time It is good.

  The guidance display sections Dm4d and Dm4e are provided in the middle of the period indicated by the time gauge Dm4a, and when the character Dm4b arrives, guidance display is suggested that suggests the contents of the main effect of this time. When the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e, for example, the character of "chance" is displayed or rotated and displayed as an effect that indicates that the result of the main effect of this time indicates the result of a big hit. The indicator attached to the notification unit Dm 4 c is switched. In this manner, by providing the guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e in the middle stage of the main effect, it is possible to notify the player of information based on the result of the main effect in a stepwise manner. On the other hand, the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can always be watched closely.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the guidance display unit can notify the guidance display indicating the result of the main effect and the guidance display indicating the period of the main effect at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e. With this configuration, the information notified to the player by the guidance display unit can be diversified. In addition, although this pachinko machine 10 is provided with two guidance display parts, one may be sufficient and you may provide three or more.

  Next, display modes at each timing of the reach navigation effect described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 (b) and 113 (a) to 113 (c). FIG. 112 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the small area Dm4 after the reach navigation effect is started, and FIG. 113 (a) is a small area Dm4 of the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the notification unit Dm4c in the reach navigation effect. 113 (b) shows an example of a display mode showing that reach navigation effect is further continued, and FIG. 113 (c) shows that the main effect is continued in reach navigation effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of.

  First, as shown in FIG. 112 (b), when reach navigation effect is executed, movement display in which the character Dm 4b moves from the left side to the right side (from the start point to the end point) on the time gauge Dm 4a is performed. In addition, the notification unit Dm4c executes rotational display to allow the player to visually recognize the indicators displayed on both sides thereof. In this manner, by performing reach navigation effect, the player is provided with information about the effect period of the main effect and the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the main effect in the middle stage of the main effect executed in the main display area Dm. On the other hand, it is possible to notify in advance (before the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed).

  Furthermore, in FIG. 112 (b), the character Dm4b has a chance below the guidance display part Dm4d! ! The letter "is displayed. This is a display indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit, and as described above, is displayed in the small area Dm4 at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display part Dm4c. As described above, by providing the guidance display portion Dm4d on the time gauge Dm4a, it is possible to indicate at which timing the display indicating the expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit is executed for the player. It is possible to notify in advance. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the display content of the indicator displayed on the notification unit Dm4c is also changeable at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e. Thus, for example, at the timing when the reach navigation effect is performed, two indicators of “V” and “×” are displayed in the notification unit Dm4c, but at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display unit Dm4d, It is possible to switch the indicator displayed in the notification unit Dm 4 c to the display of two indicators of “V” and “development”. By changing the display content of the notification unit Dm4c at a predetermined timing (the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display unit Dm4d) in this way, it is possible to diversify the content of the reach navigation effect which is the sub-effect, There is an effect that it can control getting bored early.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 113 (a), the case in which the character Dm4b reaches the notification part Dm4c in the reach navigation effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 113A, when the character Dm4b reaches the notification unit Dm4c, the rotation display of the notification unit Dm4c is stopped, and the index “?” Displayed on one surface of the notification unit Dm4c is displayed in the small area Dm4. Stop display. When the index of “?” Is displayed, the character Dm 4 b is then flipped over as shown in FIG. 113 (b), and the effect of returning to the point where the guidance display portion Dm 4 d on the timing gauge Dm 4 a is provided is performed. Ru.

  The indicator "?" Displayed in the notification unit Dm4c is an index that prevents the player from grasping whether the main effect ends or continues at this timing, and when the current main effect does not develop, FIG. 113. After the effect display of (b), the effect ends without the character Dm 4 b rising. On the other hand, when the main rendition of this time is developed and continues further, as shown in FIG. 113 (c), the character Dm4b is raised, and reach navigation effect of moving on the time gauge Dm4a is executed again. In this case, the display mode of the character Dm 4 b (display mode of the peripheral effect of the character Dm 4 b) is changed so that the player can grasp that the reach navigation effect corresponding to the developed main effect is being executed.

  The position where the character Dm 4 b is returned as shown in FIG. 113 (b) is determined based on the period of the main effect after development. Specifically, if the time taken for the character Dm4b to move on the time gauge Dm4a to reach the notification unit Dm4c is 20 seconds and the time for the main effect after development (the remaining period for the main effect is 10 seconds), the time is The position is returned to the middle position of the gauge Dm4a. By configuring in this way, reach navigation effects corresponding to the main effects after development can be displayed using the moving speeds of the time gauge Dm 4 a and the character Dm 4 b corresponding to the main effects before development It becomes possible to reduce the amount of data for performing certain reach navigation effects.

  Furthermore, for the player, it is possible to predict the period of the main effect after development by the position where the character Dm 4 b is returned. In this pachinko machine 10, a long variation time is easily selected when a lottery of special symbol is won for a big hit, so if the character Dm 4 b is returned to a position closer to the start point of the time gauge Dm 4 a There is an effect that it is possible to make the player think that the player has won, and the interest of the game can be improved. In the case where the indicator displayed in the notification unit Dm4c is "?", The player is not notified whether the current main effect develops or not, so the player returns the character Dm4b. After confirming the position (after predicting the effect period in the case of development), it pays attention to the effect whether or not the character Dm 4 b stands up. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of the reach navigation effect can be enhanced.

  As described above, in the reach navigation effect used in the present embodiment as described above, it is possible to inform the player of information on the main effect which is an effect indicating the lottery result of the special symbol in advance. Thus, the main effect can be closely watched in a state in which the destination of the main effect is predicted. In addition, by displaying information relating to the main effect in stages, the effect can be further improved since the effect can be further improved since the player can be made to continuously gaze at the effect.

  The reach navigation effect described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113 is merely an example, and the reach navigation effect used in this control example is such that various other effect displays are executed. For example, in the reach navigation effect described above, a character imitating a rabbit is used as a movement display unit, but a character imitating a turtle or a character imitating a person can be displayed as the other characters. As described above, when selecting a character to be used in the present reach navigation effect among a plurality of characters, it is determined based on the lottery result of the special symbol and the contents of the main effect to be executed. As a result, the display contents of the main effect and the sub effect can be associated with each other, and there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with an effect without a sense of discomfort. In this case, the character may be displayed in the reach navigation effect, which is a side effect, before the character is displayed in the main effect. Thereby, the content of the main effect can be grasped in advance by looking at the reach navigation effect, and the effect of the effect can be further enhanced.

  Furthermore, the moving speed of character Dm 4 b in reach navigation effect executed corresponding to the main effect before development may be different from the moving speed of character Dm 4 b in reach navigation effect performed corresponding to the main effect after development . As a result, since the period of the main effect after development is notified on the basis of the position at which the character is returned and the moving speed of the character Dm 4 b, the generation period of the main effect after development is easily grasped. Has the effect of being able to

  In addition, the degree to which the main effect develops may be indicated by the position at which the character Dm 4 b is returned. Specifically, an area with high development expectation and a low area are provided on the time gauge Dm 4 a, and even if the character Dm 4 b is returned to the area with high development expectation, the main presentation is developed with high probability. Good. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the position where the character Dm 4 b is returned, and it is possible to further enhance the rendering effect.

  Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), and is 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 299) It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 129).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in this control example, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol 1 holding ball of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 It is stored in the storage area 203a. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table When it matches with the value of the jackpot random number set by 202a, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this first hit random number table is for high probability (special symbol low probability state period) of special symbol, and high probability (special symbol special probability of being a big hit from low probability) And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. Thus, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot. The first random number table 202a for high probability of the special symbol and the first random number table 202a for low probability of the special symbol are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first random number table 202a is a table in which random number values (determination values) determined to be winning in each gaming state are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired is any of "0 to 9" It is determined whether there is any, and if it is any of “0 to 9”, it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "9", and if it is "9", it is determined that it is a big hit.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) And return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit classification counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in this control example, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol 1 hold of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number that makes the big win of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that causes the special symbol to go out, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the one symbol display device 37 is at the time of removal of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that makes a big win for the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 The displayed mode is that of the jackpot of the special symbol. In this case, a specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first random number counter C1, when there is a low probability of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, there is one random number that will be a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number “0” is for low probability Is stored in the first random number table. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 400, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 1, so the probability of becoming a big symbol for a special symbol is "1/400".

  On the other hand, at the time of the high probability of the special symbol, there are 10 random number values that become the jackpot of the special symbol, and the values "0 to 9" are stored in the first random number table for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 400, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 10, so the probability to be a big hit of a special symbol is "1/40".

  Note that the duplicate value is a random number value that is a big hit stored in the first random number table for low probability time, and a random number value that is a big win that is stored in the first random number table for high probability time. You may set the random number value which becomes each big hit so that it may not become. If there is a value that is always used as a jackpot random number value regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, the random number value may be input from the outside, and it may be easy to illegally win a jackpot. On the other hand, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state), by changing the random number value to be the jackpot, the jackpot of the special symbol Because it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value that

  Further, the value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, in the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot type when the random number value is any of “0 to 29” is “jackpot A”. Also, the jackpot type when the random number value is any of "30 to 99" is "jackpot B". In the present control example, two types of jackpots are used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one type may be used, or two or more types may be provided. Moreover, you may be comprised so that a different big hit classification may be selected even if it is the value of the same 1st contact classification counter C2 with a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol. By configuring in this manner, for example, when the jackpot with the second special symbol is performed, by setting the jackpot type in which the number of rounds is executed is larger, the player with the hit with the second special symbol is made more to the player. It can be expected. Therefore, the hit in the high probability gaming state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the convenience of the game in the high probability state can be improved. Therefore, the player can strongly feel that he / she wants to shift to the high probability state, and the game can be played for a longer time.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disengaging displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach is generated, the final stop symbol stops at other than the reach symbol. Two stop (rendering) patterns are selected, for example, a range of 90 to 99, and a "completely out of range" (for example, a range of 0 to 89) where no reach occurs. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt processing in this control example), and the special symbol 1 holding ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the area 203a. It is stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball has won the second winning opening 140.

  In addition, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In addition, in this control example, this table is divided into high probability for special symbol and low probability for special symbol, and according to the table, a range of random number values set for each type of stoppage of deviation Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

  For example, in the high probability state, a table for high probability when the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is wide 0 to 89 so that reach effect is not selected more than necessary since jackpots are easily generated Is selected, and "complete removal" is likely to be selected. In the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entering time to the first winning opening 64, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as narrow as 0 to 79 for low probability Table is selected and it becomes difficult to select "completely out".

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A so-called short time deviation, a long time deviation, and a rough display mode such as normal reach and super reach are determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 Ru. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 129) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 117 (a)) storing a random value for determining one fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110. It is provided inside.

  In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, for example, various kinds of "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time use)", "disappearing normal reach", "disappearing super reach" various types are defined as deviation patterns for distraction As the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot A, various "normal reach" and various "super reach" are defined. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type). Although not shown, the variation pattern selection table 222a is also set in the audio lamp control device 113, and further detailed variation corresponding to the type of variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command output by the main control device 110. The pattern content is selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66 , Is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  And the value of the random number which becomes a hit of the ordinary symbol is set by the ordinary symbol per random symbol table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is the ordinary symbol When it agrees with the value of the random number which is set by the per random number table, it is determined that the symbol is normal. In addition, this normal symbol per random number table is for low probability of normal symbol (during normal condition of normal symbol) and high probability of high probability of being hit of normal symbol from the low probability (of normal symbol) It is divided into two types, one for the time-saving state), and the number of random numbers for making a big hit included in each is set differently. Thus, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be hit. In this control example, the normal symbol is set to high probability according to the timing when the special symbol shifts to the high probability state, and the normal symbol is set to low probability according to the timing when the special symbol shifts to the low probability state It is defined that That is, there is no gaming state in which the special symbol has a low probability and the normal symbol has a high probability.

  As shown in FIG. 116 (c), at the time of low probability of the normal symbol, there are 24 random values that hit the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 28”. These random number values are stored in the random number per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 240 while the total number of random numbers that become a big hit is 24. Therefore, the probability that the symbol will normally hit is “1/10”.

  When the ball passes through the through gate 66 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the second random number counter C4 value is acquired and the variation display of the normal symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device. Run for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) As the symbol of "o" is lighted and displayed, the motorized prize 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol is hit, the motorized prize 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 is “0.2 seconds × 1 time The release time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "0.5 seconds x 2 times" may be opened.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, there are 200 random number values that normally hit the symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the random number per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers to be hit is 200. Therefore, the probability that the symbol is normally hit is "1 / 1.2".

  When the ball passes through the through gate 66 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, the second random number counter C4 value is acquired and the variation display of the normal symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device. Run for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be won, and after the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) As the symbol of "o" is lighted and displayed, the motorized prize 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened "one second x 2 times". Thus, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds" as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, it accompanies the second winning opening 140 Since the release period of the motorized accessory 140a becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning opening 140. In addition, a table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit or not from the value (random number value) of the second random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol is hit, the motorized prize 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is only "one second x 2 times". Although it is open, the open time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 129).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device (not shown).

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 in the main control unit 110 and the contents of the RAM 203 in the present control example will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 115 (a) is a view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 115A, the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first random number table 202a, a first type selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d. There is.

  Here, the contents of the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 116 (a). FIG. 116 (a) schematically shows the contents of the first random number table 202a. As described above, the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 116 (a)) is a table in which the value of the random number serving as the jackpot of the special symbol is defined. When the random number value specified in the first random number table 202a and the value of the first random number counter C1 match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  In this first hit random number table 202a, a big hit judgment value (big hit judgment value at the time of low probability) and a special symbol at the time of high probability of the special symbol for judging whether or not the big hit of the special symbol at the low probability of the special symbol. A jackpot determination value (jacket judgment value at high probability) for determining whether or not the jackpot is determined is provided, and the number of judgment values (random numbers) to be each jackpot is different. Thus, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability of the special symbol and the high probability of the special symbol by changing the number of judgment values (random numbers) to be the jackpot.

  Next, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 116 (b). FIG. 116 (b) schematically shows the content of the first hit type selection table 202 b. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 116 (b)) is set so that jackpot A and jackpot B can be selected respectively corresponding to the special symbol types (special symbol 1 and special symbol 2). It is done. Specifically, the value "0 to 49" of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the determination value of the big hit A in the special symbol 1 and "50 to 99" is set as the determination value of the big hit B in the special symbol 2 As the determination value of A, the value (0 to 99) of the first collision type counter C2 is set.

  Here, as described above, the "big hit A" is configured to allow the game ball that has won the variable winning device 65 to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 (that is, to determine whether or not to be in the probability variation state In the "big hit B", it is impossible (or difficult) to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 (that is, the determination as to whether or not to be a probability variation state is not executed).

  Furthermore, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are defined so that the distribution of the jackpot type is different, and in the special symbol 1, 50% of the jackpot "coarse A" is selected among the jackpots, and the special symbol 2 is the jackpot In the above, “big hit A” is selected to be 100%. Here, the special symbol 2 is a symbol for which a lottery is executed when the ball enters the second winning opening 140 as described above, and in the normal gaming state, the lottery is hardly executed, and the second symbol A lottery is executed in a definite change state in which the ball is likely to enter the winning opening 140. In this control example, when the drawing of the special symbol is executed 100 times without making a big hit once after shifting to the definite change state, the transition to the normal gaming state is made, so the positive change state is entered. By continuing to win the jackpot again before 100 lotterys of special symbols are performed, it is possible to repeat the game in a definite change state. As a result, the player is willing to play the game eagerly to win the next jackpot even after the transition to the probability change state, so the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, the contents of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 116 (c). FIG. 116 (c) schematically shows the contents of the second random number table 202c. The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 116 (c)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 116 (c), when the low probability of the normal symbol (in the normal state of the normal symbol), the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28 In the case of, it is determined to be a hit of an ordinary symbol. In addition, as above-mentioned, when it is judged that it is a hit of a normal symbol, the symbol of "○" lights up as a stop symbol (second symbol) after the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device (not shown) is finished. While being displayed, the motorized jack 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”.

  Next, the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 117A) is a data table used to determine the display pattern of the fluctuation pattern, and the display pattern is defined for each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 117 (a), a jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 117 (b)) and a deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 117 (c)); At least a deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 117 (d)) is defined.

  The jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (b). FIG. 117 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set. For each fluctuation pattern, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set as a determination value.

  Specifically, “0 to 50” is the variation pattern of various types of normal reach (30 seconds), and “51 to 179” is the variety of special reach (90 seconds) for the variation patterns of various types of super reach (60 seconds). For the fluctuation pattern of), "180 to 198" are respectively set as the determination values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern for which the determination value corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired is set as a big hit It is selected from the fluctuation pattern table 202d1.

  FIG. 117 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. The off (ordinary) fluctuation pattern table 202 d 2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is out. When the lottery result of the special symbol is out, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out of reach (non reach) or out of reach (common in reach) from the stop type selection table not shown is a stop type It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete removal is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", outreach is set.

  Here, if the variation pattern type is completely out of the range, a relatively short variation (7 seconds) of variation time and a long variation (10 seconds) of variation time are set. “0 to 98” is set for the short deviation (7 seconds), and “99 to 198” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the long deviation (10 seconds).

  In addition, for outreach, “0 to 149” for various outreach normal reach (30 seconds), “150 to 197” for outfall super reach (60 seconds), outlier special reach "198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for various types (90 seconds).

  As described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out in the normal gaming state, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 determines the type of stop and changes obtained from the (normal) change pattern table 202d Based on the value of the type selection counter CS1, the fluctuation pattern is selected from the out-of-order (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2.

  FIG. 117D is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the out-of-order (probable variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d3. The disconnection (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 is a data table for selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol to be detached when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. The deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 is different from the above-described deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 in the value of the set fluctuation type selection counter CS1.

  As described above, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), complete removal is determined If it is in the range of "90 to 99", the outreach is determined.

  As described above, when the game is in the probability variation gaming state than in the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the game is out is set low. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the fluctuation time of the deviation at the time of the definite change becomes long and the period until the big hit becomes long. Therefore, the game is postponed during the probability change gaming state where it is easy to win a jackpot, and it is possible to suppress the trouble that the player feels bored.

  Referring back to FIG. 115, the description will be continued. FIG. 115 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the main control unit 110. As shown in FIG. 115 (b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passing counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, notification counter 203m, remaining ball timer flag 203n, remaining ball timer 203p, probability variation It has at least a valid flag 203 q, a probability variation valid timer 203 r, an ejection number counter 203 s, a probability variation counter 203 t, and other memory areas 203 z.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and in each of these areas, the first winning opening 64 The values of the first random number counter C1 and the first collision type counter C2 acquired based on the winning are stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (start winning), and the acquired data includes four holding areas (the first holding area). Among the vacant areas of the area to the reserved fourth area), the areas with the smallest area number (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main controller 110, when a lottery of special symbols is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is to the execution area Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determinations such as lottery of special symbols are performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the hold first area to the execution area, the hold first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which winning data stored in other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is packed into a hold area (hold first area to hold third area) with one smaller area number. To be done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which data of winning is stored.

  The special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b has four holding areas (special figure 2 holding first area to fourth area) in the same manner as the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. In each of these areas, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored. It is a storage area for the second winning opening 140 (second special symbol), and the first winning opening 64 (first special symbol) is the second winning opening 140 (for the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a described above). The second special symbol) is different only in that it is changed, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The regular symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through gate 66, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is divided into four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In the vacant area of), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to winning is stored while the winning sequence is held. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area), the determination such as the lottery of the normal symbol is performed.

  In addition, when data is shifted from the first reserve area to the execution area, the first reserve area becomes empty, so the prizes stored in the other reserve areas are the same as in the case of the special symbol 1 suspension ball storage area 203a. The shift process is performed to pack the data in the area 1 into a small reserved area of area number 1. In addition, data shift is also performed only for the holding area in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is a variation display (third symbol) of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry of the first winning opening 64 (start winning). It is a counter which counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the ball enters the first winning opening 64 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases to 1 at maximum value 1 each time Are added (see S404 in FIG. 124). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 122).

  The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e is a variation display (third symbol) of the second special symbol (second symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on entry of the second winning opening 140 (start winning). It is a counter which counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e is set to zero, and the ball enters the second winning opening 140 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases to 1 as the maximum value 4 each time Are added (see S410 in FIG. 124). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 of FIG. 122).

  The value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding N1 of the variable display in the first special symbol) or the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (number of holding N2 of the variable display in the first special symbol) The voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the holding ball number command (see S206 and S211 in FIG. 122 and S405 and S411 in FIG. 124). The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is changed. is there.

  The voice lamp control device 113 controls the main control device by the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is changed. It is possible to obtain the value of the number of pending balls of the variable display which is suspended at 110. As a result, the number of holding balls of the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise and the like. Even if the number of balls stored in the actual variable display has deviated, it is possible to correct the deviation by means of the number of balls command received next.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of holding balls every time the number of holding balls changes. Send a ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the holding ball number symbol (holding symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the holding ball number notified by the display holding ball number command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is the number of holding balls of the variation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device (not shown) based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 66 (waiting number) Is a counter that counts up to four times. The initial value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 each time the ball passes the normal symbol starting opening 66 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. (See S604 in FIG. 126). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 125).

  When the ball passes through gate 66, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of suspension of variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (see S605 in FIG. 126). On the other hand, when the ball passes through gate 66, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S603 in FIG. 126: No).

  The probability variation setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probability variation gaming state is determined depending on whether or not the gaming ball has passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. Here, when the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (see S1412 in FIG. 134). On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, it is set to off based on the fact that the probability variation counter 203t is set to on. The probability change setting flag 203h is backed up at the time of power-off, and is set to a state immediately before power-off at the time of recovery (at power-on). Also, in the initialized state, it is set to off.

  If the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the probability change switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off, and if it is determined that it has passed, the probability change setting flag It may be configured to formally turn on 203h and return. In this case, it can be determined whether the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value larger than 0 or not. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the damage on the gaming shop side by determining the injustice where only the probability change setting flag 203h is rewritten to ON and the power is turned on again while the power is off. it can.

  The probability variation pass counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of gaming balls that have passed the probability variation switch 65e3 (see FIG. 110) in one round (13 rounds with the jackpot A in this control example) in the jackpot game. . It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether all the gaming balls having won in the specific winning opening 65a have been discharged by the sum of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the discharged number counter 203s described later. When passing through the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by one and updated (see S1411 in FIG. 1348). In addition, after the processing of whether the number of gaming balls that have won in the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged balls is executed, it is reset to "0" which is an initial value (see S1511 in FIG. 135). The probability variation passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203 j is a counter for counting the number of gaming balls that have won in the specific winning opening 65 a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, one is added and updated based on detection that the game ball has passed the detection switch 65c1 (see FIG. 134) provided in the variable winning device 65 (see S1403 in FIG. 134). ). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winnings on the variable winning device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number of discharged items (total value of the number-of-discharges counter 203s and the probability variation passing counter 203i) is one. After it is determined whether or not it is determined, the initial value "0" is reset. The value of the winning number counter 203 j is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The operation counter 203k is a counter for counting a time during which the flow path solenoid (probable solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In the pachinko machine 10, the channel solenoid 65k is set to ON for 5 seconds based on the start of 13 rounds at the jackpot A, and the channel solenoid 65k is turned ON for 0.5 seconds based on the start of the 13 rounds for jackpot B It is set. In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as start data of 13 rounds for the big hit A, and a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set for the big hit B. On the other hand, in the winning process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, one is decremented and updated. Further, based on the fact that the value of the operation counter 203k is determined to be 0, the flow passage solenoid 65k is set to be off. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and is initialized to 0 when it is initialized. As described above, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the flow channel solenoid 65k, it is possible to control winning of the probability change switch 65e3 in accordance with the jackpot type.

  The notification counter 203 m is a counter for determining the timing of outputting a notification effect (in the present control example, a sound of “seeing liquid crystal”) for attracting the player's attention. In the present control example, a notification counter 203m corresponding to one second is set at the end timing of the 12th round (the variable winning device 65 has 10 balls or 30 seconds have elapsed). The notification counter 203m is updated by being decremented by one in the process of S1302 in the notification process (see FIG. 133) of the main control device 110. Based on the notification counter 203 m becoming 0, a notification command to be output to the audio lamp control device 113 is set. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this command, the above-described processing for outputting the voice is executed.

  By configuring in this manner, a voice of "seeing the liquid crystal" is output before the start of the thirteenth round in which the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so the player can display the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Watch 81. Here, although details will be described later, in the 12th round of the jackpot game, for example, a girl's character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to urge the player to view the third symbol display device 81. The letters of "notice" which is the notification are displayed. In the 13th round, since the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, if the player pays attention to the operation, the type of jackpot being executed is determined by the operation period of the flow path solenoid 65k. Therefore, the player moves the switching member 65h (flow passage solenoid 65k) in the variable winning device 65 in order to keep the expectation that the probability variation gaming state is given until the end of the big hit game. Informing effects that make it difficult to see are performed. However, when the 12th round is over, there is a possibility that the player may look at the switching member 65h during interval display, so it is informed that the third symbol display device 81 should be watched by voice during the interval period. Informing effect is executed. As a result, after the interval effect is executed, the player's attention can be drawn to the displayed display content, and the player's attention can be diverted from the operation of the switching member 65h.

  In this control example, the notification is made to show the third symbol display device 81 to divert the player's attention from the switching member 65h. However, the present invention is not limited to this. By notifying the device 65 to hold the player's hand, the movement of the switching member 65h may be notified so as to be hidden by the player's hand. Further, not only the third symbol display device 81 but also the notification of seeing the decoration lamp 34 etc. to the player may be configured to divert the player's attention. Furthermore, the player may be configured to distract the player's attention by displaying a three-dimensional code or the like during the 12 rounds and giving a notification prompting the user to read by a mobile phone. In the present control example, the effect of diverting attention is set to the longest time (5 seconds from the start of the 13th round) until the operation of the switching member 65h is finished. As a result, it is possible to suppress a defect in which it is determined whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B is performed by the notification time.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203 n is a flag indicating that the open / close door 65 f 1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed in one round, and an abnormality process described later can be performed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203 n to ON, a remaining ball timer 203 p described later is incremented by one and updated. The remaining ball timer 203p is a counter for determining the time after the open / close door 65f1 is closed, and for determining whether the time required for the game balls in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. Is a counter.

  The remaining ball timer 203p is a time required for the game balls to be discharged to the variable winning device 65 to be discharged when the preset one round is finished and the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed. Is a counter for determining whether has elapsed. In this control example, the time required for the game balls discharged in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged is 2 seconds, and in this control example, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203p in advance. It is set as. Based on the upper limit value (3 seconds in this control example) of the remaining ball timer 203p, it is determined whether the number of winning on the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharge thereof ( S1507 in FIG. 135). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify that effect. Therefore, it can be early notified that the game ball is clogged in the variable winning device 65. Therefore, the game ball is left in the variable winning device 65 illegally, and an impact or the like is given at the start timing of 13 rounds, and the game ball is reached to the switching member 65h earlier than actually, In addition, it is possible to suppress the fraud that causes the game ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. Since the remaining ball timer 203p is set to a time shorter than the interval time until the next round is started, the next round game is executed until the remaining ball timer 203p reaches the upper limit value, and a new game is performed. There is no chance of winning.

  It should be noted that if the winning number and the discharging number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3. The configuration may not be set to ON. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that a probability change gaming state is provided illegally.

  When the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 after the passage solenoid 65k is turned off, the probability variation effective flag 203q is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is validated. When the probability variation effective flag 203 q is set to ON, it is necessary for the game ball that has finally won a prize to the specific winning opening 65 a to pass the probability variation switch 65 e 3 based on the passage solenoid 65 k being on. Indicates that the time has not passed. That is, it indicates that it is a period during which the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3.

  The probability variation valid timer 203r is a counter for counting the time after the probability variation valid flag 203q described above is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by this probability variation effective timer 203r, it is possible to determine a period required to normally pass the probability variation switch 65e3. In this control example, the time required for the game ball having entered the specified winning opening 65a to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is one second. The upper limit value of the probability variation effective timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and after that, even if it passes the probability variation switch 65e3, it is determined to be incorrect and it is not determined to be passage.

  In this way, the switching member 65h is made to vary illegally, and the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, or the game ball is pushed up with a piano wire or the like from below the probability change switch 65e3 and the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, It is possible to suppress the damage caused by fraudulent detection that the magnetic sensor is erroneously detected as passing by the radio wave or the like.

  The number-of-discharges counter 203 s is a counter for counting the number of gaming balls that have passed through the discharge confirmation switch 65 e 4 (see FIG. 110) in one round. The number-of-discharges counter 203s is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after the number of game balls that have won the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls are determined (S1511 in FIG. 135).

  The probability variation counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of variations of the remaining special symbols in the probability variation state. This probability variation counter 203t is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is on at the end of the jackpot game (S1203 in FIG. 132), and is referred to when selecting the jackpot random number table to be referred to when drawing special symbols. (S213 in FIG. 123), 1 is subtracted when the variation of the special symbol is stopped (S221 in FIG. 122).

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, and the like are set (stored).

  Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specified winning opening 65a A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 is outputted from the various switches 208. Various processings are executed based on the control signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 127) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as illumination parts 29 to 33 and decoration lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. To the input / output port 225, a main control unit 110, a display control unit 114, an audio output unit 226, a lamp display unit 227, a frame button 22, other devices 228 and the like are connected.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, or at the time of super reach The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110, the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, etc., and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 119.

  As shown in FIG. 118 (a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a navigation effect selection table 222b, and other various data and programs necessary for controlling the game. .

  In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, fluctuation patterns of types (out, reach out, various types of reach, etc.) of each fluctuation pattern are respectively set to counter values for fluctuation pattern selection (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the result of the pass / fail determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can select various types of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  The navigation presentation selection table 222b is a table for selecting presentation information used in the reach navigation presentation described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. Here, the details of the navigation presentation selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the navigation presentation selection table 222b. The navigation presentation selection table 222b is a table used to set reach navigation presentation to be performed when a predetermined variation pattern (super reach or special reach) is set.

  As shown in FIG. 119 (a), the navigation effect selection table 222b is provided with a first navigation effect selection table 222b1 and a second navigation effect selection table 222b2. Here, the reach navigation effect is briefly described. The reach navigation effect, as shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, is an effect that suggests and notifies the contents of the main effect of the fluctuation pattern (effect performed in the central portion of the main display area Dm), and small area Dm4 (FIG. 112). Refer to the sub effect to be executed in The reach navigation effect includes a time gauge Dm4a indicating the effect period of the main effect, a movement display unit (character Dm4b) indicating the progress of the effect in the main effect, and a notification unit Dm4c and guidance display for indicating and notifying the content of the main effect It is an effect display composed of sections Dm4d and Dm4e.

  The reach navigation effect described above is set so that the character Dm4b can move on the time gauge Dm4a a plurality of times, among which the effect on the first movement is the first navigation effect, and the effect on the second movement is the second navigation It is set as an effect. The first navigation effect and the second navigation effect are configured such that different times can be selected by the navigation effect selection table 222b, and by combining the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect selected by the navigation effect selection table 222b A variety of effect patterns can be set.

  The first navigation effect selection table 222b1 is a table referred to when selecting the first navigation effect. As shown in FIG. 119 (b), the effect pattern of the first navigation effect is selected as the remaining fluctuation time when the first navigation effect is executed and the value of the effect counter 223f. Specifically, in the present control example, the timing at which the reach navigation effect is performed is fixed 30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, so when the super reach (variation time 60 seconds) is set as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, If the remaining fluctuation time when selecting the first navigation effect is 30 seconds, and the special reach (the fluctuation time of 90 seconds) is set as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the remaining error when selecting the first navigation effect The fluctuation time is 60 seconds.

  Then, if the remaining fluctuation time of the remaining time storage area 223h is 30 seconds and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", the effect pattern of 20 seconds is selected as the first navigation effect, and "100 to 100" If it is 199 ", the effect pattern of 30 seconds is selected as the first navigation effect. If the remaining fluctuation time of the remaining time storage area 223h is 60 seconds and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 69", a 20 second effect pattern is selected as the first navigation effect, "70 to 70". If it is 199 ", the effect pattern of 30 seconds is selected as the first navigation effect.

  As described above, by configuring the effect patterns of different times to be selectable in the first navigation effect, the remaining fluctuation time when selecting the second navigation effect described later can be made different, so the effect pattern of reach navigation effect Can be set more complicated. Furthermore, when a special reach with a high degree of expectation in which a lottery of a special symbol has been won as a big hit is set as a variation pattern of a special symbol (in the case where the remaining variation time is 60 seconds), a super reach is set. Since the first navigation effect selection table is defined such that the ratio in which the 30 second fluctuation pattern is set as the first navigation effect is greater than in the case where the remaining fluctuation time is 30 seconds, the player is required to Does this change develop into a special reach by looking at the degree of progress of the directing navigation? Can play while predicting.

  In the first navigation effect, the effect pattern of 20 seconds and the effect pattern of 30 seconds are set by changing the moving speed of the character Dm4b, which is the moving display unit, using the same time gauge Dm4a (see FIG. 112). It is possible. Specifically, in the effect pattern of 30 seconds, a character imitating a turtle is set as the character Dm 4 b, and in the effect pattern of 20 seconds, a character imitating a rabbit is set. Thus, the data capacity of reach navigation effect is reduced by making it possible to set a plurality of effect patterns by changing the moving speed of the character moving on the time gauge Dm 4 a using the same time gauge Dm 4 a. be able to.

  Further, in the present control example, as described above, since the display mode of the character Dm4b which is the movement display unit is changed according to the movement speed on the time gauge Dm4a, only by looking at the character displayed in reach navigation effect Although the expectation of the jackpot is configured to be predictable, the movement speed may be set to be different using the same character. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the moving speed of the character of the reach navigation effect this time different from the moving speed of the character of the reach navigation effect of the last time different for the player who has experienced the reach navigation effect a plurality of times. There is an effect that it is possible to enhance the rendering effect for the player who has been playing for a long time.

  Furthermore, in this control example, the moving speed of the character Dm 4 b is set so as not to be changed halfway during the first navigation effect. This is to make it easy for the player to predict the length of the first navigation effect. The movement speed of the character Dm 4 b may be changed halfway during the first navigation effect without being limited to this. By setting in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the length of the first navigation effect.

  The second navigation effect selection table 222b2 is a table to be referred to when selecting the second navigation effect using the remaining fluctuation time after the effect pattern of the first navigation effect is selected, and the remaining time storage area 223h The effect pattern of the second navigation effect is selected based on the remaining fluctuation time stored in and the lower one digit value of the effect counter 223f.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 119 (c), in the case where the remaining fluctuation time is 10 seconds, that is, Super Reach (60 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and further 20 in the first navigation effect. When the effect pattern of seconds is selected, the remaining fluctuation time is 10 seconds, so "10 second for the second time" is selected as the second navigation effect regardless of the value of the effect counter. In this second time, the character Dm4b reaches the notification unit Dm4c provided at the end point of the time gauge Dm4a in the first effect (see FIG. 113A), and then the character Dm4b moves on the time gauge Dm4a again It has shown that an effect starts (refer FIG. 113 (b)). In this control example, up to the third movement effect can be set.

  Next, in the case where the remaining fluctuation time is 30 seconds, that is, special reach (90 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and further, the effect pattern of 30 seconds is selected in the first navigation effect, and If the value of the lower one digit of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 3", "second 10 seconds, 3rd 20 seconds" is selected as the second navigation effect, and if it is "4 to 6," [2nd 20 seconds, 3rd 10 seconds] is selected as the 2nd navigation effect, and if it is "7 to 9", the "2nd 30 seconds" is selected as the second navigation effect.

  Then, in the case where the remaining fluctuation time is 40 seconds, that is, special reach (90 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and further, the production pattern of 20 seconds is selected in the first navigation effect, If the value of the lower one digit of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 3", then "second 10 seconds, 3rd 30 seconds" is selected as the second navigation effect, and if it is "4 to 6," the second If "7th to 20th" is selected as the navigation effect "2nd 20 seconds, 3rd 20 seconds", "2nd 30 seconds, 3rd 10 seconds" is selected as the second navigation effect.

  As described above, when setting the effect pattern of reach navigation effect, it is possible to easily create a complicated effect pattern by dividing the effect period into the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect and making it selectable. Can. Further, in this control example, when selecting the effect pattern of the second navigation effect, only the lower one digit value of the value of the effect counter 223f is referred to. As a result, it is possible to independently select a plurality of effect patterns in one process using one effect counter, so the processing load when setting an effect pattern can be reduced. It has the effect of

  Referring back to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (b). As shown in FIG. 118 (b), in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, stop A type selection flag 223e, an effect counter 223f, a round number counter 223g, a remaining time storage area 223h, a fluctuation pattern temporary storage area 223i, and other memory areas 223z are provided at least.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first to fourth areas), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. The information stored in the winning information storage area 223a enables the voice lamp control device 113 to determine the lottery result of the holding ball or the like before the start of the change.

  Similar to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) ), Which is a counter that counts the number of balls (waiting number) of the variable effect pending in the main controller 110 up to four times. That is, the number of holding balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the holding ball number command output from the main control device 110.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can not directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the number of holding balls is managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of holding balls of the variable display is added by entering the ball to first winning opening 64, or the main controller 110 executes the variable display in the special symbol and is suspended. When the number of balls has been subtracted, a pending ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the holding ball number command. The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is stored (see S1708 in FIG. 138). Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol 1 holding ball of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while being synchronized with the number counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b is used for displaying the number-of-holding-ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol 1 holding ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223 b, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball for the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled to display several symbols in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol holding ball number counter 203 a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c is different from the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b only in that it is a counter corresponding to the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e of the main control unit 110, so Detailed explanation is omitted.

  The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1702 in FIG. 138), and is turned off when the setting of fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1902 in FIG. 140). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1705 in FIG. 138), and is turned off when the setting of the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S2008 in FIG. 140). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (in the case of a large hit, a large hit type) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The effect counter 223 f is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 199 used for advance notice effects and various lottery. Although illustration is omitted, the main processing (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated by one each time it is executed.

  The round number counter 223g is a counter for determining the number of times a round in the jackpot game has been executed. The round number counter 223g is incremented by 1 when a round number command is received from the main control unit 110 (see S1804 in FIG. 139), and initialized to 0 when an ending command is received (see S1808 in FIG. 139). ). The value of the round number counter 223g is used when determining a predetermined round game during the jackpot game.

  The remaining time storage area 223 h is a storage area for storing the remaining fluctuation time which is referred to when selecting the effect pattern of the reach navigation effect. In the remaining time storage area 223h, when the reach navigation effect setting process (S2005 in FIG. 141) is executed, the fluctuation time based on the acquired fluctuation pattern is set (S2102 in FIG. 141), and then the first navigation effect is displayed. The remaining fluctuation time after being set is updated (S2104 in FIG. 141), and cleared when the setting of the reach navigation effect is completed (S2109 in FIG. 141).

  By using this remaining time storage area 223h, it is possible to divide and select an effect corresponding to a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol in a plurality of periods. Specifically, when 60 seconds is set as the variation time of the special symbol, information indicating that the remaining variation time is 60 seconds is first set in the remaining time storage area 223 h. Next, any one effect pattern is selected from a plurality of effect patterns having an effect period of 20 seconds to 50 seconds as the first effect. Then, when the effect pattern of 40 seconds is selected as the effect pattern of the first effect, the information set in the remaining time storage area 223h is updated, and 20 seconds is set as the remaining fluctuation time. After that, it becomes possible to select the second effect using the remaining period based on the remaining fluctuation time. As a result, there is an effect that processing when selecting an effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern can be reduced.

  The fluctuation pattern temporary storage area 223i is a storage area for temporarily storing the selected effect pattern in the reach navigation effect in which the fluctuation pattern is selected in stages. In the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area 223i, when the reach navigation setting process (S2005 in FIG. 141) is executed, the main effect selected corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is set (S2101 in FIG. 141), and is selected. The effect pattern of the first navigation effect is set (S2103 in FIG. 141), and then the effect pattern of the selected second navigation effect is set (S2106 in FIG. 141).

  The other memory area 223z also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 138) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is performed. The command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 etc., and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 ( It is to control the fluctuation effect) and the notice effect.

  FIG. 120 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. There is. The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is another model in which the lottery probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one big symbol of a special symbol are different. The display control device 114 is converted into a common part and the cost is reduced because there are models of the same specifications.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read out. As described above, since the speed for reading the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instruction that configures the control program. In the case where a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, described later, in the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237 Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this manner, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234 a or the like. Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured by two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program. From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is used as one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234 d, the ROM controller 234 b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234 c from the NOR ROM 234 d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is a NOR type ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If it has been, the character ROM 234 has to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S1702 in FIG. 34) executed after the boot process (see S2601 in FIG. 109) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a drawing list (not shown) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 111B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform the image drawing process and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is on, and the power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character pattern area In addition to the error message image area 235f, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the game is started to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. When the entry of the ball is detected, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, which displays the lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by the fluctuation effect, is stored.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S4704 in FIG. 123).

  Referring back to FIG. 79, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235 c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The rear surface images prepared in the character ROM 234 (for example, the rear surface A corresponding to the "town stage", the rear surface B corresponding to the "empty stage", the rear surface C corresponding to the "island stage") are all the third symbol display devices The image is longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed at 81, and is displayed by the image controller 237 so that the back image is horizontally scrolled from left to right on the third symbol display device 81. Drawing is done. Thereby, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection.

  The third symbol area 235 d is an area for residence of the third symbol used in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 5) with the numerals "0" to "9" being the third symbols are resident. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 performs the fluctuation effect, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to start fluctuating production quickly. Therefore, after the entry to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 occurs, the first symbol display device 37 changes in the third symbol display device 81 even though the fluctuation effect is started. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the effect is not immediately started.

  In the third symbol area 235d, characters such as a main symbol with a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a symbol with a rear symbol, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to a main symbol consisting of an attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. Be Thereby, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in the demonstration effect, a main symbol not numbered is displayed as the third symbol. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235 e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e, whereby display control is performed. When changing the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but in the character pattern area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading out image data previously resident. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message image area 235 f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is determined in advance.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233 j, a drawing target buffer flag 233 k, a prohibited area storage area 233 m, a demonstration display flag 233 y, and a confirmation display flag 223 z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time elapses with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data It is an area where transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among transfer image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, variation effects, jackpot related Display data tables corresponding to display related to commands, round effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display fluctuation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. When the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the fluctuation effect is also received. For example, when the change effect is started, if the stop type of the change effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the end is finally displayed stop, while the stop type of the change effect is big hit A, big hit B If it is either, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot is finally displayed stopped. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect, and can easily determine the game value to be awarded according to the jackpot type.

  By notifying the short term of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the short term of the normal symbol. The longer the short term of this normal symbol, the more chances of the ball passing through the normal symbol opening 66, so the chance to draw a normal symbol increases, and the chance to hit a normal symbol also increases. . Therefore, the chances of the electric winning combination being opened by becoming a big hit of the normal symbol also increases, so it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 140, and the drawing of the special symbol becomes easy to be performed. Therefore, the longer the short term of the displayed normal symbol is, the stronger the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit can be given to the player, thereby increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game. it can. Therefore, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

  In addition, since the second winning opening 140 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as a winning ball when the ball enters the ball, the electric jackpot is opened as a normal hit of the symbol, and the ball is the second winning opening If it is easy to enter 140, the number of prize balls will increase. As a result, even if the pachinko machine 10 plays a game, it is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls or a state in which the number of balls is not reduced. You can get a sense of the period that you can get the jackpot of the special symbol without it. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the will to participate in the game.

  In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that one of the lottery results of the special symbol being held will be a big hit of the special symbol in the ending effect, the player can select the special symbol in the lottery of the special symbol being held. Since it can be recognized that the player wins the jackpot, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the jackpot of the special symbol will surely be made. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the will to participate in the game.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next change effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has passed since the one change effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to a display related to a game information related command, a display related to a jackpot related command, a round effect and a demonstration effect. In addition, as for the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for fluctuation presentation, if there are 32 fluctuation demonstration patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation presentation pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example) is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. Note that if the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), light in the image Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variation display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined. This back surface type indicates which of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of the "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage") is displayed, or the back surface A to C Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. Moreover, when specifying to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface type is also described together with information specifying which back surface image to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. Also, the range of the rear view image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear surface image different from the rear surface A to C, the rear surface image to be displayed is specified from the rear surface type.

  In this control example, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information (for example, of the range corresponding to the initial position) of the position information together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The start address of the display data table "0000H" describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 21) describes the data table. "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of sprites used in effects specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address Is described. Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined to mean.

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. In “02F0H”), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the display content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list to be described later is created and transfer data From the transfer data table stored in the table buffer 233e, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

  For example, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 adds transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table to the drawing list created based on the display data table. , The drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on change image area 235b of the resident video RAM, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on change image is transferred. , And is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 109) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2605 in FIG. 109). Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process. It is set to off (see S4705 in FIG. 123 (b)).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2901 in FIG. 111B). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see S2911 in FIG. 111 (b)) and the simplified display setting process (see FIG. 111 (b)) so that the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 111 (b) (see S2912) is executed. On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 112 to 118) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 119 to 122) are performed.

  Further, the simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S4601 in FIG. 123A), and the simplified image display flag 233c is on. Since resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 123 (b)) for transferring resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simplified image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. A later-described drawing list in which the instruction contents of the image drawing for the image is described is generated. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame. A later-described drawing list in which the contents of the drawing instruction are described is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data that means that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f one by one. Then (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list described later in which the contents of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame are described.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from which the image controller 237 completes the image drawing process for one frame (FIG. In step S2903), pointer update processing (see S4205 in FIG. 119) is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f every time the pointer 233f is updated, and the drawing list to be described later And transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and drawing the transfer data information Add to list

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Also, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 16, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third pattern (symbol 1, 1 ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2, ···), characters (character 1, character 2, ···, holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ···, error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite, such as a design. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern) Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) The detailed information corresponding to the respective sprites is described in the order of the characters (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number pattern 1, holding ball number pattern 2, ..., error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process (FIG. 111 (b Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S4208 in FIG. 119). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  For all stored sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j stores the image data corresponding to that sprite in the image storage area 236a of the ordinary video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233 j is generated by an initial setting process (see S 2602 in FIG. 109) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233 j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236 a.

  Then, the stored image data determination flag 233 j is updated when the transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) executed by the MPU 231 It will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to “on” which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a. Also, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite always becomes unstored by the image data of the one sprite being stored. So, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

  Further, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j and transfers the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4813 in FIG. 124). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer instruction of the image data is set (see S4814 in FIG. 124). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of the image data is canceled. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c). The first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is 1. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5002 in FIG. 126).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. Every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 111B) is performed, the process is performed (see S5002 of FIG. 126).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The prohibited area storage area 233m is a storage area for setting a display area (small areas Dm11 to Dm33) for prohibiting the display of the character pattern and the point pattern during the period when the character pattern and the point pattern are displayed in the point effect. . In the point effect, since the period during which the character symbol and the point symbol are displayed is a total of three times, the first to third prohibited areas are set according to the respective periods (first to third periods). A storage area 223 m is provided. As a result, different prohibited areas can be set in each period, so variations of effects can be increased.

  The demonstration display flag 233 y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is in progress. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that demonstration is in progress, and if it is off, it means that demonstration is not in progress. The demonstration display flag 233 y is set to ON when the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233 d in the display setting process (see FIG. 119) (see S 4222 in FIG. 119), When another display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d, the display data table is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 115A). This demonstration display flag 233y makes it possible to easily determine whether a demonstration effect is currently being performed.

  The finalized display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the finalized display effect is being executed. Here, the finalized display effect refers to an effect of stopping and displaying (finalized display) the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, one second) after the fluctuation pattern. If the finalized display flag 233z is on, it means that a static display effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the static display effect is not on. The finalized display flag 233z is set to ON when the finalized display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 119) (S4215 in FIG. 119), When another display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d, the display data table is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 115A). It is possible to easily determine whether or not the current display effect is being performed by the finalized display flag 233z.

<About Control Process Executed by Main Controller 110 in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 121 to 135. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer activated periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this control example). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum (in this control example, When each reaches 399, 99, 239), each clears to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, special symbol variation processing for setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed as well as processing for performing display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (S104). After that, the start winning process is executed in association with the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 (start winning) (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for performing display in the second symbol display device is executed (S106), and the through accompanying the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 66 Gate passage processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. In the shot control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the shot is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of the firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 121), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the third symbol This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol and the like performed in the display device 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is currently in the middle of a special symbol (S201). As a jackpot of special symbols, during the display showing the jackpot of the special symbols (including during the jackpot game of the special symbols) in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and special The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: Yes), this processing ends.

  If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B If the mode is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (number of holding N2 of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

  If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation A holding ball number command (special drawing 2 holding ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The pending ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 129) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted values The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223 c are respectively stored.

  After setting the special figure 2 holding ball number command in the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is 0 in the process of S204 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d The value of is acquired (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S270) A holding ball number command (special figure 1 holding ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After setting the special figure 1 holding ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). Thereafter, the process of S213 is performed.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is changing (S202: Yes), has the change time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B elapsed? It is determined whether or not it is (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is set (S215) . The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, the lottery of the special symbol line is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. It will be. More specifically, according to the value of the first random number counter C1 it is determined whether or not the big win of the special symbol, and in the case of the big win of the special symbol, according to the value of the first type counter C2 Whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined is determined.

  In addition, in this control example, when becoming big hit A, blue LED is lighted in 1st symbol display apparatus 37A, 37B. In the case of the jackpot B, the red LED is turned on, and in the case of the jack off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  After the process of S215 is completed, when the variable display under execution is started in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (current lottery result) It is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol (S216). If the lottery result this time is a big hit of the special symbol (S216: Yes), based on the big hit type, set the open scenario of the specific winning opening (S217), then set the start of the big hit (such as 16 rounds Setting (S218), and the process proceeds to S219.

  On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the current lottery result is out (S216: No), it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203t is 1 or more (S220). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203t is 0 (S220: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation counter 203t is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203t is decremented by 1 (S221). Then, when the process of S218 or the process of S221 described above is finished, a stop command is set (S219), and this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 122) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), and the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 1 Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery for "big hit of a special symbol" or "out of a special symbol" is made (judgement or rejection) and This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first hit random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b The respective values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the stop type counter CN1 are acquired (S301). Next, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203t of the RAM 203 is larger than 0 (S302).

  When the value of the probability variation counter 203t is larger than 0, that is, when the present is a probability variation state (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the special for high probability Based on the symbol jackpot random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol jackpot is acquired from the first punch random number table 202a (see FIG. 116 (a)) (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the ten random numbers set in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 116 (a)). As described above, ten random numbers from "0 to 9" are set as random number values for the big wins of special symbols, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number values for these hits. If it is determined that it is a jackpot of the special symbol. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In addition, in this control example, although the determination value determined to be a big hit was made the same in the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol, it is good also as not only it but a different random value. By configuring in this manner, the random number value determined to be out of place in the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and it is possible to suppress the jackpot bias.

  Moreover, in this control example, the number of jackpot random number values is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but not limited to that, it is determined to be a jackpot for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The number of random numbers may be set differently. In this way, by configuring, the probability of jackpot can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol of the higher jackpot probability, the player Can be expected to have a big hit.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when the value of the probability variation counter 203t is not larger than 0 (is 0), that is, when the present is not a probability variation state (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is a special symbol normal condition Since it is (low probability gaming state), based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first random number table 202a for low probability (see FIG. 116 (a)), The lottery result of whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As a random number value which becomes the big hit of the special symbol, one of “0” is set, and when the value of the random number counter C1 per the first and the random number value which becomes the hit match, the big hit of the special symbol It is determined that When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is the jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is (S305: Yes), The display mode at the time of jackpot indicating the jackpot is set (S306).

  In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A or jackpot B). Further, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type, the big hit type is set as the stop type. Next, a fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 117 (a)) based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit (S307).

  On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of removal corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined detachment. Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of out-of-pocket is determined based on the current number of holding balls (S309). Thereafter, this process ends.

  Although not shown, variation pattern commands for notifying the determined variation patterns to the audio lamp control device 113 are generated. When this process is over, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), determines the presence or absence of a winning (start winning) to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140, the start winning Is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing hold processing of the values.

  When the start winning process (FIG. 124, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, entry into the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S402) . Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this control example) (S403).

  Then, whether there is no winning in the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a ball holding ball number command (special figure 1 ball holding ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 ball holding ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The pending ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 129) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b of the RAM 223 Store.

  After setting the holding ball number command by the process of S405, the RAM 203 The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first area of the vacant holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is made the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in the processing of S407 to S412, the same processing as that of the processing of S401 to S406 is also performed for the winning of the second winning opening 140. The process is different from the other in that the process of holding the second special symbol is executed with respect to the winning of the second winning opening 140, and the other processes are the same, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, when it is determined in the process of S407 that the ball has not won the second winning opening (S407: No), after the process of S412, the prefetch process is executed (S413). Thereafter, this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 125, normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), and the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device or the motorized combination associated with the second winning opening 140 It is a process for controlling the opening time of the object 140a and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process (125, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is in the middle of hitting a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol), the opening and closing control of the motorized prize 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made in the second symbol display device. The middle part is included. As a result of the determination, if it is in the middle of the hit of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: Yes), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not inside the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608).

  If the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-short state of a normal symbol (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609). As a jackpot of special symbols, during the display showing the jackpot of the special symbols (including during the jackpot game of the special symbols) in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and special The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

  In the process of S609, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the second symbol random number table 202c for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second symbol per random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 116 (c)).

  In the process of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 Based on the second random number table 202c for probability time, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 116 (c)).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is the hit of the normal symbol (S612), and if it is determined that the symbol is the normal symbol (S612: Yes) The display mode of the hit time is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display in the second symbol display device is finished, it is set so that the symbol of "o" is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is judged whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is a regular symbol short time (S614), and if the pachinko machine 10 is a regular symbol short time (S614: Yes), the present is a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this control example, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible during the jackpot of the special symbol, even when the normal symbol is hit, it is the same as when the normal symbol is detached. The number of times and the opening time of the motorized accessory 140a are set.

  In the process of S615, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. Is set to one second, and the number of times of opening is set to two (S616), and the process proceeds to the process of S619. In the process of S614, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614: No), the process proceeds to the process of S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the opening period of the motorized prize 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is 0 The setting is made for 2 seconds, and the number of times of release is set to 1 (S617), and the processing shifts to the processing of S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is normally out (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S618). In the process of S 618, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time shortening state of the normal symbol (S619: Yes), the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device Is set to 3 seconds (S620), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing is ended. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, compared with the time of low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short with "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and further Since the release period of the second winning opening 140 becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning hole 140.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed ( S 622). In addition, the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621 before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device.

  In the process of S 622, when the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S 622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S 622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S 622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S 623). In the process of S623, if the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "o" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display Set to be On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is out and the display mode is set by the process of S 618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device Is set as When the stop display is set by the processing of S623, the variation display on the second symbol display device is ended when the second symbol display update processing (see S1007) of the main processing (see FIG. 129) is executed next. Then, in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618, the stop symbol (the second symbol) is stop-displayed (lit-displayed) on the second symbol display device.

  Next, when the variable display under execution in the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result (this time lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol fluctuation processing (FIG. 125, S106) is the ordinary symbol It is determined whether it is a hit (S624). If the lottery result this time is a normal symbol hit (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the motorized winning object 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is set (S625), and this processing is ended. When the opening / closing control start of the motorized workpiece 140a is set by the process of S625, the motored workpiece opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 129) is performed next. The control is started, and the open / close control of the motorized part is continued until the open time and the open number set in the process of S616 or S617 end. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S624 that the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), and it is determined whether or not the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66 has passed, In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process (FIG. 126, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball in the normal symbol opening (through gate) 66 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 66 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of holding times of variable display in normal symbol) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this control example) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes the normal symbol opening (through gate) 66 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the holding ball number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is the first of the vacant hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 This process is ended by storing in the area of (S705). In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first holding area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The NMI interrupt process described above is also executed by the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the NMI interrupt process causes the RAM 213 to store power-off occurrence information in the RAM 213. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 128, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, wait processing (one second in this control example) (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). If not stored (S905: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S912. As described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 129, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S912). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S913, S914), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S 907: Yes, while keeping the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the power-off occurrence information (S 908). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery is transmitted to restore the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of the drive power supply cutoff (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  In the process of S910, the rendering permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Then, the interruption is permitted (S911), and the process shifts to the main processing described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic processing of 4 m second cycle, and the counter updating processing of S1010 and S1011 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main processing (see FIG. 129), first, while the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 121) is being executed, output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 An external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 121) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the acquired ball number. Send an award ball command. Further, the ball number command for holding balls set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 122) or the start winning process (see FIG. 124) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the opening command, the round number command, the ending command, the notification command, and the error command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 130) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then the jackpot effect is executed or the variable if the special symbol is in the jackpot state A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether the specified winning opening 65a has a specified number of balls. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning hole 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present control example, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 129), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121).

  Next, a motorized product opening and closing process is performed to control the opening and closing of the motorized product 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 (S905). In the motorized part opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the motorized part is set in the process of S525 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 125), the opening / closing control of the motorized part is started. In addition, the opening / closing control of the motorized prize is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S516 or the process of S517 in the normal symbol variation process are finished.

  Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 123), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol Start at devices 37A, 37B. In this control example, of the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED until the fluctuation time has elapsed. Turn off the light and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, the blue LED And turn on the red LED.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, each time the main processing is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In addition, in the first symbol display update process, the first symbol display device 37A, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processing of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 123) ends. In the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S310 in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 123), the variation symbol being executed in 37B is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol display device 37A. , 37B stop display (lighting display).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S 907). In the second symbol display update processing, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the processing of S520 or the processing of S521 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 125), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device . As a result, in the second symbol display device, the variable display is performed in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. Also, in the second symbol display update processing, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the processing of S523 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 125), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device The display is ended, and the stop symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the processing of S513 or the processing of S518 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 125). Do.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S908), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 ms in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S909) If the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described S901 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing of this time (S909: No), the first main processing is performed until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. 1) The update of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S910, S911).

  First, updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this control example). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S901-S907 changes according to the state of a game, the remaining time until it reaches the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S908, if the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 127 has been executed, so the processing at the time of the power-off after S912 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S912), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S913). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S914), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  In addition, the process of S98 is at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S901 to S907, or at the timing when one cycle of the processes of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time is completed. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S901. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S901. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S901. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be alleviated, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 129), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, a specific winning opening ( Large opening port) A process for opening or closing the opening 65a.

  In the jackpot control process (FIG. 130, S904), first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1001). Specifically, the process of S218 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 122) is executed, and if the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. When the jackpot of the special symbol is started in the process of S1001 (S1001: Yes), an opening command is set (S1002), and this process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot of the special symbol is not started in the process of S1001 (S1001: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1003). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. In the process of S1003, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S1003: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1003, when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1003: Yes), the process of S1004 is executed. In the process of S1004, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1004). If it is determined in the process of S1004 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), a jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1005).

  Here, the jackpot operation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 131 (S1005). FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S1005). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 131, S1005), first, an opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the opening scenario set (S1101). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read in S1101 (S1102). The opening operation of the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set by the data read in the process of S1101. Thereafter, this process ends. In the process of S1102, the operation of the passage solenoid 65k for each round and the operation of the open / close door 65f1 are set.

  Then, the value of the winning number counter 203j is reset to 0 (S1104), the round number round number command is set (S1105), and this processing is ended. In this control example, a command indicating that a new round has been started is set as the round number command. Then, every time the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the current round number can be grasped by adding the round number command. As a result, the amount of data of the command output from the main control device 110 can be reduced. The content set as the round number command is not limited to this, and for example, a command including round number information on a newly started round may be set. By doing this, even if a problem (data stored due to a power failure or the like is deleted) occurs in the data relating to the number of rounds on the audio lamp control device 113 side, the latest every time a new round is started The player can receive no round information, so the player does not feel uncomfortable.

  As described above, since each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at each start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during a big hit game, the big hit game is ended halfway Problems can be suppressed.

  Referring back to FIG. 130, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S1004 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1004: No), it is then determined whether it is the operation timing of the positive solenoid 65k (S1006). If it is determined that it is the operation timing of the probability changing solenoid 65k (S1006: Yes), the probability changing solenoid 65k is set to ON (S1007), and the process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1006 that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1006: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1008). The ending timing of the ending effect is the starting timing of the ending effect when 15 rounds are finished and the open / close door 65f1 is closed and the waiting time (3 seconds in this control example) which is the ball discharging time has elapsed. It is determined as If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1008: Yes), the probability changing solenoid 65k is set to OFF (S1009), and the ending process is executed (S1010). Thereafter, this process ends. Although illustration is omitted, in the present control example, when one gaming ball passes the probability changing switch 65e3, the probability changing solenoid 65k is set to be off. However, in consideration of the case where the big hit game ends without passing the game ball through the probability changing switch 65e3, the probability changing solenoid 65k is set to be off just in the process of S1009. In this control example, the start timing of the ending effect is after the waiting time (3 seconds in this control example) after the game of the last round is finished (the open / close door 65f1 is closed), but the game of the last round is over The ending effect may be performed immediately after the play. In this case, the abnormality processing for the ball having won in the variable winning device 65 may be executed during the ending period.

  Here, the details of the ending process (S1010) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a flow chart showing the contents of this ending process (FIG. 132, S1010). In the ending process (FIG. 32, S1010), first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set (S1201). Then, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1202). If it is determined in the process of S1202 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1202: Yes), 100 is set to the probability variation counter 203t (S1203), and the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1202 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S1202: No), the process of S1203 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  As described above, in the present control example, it is determined whether the probability change setting flag 203h is on at the end of the jackpot game, and if it is on, 100 is set to the probability change counter 203t. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether the gaming ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 and set the probability change. Thus, the player can be expected to shift to the probability variation gaming state until the jackpot game is over. Furthermore, if the game ball is allowed to pass during the big hit game in the probability change switch 65e3, since the probability change gaming state is awarded after the big hit game, whether or not the game ball passes the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit game You can play games with interest.

  Referring back to FIG. 130, the description will be continued. In the process of S1008, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1008: No), the notification process is executed (S1011). Here, the details of the notification process (S1011) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the contents of the notification process (S1011).

  In the notification process (S1011), first, it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1301). If it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1301: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the 12th round (S1305). The determination of the end timing of the 12th round is made in the 12th round when it is detected that 10 balls have been won or it is determined that 30 seconds have elapsed. If it is determined that it is the end timing of the 12th round (S1305: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203m. Thereafter, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the S1305 process that it is not the end timing of the 12th round (S1305: No), this process ends. Here, by setting the 2 second counter in S1305, the notification counter 203m becomes 0 during 3 seconds of the interval time which is the flash time after the 12th round, and the sound of seeing the liquid crystal is It is output. Therefore, the channel solenoid 65k operates in the 13th round, but since the player can draw attention to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the 12th round, the movement of the switching member 65h of the variable winning device 65 is identified, It can be suppressed that the jackpot type is identified to the player. Therefore, the player can play the game expecting the probability change gaming state to be provided until the end of the jackpot game.

  In this control example, by providing the notification counter 203m, effects are drawn to draw attention to the liquid crystal across the 13th round from 1 second before the end of the interval time, but the present invention is not limited thereto. From the 12th round It may be performed continuously.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1301 that the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1301: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203m is decremented by 1 and updated (S1302). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated notification counter 203m is 0 (S1303), and when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1303: Yes), a notification command is set. (S1304). Thereafter, this process ends. In response to the notification command, the sound lamp control device 113 performs setting of the sound output of "seeing the liquid crystal".

  When it is determined in the process of S1303 that the value of the notification counter 203m is not 0 (S1303: No), the process of S1304 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Referring back to FIG. 130, the description will be continued. When the notification process (FIG. 132, S1011) is performed, a winning process is performed (S1112). Here, the winning process (S1012) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing the contents of the winning process (S1012).

  In the winning process (FIG. 134, S1012), first, it is determined whether it is a round effective period (S1401). The round effective period is a period in which a round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the open / close door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that it is out of the round effective period (S1401: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S1401: Yes), it is determined whether or not the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has passed. If it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a is passed (S1402: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is incremented by 1 and updated, and the winning number command indicating the value of the updated winning number counter 203j Set Thereafter, the processing of S1404 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 has not passed (S1402: No), the processing of S1404 is executed.

  In the process of S1404, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404: Yes), the closing of the open / close door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1406). Thereafter, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1407). Thereafter, the processing of S1408 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203 n to ON, it can be determined that the ball is being blown after the open / close door 65 f 1 is closed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1404 that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1405). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1405: Yes), the processing of S1406 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1405: No), the processing of S1408 is executed.

  In the process of S1408, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is a value larger than 0 (S1408). If it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1408: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203k is decremented by one and updated (S1409). It is determined whether the gaming ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3 (S1410). If it is determined that the game ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 (S1410: Yes), the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i is updated by adding one (S1411). The probability variation setting flag 203h is set to on (S1412). Thereafter, the process of S1413 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1410 that the gaming ball has not passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 (S1410: No), the process of S1413 is executed. In the process of S1413, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413). If it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF (S1414). The probability variation effective flag 203 q is set to on (S 1415). Thereafter, this process ends. Here, when the game ball remaining in the special discharge flow path 65e2 passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, even after the switching member 65h is switched by setting the probability variation effective flag 203q to ON, the probability variation Control can be made to set the game.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1408 that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1408: No), it is determined whether the probability variation effective flag 203q is on (S1416). If the probability variation valid flag 203 q is off (S 1416: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203 q is on (S 1416: Yes), 1 is added to the probability variation valid timer 203 r to update (S 1417). It is determined whether the value of the probability variation effective timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in this control example) (S1418). If it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1418: Yes), the probability variation valid flag 203q is set to OFF (S1419). The probability variation effective timer 203r is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1420), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1418 that the probability variation effective timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1418: No), the process of S1410 is executed.

  Thereby, if the probability variation effective timer 203r is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether the gaming ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3, so the probability variation gaming state can be set in consideration of the time of ball swelling. Further, since there is an upper limit to the time determined to be effective, it is possible to prevent the probability variation gaming state from being granted by causing the probability variation switch 65e3 to pass the gaming ball illegally.

  Referring back to FIG. 130, the description will be continued. When the winning process (FIG. 134, S1012) is executed, an abnormal process is executed (S1013). Thereafter, this process ends. Here, the abnormality processing (S1013) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1013). In the abnormality processing (S1013), processing is executed to monitor whether the probability changing switch 65e3 has been illegally passed.

  In the abnormality processing (FIG. 135, S1013), first, it is determined whether it is a round effective period (S1501). When it is out of the round effective period (S1501: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S1501: Yes), it is determined whether the gaming ball has passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S1502). If it is determined that the game ball has passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S1502: Yes), the value of the discharged number counter 203s is incremented by one and updated (S1503). Thereafter, the process of S1504 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming ball has not passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S1502: No), the processing of S1504 is executed.

  In the process of S1504, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1504). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1504: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1504: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203p is incremented by one and updated since it is in the period of the balling time (S1505). The remaining ball timer 203p determines whether the upper limit (3 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1506). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (S1506: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the upper limit value is determined (S1506: Yes), the number of discharged items (total value of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the discharged number counter 203s) matches the number of wins (the value of the number of wins counter 203j). It is determined (S1507).

  If it is determined that they match (S1507: Yes), the processing of S1509 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508). Thereafter, the processing of S1509 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the injustice in which the game ball is made to remain illegally in the variable winning device 65 and the probability changing switch 65e3 passes the game ball even if it is the big hit B.

  In the process of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1509), and the remaining ball timer 203p is reset to 0, which is an initial value (S1510). After that, the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203s, and the probability variation passage counter 203i are respectively reset to initial values (S1511), and then this process is ended.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Controller 113 in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 141. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, referring to FIG. 136, the start-up process performed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S1601). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S1716 is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “temporary stop”) in the current startup process (see FIG. 137). It is judged whether or not it is started during the execution of (S1602). As described later with reference to FIG. 137, when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1715 in FIG. 137), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S1716. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1714 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1602: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S1714 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1603).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, in the specific area of the RAM 223, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written by the processing of S1606. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1603: Yes), the process proceeds to S1604 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1603: No), the process proceeds to S1608.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. From the above, it is judged that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1603: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1604. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S1716 after an instantaneous power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. In the case where it is started to start, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1603: No), and the process proceeds to S1608.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1602: Yes), the current start-up process is performed after the instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S1716, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1604 to start initialization of the RAM 223.

  In the process of S1604, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1604). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1605: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and RAM destruction check data is set (S1606). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1605: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1607), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the decoration lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1608, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1608). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-down process of S1716 is performed (see S1715 in FIG. 137). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1716 is performed, the process of S1608 when the power-off flag is turned on is that the current start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1716 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1608: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1609), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1610). The permission is set (S1611), and the process shifts to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S1608 in the state where the power-off flag is turned off is that, for example, the current startup processing is started after the power is completely shut off, and the processing of S1604 through S1606 is performed. It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1608: No), S1609, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1610, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1610), and interrupt permission is set. Then (S1611), the processing shifts to the main processing.

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1609 is that, when the process of S1608 is reached via the processes of S1604 to S1606, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1604. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current processing of S1701 has been executed (S1701), and 1 ms or more has elapsed If not (S1701: No), the process proceeds to S1712 without performing the processes of S1702 to S1811. In the process of S1701, the process of determining whether or not 1 ms has elapsed is mainly a process relating to display (rendering) in S1702 to S1811. There is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S1712, and the command determination process of S1711 in a short cycle. Since the process of S1711 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1712 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Setting based on the above can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1701 (S1701: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1703 to S1712 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1702) ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the decorative lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1708 described later (S1703), and then the power on notification process is executed (S1704). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1705 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S1705, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S1706). In the customer waiting effect processing, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to the device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of lighting a hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring and rendering process is executed (S1707). This frame button input monitoring and effect processing monitors the input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 has been confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114. Also, monitoring of whether or not a touch operation has been performed on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process is finished, the lamp editing process is executed (S1708), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1709). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33, the lighting pattern of the sub LED 290, and the like are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1709, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1710). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  After the process of S1710, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1711). The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the process proceeds to the process of S1712. In the process of S1712, the variable display setting process is executed (S1712). In the fluctuation display setting process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute fluctuation presentation, a fluctuation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the variation display setting process is finished, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1713). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1713 (S1713: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1715), and the power-off process is executed (S1716). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1717), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of occurrence information of power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1713 (S1713: No), it is judged whether the RAM 223 is destroyed or not based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1714) If not (S1714: No), the process returns to S1701, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1714: Yes), the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the command determination processing (S1711) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1711). This command determination process (S1711) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Further, in this process, when the ball holding ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous advance notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

  In the command determination process (FIG. 138, S1711), first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the main control apparatus 110 It is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern command has been received (S1801). If the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1801: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1802), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S1803), Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 140) described later is executed. And it is used in order to set the fluctuation pattern command for indication which notifies the start of fluctuation production and the fluctuation pattern classification to display control 114.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1801: No), it is next determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1804). When the stop type command is received (S1804: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1805), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1806). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 140) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, when the stop type command has not been received (S1804: No), it is next determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1807). And when the ball holding number command is received (S1807: Yes), it is determined whether the received ball holding number command is the special drawing 1 holding ball number command or the special drawing 2 holding ball number command. , The value contained in the command, ie, the value of special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of main controller 110 (number of holding N1 of the variable display in the special symbol), special symbol 2 of main controller 110 The value of the holding ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of holdings of the variable display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1808). Further, in the process of S1808, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the values of the updated special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c is set. After the process of S1808 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the special figure 1 holding ball number command or the special figure 2 holding ball number command, when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 (start winning), or, the lottery of the special symbol line Since it is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when it is detected, the special symbol 1 holding ball of the voice lamp control device 113 is processed by the processing of S1808 every time a start winning is detected or whenever a drawing of a special symbol is performed. The values of the number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e of the main control unit 110. Therefore, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 Even if it deviates from the value of the holding ball number counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 when detecting start winnings or drawing special symbols. Can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110 or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e. In addition, when the processing of S1808 is executed, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the values of the updated special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c is It is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number-of-held-balls number design according to the number of held balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1807, when the ball holding ball number command is not received (S1807: No), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot related command has been received (S1809). If it is determined in the process of S1809 that a jackpot-related command has been received (S1809: Yes), the jackpot-related process is executed (S1810), and the process proceeds to S1811. The details of the jackpot-related processing (S1810) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1809 that the jackpot-related command has not been received, the process directly proceeds to the process of S1811.

  In the process of S 1811, it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and a process according to the received command is executed (S 1811), and the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used in the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed control device 114 The command is set to be sent to the

  If it is determined in the process of S 1811 that the notification command output from the main control device 110 has been received, the notification voice corresponding to the received command (in the present control example, “see the liquid crystal”) is selected. , And a display command for notification.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the jackpot related processing (S1810) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the jackpot related process (S1810). The jackpot related process (S1810) is a process that is executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 138) that a jackpot related command has been received.

  In the jackpot-related processing, it is first determined whether an opening command has been received (S1901). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S1901: Yes), the display opening command is set (S1902), and this process ends. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during command output processing (S1702) of the main processing (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display an effect that suggests the start of the big hit.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S1901: No), it is then determined whether a round number command has been received (S1903). If it is determined in the process of S1903 that the round number command has been received (S1903: Yes), 1 is added to the round number counter 223g (S1904). After that, a round number command for display is set based on the round number counter 223g (S1905), and this processing ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S1903 that the round number command has not been received (S1903: No), it is determined whether the ending command has been received (S1906). If it is determined in the process of S1906 that the ending command has been received (S1906: Yes), the display ending command is set (S1907), the round number counter 223g is set to 0 (S1908), and this process is performed. finish.

  If it is determined in the process of S1906 that the ending command has not been received (S1906: No), it is determined whether the V-passing command has been received (S1909). In the process of S1909, when it is determined that the V passage command is received (S2016: Yes), the game ball passes the probability change switch 65e3 to execute an effect that suggests that the probability change gaming state is provided, A display V effect command is set (S1910), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the variable display setting process (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S1712). This variation display setting process (S1712) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform variation effects, The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2001). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S2001: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S2007. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2001: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S2002), and then the fluctuation pattern in the processing of S1803 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 138). The fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2003).

  Then, it is determined whether the acquired variation pattern type is a variation pattern type corresponding to super reach or special reach (S2004). When it is determined in the process of S2004 that the acquired variation pattern type is the variation pattern type corresponding to the super reach or the special reach (S2004: Yes), the reach navigation effect setting process is then executed (S2005). Although this reach navigation effect setting process (S2005) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 141, the third symbol display device 81 when the acquired variation pattern type is a variation pattern type corresponding to super reach or special reach. It is a process for setting the reach navigation effect (sub effect) for guiding the main fluctuation effect (main effect) to be executed in.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2004, if the acquired fluctuation pattern type is not the fluctuation pattern type corresponding to the super reach or the special reach, that is, the acquired fluctuation pattern type is the deviation or the fluctuation pattern type corresponding to the normal reach (S2004 No), based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2006). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  Here, the reach navigation effect setting process (S2005) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the reach navigation effect setting process (S2005). In this reach navigation effect setting process (S2005), the main effect to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the acquired fluctuation pattern type and the contents (expected degree, effect period) of the main effect are presented to the player The side effect to be set is set.

  When the reach navigation effect setting process (S2005) is executed, first, display fluctuation pattern information corresponding to the main effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is selected based on the acquired fluctuation pattern type, The fluctuation pattern temporary storage area 223i is set (S2101). Here, the main effect is an effect for informing the lottery result of the special symbol using the effect period corresponding to the acquired variation pattern type, and the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 112) It is an effect performed in the central part of

  When the process of S2101 is finished, the remaining time storage area 223h is set based on the acquired fluctuation pattern (S2102). In the reach navigation effect setting process (S2005), a process of setting the sub-effect in stages based on the fluctuation time corresponding to the acquired fluctuation pattern type is executed. Therefore, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern acquired this time is set in the remaining time storage area 223 h by this processing. Specifically, if the variation pattern type acquired this time is the variation pattern type (variation time 90 seconds) corresponding to the special reach, 90 seconds is set in the remaining time storage area 223 h by this processing.

  Although not shown, in this control example, since the timing at which reach navigation effect (sub effect) is displayed is 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation, a fluctuation pattern type with fluctuation time of 90 seconds is acquired, and the remaining time is stored. After 90 seconds are set in the area 223h, processing for subtracting 30 seconds, which is a sub-production-impossible period, is performed. Therefore, the set time set in the remaining time storage area 223h is 60 seconds.

  Next, the first navigation effect is selected from the first navigation effect selection table 222b1, and the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area 223i is updated (S2103). This first navigation effect is selected using the first navigation effect selection table 222b1 shown in FIG. 119 (b), and the value set in the remaining time storage area 223h and the acquired effect counter 223f The first navigation effect period is set based on the value, and based on the set first navigation effect period, the variation pattern information corresponding to a part of the sub-effect to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 is selected. Thus, the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area 223i is updated. Specifically, when the first navigation effect is selected, the remaining fluctuation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h is 60 seconds, and the value of the obtained performance counter 223f is "80", the first "30 seconds" is selected as the navigation effect period. Then, the effect pattern information corresponding to the first navigation effect period "30 seconds" is selected and set in the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area 223i.

  After the process of S2103 is finished, the remaining fluctuation time of the remaining time storage area 223h is updated based on the first navigation effect period selected in the first navigation effect (S2104). As a result, the remaining fluctuation time for which the reach navigation effect, which is the side effect, should be set is calculated. Specifically, when the first navigation effect period "30 seconds" is selected with "60 seconds" set as the remaining fluctuation time in the remaining time storage area 223h, the remaining time storage area 223h is selected by this processing. The remaining fluctuation time of is updated to "30 seconds".

  Then, it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h is greater than 0 (S2105), and if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is 0 (S2105: No), reach navigation effect The setting is completed, and the process shifts to the processing of S2107. That is, when the same period as the remaining fluctuation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h is set as the first navigation effect period in which the first navigation effect is executed, the reach navigation effect is achieved only by the first navigation effect. It will be set. Specifically, the variation pattern type acquired this time is the variation pattern type (variation time 60 seconds) corresponding to the super reach, and "30 seconds" is set as the remaining variation time in the remaining time storage area 223h. The case where the first navigation effect period "30 seconds" is selected is applicable.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2105 that the remaining fluctuation time of the remaining time storage area 223h is greater than 0 (S2105: Yes), the second navigation effect is selected from the second navigation effect selection table, and the fluctuation pattern is selected. Update to temporary storage area. This second navigation effect is selected using the second navigation effect selection table 222b2 shown in FIG. 119 (c), and the value set in the remaining time storage area 223h and the acquired effect counter 223f Based on the value, the variation pattern information corresponding to a part of the sub-effect to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 is selected to update the variation pattern temporary storage area 223i. Specifically, when the second navigation effect is selected, the remaining fluctuation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h is 30 seconds, and the lower one digit value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "0". In this case, the effect pattern information of “second 10 seconds” and “third 20 seconds” is selected as the effect pattern corresponding to the second navigation effect period “30 seconds”, and the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area 223i is updated.

  As described above, the second navigation effect is configured to generate the effect pattern using the remaining fluctuation time after setting the first navigation effect. Therefore, rather than setting the rendering pattern collectively for all the periods in which the reach navigation effect can be set, the period in which the reach navigation effect can be set is divided into the first navigation effect period and the second navigation effect period, and the effect patterns are respectively set. By setting and after setting, it is possible to diversify the effect pattern of the reach navigation effect, and it is possible to suppress the player from being bored.

  In this control example, a period in which reach navigation effect can be set is divided into a first navigation effect period and a period other than that, but it may be divided into more periods. In this case, in the process of setting the second navigation effect (S2016), it is possible to select an effect pattern that does not use all of the remaining fluctuation period, and after executing the processing of S2016, the remaining fluctuation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h. It may be configured to determine again whether or not 0 (S2105). Thereby, it is possible to set reach navigation effect corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time after setting the second navigation effect in the same processing as setting the second navigation effect, and the processing can be simplified.

  Referring back to FIG. 141, the description will be continued. When it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is 0 in the process of S2105 (S2105: No) or when the process of S2106 is finished, next, based on the information of the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area, the display fluctuation pattern The command is set (S2107). Here, as the information stored in the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area, the fluctuation pattern command for display corresponding to the main effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 set in the process of S2101 and the sub effect The variation pattern command for display corresponding to the effect pattern of the first effect navigation set in the process of S2103 constituting the reach navigation effect that is the corresponding to the effect pattern of the second effect navigation set in the process of S2106 It becomes a fluctuation pattern command for display.

  When the process of S2107 is completed, the information set in the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area is cleared (S2108), the information on the remaining fluctuation time set in the remaining time storage area is cleared (S2109), and this process is completed. .

  In this control example, the main effect and the sub effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 executed based on the acquired fluctuation pattern are set and output as one display fluctuation pattern command. Although the configuration for reducing the number of commands is used, the display main effect change pattern command and the display sub effect change pattern command may be output as separate commands. Thereby, for example, the main effect is displayed on the layer on the back side of the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114, and the sub effect can be displayed on the layer on the front side of the layer on which the main effect is displayed As described above, when the player operates the frame button 22, the control such as displaying or deleting the sub-effect can be easily performed.

  Furthermore, by using the configuration described above, it is possible to easily perform control of outputting an additional command to the sub-effect, and switching the effect pattern of the sub-effect while the main effect is fluctuatingly displayed. Specifically, based on the operation content of the frame button 22 performed during a period (30 seconds in this control example) from the time the main effect is performed to the time the auxiliary effect is performed, it is used for the auxiliary effect It is possible to change the character Dm4b to be played (see FIG. 112) or to change the content of the indicator displayed on the notification unit Dm4c, and it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play.

Regarding Control Processing Executed by Display Control Device in First Control Example
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 156. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to the hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 are temporarily stored in the NAND flash memory 234a after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 states that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, it is necessary to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after specifying the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM can be operated at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs as in this control example. Since it is a memory that can read out data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 immediately enters the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S2201), and the display control device 114 is made to be able to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Launch

  Here, the boot process (S2201) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S2201) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine, and are stored in the third symbol display device 81. A character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is slow especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a as the MPU 231. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the above-mentioned MPU 231 and character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in The control program stored in the two program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S2301). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2302). Thus, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2301.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S2302, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2302, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. Among the control programs, the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2303). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored as data tables. It transfers to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after performing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2304), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S2201 in FIG. 142). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S2202 in FIG. 142) (S2305), the execution of the boot program is completed, and this boot process is ended.

  As described above, when the boot process (S2201) is executed, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are released after the system reset is released from the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed to perform various controls. It is possible to maintain high processing performance, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition using the auxiliary effect part.

  On the other hand, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first are stored by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are NAND flash memory 234 a. Even in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 143, the control program of the predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2301 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, but not necessarily limited thereto, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2301 is a boot program that executes the boot processing to be processed following the processing of S2302. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer The process set in 231 a may be executed. Then, the processing of S2303 to S2305 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2301 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is S2301. And after repeating the process of S2302 several times including the process of S2302, you may make it perform the process of S2303-S2305.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  Further, in this control example, a case was described in which a part of the boot program to be executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process starts, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2303 to S2305 without performing the processes of S2301 and S2302. As a result, since the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, the number of transfer processes of the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary rendering unit in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process ends, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2202). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs to execute display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2203). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination When the power is turned on, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the main image from the character ROM 234 when the power for the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off. When transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2203, then, the power on variation image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2204). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller follows the transfer instruction to transmit the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S2204, next, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2205). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 154A) described later. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed so as to transfer (see S3302 in FIG. 154A).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 of the resident video RAM 235 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144 (b)), it is simplified so that the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image (not shown), which are power-on images, are drawn. The command determination process (see S2508 in FIG. 144B) and the simplified display setting process (see S2509 in FIG. 144B) are executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is third By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 also transfers the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol Since the player starts playing the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) to the first winning opening 64, and the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is from the main control unit 110 by the voice lamp control device If it is via 113, that is, if a display variation pattern command is received, a power variation image (not shown) is displayed immediately during the variation presentation period to perform a simple variation presentation Can. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Also, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, so it takes time to transfer the data, so that the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on becomes longer after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S2205, the interrupt permission is set (S2206). After that, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the processing of S2206, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 144 (a), the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 144 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2401), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 144 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 144 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 144 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2501), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2501: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not a power-on image (not shown) but a normal effect. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2502) is performed, and then a display setting process (S2503) is performed.

  In the command determination process (S2502), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the variation display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the aspect and the type of stop of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped quickly, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 145 to 150.

  In the display setting process (S2503), the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2502) or the like. Concretely identify the contents of Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153.

  After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S2504). In this task processing, based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified in the display setting processing (S2503) or the simple display setting processing (S2509), the image is configured While specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be processed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2505). In this transfer setting process, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the instructions. Also, while the simplified image display flag 233c is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 for normal use. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 continuously receives a continuous notice command and a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the back image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S2506). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S2504), and a transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2505) , And generates the drawing list, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2507). As a counter updated by the processing of S2507, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, complete out, chance) The stop type table corresponding to the eye and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set, and the V interruption processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2501 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2501: Yes), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simplified command determination process (S2508) is executed, and then the simplified display setting process (S2509) is executed. Transfer to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 145 to 150, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2502) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 145, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2601), and if there is not an unprocessed new command (S2601: No), The command determination process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2601: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S2503) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2602), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S2603).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2604), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2604: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed. Then (S2605), the process returns to the process of S2601.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2605) will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (a). FIG. 146 (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. The variation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the fluctuation pattern command processing, first, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is determined, and the determined fluctuation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233 d is set (S 2701).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2701, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is the shortest. Are set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Assuming that the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is the main control device When indicated by 110, while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the fluctuation effect according to the set fluctuation display data table, the next display fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 As another variable display is suddenly started, the player may feel discomfort.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time to the display data table buffer 233 d as in this control example, the fluctuation is actually longer than the display data table set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is ended, the main display device 110 for the next display Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can easily feel the third symbol display device 81 3 You can keep watching the pattern fluctuation.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2701 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and it is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table judgment flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the process of S2701 is turned on, and other fluctuation The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2703). In the display setting process, the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d easily corresponds to which fluctuation pattern by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2703. It can be judged.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2701, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2704), 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 2705). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S2706), the variation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2705, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2701. , And at the same time the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, and the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S2702. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the image data of the sprite required in the variable display data table set in advance from the character ROM 234 for the normal video R To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect defined in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2704, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is ended. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When it is determined in the process of S2604 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2604: No), next, it is determined whether or not there is a display suspension type command among the unprocessed commands (S2606), If there is a display variation type command (S2606: Yes), the stop type command processing is executed (S2607), and the process returns to S2601.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2607) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command process. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, complete out, chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command Is determined (S2801), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter which is updated each time V interrupt processing (see FIG. 144 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on 81 is set (S2802).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2802 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned off. (S2803), and the processing of this type-of-stop command is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the data table The offset information (pattern offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2802 is described. In the above-described task processing (S2504), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2802 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2803, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  As described above, in this control example, the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, but before drawing is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the normal video from the character ROM 234 Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, high drawing responsiveness in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained.

  It should be noted that, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, therefore, command determination processing is executed. In the case where two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, there is no possibility, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously displayed for display It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2801, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set by the processing of S2802.

  Temporarily, if the stop symbol corresponding to "the big hit of the special symbol" is set, in fact, even if it is "the removal of the special symbol", the "special symbol" in the third symbol display device 81 The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, causing the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become the "big hit of the special symbol", which may lower the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, if the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set as in the present control example, in fact, if it is "big hit of a special symbol", stop of complete removal on the third symbol display device 81 Even if the symbol is displayed, the player can be pleased because the pachinko machine 10 is "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2606 that there is no display stop type command (S2606: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot-related command among the unprocessed commands (S2608), and the jackpot If there is a related command, display jackpot related command processing is executed (S2609), and the process returns to the processing of S2601.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 147 to 149, the above-mentioned display jackpot related command processing (S2609) which is one of the command determination processing (S2502, see FIG. 145) executed by MPU 231 of display control device 114. Details will be described. First, FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the display jackpot related command processing for display.

  In this display jackpot related command processing, as shown in FIG. 147, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S2901), and if there is a display opening command ( S2901: Yes) The opening command process is executed (S2902), and the process proceeds to S2903.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S2902) will be described with reference to FIG. 148 (a). FIG. 148 (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233 d (S 3001). Thereafter, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3002), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S3003). Thereafter, the pointer 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 3004). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S3005), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. When it is determined in the process of S2901 that there is no display opening command (S2901: No), next, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2903), and display is performed. If there is a command for the number of rounds (S2903: Yes), the command processing for the number of rounds is executed (S2904), and the process shifts to the processing of S2905.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2904) will be described with reference to FIG. 148 (b). FIG. 148 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. The round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The table buffer 233d is set (S3101). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3102).

  Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3101, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3104). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S3105), the round number command processing is ended, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2903 that there is no display round number command (S2903: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2905). If there is an ending command for use (S2905: Yes), an ending command process is executed (S2906), and the process proceeds to S2907.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S2906) will be described with reference to FIG. 149 (a). FIG. 149 (a) is a flowchart showing the ending command process. The ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233 d is set (S 3201). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3202).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3201, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3203), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3204). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S3205), the ending command process is ended, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command process.

  Here, the description will return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2905 that there is no display ending command (S2905: No), it is then determined whether there is a display V effect command among the unprocessed commands (S2907). If there is a V effect command for use (S2907: Yes), V effect command processing is executed (S2908), and the display jackpot related command processing is ended.

  Here, the details of the V effect command processing (S2908) will be described with reference to FIG. 149 (b). FIG. 149 (b) is a flowchart showing V-effect command processing. The V effect command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display V effect command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the V effect command processing, first, a V effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of V effect indicated by the V effect command for display is determined, and the determined V effect display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. , And the display data table buffer 233d (S3301). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3302).

  Next, based on the V effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3301, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3303), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3304). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S3805), the V effect command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

  Here, the description will return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2907 that there is no display V effect command (S2907: No), the process of processing the display jackpot related command is ended.

  Referring back to FIG. 145, the description will be continued. When it is determined in the process of S2608 that there is no jackpot related command (S2608: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2610), the back image change command If there is (S2610: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S2611), and the process returns to S2601.

  Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S2611) will be described with reference to FIG. 150 (a). FIG. 150 (a) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rear surface image change command processing, first, the rear surface image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3903) of the change of the rear surface image accompanying the reception of the rear surface image change command in the on state is set on (S3401) . Then, among the back surface image determination flags provided for each of the back surface image types (back surfaces A to C), the back surface image determination flag corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on The rear image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S3402), the rear image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S3401 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set in the process of S3402. . Then, if the identified back image type is the back surface B or back surface C, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 Since the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, the transfer instruction for the image controller 237 is set.

  In addition, in the task processing, when it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed by the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S3402 The rear image type to be displayed at the time is specified, and further, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored For the video RAM 235 or for the normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should not be two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously changed to the back image It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S3402, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear surface image change command may be extracted, and the rear surface image determination flag corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the rear image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2610 that there is no rear image change command (S2610: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2612). For example (S2612: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2613), and the processing returns to S2601.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2613) will be described with reference to FIG. 150 (b). FIG. 150 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S3501). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S3502). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the error frame command processing, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3501, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S3502 and A process is performed to display the corresponding warning image on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S3502, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  In the process of S2601 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2601: Yes ), The processing of S2602 to S2613 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2601 to S2613 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in the process of S2601 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

  In the simplified command determination process (S2508) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144B), the same process as the command determination process is performed. However, in the simplified command determination process, from the unprocessed command stored in the command buffer area, the command necessary to display the power-on image (not shown), that is, the display variation pattern command and the display Only the stop type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 146 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 146 (b)), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are executed With regard to the command of, the processing corresponding to the command is discarded without being executed.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (refer to FIG. 146 (a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S2701, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image upon power on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image, which are set and necessary in that case, are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 Therefore, in the process of S2702, the null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the process of clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153, the details of the above-described display setting process (S2503) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 145, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3601), and if the new command flag is not on, ie, off (S3601: No), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed first, and the process of S3602 to S3604 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3605. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3601: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and the new command flag is set to off (S3602). The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing of

  In the process of S3603, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S3603). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3603: YES), warning image setting processing is executed (S3604).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 152, the details of the warning image setting process will be described. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for expanding the image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, with reference to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set Warning image data for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 a warning image of an error corresponding to the flag is developed (S 3701).

  In task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, it is necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle Determine various parameters.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3701, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3702), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3604), or when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, ie, off in the process of S3603 (S3603: No), the process proceeds to S3605.

  In S3605, pointer update processing is executed (S3605). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. In this pointer update process, transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233 f for specifying the address to be done.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233 f (S 3801). That is, in principle, the pointer 233 f is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined at the address "0001H" and thereafter, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so each address Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S3801, then in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233f after the update is End information (S3802). As a result, if it is the End information (S3802: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f is updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, beyond the address where the entity data is written.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demonstration display data table (S3803). If it is the demonstration display data table (S3803: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S3804), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S3805), and this processing ends And return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3803 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S3803: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S3806), this processing ends, and returns to the display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, when the display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, the variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address at which the End information is described Since the drawing contents of are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3802, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the end information (S3802: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 151, the explanation will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3606). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S3606 together with the warning image etc. expanded earlier, and the display coordinate position for each sprite Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as zoom ratio and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3607), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after subtraction is 0 or less (S3608). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3608: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3608: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to stop the variable display and stop the display, so it is confirmed whether the finalized display flag 233z is on or not. (S3609).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag 233z is off (S3609: Yes), the finalized display has not been performed yet, and the finalized display is displayed, so the finalized display data table is first displayed on the display data table buffer 233d. (S3610), and then the null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3611). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time in the finalized display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3612), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3613). Then, after setting the decision display flag 233z indicating that the decision display effect is on in the on state (S3614), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. Then (S3615), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, when the variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As such, the drawing contents can be set. In addition, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3615 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fluctuation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect changes in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, and in the fluctuation display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time ago is described until the predetermined time passes since it is started. In task processing (S2504), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S3615, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3609, if the finalized display flag 233z is not on but off (S3609: No), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag 233y is on (S3616). Then, if the demonstration display flag 233y is off (S3616: Yes), this means that the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less as the finalized display effect ends, so the demonstration display data table is displayed data The contents are set in the table buffer 233 d (S 3617), and then the null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233 e to clear the contents (S 3618). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3619). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3620), the demonstration display flag 233y indicating that demonstration is being performed in the on state is set to on (S3621), this processing is ended, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. .

  As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the finalized display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can set the drawing contents.

  In the process of S3616, if the demonstration display flag 233y is on (S3616: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the completion of the definite display effect, which means that the demonstration effect is ended, so the display setting process is performed as it is End and return to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process performed in the next V interruption process. The demonstration effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the simple display setting process (S2509) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simplified display setting process, the power-on-time fluctuation image according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect due to the power-on time fluctuation image ends A process of setting a display data table that specifies to stop and display (not shown) in the display data table buffer 233 d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2505) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 154A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3901). Then, if the simplified image display flag 233c is on (S3901: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3902) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 154 (b).

  On the other hand, if the simplified image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the process of S3901, that is, if it is off (S3901: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is a resident video from the character ROM 234 It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3903), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 154B, the resident image transfer setting process (S3902), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2505) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 154 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3902).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not transfer instruction of untransferred image data is given to the image controller 237 (S4001), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S4001: Yes) Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer processing of the image data performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction is completed (S4002). In the process of S4002, after the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S4002 (S4002: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4002: Yes), the process proceeds to S4003. Further, as a result of the process of S4001, even when a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4001: No), the process proceeds to S4003.

  In the process of S4003, it is determined whether all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S4003), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S4003: No) A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4004), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

  As a result, transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the data information. In the transfer data information, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data for residence is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here) The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the resident video RAM 235 is not used. To the designated address of the video RAM 235 for residence. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing of S4003, if all resident target image data have been transferred (S4003: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S4005), and the resident image transfer setting processing is ended. Accordingly, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2508 in FIG. 144B) and the simple display setting process (see S2509 in FIG. 144B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 145 to 150) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 151 to 153) are performed, drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed on the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 155) (see S3901: No in FIG. 154A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all residency to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is used. The image drawing process can be performed in Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, image data for frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message in the resident video RAM 235, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made to reside immediately after the display is decided by the display etc., even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings The responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 155, a normal image transfer setting process (S3903) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2505) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3903).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3605) of the display setting process (S2503) executed earlier is used. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S4101). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S4102), and if it is transfer data information (S4102: Yes), character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of, and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM for normal use 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S4103) Further, a transfer start flag is provided which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state (S4104), and the process proceeds to S4105.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information in the process of S4102 but is Null data (S4102: No), the process of S4103 and S4104 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4105. In the process of S4105, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer instruction is newly set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of the image data is completed (S4105), and the transfer instruction is set. If it is (S4105: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4106).

  In the process of S4106, after setting the transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S4106 (S4106: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4106: Yes), the process proceeds to S4107. Also, as a result of the processing of S4105, even when the transfer instruction of the image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S4105: No), the processing proceeds to S4107.

  In the process of S4107, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4107). If the transfer start flag is on (S4107: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag Is turned off (S4108), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S4103 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to the process of S4113. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S4107: No), it is then determined whether the rear image change flag is on (S4109). Then, if the back image change flag is not on but off (S4109: No), since there is no image data to be transferred, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S4109: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so after setting the back image change flag to off (S4110), the back image provided for each back image type Among the determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S4111). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S4112), and the process proceeds to S4113.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S4113, if the back image determination flag in the on state is of the back A, the normal image transfer process is ended as it is.

  In the process of S4113, it is determined whether transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4113). The determination in the process of S4113 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite as the transfer target is the normal video If it is determined that the stored state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S4113 (S4113: Yes), the character ROM 234 does not need to transfer the image data to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, so that the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4113 (S4113: No), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S4114). As a result, transfer data information of transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, it is possible to transfer the image data of the transfer target image from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, transfer) The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S4114, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S4115), and the normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233 j sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on”, and the sub of the same image storage area 236 a as the one sprite This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, when the change of the back image is performed based on the reception of the back image change command in the command determination process executed earlier by executing the normal-use image transfer process, the back image The image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the above can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present control example, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main controller 110. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to send the image controller 237 the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233 f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can.

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, whereby the predetermined is performed according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 156, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2506) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2504) and parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites (display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) The drawing list is generated from the color information, the filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2505) (S4201). That is, in the processing of S4201, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2504), the storage RAM type storing the image data of the sprite and the address are specified for each sprite. The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites to be placed on the front side from the sprites to be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, and then details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as proper drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2505), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , The final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and drawing object buffer information specified by the drawing object buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S4202). Here, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing development of the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236 c as drawing object buffer information.

  The image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands it by overwriting in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and drawing of an image according to the drawing list is performed.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from the frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing object buffer information, and the image information together with the drive signal is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, and the drawing processing and the display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S4202, the drawing object buffer flag 233k is updated (S4203). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233 k is updated by inverting the value, that is, setting it to “1” when the value is “0”, and “0” if it is “1” To be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 144 (b)) is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. The second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of a minute is read. Accordingly, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately specifying, it is possible to perform display processing of an image of one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing of an image of one frame.

<On the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 157 to 186, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In the first control example described above, the gaming machine in which the reach navigation effect is executed as the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81 has been described.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, as effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81, the effect is advanced by the operation of continuously pressing the frame button 22 (continuously hitting) and the operation of pressing the timing well. The combined pressing effect to make it happen, and the slot effect to stop the pseudo symbol variably displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 by pressing the frame button 22 is continuous slot effect with a predetermined period (30 seconds in this control example) The third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a predetermined value (point), and a point effect for executing a specific effect (reach effect) is executed by storing a predetermined number of points. As a result, various effects can be provided to the player, so that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In this second control example, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed with respect to the first control example, and the contents of the RAM 233 and the character ROM 234 in the display control device 114 are partially The difference is that the changed part and the process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and the process performed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is partially changed. The other points are the same as in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first control example, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, among the effects to be executed in the present control example, the composite pressing effect will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 157 (a) is a view showing an example when the composite pressing effect is started in the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 157 (b) is a composite pressing effect being executed at the production notification timing D3b. FIG. 158 (a) is a diagram showing an example when reaching, FIG. 158 (b) is a diagram showing an example when the composite pressing effect under execution reaches the timing pressing period Db1; FIG. 159 (a) is a diagram showing another example when the combined pressing effect under execution has reached the timing pressing period Db1, and FIG. 159 (a) is the frame button 22 operated during the timing pressing period of the combined pressing effect under execution. FIG. 159 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the time when the combined pressing effect under execution has reached the second consecutive hit period Dc.

  The combined pressing effect is a pressing effect in which three pressing effect periods are displayed in combination, and the upper left of the main display area Dm based on the operation result of the player operating the frame button 22 in each pressing effect period. An effect of accumulating the meter of the meter display unit D1 displayed on the side is executed. When a meter of a predetermined amount is accumulated in the meter display portion D1, an advantageous benefit is given to the player.

  When the combined pressing effect is executed, first, the pressing effect corresponding to the first consecutive hit period is executed as shown in FIG. 157 (a). On the third symbol display device 81, the meter display portion D1 described above, a button display D2 for prompting the player to operate the frame button 22, and an effect gauge D3 for guiding a composite pressing effect are displayed, In the lower area of the main display area Dm, a comment column for guiding the effect contents by characters is displayed.

  The meter display section D1 is a display section for finally displaying the rendering result of the combined pressing effect, and the meter is controlled to be accumulated based on the operation of the frame button 22 in each pressing effect (see FIG. 157 (b)) . Then, on the meter display portion D1, a comment of "Reserve meter" is displayed as a comment for prompting the player to participate in the game. In this meter display section D1, "V" is displayed at the right end of the meter at the initial stage, and the meter is accumulated up to this "V" and the jack wins a jackpot of a special symbol as a benefit to be advantageous to the player. Is notified. In addition, the meter area of the meter display section D1 is set to be extended based on the game result of the combined pressing effect and the lottery result of the special symbol (see FIG. 159 (a)). As shown in FIG. 159 (a), when the meter area is extended, “VV” is displayed on the right end, and a benefit (for example, 2) which is further advantageous to the player by accumulating the meter to this “VV” It is informed that the jackpot of the round is awarded).

  The benefit given by the combined pressing effect is not limited to the content described above, and for example, an image not normally displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed or the player is collecting it. Value information (points) may be given. Further, the display modes displayed as “V” and “VV” are not limited to this, as long as the conditions for providing the benefit to the player can be visually displayed. Furthermore, it is not necessary to set the degree of advantage to the benefit given when the “V” is reached and the benefit given when the “VV” is reached, and different benefits may be provided. Just do it.

  The button display D2 is a display unit for notifying the player of the contents of the operation on the frame button 22. The button display D2 is a schematic diagram for causing the frame button 22 to be hit continuously in the first double hit period shown in FIG. 157 (a). The display and the comment of "double hit !!" are displayed. By performing such a display, it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand. The button display D2 is set so that the display mode changes according to the operation status of the frame button 22 by the player. For example, when the player does not operate the frame button 22, the button display blinks. The display is highlighted by expanding or expanding, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the display is changed to a non-emphasized display by reducing or erasing. This makes it possible to suppress excessive display of the game guidance to the player. Furthermore, it is preferable to change the button display D2 to a display that does not emphasize the button display D2 even when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed after the player does not operate the frame button 22. This makes it possible to prevent the player who does not want to perform the frame button operation from being continuously highlighted, and to suppress the player from feeling dissatisfaction.

  The effect gauge D3 is a display unit that indicates the overall flow of the combined pressing effect, and the combined pressing effect is time-sequentially directed from the left side to the right (from the left to the right in the viewpoint of FIG. 157 (a)) of the effect gauge D3. it's shown. The effect gauge D3 is divided and displayed in the order that the pressing effect is executed, such as the first consecutive hitting period Da, the timing pressing period Db1, and the second continuous hitting period Dc, and the present is determined according to the position of the moving object D3a moving on the effect gauge D3. The player is configured to be able to grasp the situation of As described above, in the combined pressing production in which the pressing effects with different operation methods of the frame button 22 are continuously executed, the game can be performed by performing a display that enables the player to grasp the entire combined pressing effect and the status of each pressing effect. It is possible to carry out effects that are easy for the person to understand.

  In addition, since the moving body D3a is configured to move on the effect gauge D3 at a constant speed, it is possible to grasp the period of the entire combined pressing effect based on the moving situation of the moving body D3a. .

  Furthermore, of the effect gauges D3, the effect notification timing D3b is set within the first consecutive hit period Da. The effect notification timing D3b is to notify in advance the content of the pressing effect to be executed during the timing pressing period Db1 executed after the first consecutive hitting period Da has elapsed. When the moving object D3a reaches the effect notification timing D3b during the combined pressing effect, guidance of the pressing effect to be executed in the next pressing effect period is displayed in a comment field described later. Thereby, the mode (the content of the operation of the frame button operation 22) of the pressing effect is suddenly changed during the combined pressing effect, and the problem that an unintended operation is performed is suppressed. It should be noted that when the effect notification timing D3b is reached, the player's operation status with respect to the frame button 22 may be determined, and the effect mode of the next pressing effect period may be set.

  In the comment field provided in the lower area of the main display area Dm, a comment explaining the game content of the combined pressing effect and a comment notifying the effect result are displayed. In FIG. 157 (a), a comment “The automatic continuous hitting is executed by pressing and holding the button” is displayed. In the automatic continuous hitting, it is assumed that the frame button 22 is hit in a pseudo manner by the player performing a predetermined operation (long press operation for 2 seconds or more) during the pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 continuously. Control processing. By executing this auto-continuous hit, continuous-play effects can be enjoyed even for a player who can not press the frame button 22 multiple times.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 157 (b), the case where the combined pressing effect has reached the effect notification timing D3b will be described. When the combined pressing effect reaches the effect notification timing D3b, gaming guidance of the timing pressing period Db1 which is the next pressing effect period is started while continuing the pressing effect by the first consecutive hit period Da. Specifically, a timing gauge Db2 in which the area of the timing pressing period Db1 is extended is displayed in the main display area Dm, and a target to be targeted by the timing pressing effect is displayed in the timing gauge. Then, in the comment column, "Aiming at the center of the mark x, button ..." is displayed as a part of the game information for the timing pressing period Db1 which is the next pressing effect period.

  The timing gauge Db2 is displayed by extending the same period as the timing pressing period Db1. Therefore, it is displayed that the moving object D3a moves the timing gauge Db2 in the same time as the moving time of the moving object D3a on the timing pressing period Db1. Here, since the timing gauge Db2 is displayed longer than the timing pressing period Db1, it is possible to set the speed at which the moving body D3a moves faster than the speed at which the moving body D3a moves on the effect gauge. Become. In addition, by selecting and displaying any one of a plurality of timing gauges Db2 having different lengths, it is possible to make the moving speed of the moving body D3a different. By configuring in this manner, the player can be notified when the combined pressing effect period is displayed to the player using the effect gauge D3 and the moving object D3a moving on the effect gauge D3 at a constant speed. There is an effect that the presentation of the timing display can be diversified without giving a sense of incongruity.

  Further, by displaying the timing gauge Db2 when the presentation notification timing D3b is reached, it is possible to predict the speed of the moving object D3a in the timing pressing effect to be executed this time, and it is possible to facilitate timing. There is.

  In FIG. 157 (b), although the target Db3 for which the frame button is operated by the timing press effect is displayed at the center of the timing gauge Db2, the displayed position is shifted to the end of the timing gauge Db2 and the timing press is performed. It may be possible to set the degree of difficulty of presentation. Further, the target Db3 may move on the timing gauge Db2, or a plurality of targets Db3 may be displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 158 (a) and (b), the case where the combined pressing effect reaches the timing pressing effect period will be described. FIG. 158 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the case where automatic continuous hitting is not performed when the timing pressing effect period is reached. As shown in FIG. 158 (a), an image showing the mobile object D3a starts moving rightward from the left end of the timing gauge Db2. As described above, since the timing gauge Db2 is a display in which the area of the timing pressing period Db1 is extended, the time required for the moving object D3a to pass through the timing pressing period Db1 and the moving object D3a pass through the timing gauge Db2 The time it takes to do is the same. In the example shown in FIG. 158 (a), since the timing gauge Db2 is displayed about eight times as long as the timing pressing period Db1, the speed of the moving object passing the timing gauge Db2 passes through the timing pressing period Db1. It is about eight times the speed of the mobile D3a.

  Further, the target Db 3 indicating the timing of pressing the frame button 22 by timing pressing effect blinks and is highlighted. Furthermore, in the comment column, a comment indicating that the frame button 22 is pressed as a timing pressing effect and a diagram schematically showing that the frame button 22 is pressed are displayed.

  On the other hand, FIG. 158 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the case where the automatic double hit is being performed when the timing pressing effect period is reached. The point different from FIG. 158 (a) described above is that the third symbol display device 81 displays a display indicating that the automatic continuous hitting is currently being performed, and the comment indicating the game content displayed in the comment column is It is a point that has been changed to "Hanase". That is, in the case of the automatic consecutive hit, since the player has reached the timing pressing effect while pressing the button, the player can not press the button in that state.

  Therefore, when it is determined that the automatic continuous hitting is being executed (the frame button 22 is pressed) when the timing pressing effect period is reached, the content of the game guidance displayed in the comment column is from "press". While changing to "Hanase", the operation signal of the frame button 22 (the timing at which the operation signal of the frame button 22 is turned on) is released (the operation signal of the frame button 22 is turned on). Change to when it turns off). As a result, in the combined pressing effect, even if the timing pressing effect is executed in a state where the automatic double hitting operation is performed in the previous pressing effect (first continuous hitting effect Da), the effect is executed without giving a hindrance to the player. can do.

  In the timing pressing effect period Db1 described in FIG. 158 (a) or FIG. 158 (b), the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the moving object D3c reaches the center of the target Db3 (in the case of FIG. When the pressing operation is performed (in the case of FIG. 158 (b), the releasing operation), as shown in FIG. 159 (a), the moving object D3c on the timing gauge Db2 is stopped and displayed at the center of the target Db3, and the timing is displayed in the comment field. A comment of "Perfectness !!" is displayed to inform that the frame button 22 is operated well. Further, the meter display portion D1 is extended and displayed as a benefit for which the timing pressing effect has succeeded, and that effect is notified in the comment field.

  Also at this timing, the moving object D3c on the effect gauge D3 is moving at a constant speed. As a result, the progress degree of the combined pressing effect can be displayed on the effect gauge D3 while the result of the timing pressing effect is stopped and displayed on the timing gauge Db2. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to inform the player of the result of the timing pressing effect and the progress of the combined pressing effect in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Next, a case where the timing pressing effect period Db1 has elapsed and the second consecutive hitting period Dc has been reached will be described with reference to FIG. 159 (b). When the second consecutive hit period Dc is reached, a display for causing the frame button 22 to be continuously hit is executed as in the first consecutive hit period. The difference from the display of the first consecutive hit period described above is that the timing press effect game result is displayed in the area of the timing press period Db1 of the effect gauge D3, and the meter display portion D1 is the timing press effect game result It is the point where it is in the state where the privilege based on is granted. The other display contents are the same and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  Then, when the second consecutive hit period has elapsed, the combined pressing effect result notification period D3d is reached, and the result of the combined pressed effect of this time is notified. Thus, the combined pressing effect is finished. As described above, in the combined pressing effect according to the present embodiment, the continuous hitting effect for performing the continuous hitting operation for continuously pressing the frame button 22 as the operation of the frame button 22 and the timing pressing for operating the frame button 22 in a timely manner The timing pressing effect for performing the operation is set to be continuously executed, and the result of the entire combined pressing effect is set based on the result of each pressing effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to cause the player to actively participate in the game since it is necessary to execute a plurality of types of frame button operations in order to make the effect of the effect sufficient.

  In addition, the player can easily perform the frame button operation since the player has an automatic continuous hitting function for assisting the continuous hitting operation. Here, when the player who is executing the automatic continuous hitting function enters the timing pressing effect while pressing the frame button 22 during the continuous hitting production, the frame button is performed by the automatic continuous hitting immediately after the timing pressing effect is started. The problem that the situation which presses 22 occurs generate | occur | produced. Therefore, the automatic continuous hitting function is provided with a valid period and an invalid period, and the automatic continuous hitting function is set to be invalid during the timing pressing effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent occurrence of a situation where the frame button 22 is pressed by the automatic continuous hitting during the timing press effect, and there is an effect that the effect which the player does not intend can be generated.

  Furthermore, only with the above-mentioned solution, it is possible to prevent the erroneous pressing due to the automatic continuous hitting against the player who has entered the timing pressing effect in the state where the automatic continuous hitting function is being executed, that is, the state where the frame button 22 is pressed. However, there was a problem that it was not possible to participate in the timing press production. Specifically, when the same timing pressing effect as normal is executed only by disabling the automatic double hitting function, a game such as “press the button at a good timing” to the player who has already pressed the frame button 22. The guidance is to be displayed, and the player is puzzled by the display content, and there is a problem that the timing pressing effect can not be enjoyed.

  Therefore, in the present control example, the operation situation of the frame button 22 is determined at the timing when the timing pressing effect is executed, and the content of the timing pressing effect is set at a good timing when the automatic continuous hitting function is set to ON. I changed to the effect of releasing the button. As a result, the player who has already pressed the frame button 22 can easily understand that the frame button 22 should be released with good timing, and can participate in the effect to execute the operation of the frame button 22 in timing. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In this control example, although the pressing effect is switched in a state in which the operation valid period of the frame button 22 is continued by the combined pressing effect, the operation invalid period in which the operation of the frame button 22 becomes invalid while the pressing effect is switched. May be provided. In this case, it is preferable to notify the player of the content of the next pressing effect within the operation invalid period. As a result, it is possible to suppress simultaneous display of the information display on the pressing effect being executed and the information display on the pressing effect to be executed next, so that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be provided. It has the effect of

  Next, among the effects executed in the present control example, continuous slot effects will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 and 161. FIG. 160 is a timing chart showing a flow of continuous slot effects executed in the present control example. The continuous slot effect is an effect in which a slot effect in which the pseudo symbol rotated and displayed by the player operating the frame button 22 is stopped and displayed is performed a plurality of times within a predetermined period (30 seconds), The result of the effect is displayed by combining the combination of the pseudo symbols stopped and displayed in each of the slot effects executed a plurality of times. Specifically, all combinations of predetermined symbols ("AAA", "BBB", "CCC") are stopped and displayed during continuous slot effects, whereby a player can receive a bonus (big hit game). .

  As shown in FIG. 160, when consecutive slot effects are executed, slot effect 1 (first slot effect) is executed first. In this slot effect 1 (first slot effect), the effect period is an effect of 15 seconds, and the operation for the frame button 22 is effective for 11 seconds (between 2 and 13 seconds after continuous slot effect is executed). The frame button operation effective period (BT) to be set is set. The frame button 22 is operated (operation 1-1) during the last 5 seconds (between 8 and 13 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) of the frame button operation effective period (BT) of the slot effect 1 (first slot effect). 2) Then, after the frame button operation effective period (BT) of the slot effect 1 elapses (between 13 and 15 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed), the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop of the effective line 1 row) After that, the process shifts to slot effect 4 (normal slot effect), and the second slot effect is executed.

  On the other hand, the frame button 22 is operated (operation for 2 seconds to 8 seconds after the continuous slot effect is performed) in the first half 6 seconds of the frame button operation effective period (BT) of the slot effect 1 (first slot effect). 1-1) When it is done, the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed within 8 to 9 seconds after continuous slot effect is executed (stop display of effective line 1 row), and then slot effect 2 (first reduced slot effect) ) Is executed. Then, if the player does not operate the frame button 22 during the frame button operation effective period (BT) of the slot effect 1 (first slot effect), the pseudo symbol is not displayed in the stop state and the special slot effect is transferred as it is Do.

  This special slot effect is an effect in which the frame button operation effective period (BT) is not set, and an effect is executed in which the pseudo symbol rotatingly displayed is displayed regardless of the operation of the player. The display mode of one of the effective line 1 to 3 is randomly determined (the display mode is set to 1/3), and the continuous slot effect is finished.

  The frame button operation effective period (BT) is not set in the special slot effect described above, although the frame effect operation period of 11 seconds is set in the slot effect 1 (first slot effect) frame Since the player who has not operated the button 22 may be a player who dislikes the operation of the frame button 22, it is for preventing the effect of operating the frame button 22 again during the slot continuous effect being displayed. It is. By setting such an effect, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling dissatisfied with the effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored early in the game.

  In this control example, the special slot effect in which the rotation display of the pseudo symbol is automatically stopped is performed as the effect that does not set the frame button operation effective period, but the operation of the frame button 22 is unnecessary. As long as the effect to be performed is performed, for example, the slot effect may be ended and a different effect may be performed.

  Next, slot effect 2 (first reduced slot effect) will be described. The slot effect 2 (first reduced slot effect) is an effect with an effect period of 10 seconds, of which 6 seconds (12 to 18 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) operate the frame button 22. The frame button operation valid period (BT) to be valid is set. The slot effect 2 (first reduced slot effect) is performed only when the frame button 22 is operated within a predetermined period (within 8 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) in the slot effect 1 (first slot effect). It is a slot effect to be executed.

  When the frame button 22 is operated during the frame button operation effective period (BT) of the slot effect 2 (first reduced slot effect), after the frame button operation effective period (BT) elapses (after the continuous slot effect is executed The pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed during 18 to 20 seconds) (stop display of the effective line 1 row), and then, it shifts to slot effect 3 (second shortening slot effect).

  On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is not operated within the frame button operation effective period (BT) of the slot effect 2 (first reduced slot effect), the extension slot effect is executed without stopping the pseudo symbol. This extended slot effect is an effect of 10 seconds in the effect period, and the frame button operation in which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid for 6 seconds (between 22 and 28 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed). It is set as the effective period (BT).

  If the frame button 22 is operated during the frame button operation effective period (BT) during this extended slot effect, after the frame button operation effective period (BT) elapses (28 to 30 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) In the meantime, the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop display of 2 lines of effective lines), and the continuous slot effect is ended.

  Subsequently, slot effect 3 (second reduced slot effect) will be described. The slot effect 3 (second reduced slot effect) is an effect with an effect period of 10 seconds, of which 6 seconds (between 22 and 28 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) operate the frame button 22. The frame button operation valid period (BT) to be valid is set. The slot effect 3 (second reduced slot effect) is a slot effect executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the frame button operation valid period (BT) in the slot effect 2 (first reduced slot effect). is there.

  When the frame button 22 is operated during the frame button operation effective period (BT) of the slot effect 3 (second reduced slot effect), after the frame button operation effective period (BT) elapses (after the continuous slot effect is executed The pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed during 28 to 30 seconds) (stop display of the effective line 1 row), and the continuous slot effect is finished.

  Also, even when the frame button 22 is not operated within the frame button operation effective period (BT) of the slot effect 3 (second reduced slot effect), the continuous slot effect is executed after the frame button operation effective period (BT) has elapsed. The pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed between 28 and 30 seconds after being displayed (stop display of the effective line 1 row), and the continuous slot effect is ended. In addition, in slot effect 3 (the second shortening slot effect), the combination of the pseudo symbol which is displayed being stopped when the frame button 22 is operated and not operated within the frame button operation effective period (BT) is a predetermined combination ( The ratio of “AAA”, “BBB”, or “CCC”) is set to be different, and the predetermined combination described above is set to be more easily stopped and displayed when the frame button 22 is operated. Therefore, it becomes possible to cause the player to operate the frame button 22 eagerly.

  Finally, slot effect 4 (normal slot effect) will be described. The slot effect 4 (ordinary slot effect) is an effect of 15 seconds in which the effect period is 11 seconds (17 to 28 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed), and the operation of the frame button 22 is effective. The frame button operation effective period (BT) is set. This slot effect 4 (normal slot effect) is 5 seconds in the second half of the frame button operation effective period (BT) in slot effect 1 (first slot effect) (8 to 13 seconds after continuous slot effect is executed) Slot effect is executed when the frame button 22 is operated.

  When the frame button 22 is operated in the latter half 9 seconds (between 19 and 28 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) in the frame button operation effective period (BT) of the slot effect 4 (normal slot effect) After the frame button operation effective period (BT) elapses (28 to 30 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed), the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop display of the effective line 1 row or 2 lines), the continuous slot effect Ends.

  On the other hand, if the frame button 22 is operated in the first half of 2 seconds (between 17 and 19 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) in the frame button operation effective period (BT), the continuous slot effect is executed and The pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed immediately after the lapse of 19 seconds (stop display of the effective line 1 row), and shifts to the slot effect 3 (second shortening slot effect) described above.

  Also, even when the frame button 22 is not operated within the frame button operation effective period (BT) of the slot effect 4 (normal slot effect), the continuous slot effect is executed after the frame button operation effective period (BT) has elapsed. The pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed between 28 and 30 seconds) (stop display of the effective line 1 row), and the continuous slot effect is ended. In slot effect 4 (ordinary slot effect), when frame button 22 is operated within the frame button operation effective period (BT), whether the stop display of the pseudo symbol becomes effective line 1 row or 2 lines It is set to be determined by lottery, and any one is selected at a ratio of 1: 1.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 161, the display mode of the continuous slot effect described above will be described. FIGS. 161 (a) to 161 (e) are diagrams showing an example of display modes displayed in the continuous slot effect. First, with reference to FIG. 161 (a), the first slot presentation performed first among the continuous slot presentation will be described. As shown in FIG. 161 (a), in the first slot effect, pseudo symbol rows having a plurality of pseudo symbols are rotated and displayed in three rows, and a frame button 22 for guiding pressing of the frame button 22 is schematically shown below. A guide map is displayed and a time gauge indicating the frame button effective operation period is displayed. Further, below the time gauge, a history display unit is displayed which displays a combination ("AAA", "BBB", "CCC") of predetermined pseudo symbols stopped and displayed in the continuous slot effect of this time.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 in this state, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. FIG. 161 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the player operates the frame button 22 and the three pseudo symbol rows are stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 161 (b), the three pseudo symbol rows that have been rotationally displayed stop ("AAA") and the guide map and the time gauge are erased. Then, when the symbol stopped and displayed this time is a combination of the above-mentioned predetermined pseudo symbols, “get” is displayed at the corresponding position of the history display unit.

  Next, when the timing at which the player operates the frame button in the first slot effect is in the range of the operation 1-2 shown in FIG. 160, the process shifts to FIG. 161 (c), and the normal slot effect is started. Also in this normal slot effect, three pseudo symbol rows are rotated and displayed in the same manner as the first slot effect described above, and three pseudo symbol rows rotated and displayed by the player operating the frame button 22 are stopped and displayed. It is. A different point from the first slot effect is that as shown in FIG. 161 (c), the stop display mode in which the effective lines are in two lines is selected as the stop display mode in which the pseudo symbol row stops. Specifically, the left and right symbol rows of the three pseudo symbol rows are normally stopped 2 seconds after the slot effect is started, and the player stops the middle symbol row by operating the frame button 22.

  Then, when the combination of pseudo symbols stopped and displayed in the normal slot effect is a combination of predetermined pseudo symbols, “get” is displayed on the history display unit. Here, when all of “A”, “B”, and “C” displayed on the history display unit are acquired, a benefit (big hit game) is awarded after the end of the continuous slot effect.

  As described above, when continuous slot effects are executed by normal frame button operation, two slot effects (first slot effect and normal slot effect) are performed, and three predetermined combinations of pseudo symbols are performed by the slot effects. The game nature to acquire is provided.

  On the other hand, when the timing when the player operates the frame button 22 in the first slot effect is in the range of the operation 1-1 shown in FIG. 160, the process proceeds to FIG. 161 (d), and the first reduced slot effect is started. Ru. In this first reduced slot effect, three pseudo symbol rows are rotated and displayed similarly to the first slot effect described above as the normal slot effect, and the three pseudo symbols are rotated and displayed by the player operating the frame button 22. The row is an effect that the stop display is performed, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the three pseudo symbol rows are stopped and displayed ("BBB") in the effective line 1 row. Thereafter, the second reduced slot effect shown in FIG. 161 (e) is executed.

  The second reduced slot effect is the same effect as the first reduced slot effect described above, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in the continuous slot effect in the present control example, next, according to the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 in the slot effect which is continuously executed within the specific period (within 30 seconds), It is configured such that an effect mode of the slot effect to be executed is selected. Specifically, the number of slot effects executed during the continuous slot effect is changed. As a result, the player can operate the frame button 22 with enthusiasm, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, the effect result of the continuous slot effect is displayed with the contents combining the combination of the pseudo symbols stopped and displayed in each of the plurality of slot effects executed during the continuous slot effect, and further executed during the continuous slot effect As the number of slot effects is increased, the result of continuous slot effects is made more advantageous to the player. As a result, the player can operate the frame button 22 more enthusiastically, and the effect of the game can be improved.

  In addition, even if the player can not operate the frame button 22 early in the slot effect (first time slot effect) executed for the first time in the continuous slot effect, since the slot effect can be executed three times, the last It becomes possible for the player to play the game eagerly. Furthermore, even if the number of slot effects to be executed during continuous slot effects is small, a plurality of combinations of predetermined pseudo symbols can be displayed in a single slot effect, so the player can see I can give hope to the end.

  In addition, for the player who refuses to operate the frame button 22, a special slot effect that does not require the frame button operation is executed after the completion of the first slot effect, giving the player a feeling of dissatisfaction. Absent.

  Next, among the effects performed in the present control example, point effects will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163. FIG. 162 (a) is a view showing a display example of the third symbol display device 81 when the “normal mode” is selected, and FIG. 162 (b) is the case where the “die mode” is selected. It is the figure which showed the example of a display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 in a case.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is not described in detail, but in the present control example, when the predetermined condition is satisfied (when the frame button operation to shift the game mode is performed, the voice lamp control device 113 In the case of winning the transition lottery), the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to shift between two different game modes (“normal mode” and “circum mode”).

  The "normal mode" is a game mode in which the variation of the third symbol is executed in the main display area Dm, and the predetermined symbol ("rabbit", "turtle", "brave") is reached when the third symbol is reached. ) Is a game mode in which an effect in which any or all of the characters appear is executed. Then, in the lower right area of the main display area Dm, three indicators (P1 to P3) for accumulating and displaying the points acquired by the point effect executed in the present control example are displayed, and any indicator (of them When the accumulated points in P1, P2 or P3) reach a predetermined number (7 points) or more, a benefit (reach effect) is given to the player.

  On the other hand, in "Circle mode", the variable display of the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the small area Dm5, and in the main display area, the player is notified of the lottery result of the special symbol by the progress of the game (not shown) using the dice. It is a game mode in which an effect to be performed is executed. Then, two indicators (P4 to P5) displayed by accumulating points acquired by the point effect executed in the present control example are displayed in the same manner as the "normal mode" described above, and one of the indicators ((4) When the accumulated points reach a predetermined number (6 points) at P4 or P5), a bonus (reach effect) is given to the player.

  First, with reference to FIG. 162 (a), the point effect performed in the "normal mode" will be described. FIG. 162 (a) is a diagram showing a display example in the "normal mode". As shown in FIG. 162 (a), in the "normal mode", three indicators are displayed, and "rabbit", "kame" and "brave man" are associated with each indicator. This is because the type assigned to each character is set in the points (displayed on the third symbol display device 81) given to the player in the point effect, and the type of the points given to the player Points are given to the respective indicators (P1 to P3) according to.

  In addition, the characters “Rabbit”, “Kame” and “Brave”, which are associated with the respective indicators (P1 to P3), are the third symbol fluctuation effects executed in the “ordinary mode” and the display of reserved symbols (not shown) ), And the point type corresponding to the character is set to be easily displayed based on the fact that the character is displayed in the third symbol variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to associate the display mode of the third symbol variation effect and the situation in which the points in the point effect are accumulated. In addition, it is not necessary to associate all of the points given in the point effect with the third symbol effect display, and the point type may be determined randomly. As a result, the points associated with characters other than the characters displayed in the third symbol effect display reach a predetermined amount (7 points), making it possible to give the player unexpectedness.

  Furthermore, in this control example, any one of a plurality of characters ("Rabbit", "Kame", "Brave") appearing in the third symbol variation effect is displayed as point effects, and the displayed character is at that time. The third point is set to be awarded a high point when it matches the character displayed as the subject of the symbol variation display.

  Further, a period for displaying the character as point effect is set three times during one point effect, and points are set to be given at each timing. This makes it possible to further associate the progress of the third symbol variation effect (presence or absence of the main character or the type of the character) with the point effect, making it possible for the player to easily understand the complex effect. It has the effect of

  In this control example, the same character as the character displayed in the third symbol variation effect is displayed in the point effect, but other than that, it is associated with the character displayed in the third symbol variation effect A display (eg, a "sword" associated with a "brave", etc.) may be used. By doing this, it is possible for the player to play the game while predicting the presence or absence of the relation by comparing the display object displayed in the point effect and the contents of the third symbol variation effect.

  In addition, point effects may be associated with other than the third symbol variation effect, for example, when the reserved symbol display is changed to a character, it may be associated with the character to be displayed after the change, which is output from the audio output device It may be associated with the character's voice. As described above, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand presentation to the player by associating some presentation provided to the player with the point presentation.

  In addition, in this control example, points are accumulated in the indicator at various timings during variation display of the special symbol (during symbol variation), and the number of points is the maximum value (the seventh step in FIG. 162). When it reaches), the production which is higher in the jackpot expectation degree than the fluctuation production of the 3rd design which is executed at least at that time is executed.

  Therefore, the player enjoys whether or not any indicator reaches the maximum value by the point effect, and the player can play the game while expecting the timing when the indicator reaches the maximum value.

  Note that an aspect in which points are displayed in the point effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As described above, in the present control example, the “normal mode” and the “diamond mode” are set by the voice lamp control device 114 which is the effect mode setting means as the plurality of effect modes. This setting is set by selecting a command indicating an effect mode based on a variation pattern selected by variation display setting processing described later, which is executed by the voice lamp control device 114. A plurality of effect modes may be settable by operating the frame button 22.

  Then, indicators (P1 to P5) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as step information of a plurality of steps, and the step information is variably displayed by displaying points that are variable information on the third symbol display device 81 Ru.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 162 (b), the point effect to be executed in the "diamond mode" will be described. FIG. 162 (b) is a diagram showing a display example in the "die mode". As shown in FIG. 162 (b), in the “circumstances mode”, two indicators imitating the dice are displayed, and the accumulated value of points is displayed by the eyes of the dice. The two dice associated with the respective indicators are configured in the same display manner as the dice used by the "diamond effect" performed in the "diamond mode".

  As described above, in the point effect of this control example, the indicator is displayed in the display mode related to the game mode being executed, as described above, so that the display giving a sense of discomfort to the player in each effect is suppressed be able to.

  Further, in each game mode, since the types of points accumulated by point effects and the upper limit value are set to be different, it is possible to enjoy different point effects for each game mode. In addition, about the point given in point production, the point standard value given beforehand is determined, the point standard value is converted so that it may correspond to the indicator display of the game mode currently performed, and the converted point is It may be configured to give to the player. This can simplify control for giving points.

  Furthermore, when the game mode is switched while the point effect is being executed, the points stored in the indicator may be converted to points corresponding to the game mode of the transition destination and displayed. In this case, the point reference value corresponding to the point already given during the point effect is stored in a storage area (not shown) formed in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 114 which is the step information storage means. The point reference value stored at the timing of transition may be converted to correspond to the indicator display of the game mode of the transition destination, and control may be performed to perform display. Thereby, the indicator display corresponding to the game mode can be executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 163, the points displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 in the point effect will be described. FIG. 163 (a) is a schematic view showing the main display area Dm, and FIG. 163 (b) is a view showing an example of effect display performed in the main display area Dm. In this control example, the display location of the points (points displayed in the main display area Dm) to be awarded to the player by the point effect is based on the display pattern of the third symbol variation effect executed in the main display area Dm. It is decided. As a result, it is suppressed that the point displayed in the main display area Dm and the third symbol variation effect overlap to give the player a sense of discomfort.

  First, as shown in FIG. 163 (a), in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the main display area Dm is divided into a plurality of small areas (small areas Dm11-13, Dm21-23, Dm31-33) based on the coordinate axes. It is done. The portion where the point is displayed is determined in units of the divided small area. In this control example, since the display mode for displaying points in units of small areas is stored in advance, it is assumed that the small area where the point display is currently performed is determined based on the effect mode of the third symbol variation effect. The point display image stored in advance corresponding to the small area is configured to be displayed in the main display area Dm. Therefore, in the case of executing the point display, it is sufficient to execute only the process of determining the display part, and it is possible to simplify the process.

  Note that a method other than the point display control used in this control may be used. For example, first, a point display image to be executed in the point display of this time is determined, and then a control to determine a small area in which the point is displayed is determined. Good.

  Also, in the present control example, the main display area Dm is divided into nine, but it may be divided into more than that number, and instead of performing point display in one small area, a plurality of small areas The point display may be performed using

  Next, a specific example of the point display will be described with reference to FIG. When performing point display while the effect shown in FIG. 163 (b) is being executed as the third symbol variation effect, first, the small region used in the third symbol variation effect and the small region not used A small area (small area Dm11 to Dm13) not used for the third symbol variation effect is determined as a result of the discrimination, that is, an allowable area for allowing point display is set.

  Then, an image relating to “Brave” is displayed as a character indicating an indicator to which a point is given to the selected small area Dm12 out of the small areas (small areas Dm11 to Dm13) set in the allowable area. Then, display of two points is performed in the selected small area Dm11 of the remaining allowable areas (small areas Dm11 and Dm13). In this case, since the hero Dc1 is displayed as the main image of the third symbol variation effect, two points of the indicator corresponding to the hero among the indicators shown in FIG. 162 (a) are stored.

  In this control example, by displaying an image the same as or related to the character that is the main body of the third symbol variation effect, the points that the player can acquire are higher than when the other images are displayed. It is set. Therefore, the player compares the character image displayed in the point effect before the point is displayed with the character image that is the main subject of the third symbol variation effect, and whether the points that can be acquired in the point effect this time are high Can be predicted. Therefore, it can be seen while expecting the continuation of the effect, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In this control example, a character image is displayed in point effect, and points are given to an indicator corresponding to the character image. However, other configurations may be used, for example, timing at which point display is performed. In the above, points may be stored in the indicator corresponding to the character that is the main body of the third symbol variation effect.

  Furthermore, for example, the hold image displayed on the hold display unit may be changed to a character image displayed as point effect. In this case, it is difficult for the player to make it difficult to determine whether the cause of the change in the reserve image is due to point effects or whether the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the change reserve image indicates the expectation of becoming a big hit. Can be made to pay attention to the effect to be executed later.

  As described above, the display location of the points is set according to the effect display mode of the third symbol variation effect, and furthermore, since the points are distributed based on the character displayed in the third symbol variation effect, the game It is possible to perform point presentation that is easy for the person to understand.

  If there are multiple small areas where points can be displayed, it is possible to select a point where points are displayed based on the number of points given and the result of the third symbol variation effect (lottery result of a special symbol) Good. For example, in the case of FIG. 163 (b), when the point displayed this time is 1 point (low point) or the lottery result of the special symbol this time is out, of the small areas Dm11 to Dm13 which can be point displayed, A point is displayed on a small area Dm13 in the vicinity of the "monster" which is an enemy character as the main character of the third symbol variation effect, and the point displayed this time is 2 points (high points) or the lottery result of the current special symbol is hit In this case, it is preferable to perform point display in a small area Dm11 near the “brave” who is the main character as a main component of the third symbol variation effect among the small areas Dm11 to Dm13 in which points can be displayed. As a result, it becomes possible to predict in advance whether or not the lottery of the special symbol of this time is a big hit by grasping the location where the player displays the point. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Moreover, in this control example, although the small area used in the third symbol variation production is set as an area where point display is not performed, for example, with the main body of the third symbol fluctuation presentation in one small area The proportion of the exclusive image may be calculated, and if the proportion is equal to or less than a predetermined amount (10% or less), the small area may be determined as an area capable of point display. Thereby, it becomes possible to perform point display in the vicinity of the main image displayed in the third symbol variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a defect that the player watching the third symbol variation effect misses the point display.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Second Control Example
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 to 168. FIG. First, with reference to FIGS. 164 to 167, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described.

  FIG. 164 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 164 (a), the ROM 222 in this control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a pressing scenario table 222c, a character selection table 222d, and a point selection table 222e are added. The other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the details of the pressing scenario table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 165 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the pressing scenario table 222c. As shown in FIG. 165 (a), in the pressing scenario table 222c, a normal pressing scenario 222c1, a long pressing scenario 222c2, and a combined pressing scenario 222c3 are set.

  FIG. 165 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the normal pressing scenario 222c1. In the normal pressing scenario 222c1, a period (normal pressing period) in which a normal button pressing becomes valid is determined according to the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k (that is, the elapsed time since the fluctuation display is started). It is a scenario. The information on the normal pressing scenario 222c1 is set in the pressing scenario storage area 223m when the normal pressing effect is selected as the variation pattern, and is a normal pressing period based on the information on the set pressing scenario storage area 223m. Is determined.

  In addition, timing types are set in periods in which button pressing is valid. By executing (displaying) the effect according to the timing type, it is possible to execute (display) the effect according to the pressing timing of the frame button 22.

  Specifically, in the normal pressing scenario 222c1, a normal pressing period is set as the pressing period type with respect to the values “5001 to 9000” of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. "OK" is set as the timing type. Although details will be described later, the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k is 0 when the variable display is started, and then 1 is added every 1 ms, so the period of 5001 ms to 9000 ms from the start of the fluctuation is determined as the normal pressing period. It will be done.

  Then, information "END" indicating the end of the pressing scenario is stored for the value "15001" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. That is, when 15001 ms has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, the information of “END” is acquired, and the termination processing of the pressing effect is executed.

  In the case of the values “0 to 5000” and “9001 to 15000” of the pressing effect scenario counter 223 k, there is no setting of the pressing period type, and the button pressing becomes an invalid period.

  Next, FIG. 165 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the long press and hold scenario 222c2. In the long press and hold scenario 222c2, a period (long press and hold period) in which the long press and the button press become effective is determined according to the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k (that is, the elapsed time after the fluctuation display is started). Scenario. The information of the long press and hold scenario 222c2 is set in the press scenario storage area 223m when the long press and press effect is selected as the variation pattern, and based on the information of the set press scenario storage area 223m, the long press and hold period Is determined.

  Specifically, in the long press and hold scenario 222c2, a long press and hold period is set as the press period type for the value "5001 to 12000" of the press effect scenario counter 223k, and "OK" is set as the timing type. There is. That is, a period of 5001 ms to 12000 ms from the start of fluctuation is determined as the long press and hold period. The long press pressing period is a period to determine whether the frame button 22 has been pressed for a predetermined period (two seconds or more in the present control example) or not. In the long press depression effect, a predetermined effect (for example, an effect in which a character of “long press success!” Is displayed) is performed based on the long press operation being performed in the long press depression period.

  Then, information "END" indicating the end of the pressing scenario is stored for the value "15001" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. That is, when 15001 ms has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, the information of “END” is acquired, and the termination processing of the pressing effect is executed.

  In the case of the values “0 to 5000” and “9001 to 15000” of the pressing effect scenario counter 223 k, there is no setting of the pressing period type, and the button pressing becomes an invalid period.

  Next, FIG. 165 (d) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the composite pressing scenario 222c3. The composite pressing scenario 222c3 is a scenario in which a period in which pressing of a plurality of types of buttons is valid is determined according to the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k (that is, the elapsed time since the variable display is started). The information of the composite pressing scenario 222c3 is set in the pressing scenario storage area 223m when the composite pressing effect is selected as the variation pattern, and it is various pressing periods based on the information of the pressing scenario storage area 223m set. Is determined. In the present embodiment, only one type of composite pressing scenario is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types may be provided.

  Specifically, in the composite pressing scenario 222 c 3, an auto pressing period is set as the pressing period type for the values “5001 to 12000” of the pressing effect scenario counter 223 k, and “OK” is set as the timing type. That is, a period of 5001 ms to 12000 ms from the start of fluctuation is determined as the auto pressing period. The auto pressing period is a period in which the auto pressing is performed based on pressing of the frame button 22 for a predetermined period (two seconds or more in this control example). In the auto-press effect, based on the long-press operation being performed in the auto-press period, the effect as the frame button 22 is pressed every one second while the long-press operation continues (for example, the frame button The effect of increasing the gauge is executed by 22 consecutive hits.

  The release period is set for the value "12001 to 13200" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k as the pressing period type as the pressing period type, and the normal pressing effect is set when the non-automatic pressing is performed, "NG" is set as the timing type.

  The release period is set for the value “13201 to 13800” of the pressing effect scenario counter 223 k as the pressing period type as the pressing period type, and the normal pressing effect is set when the non-automatic pressing is performed, "OK" is set as the timing type.

  For the value "13801 to 15000" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, the release period is set when the automatic pressing is performed as the pressing period type, and the normal pressing effect is set when the non-automatic pressing is performed, "NG" is set as the timing type.

  That is, when the auto-pressing is performed, a release effect which is an effect of releasing the frame button 22 is displayed, and by releasing the frame button 22 in a period of 13201 ms to 13800 ms from the start of fluctuation, an effect based on the “OK” timing type ( For example, the characters "Good timing!" Are displayed. On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is released during 12001 ms to 13200 ms or 13801 ms to 15000 ms, effects based on the timing type of “NG” (for example, characters “bad timing!”) Are displayed.

  In the case of non-automatic pressing, a normal pressing effect which is an effect of pressing the frame button 22 is displayed, and the frame button 22 is pressed in a period of 13201 ms to 13800 ms from the start of fluctuation, based on the timing type of "OK". An effect (for example, the characters "Good timing!") Is displayed. On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is pressed during 12001 ms to 13200 ms or 13801 ms to 15000 ms, an effect based on the timing type of "NG" (for example, characters of "bad timing!") Is displayed.

  The automatic pressing effect is set for the values “15001 to 18000” of the pressing effect scenario counter 223 k, and “OK” is set as the timing type.

  Then, information of "END" indicating the end of the pressing scenario is stored for the value "20001" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. That is, when 20001 ms has elapsed from the start of the change, the information of “END” is acquired, and the processing of ending the combined pressing effect is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 166, the details of the character selection table 222d provided in the ROM 222 in the present control example will be described. FIG. 166 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the character selection table 222d.

  As shown in FIG. 166 (a), the character selection table 222d is provided with a winning character selection table 222d1 and a separation character selection table 222d2.

  First, the contents of the hit character selection table 222d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 166 (b). FIG. 166 (b) is a table for determining the character to be displayed in the first to third periods of point effect when the judgment result of the large hit is the large hit, and the character corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223f Is the specified table.

  Although the effect counter 223f is not shown, it has three independent counters, and when selecting a character in each period, the selection is performed using different counters. As a result, variations of the characters displayed in the first to third periods can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Specifically, in the winning character selection table 222d1, "Brave" is defined as a character corresponding to the value "0 to 49" of the effect counter 223f, and corresponds to the value "50 to 100" of the effect counter 223f. "Rabbit" is defined as the character, and "Kame" is defined as the character corresponding to the value "101 to 149" of the effect counter 223f. As the character corresponding to the value "150 to 199" of the effect counter 223f, "the same character as the type of point effect" is defined, and a character (brave, rabbit, or frog) that performs the main effect in the point effect The same character will be selected.

  That is, in the point effect executed when the determination result of the big hit is a big hit, the same character as the character performing the main effect in the point effect is likely to be displayed in the first to third periods. Since the player plays the game expecting that the same character as the character performing the main effect in the point effect is displayed in the first to third periods, the player's interest can be improved.

  Next, the contents of the release character selection table will be described with reference to FIG. 166 (c). FIG. 166 (c) is a table for determining the character to be displayed in the first to third periods of point effect when the judgment result of the jackpot is out, and the character corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223f Is the specified table.

  Specifically, "brave man" is specified in the off character selection table 222d2 as a character corresponding to the value "0 to 65" of the effect counter 223f, and corresponds to the value "66 to 132" of the effect counter 223f. "Rabbit" is defined as the character, and "Kame" is defined as the character corresponding to the value "133 to 199" of the effect counter 223f.

  Next, details of the point selection table 222e provided in the ROM 222 in the present control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 167 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the point selection table 222e.

  As shown in FIG. 167 (a), the point selection table 222e is provided with a winning point selection table 222e1 and a separation point selection table 222e2.

  First, the contents of the hit point selection table 222e1 will be described with reference to FIG. 167 (b). FIG. 167 (b) is a table for determining the points to be displayed in the first to third periods of point effects when the determination result of the large hit is a large hit, and the points corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223f Is the specified table. When selecting points in each period, the selection is performed using different counters, as in the case of character selection. Thereby, the variation of the points displayed in the first to third periods can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Specifically, in the winning point selection table 222e1, "1" is defined as a point corresponding to the value "0 to 2" of the lower one digit of the effect counter 223f, and the value of the lower one digit of the effect counter 223f "2" is defined as a point corresponding to "3 to 6", and "3" is defined as a point corresponding to the lower one digit value "7 to 9" of the effect counter 223f.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 167 (c), “1” is defined as the point corresponding to the value “0 to 4” of the lower one digit of the effect counter 223f in the point selection table for departure 222e1. "2" is defined as a point corresponding to the lower digit "5 to 7" of the counter 223f, and "3" is defined as a point corresponding to the lower digit "8 to 9" of the effect counter 223f. It is prescribed.

  Therefore, the winning point selection table 222e1 is configured to be easier to select a point higher than the departure point selection table 222e2. That is, when the determination result of the jackpot is a jackpot, high points are easily displayed in the first to third periods of the point effect. As a result, since the player plays a game expecting high points to be displayed in the first to third periods of point effects, the player's interest can be improved.

  Referring back to FIG. 164, the description will be continued. FIG. 164 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 142, the RAM 223 in this control example has a pressing effect flag 223j, a pressing effect scenario counter 223k, a pressing scenario storage area 223m, a slot effect flag 223n, and a slot effect counter 223p with respect to the RAM 223 in the first control example. , And a slot effect state 223 q is added, the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The depression effect flag 223j is a flag for determining whether or not the depression effect is being executed (displayed), and indicates that the depression effect is being executed (displayed) if it is on, and is depressed if it is off Indicates that the effect is not performed (displayed). The depression effect flag 223j is set to ON (FIG. 170: Yes) when it is determined that the acquired fluctuation pattern is the depression effect in the fluctuation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170). See S2031). Then, it is referred to determine whether or not the pressing effect is being performed in the pressing effect setting process (see FIG. 172) (see S4401 in FIG. 172), and is set to off at the end of the pressing effect (S4416 in FIG. 172). reference).

  The pressing effect scenario counter 223k is a counter for counting an elapsed time from when the fluctuation display in which the pressing effect is set is started. This pressing effect scenario counter 223k is incremented by one each time it is determined that pressing effect is being performed in the pressing effect setting process (see FIG. 172) (see S4402 in FIG. 172), and is initialized to 0 when the pressing effect ends. (See S4415 in FIG. 172). Since the pressing effect setting process is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169), the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k is incremented by 1 every 1 ms. Whether the button pressing is valid based on the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k (the elapsed time since the fluctuation display is started) and the pressing scenario stored in the pressing scenario storage area 223m described later Whether or not it is determined.

  The pressed scenario storage area 223 m is an area for storing the pressed scenario stored in the above-described pressed scenario table 222 c. In this pressing scenario storage area 223m, when the variation pattern in which the pressing effect is set is acquired in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), the pressing scenario corresponding to the setting pressing effect is set. (See S2033 in FIG. 170). Based on the pressing scenario set in the pressing scenario storage area 223m and the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k described above, it is determined whether or not the button pressing is a valid period.

  The slot effect flag 223n is a flag for determining whether the slot effect is being executed (displayed), and indicates that the slot effect is being executed (displayed) if it is on, and it is a slot if it is off Indicates that the effect is not performed (displayed). This slot effect in-progress flag 223n is set to ON (FIG. 170: Yes) when it is determined that the acquired change pattern is slot effect in the change display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170). See S2305). Then, in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), reference is made to determine whether or not slot effect is in progress (see S4601 in FIG. 174), and is set to off when the slot effect is ended (see FIG. 174). See S4617 in FIG. 174).

  The slot effect counter 223p is a counter for counting an elapsed time after the set variable display of the slot effect is started. The slot effect counter 223p is incremented by one (S4603 in FIG. 174) when it is determined that slot effects are being performed (S4601 in FIG. 174: Yes) in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174). Since the slot effect setting process is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169), the value of the slot effect counter 223p is incremented by 1 every 1 ms. The value of the slot effect counter 223p is a slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), a first slot effect in progress process (see FIG. 175), a normal slot effect in progress process (see FIG. 176), and a first reduced slot effect in progress process (FIG. 177). Reference is made in the second shortening slot effect processing (see FIG. 178) and the extension slot effect processing (see FIG. 179).

  The slot effect state 223 q is an area in which information indicating the state of slot effect is stored, and during the first slot effect, during normal slot effect, during the first reduced slot effect, during the second reduced slot effect, during the extended slot effect The corresponding value is stored. In the slot effect state 223q, the first slot effect is set when it is determined that the slot effect is set to the acquired change pattern in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) (S2034 in FIG. 170: Yes) (See S2036 in FIG. 170). In the first slot effect presentation process (see FIG. 175), the normal slot effect is set when the normal slot effect is selected (see S4705 in FIG. 175), and the first reduced slot effect is selected when the first reduced slot effect is selected. The effect is set (see S4707 in FIG. 175), and the special slot effect is set when the special slot effect is selected (see S4712 in FIG. 175). When the display slot stop command for the stop mode in which 2 symbols are aligned is set in the normal slot effect processing (see FIG. 176), the end waiting state is set (see S4805 in FIG. 176), and the second reduced slot effect When the display slot effect command corresponding to is set, the second reduced slot effect is set (see S4807 in FIG. 176). In the first reduction slot effect processing (see FIG. 177), the second reduction slot effect is set when the second reduction slot effect is selected (see S4904 in FIG. 177), and the extension slot effect is selected. An extension slot effect is set (see S4908 in FIG. 177). In the second reduction slot effect processing (see FIG. 178), when the display slot stop effect command for the stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set, the end waiting state is set (see S5005 in FIG. 178). In the extension slot effect in-progress process (see FIG. 179), when setting a stop slot effect command for display of a stop mode in which two symbols are aligned, an end waiting state is set (see S5105 in FIG. 179). Then, in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), it is referred to in order to determine which slot effect is being executed (displayed), and cleared at the end of the slot effect (see S4619 in FIG. 174).

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. The display control device 114 in this control example is different from the first control example in that the contents of the work RAM 233 and the character ROM 234 are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 168, in the work RAM 233 in this control example, a prohibited area storage area 233 m is added to the first control example. The prohibited area storage area 233m is a small area of a display area consisting of a total of 9 areas obtained by vertically dividing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 into three up and down left and right (Dm11 to Dm31, see FIG. 163) Is stored, and the display area corresponding to the stored information is controlled so as not to display a character pattern and a point pattern. Specifically, when Dm11, Dm12, and Dm13 are stored as information indicating a display area in the prohibited area storage area 233m, for example, it does not correspond to the display area stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m (Dm11, Do not display on Dm12, Dm13) Character pattern and point pattern are selected and point effect is executed. In addition, after the character design is selected, the prohibited area storage area 233m is updated based on the display area where the selected character design is displayed, and then the point design is selected. This can prevent the character pattern and the point pattern from being displayed redundantly in the same display area. When all display areas are stored in the prohibited area storage area 233 m when selecting a point pattern, overlapping display is performed by combining (or reducing) image data of the character pattern and the point pattern. It may be prevented, or one of the character symbol and the point symbol may not be displayed.

  The character ROM 234 in this control example has a character data table 234a3 and a point data table 234a4 added to the first control example.

  The character data table 234a3 is a table in which image data for displaying a character pattern in the point effect described above is stored. The character data table 234a3 stores display information of the character symbol displayed in the first to third periods in the point effect, and in the point effect command processing (see FIG. 186), the character information of the command received is stored. Display information of the corresponding character pattern is set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  The display information of the character pattern includes information on the small area (Dm11 to Dm33) displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the small area (Dm11 to Dm33) stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m The display information that matches with is processed so as not to be selected. Thus, the character pattern can be prevented from being displayed in the display area stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m. For example, the point pattern and the character pattern displayed in the point effect are displayed in an overlapping manner. It can be done not to

  The point data table 234a4 is a table in which image data for displaying a point symbol in the point effect described above is stored. The point data table 234a4 stores the display information of the point symbol displayed in the first to third periods in the point effect, and in the point effect command processing (see FIG. 186), it is used as point information of the received command. Display information of the corresponding point symbol is set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  The display information on the point symbol includes information on the small area (Dm11 to Dm33) displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the small area (Dm11 to Dm33) stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m The display information that matches with is processed so as not to be selected. Thereby, since it is possible to prevent the point symbol from being displayed in the display area stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m, for example, the point symbol and the character pattern displayed in the point effect are displayed in an overlapping manner. It can be done not to

<About Control Process Executed by Main Controller 110 in Second Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 169 to 179, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. In this control example, the main processing 2 (see FIG. 169) is modified to execute the pressing effect setting process (S1731) and the slot effect setting process (S1732) in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169). The difference is that the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 169) is executed instead of the display setting process (see FIG. 140), and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, main processing 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the main process 2, the processes of S1701 to S1710 are executed as in the main process (see FIG. 101) in the first control example described above.

  When the process of S1710 is finished, the depression effect setting process is executed (S1731), the slot effect setting process is executed (S1732), and the process proceeds to S1711. Then, the command determination process is executed (S1711), the variable display setting process 2 is executed (S1712), and the process shifts to the process of S1713. After S1713, the processes of S1713 to S1717 are executed as in the first control example described above.

  Here, the details of the variable display setting process 2 (S1712) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This variation display setting process 2 (S1712) adds a process for executing a pressing effect, a slot effect and a point effect in place of the reach navigation effect with respect to the variable display setting process (see FIG. 140) of the first control example. The other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the variable display setting process 2 (S1712), first, the processes of S2001 to S2003 are executed as in the first control example, and then a display change pattern command is set (S2006).

  When the process of S2006 is completed, it is determined whether the set fluctuation pattern command is to execute the depression effect (S2031). In the process of S2031, when it is determined that the pressing effect is to be executed (S2031), the pressing effect flag 223j is set to ON (S2032), and the pressing effect scenario corresponding to the acquired fluctuation pattern is pressed in the scenario storage area 223m Setting (S2033), and shifts to the processing of S2007.

  In the process of S2033, for example, if the acquired variation pattern is to execute the normal pressing effect, the normal pressing scenario is acquired from the pressing scenario table 222c and set in the pressing scenario storage area 223m. Thereby, based on the pressed scenario storage area 223m and the pressed effect scenario counter 223k, the button valid period can be matched with the display of the effect.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2031 that the pressing effect is not to be executed (S2031: No), it is then determined whether the slot effect is to be executed (S2034).

  If it is determined in the process of S2034 that the set fluctuation pattern command is to execute slot effect (S2034: Yes), the slot effect flag 223n is set to ON (S2035), and the slot effect state 223q Is set as the first slot effect (S2036), and the process proceeds to the processing of S2007.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2034 that slot effect is not to be executed (S2034: No), it is then determined whether or not point effect is to be executed (S2037).

  If it is determined in the process of S2037 that the set fluctuation pattern command is to execute point effect (S2037: Yes), point effect setting process is executed (S2038), and the process proceeds to S2007. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the point effect is not to be executed in the process of S2037 (S2037: No), the process of S2038 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2007.

  Similar to the first control example, the process proceeds from S2007 to S2011, and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 174, details of the point effect setting process (S1837) executed in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) will be described. The point effect setting process (S1837) is a process for determining the display mode of the point effect and transmitting a display point effect command for display to execute the point effect of the determined display mode to the display control device 114. is there.

  In the point effect setting process (S1837), first, it is determined whether or not the success or failure judgment result is a big hit (S4301). Then, based on the type of point effect, the value of the effect counter 223f, and the winning character selection table 222d1, first to third character information is determined (S4302). As described above, the first to third character information is information for displaying a character pattern in the three periods in which the character symbol set to point effect and the point symbol are displayed. The first character information is information of a character pattern to be displayed in the first period (the shortest elapsed time from the start of variable display) of the three periods, and the second character information is the first period. The third character information is information of a character symbol to be displayed in a third period, which is a period next to the second period.

  As described above, the winning character selection table 222d1 is configured so that the same character pattern as the character predetermined in the point effect is easily selected. In this way, if the character mainly displayed in the point effect and the character symbol displayed in the first to third periods are the same character, then the player is expected to expect a big hit. Can.

  After the process of S4302, the first to third point information is determined based on the value of the lower one digit of the effect counter 223f and the hit point selection table 222e1 (S4303), and the process moves to S4306. The first to third point information, like the first to third character information described above, is information for displaying a point symbol in the first to third periods set in the point effect.

  As described above, the winning point selection table 222e1 is configured such that a point symbol with a higher point is more easily selected than the deviation point selection table 222e2. As a result, by displaying a lot of point symbols of high points in point effects, it is possible to make the player expect to be a big hit afterwards.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the determination in step S4301 is out of step (S4301: No), the first to third characters are determined based on the value of the effect counter 223f and the out-of-character selection table 222d2. Information is determined (S4304). The first to third point information is determined based on the value of the lower one digit of the effect counter 223f and the point selection table for departure 222e2 (S4305), and the process proceeds to S4306.

  After the process of S4303 or S4305, a point effect command for display is generated and set based on the type of point effect and the determined character information and pointer information. The display point effect command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1702) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) executed by the MPU 221. , And sent to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the point effect command for display, and based on the point effect type of the received command, the first to third character information, and the first to third point information. Is set, and the point effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 172 and 173, details of the pressing effect setting process (S1731) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) will be described. The pressing effect setting process (S1731) detects pressing (normal pressing, long pressing, etc.) of the frame button 22 in accordance with the pressing effect being executed (displayed), and controls to display a command corresponding to the pressing. It is a process for transmitting to the device 114.

  In the depression effect setting process (S1731), first, it is determined whether or not the depression effect flag 223j is on (ie, whether or not the depression effect is in progress) (S4401). If it is determined in the process of S4401 that the pressing effect in-progress flag 223j is off (S4401: No), since it is not necessary to perform the setting relating to the pressing effect, the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4401 that the pressing effect flag 223j is on (S4401: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4402 in order to execute the process relating to the pressing effect.

  In the process of S4402, the depression effect scenario counter 223k is incremented by 1 (S4402), and the process proceeds to S4403. Since the pressing effect setting process (S1731) is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169), while the pressing effect is being executed, the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k is every 1 ms. It is incremented by one.

  In the process of S4403, pressing of the frame button 22 in which the current period is normal is performed based on the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k updated in the process of S4402 and the pressing scenario set in the pressing scenario storage area 223m. It is judged whether it is a period to detect (normal pressing period) (S4403).

  If it is determined in the process of S4403 that the current period is the normal pressing period (S4403), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S4404). If it is determined in the process of S4404 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4404: Yes), a display pressing command indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed in the normal pressing period is set based on the timing type. (S4405), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4404 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S4404: No), the process of S4405 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  In the process of S4405, a timing type is acquired from the pressing scenario set in the pressing scenario storage area 223m based on the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, and a display pressing command according to the timing type is set. Thus, when different effects are executed depending on the pressing timing of the frame button 22, it is possible to determine at which timing the frame button 22 is pressed, and it is possible to execute the effects according to the pressing timing.

  If it is determined in the process of S4403 that the current period is not the normal pressing period (S4403: No), it is then determined whether it is a period to detect the long pressing of the frame button 22 (long press pressing period). (S4406). If it is determined in the process of S4406 that the current period is the long press and hold period (S4406: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is long and pressed (S4407). Specifically, when the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed is 2 seconds or more, it is determined that the frame button 22 is long pressed.

  If it is determined in the process of S4407 that the frame button 22 has been long pressed (S4407), a display long press command indicating that the frame button 22 has been long pressed in the long press pressing period is set ( S4408), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4407 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed for a long time (S4407: No), the process of S4408 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  If it is determined in the process of S4407 that the current period is not the long press and hold period (S4406: No), it is then determined whether the current period is the auto press and hold period (S4409). If it is determined in the process of S4409 that the current period is the auto pressing period (S4409: Yes), the auto pressing effect setting process is executed (S4410), and this process is ended. The details of the auto-press effect setting process (S4410) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the process of S4409 that the current period is not the auto pressing period (S4409: No), it is then determined whether the current period is the release period (S4411). In the process of S4410. If it is determined that the current period is a release period (S4411: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been released (whether the pressed state has changed to the non-pressed state) (S4412) .

  If it is determined in the process of S4412 that the frame button 22 has been released (S4412: Yes), a display release command indicating that the frame button 22 has been released during the release period is set, and this process ends. Do. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4412 that the frame button 22 is not released (S4412: No), the process of S4413 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  If it is determined in the process of S4411 that the current period is not the release period (S4411: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the pressing effect period (obtained based on the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k Whether or not the pressing period type of the pressing scenario is "END" is discriminated (S4414).

  If it is determined in the processing of S 4414 that the end timing of the pressing effect period is reached (S 4414: Yes), the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223 k is initialized to 0 (S 4415), and the pressing effect flag 223 j is set to off. Then (S4416), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the depression effect period in the processing of S4414 (S4414: No), the processing of S4415 and S4416 is skipped, and the present processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 173, the details of the auto-press-effect setting process (S4410) executed when it is determined in the press-effect setting process (see FIG. 172) that it is an auto-pressing period will be described. . In this auto-press effect setting process (S4410), based on the fact that the frame button 22 is pressed for a long time in the auto-pressed period, the frame button is performed for a fixed period (every second) during the long-pressed time. This processing is for transmitting a command indicating that the key 22 has been pressed to the display control device 114. That is, in the automatic pressing effect, the frame button 22 is automatically (automatically) pressed by long-pressing the frame button 22.

  In the auto-press effect setting process (S4410), first, it is determined whether or not the long press of the frame button 22 has been started (S4501). Specifically, when the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for 2 seconds or more, it is determined that the long press of the frame button 22 is started. If it is determined in the process of S4501 that the long press of the frame button 22 is started (S4501: Yes), the press scenario stored in the press scenario storage area 223m is changed to the press scenario for auto press in progress ( S4502). Then, an auto-press start command indicating that long-pressing of the frame button 22 has been started in the auto-pressing period (auto-pressing has been started) is set (S4503), and this processing ends. In the process of S4502, by changing the pressing scenario to a pressing scenario for auto pressing, the rendering mode to be displayed thereafter is changed to the rendering mode on the premise that the frame button 22 is pressed. (For example, the effect of pressing a button can be changed to the effect of releasing a button).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4501 that the long press of the frame button 22 is not started (S4501: No), it is determined whether the long press of the frame button 22 is in progress (S4504). If it is determined in the process of S4504 that the frame button 22 is being pressed for a long time (S4504: Yes), the previous auto pressing is performed during a period in which the automatic pressing started by the frame button 22 is performed. It is determined whether or not a predetermined period (1 second in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the execution of (S4505).

  If it is determined in the process of S4504 that a predetermined period (1 second) has elapsed since the previous auto press was performed (S4504: Yes), an auto press command for display is set (S4506). End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4504 that the predetermined period (1 second) has not elapsed since the previous auto press was performed (S4504: No), the process of S4506 is skipped and this process is performed. finish.

  If it is determined in the process of S4504 that the frame button 22 is not being pressed for a long time (S4504: No), it is then determined whether the long press for the frame button 22 has been completed (S4507). Specifically, if the frame button 22 is not pressed continuously for 5 ms or more after the frame button 22 is pressed for a long time, it is determined that the long press for the frame button 22 is finished. Thereby, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed temporarily (for example, for 1 ms) due to the influence of noise or the like, it is prevented that the frame button 22 is erroneously determined to be long pressed. it can.

  In the process of S4507, when it is determined that the long press of the frame button 22 is finished (S4507: Yes), the pressing scenario stored in the pressing scenario storage area 223m is changed to the pressing scenario for non-automatic pressing (S4508). Then, a display auto-press termination command indicating that long-pressing of the frame button 22 has been completed (auto-pressing has been started) in the auto-pressing period is set (S4509), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the long press of the frame button 22 is not finished in the process of S4507 (S4507: No), it is then determined whether the frame button 22 is normally pressed (S4510).

  In the process of S4510, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is normally pressed (S4510: Yes), the frame button 22 is manually pressed (continuously hit) during the automatic continuous hitting period, so it is based on the timing type A display press command is set (S4511), and this processing ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S4510 that the frame button 22 is not normally pressed (S4510: No), this process is ended as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 174 to 179, the details of the slot effect setting process (S1732) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) will be described. The slot effect setting process (S1732) is a process for performing a process corresponding to pressing of the frame button 22 in the slot effect.

  In the slot effect setting process (S1732), first, it is determined whether or not the slot effect in progress flag 223n is on (whether or not slot effect is in progress) (S4601). If it is determined in the process of S4601 that the slot effect in-progress flag 223n is off (S4601: No), since the slot effect is not being executed (displayed), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4601 that the slot effect in-progress flag 223n is on (S4601: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4602 to execute (display) the slot effect. In the process of S4602, the value of the slot effect counter 223p is incremented by 1 (S4602), and the process proceeds to the process of S4603. Since the slot effect setting process (S1732) is executed every 1 ms in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169), the value of the slot effect counter 223p is incremented by 1 every 1 ms during execution (display) of the slot effect Ru.

  In the process of S4603, it is determined whether the slot effect state 223q is a value indicating a first slot effect (S4603). If it is determined in the process of S4603 that the slot effect state 223q is a value indicating the first slot effect (S4603), it means that the first slot effect (first slot effect) is being executed in the slot effect. In order to execute the process in the first slot effect, the process in the first slot effect is executed (S4604), and the process shifts to the process of S4613.

  Here, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 175, the details of the process during the first slot effect (S4604) will be described. The first slot effect presentation process (S4604) is a process executed in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), and is a process for performing a process corresponding to pressing of the frame button 22 or the like in the first slot effect of slot effect. is there.

  In the processing for the first slot effect (S4604), first, it is determined whether or not the pressing of the frame button 22 is a valid button pressing effective period (S4701). Specifically, when the value of the slot effect counter 223p is 2000 to 13000 (that is, between 2 seconds and 13 seconds after the slot effect is started), it is determined that the button pressing effective period is Do.

  If it is determined in the process of S4701 that the button pressing period is valid (S4701: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S4702). If it is determined in the process of S4702 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S4702: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4701 that the frame button 22 is pressed (S4702: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value between 2000 and 8000 (S4703) . If it is determined in the process of S4703 that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value of 2000 to 8000 (S4703: Yes), early (from 2 seconds to 2 seconds to 13 seconds) in the button pressing effective period (between 2 seconds to 13 seconds) Since the frame button 22 is pressed during 8 seconds and there is a lot of remaining effect of the slot depression effect, the process shifts to the process of S4706 to execute the first reduced slot effect.

  In the process of S4706, the first reduction slot effect is selected (S4706), the slot effect state 223q is set to the first reduction slot effect (S4707), and the process proceeds to S4708.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is not a value of 2000 to 8000 (that is, a value of 80001 or more) (S4703: Yes), the process proceeds to S4704 for executing normal slot effect. Transition.

  In the process of S4704, the normal slot effect is selected (S4704), the slot effect state 223q is set to the normal slot effect (S4705), and the process shifts to the process of S4708.

  In the process of S4708, a display mode slot stop effect command of a stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S4708), a display slot effect command according to the selected effect is set (S4709), and this process is ended. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4701 that it is not in the button pressing effective period (S4701: No), it is then determined whether the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 13000 (S4710).

  If it is determined in the process of S4710 that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 13000 (S4701: Yes), the frame button 22 is not pressed in the button pressing valid period. In this case, special slot effect is selected (S4711), and the slot effect state 223q is set to an end waiting state (S4712), and the process shifts to the process of S4709.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4710 that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is less than or equal to 13000 (S4710: No), this process ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 174, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4603 that the first slot effect is not set in the slot effect state 223q (S4603: No), it is then determined whether or not the normal slot effect is set in the slot effect state 223q. (S4605). If it is determined in the process of S4605 that the normal slot effect is set (S4605: Yes), the process proceeds to the normal slot effect in progress process (S4606).

  The normal slot effect processing is processing for performing processing corresponding to pressing of the frame button 22 or the like during the normal slot effect. In the normal slot effect processing (S4606), first, it is determined whether or not the pressing of the frame button 22 is a valid button pressing effective period (S4801). Specifically, when the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value of 17000 to 28000 (that is, from 17 seconds to 28 seconds after the slot effect is started), it is assumed that the button pressing effective period is set. Determine.

  If it is determined in the process of S4801 that the period is not the button pressing effective period (S4801: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4801 that the button pressing effective period is reached (S4801: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S4802).

  If it is determined in the process of S4802 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S4802: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4802 that the frame button 22 is pressed (S4802: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 19000 (S4803).

  In the process of S4803, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is 19000 or less (S4803: No), the frame button 22 is pressed early during execution (display) of the normal slot effect, and then, the effect It is a case where it is possible to execute the second shortening slot effect whose time is 10 seconds. In this case, the display slot stop effect command for the stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S4808), and the slot effect state 223q is set to the second reduced slot effect (S4809), for display corresponding to the second reduced slot effect A slot effect command is set (S4810), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4803 that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 19000 (S4803: Yes), the process moves to the process of S4804 to end the slot effect.

  In the process of S4804, it is determined whether the value of the effect counter 223f is even or not (S4804). When it is determined that the value is even (S4804: Yes), the display slot for the stop mode in which the two designs are aligned A stop effect command is set, and the process shifts to the processing of S4807.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4804 that the value of the effect counter 223f is an odd number (S4804: No), the display slot stop effect command of the stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set and the process proceeds to S4807 Transition.

  In the process of S4807, the slot effect state 223q is set to an end waiting state (S4807), and this process ends.

  As described above, in the normal slot effect, when pressing of the frame button 22 is performed early, one symbol is stopped and displayed, and thereafter, one symbol is stopped and displayed in the second reduced slot effect, and the first time Three symbols will be stopped and displayed together with the stop indication in the slot effect. On the other hand, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is delayed, it is determined depending on the value of the effect counter whether the two symbols are stopped or displayed. Therefore, by pressing the frame button 22 at an early stage, there is a high possibility that the two symbols will be stopped and displayed, and therefore, the player can actively participate in the game.

  Referring back to FIG. 174, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4605 that the normal slot effect is not set in the slot effect state 223q (S4605: No), it is then determined whether or not the first reduced slot effect is set in the slot effect state 223q. (S4607).

  If it is determined in the process of S4607 that the first reduction slot effect is being set (S4607: Yes), the first reduction slot effect in-progress process is executed (S4608), and the process moves to the process of S4613.

  Here, the details of the process during the first reduced slot effect will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The first reduction slot rendering process (S4608) is a process executed in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), and performs a process corresponding to pressing of the frame button 22 or the like in the first reduction slot effect of the slot effect. It is a process for

  In the first reduction slot effect processing (S4608), first, it is determined whether or not it is a button pressing effective period in the first reduction slot effect (S4901). Specifically, when the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value of 12000 to 18000, it is determined that it is a button pressing effective period in the first reduced slot effect.

  If it is determined in the process of S4901 that the button pressing effective period in the first reduced slot effect is in effect (S4901: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S4902).

  If it is determined in the process of S4902 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S4902: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4902 that the frame button 22 is pressed (S4902: Yes), the second reduction slot effect is selected (S4902), and the slot effect state 223q is set to the second reduction slot effect. (S4904). Then, a display slot stop effect command for display in a stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S4905), and the process shifts to the process of S4909.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4901 that the period is not the button pressing effective period (S4901: No), it is determined whether the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 18000 (S4906).

  If it is determined in the process of S4906 that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is less than or equal to 18000 (S4906: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4906 that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 18000 (S4906: Yes), the frame button 22 is not pressed in the button press valid period in the first reduced slot effect. is there. In this case, the extension slot effect is selected (S4907), the slot effect state 223q is set to the extension slot effect (S4908), and the process proceeds to S4909.

  When the process of S4905 or S4908 is finished, a display slot effect command according to the selected effect is set (S4909), and this process ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 174, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4607 that the first reduced slot effect is not set in the slot effect state 223q (S4607: No), then whether or not the second reduced slot effect is set in the slot effect state 223q It is determined whether or not (S4609).

  If it is determined in the process of S4609 that second shortening slot effect in progress is set (S4609: Yes), the second shortening slot effect in-progress process is executed (S4610), and the process proceeds to S4613.

  Here, the details of the second shortening slot effect in-progress process (S4610) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The second shortening slot effect in-progress process (S4610) is a process executed in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174) and corresponds to pressing of the frame button 22 during execution (display) of the second shortening slot effect It is a process for performing a process.

  In the second reduction slot effect processing (S4610), first, it is determined whether or not it is a button pressing effective period in the second reduction slot effect (S5001). Specifically, if the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value of 22000 to 28000, it is determined that it is a button pressing effective period.

  If it is determined in the process of S5001 that the period is not the button pressing effective period (S5001: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5001 that the button pressing effective period is in progress (S5001: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S5002).

  If it is determined in the process of S5002 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S5002: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed in the process of S5002 (S5002: Yes), a display slot stop effect command for the stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S5003), and the slot effect state 223q is It is set in an end waiting state (S5004), and this processing ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 174, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4609 that the second reduced slot effect is not set in the slot effect state 223q (S4609: No), then whether or not the extended slot effect is set in the slot effect state 223q It discriminates (S4611).

  If it is determined in the process of S4611 that extension slot effect is set (S4611: Yes), an extension slot effect process is executed (S4612), and the process proceeds to S4613.

  Here, the details of the extension slot effect processing (S4612) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 179. The extension slot effect during process (S4612) is a process executed in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), and is for performing a process corresponding to pressing of the frame button 22 during execution (display) of the extension slot effect. Processing.

  In the extension slot effect processing (S4612), first, it is determined whether or not it is a button pressing effective period in the extension slot effect (S5101). Specifically, if the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value of 22000 to 28000, it is determined that it is a button pressing effective period.

  If it is determined in the process of S5101 that the period is not the button pressing effective period (S5101: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5101 that it is a button pressing effective period (S5101: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S5102).

  If it is determined in the process of S5102 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S5102: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed in the process of S5102 (S5102: Yes), the display slot stop effect command for the stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S5103), and the slot effect state 223q is It is set in an end waiting state (S5104), and this processing ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 174, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4611 that the extended slot effect is not set in the slot effect state 223q (S4611: No), the process proceeds to S4613.

  In the process of S4613, it is determined whether the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 28000 in order to determine whether it is the end time of the slot effect (S4613). If it is determined in the process of S4613 that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is 28000 or less (S4613: No), it is not the end timing of the slot effect, so the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4613 that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 28000 (S4613: Yes), it is the end timing of the slot effect, then the slot effect state 223q is waiting for the end. It is determined whether there is any (S4614).

  In the process of S4614, when the slot effect state 223q is waiting for the end (S4614: Yes), it may not be necessary to operate the frame button 22 if the slot effect is already stopped and displayed by the operation of the frame button 22. The special slot effect is being executed. In this case, a display slot effect end command is set, and the process proceeds to step S4617.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4614, when the slot effect state 223q is not in the end waiting state (S4614: Yes), the effect mode in the slot effect is not stopped and displayed. In this case, in order to end the slot effect after stopping and displaying the effect mode in the slot effect, a display slot effect forced end command is set (S4616), and the process proceeds to S4617.

  In the process of S4617, the slot effect in-progress flag 223n is set to OFF (S4617), the slot effect counter 223p is initialized to 0 (S4618), the slot effect state 223q is cleared (S4619), and this process is ended.

Regarding Control Processing Executed by Display Control Device in Second Control Example
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 186. The present control example is different from the above-described first control example in that in the command determination process 2 (refer to FIG. 180), pressing effect related command processing, slot effect command processing, and point effect command processing are added. The points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, command determination processing 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the display control device 114 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 180. In the command determination process 2, the processes of S2601 to S2613 are executed as in the command determination process (see FIG. 145) in the first control example described above.

  When it is determined in the process of S2612 that an error command has not been received (S2612: No), it is then determined whether a command related to pressing effect has been received (S2631).

  If it is determined in the process of S2631 that a command related to the effect of pressing has been received (S2631: Yes), the processing of command related to the effect of pressing is executed (S2632), and the process returns to the process of S2601. Details of the pressing effect related command process (S2632) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 181 to 184.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2631 that the command related to the pressing effect is not received (S2631: No), it is then determined whether the slot effect command is received (S2633).

  If it is determined in the process of S2633 that the slot effect command has been received (S2633: Yes), the slot effect command process is executed (S2634), and the process returns to the process of S2601. Details of the slot effect command processing (S2634) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2633 that the slot effect command has not been received (S2633: No), it is then determined whether a point effect command has been received (S2635).

  If it is determined in the process of S2635 that the point effect command has been received (S2635: Yes), the point effect command process is executed (S2635), and the process returns to the process of S2601. Details of the point effect command process (S2635) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2635 that the point effect command is not received (S2635: No), other command processes are executed as in the first control example (S2614), and the process of S2601 Return to

  Next, with reference to FIG. 181 to FIG. 184, details of the pressing effect related command process (S2632) will be described. The pressing effect related command process (S2632) is a process for performing a process corresponding to various commands for displaying (executing) the pressing effect.

  In the pressing effect related command processing (S2632), first, it is determined whether or not a display pressing command has been received (S5201). If it is determined in the process of S5201 that the display press command has been received (S5201: Yes), the press command process is executed (S5202), and the process proceeds to S5203.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 182 (a), the details of the pressing command process (S5202) will be described. FIG. 182 (a) is a flowchart showing the pressing command process. This pressing command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display pressing command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the pressing command processing, first, the pressing display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the pressing command for display is determined, and the determined pressing display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S5301). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5302).

  Then, based on the pressed display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5301, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5303), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S5304). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S5305), the pressing command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the pressing effect related command processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 181, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5201 that the display press command has not been received (S5201: No), it is then determined whether the display long press command has been received (S5203).

  If it is determined in the process of S5203 that the display long press command has been received (S5203: Yes), the long press command process is executed (S5204), and the process proceeds to S5205.

  Here, the details of the long press command process (S5204) will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (b). FIG. 182 (b) is a flowchart showing the long press command process. The long press command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display long press command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the long press command processing, first, a long press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display long press command is determined, and the determined long press display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display data. The table buffer 233d is set (S5401). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5402).

  Then, based on the long press display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5401, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5404). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S5405), the long press command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the pressing effect related command processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 181, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5203 that the display long press command has not been received (S5203: No), it is next determined whether the display auto press start command has been received (S5205).

  If it is determined in the process of S5205 that the display auto-press start command has been received (S5205: Yes), the auto-press start command process is executed (S5206), and the process proceeds to S5207.

  Here, the details of the automatic pressing start command processing (S5206) will be described with reference to FIG. 183 (a). FIG. 183 (a) is a flowchart showing an automatic pressing start command process. This auto-pressing start command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display auto-pressing start command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In auto press start command processing, first, an auto press start display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display auto press start command is determined, and the determined auto press start display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. Then, the display data table buffer 233d is set (S5501). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5502).

  Then, based on the auto-pressing start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5501, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5504). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S5505), the auto-pressing start command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the pressing-effect related command processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 181, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5205 that the display auto-press start command has not been received (S5205: No), it is then determined whether the display auto-press command has been received (S5207).

  If it is determined in the process of S5207 that the display auto-press command has been received (S5207: Yes), the auto-press command process is executed (S5208), and the process proceeds to S5209.

  Here, the details of the automatic pressing command process (S5208) will be described with reference to FIG. 183 (b). FIG. 183 (b) is a flowchart showing auto press command processing. The auto-press command processing is to execute a process corresponding to the display auto-press command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the auto press command processing, first, an auto press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display auto press command is determined, and the determined auto press display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The table buffer 233d is set (S5601). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5602).

  Then, based on the auto-press display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5601, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5604). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S5605), the auto-pressing command process is ended, and the process returns to the pressing-effect related command process.

  Referring back to FIG. 181, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5207 that the display auto pressing command has not been received (S5207: No), it is then determined whether the display auto pressing end command has been received (S5209).

  If it is determined in the process of S5209 that the display auto-press termination command has been received (S5209: Yes), the auto-press termination command process is executed (S5210), and the process proceeds to S5211.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 184 (a), the details of the automatic pressing end command processing (S5210) will be described. FIG. 184 (a) is a flowchart showing an auto-press termination command process. This auto-press termination command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display auto-press termination command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In auto-press termination command processing, first, an auto-press termination display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display auto-press termination command is determined, and the decided auto-press termination display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. Then, the display data table buffer 233d is set (S5701). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e (S 5702).

  Then, based on the auto pressing end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5701, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5704). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S5705), the auto-press termination command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the pressing-effect related command processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 181, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5209 that the display auto-press termination command has not been received (S5209: No), it is then determined whether a display release command has been received (S5211).

  If it is determined in the process of S5211 that the display release command has been received (S5211: Yes), the release command process is executed (S5212), and this process ends.

  Here, the details of the release command process (S5212) will be described with reference to FIG. 184 (b). FIG. 184 (b) is a flowchart showing release command processing. This release command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display release command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the release command processing, first, the release display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display release command is determined, and the determined release display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. It sets (S5801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5802).

  Then, based on the release display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5801, time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S5804). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S5805), the release command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the pressing effect related command processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 181, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5211 that the display release command has not been received (S5211: No), this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 185, the details of the slot effect command processing (S2634) will be described. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing slot effect command processing. The slot effect command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display slot effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the slot effect command processing, first, a slot effect display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display slot effect command is determined, and the determined slot effect display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The table buffer 233d is set (S5901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5902).

  Then, based on the slot effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5904). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S5905), the slot effect command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing 2.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 186, details of the point effect command processing (S2636) will be described. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing point effect command processing. The point effect command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display point effect command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the point effect command processing, first, a point effect display data table corresponding to the type of point effect indicated by the display point effect command is determined, and the determined slot effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, The display data table buffer 233d is set (S6001).

  Next, information on the prohibited area corresponding to the point effect data table determined in the process of S5901 is set in the first to third prohibited area storage area 233m (S6002).

  Character data of a character pattern to be displayed in the first to third periods based on the information of the prohibited area storage area 233m set in the process of S6002 and the first to third character information indicated by the received command A table is determined, the display data table buffer 233d is updated, and the first to third prohibited area storage areas 233m are updated with the information of the prohibited area corresponding to the determined character data table (S6003).

  Point data of point symbols to be displayed in the first to third periods based on the information of the prohibited area storage area 233m updated in the process of S6003 and the first to third point information indicated by the received command A table is determined, and the display data table buffer 233d is updated (S6004).

  Then, the null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6005).

  Then, based on the point effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6001, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6006), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6007). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6008), the point effect command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing 2.

  As described above, the combined pressing effect described in the second control example is an effect in which the player causes the frame button 22 to continuously execute different operation modes (continuous hitting, timing pressing). It is possible to raise the willingness to participate. Furthermore, when it is determined that the player has executed the auto pressing function during the combined pressing effect, the pressing effect mode of the combined pressing effect to be executed is switched, so that the player is provided with the effect having no sense of incongruity. Can.

  In this control example, if it is normal as a combined pressing effect, the effect (timing pressing effect) to press the frame button 22 in good timing after the pressing effect (continuous hitting effect) for continuously hitting the frame button 22 is set to be executed If the auto pressing function is executed at the timing when the effect is switched from continuous hit production to timing press production, the above-described timing press production is configured to be switched to release production for releasing the button in a timely manner. Other configurations may be used.

  For example, when the automatic pressing function is executed at the timing when the effect switches from the continuous hitting effect to the timing pressing effect, the timing when the pressing operation is performed during the timing pressing effect may be automatically determined, or the continuous hitting The presentation may be performed continuously. Even with this configuration, it is possible to provide an effect that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player who is executing the auto pressing function.

  Further, in the second control example, the normal pressing effect, the timing pressing effect and the release effect can be displayed as the combined pressing effect, but other configurations may be used. For example, a long press period in which a long press effect is performed may be provided as part of a combined press effect.

  Furthermore, in the second control example, the timing at which each pressing effect mode of the combined pressing effect is changed is the timing at which the pressing effect switches, but the effect mode of the next pressing effect is performed at the timing at which the previous pressing effect is executed. May be determined. This makes it possible to notify the player in advance that the operation mode of the frame button 22 is different during the combined pressing effect.

  Moreover, although it is comprised so that operation of the frame button 22 may be continuously received during the production period of the composite press production performed by this 2nd example of a control, the invalid period which does not receive operation of the frame button 22 on the way is provided. It is good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give guidance on composite pressing effects using an invalid period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is invalid in a period in which composite pressing effects are being executed, so it is easy for the player to understand A presentation can be provided.

  In the combined pressing effect described above in the second control example, the result of the combined pressing effect is displayed based on all the operation results for each pressing effect executed during the combined pressing effect. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to increase the gaming intention to the player for each pressing effect. Note that the method of displaying the rendering result of the combined pressing effect is not limited to this, and the rendering result may be displayed independently for each pressing effect respectively executed during the combined pressing effect.

  As described above, in the continuous slot effect in the present control example, next, according to the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 in the slot effect which is continuously executed within the specific period (within 30 seconds), It is configured such that an effect mode of the slot effect to be executed is selected. Specifically, the number of slot effects executed during the continuous slot effect is changed. As a result, the player can operate the frame button 22 with enthusiasm, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, the effect result of the continuous slot effect is displayed with the contents combining the combination of the pseudo symbols stopped and displayed in each of the plurality of slot effects executed during the continuous slot effect, and further executed during the continuous slot effect As the number of slot effects is increased, the result of continuous slot effects is made more advantageous to the player. As a result, the player can operate the frame button 22 more enthusiastically, and the effect of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the slot effect (first slot effect) executed for the first time in the continuous slot effect, even if the player can not operate the frame button 22 early, since the slot effect can be executed three times, the last It becomes possible for the player to play the game eagerly. Furthermore, even if the number of slot effects to be executed during continuous slot effects is small, a plurality of combinations of predetermined pseudo symbols can be displayed in a single slot effect, so the player can see I can give hope to the end.

  Furthermore, for the player who refuses to operate the frame button 22, a special slot effect that does not require the frame button operation is executed after the completion of the first slot effect, giving the player a feeling of dissatisfaction. Absent.

  In the second control example, the slot effect is used as the plurality of operation effects performed during the continuous effect performed for a specific period, but based on the operation result for one operation effect performed during the continuous effect In addition, as long as the effect aspect and the number of times of other operation effects performed during the continuous effect can be changed, elements other than the effect using the slot may be used.

  As described above, according to the point effect of the second control example, the display location of the point is set according to the effect display mode of the third symbol variation effect, and is further displayed in the third symbol variation effect The points are distributed based on the character, so it is possible to execute point presentation that is easy for the player to understand.

  If there are multiple small areas where points can be displayed, it is possible to select a point where points are displayed based on the number of points given and the result of the third symbol variation effect (lottery result of a special symbol) Good. For example, in the case of FIG. 163 (b), when the point displayed this time is 1 point (low point) or the lottery result of the special symbol this time is out, of the small areas Dm11 to Dm13 which can be point displayed, A point is displayed on a small area Dm13 in the vicinity of the "monster" which is an enemy character as the main character of the third symbol variation effect, and the point displayed this time is 2 points (high points) or the lottery result of the current special symbol is hit In this case, it is preferable to perform point display in a small area Dm11 near the “brave” who is the main character as a main component of the third symbol variation effect among the small areas Dm11 to Dm13 in which points can be displayed. As a result, it becomes possible to predict in advance whether or not the lottery of the special symbol of this time is a big hit by grasping the location where the player displays the point. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, the display mode of the character displayed as the point effect (character displayed on Dm 12 in FIG. 163B) may be a display mode for guiding a point (small area) of the point display to be executed later. Specifically, it may be a display mode in which a point (small area) of the point display is guided by the eyes of the character.

  Moreover, in this control example, although the small area used in the third symbol variation production is set as an area where point display is not performed, for example, with the main body of the third symbol fluctuation presentation in one small area The proportion of the exclusive image may be calculated, and if the proportion is equal to or less than a predetermined amount (10% or less), the small area may be determined as an area capable of point display. Thereby, it becomes possible to perform point display in the vicinity of the main image displayed in the third symbol variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a defect that the player watching the third symbol variation effect misses the point display.

  In addition, you may use the following structures as a structure which sets the display location of a point production based on the location where the 3rd symbol fluctuation production is displayed. That is, when the display control device 114 receives a command to display points, the display control device 114 performs control to display points in all the small areas, and small areas other than the small areas that cause the player to visually recognize the point display. Control may be performed to mask the point display displayed in the area so that the player can not visually recognize. By configuring in this manner, for example, the display position of the main image displayed in the third design variation production moves to various small areas during the third design variation production, and the prohibited area and the allowable area are interchanged. Case processing can be facilitated.

  Also, as a similar process, the point display image layer for displaying points is made to display points in all the small areas, and a effect display image layer for displaying a third symbol variation effect in front of the point display image layer It is preferable to execute processing for transmitting one of the small areas not used in the third symbol variation effect with respect to the effect display image layer.

  Furthermore, in the second control example, although the small area where the third symbol variation effect is executed is set as the prohibited area for prohibiting point display, the small area where other display is performed is prohibited area For example, a small area where game information such as display of the number of reservations is displayed or the pachinko machine 10 is provided, and driven by satisfying a predetermined condition (predetermined variation pattern selection). 3 In a gaming machine having a decorative role covering a part (a specific small area) of the front of the symbol display device 81, an abnormality is detected when the aforementioned specific small area or an abnormality is detected when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In a gaming machine having a predetermined small area in which information is displayed, the predetermined small area when an abnormality is detected may be set as a prohibited area.

  Furthermore, although the control example using the display area of one display device (the third symbol display device 81) is described in the second control example, the same control may be performed using a plurality of display devices. For example, when a movable (rotatable) sub-display device is disposed at a predetermined position, it may be set as a prohibited area, and when it is disposed at another position, it may be set as an allowable area.

First Modification of Second Control Example
Next, a first modified example of the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. The first modification of the second control example is different from the second control example described above in that the contents of the ROM 203 and the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174). Is different in that slot effect setting process 2 (FIG. 189) is executed, and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first modified example of the second control example, three types of auto pressing periods (A, B, C) are provided, and the pressing intervals are different in each auto pressing period. Thus, for example, effects such as pressing a plurality of frame buttons 22 in the button pressing period (continuous hitting effect), pressing the frame button 22 only once in good time in the button pressing period (timing pressing effect), etc. Appropriate pressing can be performed according to the type of pressing effect.

  Further, in the first modified example, an effect mode in which a rotation effect in which rotation / stop of the slot is performed is performed three times as the slot effect is displayed, and the rotation of the slot is stopped based on depression of the frame button 22. When pressing of the frame button 22 is performed early in the rotation effect, the rotation speed of the next rotation effect becomes slower, and as the pressing of the frame button 22 becomes slower, the rotation speed of the next rotation effect becomes faster. That is, if pressing the frame button 22 is performed early, the rotational speed in the next rotation effect will be slow, and it will be easy to align the target pattern, whereas if the pressing of the frame button 22 is slow, the next The rotation speed in the rotation effect of is increased, and it becomes difficult to align the target pattern. As a result, it is possible to give the player the privilege of making it easy to align the target symbols by pressing the frame button 22 at an early stage, and it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the game.

Regarding Electrical Configuration of First Modification of Second Control Example
First, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. The ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the first modification is different from the above-described second control example in that the content of the pressing scenario table 222 c is changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 187 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the pressing scenario table 222c. As shown in FIG. 187 (a), the pressing scenario table 222c in the first modified example is a first compound pressing scenario 222c4 and a combination pressing scenario 222c3 in place of the compound pressing scenario 222c3 in the pressing scenario table 222c in the second control example described above. The second compound pressing scenario 222c5 is different in that it is provided, and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the contents of the first composite pressing scenario 222c4 will be described with reference to FIG. 187 (b). FIG. 187 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the first composite pressing scenario 222c4. The first combined pressing scenario 222c4 is different from the combined pressing scenario 222c3 in the second control example described above in that the pressing interval during the auto pressing period is different, and the other points are the same. The description of the same points will be omitted.

  In the first composite pressing scenario 222c4, as shown in FIG. 187 (b), the auto pressing period A (pressing interval 1 second) is set as the pressing period type for the value "5001 to 12000" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. An auto-pressing period B (pressing interval 0.5 seconds) is set for the value “15001 to 18000” of the pressing effect scenario counter 223 k.

  In this manner, the player who is executing the auto pressing function executes the auto pressing function by making the pressing interval different with respect to the auto pressing period set to a different period depending on the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. It is possible to suppress getting bored at an early stage by the effect based on what is being done.

  In the present modification, the pressing interval is set in advance for each auto pressing period, but another configuration may be used. For example, the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k is assumed as a predetermined condition is satisfied. When the auto pressing period is reached, one auto pressing pattern is selected from an auto pressing pattern selection table in which a plurality of auto pressing patterns having different pressing intervals are stored, and the pressing interval is selected based on the selected auto pressing pattern May be set. By configuring in this way, even if the combined pressing effect based on the same combined pressing scenario is executed, the auto pressing function with different pressing intervals will be executed, so the player gets bored with the game early It is possible to suppress the

  Further, a predetermined automatic pressing pattern may be selected from the above-described automatic pressing pattern selection table based on the determination result of the special symbol. Specifically, when the effect of increasing the degree of progress is executed according to the number of times of pressing, the determination result of the special symbol is stored in the automatic pressing pattern selection table if it is determined that the big hit has been won. Among the auto press patterns, it is preferable that the auto press pattern having the shortest press interval be selected. This makes it possible to increase the degree of progress of the effect when the determination result of the special symbol is won for the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who is executing the auto-pressing function predict the determination result of the special symbol according to the progress degree of the effect.

  Furthermore, while the automatic pressing function is being performed, the third symbol display device 81 may be notified of the pressing interval. As a result, the player can visually grasp the pressing interval of the auto pressing function currently executed.

  Next, the contents of the second composite press scenario 222c5 will be described with reference to FIG. 187 (c). FIG. 187C is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the second composite pressing scenario 222c5. The second composite pressing scenario 222c5 is a period corresponding to the timing pressing period Db1 (see FIG. 157 (a)) with respect to the above-described first composite pressing scenario 222c4. The difference is that the auto pressing period is set to 15000 ", and the other points are the same. The description of the same points will be omitted.

  In the second composite pressing scenario 222c5, as shown in FIG. 187 (c), an automatic pressing period C (pressing interval of 2 seconds) is set for values "12001" to "15000" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. . As described above, the auto pressing function with a pressing interval of 2 seconds is executed during a period in which a 3-second period is set as the timing pressing period Db1 (see FIG. 157 (a)). A situation in which a button is pressed at timing can be realized.

  Specifically, for example, when the effect pressed by the auto pressing function is executed at the timing when the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k in the auto pressing period A is "14000", the pressing effect during the auto pressing period C is performed. The next pressing effect is executed at a timing when the value of the scenario counter 223 k is “16000”, that is, two seconds after the previous pressing effect. Therefore, in the case described above, the pressing effect is executed at a timing one second after the start of the timing pressing period Db1 (see FIG. 157 (a)).

  As described above, by setting different pressing intervals during auto pressing, the button pressing effects of different game characteristics are suitably executed in the state where the auto pressing function is executed (while holding the frame button 22 long). It becomes possible.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 188, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the first modified example will be described. The RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the first modification is different from the above-described second control example in that a depression frequency counter 223r is provided, and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The press number counter 223r is a counter for determining the number of times the frame button 22 has been pressed during execution (display) of the slot effect. In the slot effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 189), the number-of-times counter 223r is incremented by one when the frame button 22 is pressed and when the end timing of the button pressing effective period comes (see FIG. 189). See S6108). Then, when the value of the press number counter 223r is 2 or less, the setting of the next rotation effect is executed, and when the value of the press number counter 223r is 3, the end of the slot effect is set. Also, based on the value of the pressing frequency counter 223r, the button pressing effective period is set.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Controller in First Modification of Second Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 189, control processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the first modified example of the second control example will be described. The control process in the first modification is different from the above-described second control example in that slot effect setting process 2 (FIG. 189) is executed instead of the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174). , Other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing slot effect setting processing 2 (S1732). This slot effect setting process 2 (S 1732) displays an effect mode in which the rotation effect in which the rotation and stop of the slot are performed is performed three times as the slot effect, and stops the rotation of the slot based on the depression of the frame button 22. Do the processing. Further, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is performed early so that the number of rotations in each rotation effect is the same, processing is performed so as to slow the rotation speed in the next rotation effect. That is, if the frame button 22 is pressed early, the rotational speed in the next rotation effect becomes slow, and it becomes easy to align the target pattern.

  In slot effect setting process 2 (S1732), it is first determined whether or not slot effect is being performed (displayed) by determining whether the slot effect flag 223n is on (S6101).

  If it is determined in the process of S6101 that the slot effect in-progress flag 223n is off (S6101: No), since the slot effect is not being executed (displayed), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6101 that the slot effect flag 223n is on (S6101: Yes), since the slot effect is being executed (displayed), the slot effect counter 223p is incremented by 1 ( The process proceeds to S6102) and S6103.

  In the process of S6103, it is determined whether or not it is a button pressing effective period (S6103). Specifically, the button pressing effective period is set by the process of S6115 described later. For example, when the pressing number counter 223r is 0 (that is, the first rotation effect in the slot effect), the value of the slot effect counter 223p is If the value is from 2001 to 8000 (that is, until 2001 ms and then 8000 ms have elapsed since the slot effect was started), the button pressing effective period is established.

  If it is determined in the process of S6103 that the button is not in the valid period (S6103: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6103 that it is a button valid period (S6103: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S6104). If it is determined in the process of S6104 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6104: Yes), a display slot stop effect command for stopping the symbol rotating in the rotation effect is set (S6105) , S6108.

  When it is determined in the process of S6104 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S6104: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the button pressing effective period (S6106). Specifically, when the pressing number counter 223r is 0, it is determined whether or not the value of the slot effect counter 223p is 8000.

  If it is determined in the process of S6106 that it is not the end timing of the button pressing effective period (S6106: No), this process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6106 that it is the end timing of the button pressing effective period (S6106: Yes), the display slot stop effect command for forcibly stopping the symbol rotating in the rotation effect Are set (S6107), and the process proceeds to the process of S6108.

  In the process of S6108, the depression number counter 223r is incremented by 1 (S6108), and it is determined whether the value of the addition number counter 223r is 3 or not (S6109).

  In the process of S6109, when it is determined that the value of the number-of-times counter 223r is 3 or less (S6109: No), since the rotation effect in the slot effect is not executed three times, the next rotation effect is The process moves to the process of S6113 for setting.

  In the process of S6113, the remaining time up to the upper limit time corresponding to the value of the pressing number counter 223r is calculated (S6113). Specifically, when the value of the press number counter 223r is 1, the upper limit time is 18000 as the value of the slot effect counter 223p, and when the value of the press number counter 223r is 2, the upper limit time is a slot The value of the effect counter 223p is 28000, and the value obtained by subtracting the current value of the slot effect counter 223p from the value of the slot effect counter 223p as the upper limit time becomes the remaining time.

  A display slot effect command for display of a display mode that provides a rotational speed of 10 rotations with the remaining time calculated in the process of S6113 is set (S6114), and a button press valid period corresponding to the value of the press frequency counter 223r is set (S6115), this processing ends.

  Specifically, in the process of S6115, when the value of the press number counter 223r is 1, a period in which the value of the slot effect counter 223p becomes a value of 12001 to 18000 is set as the button press valid period, and the press number counter 223r. When the value of is 2, the period in which the value of the slot effect counter 223p becomes a value of 22001 to 18000 is set as the button pressing effective period.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6109 that the value of the press number counter 223r is 3 (S6109: Yes), the frame button 22 is pressed in the last rotation effect of the slot effect (or button press valid The period is over). In this case, a display slot effect end command is set (S6110), the value of the press number counter 223r is initialized to 0 (S6111), and the value of the slot effect counter 223p is initialized to 0 (S6112). This process ends.

  As described above, in the first modified example, in the slot effect where three rotation effects are performed, if the frame button 22 is pressed early, the rotational speed in the next rotation effect becomes slow, and the symbol of the aim While it is easy to align the two, if the pressing of the frame button 22 is slowed, the rotational speed in the next rotation effect will be fast, and it will be difficult to align the aim pattern. As a result, it is possible to give the player the privilege of making it easy to align the target symbols by pressing the frame button 22 at an early stage, and it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the game.

  The present invention is not limited to the above, and the short length of the button pressing effective period to be set next may be varied according to the pressing timing of the frame button 22 in the button pressing effective period. Specifically, when the frame button 22 is pressed early in the first rotation effect, the button pressing period may be extended in the next rotation effect. As a result, since the button pressing period is set long in the next rotation effect, even if the rotation speed of the rotation effect does not change, there are many timings at which the target symbol is stopped (that is, the chance increases). Can be given, so that the willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

Second Modification of Second Control Example
Next, a second modification of the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 to 191. In the second modification, when the pressed state of the frame button 22 is in the automatic pressing state, a pressing signal is output to the voice lamp control device 113 every fixed cycle, and the frame is displayed in the second control example. The difference is that a frame button control device 290 is provided which outputs a pressing signal to the voice lamp control device 113 based on the pressing of the frame button 22 when the pressed state of the button 22 is non-automatic pressing, and others The points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the second modified example, in the above-described frame button control device 290, based on the fact that a predetermined operation (the frame button 22 has been pressed for 2 seconds) is performed, the state is in the automatic pressing state. While the automatic pressing is performed, a pressing signal output based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 at regular intervals, without operating the frame button 22. Therefore, even when the effect of continuously hitting the frame button 22 is displayed, the player can enjoy the effect of continuously hitting the frame button 22 without operating the frame button 22, thereby reducing the operation load on the player. Can.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Modification of Second Control Example>
First, with reference to FIGS. 189 and 190, the electrical configuration in the second modified example will be described. FIG. 189 is a schematic view schematically showing an electrical configuration in the second modification.

  As shown in FIG. 189, the frame button 22 is connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second modification via the frame button control device 290. The frame button control device 290 is provided with an MPU 291 (not shown), and the processing of the MPU 291 detects that the frame button 22 is pressed, and the detection result is notified to the voice lamp control device 113.

  The MPU 291 is provided with a RAM 293, and stores information for determining the pressed state of the frame button 22. Here, the details of the RAM 293 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 191 is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the RAM 293 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present modification.

  The RAM 293 is provided with at least an automatic pressing flag 293a, a pressing time counter 293b, and a period counter 293c.

  The auto-pressing flag 293a is a flag for determining whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed automatically (a pressing signal is output at predetermined intervals regardless of whether the frame button 22 is pressed). In this case, it is determined that the auto-pressing state (during auto-pressing) is made, and if the auto-pressing state is off, it is determined that the auto-depressed state (non-auto-pressing) is not performed.

  The auto-pressing flag 293a is set from off to on (or from on to off) when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed for 2 seconds or more in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192). The auto-pressing flag 293a is referred to when it is determined in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192) whether or not the state is the auto-pressing state.

  The pressing time counter 293 b is a counter for measuring the time during which the frame button 22 is pressed. The depression time counter 293b is incremented by one when it is determined that the frame button 22 is being depressed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192). Since the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192) is a process that is executed every 1 ms, when the frame button 22 is being pressed, the value of the pressing time counter 293b is incremented by 1 every 1 ms. Then, when the value of the pressing time counter 293b becomes a predetermined value (2000 in this modification), it is determined that the frame button 22 has been long pressed, and the setting of the auto-pressing flag 293a is changed. The pressing time counter 293 b is initialized to 0 when it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 has ended.

  The period counter 293c is a counter for measuring the elapsed time during the automatic pressing. The period counter 293c is incremented by one when it is determined that the auto-pressing flag 293a is on (that is, the auto-pressing state) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192). Since the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192) is a process executed every 1 ms, the period counter 293c is incremented by 1 every 1 ms while the auto-pressing is performed. When the auto-pressing flag 293a is on, the period counter 293c is counted, and when the value of the period counter 293c becomes a predetermined value (1000 in this modification), the button pressing signal is voice lamp control It is sent to the device 113. Since the period counter 293c is initialized to 0 when it reaches the predetermined value (1000), the button pressing signal is generated each time the value of the period counter 293c reaches the predetermined value (1000) (that is, each time one second elapses). Are sent to the audio lamp control unit 113.

  Note that by changing the above-described predetermined value, it is possible to change the interval at which the button pressing signal is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 while the automatic pressing is performed. For example, the predetermined value may be set to 500 or 2000, and the timing of changing may be the timing at which a predetermined operation (long press, repeated strike, other button press, etc.) is performed, or the effect The timing of switching may be set. The timing at which the effect is switched may be notified from the audio lamp control device 113, or may be notified from the main control device 110 or the display control device 114.

<About control processing by frame button control device in second modification of second control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 192, control processing executed by the MPU 291 in the frame button control unit 290 in the second modified example will be described. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process periodically (in this modification, every 1 ms) executed by the MPU 291. The timer interrupt process is a process for detecting pressing of the frame button 22 and outputting a signal (pressing signal) indicating pressing of the frame button 22 to the voice lamp control device 113 based on the detection result. When a long press of the frame button 22 is detected, the automatic pressing function is executed, and a pressing signal of the frame button 22 is output to the voice lamp control device 113 every predetermined period (one second in this modification). Processing.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S6201). If it is determined in the process of S6201 that the frame button 22 is pressed (S6201: Yes), the value of the pressing time counter 293b is incremented by 1 (S6202), and the value of the added pressing time counter 293b is It is determined whether it is 2000 (S6203).

  If it is determined in the process of S6203 that the value of the pressing time counter 293b is 2000 (S6203: Yes), since 2 seconds have elapsed since the frame button 22 was pressed, the auto-pressing flag 293a Is checked (S6204).

  If it is determined in the process of S6204 that the auto-pressing flag 293a is off (S6204: Yes), the auto-pressing function is not being executed, so to start the execution of the auto-pressing function. The auto-pressing flag 293a is set to ON (S6205), a pressing signal indicating pressing of the frame button 22 is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S6206), and the process proceeds to the process of S6212. Since the depression signal is outputted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the process of S6206 and the effect based on the reception of the depression signal is executed by the voice lamp control device 113, it is determined that the automatic depression is set for the player. It can be easily recognized. It should be noted that the invention is not limited to the output of the pressing signal, and notifies that the auto pressing has been set, and based on the notification, an effect indicating that the auto pressing is set by the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. May be

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6204 that the auto-pressing flag 293a is on (S6204: No), it means that the auto-pressing function is being executed. Then, the auto-pressing flag 293a is set to off (S6207), and the process shifts to the processing of S6212.

  When it is determined in the process of S6203 that the value of the pressing time counter 293b is not 2000 (S6203: No), the process of S6204 to S6207 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S6212.

  When it is determined in the process of S6201 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S6201: No), it is determined whether the value of the pressing time counter 293b is larger than 5 (S6208).

  If it is determined in the process of S6208 that the value of the pressing time counter 293b is larger than 5 (S6208: Yes), the frame button 22 is pressed, the pressing signal indicating the pressing of the frame button 22 is used. The flow shifts to the processing of S6209 to output. When the value of the pressing time counter 293b is larger than 5 (when the frame button 22 is pressed for 5 ms) by the process of S6208, it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed, so the frame button 22 is short-termed due to noise or the like. Even in the case where it is determined that an interval (for example, 1 ms) has been pressed, the pressing of the frame button 22 can be accurately detected.

  The process of S6209 determines whether the value of the pressing time counter 293b is smaller than 2000 (S6209). If it is determined in the process of S6209 that the value of the pressing time counter 293b is smaller than 2000 (S6209: Yes), the frame button 22 is normally pressed, the pressing signal is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. Then, the process is output (S6210), and the process proceeds to the process of S6211.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6209 that the value of the pressing time counter 293b is 2000 or more (S6209: No), the frame button 22 is pressed for a long time, the process of S6210 is skipped. , And proceeds to the process of S6211.

  In the process of S6211, the value of the pressing time counter 293b is initialized to 0 (S6211), and the process proceeds to the process of S6212.

  In the process of S6212, it is determined whether or not the auto-pressing flag 293a is on (S6212). If it is determined in the process of S6212 that the auto-pressing flag 293a is on (S6212: Yes), since the auto-pressing function is being executed, the value of the period counter 293c is incremented by one. (S6213), it is determined whether the value of the added period counter 293c is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (1000 in this modification) (S6214).

  If it is determined in the process of S6214 that the value of the period counter 293c is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (1000) (S6214: Yes), a pressing signal indicating pressing of the frame button 22 is output to the audio lamp control device 113 ( In step S6215), the period counter 293c is initialized to 0 in order to count the next predetermined period (S6216), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6214 that the value of the period counter 293c is smaller than the predetermined value (1000) (S6214: No), the processes of S6215 and S6216 are skipped, and the process is ended.

  If it is determined in the process of S6212 that the auto-pressing flag 293a is off (S6212: No), the auto-pressing function is not being executed, the processes of S6213 to S6216 are executed to execute this process. End the process.

  As described above, in the second modification of the second control example, the on / off of the auto pressing function can be switched by executing the predetermined operation (long press on the frame button 22). Therefore, since it is not necessary to continuously press and hold the frame button 22 in order to execute the automatic pressing function, the operation burden on the player can be reduced.

  In the second modification, the pressing signal is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 even when the execution of the automatic pressing function is started. As a result, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the auto-pressing has been set. It is to be noted that the present invention is not limited to the output of the pressing signal, and notifies that the auto pressing has been set, and based on the notification, an effect indicating that the auto pressing is set by the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. May be

  In the second modification, even when the automatic pressing function is executed, the normal pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, and the pressing signal is output to the audio lamp control device 113. As a result, even when the auto-pressing function is being executed, the player can change the effect mode by operating the frame button 22 arbitrarily, so the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved. . The present invention is not limited to this, and when the automatic pressing function is being executed, the normal pressing of the frame button 22 may not be detected. In addition, when the automatic pressing function is being executed, the execution of the automatic pressing function may be ended based on the frame button 22 being normally pressed. As a result, the execution of the auto-pressing function can be easily ended, and a gaming machine which is easy for the player to operate can be provided.

  In the second modification, the time during which the frame button 22 is pressed is measured by the processing of the MPU. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an electric circuit is provided so that the capacitor is charged while the frame button 22 is pressed, and it is configured to determine that the long press is performed when the voltage of the capacitor reaches a predetermined value (for example, 5 V). May be

<Another Example of Effect Performed in Each Control Example>
Next, other effects performed in each of the control examples described above will be described. The same reference numerals are given to the same points as the configuration used in each control example described above, and the description thereof is omitted.

<Mission production>
In each of the control examples described above, the mission effect is executed when a specific variation pattern (for example, super reach (60 seconds)) is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202d by the processing of the voice lamp control device 113. The mission effect is an effect of providing a benefit (for example, a big hit) when a specific command (mission) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the contents of the effect executed thereafter satisfy the command.

  In each of the control examples described above, the command display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is composed of command content (first command information) and a commander (second command information). And, it is configured to be able to store past command display as a command history. By this configuration, when the mission effect is performed, the current command display and the past (previous) command display are simultaneously displayed. Here, based on the relationship between the present command display and the past (previous) command display, it is configured to indicate to the player whether or not the present mission effect will be successful.

  Specifically, if the current and previous command displays (the first command information and the second command information) are the same, it indicates that there is a high possibility that the present mission presentation will be successful, and if they are different, the current display Suggests that the mission presentation is unlikely to succeed. Furthermore, when a part of the command display matches (for example, the commander who is the second command information matches), it is set so as to indicate that the possibility of success is high if the mission effect is advanced to the second half. Ru.

  As described above, since the contents of the past mission effects and the current mission effects overlap to set the expectation of the jackpot to be high, the same effects are repeatedly executed and the player is bored with the game. It is possible to make it easy for the jackpot to have an expectation. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the player gets bored with the game early.

  Furthermore, in the present mission effect, for example, when a command "collect people" is displayed as the command content, if the result of the effect is "0 people", the command fails and "1 person" to "100 people" When the command is successful and the command is successful, the command achievement rate (for example, "one person" and "command achievement rate 1% and" 100 people ") is set. By setting the achievement rate of the command, it is possible to set the degree of expectation to be the jackpot in more detail. In addition, when the current and previous command displays have the same command content, which is the first command information, and the commander, which is the second command information, different, the effect is executed with the command achievement rate taken over. It is done. Thereby, even if the same instruction content is repeatedly executed, the content of the effect can be changed. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the player gets bored with the game early.

  In the above description, effects are performed based on the previous command display history and the current command display, but for example, a means capable of storing a plurality of command displays displayed in the past is provided. A selection means is provided for the player to select an arbitrary command display from the inside. Even if the instruction display selected by the selection means is displayed on the display screen (the third symbol display device 81), the effect is executed based on the instruction display selected by the selection means and the present instruction display. Good. In addition, the information corresponding to the indication display in the past is displayed as a two-dimensional code on the display screen of the pachinko machine 10, the player can acquire the information, and the acquired information is used to play the pachinko machine next time. By making it possible to input to 10, it may be possible to take over and display a command instruction executed in the past (for example, the previous day).

<Chance up production>
In each control example mentioned above, in order to show the degree of expectation that the special symbol in change has won the big hit, a part display mode (for example, comment display or reach) of the effect performed in the third symbol display device 81 An effect of changing the color pattern of the display of the title name, the color of the background, etc.) to a different color pattern is executed. As a result, when the same effect is executed, the player will watch the effect while expecting that the partial display mode of the effect is displayed with which color pattern, and the player will get bored early in the game To suppress that.

  However, since the partial display mode described above is displayed at various timings in one of the effects (for example, 60 seconds), the player does not notice a change in the partial display mode, or sees the effect in expectation As a result, there was a problem that a feeling of dissatisfaction was remembered because the degree of expectation of the jackpot is not displayed with a high color pattern.

  On the other hand, in each of the control examples described above, a color pattern advance notification means is provided which can notify the player of the color pattern displayed in the current effect in advance when the effect is executed. As a result, the player can grasp in advance the color pattern provided in the present presentation.

  Moreover, in each control example mentioned above, it was set as the structure by which a specific color pattern is automatically selected from several displayed color patterns as a color pattern prior notification means. As a result, by displaying a color pattern having a high expectation of big hit among a plurality of color patterns once displayed, the color pattern is selected by the color pattern prior notification means in anticipation that the color pattern is selected. It is possible to closely watch the

  Furthermore, in the color pattern prior notification means, a plurality of color patterns can be notified based on the number of partial display modes described above. As a result, when a plurality of color patterns with a high probability of big hit are notified in advance, the player only needs to pay attention to the effect, suppressing the distrust of the game caused by having excessive expectation in each effect. be able to.

  Moreover, since the some partial display modes mentioned above are made to differ in the jackpot expectation degree at the time of being changed into the same color pattern, the partial display mode which the color pattern notified beforehand by the color pattern prior notification means is different You can watch the production while enjoying what it is used for.

<Hold change effect>
In each of the control examples described above, an area (hereinafter referred to as a pending display area) in which information indicating the number of rights for which the variation of the special symbol is executed in the third symbol display device 81 (hereinafter referred to as pending number information) is displayed. And a region (hereinafter referred to as execution display area) in which information (hereinafter referred to as execution information) corresponding to the special symbol currently being changed is displayed. Then, the display mode of the holding symbol representing the holding number information displayed in the holding display area by the number of symbols is changed based on the information obtained by prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the holding symbol, Is configured to be executable.

  Conventionally, this reserved pre-reading effect is configured to change the display pattern of the reserved symbol when a new change of the special symbol is started. In this case, it is possible to entertain the player with the play-preserving effect when the predetermined number or more of the hold number information is displayed, but if the hold number is small, the effect should be sufficiently enjoyed. There was a problem that I could not

  On the other hand, in the on-hold change effect of each control example mentioned above, based on the information which prefetched the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the on-hold symbol, using the time required until the on-hold symbol shifts to the execution display area The display mode of the holding symbol is changed. Thereby, even in a state where the number of reservations is small, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the reservation symbols at least using the time until the variation of the special symbol currently executed is finished.

  Specifically, the holding symbol (for example, the holding symbol displayed on holding 3) which is the target of holding change is changed to a character, and the holding symbol changed to the character is a predetermined holding display area (for example, holding 2 is displayed) The hold change effect is started (displayed, for example, battle effect) when displayed (shifted) in the area to be displayed. And, as long as the time until the end of the on-hold change effect ends, the on-hold change progresses.

  That is, in the case where the holding symbol to be subjected to the holding change shifts to the holding 2, the length of the holding change effect based on the fluctuation time of the special symbol being executed and the fluctuation time of the holding symbol displayed on the holding 1. Is determined. As a result, even if the pending change presentation is started in the pending 1 state, the pending change can be sufficiently advanced by the pending change presentation if the variation time of the special symbol currently being shifted is long.

  Further, the end of the on-hold change effect may be at the timing when the on-hold symbol to be subjected to the on-hold change effect shifts to the execution display area, or may be ended before that.

  Furthermore, in each of the control examples described above, when the held symbol to be the target of the held change presentation shifts to the execution display area, the character image is displayed in the vicinity of the execution display area. And it is used for the prefetch effect of the holding symbol currently displayed on the holding display area in the state in which the holding symbol which becomes the object of the holding change presentation with the character image is displayed on the execution display area.

  Specifically, the character in which the holding symbol to be the target of the holding change presentation has changed and the character displayed in the vicinity of the execution display area execute the battle presentation described above. By configuring in this way, when the holding symbol changes to a character in a state where the number of holdings is small, the character is used for holding change presentation of the holding symbol later, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game Become.

  In the battle effect described above, the degree of expectation may be suggested by a combination of characters facing each other. Further, it is preferable that the frequency of the pre-hold presentation effect and the expectation of the jackpot differ depending on the type of the character displayed in the vicinity of the execution display area.

<Button production setting>
In each of the control examples described above, a plurality of frame button operation effects capable of operating the frame button 22 can be performed as the variation pattern set by the voice lamp control device 114. Further, although detailed description is omitted, various frame button operation effects are set more in each of the control examples described above (for example, by continuously hitting the frame button 22 while the third symbol is moving) An effect of notifying the player by changing the color of light emitted from the plurality of light emitting units provided in the pachinko machine 10, the degree of expectation of the special symbol corresponding to the third symbol fluctuating this time, the sound lamp, Effects such as changing the decoration mode by continuously hitting the frame button 22 without being based on the variation pattern set by the control operation 114). As described above, when a plurality of frame button operation effects are configured to be executable, there is a problem that the frame button effects are frequently performed, and the action of the player operating the frame buttons 22 becomes complicated.

  On the other hand, a unit for determining whether or not various frame button operation effects using the frame button 22 are set in a plurality, and a plurality of frame button operation effects that are set when it is determined that a plurality is set. When the interval between a plurality of frame button operation effects becomes a predetermined interval by the interval determination means for determining the interval of the frame button operation effect and the interval determination means, the operation of the frame button 22 is enabled also in the predetermined interval A frame button operation effect setting means is provided. Thereby, when a plurality of frame button operation effects are executed at predetermined intervals, it is possible to set a period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is enabled to straddle the plurality of frame button operation effects. Therefore, the player can continue to operate the frame button 22, and it is possible to suppress that the player's operation on the frame button 22 becomes complicated.

  Note that, as the above-mentioned interval determination means, specifically, a period in which a plurality of frame button operation effects are actually executed is set, and an interval of a plurality of frame button operation effects is set based on the set period. A storage unit is provided for storing combinations of frame button operation effects such as those to be determined and the intervals at which a plurality of frame button operation effects are executed is less than a predetermined amount, and combinations of frame button operation effects stored in the storage unit There is one that determines whether or not is set.

  Furthermore, as the frame button operation effect setting means described above, specifically, the frame button operation performed later and the frame button operation performed later are set to be extended so that the operation effective period of the frame button operation effect executed earlier is extended. There are cases where it is set to move forward the operation effective period of the effect and cases where a new frame button operation effect is set.

  When setting is made so as to extend the operation effective period of the frame button operation effect executed earlier, the third symbol display in a mode in which the operation effective period has been extended in advance. It may be displayed on the device 81, or the frame button operation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a mode in which the normal operation effective period is set, and the remaining period of the set operation effective period is predetermined. A display may be performed in which the operation effective period is extended when the period (the remaining 2 seconds or the remaining 0 seconds) is reached. By doing this, it is possible to determine whether a new frame button operation effect has not been set until just before the frame button operation effect being executed is finished, so that the player can play more frames. The button 22 can be operated continuously, and the operation of the player on the frame button 22 can be suppressed from being complicated.

  In addition, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect result of the frame button operation effect which has been executed earlier at the timing when the normal operation effective period is completed, and by the operation of the frame button 22 during the extended operation effective period, It is also possible to change the display mode of the effect result of the frame button operation effect executed previously displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When setting the effective period of the frame button operation effect to be executed later to be moved forward, the frame button operation effect itself to be executed later may be moved forward, or the frame button operation effect to be executed later may be performed. Alternatively, the effective period of operation set forward may be used as a preparation period until the frame button operation effect to be executed later is started. For example, when a frame button operation effect of continuously hitting the frame button 22 is performed as a frame button operation effect to be executed later, a display indicating the degree of the continuous hit operation is performed by executing the continuous hitting operation during the preparation period, During the preparation period, the automatic double hit function can be set to ON.

  Furthermore, when a new frame button operation effect is set, a frame button operation effect that is not related to the frame button operation effect executed first or the frame button operation effect executed later is executed.

  As described above, when a plurality of frame button operation effects are set at predetermined intervals, the frame button operation effects are set such that the operation valid period set in the plurality of frame button operation effects continues. By doing this, the player can operate the frame button 22 continuously, so that it is possible to suppress that the player's operation on the frame button 22 becomes complicated.

  In addition, as a setting method of a frame button operation production, when setting one production, a plurality of frame button operation productions may be set, and it is possible to each individual production that the execution time may approach. A frame button operation effect may be set. For example, expecting that the special symbol of this time is a big hit by continuously pressing the frame button 22 until the variation of the third symbol based on the variation of the special symbol becomes a predetermined dynamic display mode (for example, SP reach) In the case where the degree is displayed by the light emission color of the decoration lamp provided in the pachinko machine 10, and further, when a predetermined dynamic display mode (for example, SP reach) is set, the third symbol is a predetermined dynamic When a pattern to be a display mode (for example, SP reach) can be selected from a plurality (for example, three) and a pattern in which a frame button operation effect is set is selected from the predetermined dynamic display mode, 2 An interval at which one frame button operation effect is executed may be set to a predetermined interval.

  In each of the control examples described above, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means operable by the player, but the invention is not limited thereto. For example, an operation of providing a proximity sensor operable by the player approaching a hand The player, the operation means that responds by touching the player (detects changes in pressure and capacitance), the operation means such as the operation that the player tilts back and forth, and the left and right, and the operation means that can rotate The configuration is only required to be operable. Furthermore, although the frame button 22 alone constitutes the operation means in the contents described above, the operation means may be constituted using a plurality of devices.

  Furthermore, in each control described above, although the setting method for pressing the frame button 22 for a predetermined period or longer is used as a setting method for automatically operating the operation means, the present invention is not limited thereto. The operation may be set when the operation means is operated at a predetermined timing as the operation of (1), or may be set when the operation means is operated according to a predetermined procedure. In addition, a dedicated device may be provided for automatically switching to the state in which the operation means is operated.

<Third control example>
Next, a third control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second control example described above, indicators P1 to P5 (see FIG. 162) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81, and the indicators P1 to P5 are displayed. When the display mode becomes a predetermined mode (for example, the display mode in which the indicator P3 indicates MAX), the point effect for which a specific effect (for example, SP reach) is performed, and the display mode of each indicator in the point effect are changed The control of the point display for displaying the predetermined value (for example, point) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 has been described.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, another example of the point effect and another example of the point display described in the second control example described above will be described. In the third control example, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed with respect to the second control example, and the contents of the RAM 233 and the character ROM 234 in the display control device 114 are partially The difference is that the changed part and the process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and the process performed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is partially changed. The other points are the same as in the second control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the second control example, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, with regard to the point effect executed in the present control example, differences from the above-described second control example will be described. In the second control example described above, two types of modes ("normal mode" and "dimple mode") are used for point effects, whereas in the present control example, four types of modes used for point effects (FIG. 195) It differs in the point which made it to reference).

  Furthermore, in the second control example described above, points are allocated equally to the respective indicators P1 to P3 displayed in the "normal mode", whereas in the present control example, the "normal mode A" is used. It differs in the point which makes distribution of a point differ according to the lottery result of a special symbol with respect to each indicator P1-P3 displayed by. Further, in the present control example, a detailed description is added to the processing relating to the mode transition during the point effect, which is also executed in the second control example described above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 195 to FIG. 197, the point effect of this control example will be described in detail. FIG. 195 is a schematic diagram for explaining each mode used for point effect in the third control example. Here, the point effect of this control example is an effect performed while the variation of the special symbol is executed 1 to 4 times, and the indicator display mode as in the point effect performed in the second control example described above Is an effect that informs the player that a benefit (a high impact or a large hit expected effect) is given to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 195, the point effect in this control example is composed of four types of modes: "normal mode A", "normal mode B", "die mode", and "bingo mode". In each of these modes, different indicators are displayed, and at the time of mode transition performed during the point effect, the indicators are displayed in a display mode that inherits the indicator display mode displayed in the mode before the transition. Are configured to Specifically, a display mode (for example, "Normal Mode A" corresponding to a rabbit) in which it is determined that a bonus 2 (for example, a game with a high probability of a big hit) is given before a point effect mode transition In the case where the indicator P1 is the display mode indicating the maximum value (MAX), the display mode (for example, it is determined that the display mode of the indicator after mode transition is also given the benefit 2 (representation with high jackpot expectation)) A display mode that shows the eyes in the "die mode" is configured to be displayed.

  Specifically, it has been determined that a plurality of display modes (reward 1 display mode (big hit confirmation display mode), benefit 2 display mode (big hit expectation degree) is given to the display mode displayed by the indicator. Display mode), high reference display mode (display mode showing a high reference state to which any one of the benefits is given a little more) divided into a discriminable storage possible, and when mode transition is performed, the discriminatively stored display The display mode corresponding to the stage of the mode is the initial display mode after mode transition.

  By configuring in this manner, the player can easily grasp that the benefits acquired in the point production so far are not lost when the mode transition occurs during the point production and the point production By shifting to a different indicator in the middle, it is possible to diversify the effects and suppress the player from being bored early.

  Here, details of each mode used for point presentation will be described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197. Fig. 196 (a) is a schematic view showing a "normal mode A" used for point effect in the third control example. This "normal mode A" is a display mode similar to the "normal mode" of the point effect described in the second control example described above, and only the points different from the "normal mode" described above are described here. , Other explanations are omitted.

  In the "normal mode A", three indicators P1 to P3 are used as in the "normal mode" used in the point effect of the second control example described above. In this control example, unlike the second control example described above, the value of the indicator P3 corresponding to "Brave" is set higher than the indicators P1 and P2 corresponding to "Rabbit" and "Kame". . Specifically, the bonus given to the player when the value of the indicator reaches the maximum (MAX) is different, and the indicators P1 and P2 corresponding to "Rabbit" and "Kame" have their respective indicator values When it reaches the maximum (MAX), it announces that it shifts to the effect (main effect) with a high hit probability as a benefit 2, and when the value of the indicator P3 corresponding to "brave man" becomes the maximum (MAX), it will be a benefit 1 , It is configured to notify that the special symbol in change is winning the jackpot.

  Further, as a display mode (high reference display mode) indicating a high reference state to which a privilege is given a little more, a display mode in which the display mode of any one of the indicators P1 to P3 indicates a sixth step is set. Thereby, when the mode is shifted when the indicator of any of the indicators P1 to P3 indicates the sixth step, the display mode of the indicator after the mode shift is displayed in the display mode indicating the high reference state It will be.

  In addition, when "normal mode A" is set as point production, the production in which a "rabbit", a "Kame", and a "brave man" are displayed is performed as a 3rd symbol change production (main production). In this way, the main effect (the third symbol variation effect) and the sub-effect (point effect) are associated with giving relevance to the display contents of the main effect and the display mode of the indicator in the point effect without giving the player a sense of discomfort. Can be displayed (executed).

  Next, the "diamond mode" will be described with reference to FIG. 196 (b). Fig. 196 (b) is a schematic view showing a "die mode" used for point effect in the third control example. This "die mode" is a display mode similar to the "die mode" of point effect described in the second control example described above, and only the differences from the "die mode" described above will be described here, Other explanations are omitted.

  In the "die mode", two indicators P4 and P5 simulating a die are used as in the "die mode" used in the point effect of the second control example described above. In this control example, when the combination of the display modes of the indicators P4 and P5 becomes a predetermined display mode (for example, Zoro eyes), the player is set to be provided with a benefit (a benefit 1, a benefit 2) . Specifically, when a display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 show the same number (i.e., Zoro eyes display mode) is displayed, an effect with a high expectation of the jackpot is given as the benefit 2, and the Zoro eyes display mode Among them, in the case of “6.6”, it is notified that the jackpot has been won as the benefit 1.

  In the "circumstances mode", the indicators P4 and P5 imitating a die perform rotational display in which the indicators are rotated, and when the display mode is stopped, the indicators P4 and P5 are different in the subsequent rotational display. It does not become a display mode showing numbers (that is, non-zolo eyes display mode), and a rotation display is performed to indicate whether or not the numbers stopped and displayed in the zolo eye display mode are increased. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress stop display of the non-throttle display mode after stop display of the once-throttle display mode, so it is easy to understand the benefits given to the player be able to.

  Further, in the case of "in the dice mode", the case where the number of the indicator P4 is "5" is set as the high reference display mode. For example, in the “normal mode A”, when the display mode of the high reference (for example, the value of the indicator P1 corresponding to rabbit is “6”) is displayed, when transitioning to the “diamond mode”, the indicator P4 The display mode is fixed to "5", and an effect that only the indicator P5 is rotated is performed. Thereby, even if the mode transition is performed during the point effect, the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the display mode indicating the high reference state. Thus, the player can easily grasp that the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition is maintained.

  Furthermore, since the display mode of the indicator P4 is stopped at “5”, “5.5” will be stopped when the eye-viewing mode is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to predict that the Zoro eyes display mode “6.6” notifying that the jackpot has been won is close after the Zoro eyes display mode is stopped and displayed, and the effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, when the "die mode" is set as a point effect, an effect using a die is executed as a third symbol variation effect (main effect). In this way, the main effect (the third symbol variation effect) and the sub-effect (point effect) are associated with giving relevance to the display contents of the main effect and the display mode of the indicator in the point effect without giving the player a sense of discomfort. Can be displayed (executed).

  Next, the “normal mode B” will be described with reference to FIG. 197 (a). FIG. 197 (a) is a schematic view showing a "normal mode B" used for point effect in the third control example. One indicator P6 which expresses the whole by 100% is used for this "normal mode B", and the display mode of indicator P6 became a predetermined display mode (for example, the display mode which shows 50% and 100%) In such a case, it is set that the player is given a benefit (a benefit 1, a benefit 2). Specifically, when the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates 50% is displayed, an effect having a high expectation of the jackpot is given as the benefit 2 and the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates 100% is displayed In addition, it is notified that the jackpot has been won as the benefit 1.

  In the “normal mode B”, a display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates 40% is set as the high reference display mode. For example, in the case where the display mode of the high standard (for example, the value of the indicator corresponding to rabbit is "6") is displayed in the "normal mode A", after transition to the "normal mode B" The display mode of the indicator P6 is set to a display mode showing 40%. Thereby, even if the mode transition is performed during the point effect, the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the display mode indicating the high reference state. Thus, the player can easily grasp that the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition is maintained.

  Next, the "bingo mode" will be described with reference to FIG. 197 (b). FIG. 197 (b) is a schematic view showing “bingo mode” used for point effect in the third control example. In this "bingo mode", a 9-mass indicator P7 with numbers 1 to 9 is used, and the number attached to the indicator P7 corresponding to the number displayed by the point effect is deleted (designated) The directing effect is executed. Then, when the display mode in which the erased (designated) numbers are arranged in a straight line is displayed, the player is given a benefit (a benefit 1, a benefit 2).

  Specifically, when a display mode indicating that two lines of the indicator P7 are aligned is displayed, an effect with a high expectation of the jackpot is given as the benefit 2 and indicates that three lines or more of the indicator P7 are aligned. When the display mode is displayed, it is notified that the jackpot has been won as the benefit 1.

  In the "bingo mode", a display mode indicating that one line of the indicator P7 is aligned is set as the high reference display mode. For example, in the case where the display mode of the high reference (for example, the value of the indicator P1 corresponding to rabbit is “6”) is displayed in the “normal mode A”, the transition to the “bingo mode” is performed after the transition The display mode of the indicator P7 is set to a high reference display mode which indicates that one line is aligned. Thereby, even if the mode transition is performed during the point effect, the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the display mode indicating the high reference state. Thus, the player can easily grasp that the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition is maintained.

  As described above, the indicators having different display modes (appearance, number) and display modes (display modes for notifying a player of giving a privilege) to the plurality of modes used for point effects in this control example as described above (P1 to P7) are used, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the point effect which is monotonous by performing mode transition during the point effect execution.

  Further, even when the mode is shifted during the point effect, the point effect after the mode transition is executed in the display mode corresponding to the display mode before the mode transition, so that the point effect which is easy for the player to understand is provided. Can.

  Furthermore, although the details will be described later, in a predetermined mode (for example, “normal mode A”), a display mode (for example, indicators P1 to P3 indicating “4. Although the display mode shown in “4.4” is displayed, by transitioning to a different mode (for example, “a die mode”) while the display mode is displayed, the player as a display mode of the indicator after the mode shift The display mode (for example, the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "4.4") is displayed so as to indicate that the benefit (for example, the benefit 2) is given to.

  In this manner, by transitioning to a mode in which the display mode of the indicator indicating that the bonus is given to the player is different, the bonus is given from the display mode indicating the low reference value with a low degree of expectation to which the bonus is given. To a display mode (or a high reference display mode with a high degree of expectation to which a benefit is given).

  Furthermore, in the final stage during point production (for example, in a state where the special symbol has fluctuated 3 times during point production), in the current mode, there is a low expectation of being a display mode to which a benefit is given (for example, "normal mode A" Even if each indicator P1 to P3 is a display mode showing a low numerical value in), a display mode (or Since there is a possibility of mode transition to a high standard display mode in which an award is given with a high degree of expectation, it is possible to entertain the player to the end.

  Next, returning to FIG. 195, the mode transition of the point effect in the present control example will be described. The point effect of this control example is set to be started from the "normal mode A", and as a result of the mode transition lottery executed during the point effect, the mode transition is executed when it is determined that the mode transition is made. (Hereinafter, referred to as the first mode transition). In addition to the determination of the mode transition described above, the mode transition is executed based on the result of determination of the success or failure and the display mode of the indicator (hereinafter, referred to as second mode transition).

  Furthermore, with respect to the mode transition destination, the restriction (that is, the prohibition process) is set based on the display result of the success or failure determination result and the indicator, and the effect of the point effect is reduced by the mode transition being executed. It is suppressing the occurrence of a situation.

  First, in the "normal mode A", as shown in FIG. 195 as the transition destination of the first mode transition, the "die mode", the "normal mode B" and the "bingo mode" are set, and the mode transition lottery is won. Transition to the mode set as the transition destination. That is, the “normal mode A” set as the first mode when the point effect is performed is set to be shiftable to any of the remaining three modes as the first mode shift.

  Here, in the case of the display mode in which the first mode transition described above is performed and the display mode before the mode transition notifies that the privilege 2 is given, the display mode after the mode transition also informs that the privilege 2 is given When the display mode before the mode transition is the display mode indicating the high standard (high standard display mode), the display mode after the mode shift is also the display mode (high standard display mode) indicating the high standard Be done. As a result, even when the mode transition is performed in the middle of the point effect, it is possible to inform the player of the status (display mode) of the indicator in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Moreover, in the case of a predetermined display mode (for example, "4.4.4") in which all the indicators P1 to P3 have the same display mode as the second mode transition, the "normal mode A" It is configured to be transferable to In this case, the indicators P4 and P5 are displayed in the same display mode (e.g., "3.3") in the same output (i.e., Zorome) in the "die mode" after the mode transition. As described above, by performing both the first mode transition performed by the mode transition lottery and the second mode transition performed based on the display mode, the mode transition is performed in various situations in the point effect It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  When the transition condition of the first mode transition and the transition condition of the second mode transition are simultaneously established in the “normal mode A”, the second mode transition is prioritized and executed. This is because, in contrast to the first mode transition for enhancing the rendering effect, the second mode transition is easy to set the mode transition based on the result of the determination of the special symbol. Although the detailed description will be described later, in the present control example, the transition condition of the second mode transition is likely to be established if the lottery result (the result of the judgment of success or failure) of the special symbol is won in the "normal mode A". Is configured. That is, since the state in which the second mode transition condition is satisfied is a state in which the jackpot can be expected, by making the second mode transition condition prior to the first mode transition condition, a jackpot can be made to the player. It is possible to execute mode transition which gives expectation.

  As described above, in the point effect capable of transitioning a plurality of modes, the fulfillment conditions of the plurality of mode transition conditions are set so that the winning expectation of the jackpot is different, and further, a plurality of mode transition conditions are simultaneously established. By executing the mode transition based on the establishment of the mode transition condition with the higher winning expectation, it becomes possible for the player to execute the mode transition during the point effect as an effect expecting a big hit, thereby enhancing the effect. It has the effect of being able to

  Next, when the mode set during the point effect is the "die mode", the "normal mode A" or the "bingo mode" is set as the first mode transition. That is, it is set so as not to shift to the "normal mode B" from the "diamond mode". This is a preset prohibition process, and the first mode is for a mode in which it is difficult for the player to relate the indicator display mode before mode transition to the indicator mode after mode transition. Even when the transition condition of the transition is satisfied (when the mode transition lottery is won), the mode is not transitioned. As a result, even if the mode transition is executed during the point effect, the player does not feel uncomfortable.

  In addition, when transitioning from "circumstances mode" to "normal mode A", "normal mode A" displayed when transitioning from "normal mode A" to "dimple mode" in the point effect of this time The display modes of the indicators P1 to P3 are set so as not to be lower than the display modes of the indicators P1 to P3 (the numerical value of each indicator does not decrease). Specifically, the display mode of each indicator at the time of mode transition is stored, and the display mode of the mode transition destination can be set based on the display mode of each stored indicator.

  This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the mode transition is performed a plurality of times during one point effect, and the mode is reset to the originally set mode. A limit (for example, one) may be provided to the number of mode transitions performed during one point effect, and the mode may not shift to the mode already displayed during one point effect.

  When the “normal mode B” is set, only the “normal mode A” is set as the transition destination of the transition condition of the first mode transition (when the mode transition lottery is won), When the bingo mode is set, only the "normal mode B" is set as the transition destination when the transition condition of the first mode transition is satisfied.

  As described above, the mode transition executed for the point effect in the present control example is an effect that is easy for the player to understand due to a plurality of mode transition conditions and various prohibition processes, and further gives expectation.

  In this control example, the second mode transition (mode transition based on the special symbol's judgment result and indicator display mode) is set to "normal mode A" only, but it may be set in other modes as well. Good. Further, more mode transition conditions may be set, or an upper limit (for example, one) may be provided to the number of mode transitions performed in one point effect. By configuring in this way, there is an effect that it is possible to further enhance the rendering effect of the mode transition during point rendering.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 198, the display method of the point which changes the display mode of an indicator in point production is demonstrated. FIG. 198 is a schematic view schematically showing a point display method. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, when creating an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a plurality of layers are overlaid and created (see FIGS. 206 to 208). FIG. 198 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing a layer displaying the character image of the third symbol variation effect (main effect) among the plurality of layers, and FIG. 198 (b) is a plurality of layers. FIG. 198 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing a layer displaying a point image (sub effect) among them, and FIG. 198 (c) is a combination of a plurality of layers (a layer displaying a character image and a layer displaying a point image). It is the model which showed typically the image which

  As shown in FIG. 198 (a), the layer displaying the character image is divided into a plurality of small areas (Dm11 to Dm13, Dm21 to Dm23, Dm31 to Dm33) based on the coordinates, and the small area where the character is displayed (Dm12 and Dm13, Dm21 to Dm23, Dm31 to Dm33) are discriminated from the small area (Dm11) in which the character is not displayed, and image processing is executed so as to transmit the small area (Dm11) in which the character is not displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 198 (b), the layer displaying the point image is also divided into a plurality of small areas (Dm11 to Dm13, Dm21 to Dm23, Dm31 to Dm33) based on the coordinates as in the layer displaying the character image. A point display process is performed to display points for all small areas, which are divided. In this point display process, when a command indicating the number of points output from the audio lamp control device 113 is received, point images indicating the corresponding number of points are displayed for all the small areas.

  Then, by creating an image of each layer, as shown in FIG. 198 (c), only the small area (Dm11) of the character image in which the character is not displayed is synthesized on the back of the layer displaying the character image. The layer displaying the point image can be visually recognized, and the point can be displayed at a position not interfering with the character image.

  By executing the above-described image creation process, it is not necessary to execute the process of determining the display position of the point when executing the point display, so that the control load can be reduced.

  In the point display method described with reference to FIG. 198, the small area (Dm11) in which the character is not displayed, that is, the allowable area in which the point display can be performed is one. If there are a plurality of small areas in which the character is not displayed, it is preferable to execute a process of selecting one small area out of them. For example, the type of the character image (main image) displayed as the third symbol variation effect (main effect) is determined, and a specific character (for example, a character imitating a hero as a character associated with the point effect indicator One of the permissible areas adjacent to the small area (in the case of FIG. 198 (a), small areas Dm21, Dm22, Dm31, Dm32) in which Dc1) is displayed may be selected. Thereby, it becomes possible to execute point display in the vicinity of the main image displayed in the third symbol variation effect (main effect). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a defect that the player watching the third symbol variation effect (main effect) misses the point display.

  In addition, although the point display is made visible to the player by transmitting one of the permissible areas, which are small areas in which the character image is not displayed, among the layers displaying the character image, another control method may be used. . For example, in the image created this time, a small area where the character is displayed but the character is not displayed later may be determined, and the transmission processing may be performed at the timing when the character is not displayed in the small area. By configuring in this manner, a time lag can be provided from when the command for the point display is received to when the point is actually displayed, and the effect of the point display can be enhanced. Furthermore, since the point display is performed based on the movement of the character moving in the third symbol variation production, the display giving relevance to the third symbol variation production that is the main production and the point production that is the sub-production ( Effect can be performed, and the effect can be further enhanced.

  In addition, when using such a control method, in the third symbol variation effect (main effect), an effect in which two types of characters face each other is executed, and an ally character (for example, the character Dc1 in FIG. 198) attacks If it does, points will be displayed, and if the enemy character (for example, character Dc2 in FIG. 198) makes an attack, no points will be displayed, or its value will be lower than the points displayed when allies attack. It is good to make the point be displayed. As a result, it is possible to execute display in which the third symbol variation effect which is the main effect and the point effect which is the sub effect are associated with each other, and the effect can be further enhanced.

  In the above-described control example, the number of points having the same value is displayed in each small area, but different points may be displayed. In addition, the method of point display described in the second control example described above may be used.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Control Example
Next, with reference to FIGS. 199 to 208, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 199 to 205, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described.

  FIG. 199 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 199 (a), the ROM 222 in this control example is different from the ROM 222 in each control example described above in the internal level selection table 222aa, internal score selection table 222ab, number selection table 222ac, use score selection table 222ad, final The display mode selection table 222ae, the character selection table 222af, the mode selection table 222ag, and the display mode selection table 222ae are different, and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the details of the internal level selection table 222aa will be described with reference to FIG. 200 (a). FIG. 200 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the internal level selection table 222aa. As shown in FIG. 200 (a), the internal level selection table 222aa is based on the result of determination of the success or failure of the special image variation of this time, the result of determination of success or failure of the winning information currently stored on hold, and the value of the effect counter 223f. It is a table to select the internal level. In addition, the success or failure judgment result in the special figure fluctuation this time is judged based on the fluctuation pattern command output from main controller 110, and the success or failure judgment result of the prize information currently stored on hold is outputted from main controller 110 It is determined based on the winning command.

  The internal level selection table 222aa is referred to in the point effect initial setting process (S6303 in FIG. 211) executed in the point effect setting process 2 (S2053 in FIG. 210) described later (S6351 in FIG. 211). Specifically, the internal level "3" is obtained if the current success or failure judgment result is "hit", and the hold judgment result is "hit" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149". Is selected, and if it is "150 to 198", the internal level "2" is selected, the current pass / fail result is "hit", and the pass / fail result within the hold is "off", and the effect is If the value of the counter 223 f is “0 to 149”, the internal level “2” is selected, and if it is “150 to 198”, the internal level “1” is selected. In addition, if the current judgment result of the present is "off", and the judgment result within the suspension is "hit" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", the internal level "2" is selected. If it is "150 to 198", the internal level "1" is selected, the result of the present determination is "out", and the result of the on / off determination is "out", the effect counter 223f If the value is "0 to 149", the internal level "1" is selected, and if it is "150 to 198", the internal level "2" is selected.

  As described above, the internal level selected in the internal level selection table 222aa is such that a high numerical value is selected according to the advantageous state (for example, the state in which the jackpot is won) that the gaming state is advantageous for the game. Is configured. Thus, by providing an indicator (internal level) according to the gaming state and executing effects based on the indicator, it is possible to easily set the degree of expectation that the gaming state is in an advantageous state for each effect to be performed be able to.

  Next, details of the internal score selection table 222ab will be described with reference to FIG. 200 (b). FIG. 200 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the internal score selection table 222ab. As shown in FIG. 200 (b), the internal score selection table 222ab is a table that is referred to when selecting an internal score to be used when performing point effects based on the internal level and the value of the effect counter 223f. It is.

  Specifically, when the value of the internal level is "3" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0-198", "7" is selected as the internal score used in the point effect, and the internal level is selected. If the value of is "2" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", "5" is selected as the internal score, and if "100 to 198", "6" is selected as the internal score . Also, if the value of the internal level is "1" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", "4" is the internal score, and if "150 to 198", the internal score is "5". Is selected.

  As described above, in this control example, since the internal score used when the point effect is executed is selected based on the value of the internal level set corresponding to the gaming state, the player feels anticipation Can be performed to give points.

  Next, the number selection table 222ac will be described with reference to FIG. 201 (a). FIG. 201 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the number selection table 222ac. As shown in FIG. 201 (a), in the number selection table 222ac, the number-of-uses selection table 222ac1 for use and the number-of-times selection table for removal 222ac2 are set. The number selection table 222 ac is a table to be referred to when setting the number of times the point effect is executed (that is, the number of times of the special symbol variation in which the point effect is continuously executed). Different selection tables are configured to be referred to depending on the determination result of the success or failure or the result of the determination on success or failure of the winning information stored on hold.

  FIG. 201 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the hit number selection table 222ac1. The hit number selection table 222 ac1 is a table for selecting the number of point effects to be executed when the result of the pass / fail judgment is a hit, and the point effect is ended by the change of the special symbol with the result of the pass / fail judgment. The number of point effects is selected. Specifically, if the result of the special symbol variation is a hit, "one time" is performed as the number of point effects, and the special symbol variation after one rotation (that is, executed after the end of the special symbol variation this time) "2 times" is selected as the number of point effects if the success or failure judgment result of the "hold storage" is a hit, and "3 times" is selected if the success or failure judgment result of the special symbol variation after 2 revolutions is a hit.

  In this manner, by setting the number of point effects based on the timing when the special symbol variation to be hit is executed, it is possible to suppress that the hit game is started in the middle of the point effect, and the point effects Can enhance the stage effects.

  FIG. 201 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the number-of-decouplings table 222ac2. This deviation number selection table 222ac2 is executed when the result of judgment of success or failure is out (that is, the result of judgment of success or failure of the special symbol variation of this time is neither the success or failure judgment result corresponding to the winning information stored on hold). It is a table for selecting the number of point effects to be played, and the number of point effects is selected based on the number of pieces of winning information that are stored on hold (hereinafter referred to as the number of holding balls).

  Specifically, when the number of holding balls is “0”, “−” is set as the number of point effects. This is to prevent the point presentation from being performed even if the set variation pattern command is a command to execute the point presentation. By configuring in this way, the success or failure judgment result is out, and further, it is possible to suppress that the point effect that can be executed over a plurality of special symbol variations is performed while the number of holding balls is "0". Because of this, it is possible to enhance the effect of the point effect to be executed. In this control example, although the yes / no determination result is out, and the point effect is not executed when the number of holding balls is "0", any other configuration may be used, for example, The point effect may be performed at a predetermined rate (10%).

  And when the number of holding balls is "1", "2" is the number of point effects, and when the number of holding balls is "2," the number of point effects is "3", the number of holding balls is "3" In the case of “,” “4” is set as the number of point effects. In this manner, by selecting the number of point effects using the number of holding balls at the time point effects are executed, the point effects when the success or failure determination result is out and the point effects when the success or failure determination result is a hit It is possible to prevent the player from being discriminated by the number of point effects.

  In the present control example, if the number of point effects is determined as the success or failure judgment result, it is selected based on the timing at which the special symbol variation in which the success or failure judgment result is performed is executed. Although it is configured to be selected based on the number of holding balls when the point effect is executed, other configurations may be used. For example, in the point effect when the success or failure determination result is out, the number of holding balls may be the maximum number of point effects, and the number may be selected by lottery within the range. By configuring in this way, the number of point effects can be set more complicatedly.

  Next, the used score selection table 222ad will be described with reference to FIG. 202 (a). FIG. 202 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the use score selection table 222ad. The use score selection table 222 ad is used to select a score to be used each time of point production, and as shown in FIG. 202 (a), the use score selection table 222 ad is the number of times of point production (remaining number) The usage score is selected based on the internal score and the remaining score of the internal score.

  Specifically, if the counter value of the effect number counter 223 ac is “4” and the remaining score is “4”, the use score is “1”, and if the remaining score is “5”, the use score If "2" is the remaining score is "6", "3" is selected as the used score, and if the remaining score is "7", "-" is selected as the used score. Also, if the counter value of the effect number counter 223ac is "3" and the remaining score is "3", "1" is used as the used score, and if the remaining score is "4", "2" is used as the used score "If the remaining score is" 5 "," 3 "is used as the used score, and if the remaining score is" 6 "," 4 "is selected as the used score, and the remaining score is" 7 " , "-" Is selected as a use score.

  Furthermore, if the counter value of the effect number counter 223 ac is “2” and the remaining score is “2”, “1” is used as the used score, and if the remaining score is “3”, “2” is used as the used score "If the remaining score is" 4 "," 3 "is used as the use score, and if the remaining score is" 5 "," 4 "is used as the use score, and if the remaining score is" 6 ", the use is used If the score is “5” and the remaining score is “7”, “−” is selected as the use score. If the counter value of the effect number counter 223 ac is “1” and the remaining score is “1”, “1” is used as the used score, and if the remaining score is “2”, “2” is used as the used score "If the remaining score is" 3 "," 3 "is used as the used score, and if the remaining score is" 4 "," 4 "is selected as the used score, and the remaining score is" 5 " When the remaining score is "6", "6" is selected as the used score, and when the remaining score is "7", "7" is selected as the used score.

  In this manner, by selecting the use score to be used in the point production to be executed during the special symbol variation this time based on the remaining number of point production and the remaining score, the number of times the point production continues (the number of times of variation of the special symbol ) Are controlled in advance by the player.

  Next, the final display mode selection table 222ae will be described with reference to FIG. 202 (b). FIG. 202 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the final display mode selection table 222ae. As shown in FIG. 202 (b), the final display mode selection table 222ae includes the final first display mode selection table 222ae1, the final second display mode selection table 222ae2, the final third display mode selection table 222ae3, and the final fourth display A mode selection table 222ae4 is set.

  The final display mode selection table 222 ae is a table to be referred to when selecting the display mode of the indicator to be finally displayed in the point effect, and the final display mode of each mode is performed when the point effect is executed. A final display mode corresponding to the mode set in the final stage of the point effect (the change of the last special symbol for which the point effect is executed) is displayed in advance.

  FIG. 203 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the final first display mode selection table 222ae1. The final first display mode selection table 222ae1 is a table for selecting the final display mode in the “normal mode A”, and it is used for the internal score set when the point effect is performed and the value of the effect counter 223f. The final display mode of each of the indicators P1 to P3 is selected based on the above.

  Specifically, when the internal score is "7" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.7.7" is selected. In the case of “50 to 99”, the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate “5.6.7” is selected, and in the case of “100 to 149”, the indicators P1 to P3 are “4.4. In the case of "150 to 198", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "7.7.7" is selected. That is, when the internal score “7” is selected, which is selected only when the special symbol variation this time is winning a big hit, it has a higher value than the other indicators (indicators P1 and P2) as the final display mode. It is set so that the last display mode in which the indicator (indicator P3) to which a score is given becomes the maximum value is selected.

  Next, when the internal score is "6" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "7.6.5" is selected, " In the case of 50 to 99 ", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate" 4.7.4 "is selected, and in the case of" 100 to 149 ", the indicators P1 to P3 are" 5.4.7. Is selected, and in the case of "150 to 198", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.4.4" is selected, the internal score is "5", and the effect is selected. When the value of the counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "6.3.1" is selected, and in the case of "50 to 99", the indicators P1 to P3 are The display mode indicating “5.5.3” is selected, “100 to 1 In the case of 9 ", a display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate" 5.6.2 "is selected, and in the case of" 150 to 198 ", the indicators P1 to P3 indicate" 4.4.4 ". The display mode shown is selected.

  When the internal score is "4" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.3.2" is selected, and "50" In the case of ~ 99 ", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate" 5.5.1 "is selected, and in the case of" 100 to 149 ", the indicators P1 to P3 are" 5.4.3 " Is selected, and in the case of "150 to 198", a display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.4.4" is selected.

  As described above, by selecting the final display mode based on the value of the internal score selected when the point effect is performed, the change in the display mode of each indicator in the "normal mode A" is made to have a difference. It is possible to increase the degree of expectation of hitting by changing to a display mode in which a specific indicator (indicator P3) shows a high value.

  In addition, in the point effect of this control example, the indicator display mode in the middle step is used at this time, the final display mode selected by the final display mode selection table 222 ae, the current display mode, the remaining number of point effects, Since the selection is made based on the score, the indicator whose value in the final display mode is high (as the display mode approaches the maximum value) tends to increase in value halfway. Therefore, since it is possible to predict the final display mode by grasping the degree of rise of the indicator in the middle stage of the point effect, it is possible to keep the point effect focused on.

  FIG. 203 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the final second display mode selection table 222 ae 2. The final second display mode selection table 222ae2 is a table for selecting the final display mode in the "die mode" and is based on the internal score set when the point effect is performed and the value of the effect counter 223f. Thus, the final display mode of each of the indicators P4 and P5 is selected.

  Specifically, when the internal score is "7" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "5.5" is selected, " In the case of 50 to 99 ", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate" 3.3 "is selected, and in the case of" 100 to 149 ", the indicator P4 and P5 indicates" 4.4 " An aspect is selected, and in the case of "150 to 198", a display aspect in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "6.6" is selected. That is, it is a display mode of an indicator to which a high value score is given as a final display mode when the internal score “7” selected is selected only when the special symbol variation this time is winning a big hit. "6.6" is set to be selected.

  Next, when the internal score is "6" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "5.3" is selected, "50 to 50". In the case of "99", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "6.3" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 149", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "1.1" is selected. In the case of "150 to 198", the display mode in which indicators P4 and P5 indicate "2.2" is selected, the internal score is "5", and the value of effect counter 223f is "0 to 0". In the case of 49 ", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate" 3.2 "is selected, and in the case of" 50 to 99 ", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate" 6.2 "is selected. Selected, "100 to 1 In the case of 9 ", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate" 2.4 "is selected, and in the case of" 150 to 198 ", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate" 1.1 "is selected. It is selected.

  When the internal score is "4" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "1.4" is selected, and "50 to 99". In the case of “”, the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate “2.3” is selected, and in the case of “100 to 149”, the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate “3.2” is selected. In the case of "150 to 198", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "4.1" is selected.

  Thus, by selecting the final display mode based on the value of the internal score selected when the point effect is performed, the combination of the display modes of the respective indicators in the "dimple mode" is made according to the internal score. It becomes possible to make a difference in whether or not it becomes an eye.

  FIG. 204 is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the final third display mode selection table 222ae3. The final third display mode selection table 222ae3 is a table for selecting the final display mode in the "normal mode B", and is used for the internal score set when the point effect is performed and the value of the effect counter 223f. On the basis of this, the final display mode of the indicator P6 is selected.

  Specifically, when the internal score is "7" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "100%" is selected, and "150 to 198". In the case of “,” the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates “90%” is selected. That is, it is a display mode of an indicator to which a high value score is given as a final display mode when the internal score “7” selected is selected only when the special symbol variation this time is winning a big hit. "100%" is set to be selected.

  Next, when the internal score is "6" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "70%" is selected, and "50 to 149" is selected. In the case, the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "80%" is selected, and in the case of "150 to 198", the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "90%" is selected, and the internal score is "5". If the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "50%" is selected, and if the value is "50 to 99", the indicator P6 is "60". The display mode indicating “%” is selected, and in the case of “100 to 149”, the display mode indicating “70%” is selected in the indicator P6, and in the case of “150 to 198”, the indicator P6 is “80 Indication that indicates% There is selected.

  When the internal score is "4" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", a display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "40%" is selected, and "50 to 99". In the case where the indicator P6 indicates "50%" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 149", the indicator P6 indicates "60%" is selected, and in the case of "150 to 198" The display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "80%" is selected.

  As described above, by selecting the final display mode based on the value of the internal score selected when the point effect is executed, the display mode of the indicator in the “normal mode B” is finally made according to the internal score. It is possible to make a difference in how far it rises.

  Next, the character display selection table 222af will be described with reference to FIG. The character display selection table 222af is a table to be referred to when the point effect is executed in the “normal mode A”, and is made to appear to suggest an indicator whose display mode changes among the indicators P1 to P3. It is a table for selecting a character (a mini character for sub effect (see FIG. 163)).

  Specifically, if the internal score is “7” and the value of the effect counter 223 f is “0 to 149”, “brave” is selected as the character, and if “150 to 198”, "Kame" is selected as the character. That is, when the internal score “7” is selected, which is selected only when the special symbol variation this time is winning a big hit, the display mode of the indicator P3 corresponding to the hero always changes as “character Is set to be easy to select.

  Next, if the internal score is “6” and the value of the effect counter 223 f is “0 to 99”, “brave” is selected as the character, and if “100 to 149”, the character is determined as the character If "Rabbit" is selected and "150 to 198", "Kame" is selected as the character, the internal score is "5", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49". “Brave” is selected as the character, “Rabbit” is selected as the character in the case of “50 to 99”, and “Kame” is selected as the character in the case of “100 to 198”.

  Furthermore, if the internal score is "4" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", "Rabbit" is selected as the character, and if "100 to 198", it is "C". Kame is selected.

  Thus, the character displayed this time is selected by selecting the character suggesting the indicator whose display mode changes among the indicators P1 to P3 based on the value of the internal score selected when the point effect is performed. It becomes possible to predict whether the point effect of the point effect is the point effect to be executed when the success or failure judgment result is a hit, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  When changing the display mode of the indicator in the middle stage of the point effect in which "normal mode A" is set, the indicator of the character selected in the character display selection table 222af is set to change. There is. Thereby, it is possible to associate the display of the character with the change in the display mode of the indicator, and it is possible to enhance the rendering effect.

  Referring back to FIG. 199, the description will be continued. The mode selection table 222ag is a table that is referred to when selecting a mode transition destination during point presentation. The mode selection table 222ag is referred to (S6406 in FIG. 212) when it is determined that the mode transition flag 223ai is on (S6406 in FIG. 212) in the mode transition process (see FIG. 212).

  In this mode selection table 222ag, the transition destination mode is set based on the currently set mode and the value of the effect counter 223f. As described above with reference to FIG. 195, the mode to which the prohibition is applied as the mode transition destination is set not to be selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent mode transition between modes in which it is difficult to find the relationship between the display modes of the indicators displayed corresponding to the respective modes.

  The display mode selection table 222 ah is a table for selecting the display mode (color, pattern, etc.) of the indicator of the mode transition destination displayed at the time of mode transition. The display mode selection table 222ah is referred to when the display mode is determined in the display mode selection process (S6408 in FIG. 213) executed in the mode transition process (see FIG. 212) (S6451 in FIG. 213).

  In the display form selection table 222ah, whether or not to change the display form to the “expected degree high form” is selected based on the internal score set in the current point effect and the value of the effect counter. The “expected degree high form” is a display form for notifying the player that the point effect of this time is a point effect having a high hit probability.

  Specifically, it is a display mode in which the outer shape of the indicators (P1 to P7) displayed in each mode is changed to "special color (red)" or "special pattern (fish pattern)" . In addition, it is good for this "high expectation degree form" to set the same content in each indicator (P1 to P7). As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the fact that the “expected degree high form” is displayed regardless of which point effect is used and which mode.

  As described above, by making it possible to change the display mode only for the indicator displayed when the mode transition is executed, the player is expected to perform the mode transition during the point effect. The effect is that the effect can be enhanced.

  Referring back to FIG. 199, the description will be continued. FIG. 199 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 199 (b), the RAM 223 in this control example is an internal level storage area 223aa, a continuous effect start flag 223ab, an effect frequency counter 223ac, a score information storage area 223ad, and a remaining score with respect to the RAM 223 in the second control example. The difference is that information storage area 223ae, display information storage area 223af, point effect temporary storage area 223ag, mode information storage area 223ah, mode transition flag 223ai, and character information storage area 223aj are added, and the other points are the same. . The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted. In this control example, a plurality of counters are provided as the effect counter 223f, and each counter independently updates the value, but the description thereof is omitted, and the description using the effect counter 223f as a generic term do. Therefore, even when the process of referring to the value of the effect counter 223f is performed at a plurality of locations in one control process routine, in practice, different counter values are acquired in each process.

  The internal level storage area 223aa is an area for storing the internal level set for the point effect. In the internal level storage area 223aa, the internal level determined based on the result of the determination of the point and the internal level selection table 222aa in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211) is set (S6351 in FIG. 211). Then, the set internal level is referred to when determining the internal score set for the point effect (S6352 in FIG. 211), and in the point effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 210), when the point effect ends If it is determined (S6307 in FIG. 210: Yes), the stored information on the internal level is initialized (S6312 in FIG. 210).

  The continuous effect start flag 223ab is a flag for determining whether or not the point effect which is the continuous effect is being executed, and indicates that the point effect is being executed if it is on, and the point effect is off if it is off. Indicates that it has not been executed. The continuous effect start flag 223ab is set to ON in the point effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 210) (S6302 in FIG. 210). Then, in the point effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 210) after the next time, it is referred to when it is determined whether or not the point effect initial setting process (S6303 in FIG. 211) to be executed when starting continuous effect is executed. If it is determined that the point effect ends (S6301 in FIG. 210) (S6307 in FIG. 210: Yes), it is set to be off (S6313 in FIG. 210).

  The effect frequency counter 223 ac is a counter for counting the number of continuous effects (point effects) to be executed this time. In this effect frequency counter 223 ac, in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211), a value corresponding to the determined effect frequency is set (S6351 in FIG. 211), and the fluctuation display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209) Each time point effect setting processing 2 (see FIG. 210) to be executed is executed, 1 is subtracted (S6306 in FIG. 210). The value of the effect frequency counter 223 ac is referred to in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209) when determining whether the point effect which is the continuous effect is being performed (S 2051 in FIG. 209) and the point effect setting process ( 210), which is referred to when determining whether or not the continuous effect is over (S6307 in FIG. 210), and in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214), the use score to be used in the current variation is determined (S6501 in FIG. 214).

  The score information storage area 223ad is an area for storing the internal score selected in the above-mentioned internal score selection table 222ab and the use score selected in the above-mentioned usage score selection table 222ad. In this point information storage area 223ad, the internal points determined in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211) are set (S6351 in FIG. 211) and determined in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214) A use score is set (S6501 in FIG. 214). The internal score stored (set) in the score information storage area 223ad is referred to when the final display mode is determined in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211) (S6355 in FIG. 211), and the character is selected. It is referred to in the case of determination (S6356 in FIG. 211), and is referred to in determining the mode transition destination in the mode transition process (see FIG. 212) (S6404 in FIG. 212). In addition, the use score stored (set) in the score information storage area 223ad is referred to when updating the remaining score information in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214) (S6502 in FIG. 214), When the value of the effect number counter 223ac is larger than 1 (S6503 in FIG. 214: No), it is referred to when determining the display mode (S6507 in FIG. 214). Then, when it is determined that the point effect is finished (S6307 in FIG. 210: Yes), the stored information is initialized (S6308 in FIG. 210).

  The remaining score information storage area 223 ae is an area for storing a remaining score obtained by subtracting the already-used use score from the internal score set in the continuous effect (point effect) currently executed. The remaining score information storage area 223ae is referred to when determining the use score (S6501 in FIG. 214) in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214), and it is determined that the point effect ends (FIG. 210). S6307: Yes), the stored information is initialized (S6309 in FIG. 210).

  The display information storage area 223af is an area for storing the final display mode of point effects which are continuous effects and the display mode to be displayed this time. In the display information storage area 223af, the final display mode determined in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211) is set (S6355 in FIG. 211), and the display mode determined in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214) Is set (S 6508 in FIG. 214). Then, when it is determined that the point effect is finished (S6307 in FIG. 210: Yes), the stored information is initialized (S6310 in FIG. 210). In addition, the display information storage area 223af is configured to be able to set the display mode for modes other than the mode currently set, and the indicator can be smoothly displayed even when the mode transition is executed during the point effect. It is configured to be able to be displayed.

  The point effect temporary storage area 223ag is an area for temporarily storing various effects set in the point effect in order to output them to the display control device 114 with a single display command. The score effect temporary storage area 223ag temporarily stores information on the determined display form (color, pattern, etc. of the indicator) in the display form change process (see FIG. 213) (S6451 in FIG. 213), and is determined. Information regarding the display mode (display mode to be displayed after mode transition) is temporarily stored (S6454, S6456, S6457 in FIG. 213), and information regarding the display mode determined in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214) Is temporarily stored (S6504 and S6507 in FIG. 214), and is referred to when setting the display point effect command (S6505 in FIG. 214), and then the stored information relating to various effects is initialized ( S6506 of FIG. 214).

  The mode information storage area 223ah is an area for storing information corresponding to the currently set mode. The mode information storage area 223ah is updated to the information corresponding to the mode after transition in the mode transition process (see FIG. 212) when mode transition is performed (S6409 in FIG. 212), and the display background command is set. In the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214), the point effect mode is referred to in determining the display mode (S6504 and S6507 in FIG. 214). Then, when it is determined that the point effect is finished (S6307 in FIG. 210: Yes), the stored information is initialized (S6311 in FIG. 210). In this control example, since point effect is set in advance to be started from "normal mode A", information corresponding to "normal mode A" in mode information storage area 223ah when point effect is executed Is stored.

  The mode transition flag 223 ai is a flag for determining whether a mode transition condition (a condition for establishing the first mode transition) is established during point effect which is continuous effect, and in the case of being on, the mode transition condition is established. Indicates that the mode transition condition is not satisfied. The mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON (S6510 in FIG. 214) when it is determined that there is a mode transition (S6509 in FIG. 214) in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214) (S6510 in FIG. 214). In the process (see FIG. 212), it is referred to determine whether the mode transition condition is satisfied (S6406 in FIG. 212), and turned off when the process relating to mode transition (S6402 to S6410 in FIG. 212) ends. It is set.

  Here, the flow of mode transition in the point effect of this control example will be described. When the point effect is executed, first, the display mode of the indicator displayed in the special symbol variation this time is set (S6507 in FIG. 214). Thereafter, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not mode transition is to be performed (S6509 in FIG. 214), and it is determined that mode transition is to be performed (winning in mode transition lottery) (S6509 in FIG. 214: Yes). The transition flag 223ai is set to on. Then, in the mode transition process (see FIG. 212) executed in the variation display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209) executed when the next special symbol variation is started, the mode transition flag 223ai is set to on. If it is determined that it is set to ON (S6406: Yes in FIG. 212), processing relating to mode shift (S6407 to S6410 in FIG. 212) is executed.

  That is, in the point effect in this control example, since the mode transition is performed when the next special symbol change is executed, for example, the lottery whether to execute the mode change is the current special symbol change, for example. To make the player recognize the display mode of each indicator at the end of the special symbol change by making a lottery based on the display mode of each indicator displayed by the mode, and shift to the mode by the next special symbol change Can be expected to be implemented.

  The character information storage area 223aj is an area for storing character information related to the character selected by the character selection table 222af described above. The character information stored in the character information storage area 223aj is a character that is displayed to indicate which indicator display mode of the indicators P1 to P3 changes in the state in which the "normal mode A" is set. It is. In the character information storage area 223aj, information about the character determined in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211) is set, and when setting a point effect command for display in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214) If it is determined that the point effect is finished (S6307 in FIG. 210: Yes), the stored information is initialized (S6314 in FIG. 210). In this control example, only the “normal mode A” is configured to display a character for indicating whether the display mode of the indicator changes, but does the display mode of the indicator change for each mode? An effect may be made to suggest that the character information is used to indicate whether or not to make a mode transition. In this case, for example, when a mode other than the “normal mode A” is set, the character stored in the character information storage area 223aj may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that the mode set in the point effect shifts to the “normal mode A”.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 206 to FIG. 208, the electrical configuration of the display control apparatus 114 in the third control example will be described about differences from the control examples described above. The same parts as those in each control example described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  When the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in this control example generates the drawing list as shown in FIG. 206, detailed information corresponding to the point is described on the back side of the character in the image for one frame It differs in that it is set as By generating the drawing list in this manner, it is possible to create the point display image described above with reference to FIG. 198.

<About the control process executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 209 to 214, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. The present control example is different from the first control example described above in that variable display setting processing 3 (see FIG. 209) is executed instead of the variable display setting processing 2 (see FIG. 170), and the other points are the same. It is. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 209, the variable display setting process 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 3 in the third control example. In the variable display setting process 3, as in the case of the variable display setting process 2 in the second control example described above, the processes of S2001 to S2006 are executed.

  When the process of S2006 is completed, it is determined whether the value of the performance number counter 223ac is greater than 0 (S2051), and if it is determined not to be greater than 0 (is 0) (S2051: No), it is set It is determined whether the variation pattern command is to execute point effects (S2052). Here, when it is determined that the point effect is to be executed (S2052: Yes), the point effect setting process 2 is executed (S2053), and when the process of S2053 is finished, the process proceeds to S2007.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2051 that the value of the effect number counter 223ac is larger than 0 (S2051: Yes), that is, if point effect is already being executed, the process of S2052 is not performed but S2053. Move to the process of This prevents a new point presentation being performed while the point presentation is being performed.

  Further, in the process of S2052, when it is determined that the variation pattern command is not to execute the point effect (S2052: No), and when the process of S2053 is finished, the variation in the second control example described above As in the display setting process 2, the processes of S2007 to S2011 are executed, and the present process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 210, point presentation setting processing 2 (S2053) executed in the fluctuation display setting processing 3 (see FIG. 209) will be described. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing point effect setting processing 2 (S2053). This point effect setting process 2 (S2053) determines the display mode of the point effect, and transmits a display point effect command for display to execute the point effect of the determined display mode to the display control device 114. It is a process.

  In point effect setting process 2 (S2053), first, it is determined whether the continuous effect start flag 223ab is on (S6301). If it is determined that it is off (S6301: No), the continuous effect start flag 223ab is set to on (S6302), and point effect initial setting processing is executed (S6303). On the other hand, if it is determined that the continuous effect start flag 223ab is set to ON in the process of S6301 (S6301: Yes), point effects which are continuous effects have already been executed, so point effects are performed. The initial setting process (S6303) is skipped to shift to the process of S6304.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 211, the point presentation initial setting process (S6303) will be described. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the point effect initial setting process (S6303). In the point effect initial setting process (S6303), it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command set in the fluctuation display setting process 3 (S1712 in FIG. 209) is to execute point effect, and various point effects are performed. It is a process for executing initialization.

  When the point effect initial setting process (S6303) is executed, the current internal level is determined with reference to the internal level selection table 222aa, and is set in the internal level storage area 223aa (S6351). Thereby, it is determined whether or not the point effect to be executed this time is a point effect that leads to a hit of a special symbol.

  Next, based on the internal level set in the internal level storage area 223aa in S6351 and the value of the effect counter 223f, the internal score selection table 222ab is referenced to determine the internal score used in the point effect to be executed this time , And is set in the score information storage area 223ad (S6352). The internal score set in this process is used for setting of the final display mode in the point effect or setting of the character as described above. Moreover, it is also used for setting of the use score used whenever fluctuation of a special symbol is started while the point effect is continuing, and setting of the remaining score.

  When the process of S6352 is completed, the number of effects of the point effect is determined based on the number selection table 222ac (S6353), and a value corresponding to the determined number of effects is set in the effect frequency counter 223ac (S6354). As described above, the number selection table 222 ac refers to different tables depending on whether the result of the pass / fail judgment is a hit or not.

  Specifically, when the winning information corresponding to the pending storage to be executed after three revolutions is a hit, the winning number selection table 222 ac1 is referred to, and “4” is determined as the number of effects. Then, 4 is set in the effect frequency counter 223 ac as a value corresponding to the effect frequency “4”. The value of the effect frequency counter 223 ac is decremented by one each time the point effect setting process 2 (S 2053 in FIG. 210) is executed, and is decremented until the value of the counter becomes “0”.

  Next, based on the internal score set by the process of S6352 and the final display mode selection table 222ae, the display mode of each indicator to be finally displayed in the point effect of this time is determined, and the display information storage area 223af is selected. It sets (S6355).

  The final display mode selection table 222 ae has four tables corresponding to four modes (“normal mode A”, “die mode”, “normal mode B”, “bingo mode”) to which transition is made during point production In this processing, the final display mode is determined for all modes and set in the display information storage area 223af. This makes it possible to display an appropriate final display mode based on the internal score regardless of which mode the point effect is in progress.

  After the process of S6355, the character to be used when the mode of point effect is set to "normal mode A" is determined based on the internal score set by the process of S6352 and the character selection table 222af, and character information is determined. It sets to storage area 223aj (S6356), and ends this processing.

  As described above, in the point effect initial setting process (S6303), most modes including the final display mode of the point effect to be executed this time are set. By setting the point effect mode in advance in this manner, it becomes possible to advance the point effect mode in the middle to the final display mode, and it is possible to suppress the player from giving a sense of discomfort. Can be performed.

  In this control example, although the final display mode of all the indicators is set as the final display mode, for example, only the indicator related to the display mode for notifying the player of giving the benefit is set to the final display mode In addition, the display mode of the other indicators may be set randomly. As a result, the display mode of each indicator in the point effect can be made more colorful, and it can be suppressed that the game gets bored prematurely. In this case, it is preferable to execute the prohibition process so as not to notify that the display mode which is randomly set is not given a benefit that is not actually given. As a result, it is possible to execute point effects that do not give the player a sense of discomfort.

  Further, in the present control example, the internal level is set based on the result of the determination whether the point effect is executed, but the internal level is always set by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 based on the result of the determination. You may By configuring in this way, it is possible to use the internal level even when setting the effect mode of effects other than point effects, and an effect that the effect corresponding to the gaming state of the special symbol can be easily set. is there.

  Furthermore, in this control example, although the success or failure judgment result is determined with reference to not only the special symbol executed this time but also the prize information stored on hold, the success or failure is determined based only on the lottery result of the special symbol executed this time. The determination result may be determined and the internal level may be set.

  Referring back to FIG. 210, the description will be continued. When the point effect initial setting process (S6303) is finished, then the mode shift process (S6304) is executed. In this mode shift process (S6304), a process of determining whether to shift the mode during the point effect and a process of changing the display mode of the indicator when the mode is shifted are executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 212, the mode transition process (S6304) will be described. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing mode transition processing (S6304). In the point effect in the present control example, when it is determined that the mode transition is made as a result of a predetermined lottery (the process of S6509 executed in the point effect mode setting process (S6305 in FIG. 214 described later)) (mode transition flag 223ai is on There are two mode transition conditions: mode transition to (when set to), mode transition based on the set mode, the current display mode and the number of internal points, and the like.

  In this manner, a mode executed during point effect by combinedly executing the mode transition randomly performed by lottery and the mode transition performed when a mode transition condition (for example, display mode) is satisfied. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the transition.

  Although details will be described later, in the present control example, the display mode of each of the indicators P1 to P3 is “Zolo” in the “normal mode A” when the possibility of a hit determination result is high (the internal score is 6 or more). When it becomes an eye ("2.2.2" or "4.4.4"), it is configured to shift to the "diamond mode". This is a situation in which it is difficult to give a benefit that benefits the player in "normal mode A" (for example, notification that a presentation with a high expectation for a big hit is performed, notification that a big hit has been won), that is, Even if the display mode of the indicators P1 to P3 has not reached the maximum value, a benefit that is advantageous to the player is likely to be awarded when the predetermined display mode (Zoro eye display mode) is reached. It is for making it a state. As a result, even if the display mode of the indicator in the point effect is not good (for example, in the case of the "normal mode A", the situation in which the point is not rising), the benefit is advantageous to the player by the mode transition Since it is possible to increase the degree of expectation given, it is possible to entertain the player to the end.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, when the display mode of each of the indicators P1 to P3 in the "normal mode A" is Zoro eyes, a bonus is provided in which the Zoro eyes display mode is advantageous to the player. Since it is possible to shift to “,” it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand presentation without giving the player a sense of discomfort with respect to the change in the display mode of the indicator due to the mode shift.

  Referring back to FIG. 212, the description will be continued. When the mode transition process (S6304) is executed, first, the mode information currently set is read from the mode information storage area 223ah (S6401), and it is determined whether the mode currently set is "normal mode A". (S6402). If it is determined that the mode currently set is “normal mode A” (S6402: Yes), then the current display mode set in the display information storage area 223af is “2.2. It is determined whether it is 2 "or" 4.4.4 "(S6403).

  If it is determined in the process of S6403 that the current display mode is "2.2.2" or "4.4.4" (S6403: Yes), whether the internal score is "6" or more It discriminate | determines (S6404), and when it discriminate | determines that it is "6" or more (S6404: Yes), "a dice mode" is set (S6405) and it transfers to the process of S6408. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6404 that it is not "6" or more ("5" or less) (S6404: No), the mode transition flag 223i is set to OFF (S6411), and this process ends. Do.

  Further, in the process of S6402, when it is determined that the mode currently set is not the “normal mode A” (S6402: No), or in the process of S6403, the current display mode is “2.2.2. If it is determined that the mode transition flag 223ai is not "4.4.4" (S6403: No), it is then determined whether the mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON (S6406).

  The mode transition flag 223ai is a flag set in the point effect mode setting process (S6305) described later, and when the mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON, the point effect setting process 2 of the next time (S2053 in FIG. 210) Mode transition processing (S 6304 in FIG. 212), and mode transition is executed.

  If it is determined in the process of S6406 that the mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON (S6406: Yes), the mode of the transition destination is selected based on the mode selection table 222ag (S6407). On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S6406 that the mode transition flag 223ai is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S6409: No), this process is ended as it is.

  Here, the mode selection table 222ag referred to in the process of S6407 will be described. In this mode selection table 222ag, the transition destination mode is selected based on the currently set mode and the effect counter 223f. Note that this mode transition is provided with a prohibition to restrict mode transition (see FIG. 195). For example, in the state where "dimple mode" is set, mode transition to "normal mode B" is not made. In the state where the "bingo mode" is set, it is set so that the mode is not shifted to the "die mode".

  The prohibition process is for suppressing the effect that the display mode of the indicator is changed by mode transition during the point effect, and the effect is difficult for the player to understand. By configuring in this way, the advantage of transitioning to the mode in point effects (a point that the player can have expectations until the end of the effect by changing the display mode of the indicator in accordance with the mode transition) is utilized. However, it is possible to suppress the demerit (a point where it is difficult to be understood by the player due to the change in the display mode of the indicator based on the mode transition).

  Referring back to FIG. 212, the description will be continued. When the process of S6405 or the process of S6407 is finished, the display mode change process (S6408) is executed. The display mode change process (S6408) is a process for changing the display mode of the indicator based on the mode transition.

  Next, the display mode change process (S6408) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing display mode change processing (S6408). This display mode change process (S6408) is a process for setting the display mode of the indicator displayed after the mode transition based on the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition, and the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition is predetermined It is determined whether the display mode (display mode notifying that the player is given a benefit or display mode approximating the display mode notifying that the player is given a benefit), and the judgment result Set the display mode after mode transition based on.

  When the display mode change process (S6408) is executed, the display mode is first determined based on the display mode selection table 222ah, and is set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag (S6451). The display form selection table 222 ah is a table for setting the display form (color, pattern) of the indicator after mode transition based on the internal score set in the point effect of this time and the value of the effect counter 223 f. Thereby, when the mode is shifted in the point effect, the player can be made to gaze at not only the display mode of the indicator after the mode shift but also the display mode (color, pattern), and the effect can be further enhanced. .

  In addition, even if the mode transition is performed in the early stage of point effect, that is, when the indicator display mode is largely separated from the final display mode, the indicator's score based on the internal score set in the point effect Since the display mode is set, it is possible to execute an effect of increasing the expectation of the jackpot.

  After the process of S6451, the display mode currently set is read out from the display information storage area 223af (S6452), and it is determined whether the current display mode is SP reach compatible (S6453). The SP reach response is a display mode informing that the effect (SP reach) having a high jackpot expectation is executed, and specifically, in the “normal mode A”, any one of the indicators P1 and P2 In the display mode in which the display mode is the maximum value (MAX), in the case of the "normal mode B", in the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 are "Zoro eyes (except 6.6)" in the "die mode". In the display mode in which the indicator P6 is "50% to 90%", in the case of the "bingo mode", the indicator P7 is a display mode in which "two lines are established".

  If it is determined in the process of S6453 that the current display mode is SP reach compatible (S6453: Yes), the display mode corresponding to SP reach is determined and set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag (S6454), This process ends. That is, when the display mode before the mode transition is the display mode corresponding to SP reach, the display mode after the mode transition is also set to the display mode corresponding to SP reach. As a result, it is possible to suppress the situation where the benefit (notice that SP reach is executed) displayed before the mode transition disappears after the mode transition (display mode not corresponding to SP reach is displayed), and the player It is possible to carry out a suitable presentation without dissatisfaction.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6453 that the current display mode is not SP reach compatible (S6453: No), then it is determined whether the current display mode is a display mode corresponding to the high standard. To do (S6455). As described above, the high reference is not a display mode for providing a bonus to the player, but is set as a display mode similar to that.

  Specifically, in the case of the "normal mode A", in the display mode in which the display mode of any of the indicators P1 to P3 is "6", in the case of "in the corner mode", the number of the indicator P4 is "5" In the display mode which is the "normal mode B", the indicator P6 is "40%".

  By configuring in this way, even if the mode transition occurs during point presentation, the display aspect of the indicator after the mode transition is significantly different from the indicator display aspect displayed in the previous point presentation It is possible to suppress the

  For example, in the “normal mode A”, mode transition is executed in a state where the display mode in which the indicator P1 indicates “6” is displayed as the display mode corresponding to the high standard, and the mode is shifted to the “bingo mode”. Is a display mode in which the display mode of the indicator P7 after the mode transition indicates "one line formation". Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to execute the point effect after the mode shift while maintaining the expectation that the privilege before the mode shift is given.

  Referring back to FIG. 213, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6455 that the current display mode is the display mode indicating the high standard (S6455: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the high standard after mode transition is determined, and the score effect temporary storage area 223ag Is set (S6456), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the current display mode is not the display mode indicating the high standard (S6455: No), the display mode not corresponding to the high standard is determined, set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag, and the process is ended.

  As described above, in the point effect in this control example, when mode transition is executed, the indicator display mode after mode transition is determined based on the indicator mode displayed before the mode transition. Thus, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand presentation. Then, when the mode transition is executed when the display mode for notifying that the benefit is provided to the player is displayed, the display notifying that the benefit is provided to the player Since the indicator after mode transition is configured to be displayed in a mode, it is possible to suppress giving a player a sense of dissatisfaction.

  Furthermore, the display mode similar to the display mode for informing the player that the benefit is given is determined and stored as the high reference value, and the mode transition is executed in the state where the display mode indicating the high reference value is displayed. In the case where it is determined that the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the display mode indicating the high reference value, when the player is in the display mode informing that the privilege is given a little more Even when mode transition is performed in a state of paying close attention to point effects while expecting, an indicator after mode transition is displayed in a display mode indicating a high reference value, and therefore, a sense of expectation can be maintained.

  In this control example, the display mode is stored so as to be distinguishable between the high standard and the other two stages when the display mode is not a display mode for notifying that a benefit is given, but is divided into three or more stages. The display mode may be stored. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the player's dissatisfaction due to the difference between the indicator display mode before the mode transition and the indicator mode after the mode transition.

  Further, in the present control example, when mode transition is performed in a state where the display mode corresponding to the high standard or the display mode not reaching the high standard is displayed, the same meaning as the display mode before the mode shift The display mode of the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in a display mode having a mode, for example, the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition based on the internal level or internal score set when the point effect is performed. A display mode that is more advantageous to the player may be set as the display mode after the mode transition. As a result, it is possible to make the player have a higher sense of expectation for mode transition.

  Referring back to FIG. 212, the description will be continued. When the display mode change process (S6408 in FIG. 213) is ended, next, the mode information stored in the mode information storage area 223ah is updated to the mode information corresponding to the mode set this time (S6409), and the set mode is set. Is set (S6410), the mode transition flag 223ai is set to OFF (S6411), and the process ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 210, the description will be continued. When the mode transition process (S6304) is finished, next, a point effect mode setting process (S6305) is executed. The point effect mode setting process (S6305) is a process for setting the display mode of the indicator to be changed in the variable display performed this time.

  Here, the point effect mode setting process (S6305) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing point effect mode setting processing (S6305). When the point effect mode setting process (S6305) is executed, first, the remaining point information set in the remaining point information storage area 223ae and the value of the effect frequency counter 223ac are used to refer to the use point selection table 222ad. The use score to be used in the fluctuation of is determined (S6501).

  Then, based on the determined use score, the remaining score information set in the remaining score information storage area 223ae is updated (S6502). Specifically, a value obtained by subtracting the used score used this time from the set remaining score information is updated and set as new remaining score information.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the effect number counter 223ac is 1 (S6503), and if it is determined that it is 1 (S6503: Yes), that is, if it is the end of the point effect, the display information storage area 223af The final display mode is determined based on the final display mode information set in and the current mode information set in the mode information storage area 223ah, and is set in the point effect temporary storage area 223ag (S6504). Then, a point effect command for display is set based on the information set in the point effect temporary storage area 223ag (S6505), and the information set in the point effect temporary storage area 223ag is cleared (S6506), and this process is executed. finish.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6503 that the value of the effect counter 223ac is not 1 (2 or more) (S6503: No), the use score determined in S6501 and the display information storage area 223af are set The present display mode is determined based on the present final display mode and the current display mode, and is set in the point effect temporary storage area 223ag (S6507).

  Then, the display mode set this time is set in the display mode storage area 223af (S6508), and then it is determined whether mode transition is to be executed (S6509), and if it is determined that mode transition is present (S6509: Yes) The mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON (S6510), the above-described processing of S6505 and S6506 is executed, and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no mode transition (S6509: No), the above-described processes of S6505 and S6506 are executed without setting the mode transition flag 223ai to ON, and this process is ended.

  Referring back to FIG. 210, the description will be continued. When the point effect mode setting process (S6305) is ended, next, the value of the effect frequency counter 223ac is decremented by 1 (S6306), and it is judged whether the value of the effect frequency counter 223ac after the subtraction is less than "0" (S6307). If it is determined that it is not less than “0” (one or more) (S6307: No), since this is a case where the point effect continues, the present processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6307 that the value of the effect number counter 223ac is 0 or less (0) (S6307: Yes), this is a case where the point effect ends at this time, the score information storage area 223ad Clear (S6308), clear remaining score information storage area 223ae (S6309), clear display information storage area 223af (S6310), clear mode information storage area 223ah (S6311), clear internal level storage area 223aa Then, the continuous effect start flag 223ab is cleared (S6313), the character information storage area is cleared (S6314), and this processing is ended.

Regarding Control Process Executed by Display Control 114 in Third Control Example
Next, each control process performed by the MPU 221 in the display control apparatus 114 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 215 to 217. The present control example is different from the above-described second control example in that point effect related command processing is added in command determination processing 3 (see FIG. 215), and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the display control apparatus 114 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 3. In the command determination process 3, as in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 180) in the second control example described above, the processes of S2601 to S2613 are performed.

  When it is determined in the process of S2612 that an error command has not been received (S2612: No), it is then determined whether a display point presentation related command has been received (S2637).

  If it is determined in the process of S2637 that the display point effect related command has not been received (S2637: No), the various processes described in the control examples described above as other command processes are executed (S2614), This process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2637 that the display point effect related command has been received (S2637: Yes), point effect related command process is executed (S2638), and then this process ends.

  Next, point effect related command processing will be described with reference to FIG. 216 (a). FIG. 216A is a flowchart showing point effect related command processing (S2638). The point effect related command process is a process executed when the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a plurality of display commands related to point effect.

  When point effect related command processing (S2638) is executed, it is first determined whether there is a display point command (S6601), and if it is determined that there is a display point command (S6601: Yes), the point command The process (S6602) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6603. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display point command (S6601: No), the point command process (S6602) is skipped and the process proceeds to S6603.

  In the process of S6603, it is determined whether there is an indicator command for display (S6603). If it is determined that there is an indicator command for display (S6603: Yes), an indicator command process (S6604) is executed to display an indicator If it is determined that there is no command (S6603: No), this processing ends.

  Next, point command processing (S6602) will be described with reference to FIG. 216 (b). FIG. 216 (b) is a flowchart showing point command processing (S6602). This point command process (S6602) executes a process corresponding to the point command received from the audio lamp control device 113, and points that suggest change contents of the display mode of each indicator during the point effect (see FIG. 198) ) Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the point command process (S6602), first, the effect display data table corresponding to the point type (for example, the number of points) indicated by the display point command is determined, and the determined effect display data table is stored from the data table storage area 233b. It is read out and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Next, null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6702).

  Then, based on the effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6701, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S 6704). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6705), the point command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing 3.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 217, the indicator command processing (S6604) executed in the point rendering related command processing (see FIG. 216A) will be described. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing indicator command processing (S6604). The indicator command process (S6604) is a process for executing a process corresponding to the indicator command received from the audio lamp control device 113, and is a process for displaying the display mode of each indicator during the point effect.

  In the indicator command processing (S6604), first, an effect display data table (indicator data table) corresponding to display mode information (for example, display mode or set mode) of the indicator indicated by the display indicator command is determined, The determined effect display data table (indicator data table) is read from the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6751). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6752).

  Then, based on the effect display data table (indicator data table) set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6751, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6753), and the pointer 233f is 0 (S6754). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6755), the point command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process 3.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 218, a modification of the point display method described with reference to FIG. 198 described above will be described. FIG. 218 is a schematic view showing a modified example of point display in the third control example. FIG. 218 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing a layer displaying a point image (sub effect) among the plurality of layers in this modification, and FIG. 218 (b) is a plurality of in the present modification. FIG. 218 is a schematic view schematically showing an image in which layers are combined, and FIG. 218 (c) is a schematic view showing an example displayed after the schematic view shown in FIG. 218 (b) is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 218 (a), in a plurality of small areas (Dm11 to Dm13, Dm21 to Dm23, Dm31 to Dm33) displaying character images, points are respectively displayed at different display positions (display positions in each small area). Data that can be displayed is stored, and among these, a small area corresponding to the main effect to be executed this time is set, and a point display process is performed to display points of the set small area. Then, an image obtained by combining the layer displaying the point image and the layer displaying the character image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 218 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 218 (b), in the image in which the two characters (Dc1, Dc2) displayed in the state where the main effect is started are facing each other, the point executed in the point display process (displayed in small area Dm31 The display process is performed so that the player can not visually recognize the display of points because the point (d) is overlapped with the character Dc1.

  Thereafter, the main effect proceeds, and as shown in FIG. 218 (c), when the character Dc1 moves, the points displayed in the small area Dc1 become visible to the player. In this case, a plurality of operation patterns such as a pattern (attack pattern) in which the character Dc1 moves and a pattern (defense pattern) in which the character Dc2 moves from the state shown in FIG. Whether or not the point is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be determined according to the progress contents. As a result, it is possible to execute display in which the third symbol variation effect which is the main effect and the point effect which is the sub effect are associated with each other, and the effect can be further enhanced.

  In this control example, although the small area which performs point display is specified based on the production pattern of the main effect, for example, as described above, a plurality of motion patterns (each of a plurality of characters move as the main effect When the pattern is configured to be settable, point display may be performed on a plurality of small areas corresponding to a plurality of operation patterns. Specifically, in the state shown in FIG. 218 (b), display processing is performed so that point display is performed in advance in both the small area Dm31 overlapping with the character Dc1 and the small area Dm32 overlapping with the character Dc2 The point corresponding to the operation pattern set as may be displayed. In this case, the value (number) of the point displayed when the character Dc1, which is an ally character, moves is different from the value (number) of the point displayed when the character Dc2, which is the enemy character, moves. You may want to execute the display settings on.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to associate the operation pattern in the main effect with the value of the point to be displayed, and it is possible to further enhance the effect of the effect.

  As described above, in the present control example, when each display content of the point effect is determined by the audio lamp control device 113, the display point command and the display indicator command are output separately from the display variation pattern command. It is configured as follows. Thus, for example, when it is determined that the operation of the frame button 22 has been performed, each command is displayed when displaying points on the third symbol display device 81 or changing the display mode of the indicator. It is possible to output to the display control device 114 at different timings.

  Therefore, a command related to display data when the frame button 22 is operated and a command related to display data when the frame button 22 is not operated are output each time, and a command indicating that the frame button 22 is operated is output. Since it is not necessary to cause the display control device 114 to perform processing of rewriting display data, the control load can be reduced.

  In this control example, although the display point command and the display indicator command are output separately from the display variation pattern command, all or a part of them are set as a common display command. The audio lamp control device 113 may be configured to output to the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the point effect in the third control example, when mode transition is performed, the indicator display mode after mode transition is determined based on the indicator mode displayed before the mode transition. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand presentation. Then, when the mode transition is executed when the display mode for notifying that the benefit is provided to the player is displayed, the display notifying that the benefit is provided to the player Since the indicator after mode transition is configured to be displayed in a mode, it is possible to suppress giving a player a sense of dissatisfaction.

  Furthermore, the display mode similar to the display mode for informing the player that the benefit is given is determined and stored as the high reference value, and the mode transition is executed in the state where the display mode indicating the high reference value is displayed. In the case where it is determined that the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the display mode indicating the high reference value, when the player is in the display mode informing that the privilege is given a little more Even when mode transition is performed in a state of paying close attention to point effects while expecting, an indicator after mode transition is displayed in a display mode indicating a high reference value, and therefore, a sense of expectation can be maintained.

  In this control example, the display mode is stored so as to be distinguishable between the high standard and the other two stages when the display mode is not a display mode for notifying that a benefit is given, but is divided into three or more stages. The display mode may be stored. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the player's dissatisfaction due to the difference between the indicator display mode before the mode transition and the indicator mode after the mode transition.

  Further, in the present control example, when mode transition is performed in a state where the display mode corresponding to the high standard or the display mode not reaching the high standard is displayed, the same meaning as the display mode before the mode shift The display mode of the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in a display mode having a mode, for example, the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition based on the internal level or internal score set when the point effect is performed. A display mode that is more advantageous to the player may be set as the display mode after the mode transition. As a result, it is possible to make the player have a higher sense of expectation for mode transition.

  The configuration used for the point effect of this control example and the configuration used for the point effect of the second control example described above may of course be used in combination, for example, for the point effect of the second control example described above As in the third control example, four modes may be set, and the configuration of the mode transition process of the present control example may be added, or the second control described above for determining the point to be displayed in the present control example As shown in the example, the display contents of the third symbol variation effect (main effect) may be made to correspond. Further, the configuration for determining the position to display the point in this control example may be switched to the configuration used in the second control example described above. As a result, more colorful effects can be provided to the player.

  Furthermore, in "Normal Mode A", "Benefit 1" to be awarded when the indicator P1 becomes MAX and "Benefit 2" to be granted when the indicator P2 or P3 becomes MAX, the degree of expectation of the jackpot Among the effects of the third symbol variation effect, which is set in stages, it is a privilege to notify that the step goes up with respect to the effect contents currently being executed. For example, the "Privilege 2" may be a benefit for notifying that the degree of expectation of the jackpot is raised by one step.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make the player's expectation for the big hit different depending on the details of the effect executed in the third symbol variation effect and the timing at which the indicator becomes MAX, and the player pays attention to the effect It is possible to In this case, the timing at which the indicator is MAX may be different from the timing at which the benefit is provided. As a result, in the state where the indicator becomes MAX and it is determined that the benefit is provided, the player is allowed to play the game while predicting which effect content is being executed and the benefit is provided. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Fourth control example
Next, a fourth control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first control example described above, it is performed in the small area Dm4 (see FIG. 112) in order to indicate and notify the content of the main effect of the fluctuation pattern (effect performed in the central portion of the main display area Dm). The control of the reach navigation effect (see FIGS. 112 and 113), which is a side effect, is described. The reach navigation effect includes a time gauge Dm4a indicating the effect period of the main effect, a movement display unit (character Dm4b) indicating the progress of the effect in the main effect, and a notification unit Dm4c and guidance display for indicating and notifying the content of the main effect It is an effect display composed of sections Dm4d and Dm4e.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, another example of the reach navigation effect described in the first control example described above will be described. In this fourth control example, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed from the first control example, and the process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is one of them. The point which changed the part and the point which explained the reach navigator effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in a plurality of patterns differ. The other points are the same as in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first control example, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 219 and 220, the flow of the reach navigation effect will be described in detail. FIG. 219 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of the reach navigation effect. Similar to the first control example described above, this reach navigation effect is performed according to the fluctuation time of the effect (main effect) to be executed by a predetermined fluctuation pattern (super reach or special reach) among the fluctuation time of the special symbol. This is a side effect, which allows the player to visually grasp and notify or suggest in stages. As described above, the player is displayed to the player by displaying the contents of the main effect (the description of the main effect, the fluctuation time and the expectation for becoming a big hit) performed by the third symbol display device 81 using the sub-effect. It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

  In FIG. 219, 60 seconds is set as the variation time of the special symbol (see FIG. 117 (b)), and it develops into a super reach 30 seconds after the beginning of the variation, and 20 seconds after that (that is, 50 seconds after the beginning of the variation) These show the flow of reach navigation effect when the fluctuation pattern in which the main effect develops further is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 219, for 15 seconds after the change of the special symbol is started, the pre-reach effect (the third symbol changes at high speed) is displayed in the main effect, and then the reach effect (two left and right third symbols) Stop with the same number, the effect that only the third symbol in the middle) is displayed for 15 seconds. Thereafter, super reach effect for 30 seconds in the main effect (for example, the variation of the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the small area Dm5 (see FIG. 112) of the main display area Dm, and the character confronts in the main display area Dm) (See FIG. 163) is displayed.

  In an example shown in FIG. 219, an effect in which the expectation of becoming a big hit becomes high 20 seconds after the start of the super reach effect (for example, the ally character avoids attacking the other character, a weapon different from the usual one) The timing at which the effect of attacking the character of the other party using) and the effect indicating that the winning result is off (for example, the effect of taking the attack of the character of the other party and going down) occurs is set. At timing, it is configured to make the player pay attention to what effect is to be executed.

  At the timing when the super reach effect is displayed, reach navigation effect is displayed as a sub effect in the small area Dm4 (see FIG. 112) on the lower left side of the main display area Dm (point A). The detailed contents of the reach navigation effect are the same as in the first control example described above, and therefore the description thereof is omitted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 219, a presentation pattern in which the first reach navigation effect is 20 seconds and the second reach navigation effect is 10 seconds is set, and the production branch timing of the super reach effect executed in the main effect (super reach effect The timing after 20 seconds from being displayed) is configured to be associated with the timing at which the first reach navigation effect is switched to the second reach navigation effect.

  In this reach navigation effect, similar to the reach navigation effect in the first control example described above, the guidance display portions Dm4d, Dm4e are provided midway, and when the character reaches the guidance display portions Dm4d, Dm4e, for example, the current display As an effect that indicates that the result of the main effect indicates the result of a big hit, the character of "chance" is displayed, or the indicator attached to the informing unit Dm4c being rotated is switched (point B and point C).

  Then, when reaching the timing (point D) at which 20 seconds have passed since the super reach effect was displayed, that is, the effect display timing of the super reach effect continuing in the main effect. While being done, the reach navigation effect is switched from the first reach navigation effect to the second reach navigation effect. At this time, since the second reach navigation effect is set to a half period (10 seconds) of the first reach navigation effect period (20 seconds), the second navigation effect is the time used in the first navigation effect. It starts from the half point of the gauge Dm 4 a (see FIG. 112). Then, of the guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e provided on the time gauge Dm4a, the character Dm4b (see FIG. 112) can pass through the guidance display portion Dm4e again by the second reach navigation effect (point E). The notification mode is changed again, and the second reach navigation effect ends (point F) in accordance with the result display timing of the super reach effect (the stop display timing of the third symbol).

  As described above, among the third symbol variation effects of notifying the lottery result of the special symbol using the variation display of the third symbol, it becomes a predetermined variation effect (super reach effect or special reach effect) with high expectation of the big hit among the third symbol change effects By executing the reach navigation effect, which is a side effect, in accordance with the timing of the main effect, the player can visually grasp the progress of the main effect aspect, and it is possible to notify or suggest it in stages Thus, the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 220, contents displayed in the small area Dm4 when the example of the reach navigation effect shown in FIG. 219 described above is executed will be described. FIG. 220 (a) is a schematic view showing the display content displayed at the point C shown in FIG. 219 among the reach navigation effects, and FIG. 220 (b) is the point D shown in the FIG. FIG. 220C is a schematic view showing the display content displayed at the point E shown in FIG. 219 in the reach navigation effect. The same reference numerals are given to portions described in the first control example described above, and the description thereof is omitted.

  First, the display content of the point C during the first reach navigation effect effect will be described with reference to FIG. 220 (a). As shown in FIG. 220 (a), in the first reach navigation effect (20 seconds), when the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display portion Dm4d, a "chance" with a high expectation for winning a jackpot is displayed, When the display unit Dm 4 e is passed, “chance” is not displayed, and “x” is displayed. In this way, by notifying the expectation of winning a big hit in the guidance display parts Dm4d and Dm4e during reach navigation effect production, the information content of the guidance display parts Dm4d and Dm4e and the presentation of the main effect are combined to produce the present Since it is possible to predict the lottery result of the special symbol variation, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 220 (b), the display content of the point D during the first reach navigation effect effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 220 (a), the second reach navigation effect (10 seconds) is started from the half position of the time gauge Dm 4a. Therefore, the character Dm 4 b passes through the guidance display unit Dm 4 e again during the second reach navigation effect. As described above, by setting the guidance display part that has passed in the first reach navigation effect so that the character Dm 4 b passes again in the second reach navigation effect, it is possible to convert the notification content of the guidance display part without discomfort. .

  Then, as shown in FIG. 220 (c), when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display area Dm4e in the second reach navigation effect, the notification content of the guidance display area Dm4e is changed, and "chance" is displayed. Thus, when switching from the first reach navigation effect to the second reach navigation effect, by setting the effect so that the character Dm4b passes again through the guidance display unit that has passed the first reach navigation effect, the first reach navigation effect Because the player is gazing at the reach navigation effect while expecting the second reach navigation effect to be set again so as to pass through the guidance display section where the notification (“chance”) of which the expectation level is high was not given again. , Can enhance the rendering effect.

  In addition, since it is possible to efficiently use the same data for the first reach navigation effect and the second reach navigation effect as the display data used for the effect, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for the effect.

  In the example described above, the notification content is changed by the character Dm4b passing the guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e again, but an effect may be provided that does not change the notification content even if the character Dm4b passes again. . In this case, it is preferable to perform an operation (for example, jump) to avoid the guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e. Thereby, in the second reach navigation effect, it is possible to watch whether the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e or can be avoided, and it is possible to suppress an early boredom in the game and to prevent the first reach navigation When the second reach navigation effect is started from a position where it can pass through the guidance display section where notification ("chance") with a high expectation of the big hit is made in the production, the production that lowers the expectation of the big hit is suppressed can do.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fourth Control Example
Next, with reference to FIGS. 221 to 223, the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described.

  FIG. 221 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 221 (a), the ROM 222 in this control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a second internal level selection table 222ba, an effect scenario storage area 222bb, and an effect scenario selection table 222bc are added. The other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the details of the second internal level selection table 222ba will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 222 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the second internal level selection table 222ba. The second internal level selection table 222ba is a table for selecting the internal level based on the result of the pass / fail judgment of the pachinko machine 10, and the second internal level selection table 222ba corresponds to the internal level selection table 222aa used in the third control example described above. The difference is that the process of the determination on the basis of winning information stored on hold is not executed.

  Specifically, in the case where the success / failure determination result is "hit" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", "2" is selected as the internal level, and "150 to 198". , “3” is selected as the internal level. Then, when the result of the judgment of the success or failure is "off" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", "1" is selected as the internal level, and in the case of "150 to 198", the internal "2" is selected as the level.

  In this way, the internal level is about 25% when the success or failure judgment is "hit" to "3", about 75% when the success or failure judgment is "hit", and when the success or failure judgment is "out" It is possible to set about 25% of the above to "2" and about 75% of the cases where the result of the pass / fail judgment is "out" to "1". By thus setting the internal level and executing the effect corresponding to the internal level, a plurality of jackpot expectation degrees for the effect can be easily set more easily than in the case where the effect is performed corresponding to only the result of the pass / fail judgment. It becomes possible.

  Although the internal level is set to three levels in this control example, the number of levels of the internal level is not limited to this and may be set to four or more levels. In this case, for example, by providing an internal level in which only about 1% of the success / failure determination result is "hit" is provided, and effects corresponding to the internal level are executed, valuable display that is rarely displayed An effect can be provided to the player. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of superiority.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 223, the effect scenario storage area 222bb will be described. FIG. 223 is a schematic view schematically showing the effect scenario storage area 222bb. The effect scenario storage area 222bb is an area in which a plurality of effect scenarios for reach navigation effects are stored, and is referred to when selecting an effect scenario in reach navigation effect setting processing 2 (S2005 in FIG. 224) described later. It is an area where a scenario is stored.

  As shown in FIG. 223, the rendering scenario storage area 222bb is used as a scenario pattern of a rendering scenario, as an expectation display that is notified (displayed) by the guidance display Dm 4 d (first point) and the guidance display unit Dm 4 e (second point), Both the guidance display section Dm4d and the guidance display section Dm4e are used as the return position of the character Dm4b when the "chance" with a high degree of expectation or the "x" with a low degree of expectation switches from the first reach navigation effect to the second reach navigation effect. A return position “1” which is a passable position or a return position “2” which is a position which can pass only the guidance display portion Dm 4 e are respectively set.

  Specifically, scenario 1 displays the first point "x" and the second point "x" during the first reach navigation effect, returns to the return position "1", and the first point during the second reach navigation effect Chance ", a second point" chance "is displayed scenario, scenario 1 is displayed during the first reach navigation effect, the first point" x ", the second point" x "is displayed, until the return position" 1 " It is a scenario where the first point "chance" and the second point "x" are displayed during the second reach navigation effect, and scenario 3 is the first point "x" and the second point "during the first reach navigation effect". “×” is displayed, the return position is “1”, and the first point “×” and the second point “×” are displayed during the second reach navigation effect. Thus, a plurality of scenarios in which the display mode of the first reach navigation effect and the return position are the same and only the display mode of the second reach navigation effect is different are facilitated easily, and the scenario is set corresponding to the above-mentioned internal level Thus, it is possible to easily carry out the rendering according to the jackpot expectation.

  And the display mode shown to Fig.223 (a) is set similarly about the scenario 4-the scenario 12. FIG. In addition, "super" displayed at the second point during the second reach navigation effect of scenario 11 indicates a display (for example, "super heat") whose jackpot expectation is much higher than the "chance" display. .

  Although scenario 1 to scenario 12 are used as scenario patterns for reach navigation effect in this control example, more scenarios may be used. Further, as described in the reach navigation effect of the first control example described above in the scenario pattern, the type of the character Dm 4 b or the moving speed of the character Dm 4 b may be set.

  Furthermore, in this control example, the same time gauge Dm4a is used for the first reach navigation effect and the second reach navigation effect, so that the display data used for the effect is made common, but the display data is made common by other methods. For example, two second time gauges Dm 4 a used in the first reach navigation effect may be displayed side by side when the second reach navigation effect is started. In this case, by scrolling the time gauge Dm 4 a in accordance with the moving direction of the character Dm 4 b, it is possible to reduce the display area in which the reach navigation effect is performed.

  In addition, although the time gauge Dm4a of one path is used in the movement direction of the character Dm4b in this control example, the time gauge Dm4a having a plurality of paths may be provided. In this case, it is preferable to set the scenario pattern so that the route in which the character Dm 4 b moves differs between the first reach navigation effect and the second reach navigation effect. Thereby, the contents of the reach navigation effect can be made more colorful.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 223 (b), the rendering scenario selection table 222bc will be described. FIG. 223 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the presentation scenario selection table 222bc. The effect scenario selection table 222bc is a table referred to when selecting an effect scenario in reach navigation effect setting process 2 (S2005 in FIG. 224) described later.

  As shown in FIG. 223 (b), in the effect scenario selection table 222bc, each scenario is selected based on the internal level, the fluctuation time indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the value of the effect counter 223f. Is set as.

  Specifically, when the value of the internal level is "1", the fluctuation time is "60 seconds", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 129", scenario "5" is selected, and " In the case of “130 to 198”, scenario “4” is selected. Also, if the value of the internal level is “1”, the variation time is “90 seconds”, and the value of the effect counter 223 f is “0 to 65”, scenario “1” is selected, and the effect counter 223 f is selected. If the value is "66 to 129", scenario "2" is selected, and if "130 to 198", scenario "3" is selected.

  Furthermore, when the value of the internal level is "2", the fluctuation time is "60 seconds", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 65", scenario "7" is selected, and the effect counter 223f is selected. If the value is "66 to 129", scenario "8" is selected, and if "130 to 198", scenario "10" is selected. Also, when the value of the internal level is "2", the fluctuation time is "90 seconds", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 65", scenario "9" is selected, and the effect counter 223f is selected. If the value is “66 to 129”, scenario “6” is selected, and if “130 to 198”, scenario “1” is selected.

  Then, when the value of the internal level is “3”, the fluctuation time is “60 seconds”, and the value of the effect counter 223 f is “0 to 65”, the scenario “7” is selected, and the effect counter 223 f is selected. If the value is "66 to 198", scenario "12" is selected. Also, when the value of the internal level is "3", the fluctuation time is "90 seconds", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 65", scenario "1" is selected, and the effect counter 223f is selected. If the value is "66 to 129", scenario "6" is selected, and if "130 to 198", scenario "11" is selected.

  Referring back to FIG. 221, the description will be continued. FIG. 221 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 221, the RAM 223 in this control example is different from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that a second internal level storage area 223 ba is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The second internal level storage area 223ba is for storing the internal level selected by the second internal level selection table 222ba described above based on the result (lottery result) of the special symbol when the reach navigation effect is executed. It is an area. In this second internal level storage area 223ba, the internal level determined in reach navigation effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 224) is set (stored) (S2152 in FIG. 224), and is referred to when selecting an effect scenario (FIG. 224, S2153), which is initialized when the reach navigation effect ends.

Regarding Control Process Executed by Audio Lamp Control Device 113 in Fourth Control Example
Next, with reference to FIG. 224, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. This control example is different from the above-described first control example in that reach navigation effect setting processing 2 (see FIG. 224) is executed instead of reach navigation effect setting processing (see FIG. 141), and the other points are the same. is there. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing reach navigation effect setting process 2 (S2005) in the present control example. The reach navigation effect setting process 2 (S2005) is a process executed when the change pattern type based on the change pattern command acquired from the main control unit 110 is to execute reach navigation effect, and the effect mode of reach navigation effect Is determined.

  When reach navigation effect setting process 2 (S2005) is executed, first, display fluctuation pattern information corresponding to the main effect to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 is selected based on the acquired fluctuation pattern type. , And the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area 223i (S2151). Here, the main effect is an effect for informing the lottery result of the special symbol using the effect period corresponding to the acquired variation pattern type, and the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 112) It is an effect performed in the central part of

  After the process of S2151, the internal level is determined based on the second internal level selection table 222ba and set in the second internal level storage area 223ba (S2152), and then the internal level and the presentation scenario selection table 222bc Based on the above, the rendering scenario is selected and set in the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area 223i (S2153).

  Then, when the process of S2153 is finished, the processes of S2107 and S2108 are executed in the same manner as the reach navigation effect setting process (see FIG. 141) executed in the first control example described above, and the present process is ended.

  Next, a modification of the display mode of reach navigation effect used in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 225 and 226. FIG. FIG. 225 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing a first modification of the fourth control example, and FIG. 225 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing a second modification of the fourth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows typically modification 3 of the 4th control example, FIG. 226 (b) is a schematic which shows an example of the display content displayed in the modification 3 of the 4th control example FIG. 226 is a diagram, and FIG. 226 (c) is a schematic view showing an example of display content displayed in the modification 3 of the fourth control example. In addition, the present modifications 1 to 3 are modifications of the display mode used in the reach navigation effect, and the control content uses the configuration described in the first control example or the fourth control example described above. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 225 (a) shows the contents of the second reach navigation effect of the modification 1 of the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 225 (a), in this modification, the time gauge Dm4a used in the first reach navigation effect is reversed and used as the time gauge Dm4a for the second reach navigation effect. By doing this, it is possible to divert the display data used for the effect.

  Next, FIG. 225 (b) shows the contents of the second reach navigation effect of the modification 2 of the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 225 (b), when the second reach navigation effect is started, the time gauge Dm4a used in the first reach navigation effect is extended and displayed, and the effect that the character Dm4b continues to move is executed . In this case, the guidance display portions Dm4f and Dm4g are newly displayed, and the number of places for reporting the degree of expectation of the jackpot is increased to four. As a result, up to four "chances" for notifying that the jackpot expectation is high can be displayed, and the player can be widely notified of the expectation for the jackpot.

  In this modification, the guidance display parts Dm4f and Dm4g are displayed separately from the guidance display parts Dm4d and Dm4e, but, for example, the first reach navigation effect is executed according to the progress of the second reach navigation effect Scrolling may be performed in the moving direction of the character Dm 4 b (rightward at the viewpoint in FIG. 225 (b)) so that the region is erased. Thereby, the effects of the present modification can be performed without enlarging the area of the small area Dm4.

  In this case, only the display results of the guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e may be displayed in the small area Dm4, or the display contents displayed on the guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e may be displayed as the guidance display portion Dm4f. And Dm 4 g may be displayed so as to change the display mode when the character Dm 4 b passes through the guidance display portions Dm 4 f and Dm 4 g in the second reach navigation effect.

  Next, FIG. 226 (a) shows the contents of the reach navigation effect of the modification 3 of the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 226 (a), in the reach navigation effect of this modification, the time gauge Dm4a branched into two paths is used, and the first path which finally reaches the first notification unit Dm4c1, and the second A second route to reach the notification unit Dm4c2 is configured. Among them, when the character Dm4b moves on the first route, it passes through the guidance and notification units Dm4d and Dm4e on the way, and when the character Dm4b moves on the second route, it passes through the guidance and notification units Dm4d and Dm4f on the way .

  In the present modification, when the reach navigation effect is executed, either the first path or the second path is moved in the first navigation effect, and the first informing portion Dm4c1 or the second informing portion Dm4c2 is reached. Then, the second navigation effect is performed by returning to the return position set to a position before the branch point at which the first path and the second path branch off.

  Then, in the second navigation effect, the character Dm4b moves in either the path along which the character Dm4b moves in the first navigation effect or the path in which the character Dm4b does not move in the first navigation effect. Thereby, when the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect select the same route, the display result in the guidance display part Dm4e that the character Dm4b has passed in the first navigation effect is changed by the second navigation effect It is possible to

  In addition, when a route in which the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect are different is selected, it is possible to display the display result in the three guidance display portions Dm4d, dm4e, Dm4f as reach navigation effect.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 226 (b), as a result of selecting the first route in the first navigation effect, the "chance" to notify that the jackpot expectation is high in the guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e is displayed In the state, when the second route is selected as the second navigation effect, as shown in FIG. 226 (c), the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display portion Dm4f provided in the middle of the second route, and the jackpot expectation degree is A "chance" to notify that it is high is displayed. When different routes are selected for the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect, the notification portion (informing portion Dm4c1 or the notification portion Dm4c2) that has arrived in the first navigation effect currently has the second navigation effect "Development" is displayed to indicate that it is medium. Thus, the player can easily grasp the current situation.

  In addition, when the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect select the same route, for example, in the first navigation effect, when the display result of the guidance display unit Dm 4 e is “x”, the second navigation effect As a result, the display result of the guidance display section Dm 4 e may be changed to “chance”.

  That is, in the case where the second navigation effect is started from the return position shown in FIG. 226 (b) when the display result of the guidance display portion Dm4e is "x" in the first navigation effect, the player is The effect mode of the second navigation effect is the effect mode in which the same route as the first navigation effect is selected, and the display result of the guidance display unit Dm 4 e in which the “×” is displayed in the first navigation effect is changed to “chance” In the case of a presentation mode in which the display result of “chance” is displayed on the guidance display section Dm 4 f while the display result of the guidance display section Dm 4 e is “X” while the route different from the first navigation effect is selected It is possible to make both expectations.

  In this case, it is preferable to set the second navigation effect to travel the route different from the first navigation effect so as to be advantageous to the player. Specifically, the probability that “chance” is displayed as the display result of the guidance display unit Dm 4 f is higher than the probability that the display result of the guidance display unit Dm 4 e is changed from “x” to “chance” It is preferable to set such that the expectation that the display result of the guidance display unit Dm 4 f is displayed as “chance” is higher than the guidance display unit Dm 4 e so that the expectation for winning the jackpot is higher. As a result, the player can be expected to select a route different from the first navigation effect as a route to be selected in the second navigation effect, so that the reach navigation effect can be watched continuously. It becomes possible.

  As described above, in the reach navigation effect in this modification, the time gauge Dm 4a for guiding the progress of the game has a plurality of (two) paths, and the result of the first navigation effect (display result of the guidance display unit) The second navigation effect can change the route expected by the player.

  Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the path along which the character Dm 4 b moves in the reach navigation effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In this modification, the position (return position) at which the second navigation effect is started is described as one position (position before the route branches), but the return position as in the fourth control example described above You may provide two or more. In this case, for example, a return position may be provided in front of the guidance display portion Dm4d, or a return position may be provided between the branch point of the route and the guidance display portion Dm4e or Dm4f. As a result, when the second navigation effect is executed, the route (the passing guidance display unit) along which the character Dm 4 b moves in the second navigation effect changes depending on the position at which the character Dm 4 b is returned. Therefore, it is possible to execute various effects according to the result of the first navigation effect (display result of the guidance display unit) and the position (return position) where the second navigation effect is started.

  Furthermore, in the present modification, the time gauge Dm 4 a is branched into two paths, but may be branched into more than two (three or more), or a plurality of branch points may be provided. Alternatively, a specific position may be set in the middle of the path along which the character Dm 4 b is moving, and the character Dm 4 b may move to another path when passing through the specific position. Thereby, the reach navigation effect can be made more colorful.

  In addition, in the present modification, a plurality of routes are displayed in the small area Dm4 when the reach navigation effect is executed, but for example, the route in which the character Dm4b moves during the first navigation effect Only the first route is displayed, and a plurality of routes (first and second routes) are displayed only when a route different from the first navigation effect is selected in the second navigation effect. It is also good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player predict the effect because the player is not notified in advance (during the first navigation effect) what route the path to be passed in the second navigation effect is. , You can improve the interest of the game.

  As described above, in the fourth control example, the contents of the main effect to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 (a description of the main effect and an expectation for becoming a fluctuation time or a big hit) Can be provided to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In addition, the production branch timing of the super reach production executed in the main production (the timing after 20 seconds since the super reach production is displayed) and the timing at which the first reach navigation production is switched to the second reach navigation production are associated Because of this configuration, a predetermined change effect (super reach effect) with a high expectation of the jackpot among the third symbol change effects (main effects) informing the lottery result of the special symbol using the third symbol change display And the player can visually grasp the progress of the aspect of the main effect by executing the reach navigation effect which is the sub-effect according to the timing (effect branch timing) of the main effect that In addition, it is possible to provide notification or suggestion in stages and provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

  In addition, by notifying the expectation of winning a big hit with a plurality of guidance display parts Dm4d and Dm4e during reach navigation effect production, the information content of the guidance display parts Dm4d and Dm4e and the presentation of the main effect are combined this time Since it is possible to predict the lottery result of the special symbol variation, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, by setting the guidance display part that has passed in the first reach navigation effect so that the character Dm 4 b passes again in the second reach navigation effect, it is possible to convert the notification content of the guidance display part without discomfort. Accordingly, guidance is set such that the character Dm 4 b passes again through the guidance display unit that has passed in the first reach navigation effect, and thus guidance in which the notification with high expectation (“chance”) is not performed in the first reach navigation effect Since the player gazes at the reach navigation effect while expecting the second reach navigation effect to be set again to pass through the display unit, the effect can be enhanced.

  In the example described above, the notification content is changed by the character Dm4b passing the guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e again, but an effect may be provided that does not change the notification content even if the character Dm4b passes again. . In this case, it is preferable to perform an operation (for example, jump) to avoid the guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e. Thereby, in the second reach navigation effect, it is possible to watch whether the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e or can be avoided, and it is possible to suppress an early boredom in the game and to prevent the first reach navigation When the second reach navigation effect is started from a position where it can pass through the guidance display section where notification ("chance") with a high expectation of the big hit is made in the production, the production that lowers the expectation of the big hit is suppressed can do.

  Furthermore, since it is possible to efficiently use the same data for the first reach navigation effect and the second reach navigation effect as display data used for the effect, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for the effect.

<Fifth control example>
Next, a fifth control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second control example described above, in the slot effect which is continuously executed within the specific period (within 30 seconds) as the continuous slot effect, the slot which is executed next by the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 It was comprised so that the production | presentation aspect of production | presentation might be set.

  On the other hand, in this control example, detailed control is added to the dynamic display (rotational display) mode and the stop display mode of the pseudo symbol in each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect of the second control example described above. It differs in the point.

  In the fifth control example, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed with respect to the second control example, and the process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is one It differs in the point which changed the part and the point which changed the dynamic display mode and the stop display mode in the various slot effects displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81. The other points are the same as in the second control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the second control example, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 227 and FIG. 228, the dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbol in the slot effect of this control example will be described. In this control example, a plurality of dynamic display modes of the pseudo symbol in the slot effect can be set, and the type of slot effect to be executed (first slot effect, normal slot effect, first shortened slot effect, second shortened) Different dynamic display modes are executed based on the slot effect, the extension slot effect), and the remaining time of the operation valid period of the frame button 22.

  FIG. 227 (a) is a schematic view showing a normal example of a dynamic display mode of a pseudo symbol in slot effect. As shown in FIG. 227 (a), in the normal dynamic display mode, the left and right pseudo symbols “A” are stopped and displayed, and the dynamic display mode in which the pseudo symbol in the inside is dynamically displayed is executed. In this state, when the player depresses the frame button 22 and the left middle symbol “A” is lined up in a line, the player obtains the symbol “A”. As described in the second control example described above, in the continuous slot effect, as a result of executing the slot effect a plurality of times, the pseudo symbols "A", "B" and "C" of plural types (three types) are obtained. When it is determined, it is informed that a benefit (for example, a big hit game) which is advantageous to the player is won (a benefit which is advantageous to the player is given).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 227 (b) to (e), another example set as a dynamic display mode of a pseudo symbol will be described. In this control example, a plurality of dynamic symbol display modes of the pseudo symbol can be set, and the pseudo symbol can be dynamically displayed in various dynamic display modes. It is possible to urge pressing of the frame button 22. Therefore, the player can be motivated to participate in the operation effect (slot effect) for operating the frame button 22.

  FIG. 227B is a schematic view showing an example in which the number of reels is changed as the dynamic display mode in the slot effect. As shown in FIG. 227 (b), in this control example, it is possible to set a dynamic display mode in which the number of reels on which the pseudo symbol used for slot effect is displayed is one as the dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbol There is. As a result, it is possible to magnify and display a pseudo-pattern currently displayed dynamically in a limited display space.

  In the present control example, the normal number of reels (three) is one, but the number of reels may be two, as long as it is smaller than the normal number of reels. Further, in the present control example, the number of reels is set to one, and the pseudo symbol in the dynamic display is displayed in an enlarged manner. In this case, a display for prompting the player to press the frame button 22 in a vacant area (area where normal left and right reels are displayed) (for example, the timing at which the pseudo symbol “A” is arranged in a line) It is preferable to execute the display or the display of the expectation degree in which the pseudo symbols “A” are arranged in a line by pressing the frame button 22. Thereby, it is possible to execute an effect that urges the player to press the frame button 22.

  FIG. 227 (c) is a schematic view showing an example in which the size of the pseudo symbol is changed as the dynamic display mode in the slot effect. As shown in FIG. 227 (c), in this control example, among the pseudo symbols used for the slot effect as the dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbol, it is possible to set the dynamic display mode for enlarging the pseudo symbol in the dynamic display. doing. As a result, the player can easily grasp the portion where the pseudo symbol to be displayed for the current stop is dynamically displayed, so that the frame button 22 can be actively pressed.

  In this control example, the player easily grasps the pseudo symbol "A" by enlarging the pseudo symbol "A" more than the other symbols, but, for example, the other symbols are relatively displayed in a reduced size. It may be a dynamic display mode in which the pseudo symbol “A” is more easily visible than other symbols. As a result, the pseudo symbol "A" can be easily viewed without changing the dynamically displayed area.

  FIG. 227D is a schematic diagram showing an example in which the symbol arrangement of the reels (middle reels) dynamically displayed as the dynamic display mode in the slot effect is changed. As shown in FIG. 227 (d), in this control example, among reels used for slot effect as a dynamic display mode of pseudo symbols, the symbol arrangement of reels (middle reels) for displaying pseudo symbols during dynamic display is different. The set dynamic display mode is configured to be settable. Specifically, in the dynamically displayed symbols, it is possible to set a dynamic display mode in which the number of pseudo symbols (pseudo symbol “A”) to be displayed for stop at this time is increased. As a result, the player can easily grasp the portion where the pseudo symbol to be displayed for the current stop is dynamically displayed, so that the frame button 22 can be actively pressed.

  In this control example, the player is able to easily grasp the pseudo symbol "A" by increasing the number of pseudo symbols (pseudo symbol "A") to be displayed for the current stop display. In addition to this, for example, by reducing the number of pseudo symbols that are not subject to stop display at this time, that is, symbols that are not stop displayed on the left and right reels (for example, pseudo symbols "B" and "C"), The number of pseudo symbols "A" may be increased. In this case, since the total number of symbols dynamically displayed on the middle reel decreases, it is possible to easily identify individual symbols being displayed dynamically (rotated).

  FIG. 227 (e) is a schematic view showing an example in which the dynamic display speed (rotational speed) of the reel (middle reel) dynamically displayed as the dynamic display mode in the slot effect is changed. As shown in FIG. 227 (e), in this control example, among reels used for slot effect as a dynamic display mode of a pseudo symbol, a dynamic display speed of a reel (middle reel) displaying a pseudo symbol during dynamic display The dynamic display mode in which (rotational speed) is reduced is configured to be settable. As a result, the player can easily grasp the portion where the pseudo symbol to be displayed for the current stop is dynamically displayed, so that the frame button 22 can be actively pressed.

  In addition, the dynamic display speed of the dynamically displayed reel may be slowed in the vicinity of the pseudo symbol which is the stop display target of this time, and may be made fast in the other cases. As a result, the player can be made to easily grasp the pseudo symbol to be the stop display target of this time, and furthermore, the period in which the reel makes a round can be shortened.

  Furthermore, the dynamic display speed of the reel on which the pseudo symbol is dynamically displayed is a normal speed until the reel is displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, two turns), and thereafter (for example, the third round) As described above, the dynamic display speed may be reduced. As a result, it is possible for the player who has not operated the frame button 22 for a predetermined period (period in which the reels make two revolutions) to easily grasp the pseudo symbol to be the stop display target of this time. 22 can be prompted to operate.

  As described above, in the present control example, in each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect, since the pseudo symbol is configured to be displayed in various dynamic display modes, the player is motivated to be motivated Can operate the frame button 22.

  In each of the dynamic display modes described above, only the pseudo symbol to be displayed for the current stop is displayed with luminance higher than that of the other symbols, or the display mode is changed to emphasize the edge of the symbol. This may make it easier for the player to grasp.

  In addition, the frame button 22 is operated despite the fact that the number of revolutions of the reel has reached a predetermined number (dynamic display as if the reel has been repeated a predetermined number of times), or that a predetermined period has elapsed since the slot effect was started. If not, each dynamic display mode may be switched and displayed. As a result, various dynamic display modes can be provided to the player, and the player can be made to operate the frame button 22 eagerly.

  Next, the stop display mode of each slot effect in the continuous slot effect of this control example will be described. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 232, in this control example, the stop display mode of each slot effect is determined based on the result of the determination of the special symbol, and the case of the determination of the special symbol is a hit. Is set so that three kinds of pseudo symbols "A", "B", and "C" can be acquired by a plurality of slot effects performed in a continuous slot effect, and the result of the judgment of the special symbol is In the case of a gap, it is set such that the number obtainable from among the three types of pseudo symbols in a plurality of slot effects executed in the continuous slot effect is any one of 0 to 2.

  Therefore, even if the frame button 22 is operated in each slot effect performed in the continuous slot effect when the judgment result of the special symbol is out, the pseudo symbol to be the stop display object is not stopped and displayed on the line Stop control. Specifically, a symbol different from the pseudo symbol to be displayed for stop is set before and after the pseudo symbol to be displayed for stop, and the player can easily grasp the symbol to be displayed for the pseudo symbol to be displayed for stop. When the frame button 22 is operated in an aim, stop control is performed so that a symbol displayed one before or one after the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed on the line. By doing this, it is possible to display the stop display mode of the disconnection without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  Further, in the present control example, the player is not uncomfortable by changing the start position of the dynamically displayed reel without changing the symbol arrangement of the dynamically displayed reel other than the stop control described above. A stop control in which a stop display mode of disengaging is displayed is also configured to be executable. Next, the above-described stop control will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 228 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing an example of symbol arrangement and stop positions of reels (middle reels) dynamically displayed as a dynamic display mode in slot effect. In the dynamic display mode shown in FIG. 228 (a), a portion where the pseudo symbol (pseudo symbol "A") to be displayed for the current stop is not set as the symbol array (a pseudo symbol not to be the current stop display is set) ) Is a continuous symbol array. Specifically, one symbol array is composed of 11 symbols, and one of them is a symbol array in which a pseudo symbol “A” is set (see FIG. 228 (b)).

  By using the reels of such a symbol array, the stop control is also displayed in which the stop display mode of disengaging is displayed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player only by changing the start position of the reel and the dynamic display speed in each slot effect. It is made feasible.

  This stop control will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 228 (b). FIG. 228 (b) is a timing chart explaining the symbol stop range in the dynamic display mode shown in FIG. 228 (a). As shown in FIG. 228 (b), in this dynamic display mode, as the symbol arrangement of the dynamically displayed reels, the pseudo symbol “A” to be displayed on the current stop is set to the arrangement 4 and other than that A pseudo symbol "-" different from the current stop display target is set to.

  Then, in the dynamic display mode using this reel, the rotation start position 1 where the position where the dynamic display of the reel is started is the arrangement 1 of the symbol array and the rotation start position 2 where the array of the symbol arrangement 9 Is set. Then, two types of "high" and "ultra-low" are set as the speeds of the dynamically displayed reels. Specifically, the reel speed "high" is set at a speed at which one dynamically displayed symbol takes 0.7 seconds to move, and the reel speed "ultra-low" is specifically set Is set at a speed of 1.2 seconds to move one dynamically displayed symbol.

  That is, when the slot effect in which the operation effective period (button operation effective period) of the frame button 22 is set to 6 seconds is executed, 9 to 10 symbols are moved in the case of the reel speed "high". In the case of the reel speed "very low", an effect of moving five symbols is executed. Therefore, it is possible to change the type of pseudo symbols dynamically displayed during the button operation effective period without changing the symbol arrangement only by changing the position at which the dynamic display of the reel is started and the reel speed. Therefore, various dynamic display modes can be set without increasing the types of symbol data, and the amount of effect data can be reduced.

  Next, a specific example will be described with reference to FIG. 228 (b). When rotation start position 1 is set, it is assumed that either the reel speed "high" or the reel speed "very low" is set. Also, a dynamic display mode capable of displaying a pseudo symbol "A" to be displayed as a stop is executed. In this case, the reel speed "very low" (one symbol is displayed) in which the period during which the pseudo symbol "A" is displayed is longer than the reel speed "high" (the period when one symbol is displayed is 0.7 seconds) When the time period is 1.2 seconds), the player can easily grasp the pseudo symbol which is the target of the stop display of this time.

  In addition, when the rotation start position 2 is set, when the reel speed "high" is set, the symbols dynamically displayed during the button operation effective period become the range of the array 9 to the array 5, so the stop display is performed. It becomes a dynamic display mode that can display the target symbol “A”, and when the reel speed is set to “very low”, the symbol dynamically displayed during the button operation effective period is the range of array 9 to array 2 Therefore, it is a dynamic display mode in which it is impossible to display the pseudo symbol "A" which is the stop display target.

  In this way, if the special symbol's judgment result is out of order, dynamic display is performed from the rotation start position 2 by starting the dynamic display set to the reel speed "very low", and the dynamic display not to display the pseudo symbol "A" is executed. It is possible to Moreover, when performing such stop control, it is good for the symbol set other than the pseudo-symbol used as stop display object to be the same symbol. Thereby, whether the dynamic display mode executed in the slot effect this time is the dynamic display mode in which the pseudo symbol to be displayed for stop is displayed is set other than the pseudo symbol to be displayed for stop It is possible to prevent the player from grasping by the dynamic display content of the symbol.

  Furthermore, in the case where the dynamic display is started from the rotation start position 1 when the reel speed is "very low", the dynamic display mode (the player can easily grasp the pseudo symbol to be the stop display target) The dynamic display mode advantageous to the player) and the dynamic display mode incapable of displaying the pseudo symbol "A" to be the stop display target when the dynamic display is started from the rotation start position 2 (convenient to the player Dynamic display mode). Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the dynamic display mode advantageous to the player or the disadvantageous dynamic display mode only by grasping the reel speed when the dynamic display of the reel is started in the slot effect. It can prevent.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fifth Control Example
Next, with reference to FIG. 229 to FIG. 232, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described.

  FIG. 229 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 229 (a), the ROM 222 in this control example is different from the ROM 222 in the second control example in that a display mode storage area 222ca, a display mode selection table 222cb, and a stop mode selection table 222cc are added. , Other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 230, the details of the display mode storage area 222ca will be described. FIG. 230 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the display mode storage area 222ca. The display mode storage area 222ca is a table in which a plurality of dynamic display modes of reels of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect are stored, and it is used for the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) described later. When it is determined that there is a slot effect (S2034 in FIG. 223: Yes), the display mode to be selected is stored.

  As shown in FIG. 230, the display mode storage area 222ca stores a plurality of display modes (display mode 1 to display mode 9) having different rotational speeds (dynamic display speed) and symbol arrangement as dynamic display modes in slot effect It is done. Thereby, when continuous slot effects are executed in this control example, it becomes possible to set a plurality of patterns as dynamic display modes to be executed in each slot effect.

  The rotation speed indicates a period during which a symbol is dynamically displayed in the display area in which the slot effect is displayed. In the present control example, the symbol of 1 for 0.7 seconds in the rotation speed "high". It is set to be displayed. In addition, at the rotational speed "low", one symbol is set to be displayed for one second. Furthermore, at the rotational speed "very low", one symbol is set to be displayed for 1.2 seconds. By setting the rotational speed of the reel to three levels in this way, in the dynamic display of each slot effect, it is possible to set the dynamic display in which the player can easily distinguish the pseudo symbol and the dynamic display in which it is difficult to distinguish. It becomes possible. Therefore, even in the dynamic display mode using the same symbol arrangement, different effects can be executed.

  Furthermore, by providing three rotational speeds of the reel, it is possible to make the number of pseudo symbols displayed in one slot effect different. For example, when the period of one slot effect (period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is effectively determined) is 6 seconds, nine pseudo symbols can be displayed at the rotational speed “high”, and the rotational speed “ In "Low", six pseudo-patterns can be displayed, and in the rotation speed "very low", five pseudo-patterns can be displayed. Thus, it is possible to change the number of times the pseudo symbol in the current stop display mode is displayed by the rotational speed of the reel.

  Specifically, in display mode 1, the rotational speed is "high", and a pseudo pattern (displayed as "circle" in FIG. 230) whose symbol array is to be stopped and displayed, and a pseudo symbol not to be stopped and displayed (Displayed as “x” in FIG. 230) is set to be displayed alternately, and in display mode 2, the rotational speed is “low” and the same symbol array as display mode 1 is set. It is

  Display mode 3 is the same rotation speed as display mode 1 and is not a target for stop display with respect to a pseudo symbol (displayed as “circle” in FIG. 230) for which the symbol array is for stop display In FIG. 230, two “X” symbols are set to be displayed side by side, and further, a pseudo symbol (displayed as “star” in FIG. 230) to be stopped and displayed is emphasized (enlarged, It is set to be displayed as light emission etc.). In the display mode 4, the rotational speed is "low" and the same symbol array as the display mode 3 is set.

  Display mode 5 is set so that the rotational speed is "very low" and the symbol pattern is displayed as a pseudo symbol of the stop display target in array 4 and other sequences are displayed as pseudo symbols other than the stop display target. In the display mode 6, the rotational speed is "very low", and the pseudo pattern of the stop display target is displayed in the array 11 as the symbol array, and the other arrays are pseudo patterns other than the stop display target. Is set to be displayed.

  The display mode 5 and the display mode 6 use the same symbol array data, and are different from each other in the position where the dynamic display is started. That is, in the display mode 6, dynamic display is started from the array 5 shown in the display mode 5. The display mode 5 and the display mode 6 are dynamic display modes in which the stop display mode described in FIG. 228 described above is executed.

  In the display mode 7, the rotational speed changes in the middle, and the rotational speed is "low" during the period when the arrays 1 to 6 of the symbol array are displayed, and the rotational speed is during the period when the arrays 7 to 11 are displayed. It becomes "high", and as symbol array, the pseudo symbols that are not targeted for stop display until the arrays 1 to 6 and the pseudo symbols that are targeted for stop display are displayed alternately, and the arrays 7 to 11 have pseudo symbols that are not targeted for stop display It is set to be displayed.

  Thus, the rotational speed is reduced in the range (arranges 1 to 6) in which the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed are displayed, and the rotation speed is set in the range (arranges 7 to 11) in which the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed is not displayed. By speeding up, the dynamic display speed is changed to attract the player's interest, and the period during which the pseudo symbol to be the stop display target is displayed is made more motivated to the player. The frame button 22 can be operated.

  In addition, since the rotation speed is increased in the range (arranges 7 to 11) in which the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed are not displayed, it is possible to shorten the period in which the reel makes one round. In the period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is effective, a plurality of ranges (arranges 7 to 11) in which the pseudo symbols to be displayed for stop display are displayed can be displayed in a plurality of rotations. The button 22 can be operated.

  In the display mode 8, the rotational speed is changed by rotation of the symbol array, and the rotational speed is "high" in the first round and the rotational speed is "low" in the second and subsequent rounds. The display mode 9 is set so that the display pattern 9 highlights the pseudo pattern to be stopped and displayed by the rotation of the symbol array, and the rotation speed is “high” in the first round. The symbol arrangement is the same as that of the display mode 7 and the pseudo symbol “star” emphasizing the pseudo symbol “A” to be stopped and displayed is set to be displayed after the second round.

  In this control example, the nine display modes (display mode 1 to display mode 9) described above can be set as the dynamic display modes to be executed in the slot effect, but the types of display modes are the same. However, many display modes may be used. By doing this, it is possible to further enhance the effect of each slot effect performed in the continuous slot effect.

  Next, the display mode selection table 222cb will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 231 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the display mode selection table 222cb. The display mode selection table 222cb is a table to be referred to when selecting a dynamic display mode of each slot effect to be executed in the continuous slot effect, and is used for the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) described later. When it is determined that there is a slot effect (S2034 in FIG. 223: Yes), this is referred to.

  In this display mode selection table 222cb, as shown in FIG. 231 (a), the display mode selection table 222cb is set with a display mode selection table 222cb1 for winning and a display mode selection table 222cb2 for removal, and the special symbol A dynamic display mode of each slot effect to be executed in the continuous slot effect is selected based on the determination result.

  As described above, since the dynamic display mode of each slot effect to be executed in the continuous slot effect is selected based on the success / failure determination result of the special symbol, the jackpot of the special symbol is obtained by grasping the effect contents of the continuous slot effect. It is possible to make the player predict whether or not he has won.

  FIG. 231 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the hit display mode selection table 222cb1. Each slot effect (first slot effect, normal slot effect, first shortening slot effect, second shortening slot effect, extension) executed in the continuous slot effect based on the value of the effect counter 223f by the hit display mode selection table 222cb1 The display mode of slot effect is selected.

  Specifically, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", "display mode 1" as the first slot effect, "display mode 1" as the normal slot effect, and "display as the first reduced slot effect" In the case where “display mode 2” is set as the second reduced slot effect, “display mode 2” is set as the extended slot effect, and the value of the effect counter 223 f is “50 to 99,” as the first slot effect "Display mode 1", "display mode 2" as a normal slot effect, "display mode 2" as a first reduced slot effect, "display mode 4" as a second reduced slot effect, "displayed as an extended slot effect When "mode 4" is set, and the value of the effect counter 223f is "100 to 149", "display mode 1" is displayed as the first slot effect, and "display condition" as the normal slot effect. 8 is set as "display mode 4" as the first reduced slot effect, "display mode 5" as the second reduced slot effect, "display mode 5" as the extended slot effect, and the value of the effect counter 223f is " In the case of 150 to 198, "display mode 1" as the first slot effect, "display mode 9" as the normal slot effect, "display mode 4" as the first reduced slot effect, and "second reduced slot effect" The "display mode 7" is set as the extension slot effect.

  FIG. 231C is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the separation display mode selection table 222cb2. Each slot effect (first slot effect, normal slot effect, first shortened slot effect, second shortened slot effect, extended) executed in the continuous slot effect based on the value of the effect counter 223f by the display mode selection table 222cb2 for departure The display mode of slot effect is selected.

  Specifically, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", "display mode 1" as the first slot effect, "display mode 1" as the normal slot effect, and "display as the first reduced slot effect" If "display mode 2" is set as the second reduced slot effect, "display mode 2" is set as the extended slot effect, and the value of the effect counter 223f is "50 to 99", the first slot effect is displayed. "Display mode 1", "display mode 2" as a normal slot effect, "display mode 2" as a first reduced slot effect, "display mode 4" as a second reduced slot effect, "displayed as an extended slot effect When "mode 4" is set, and the value of the effect counter 223f is "100 to 149", "display mode 1" is displayed as the first slot effect, and "display condition" as the normal slot effect. “2” is set as “display mode 7” as the first reduction slot effect, “display mode 6” as the second reduction slot effect, “display mode 6” as the extension slot effect, and the value of the effect counter 223 f is “ In the case of 150 to 198, "display mode 1" as the first slot effect, "display mode 4" as the normal slot effect, "display mode 8" as the first reduction slot effect, and "second reduction slot effect" "Display mode 9" is set as "display mode 7" as the extension slot effect.

  As described above, in this control example, the dynamic display mode is set in advance for all the slot effects that may be executed in the continuous slot effect, so in the continuous slot effect Regardless of the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 for each slot effect to be executed, the next slot effect can be smoothly performed.

  Next, the stop mode selection table 222cc will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 232 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the stop mode selection table 222cc. The stop mode selection table 222 cc is a table for selecting the stop mode of each slot effect to be executed in the continuous slot effect, and it is assumed that there is a slot effect in the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) described later. If it is determined (S2034 in FIG. 233: Yes), it is referred to.

  In this stop mode selection table 222cc, as shown in FIG. 232 (a), a stop mode selection table for win 222cc1 and a stop mode selection table for disengagement 222cc2 are set, and a table corresponding to the determination result of the special symbol The stop mode is selected with reference to.

  FIG. 232 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the hit stop mode selection table 222 cc 1. The hit stop mode selection table 222cc1 is a table for selecting a stop pattern having a different number of established symbols in each slot effect based on the value of the effect counter 223f.

  Specifically, when the value of the effect counter 223 f is “0 to 99”, the stop pattern 1 is selected. The stop pattern 1 is established as the first slot effect, the symbol number "1" is established as the normal slot effect, the symbol number "2" is established as the first reduced slot effect, and the symbol number "0" is formed as the second reduced slot effect. The number of established symbols "2" is set as the number of established symbols "2" as the extension slot effect.

  When the value of the effect counter 223f is "100 to 199", the stop pattern 2 is selected. The stop pattern 2 is established as the first slot effect, the symbol number "1" is established as the normal slot effect, the symbol number "2" is established as the first reduced slot effect, and the symbol number "1" is generated as the second reduced slot effect. The number of established symbols "1" is set as the number of established symbols as an extension slot effect.

  As described above, in the case where the success or failure determination result is a hit, three symbols are established after each slot effect is executed in the continuous slot effect. As a result, the player is notified that the player has won the winning.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, since a plurality of stop patterns for each slot effect are provided in the case where the success / failure determination result is a hit, the current continuous slot effect during the execution of the continuous slot effect is a hit It is possible to suppress a situation in which the player is aware of whether or not the continuous slot effect has been executed.

  FIG. 232 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the disconnection stop mode selection table 222 cc 2. The disconnection stop mode selection table 222cc2 is a table for selecting a stop pattern having a different number of established symbols in each slot effect based on the value of the effect counter 223f.

  Specifically, when the value of the effect counter 223 f is “0 to 99”, the stop pattern 1 is selected. This stop pattern 1 is established as the first slot effect, the symbol number "1" is established as the normal slot effect, the symbol number "0" is established as the first reduced slot effect, and the symbol number "0" is formed as the second reduced slot effect. The number of established symbols “0” is set as the number of established symbols “0” as the extension slot effect.

  When the value of the effect counter 223f is "100 to 199", the stop pattern 2 is selected. The stop pattern 2 is established as the first slot effect, the symbol number "1" is established as the normal slot effect, the symbol number "0" is established as the first reduced slot effect, and the symbol number "1" is generated as the second reduced slot effect. The number of established symbols “0” is set as the number of established symbols “0” as the extension slot effect.

  As described above, in the present control example, the same slot pattern is produced in the first slot effect executed at the beginning of the continuous slot effect whether the success or failure judgment result is hit or not, so the continuous slot effect starts Immediately after being played (at the time when the first slot effect is finished), the player is grasped as to whether or not the current continuous slot effect is the continuous slot effect executed when the result of judgment of the success or failure is a hit. Can be suppressed.

  Referring back to FIG. 229, the description will be continued. FIG. 229 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 229, the RAM 223 in this control example is different from the RAM 223 in the second control example in that a display mode storage area 223ca and a stop mode storage area 223cb are added, and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The display mode storage area 223ca is an area for storing (setting) the display mode selected by the display mode selection table 222cb described above. In the display mode storage area 223ca, the selected display mode is set in the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) (S2071 in FIG. 233), and a display slot effect corresponding to each slot effect of the continuous slot effect Referenced when setting a command (S4752 in FIG. 234, S4853 in FIG. 235, S4952 in FIG. 236, S5052 in FIG. 237, S5152 in FIG. 238), information regarding the display mode stored when the continuous slot effect is finished Is initialized.

  The stop mode storage area 223cb is an area for storing (setting) the stop mode selected by the above-described stop mode selection table 222cc. In the stop mode storage area 223cb, the selected display mode is set in the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) (S2072 in FIG. 233), a display slot effect corresponding to each slot effect of the continuous slot effect Displayed when the command is set (S4751 in FIG. 234, S4851, S4852 in FIG. 235, S4951 in FIG. 236, S5051 in FIG. 237, S5151 in FIG. 238) and stored when continuous slot effect is finished Information about is initialized.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Controller 113 in Fifth Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 233 to FIG. The present control example is different from the second control example described above in that the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) is executed instead of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), and the other points are the same. It is. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 233, the variable display setting process 4 (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. In the variable display setting process 4 (S1712), the processes of S2001 to S2006 are executed as in the case of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the second control example described above.

  When the process of S2006 is finished, the processes of S2034 and S2035 are executed as in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the second control example described above, and then the display mode is displayed based on the display mode selection table 222cb It selects and sets to the display mode storage area 223ca (S2071).

  When the process of S2071 is completed, the stop mode is selected based on the stop mode selection table 222cc, and is set in the stop mode storage area 223cb (S2072). Then, as in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the second control example described above, the process of S2036 and the process of S2007 to 2011 are executed, and the present process is ended.

  Next, referring to FIG. 234 to FIG. 238, processing during various effects of slot effect processing (see FIG. 174) of main processing 2 (see FIG. 169) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example. Explain about

  First, with reference to FIG. 234, the first slot effect presentation process 2 will be described. This FIG. 234 is a flow chart showing the contents of processing 2 during the first slot effect. When the first slot effect presentation process 2 is executed, the processes of S4701 to S4707 are executed as in the first slot effect presentation process (see FIG. 175) in the second control example described above. When the process of S4707 is finished, next, the display slot stop effect command of the set stop mode is set (S4751), and the display slot effect command according to the effect set in the display mode storage area 223ca is displayed. The setting is made (S4752), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4701 that the current time is not the button pressing effective period (S4701: No), S4710 is the same as the first slot effect in-progress process (see FIG. 175) in the second control example described above. The processing of ~ S4712 is executed, and this processing ends.

  Next, normal slot effect processing 2 will be described with reference to FIG. This FIG. 235 is a flow chart showing the contents of the process 2 during the normal slot effect. When the normal slot effect in progress process 2 is executed, the processes in S4801 to S4803 are executed as in the normal slot in effect process (see FIG. 176) in the second control example described above, and in the process of S4803, the slot effect counter If it is determined that the value of 223p is larger than 19000 (S4803: Yes), a display slot stop effect command corresponding to the set stop mode is set (S4851), and then waiting for the slot effect state to end The state is set (S4807), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S4803 that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is not larger than 19000 (19000 or less) (S4803: No), the display slot stop effect command corresponding to the set stop mode is set The slot effect state is set to the second shortening slot effect (S4809).

  When the process of S4809 is finished, next, a display slot effect command corresponding to the display mode of the second reduced slot effect set in the display mode storage area 223ca is set (S4853), and this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 236, the first reduction slot effect processing 2 (S4608) will be described. This FIG. 236 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first reduction slot effect processing 2 (S4608). When the first reduction slot effect processing 2 (S4608) is executed, first, S4901 to S4904 and S4906 to S4908 as in the first reduction slot effect processing (refer to FIG. 177) in the second control example described above. Execute the process of

  After the process of S4904, the display slot stop effect command corresponding to the stop mode set in the stop mode storage area 223cb is set (S4951), and then the display mode selected from the display mode storage area 223ca is selected. A corresponding slot effect command for display is set (S4952), and this processing ends.

  Next, second shortening slot effect processing 2 (S4610) will be described with reference to FIG. This FIG. 237 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second shortening slot effect processing 2 (S4610). When the second shortening slot effect processing 2 (S4610) is executed, first, the processing of S5001 and S5002 is executed similarly to the second shortening slot effect processing (see FIG. 178) in the second control example described above. When the process of S5002 is completed, the display slot stop effect command corresponding to the stop mode set in the stop mode storage area 223cb is set (S5051), and the display mode stored in the display mode storage area 223ca is handled. A slot effect command for display is set (S5052), the slot effect state is set to an end waiting state (S5004), and this processing is ended.

  FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing the contents of extended slot effect processing 2 (S4612). When the extension slot effect processing 2 (S4612) is executed, the processing of S5101 and S5102 is executed in the same manner as the extension slot effect processing (see FIG. 179) in the second control example described above, and then the stop mode is stored. A display slot stop effect command corresponding to the stop mode set in the area 223cb is set (S5151), and a display slot effect command corresponding to the display mode set in the display mode storage area 223ca is set (S5152) ), The slot effect state is set to an end waiting state (S5104), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the fifth control example, in addition to the continuous slot effects in the second control example described above, in each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect, various dynamic display modes are used for the pseudo symbol Since it is configured to be able to be displayed, the player can make the player operate the frame button 22 eagerly.

  Furthermore, the player is configured to change the dynamic display mode by establishing a predetermined condition (the number of turns of the symbol array displayed on the reel and the elapse of a predetermined time) even during one slot effect. On the other hand, the operating means (frame button 22) can be operated more actively.

  As the plurality of dynamic display modes, it is preferable to change the number of dynamically displayed reels. As a result, it is possible to magnify and display a pseudo-pattern currently displayed dynamically in a limited display space. Also, the size of the pseudo symbol may be changed. As a result, the player can easily grasp the portion where the pseudo symbol to be displayed for the current stop is dynamically displayed, so that the frame button 22 can be actively pressed.

  In this case, the other symbol may be displayed in a reduced size so that the pseudo symbol to be displayed for stop display may be a dynamic display mode that is easier to visually recognize than the other symbols. Thereby, it is possible to easily view a predetermined pseudo-pattern without changing the dynamically displayed area.

  Furthermore, the number of predetermined pseudo symbols (pseudo symbols to be displayed for stop) may be increased. Thereby, the player can easily grasp the predetermined symbol. In addition, the number of predetermined pseudo symbols may be relatively increased by decreasing the number of predetermined pseudo symbols (the pseudo symbols that are not to be displayed for stop). In this case, since it is possible to reduce the total number of dynamically displayed symbols, it is possible to easily identify individual symbols being dynamically displayed.

  In addition, as the dynamic display mode, the symbol arrangement of the dynamically displayed reels may be changed, and a range in which a predetermined pseudo symbol (a pseudo symbol to be displayed for stop display) is concentrated may be set.

  In addition, in the present control example, the speed at which the pseudo symbol is dynamically displayed in the slot effect is configured to be changeable. As a result, it is possible to set dynamic display for easily grasping a predetermined pseudo symbol (pseudo symbol to be displayed for stop) and dynamic display for which it is difficult to grasp even in the same symbol array, so that various effects can be obtained. Can be performed.

  In addition, the dynamic display speed of the dynamically displayed reel may be slowed in a range where a predetermined pseudo symbol (a pseudo symbol to be displayed for stop display) is displayed, and may be increased otherwise. As a result, it is possible to make the player easily grasp the pseudo symbol which is the stop display target of this time without changing the period for displaying the predetermined symbol array.

  Furthermore, the dynamic display speed of the dynamically displayed reels is set to the normal speed until the number of reels reaches a predetermined number (for example, 2 turns), and the dynamic display after that (for example, the third turn) is described above. You may make it slow. This makes it possible for a player who has not operated the operation means (frame button 22) for a predetermined period (period in which the reel makes two revolutions) to easily grasp a predetermined pseudo symbol (a pseudo symbol to be displayed for stop). It is possible to urge to operate the operation means (frame button 22).

  Further, in this control example, since the dynamic display mode and the stop display mode of each slot effect are determined based on the result of the determination of the special symbol, the effect contents of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect are It becomes possible to predict the success or failure judgment result of the special symbol based on. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to give an interest to the contents of the continuous slot effect.

  In this control example, it is dynamic in advance for each slot effect (first slot effect, normal slot effect, first shortening slot effect, second shortening slot effect, extension slot effect) which may be executed in continuous slot effects. Since the display mode is set, the next slot effect can be smoothly executed regardless of the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 for each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect. Can.

  Further, in the present control example, the same stop mode is obtained in the first slot effect executed at the beginning of the continuous slot effect whether the success or failure judgment result is a hit or not. Therefore, immediately after the continuous slot effect is started It is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether or not the current continuous slot effect is the continuous slot effect executed when the success or failure judgment result is a hit) when the slot effect is finished) .

  In this control example, the dynamic display mode and the stop display mode of each slot effect to be executed in the continuous slot effect are set in advance, but when the slot effect to be executed in the continuous slot effect is determined The dynamic display mode and the stop display mode of the slot effect may be set (when the slot effect to be executed next is determined based on the operation timing of the frame button 22 during each slot effect).

  Furthermore, the dynamic display mode and the stop display mode in the special slot effect executed when the player does not operate the frame button 22 while the first slot effect is executed are also at the same timing as the other slot effects. It may be set.

Sixth Control Example
Next, a sixth control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 239 to 248. The present control example describes in detail the combined pressing effect of the second control example described above. The composite pressing effect of the second control example described above is configured to be executed based on one special symbol variation.

  On the other hand, in this control example, a composite pressing effect performed based on one special symbol change and a combined effect performed based on a plurality of special symbol changes are executed. There is a difference in points. Further, detailed description is added on the relationship between the operation content of the frame button 22 for each pressing effect in the combined pressing effect executed based on one special symbol variation and the pressing effect to be executed.

  In this sixth control example, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed with respect to the second control example, and the process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is one. It is different in the point which changed the part. The other points are the same as in the second control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the second control example, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 239, the rear surface image displayed by the pachinko machine 10 of this control example will be described. FIG. 239 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example ("mountain" stage) of the rear surface image data stored in the character ROM 234 in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 of this control example. ) Is a schematic diagram showing an example ("sea" stage) of the back surface image data stored in the character ROM 234 in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 of this control example.

  In this control example, the player can select the stage shown in FIGS. 239 (a) and (b) by operating the frame button 22. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 241, a period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is effectively determined is set during a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after fluctuation of the special symbol is started. When the person operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81 is switched.

  Further, in this control example, an effect corresponding to the stage being displayed is performed. Therefore, while the player can change the stage (for example, 5 seconds after the change of the special symbol is started), the frame button 22 is operated to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to execute a new effect, so that it is possible to cause the player to operate the frame button 22 eagerly.

  Next, referring to FIG. 240, the composite pressing effect in the present control example will be described. FIG. 240 is a timing chart showing an example of combined depression effect in this control example. In the combined pressing effect of this control example, the same elements as those in the above-described second control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 240, in this control example, the background (stage) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed during a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the special symbol variation is executed. Period is set. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 240, the continuous hit effect is executed for 10 seconds from the time when the variation time of the special symbol variation 1 (60s) becomes 12 seconds to the time when 2 seconds is left.

  The background (stage) to be executed in the next special symbol change when the player executes a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 (for example, an operation that the number of consecutive hits is 50 or more) during this continuous hit effect The operation mode to be changed is configured to be changed. Here, an operation mode for changing the background (stage) will be described with reference to FIGS. 241 (b) and (c).

  FIG. 241 (b) is a schematic view showing an operation mode capable of changing the background of the special symbol variation being executed as the background change operation mode, and FIG. 241 (c) is executed as the background change operation mode It is a schematic diagram which shows the operation aspect which can change the background of the following special symbol variation. First, in FIG. 241 (b), the back image corresponding to the background ("sea" stage) currently selected is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the small display area Ds is small. Stages selectable as a background selection screen ("sea" stage and "mountain" stage) are displayed in the area Ds2 and are configured so that the stage currently selected is displayed larger than the stages not selected.

  Then, below the main display area Dm, “I change the background by pressing a button” is displayed as a background change notification display for notifying the player that the background changeable period is currently possible. A display imitating a “button” indicating that the present is an operation effective period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is effective is performed.

  This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that the background can be changed, and allows the player to select an arbitrary background.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 240, an effect (for example, a continuous hit effect) for causing the player to operate the frame button 22 during a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds until the special symbol fluctuation ends) until the special symbol fluctuation ends. May be performed. In this case, as a result of the player earnestly operating the frame button 22, the frame button 22 is operated even after the next special symbol change is started, and the background is changed unintentionally in the next special symbol change. Problems may occur.

  If this problem occurs, for example, in a state in which effects (so-called, continuous effects) executed across a plurality of changes are being executed, the player can not see the effects he was looking forward to There was a risk that the player would be dissatisfied.

  Therefore, in the present control example, in order to prevent the occurrence of the problem described above, a predetermined frame button operation (for example, 5 seconds until the special symbol fluctuation ends) until the special symbol fluctuation ends (for example, When it is determined that the continuous hitting operation has been executed, the background changing operation mode to be executed in the next special symbol variation is changed to a specific background changing operation mode.

  Here, the specific background change operation mode described above will be described with reference to FIG. 241 (c). As shown in FIG. 241 (c), this particular background change operation mode differs from the background change operation mode shown in FIG. 241 (b), and even if the frame button 22 is operated, the special symbol variation currently being executed is It is configured so that the background does not change until the end. On the lower side of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, "Please select the background of the next change by pressing a button" as a display for informing the player that the current background change operation mode is the specific one. It is displayed, and in the small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds, selection contents indicating the background displayed in the next change are displayed.

  In this manner, the player is dissatisfied by changing the mode of the effect using the frame button 22 executed by the next special symbol change based on the operation content of the frame button 22 during the special symbol change. Can be suppressed.

  In this control example, when it is determined that the predetermined operation is performed on the frame button 22 during the predetermined period until the special symbol variation ends, the frame button 22 executed in the next special symbol variation The configuration in which the operation mode of the effect of operating the (hereinafter referred to as a frame button operation effect) is changed is used, but other configurations may be used.

  For example, when the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during one special symbol change exceeds a predetermined number, the mode of the frame button operation presentation in the next special symbol change may be changed, or The end timing of the frame button operation effect performed in the special symbol variation of and the start timing of the frame button operation effect executed corresponding to the next special symbol variation are set within a predetermined interval (for example, 10 seconds) In such a case, the mode of the subsequent frame button operation effect may be changed based on the fact that the operation content of the frame button operation effect executed previously is determined to be the predetermined operation content.

  Furthermore, in this control example, when it is determined that the operation of the frame button 22 during the frame button operation effect is a predetermined operation, the mode of the next frame button operation effect is changed, so that Although it is configured to be able to change the next frame button operation effect only in the situation where the above-mentioned problem may actually occur, it is not limited to this, and is executed in the present special symbol variation Based on the fact that the end timing of the frame button operation effect and the start timing of the frame button operation effect executed corresponding to the next special symbol variation are set within a predetermined interval (for example, 10 seconds) You may comprise so that the aspect of the frame button operation presentation performed corresponding to special symbol variation may be changed. This makes it possible to reliably prevent the problems described above from occurring.

  In addition, means is provided for determining whether the frame button 22 is operated in a state where the frame button operation effect is not set, and within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) until the next frame button operation effect is executed. When the determination means determines that a predetermined operation is being performed on the frame button 22, the mode of the next frame button operation effect may be changed. Thus, for example, when it is notified that the success or failure judgment result of the special symbol variation this time is out despite the fact that the frame button operation effect is not executed, the player regrets and the frame button 22 It is possible to suppress an unintended background change from being performed when the next special symbol variation starts in a state where the user operates (presses) a plurality of times.

  As described above, in the present control example, a plurality of frame button operation effects executed over a plurality of special symbol variations (a continuous hit effect of special symbol variation 1 and a background change effect of special symbol variation 2 in FIG. 240) On the other hand, the mode of the frame button operation effect to be executed later can be changed based on the operation content of the frame button operation effect to be executed before.

  In addition, in the same manner as in the second control example described above, the frame button operation effect to be executed before is also performed for a plurality of frame button operation effects (composite pressing effect) to be executed during one special symbol change. It is comprised so that change of the aspect of the frame button operation presentation performed later based on the operation content is possible.

  Referring back to FIG. 240, the composite pressing effect will be described. When the special symbol variation 2 (90s) is executed, a combined pressing effect is executed in which a plurality of frame button operation effects are continuously executed. The combined pressing effect is the same effect as the combined pressing effect executed in the second control example described above (see FIGS. 157 to 159). Here, the operation content of the frame button 22 and the effect mode of the frame button operation effect in each frame button operation effect executed in the combined pressing effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 242 is a schematic view showing the relationship between the operation content of the frame button 22 and the effect mode to be executed in the combined pressing effect. As shown in FIG. 242, when the combined pressing effect is executed, first, the pressed effect 1 is executed. In the same manner as in the second control example described above, this depression effect 1 is a frame button operation effect (in which the effect period is 12 seconds and the effective period of operation is 5 seconds after the start of effect). For 7 seconds) (see FIG. 157 (b)).

  During the pressing effect 1, the operation content of the frame button 22 with respect to the pressing effect 1 is determined at a predetermined timing (at a timing when 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the operation effective period). As the determination content, the "weak continuous hit" which is determined when the frame button 22 is continuously hit (operation 3) based on the operation content of the frame button 22 and the number of consecutive hits is small (50 times or less) The automatic continuous hitting function is executed by an operation (operation 4) in which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for 2 seconds or more in the pressing effect 1 and “strong continuous hitting” determined when the number of times is large (51 times or more) "Long press" determined to be, "No operation" determined if the frame button 22 has been operated even once during the pressing effect 1, unnecessary frame button operations are executed for the pressing effect 1 There are five types of "other operations" that are determined to be present.

  Then, based on the determination result determined at the operation determination timing of the pressing effect 1, the mode of the pressing effect 2 which is the frame button operation effect to be executed next is set. Specifically, when it is determined that "weak continuous hitting" is made in the pressing effect 1, "timing pressing effect" (see FIG. 158 (a)) is set in the pressing effect 2 and it is determined that "strong continuous hitting" In the case where “pressing effect 2” (see FIG. 243 (a)) is set in the pressing effect 2 and “long press” is determined, the “timing release effect” (see FIG. 158 (b)) is set. When it is determined that "no operation" is made, "timing press effect" is set in depression effect 2 as in the case where it is determined that "weak continuous hit" is described above, and when it is determined that "other operation" is made, it is pressed The “timing pressing effect (hard)” (see FIG. 243 (b)) in which the difficulty level of the “timing pressing effect” described above is increased in the effect 2 is set.

  In this manner, by setting the mode of the pressing effect 2 to be executed next based on the operation content of the frame button 22 for the pressing effect 1, for example, the frame button exceeds the predetermined number of times (50 times) in the pressing effect 1 By continuously performing the effect of continuously hitting the frame button 22 for the player who has pressed the button 22 (a player who is good at the continuous hitting operation), it is possible to cause the player to actively participate in the frame button operation effect.

  In addition, for the player who is executing the auto-continuous hitting function with the pressing effect 1 (the player who is continuously pressing the frame button 22), the effect is to release the button instead of the effect to press the button By executing the above, effects corresponding to the current button operation state (pressed state) can be performed, and the player can be prevented from being confused by the contents of the effects.

  Furthermore, for the player who is performing an unnecessary frame button operation for the pressing effect 1, an effect can be executed that makes it difficult for the frame button operation effect of the pressing effect 2 to be successful as a penalty.

  Then, when the pressing effect 2 is finished, the continuous hitting effect (the effect period is 7 seconds and the operation effective period is 5 seconds from the start of effect) is executed as in the combined pressing effect of the second control example described above (FIG. 159 (b ), The combined pressing effect ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 243 (a), the continuous hitting effect of the pressing effect 2 executed when the pressing effect 1 of FIG. 242 is determined to be “strong continuous hit” will be described. FIG. 243 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of an effect to be executed in the pressing effect 2 in the combined pressing effect. The same elements as those of the composite touch effect in the second control example described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 243 (a), when the continuous hitting effect is started in the pressing effect 2, the "high probability storage state" is displayed in the comment column, and it is suggested that the display mode of the meter display unit D1 changes. “May the meter be pierced?” Is displayed. In addition, “a continuous hit” indicating that the currently-executed frame button operation effect is a continuous hit effect is displayed between the meter display portion D1 and the small area Dm5.

  In the continuous hitting effect executed in this pressing effect 2, as in the pressing effect 2 of the second control example described above, the meter area of the meter display portion D1 is based on the game result of the combined pressing effect and the lottery result of the special symbol. It is set to be extended (see FIG. 159 (a)), and more specifically, when the number of pressing the frame button in the period (3 seconds) during which the pressing effect 2 is being executed exceeds 20 times. The display of the meter display part D1 changes based on the success / failure determination result of the special symbol for which the operation condition is satisfied and the combined pressing effect is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 159 (a), when the special symbol of this time is won as a big hit as a result of the success or failure judgment and the special symbol is also winning a big hit to the winning information stored on hold. The meter of part D1 is extended.

  As described above, for the player who has executed a sufficient number of consecutive hitting operations in the pressing effect 1, the consecutive hitting operation can be continuously performed also in the pressed effect 2, and furthermore, it is executed based on the continued consecutive hitting operation. Since the effect mode is different between the depression effect 1 and the depression effect 2, it is possible to cause the player to operate the desired frame button 22 with desire.

  In this control example, the effect mode is changed based on the number of times of continuous hitting operations on the frame button 22. For example, the number of times of continuous hitting (operation condition) at which the effect mode is changed It may be configured to be determined by lottery. As a result, since it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the operation condition in the current depression effect, it is possible to actively execute the frame button operation to the end.

  The timing pressing effect (disadvantage) of the pressing effect 2 executed when it is determined that “other operation” is determined in the pressing effect 1 of FIG. 242 will be described. FIG. 243 (b) is a schematic view showing an example of an effect to be executed in the pressing effect 2 in the combined pressing effect. The same elements as those of the composite touch effect in the second control example described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 243 (b), the timing depression effect (fault) is a display of the target Db3 displayed in the timing gauge with respect to the timing depression effect (see FIG. 158 (a)) of the second control example described above. The difference is that the moving object D3a is not displayed in the timing gauge.

  With this configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of success (the degree of difficulty in pressing the frame button 22 at the center timing of the target Db 3) with respect to the normal timing pressing effect. This makes it difficult for the player who does not purposely participate in the combined pressing effect to make the timing pressing effect successful (it is difficult to satisfy the operating conditions), and the effect to be displayed when the operating conditions are satisfied (special It is possible to make it difficult to execute the effect that suggests the lottery result of the symbol.

  The method for increasing the difficulty level is not limited to the above-described configuration. For example, while the timing pressing effect is being performed, the pressing timing can be obscured by moving the target Db 3 at high speed in the timing gauge. The display of the target Db3 may be temporarily erased, or the width of the timing gauge may be expanded or reduced to change the moving speed of the moving body D3a.

  Further, as a condition for setting the timing pressing effect (improper), the result of the operation determining and the pressing effect 2 are started other than when the result of the operation determination in the pressing effect 1 is determined to be "other operation". When the operation situation at the time is different, for example, in the depression effect 1, although the "long press" is set as the operation determination result, the frame button 22 is depressed when the depression effect 2 is executed. Even when it is determined that there is no timing depression effect (hard) may be set.

  Furthermore, in this control example, the timing pressing effect (hard) is configured to be executed for the game player who is determined not to intentionally participate in the combined pressing effect, but in addition to this, For example, when the operation content for the frame button 22 in the pressing effect 1 is a specific operation content (for example, the lower one digit of the number of consecutive strokes is 7), the timing pressing effect (hard) is successful. A player who announces a lottery result of a special symbol, displays a specific effect (image or moving image), or provides information that the player can store (when the operation condition is satisfied). It may be configured to give a benefit that is advantageous to the

<Electric Configuration in Sixth Control Example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the contents of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described.

  FIG. 244 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 244, a background information storage area 223da, an operation change flag 223db, an in-confirmation flag 223dc, and a pressing number counter 223dd are added to the RAM 223 in each control example described above. The other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The background information storage area 223 da is an area for storing background information (for example, “sea” stage, “mountain” stage) set by the player operating the frame button 22. In the background information storage area 223da, the frame button 22 is operated during the first frame button operation valid period, which is an operation period in which the background can be changed, in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (see FIG. 247). When background information based on the content of the operation is stored and the flag under confirmation 223dc is set to ON in the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 245), display is performed based on the stored background information. A background command is set (S2082 in FIG. 245).

  The operation change flag 223bd is a flag for determining whether the frame button 22 is operated 5 seconds before the end of the special symbol variation, and indicates that the frame button 22 is operated if it is on, and is off Indicates that the frame button 22 is not operated. The operation change flag 223bd is determined to be frame button input during the 5 seconds (effective period before the end) until the special symbol variation ends in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (see FIG. 247) ( It is set to ON (S6810 of FIG. 247: Yes) (S6811 of FIG. 247).

  Then, it is determined that the first frame button operation valid period is in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (see FIG. 247) (S6802 in FIG. 247: Yes) and the checking flag 223dc is set to off. If it is determined (S6803 in FIG. 247: Yes), it is set to off (S6805 in FIG. 247).

  The checking flag 223dc is a flag for determining whether the effect of changing the background of the next change is performed as the background change effect (see FIG. 241 (c)). If the effect is on, the background of the next change is changed It indicates that the effect to be performed is being performed, and if it is off, it indicates that the effect to change the background of the next change is not being performed. The flag 223dc during check is set to ON when it is determined that the operation change flag 223db is set to ON in the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (see FIG. 247) (S6804 in FIG. 247). In the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 245), it is referred to when setting the background command for display (S2081 in FIG. 245), and after setting the background command for display, it is set to off (S2083).

  The pressing number counter 223dd is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the pressing effect 1 of the combined pressing effect. When it is determined that the depression effect 1 is being performed (normally being depressed) in the automatic depression effect setting processing 2 (S4510), the depression frequency counter 223dd is incremented by one (S4551 in FIG. 246), and the depression number It is referred to when determining whether the number of times pressed during the production 1 has reached the predetermined number (50 times) (S4552 in FIG. 246) and it is determined that the predetermined number (50 times) has been reached (FIG. S4552 of 246: Yes), the value of the counter is initialized to 0 (S4554 in FIG. 246). Further, although not shown, the value of the counter is initialized to 0 also at the timing when the pressing effect 1 of the composite pressing effect ends.

Regarding Control Process Executed by Audio Lamp Control Device 113 in Sixth Control Example
Next, with reference to FIGS. 245 to 247, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. In this control example, in place of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 245) is executed with respect to the second control example described above. It differs in that the automatic pressing effect setting process (see FIG. 246) is executed instead of (refer to FIG. 246), and the frame button input monitoring / showing process 2 (see FIG. 247) is described in detail. . The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the variable display setting process 5 (S1712) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 5 (S1712). When the variation display setting process 5 (S1712) is executed, the processes of S2001 to S2006 are executed as in the case of the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) executed in the second control example described above. The variable display setting process is executed (S2040).

  In the process of S2040, various effects to be executed based on the acquired fluctuation pattern are set. Specifically, the processes of S2031 to S2033 are performed as in the case of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) performed in the second control example described above.

  When the process of S2040 is completed, it is next determined whether the flag 223dc under confirmation is set to ON (S2081), and it is determined that the flag is set to ON (ie, during the previous special symbol change) When the effect of changing the background in the next special symbol variation is executed (S2081: Yes), the display background command is set based on the information indicating the background stored in the background information storage area 223da ((S2081: Yes) S2082).

  Then, the flag 223dc during verification is set to OFF (S2083), and then the processing of S2007 to S2011 is executed similarly to the variation display setting processing 2 (refer to FIG. 170) executed in the second control example described above. End the process.

  By configuring in this way, based on the information (information set in the background information storage area 223da) in which the background of the next special symbol variation is set, the third time at the timing when the next special symbol variation is started The background ("sea" stage, "mountain" stage) displayed on the symbol display device 81 can be changed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 246, the auto pressing effect setting process 2 (S4410) will be described. FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing the contents of auto-press effect setting process 2 (S4410). This auto-press effect setting process 2 (S4410) is normally pressed (S4510 in FIG. 246: Yes) with respect to the auto-press effect setting process (see FIG. 173) executed in the second control example described above. Processing content is different.

  When the auto-press-effect setting process 2 (S4410) is executed, first, the processes of S4501 to S4510 are executed in the same manner as the auto-press effect setting process (see FIG. 173) performed in the second control example described above. When it is determined in the process of S4510 that it is a normal pressing period (S4510 in FIG. 246: Yes), a display pressing command based on the timing type is set (S4511), and the value of the pressing number counter 223dd is incremented by one. (S4512).

  Next, it is determined whether the counter value added in the process of S4512 exceeds 50 (S4552), and if the value of the press number counter 223dd is not larger than 50 (50 or less) (S4552 in FIG. 246: No) ), This processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the value of the press number counter 223dd exceeds 50 in the process of S4522 (S4552 in FIG. 246: Yes), then the press presentation scenario is changed to 2 for non-auto pressing (4553), The value of the counter is initialized to 0 (S4554), and this processing ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 247, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 will be described. FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (see FIG. 247). When this frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S1707) is executed, first, it is determined whether there is an input of a signal based on the operation of the frame button 22 (S6801), and it is determined that there is no input. In the case (S6801: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is an input of a signal based on the operation of the frame button 22 (S6801: Yes), next, the first frame button operation valid period in which the background can be selected is It is determined (S6802). If it is determined in the process of S6802 that the first frame button operation effective period is determined (S6802: Yes), it is determined whether the checking flag 223dc is set to ON (S6803), and is set to ON. If it is determined that there is no (set to OFF) (S6803: No), it is then determined whether the operation change flag 223db is set to ON (S6804).

  If it is determined in the process of S6804 that the operation change flag 223db is set to ON (S6804: Yes), the operation change flag 223db is set to OFF (S6805), and the checking flag 233dc is set to ON. (S6806), the processing proceeds to S6807. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6803 that the confirmation flag 233dc is set to ON (S6803: Yes), the process of S6804 to S6806 is skipped and the process proceeds to S6807.

  In the process of S6807, it is determined whether a confirmation operation has been performed. The confirmation operation is the operation of the frame button 22 while the effect of setting the background of the change next time is being executed, and it is assumed that the confirmation operation is performed in the process of S6807 (the frame button 22 is operated). If it is determined (S6807), information based on the currently set background is set in the background information storage area 223da (S6808), and this processing ends.

  Here, the process of S6808 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 241 (c). While the effect of setting the background of the next change is being performed, when the frame button 22 is pressed once, one display is switched to the small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds. The background display ("sea" or "mountain") enlarged and displayed in the small area Ds2 is a background to which the transition is made next time the fluctuation is started. That is, in the process of S6808, when the confirmation operation is executed once on the background information (the “mountain” stage in FIG. 241 (c)) currently set (due to the current change), the transition is made at the next change When background information corresponding to the "sea" stage is set in the background information storage area 223da as a background to be displayed and the confirmation operation is executed twice, the background information corresponding to the "mountain" stage is the background as the background to shift in the next change. It is set in the information storage area 223da.

  Referring back to FIG. 247, the description will be continued. When it is determined in the process of S6804 that the operation change flag is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S6804: No), for display corresponding to the background next to the background currently set. A background command is set (S6809), and this processing ends.

  The process of S6809 is in the first frame button operation effective period, and both the operation change flag 223db and the confirmation flag 223dc are set to OFF, that is, a normal background change effect (FIG. 241 (b) Reference) is a process that is executed when the operation is performed, and the background is changed based on the operation input of the frame button 22.

  If it is determined in the process of S6802 that the present time is not the first frame button operation effective period (S6802: No), it is then determined whether the present time is the pre-end period (S6810). This pre-end period is a period indicating that the remaining period until the end of the special symbol variation is a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), and it is determined that it is not the pre-end period (S6810: No If the process is ended and it is determined that it is a period before the end (S6810: Yes), the operation change flag 223db is set to ON (S6811), and the process is ended.

  As described above, in the sixth control example, a predetermined frame button operation (for example, continuous hitting operation) is performed during a predetermined period until the special symbol variation ends (for example, 5 seconds until the special symbol variation ends). A situation in which the player is dissatisfied because it is configured to change the background change operation mode to be executed at the next special symbol change to a specific background change operation mode when it is determined that the) is executed. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, a situation occurs that gives the player a dissatisfaction by changing the mode of the effect using the frame button 22 executed by the next special symbol change based on the operation contents of the frame button 22 during the special symbol change. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, the end timing of the frame button operation effect performed in the special symbol change this time and the start timing of the frame button operation effect performed corresponding to the next special symbol change are within a predetermined interval (for example, 10 seconds) It may be configured to change the mode of the frame button operation presentation performed corresponding to the next special symbol variation based on the setting in. This makes it possible to reliably prevent the problems described above from occurring.

  In addition, means is provided for determining whether the frame button 22 is operated in a state where the frame button operation effect is not set, and within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) until the next frame button operation effect is executed. When the determination means determines that a predetermined operation is being performed on the frame button 22, the mode of the next frame button operation effect may be changed. Thus, for example, when it is notified that the success or failure judgment result of the special symbol variation this time is out despite the fact that the frame button operation effect is not executed, the player regrets and the frame button 22 It is possible to suppress an unintended background change from being performed when the next special symbol variation starts in a state where the user operates (presses) a plurality of times.

  In this control example, when it is determined that "long press" is made in the press production 1 of the composite press production, the timing release production is executed in the press production 2; for example, the player It may be configured to be able to execute all of the composite pressing effects while continuously pressing the frame button 22. The effect performed in the press effect 2 in this case will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 248 is a schematic diagram showing an example of pressing effect 2 executed when it is determined that “long press” is performed at the operation determination timing of pressing effect 1 as the composite pressing effect. As shown in FIG. 248, when the player holds the frame button 22 for a long time and the operation determination point is reached in a state where the auto continuous hitting function is being executed in the pressing effect 1, “Auto timing is set by pressing the button for a long time in the comment column. Is displayed, and next to that, there is displayed a schematic diagram imitating a timing gauge and an expected degree indicating a ratio at which the timing is set.

  In this case, while the effect that the meter of the meter display unit D1 is rising is executed by executing the automatic continuous hitting function during the pressing effect 1, the operation timing of the timing pressing effect is displayed in the timing gauge displayed in the comment column. A lottery effect is executed.

  Then, auto timing is set in a period until depression effect 2 is started, and in the timing depression effect (see FIG. 158A) executed in depression effect 2, frame button 22 is operated at the set auto timing. The same effect as when being played is performed. With this configuration, the player can execute the continuous hit effect and the timing press effect only by continuously pressing the frame button 22 (long press).

  In the example described above, the degree of expectation that the auto timing is set may be set randomly or may be set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. Further, the degree of expectation may or may not be notified to the player. Furthermore, the player may be notified in advance of the timing set by the automatic timing (before the depression effect 2 is executed), or the player may not be notified of the set timing in advance. It is also good.

  For example, two timings for determining the operation content of the pressing effect 1 are provided, and when it is determined that "long press" is made at the previous determination timing, the effect shown in FIG. 248 is executed and before the later determination timing. The setting result of the auto timing may be notified to the player. By configuring in this way, when the setting content of the auto timing is bad, a normal timing pressing effect can be executed as the pressing effect 2 by changing the operation content (for example, continuous hitting operation) from there.

<Seventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 249 to 260, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described. In the seventh control example, when the pressing effect for pressing the frame button 22 is set to be executed at short intervals (10 seconds in this control example) with respect to the second control example described above, the intervals ( In this control example, the additional effect is executed for 10 seconds. Specifically, when the pressing effect (first pressing effect) ends and the next pressing effect (second pressing effect) is started after opening a short interval (for example, 10 seconds), 1 An additional effect of pressing the frame button 22 between the second pressing effect and the second pressing effect is executed. Thereby, the pressing effect or the additional effect for pressing the frame button 22 is continuously executed until the second pressing effect is ended after the first pressing effect is started.

  Here, when the first pressing effect is finished, the second pressing effect is executed by opening a short interval (for example, 5 seconds) even though the player releases the frame button 22 Because the player moves his hand to the frame button 22 again at short intervals, the operation burden on the player increases, and there is a risk that the player can not concentrate on the game. On the other hand, in the seventh control example, the pressing effect or the additional effect for pressing the frame button 22 is continuously executed from the start of the first pressing effect to the end of the second pressing effect. Therefore, the hand may be moved to the frame button 22 until the second depression effect is finished, and the above-mentioned problem can be suppressed (prevented).

  First, with reference to FIG. 249, the flow in which the additional effect in the seventh control example is set will be described. FIG. 249 is a timing chart showing a flow in which an additional effect is set. In the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, a plurality of manipulation effects are produced in the third symbol variation effect (variation effect using the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81) corresponding to one special symbol variation. (The effect of causing the player to operate the frame button 22) is configured to be settable.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 249, for the special symbol variation 1 (special symbol variation with a variation time of 90 seconds), the third symbol variation effect is the first variation pattern (0 after the special symbol variation starts) The second variation pattern (the variation pattern corresponding to the period from 31 seconds to 60 seconds after the start of the special symbol variation), and the third variation pattern (the special symbol variation) It is comprised so that it may be divided into (a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a period of 61 seconds-90 seconds after it starts), and the 3rd design variation production is set.

  Here, in recent years, it is required to increase the types of effect patterns of the third symbol fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in order to prevent the player from getting bored early in the game. It was Therefore, as in the present control example, the present applicant divides the period in which the third symbol variation production is performed into a plurality of periods, and combines a variation pattern set for each period to create a series of effect patterns. I thought about processing.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to create the same kind of effect pattern with a smaller amount of data than when storing a series of effect patterns. Therefore, a greater number of effect patterns are created using the same amount of data when storing a series of effect patterns, or the amount of data used for the third symbol variation effect is reduced, and other effects (for example, a character It is possible to increase the amount of data used for moving effects, bonus effects etc. displayed during a big hit, etc., and it becomes possible to set various effects within the limited data capacity, and the player can There was an effect that it was possible to suppress getting bored early in the game.

  However, in the case of creating a series of effect patterns by combining a plurality of change patterns, for example, in each of the continuous change patterns, an operation effect in which an effect is executed based on an operation of the frame button 22 is set was there. Furthermore, of the continuous fluctuation patterns, the operation effect is performed on the second half of the fluctuation patterns to be executed first. When the operation effect is executed on the first half of the fluctuation pattern to be executed next, the effect pattern in which the plurality of fluctuation patterns are executed at short intervals (for example, 3 seconds) is created.

  Furthermore, by setting a long period of operation effects to be executed with at least one of the plurality of fluctuation patterns, the period in which the player is allowed to actively play the game is continued, and the player plays the game It is conceivable to suppress getting bored early, but when such a configuration is used, it is easy to create a rendering pattern in which a plurality of manipulation effects are executed at short intervals (for example, 3 seconds). Met.

  As described above, this control example solves the problem that occurs when processing capable of creating a plurality of effect patterns with a small amount of data is performed.

  In the first variation pattern, an operation effect (“variation B”) with an operation valid period of 10 seconds for effectively discriminating the operation of the frame button 22 is performed. In the second variation pattern, an operation effect term with an operation valid period of 25 seconds (“SP2”) However, in the third variation pattern, an operation effect (“SSP2”) having an operation effective period of 10 seconds can be set.

  Specifically, "fluctuation B" which can be set as the first fluctuation pattern has an operation effective period (10 seconds) 17 seconds after the first fluctuation pattern is started (after the special symbol fluctuation is started). It is set and ends 3 seconds after the operation effective period has elapsed. In the third symbol display device 81, after the reach condition where the third symbol fluctuates at high speed in the first 17 seconds and the left and right third symbols stop with the same number, an operation effect (regarding the degree of expectation of the jackpot) An operation effective period of 10 seconds is executed, and an effect of notifying the player of the result of the operation effect in the remaining 3 seconds is performed.

  "SP2" that can be set as the second variation pattern is the next operation effect to be executed for 3 seconds after the end of the first variation pattern (after 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the special symbol variation) The display for explaining the contents of the effect of the operation effective period of 23 seconds is executed, and thereafter, the operation effective period (23 seconds) is set, and the operation effective period ends, and ends after 4 seconds. In this "SP2", the operation effective period is set to be as long as 23 seconds, but by operating the frame button 22 during this period, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is variable (change of color, Change of comment etc.), the light emission mode of the light emitting part (LED etc.) provided to the pachinko machine 10 is variable (change of color, change of brightness, change of presence / absence of lighting) or drive provided to the pachinko machine 10 The drive mode of the device (see FIG. 7) is configured to be variable (change in presence / absence of drive, change in drive speed, change in drive range). Therefore, the player changes the various modes (display mode, light emission mode, drive mode) while operating the frame button 22 for a long period of time (23 seconds in this control example).

  "SSP2" that can be set as the third variation pattern is the next operation effect to be performed for 4 seconds after the end of the second variation pattern (after 60 seconds have elapsed from the start of the special symbol variation) ( Display to explain the contents of the effect of the operation effective period 10 seconds) is executed, then, the operation effective period (10 seconds) is set, 16 seconds after the operation effective period elapses, that is, after the special symbol variation is started Exit after 90 seconds. In this "SSP2", an effect of continuously hitting the frame button 22 during the operation effective period is executed. In addition, the effect for notifying the player of the determination result (lottery result) of the special symbol is a period in which the operation effective period is not set (from the 15th lapse of the third variation pattern to the end) Period) is used.

  Then, when "variation B" is set in the first variation pattern and "SP2" is set in the second variation pattern, the operation valid period set in "variation B" and "SP2" are set. The interval between the operation valid periods is 6 seconds. The six-second interval is the interval at which the additional effect can be performed. Further, when "SP2" is set in the second variation pattern and "SSP2" is set in the third variation pattern, the operation valid period set in "SP2" and "SSP2" are set. The interval between the operation effective period is 8 seconds. The 8-second interval is the interval at which the additional effect can be performed.

  Then, the remaining period until the operation valid period (25 seconds) in which the operation timing of the frame button 22 in "variation B" is set to "SP2" is a predetermined period (within 10 seconds in this control example) In the case of the operation timing, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the remaining period of the operation effective period (10 seconds) set to "variation B" becomes 4 seconds or less, the additional effect is executed. It will be. In addition, the operation in which the remaining period until the operation valid period (10 seconds) in which the operation timing of the frame button 22 in "SP2" is set to "SSP2" (10 seconds) is a predetermined period (within 10 seconds in this control example) In the case of the timing, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the remaining period of the operation effective period (25 seconds) set to “SP2” is within 2 seconds, the additional effect is executed. Become.

  As described above, when a plurality of operation effects for which the operation valid period is set are executed, an additional effect is performed based on the operation content of the operation effects to be executed before (whether or not the frame button 22 is operated). By using the configuration to determine whether to execute, problems when multiple operation effects for which the operation valid period is set are performed (that is, the action of operating the frame button 22 and the action of not operating the operation are repeated in a short period of time) As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the player's operation burden increases and it becomes impossible to concentrate on the game.

  As described above, in the present control example, when a plurality of operation effects for which the operation valid period is set are executed, the operation content of the operation effects to be executed before (whether the frame button 22 has been operated or not Whether or not the additional effect is to be executed is determined based on the above, but the invention is not limited thereto. For example, a plurality of operation effects for which the operation valid period is set are set at predetermined intervals (for example, 5 seconds) In this case, the additional effect may be performed at the predetermined interval (5 seconds) without determining the operation content.

  Next, display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an additional effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 250 and 251. FIG. FIG. 250 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of the operation effect when “SP2” is set as the second variation pattern, and FIG. 250 (b) is between “SP2” and “SSP2”. FIG. 250 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a normal display in which “additional effect” is not performed in a period in which “additional effect” to be set can be performed, and FIG. 250 (c) is a case where “SSP2” is set It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the operation production in.

  As shown in FIG. 250 (a), an effective period notifying unit S1 (figure imitating a frame button) for notifying the third symbol display device 81 that it is an operation effective period of the frame button 22 in "SP2"; A period display unit M1 indicating the operation valid period in "SP2" is displayed, and the period display unit M1 displays the remaining period (a in the figure) of the operation valid period. Then, in the comment column, the characters “press the button” prompting the player to operate the frame button 22 are displayed.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 during "SP2", the characters of "chance" are displayed in the comment field as the operation result as shown in FIG. 250 (b). It is to be noted that since the timing shown in FIG. 250 (b) is a timing at which the operation valid period is not set (that is, the operation invalid period is set), the valid period notifying unit S1 and the period display unit M1 display I will not.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 250 (c), “SSP2” is started, and an effective period informing part S1 (figure imitating a frame button for notifying the third symbol display device 81 that it is an operation effective period of the frame button 22) And a period display unit M2 indicating the operation valid period in "SSP2", and the period display unit M2 displays the remaining period (a in the figure) of the operation valid period. In addition, the characters "Continuous stroke" indicating the content of the operation in "SSP2" and the characters "Let's set the meter to MAX" indicating the content of the effect are displayed.

  As described above, as shown in FIGS. 250 (a) to 250 (c), when multiple operation effects are executed, the operation valid period of the frame button 22 in the period (period in which FIG. 250 (b) is displayed) Since the display of the effective period notification unit S1 for notifying that it is not, the display of the period display unit M2 indicating the operation effective period, or the display for prompting the player to operate the frame button 22 is not performed, the player The operation of the frame button 22 will be stopped. Then, when the operation effect is executed again, the display shown in FIG. 250 (c) is made. If such a display (effect) is executed in a short period of time, the operation on the frame button 22 performed by the player becomes complicated, and there is a possibility that the game intention may be lowered. On the other hand, in the present control example, when a plurality of operation effects are executed, the above-described problem occurs by executing the additional effects during the period (period in which FIG. 250 (b) is displayed). Suppressing the Next, with reference to FIG. 251, contents of display (effect) of the additional effect will be described.

  FIG. 251 (a) is a schematic view showing an example displayed as an additional effect in this control example, and FIG. 251 (b) is a schematic view showing another example displayed as an additional effect in this control example. FIG. 251 (c) is a schematic view showing still another example displayed as an additional effect in the present control example.

  In the example shown in FIG. 251 (a), an addition valid period notification unit Sa notifying of the operation valid period set by the additional effect with respect to the display content shown in FIG. 250 (b) and addition indicating the addition operation valid period A difference is that the period display unit Ma is displayed, and the additional period display unit Ma displays the remaining period (b in the figure) of the operation valid period. By executing the additional effect in this manner, after the operation effective period of “SP2” is set (see FIG. 250 (a)), the operation effective period of “SSP2” is set (see FIG. 250 (c)). Since it is possible to notify the player that the operation effective period is continuously for the period up to), the operation on the frame button 22 performed by the player becomes complicated, and the will to play the game decreases. Can be suppressed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 251 (a), the display mode (display mode and display position) of the additional effective period informing unit Sa for informing the operation effective period is the same as the display manner of the effective period informing unit S1 or S2. There is no sense of discomfort with respect to the additional effect being performed. Furthermore, the player operates the frame button 22 as an additional effect, so that an additional comment is displayed for the comment displayed by the operation effect of “SP2”, so the third symbol display device 81 The player does not feel uncomfortable with the displayed effect (operation effect).

  In the example shown in FIG. 251 (a), only the addition period display unit Ma is displayed, but another configuration may be used. Next, another example showing the operation valid period will be described with reference to FIGS. 251 (b) and 251 (c).

  FIG. 251 (b) shows the display content when the additional effect is set so that the display content of "SP2" shown in FIG. 250 (a) is displayed continuously (extended). As shown in FIG. 251 (b), on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a period display section M1 indicating an operation effective period of "SP2" is displayed in a state where there is no remaining period. The additional period display section Ma is displayed on the left side of FIG. As a result, the remaining period a decreases in “SP2” (moving to the left side of the period display section M1), and when the remaining period disappears (when the operation effective period ends), that is, the additional effect is When it is started, the additional period display section Ma can be displayed, and it is possible to make the player recognize that the operation effect performed by the additional effect is extended the operation effect of “SP2”. .

  In addition, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is also added because the effect of the character of "chance" displayed during the operation effect of "SP2" being rewritten (updated) is performed. It is possible to recognize that the operation effect of “SP2” is extended as the operation effect performed by the effect.

  FIG. 251 (c) shows the display content when the additional effect is set so that the display content of "SSP2" shown in FIG. 250 (c) is advanced. As shown in FIG. 251 (c), on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a period display M2 indicating an operation effective period of "SSP2" is displayed, and it is shown in the horizontal view (FIG. 251 (b) An additional period display section Ma is displayed on the right side. As a result, when the remaining period b decreases in the additional effect (moves to the left side of the period display section Ma) and the remaining period disappears (when the operation effective period ends), that is, “SSP2” When the operation effective period starts, the remaining period of the period display unit M2 can be displayed to decrease, and the operation effect to be executed by the additional effect for the player is the operation of “SSP 2” It becomes possible to recognize that the presentation has been executed in advance.

  In addition, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is also an effect that changes the display mode of the meter that is increased by the operation effect of "SSP2" (for example, the color of the meter changes or the effect around the meter Because the effect that suggests that the meter becomes MAX in the operation effect of “SSP2” is executed by changing the variable, etc., the operation effect with the additional effect and the operation effect of “SSP2” being more relevant Can be recognized as

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Seventh Control Example
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 252 to 254. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example, the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a in the ROM 222 in the audio lamp control device 113 are changed from the second control example described above, and the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113. The difference is that the contents of the above are changed and the contents of the work RAM 233 in the display control device 114 are changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 252, the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a in the ROM 222 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 252 is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a in the present control example.

  FIG. 252A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a. As shown in FIG. 252 (a), the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a defines various fluctuation pattern selection tables for selecting a detailed fluctuation pattern according to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected in main controller 110. It is done. Specifically, a first variation for selecting a presentation mode (first variation pattern) of a period of 30 seconds after the variation is started (that is, a period from 0 seconds to 30 seconds after the variation starts) Pattern selection table 222a1, second variation pattern selection table 222a2 for selecting a presentation mode (second variation pattern) in a period from 31 seconds to 60 seconds after the start of variation, 61 seconds to 90 seconds after the start of variation A third variation pattern selection table 222a3 for selecting an effect mode (third change pattern) of a period up to the passage and an additional effect selection table 222a4 for determining an effect mode of an additional effect are provided.

  In this control example, according to the variation pattern (variation time) selected in main controller 110, the first to third variation patterns and additional effects are selected from variation pattern selection table 222a, and they are combined into a variation pattern. Perform one variation presentation based on it. For example, when a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected in main controller 110, the first fluctuation pattern is selected from first fluctuation pattern selection table 222a1, and one fluctuation is selected based on the selected fluctuation pattern. Perform the production. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is selected in main controller 110, the first fluctuation pattern is selected from first fluctuation pattern selection table 222a1, and the second fluctuation is selected from second fluctuation pattern selection table 222a2. The pattern is selected, the third variation pattern is selected from the third variation pattern selection table 222a3, the additional effect is selected from the additional effect selection table 222a4, and one is selected based on the selected first to third change patterns and the additional effect. Perform the change production of.

  Although illustration is omitted, when a fluctuation time other than the fluctuation time (30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds) described above is selected in main controller 110, a detailed fluctuation pattern according to the fluctuation time is selected. It will be selected. For example, when a short deviation (a fluctuation time of 7 seconds) is selected in the main control device 110, a fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a in which a fluctuation pattern of 7 seconds is defined.

  First, with reference to FIG. 252 (b), the first variation pattern selection table 222a1 for selecting a first variation pattern (a presentation aspect of a period from 0 seconds to 30 seconds from the start of variation) will be described. FIG. 252B is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the first variation pattern selection table 222a1.

  As shown in FIG. 252 (b), in the first variation pattern selection table 222a1, the first variation pattern (representation aspect of the period from 0 seconds to 30 seconds from the variation start) corresponds to the value of the first effect counter 223f1 Are defined.

  Specifically, fluctuation A, which is an effect aspect in which the depression effect of pushing the frame button 22 is not performed, is defined with respect to the value “0 to 99” of the first effect counter 223 f 1. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, multiple types of production | presentation aspect of the fluctuation | variation A are prescribed | regulated, and the fluctuation | variation A is performed by the production | presentation aspect of any of that. As a result, since the variation of the effect mode of the variation A can be increased, the player's interest can be improved.

  The variation B, which is an effect mode in which the pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 is executed, is defined with respect to the value “100 to 198” of the first effect counter 223 f 1. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, two or more types of presentation modes of the fluctuation | variation B are prescribed | regulated similarly to the fluctuation | variation A, and the fluctuation | variation B is performed by the presentation aspect in any of that. As a result, since the variation of the effect mode of the variation B can be increased, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 252C, the second variation pattern selection table 222a2 for selecting the second variation pattern (the presentation aspect of the period from 31 seconds to 60 seconds from the start of variation) will be described. FIG. 252C is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the second variation pattern selection table 222a2.

  As shown in FIG. 252 (c), in the second variation pattern selection table 222a2, the rendering modes from 31 seconds to 60 seconds after the variation start are defined corresponding to the value of the second rendering counter 223f2 There is.

  Concretely, fluctuation SP1 which is a production | generation aspect by which the pressing production which presses frame button 22 is not performed is prescribed | regulated with respect to the value "0-99" of 2nd presentation counter 223f2. As in the case of the fluctuation A, a plurality of types of effect modes are defined in the fluctuation SP1 as well, and effects are executed in any of the effect modes. As a result, since the variation of the effect mode of the variation SP1 can be increased, the player's interest can be improved.

  A fluctuation SP2 which is an effect aspect in which a pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 is executed is defined with respect to the value “100 to 198” of the second effect counter 223f2. Similar to the change B, a plurality of types of effect modes are defined in the change SP2, and effects are executed in any of the effect modes. As a result, since the variation of the effect mode of the variation SP2 can be increased, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 252 (d), the third variation pattern selection table 222a3 for selecting the third variation pattern (the presentation aspect of the period from 61 seconds to 90 seconds from the start of variation) will be described. FIG. 252D is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the third variation pattern selection table 222a3.

  As shown in FIG. 252 (d), in the third variation pattern selection table 222a3, the rendering modes from 61 seconds to 90 seconds after the variation start are defined corresponding to the value of the third rendering counter 223f3. There is.

  Specifically, a fluctuation SSP1 which is an effect aspect in which the depression effect of pushing the frame button 22 is not performed is defined with respect to the value “0 to 99” of the third effect counter 223f3. Similar to the fluctuation A, a plurality of types of effect modes are defined in the fluctuation SSP1, and effects are executed in any of the effect modes. As a result, since the variation of the effect mode of the variation SSP1 can be increased, the player's interest can be improved.

  For the value “100 to 198” of the third effect counter 223 f 3, a change SSP 2 which is an effect aspect in which a pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 is executed is defined. Similar to the change B, a plurality of types of effect modes are defined in the change SSP2, and effects are executed in any of the effect modes. Thereby, since the variation of the presentation mode of the variation SSP2 can be increased, the player's interest can be improved.

  Although the details will be described later, the first effect counter 223f1, the second effect counter 223f2, and the third effect counter 223f3 are counters that are updated independently. By these independent counters, each fluctuation period (a first fluctuation pattern which is a period of 0 to 30 seconds, a second fluctuation pattern which is a period of 31 seconds to 60 seconds, a period of 61 seconds to 90 seconds as a detailed fluctuation pattern Since the effect mode in the third variation pattern (A) is selected, variations of the effect mode can be increased, and the player's interest can be improved.

  Here, a frame is shown in each fluctuation period (a first fluctuation pattern which is a period of 0 to 30 seconds, a second fluctuation pattern which is a period of 31 seconds to 60 seconds, a third fluctuation pattern which is a period of 61 seconds to 90 seconds) When the pressing effect for pressing the button 22 is continuously executed, for example, the pressing effect to be executed first is executed when the pressing effect is executed in a period of 0 to 30 seconds and a period of 31 seconds to 60 seconds. When the pressing of the frame button 22 in (the pressing effect performed in the period of 0 to 30 seconds) is slow, a short interval is opened after pressing the frame button 22 and the pressing effect (period of 31 seconds to 60 seconds) The pressing effect to be executed is to be executed. In this case, although the frame button 22 is pressed in the first pressing effect and the hand is released from the frame button 22, the second pressing effect is executed by opening a short interval (for example, 5 seconds). Then, the player moves his hand to the frame button 22 again at a short interval, which increases the operation burden on the player and may cause the player not to concentrate on the game.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, when the pressing effect is continuously executed in one variation effect, and the pressing of the frame button 22 in the first pressing effect is slow, the end of the first pressing effect In the period until the start of the next (second time) pressing effect, the additional effect of pressing the frame button 22 is selected and executed. Thus, the pressing effect or the additional effect of pressing the frame button 22 is continuously executed until the second pressing effect is ended after the first pressing effect is started, so the second pressing effect is The hand may be moved to the frame button 22 until it is finished, and the above-mentioned problem can be suppressed (prevented).

  Here, the contents of the additional effect selection table 222a4 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 253 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the additional effect selection table 222a4.

  The additional effect selection table 222a4 is for selecting the additional effect to be performed when the pressing of the frame button 22 in the first pressing effect is slow when the pressing effect is continuously executed in the above-described one variation effect. Table.

  As shown in FIG. 253, when the fluctuation patterns (first to third fluctuation patterns) of each fluctuation period in one fluctuation effect become a specific combination (when the depression effect is continuous), an additional effect is defined, In the period from the end of the pressing effect executed first to the start of the pressing effect executed next, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is delayed in the pressing effect executed first among the continuous pressing effects, The prescribed additional effects are performed.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern (the first to third fluctuation patterns) of each fluctuation period in one fluctuation effect does not become a specific combination (when the depression effect is not continuous), the additional effect is not defined, and the addition effect is added The presentation is never performed.

  Specifically, first, the case where the first variation pattern is “variation A (without pressing effect)” will be described.

  If the first variation pattern is "variation A (no pressing effect)" and the second variation pattern is "variation SP1 (no pressing effect)", the third variation pattern is "none" (ie, 60). Fluctuation effects end in seconds), and “pressing effects” are continuously executed in one fluctuation effect, regardless of “varying SSP1 (without pressing effect)” or “varying SSP2 (with pressing effect)” Since there is no additional effect, no additional effect is defined.

  When the first variation pattern is "variation A (without pressing effect)" and the second variation pattern is "variation SP2 (with pressing effect)", the third variation pattern is "none", "variation SSP1. If “(no pressing effect)”, the pressing effect is not continuously executed in the variation effect of 1, and the additional effect is not defined. On the other hand, if the third variation pattern is "variation SSP2 (with pressing effect)", the pressing effect is continuously executed in the second variation pattern and the third variation pattern, so the additional effect 2 is It is prescribed.

  When the additional effect 2 is defined, the additional effect 2 is executed when the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed is late in the pressed effect performed in the second variation pattern. The additional effect 2 is an effect in which a comment is displayed by pressing the frame button 22. Therefore, the player continues the process of the frame button 22 until the pressing effect in the third variation pattern is executed. The operation can be performed.

  Next, the case where the first variation pattern is "variation B (with pressing effect)" will be described.

  When the first variation pattern is "variation B (with pressing effect)" and the second variation pattern is "variation SP1 (without pressing effect)", the third variation pattern is "none" (ie, 60). Fluctuation effects end in seconds), and “pressing effects” are continuously executed in one fluctuation effect, regardless of “varying SSP1 (without pressing effect)” or “varying SSP2 (with pressing effect)” Since there is no additional effect, no additional effect is defined.

  When the first variation pattern is "variation B (with pressing effect)" and the second variation pattern is "variation SP2 (with pressing effect)", the third variation pattern is "none", "variation SSP1. In either the (no pressing effect) or the "variation SSP2 (with pressing effect)", since the pressing effect is continuously executed in the first fluctuation pattern and the second fluctuation pattern, An additional effect 1 is defined.

  Furthermore, if the third variation pattern is "variation SSP2 (with pressing effect)", the pressing effect is continuously executed in the second variation pattern and the third variation pattern, so in this case In addition to the additional effect 1, an additional effect 2 is defined.

  When the additional effect 1 is defined, the additional effect 1 is executed when the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed is late in the pressed effect performed in the first variation pattern. The additional effect 1 is an effect in which a comment is displayed by pressing the frame button 22. Therefore, the player continues the process of the frame button 22 until the pressing effect in the second variation pattern is executed. The operation can be performed.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 222 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 254 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 222 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example. The RAM 222 in this control example is different from the above-described second control example in that the contents of the effect counter 223f are changed and an effective period storage area 223ea is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The effect counter 223f is used to select the first fluctuation counter 223f1 used to select the first fluctuation pattern described above, the second fluctuation counter 223f2 used to select the second fluctuation pattern, and the third fluctuation pattern. Hanging third change counters 223f3 are respectively provided (see FIG. 254 (b)).

  The effective period storage area 223ea is an area for determining whether or not it is a period in which the effect is executed based on the depression of the frame button 22 (that is, a period in which the depression of the frame button 22 is effective). The period in which the pressing of the button 22 is effective is set by the value of the elapsed time (ms) after the start of the fluctuation effect. In the effective period storage area 223ea, when the variation pattern command for executing the depression effect is set in the fluctuation display setting process 6 (see FIG. 256) (S2031 in FIG. 256: Yes), the depression effect is executed. A period in which the operation of the corresponding frame button 22 is valid is set. Also, in the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 (see FIG. 257), when the additional effect is set (S6854 in FIG. 257: Yes), a period in which the operation of the frame button 22 according to the additional effect is effective. Is set (S6855 in FIG. 257). And although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, when the one fluctuation production is complete | finished, the content of effective period storage area 223ea is cleared.

  Next, the contents of the work RAM 233 in the display control device 114 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 255 is a block diagram schematically showing an electrical configuration in the display control device 114 in this control example. The display control device 114 in the present control example is different from the above-described second control example in that the contents of the work RAM 233 are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The work RAM 233 in the present control example is different from the work RAM 233 in the second control example described above in that an additional effect data storage area 233n, an additional effect 1 flag 233p1 and an additional effect 2 flag 233p2 are added.

  The additional effect data storage area 233 n is an area for storing effect data for executing (displaying) the additional effect 1 or the additional effect 2. In the additional effect data storage area 233n, when it is determined that the additional variation data is included in the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command processing 2 (see FIG. 259 (a)) (S2751: Yes), Corresponding additional effect data is stored. Then, in the pointer update process 2 (see FIG. 260), when the execution of the additional effect is determined at the update timing of each additional effect (the additional effect flag is on), the additional effect data storage area 233n is stored. The effect data in question is overwritten (updated) on the display data table buffer 233 d. Thus, the additional effect is to be executed.

  The additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is a flag for determining whether or not the execution of the additional effect 1 has been determined. When the additional effect 1 flag is on, it is determined that the execution of the additional effect 1 is determined, so it is off In some cases, it is determined that the execution of the additional effect 1 is not determined. The additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is set to ON when the additional effect command indicating the additional effect 1 is received in the additional effect command processing (see FIG. 259 (b)) (S6903). Then, if it is determined in the pointer update process 2 (see FIG. 260) that it is the update timing of the additional effect 1 (S3851: Yes), it is referred (S3852) and the value of the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is on. If it is determined (S3852: Yes), the effect data of the additional effect 1 stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n is overwritten (updated) on the display data table buffer 233d.

  The additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is a flag for determining whether or not the execution of the additional effect 2 is determined, and when it is on, it is determined that the execution of the additional effect 2 is determined, and it is off In some cases, it is determined that the execution of the additional effect 2 is not determined. The additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is set to ON when the additional effect command indicating the additional effect 2 is received in the additional effect command processing (see FIG. 259 (b)) (S6902). When it is determined in the pointer update process 2 (see FIG. 260) that it is the update timing of the additional effect 2 (S3855: Yes), it is referred (S3856) and the value of the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is on. If it is determined (S3856: Yes), the effect data of the additional effect 2 stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n is overwritten (updated) on the display data table buffer 233d.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Controller in Seventh Control Example>
Next, various control processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 256 and 257. In this control example, in place of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), the variable display setting process 6 (see FIG. 256) is executed with respect to the second control example described above, and frame button input monitoring The process is different from the effect process (see S1707 in FIG. 137) and the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (see FIG. 257) is performed, and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the details of the variable display setting process 6 (S1712) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the fluctuation display setting process 6 (S 1712) in the present control example, when the fluctuation pattern in which the depression effect is executed is set in addition to the fluctuation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the second control example described above (S2031 : Yes), the period in which the operation of the frame button 22 corresponding to the pressing effect to be executed is effective is set in the effective period storage area 223ea.

  In the seventh control example, the pressing effect, the slot effect, and the point effect in the second control example are not executed, and the processing corresponding to those effects is not executed. However, the pressing effect in the second control example The slot effect and the point effect may be executable, and processing corresponding to those effects may be executed. This makes it possible to execute a wide variety of effects, thereby improving the player's interest.

  In the variable display setting process 6 (S1712), first, the processes of S2001 to S2003 are executed similarly to the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the second control example. Then, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (that is, the fluctuation pattern received from main controller 110) acquired in the process of S2003 is displayed as fluctuation pattern selection table 222a (first fluctuation pattern selection table 222a1 to third fluctuation pattern selection table The selection is made based on the effect counter 222a3) and the effect counter 223f (the first effect counter 223f1 to the third effect counter 223f3) (S2091), and the display variation pattern command is set (S2006).

  After the process of S2006, the process proceeds to the process of S2031. In the process of S2031, when it is determined that the display variation pattern command set in the process of S2006 is to execute the pressing effect (S2031: Yes), for each variation pattern selected in the process of S2091. The operation effective period of the corresponding frame button 22 is set in the effective period storage area 223ea (S2092), and the process proceeds to S2007.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2031 that the display variation pattern command set in the process of S2006 is not one to execute the pressing effect (S2031: No), the process of S2092 is skipped and the process of S2007 is performed. Transfer to processing.

  When the process of S2031 or S2092 is completed, the processes of S2007 to S2011 are performed as in the second control example, and the process ends.

  Next, the details of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 (S1707) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S1707), a frame button pressing command is set based on the detection of pressing of the frame button 22 during the operation valid period of the frame button 22. In addition, when depression of the frame button 22 is detected in the operation effective period of depression effect, the period until the next depression effect is started is determined, and the period until the next depression effect is started is short. When it is determined (in the present control example, 10 seconds or less), the additional effect command is set to execute the additional effect.

  Specifically, in the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 (S1707), first, based on the information stored in the valid period storage area 223ea, the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is currently valid (frame button operation valid It is determined whether or not it is a period) (S6851). If it is determined in the process of S6851 that the frame button operation valid period is not reached (S6851: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6851 that the frame button operation valid period is reached (S6851: Yes), it is then determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S6801).

  If it is determined in the process of S6801 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S6801: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6801 that the frame button 22 is pressed (S6801: Yes), a display frame button pressing command corresponding to the current period is set (S6852), and the process proceeds to S6853. Transition. The display frame button pressing command set in the process of S6852 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process of the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) executed by the MPU 221 (S1702) Are sent to the display control device 114. When receiving the display frame button press command, the display control device 114 determines a period in which the command is set (for example, a period of depression effect in the second variation pattern) from the received command, and effects according to the period (( For example, a comment display effect (see FIG. 250 (b)) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S6852 is completed, it is determined whether the current period is a period in which the pressing effect is being executed (S6853). When it is determined in the process of S6853 that the current period is not a period in which the pressing effect is being executed (S6853: No), the present process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6853 that the current period is a period in which the pressing effect is being executed (S6853: Yes), in order to determine whether or not the additional effect is to be executed, Transfer to processing.

  In the process of S6854, it is determined whether or not the remaining period until the next pressing effect is started is 10 seconds or less. When it is determined in the process of S6854 that the remaining period until the next pressing effect is started is 10 seconds or less (S6854: Yes), in order to execute the additional effect, the additional effect command for display is displayed. The setting is made (S6855), the effective period storage area 223ea is updated based on the depression period of the frame button 22 corresponding to the set additional effect (S6856), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6854 that the remaining period until the next pressing effect is started is longer than 10 seconds (S6854: No), the processes of S6855 and S6856 are skipped and the main process is performed. Finish.

Regarding Control Processing Executed by Display Control Device in Seventh Control Example
Next, control processing executed by the display control apparatus 114 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In this control example, in place of command determination processing 2 (see FIG. 180), command determination processing 4 (FIG. 258) is executed with respect to the second control example described above, and variation pattern command processing (FIG. 146). (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) It differs in that pointer update processing 2 (see FIG. 260) is executed instead of (see FIG. 153), and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the details of the command determination process 4 (S2502) executed in the present control example will be described with reference to FIG. In command determination process 4 (S2502) in the present control example, variation pattern command is substituted for variation pattern command process (see FIG. 146 (a)) as compared to command determination process 2 (see FIG. 180) in the second control example described above. The difference is that the process 2 (see FIG. 259 (a)) is performed and the point that an additional effect command process (see FIG. 259 (b)) is added, and the other points are the same.

  In command determination processing 4 (S2502), first, the processing of S2601 to S2604 is executed as in the second control example. If it is determined in the process of S2604 that there is a display variation pattern command (S2605: Yes), variation pattern command processing 2 is executed (S2605), and the process proceeds to S2601.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing 2 (S2605) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 259 (a). In fluctuation pattern command processing 2 (S2605) in the present control example, when there is additional effect data, the additional effect data is added to the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 146 (a)) in the second control example described above. The difference is that the data storage area 233 n is changed to be stored, and the other points are the same.

  In the variation pattern command process 2 (S2605), first, it is determined whether or not there is additional effect data in the received variation pattern command (S2751). When additional effect data is set as a fluctuation pattern command, as described above with reference to FIG. 253, when pressing effects are set (selected) continuously in the first to third fluctuation patterns. It is.

  If it is determined in the process of S275 that there is additional effect data in the received variation pattern command (S2751: Yes), additional effect data corresponding to the command (effect data corresponding to additional effect 1 or additional effect 2) , And stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n (S2572), the process proceeds to the processing of S2701.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S275 that there is no additional effect data in the received fluctuation pattern command (S2751: No), the process of S2752 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S2701.

  After shifting to the process of S2701, the processes of S2701 to S2706 are executed as in the second control example described above, and the process ends.

  As described above, when the variation pattern command having the possibility of executing the additional effect is received, the effect data necessary for the execution (display) of the additional effect is stored in the additional effect data storage area 233 n in advance. When performing (displaying) additional effects, you can execute (displaying) additional effects without delay. In addition, it is not restricted to this, You may make it store presentation data required for execution (display) of an additional presentation in the additional presentation data storage area 233n, only when performing an additional presentation. As a result, when the additional effect is not executed, it is not necessary to store the effect data in the additional effect data storage area 233n, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 258, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2604 that the display variation pattern command has not been received (S2604: No), then the processes of S2606 to S2613 are executed as in the second control example.

  If it is determined in the process of S2612 that an error command has not been received (S2612: No), it is then determined whether an additional effect command has been received (S2639). If it is determined in the process of S2639 that the additional effect command has been received (S2639: Yes), the additional effect command process is executed (S2640), and the process returns to the process of S2601.

  Here, the details of the additional effect command process (S2640) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 259 (b). This additional effect command process (S2640) is a process that is executed when an additional effect command indicating execution of an additional effect is received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the additional effect command process (S2640), first, it is determined whether or not the received additional effect command is a command indicating the execution of additional effect 1 (S6901).

  When it is determined in the process of S6901 that the received additional effect command is a command indicating the execution of additional effect 1 (S6901: Yes), the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is set to ON (S6903), and this process is performed. Finish. As described above, the additional effect 1 is an additional effect to be executed between the pressing effect of the first variation pattern and the pressing effect of the second variation pattern.

  By setting the additional effect 1 flag 233 p 1 to ON by the process of S 6903, the additional effect 1 is executed at the execution start timing of the additional effect 1 (0.1 seconds before the end timing of the pressing effect in the first variation pattern) The display data table buffer is updated to be (displayed).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the received additional effect command is a command indicating the execution of additional effect 2 (S6901: No), the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is set to ON (S6902), and this processing is ended. . The additional effect 2 is, as described above, an additional effect executed between the pressing effect of the second variation pattern and the pressing effect of the third variation pattern.

  By setting the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 to ON by the process of S6902, the additional effect 2 is executed at the update timing of the additional effect 2 (0.1 second before the end timing of the depression effect in the second variation pattern) ( The display data table buffer is updated to be displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 258, the description will be continued. In the process of S2639, when it is determined that the additional effect command is not received (S2639: No), the process of other commands is executed (S2614), and the process returns to the process of S2601.

  Next, the details of the pointer update process 2 (S3605) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the pointer update process 2 (S3605), with respect to the pointer update process (see FIG. 153) in the second control example described above, the execution (display) start timing of the additional effect is determined, and the update timing of the additional effect (in each variation pattern The difference is that the additional effect is executed (displayed) one second before the end timing of the pressing effect, and the other points are the same.

  In pointer update processing 2 (S3605), first, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 (S3801). Then, based on the value of the pointer 233f added in the process of S3801, it is determined whether it is the update timing of the additional effect 1 (0.1 second before the end timing of the depression effect in the first variation pattern) (S3851 ).

  If it is determined in the process of S3851 that it is the update timing of the additional effect 1 (S3851: Yes), it is determined whether the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is on (S3852). If it is determined in the process of S3852 that the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is off (S3852: No), it is not the case to execute the additional effect 1 (the frame button 22 was pressed earlier or not pressed) Or, since the pressing effect is not executed in the second variation pattern), the present processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3852 that the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is on (S3852: Yes), the additional effect 1 is to be executed (from the pressing of the frame button 22 to the next pressing effect) Since the start is within 10 seconds), the additional effect 1 data stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n is overwritten on the display data table buffer 233d (S3853), and the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is set to OFF. Then (S3854), the process ends.

  In the process of S3853, the additional effect 1 data is overwritten starting from the area in the display data table buffer 233d in which the display data to be executed after one second is stored. As a result, it is possible to execute (display) the additional effect 1 from the time when one second has passed from the update timing of the additional effect 1 (one second before the end timing of the pressing effect in the first variation pattern). The update timing is not limited to one second before the end timing of the pressing effect, and may be changed as appropriate. In that case, the area to be updated in the display data table buffer 233d may be changed in accordance with the change.

  In the process of S3851, when it is determined that it is not the update timing of the additional effect 1 (S3851: No), it is the update timing of the additional effect 2 (0.1 seconds before the end timing of the pressing effect in the second variation pattern) It is determined whether or not (S3855).

  If it is determined in the process of S3855 that it is the update timing of the additional effect 2 (S3855: Yes), it is determined whether the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is on (S3856). In the process of S3856, when it is determined that the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is off (S3856: No), it is not a case to execute the additional effect 2 (pressing of the frame button 22 was early or not pressed Or, since the pressing effect is not executed in the third variation pattern), the present process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3856 that the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is on (S3856: Yes), it is a case of executing the additional effect 2 (from the pressing of the frame button 22 to the next pressing effect) Since the start is within 10 seconds), the additional effect 2 data stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n is overwritten on the display data table buffer 233d (S3857), and the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is set to OFF. Then (S3858), the process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S3855 that it is not the update timing of the additional effect 2 (S3855: No), the processes of S3802 to S3806 are executed as in the second control example described above, and the present process is ended.

  As described above, in the pointer update process 2 (S3605), the effect data for executing (displaying) the additional effect is overwritten (updated) in advance in the display data table buffer at the update timing of each additional effect. The presentation can be performed (displayed) without delay. The present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table buffer may of course be updated at the timing when the additional effect is started. For example, if it is determined whether it is the start timing of the additional effect 1, and it is determined that the start timing of the additional effect 1 is, if the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is on, the data of the additional effect 1 is displayed The data table buffer 233 d may be overwritten (updated).

  Also, in pointer update processing 2 (S3605), it is determined whether it is the update timing of each additional effect, and then it is determined whether or not the additional effect is performed (whether the additional effect flag is on). It is not limited to this. If it is determined that the additional effect is to be performed (that is, if the additional effect flag is on), it may be determined whether it is the update timing of the additional effect. Accordingly, when the additional effect is not executed, it is not necessary to determine whether it is the update timing of the additional effect, and the processing load can be reduced.

  In the present control example, when a plurality of operation effects are performed with a predetermined interval, the additional effect is set for the intervals therebetween, but other configurations may be used. For example, when a plurality of operation effects are executed with a predetermined interval open, the processing is performed to delay the start timing of the operation effect to be executed first by the predetermined interval, whereby the plurality of operation effects are continuously performed. It may be made to be performed, and it may be constituted so that processing may be carried out so that start timing of operation production performed later may be advanced by a predetermined interval.

  By configuring in this manner, it becomes possible to execute a plurality of operation effects as one continuous operation effect without setting an additional effect between a plurality of operation effects. In this case, for example, by advancing the start timing of the operation effect to be executed later by a predetermined interval (for example, 5 seconds), the end timing of the operation effect to be executed later is also advanced by a predetermined interval (for example, 5 seconds) Since the additional effect described above is set after the end of the operation effect to be executed later, it is preferable to set the duration of the effect for displaying the result of the operation effect to be long.

<Modification of Seventh Control Example>
Next, a modification of the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 261 to 263. FIG. In the seventh control example described above, the case is described where a plurality of operation effects are set in the third symbol variation effect executed for one special symbol variation, but in the present modification, continuous special symbol variation is A case where a plurality of operation effects are set to straddle will be described. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in each control example described above, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 261, the flow in which the additional effect in the present modification is set will be described. FIG. 261 is a timing chart showing a flow in which an additional effect is set across a plurality of special symbol variations.

  As shown in FIG. 261, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present modification, the background (stage) of the third symbol display device 81 is changed by the player operating the frame button 22 as in the sixth control example described above. The background change effect is set to a period (five seconds) from one second to six seconds after the start of the special symbol variation. During this period, the player can switch the background (stage) of the third symbol display device 81 by operating the frame button 22.

  When the first variation pattern "variation A" and the second variation pattern "SP2" are set as variation patterns of special symbol variation 1 (60 seconds) (see FIG. 253), the remaining period of the special symbol variation is 27. The operation effect is executed in a period of seconds to 4 seconds (23 seconds). Since special symbol variation 1 (60 seconds) has the end timing of the second variation pattern "SP2" as the end of the special symbol variation, the end timing of the operation effective period of "SP2" in the special symbol variation 1 and the special symbol variation The period between the start timing of the operation effective period set in the background change effect of 2 (30 seconds) is 5 seconds.

  The same control as in the seventh control example described above is executed also during the five seconds, and the additional effect 3 is executed. Next, the display content of the additional effect 3 displayed in the present modification will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 262 is a diagram for explaining the display content of the additional effect when a plurality of operation effects are set across continuous special symbol variations, and FIG. 262 (a) is an example of the display content in the normal background change effect period And is a schematic view showing FIG. 262 (b) is a schematic view showing an example of display content when the additional effect 3 is executed, and FIG. 262 (c) is a display content in the background change effect period when the additional effect 3 is executed It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of.

  First, as shown in FIG. 262 (a), in this modification, a display mode capable of background change is displayed as in the sixth control example described above. The display content is the same as FIG. 241 (b) of the sixth control example described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, when the additional effect 3 is executed, as shown in FIG. 262 (b), an additional effective period notification unit Sa that notifies the effective period set by the additional effect 3 and an additional period display showing the additional operation effective period The part Ma is displayed, and the additional period display part Ma displays the remaining period (b in the figure) of the operation effective period. Then, the characters “Get new background with MAX” explaining the game content in the additional effect 3 and a meter that is variable by operating the frame button 22 are displayed.

  When the player continuously operates the frame button 22 in the additional effect 3 and the meter displayed on the third symbol display device 81 reaches MAX, the background which can not be normally selected can be selected by the background change effect Become.

  FIG. 262C is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content of the background change presentation when the new background is acquired in the additional presentation 3. As shown in FIG. 262 (c), normally, two types of “sea” stage or “mountain” stage were selectable as a background (see FIG. 262 (a)), but a new background was obtained by additional effect 3 , "River" stage is displayed selectable.

  As described above, in the present modification, the additional effect (additional effect 3) is executed as in the seventh control example described above, even in the plurality of operation effects set so as to straddle the plurality of special symbol variations. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation of the frame button performed by the player across multiple special symbol variations from being complicated.

  In addition, the condition that the meter is MAX in the additional effect 3 may be a case where the operation content executed during the operation effect satisfies the operation condition, or the lottery result of the special symbol variation 2 (the result of the judgment of propriety) may be made in advance. It may be determined that the determination result is a predetermined result (for example, a big hit). Also, both may be combined.

  Further, the additional effect used in the seventh control example and the modification example of the seventh control example additionally sets both the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the operation valid period of the frame button 22 However, as shown in FIG. 263, only the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be changed, and the operation valid period of the frame button 22 may not be changed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the case of changing only the effect mode without changing the operation effective period of the frame button 22 as an additional effect will be described. FIG. 263 (a) is a schematic view showing the display content obtained by deleting the display of the addition period display section Ma showing the addition operation effective period from the display content of FIG. 251 (a) described above in the modification of the seventh control example FIG. 263 (b) is a display obtained by deleting the display of the period display M1 and the addition period display Ma indicating the addition operation effective period from the display contents of FIG. 251 (b) described above in the modification of the seventh control example FIG. 263 (c) is a schematic view showing the contents, and FIG. 263 (c) shows the addition period display section Ma and the period display section M2 showing the addition operation effective period from the display contents of FIG. 251 (c) described above in the modification of the seventh control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display content which deleted the display.

  As shown in FIG. 263 (a) to (c), since the operation effective period of the frame button 22 is not changed as the additional effect, the period in which the additional effect is executed is a period in which the operation effective period is not set. Therefore, the period display sections M1 and M2 indicating the operation valid period and the additional period display portion Ma indicating the additional operation valid period are not displayed.

  However, as the effect mode, the operation display section Sb is displayed in the same display mode as the effective period informing section Sa shown in FIG. 251 as a notification to urge the player to operate the frame button 22. It is possible to suppress that the player cancels the operation of the frame button 22 in a period (operation ineffective period) between the period and the operation effective period.

  As described above, the player is notified of the player by operating the frame button 22 as the effect mode (display of the operation display section Sb) without changing the operation effective period as the additional effect. It is possible to continuously operate the frame button 22 across a plurality of operation effective periods, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of frequent repetition of the operation of operating the frame button 22 and the operation of stopping the operation. .

  Note that, as the effect mode of the additional effect in this case, it is preferable to use such an effect mode that the display mode is variable based on the fact that the player operates the frame button 22 even during the operation invalid period. This makes it possible for the player to think that the display mode is variable based on the operation valid period, that is, the operation of the frame button 22, although it is actually an operation invalid period.

  Specifically, an effect in which an additional comment is displayed based on the operation of the frame button 22 as shown in FIG. 251 (a) as an effect actually performed in the operation valid period, or shown in FIG. 251 (b) An effect in which the content of the comment is changed on the basis of the operation of the frame button 22 or an effect in which a meter is accumulated based on the operation of the frame button 22 as shown in FIG. It is preferable to execute a pseudo effect mode that is pseudo-executed regardless of.

  Thereby, it can be considered that the display mode is variable based on the operation of the frame button 22. Further, the timing at which the display mode of the above-described pseudo effect mode changes may be switched based on the operation content (operation interval and the number of operations) with respect to the frame button 22 performed during the actual operation valid period. Thereby, it can be considered that the effect mode during the operation invalid period is variable based on the operation of the frame button 22.

<Eighth control example>
Next, an eighth control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. The control examples described above constitute various effects as an operation effect in which the player operates the frame button 22. The present control example is different in that the effect mode control in the case where the operation effect in each control example described above is executed is different.

  Specifically, based on the remaining period of the operation valid period set for each operation effect, control is performed to make the effect mode different when the frame button 22 is operated. By configuring in this way, for example, when the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the remaining period of the operation valid period becomes a predetermined time or less (for example, 5 seconds or less), the remaining period of the operation valid period is a predetermined time Execute the effect mode in which the amount of change in the effect mode (the increase amount of the meter, the increase amount of the numerical value, etc.) based on the operation of the frame button 22 is larger (larger) than in the above case (for example, more than 5 seconds) So, I can enjoy the operation production to the end.

  Furthermore, in the operation effect in which the effect mode changes when the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) (ie, long press operation), the remaining period of the operation valid period is less than or equal to a predetermined time (for example, 5) When it becomes second or less, the period for determining that the long press operation is performed is shortened (for example, 1 second). With this configuration, it is possible to experience a change in the effect mode based on the long press operation even at the end of the operation effect, so that the operation effect can be enjoyed to the end.

  In the eighth control example, a part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed from the above control examples, and a part of the processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 It differs in the point which changed. The other points are the same as those of the control examples described above. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in each control example, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 264 (a) and 264 (b), the operation effects in this control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 264 (a), a display mode for prompting the player to hit the frame button 22 continuously is displayed during the variable display of the third symbol. And under the symbol imitating the shape of the frame button 22, the remaining time indicator M which shows the remaining time which can press the frame button 22 is displayed. The display color of the remaining time indicator M is configured to be variable based on the reduction of the remaining time. In this control example, the remaining time period is displayed in red, and when the remaining time decreases, it is changed so that it is changed to white (a portion displayed in red decreases) ((displayed in red) See FIG. 264 (b)).

  In addition, on the left side of the remaining time indicator M, by long-pressing the frame button 22, it is shown that control (determination) is performed in the same state as automatic continuous hitting, of “long-press automatic continuous hitting” Characters are displayed. Then, in the upper part of the display area, an indicator whose color is variable based on the frame button 22 being continuously hit is displayed. A scale is displayed on this indicator, and the scale is set to the degree of anticipation that the success or failure judgment result of the special symbol in motion is a win. When the frame button 22 is continuously hit and the color of the indicator is changed (changed from white to red) to the point where the scale of the indicator is larger, the player is not successful in judging whether or not the special symbol in change. You can expect it.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 264 (b), when the frame button 22 is long pressed (the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for 3 seconds or 1 second), the long press is performed on the pattern imitating the frame button 22. A character of "auto continuous hit" is displayed, which indicates that the automatic hit is detected. In the present control example, the pressing period of the frame button 22 determined to be a long press is variably set depending on the remaining time in which the operation of the frame button 22 is determined to be valid. Specifically, when the remaining time is 5 seconds or less, if the frame button 22 has been continuously pressed for 3 seconds, the setting that has been determined to be long pressed continuously for 1 second. When is pressed, it is switched and set so as to be determined as long press. As a result, even if the frame button 22 is pressed for a long time after the remaining time runs short, more indicators can be stored, and the button effect can be enjoyed.

  In the present embodiment, the determination time for determining that the frame button 22 is held down is changed depending on the remaining time, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the amount of changing the indicator can be increased or the speed of changing can be increased quickly. It may be configured. When the frame button 22 is operated when the remaining time reaches a predetermined value (for example, 3 seconds or less), the maximum value or the predetermined value (for example, the scale MAX) at which the indicator is changed. If the effect to be displayed is selected, the indicator may be variably displayed up to the scale 1 and so on.

  Next, referring to FIG. 265, frame button input monitoring and effect processing 4 (S1707) which is one of the main processing 2 (see FIG. 169) of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example. explain. FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring and rendering process 4 (S1707).

  In frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (FIG. 265, S1707), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time (frame button operation effective period) is a value larger than 0 (S7031). If it is determined that the SW effective time is 0 (0 or less) (S7031: No), the value of the SW effective time storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset. (S7032). Thereafter, this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW effective time is a value larger than 0 (S7001: Yes), the SW effective time is updated by subtracting the elapsed time (S7033). Next, it is determined whether the SW effective time is 5 seconds or less (S7034). If it is determined that the SW effective time is 5 seconds or less (S7034: Yes), the long press determination value is set to 1 second (S7035). On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW effective time is not 5 seconds or less (S7034: No), 3 seconds is set as the long press determination value (S7036).

  In the process of S7037, it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S7037). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S 7037: Yes), the value of the SW pressing counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is incremented by 1 (S 3078). Then, based on the value of the SW depression counter (not shown), it is determined whether or not it is equal to or longer than the long press determination value set in the process of S7035 or S703 (S7040). When it is determined that the value is the long press determination value or more (S7040: Yes), the SW indicator is incremented by 1 in the range of the effect value set in the variation pattern (S7041), and the updated SW indicator is displayed. A display command is set (S7042). Thereafter, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7040 that the value of the SW depression counter (not shown) is less than the long press determination value (S7040: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S7037 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S7037: No), the period when the frame button 22 is not pressed is a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) or more. It is determined (S7043). If it is determined that the time is equal to or more than the predetermined time (S7043: Yes), the SW depression counter (not shown) is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S7044). On the other hand, when it is determined that the time is less than the predetermined time (S7043: No), this process ends.

  Thus, in this control example, if it is pressed within 0.5 seconds after the frame button 22 is pressed, the value of the SW pressing counter (not shown) is incremented by 1 as being continuously hit. Update. And when it becomes more than a long press judgment value, it sets so that SW indicator may be changed. The variable amount of the SW indicator is set in advance for each fluctuation pattern, and is set so as to represent the expectation of the result of the pass / fail judgment.

  Therefore, the player can make the indicator variable regardless of whether the player holds a long press or a continuous hit. Furthermore, since the long press determination value is set variably according to the SW valid time, it is possible to show the player an effect of varying the indicator even if the SW valid time is short. Note that the speed at which the indicator is changed may be set to be faster according to the value of the SW effective time.

  Note that the above-described SW pressing counter (not shown) measures the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed, and it is configured to be able to measure the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed. A counter (counting counter for counting the number of pressing times) for counting the number of times of pressing of the frame button 22 and a counter (counting period measuring counter) for measuring the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed may be provided separately. In this case, when the player executes the long press operation, first, at the timing at which the pressing of the frame button 22 is started, the press number measurement counter is incremented by 1, and the measurement of the press period measurement counter is started.

  In a state where the player continues to press the frame button 22, the value of the pressing time measurement counter is not added, the value of the pressing period measurement counter is added, and the value of the pressing period measurement counter is a predetermined value ( Whether or not the value corresponding to 1 second or 3 seconds has been reached is determined by the pressing period determination means.

  Then, when it is determined by the pressing period determination means that the value of the pressing period measurement counter has reached a predetermined value (a value corresponding to 1 second or 3 seconds), it is determined that the frame button 22 has been long pressed. May be

  As described above, by providing the pressing frequency measuring counter and the pressing period measuring counter, it becomes possible to control independently the pressing operation (the continuous hitting operation) of the frame button 22 and the long pressing operation.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 266, a modification of the frame button input monitoring and rendering process 4 (S1707 in FIG. 265) will be described. In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (S1707 in FIG. 265) described above, when the remaining period of the SW effective period (button operation effective period) is a predetermined period (5 seconds or less), the frame button 22 is long pressed By shortening the long press judgment value, which is a value for determining that there is a short (from 3 seconds to 1 second), even if the SW valid time (button operation valid period) is short, the long press operation (Automatic continuous hit) can be executed, and further, in the state where the long press judgment value is shortened, the speed at which the SW indicator is changed is increased to reduce the SW effective time (button operation effective period). The SW indicator can be variably displayed to the end (up to the maximum range that can be variably preset) by the long press operation (automatic continuous hit) executed at

  On the other hand, in the present modification, when the long press operation (automatic consecutive hit) is executed in the state where the long press judgment value is shortened, the long press operation (auto when the long press judgment value is not shortened This is different in that the value of the SW pressing counter is added more than the continuous hitting).

  In this modification, when the long press operation (automatic continuous hit) is performed in a state where the long press determination value is shortened, a large value of the SW pressing counter is added (automatic continuous hit interval is short) Although other configurations may be used, for example, when the remaining period of the SW effective period (button operation effective period) is within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds), A large number of values of the SW depression counter due to automatic consecutive strikes may be added.

  Next, referring to FIG. 266, the frame button input monitoring and effect process 5 (S1707 in FIG. 266) of the present modification will be described. This FIG. 266 is a flowchart which shows the content of frame button input monitoring and presentation processing 5 (S1707 of FIG. 266).

  When the frame button input monitoring and rendering process 5 (S1707 in FIG. 266) is executed, first, in the same manner as the frame button input monitoring and rendering process 4 (S1707 in FIG. 265) of the eighth control example described above, Processing is performed. When it is determined in the process of S7037 that the frame button 22 is pressed (S7037: Yes), it is determined whether the long press determination value is set to one second (S7051), and not one second. If it is determined (3 seconds) (S7051: No), the processing of S7038, S7041 and S7042 is executed in the same manner as the frame button input monitoring and rendering processing 4 (S1707 of FIG. 265) of the eighth control example described above. , End this process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the time is one second in the process of S7051 (S7051: Yes), the value of the SW depression counter (not shown) is incremented by 2 (S7052) and the value of the SW indicator is incremented by 2 (S7052) In step S7053, a display command indicating the SW indicator is set (S7042), and the process ends.

  When it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed in the process of S7037 (S7037: No), the same as the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (S1707 in FIG. 265) of the eighth control example described above. Then, the processing of S7043 and S7044 is executed, and this processing ends.

  As described above, in this modification, it is determined that the frame button 22 has been long-pressed when the remaining period of the SW effective period (button operation effective period) becomes equal to or less than the predetermined period (5 seconds or less). Value (time) is shortened (shortened from 3 seconds to 1 second), and during the shortened period, the value of the SW pressing counter added by the automatic continuous hitting operation is added more than usual did.

  As a result, the SW indicator is variably displayed to the end (up to the maximum range which is preset to be variably possible) by the long press operation (automatic continuous hit) executed when the SW effective time (button operation effective period) is short. be able to.

  Furthermore, unlike the eighth control example described above, the value added to the SW pressing counter is configured to increase, so that the value of the SW pressing counter can be associated with the value of the SW indicator, and the control load Also has the effect of being able to

  Note that the above-described SW pressing counter (not shown) measures the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed, and it is configured to be able to measure the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed. A counter (counting counter for counting the number of pressing times) for counting the number of times of pressing of the frame button 22 and a counter (counting period measuring counter) for measuring the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed may be provided separately. In this case, when the player executes the long press operation, first, at the timing at which the pressing of the frame button 22 is started, the press number measurement counter is incremented by 1, and the measurement of the press period measurement counter is started.

  In a state where the player continues to press the frame button 22, the value of the pressing time measurement counter is not added, the value of the pressing period measurement counter is added, and the value of the pressing period measurement counter is a predetermined value ( Whether or not the value corresponding to 1 second or 3 seconds has been reached is determined by the pressing period determination means.

  Then, when it is determined by the pressing period determination means that the value of the pressing period measurement counter has reached a predetermined value (a value corresponding to 1 second or 3 seconds), it is determined that the frame button 22 has been long pressed. May be

  As described above, by providing the pressing frequency measuring counter and the pressing period measuring counter, it becomes possible to control independently the pressing operation (the continuous hitting operation) of the frame button 22 and the long pressing operation.

  As described above, the configurations described in the respective control examples may be appropriately combined, and in particular, the configurations of the reach navigation effect described in the first control example and the configurations of the reach navigation effect described in the fourth control example may be combined. Or each composition of the composite pressing effect described in the second control example is combined with the configuration of each pressing effect of the sixth control example, the seventh control example and the eighth control example, or the second control example The respective configurations of continuous slot effects performed in combination with the respective configurations of continuous slot effects described in the fifth control example, or the configurations of point effects described in the second control example are described in the third control example You may combine with each structure of the point production which did.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<About the Concept of the Invention Taking Slide Unit 400 as an Example>
A game machine comprising a base member, a displacement member disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and an abutment member formed to be able to abut on the displacement member, the displacement member comprising the base It has a first member disposed linearly displaceably in the member, a pinion gear rotatably disposed in the first member, and a rack gear engaged with the pinion gear, and is linearly displaceable in the first member. The base member includes a rack gear with which the pinion gear is engaged, and the first member of the displacement member is abutted against the contact member. A game machine A1.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a base member and a displacement member disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaced (e.g., JP-A-2015-57166). In this case, for example, the displacement member in displacement is brought into contact with the contact member, and the contact member is displaced together with the displacement member, or the contact member is disposed at the end of the displacement range of the displacement member. When the stop position of the displacement member extends beyond the target position due to variations in dimensions or control, etc., the displacement member is brought into contact with the contact member (the contact member functions as a stopper), etc. Are known.

  However, in the conventional configuration described above, there is a problem that when the displacement member abuts on the contact member, the displacement member and the contact member may be damaged. On the other hand, if the displacement speed of the displacement member is reduced in order to suppress breakage, the rendering effect associated with the displacement of the displacement member is lost.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, damage to the displacement member and the contact member can be suppressed while securing the rendering effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

  That is, the displacement member includes a first member disposed linearly displaceably on the base member, and a second member disposed linearly displaceably on the first member, and the rack gear of the second member Since the rack gear of the base member is meshed with the rack gear through the pinion gear rotatably disposed in one member, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is larger than the first member. In the accelerated state, linear displacement can be made with respect to the base member. As a result, the displacement speed of the second member can be increased, and the rendering effect associated with the displacement can be secured. On the other hand, the displacement member brings the first member, which has a displacement speed lower than that of the second member, into contact with the contact member, weakens the impact at the time of contact and suppresses damage to the displacement member and contact member. can do.

  As a mode of driving the first member relative to the base member, for example, the rack gear formed on the first member is engaged with a pinion gear disposed on the base member, and the pinion gear is rotationally driven to base the first member. The first member is a base member that is linearly displaced with respect to the member, or the tip end of an arm body whose proximal end is rotatably supported on the base member is connected to the first member and the arm body is rotationally driven. For example, one that is linearly displaced with respect to

  Further, the abutment of the displacement member and the abutment member may be performed at the time of linear displacement of the displacement member in a direction in which the second member is relatively displaced in the projecting direction with respect to the first member, or It may be performed at the time of linear displacement of the displacement member in a direction in which the second member is displaced relative to the first member in the storage direction. In any case, the first member, which has a displacement speed lower than that of the second member, abuts against the contact member, thereby weakening the impact at the time of contact, and the displacement member and the contact member Damage can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A1, the contact member is disposed displaceably on the base member, and the displaceable direction of the contact member is a straight line of the displacement member when the displacement member is abutted. A game machine A2 characterized in that it is in a direction permitting displacement.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the contact member is disposed displaceably on the base member, and the displaceable direction of the contact member is in contact with the displacement member. Since the direction in which the displacement member is displaced is permitted when the displacement member is displaced, the cushioning effect can be exhibited by receiving and displacing the displacement of the displacement member, and as a result, breakage of the displacement member and the abutment member Can be easily suppressed.

  The direction in which the linear displacement of the displacement member is permitted means that the direction of displacement of the contact member includes at least a component of the direction of linear displacement of the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the contact member does not have to be a linear displacement, and may be a rotation or a curved (curved) displacement. When the displacement of the contact member is a linear displacement, the direction of the linear displacement does not have to be parallel to the direction of the linear displacement of the displacement member, and may be inclined.

  In the gaming machine A2, a movable direction of the contact member is set in a direction parallel to a direction of linear displacement of the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the displaceable direction of the contact member is set in a direction parallel to the direction of the linear displacement of the displaceable member. At the time, the escaping operation of the abutting member can be smoothly performed. Therefore, the buffer action can be reliably exerted, and breakage of the displacement member and the contact member can be easily suppressed.

  A game machine A4 comprising: a guide member for guiding a linear displacement of the displacement member, wherein the linear displacement of the contact member is guided by the guide member.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, a guide member for guiding the linear displacement of the displacement member is provided, and the linear displacement of the contact member is guided by the guide member. Can be implemented. That is, when the first guide member for guiding the displacement member and the second guide member for guiding the contact member are juxtaposed at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the linear displacement. Therefore, the space in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the linear displacement is correspondingly increased, resulting in an increase in size. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A4, space efficiency can be improved and miniaturization can be achieved by using one of the guide members.

  In any one of game machines A2 to A4, a game machine A5 characterized in that the contact member can be disposed at a position where it does not abut on the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the abutting member can be disposed at a position where it does not abut on the displacing member. A non-contacting state can be formed. That is, when the displacing member is linearly displaced at a relatively high speed, the stop position of the displacing member is likely to extend beyond the target position due to variations in dimensions and control, etc. When the displacement member is linearly displaced at a relatively low speed, the abutment member is brought into contact with the member (the abutment member functions as a stopper), since the stop position of the displacement member can be easily matched with the target position. The displacement member and the non-contact position are disposed, and the contact frequency between the displacement member and the contact member is reduced by reducing the number of contacts by not allowing both to contact each other, and the life of those members is improved. Can be

  In any one of the game machines A2 to A5, an abutment member drive means for applying a driving force to the abutment member is provided, and the abutment member pushes back the displacement member by the drive force of the abutment member drive means. A game machine A6 characterized in that it is displaceable in the direction.

  Here, the displacement member includes a first member disposed linearly displaceably on the base member, and a second member disposed linearly displaceably on the first member, and the rack gear of the second member By meshing the rack gear of the base member with the rack gear via the pinion gear rotatably disposed on the first member, the second member can be moved from the first member by utilizing the linear displacement of the first member with respect to the base member In the speed-up state, the force required for driving is relatively large because the structure is to linearly displace the base member. In particular, at the time of initial operation of the displacement member (at the start of linear displacement from the stop state), the force required for driving is maximized by the influence of the inertial force. Therefore, since the initial operation (speed of linear displacement from the stop state) is slowed, there is a possibility that the rendering effect accompanying the displacement may be inhibited.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the contact member is formed displaceable in the direction of pushing back the displacement member by the driving force of the contact member driving means. Therefore, it is possible to assist the initial movement of the displacing member (start of linear displacement from the stopped state). Therefore, the displacement member can be linearly displaced quickly from the stop state. As a result, it is possible to accelerate the initial operation and to improve the rendering effect associated with the displacement.

  The direction in which the displacement member is pushed back means that the direction of displacement of the contact member includes at least a component in the direction of linear displacement of the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the contact member does not have to be a linear displacement, and may be a rotation or a curved (curved) displacement. When the displacement of the contact member is a linear displacement, the direction of the linear displacement does not have to be parallel to the direction of the linear displacement of the displacement member, and may be inclined.

  In the gaming machine A6, when the contact member is displaced in the direction of pushing back the displacement member by the driving force of the contact member driving means, the contact member abuts on the first member of the displacement members. A game machine A7 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6, when the contact member is displaced in the direction of pushing back the displacement member by the driving force of the contact member driving means, Since the first member abuts on the first member, the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the displacement member can be enhanced. That is, the contact member is brought into contact with the first member whose displacement speed is slower than that of the second member and pushes back the first member, so that the auxiliary force acts on the displacement member (first member) from the contact member. For a longer time (ie, from the time when the displacement member speed exceeds the velocity of the contact member and the displacement of the displacement member precedes the displacement of the contact member) after starting to push back the displacement member in the stopped state. As a result, the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the displacement member can be increased.

  In the gaming machine A6 or A7, the first member and the contact member are linearly displaced by the rack and pinion mechanism with respect to the base member, and the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is the rack in the contact member A game machine A8 characterized by being set to a gear ratio larger than that of the pinion mechanism.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6 or A7, when the first member and the abutting member are linearly displaced by the rack and pinion mechanism with respect to the base member, the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member Since the gear ratio is set to a gear ratio larger than that of the rack and pinion mechanism in the contact member, the displacement member can be easily displaced linearly from the stopped state, and after the start of the linear displacement, the displacement member ( The speed of linear displacement of the second member can be increased, and as a result, the rendering effect associated with the displacement can be improved.

  That is, by setting the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the contact member to a small gear ratio, a larger driving force can be exhibited. Therefore, the force that pushes back the displacement member by the contact member is made stronger. It is possible to reliably assist the initial movement of the member (the start of linear displacement from the stopped state). Therefore, the displacement member can be linearly displaced quickly from the stop state. On the other hand, by setting the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member to a large gear ratio, the speed of linear displacement of the first member can be increased, and accordingly, the linear displacement of the second member Speed can be increased.

  In addition, that gear ratio is large (small) means that the distance of the linear displacement of the rack gear at the time of one rotation of a pinion gear is large (small).

  Here, if the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is reduced in order to accelerate the initial operation of the displacement member, the speed of linear displacement of the displacement member (second member) after the initial operation decreases. On the other hand, if the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is increased in order to increase the speed of linear displacement of the displacement member (second member) after the initial operation, the initial operation of the displacement member is delayed. That is, it is impossible in the prior art to simultaneously achieve the earlier operation of the displacement member and the increase in the linear displacement speed of the displacement member (second member) after the initial operation. By adopting a structure that pushes back the displacement member, such coexistence is made possible for the first time.

<About the concept of the invention which makes lower unit unit 600 an example>
A driving unit, a displacement member driven by the driving unit and displaceably formed to a first position, and an abutted member to which the displacement member displaced to the first position abuts. In the gaming machine, at least a component of a velocity component of the displacement member in a direction toward the abutted member is formed to decrease near the first position.

  Here, a pair of displacement members are provided, and the pair of displacement members are displaceable between a retracted position arranged at a predetermined distance and a contact position (first position) with which the two are in contact with each other. The gaming machine formed is known (for example, JP, 2015-51160, A). In this type of gaming machine, for example, the pair of displacement members retracted to the retraction position are displaced in a direction approaching each other and brought into contact (combined) at the contact position, whereby the pair of displacement members are integrated. The effect is to create a single character.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the pair of displacement members abut on each other in the first position, an impact occurs, and the attitude becomes unstable, for example, they bounce back each other. was there. On the other hand, when the displacement speed of the pair of displacement members is reduced in order to weaken the impact at the time of contact, the time until the pair of displacement members are integrated to form one character is bulky and extends. The effect of the production is hindered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, at least the component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the abutted member is formed to decrease in the vicinity of the first position. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an impact when the displaced displacement member abuts on the abutted member. Therefore, for example, it is possible to suppress that the displacement member bounces from the abutted member, and the posture of the displacement member can be stabilized.

  Further, since the reduction of at least the component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the abutted member is formed to decrease near the first position, the displacement until reaching the vicinity of the first position is Since the speed of displacement of the member can be increased, it is possible to reduce the time until the displacement member is integrated with the abutted member to form one character, and it is possible to suppress interproportionation. As a result, the effect of the presentation can be enhanced.

  Further, the abutted member may be a member that is stopped at the first position, or may be a member that is displaceable toward the first position. In the latter case, the abutted member is disposed at the first position prior to the displacing member (that is, the displacing member relative to the abutted member reaches the first position and is in the stopped state). May be abutted), and disposed at the first position substantially simultaneously with the displacing member (ie, the displacing member and the abutted member in a mutually displaced state are abutted at the first position) It may be

  Further, as a form in which the component in the direction toward the abutted member decreases near the first position, the form in which the component in the direction toward the first position decreases continuously in the direction toward the first position The form etc. which combined these are illustrated.

  Further, the decrease in the component in the direction toward the abutted member means that the velocity in the direction toward the abutted member is zero as well as the velocity toward the abutted member is reduced, and This is intended to include the case where the velocity in the direction of separating from the abutted member increases (that is, the velocity in the direction toward the abutted member becomes negative).

  The gaming machine B1 includes transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the displacement member, and the transmission means is one of the speed components of the displacement member in a state where the drive state of the drive means is constant. The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that at least the component in the direction toward the abutted member decreases in the vicinity of the first position.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1, the transmission means drives at least a portion of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the abutted member in the vicinity of the first position. Since it can be performed in a state in which the driving state of the driving member is constant, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as increasing or decreasing the driving state of the driving means according to the displacement position of the displacement member. Therefore, the control of the drive means can be simplified to reduce the control cost and improve the reliability.

  In addition, as a state where a drive state is made constant, for example, when a drive means is an electric actuator (for example, an electric motor, an electric linear actuator, etc.), the state where the supply current or supply voltage is made constant is illustrated. Ru. However, changes in state in transient response at the time of start and stop shall be ignored.

  The gaming machine B2 includes a base member on which the displacement member is disposed displaceably, and the transmission means is disposed at a position separated from the rotation base rotatably connected to the base member and a predetermined distance from the rotation base. And a connecting member having a connecting tip portion rotatably connected to the displacement member, wherein the connecting member is rotated about the rotation base in a direction to bring the connecting tip portion closer to the first position. Thus, the displacement member is displaced toward the first position. A game machine B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, the connection member is interposed between the displacement member and the base member, and the movement trajectory of the connection tip portion of the connection member is a circular arc centered on the rotary base. That is, the tangential displacement of the arc is imparted to the displacement member. In this case, the connecting member is rotated about the rotation base in the direction to bring the connecting tip close to the first position, so that the first position of the velocity components of the displacement member (ie, the abutted member) The component in the heading direction can be reduced at least in the vicinity of the first position. As described above, since the transmission means is provided with the connection member interposed between the base member and the displacement member and displaces the displacement member via the connection member, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2, the transmission The structure of the means can be simplified.

  The gaming machine B2 includes a base member on which the displacement member is disposed displaceably, the transmission means includes a guide groove which is extended to the base member and guides the displacement member, and the displacement member is The guide groove includes a guided portion guided along the guide groove, and the guide groove is a component of the velocity component of the guided portion guided along the guide groove in a direction toward at least the abutted member. Is formed so as to decrease near the first position.

  According to the gaming machine B4, the transmission means includes a guide groove extending in the base member to guide the displacement member, and the displacement member includes a guided portion guided along the guide groove, the guide groove being A component of at least the velocity component of the guided portion guided along the guide groove in the direction toward the abutted member is formed to decrease near the first position. As described above, the transmission means is provided with a guide groove for guiding the displacement member (guided portion), and the displacement member is displaced along the guide groove. Therefore, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, the transmission means Structure can be simplified.

  One of the game machines B2 to B3 is provided with an interposition member which is movably connected to one side of the base member and is movably connected to the other side of the displacing member.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B2 to B3, the base member is provided with the interposition member in which one side is displaceably connected and the other side is displaceably connected to the displacement member. The driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the displacement member through the transmission means, and when the displacement member is displaced, the displacement of the interposed member can be exerted on the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the displacement member can be a combination of the displacement by the action of the transmission means and the displacement by the action of the interposed member. Thereby, the form of displacement of the displacement member can be complicated, and the effect of the effect by the displacement can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine B5, the interposed member is rotatably connected to the base member and the displacement member by pivotally supporting the one side and the other side.

  According to the gaming machine B6, since the interposed member is rotatably connected to the base member and the displacing member by pivoting on one side and the other side, when the displacing member is displaced, the interposed member is disposed on the one side. The other side is displaced by an arc-like locus about the rotation center. Therefore, such an arc-like displacement (that is, a displacement that constantly changes the displacement direction along the tangential direction of the arc) can be applied to the displacement member from the interposed member member. As a result, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, the form of displacement of the displacement member can be complicated, and the effect of the effect by the displacement can be enhanced.

  In any one of the game machines B2 to B6, the transmission means is formed such that a component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the abutted member is at least approximately 0 at the first position. Game machine B7 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B7, in any one of the gaming machines B2 to B6, the transmission means is such that a component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the abutted member is at least approximately 0 at the first position. Since the displacement member displaced to the first position is brought into contact with the abutted member, the occurrence of an impact can be more reliably suppressed. Therefore, for example, it is possible to suppress that the displacement member bounces from the abutted member, and the posture of the displacement member can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine B7, the transmission means is formed such that a component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the abutted member has a negative value at the first position. Game machine B8.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B7, the transmission means is formed such that the component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the abutted member has a negative value at the first position. Because the displacement member in the first position has a component in the direction of separating from the abutted member, the displacement member displaced to the first position is abutted against the abutted member, Can be released from the abutted member, whereby the occurrence of an impact can be more reliably suppressed. Therefore, for example, it is possible to suppress that the displacement member bounces from the abutted member, and the posture of the displacement member can be stabilized.

  Also, if the displacement member has a negative value at the first position, even if the displacement member abuts on the abutted member before the displacement member reaches the first position due to variations in dimensions or control, etc., Since it is possible to increase the probability that the speed of the displacement member is slow (or a negative value), it is possible to easily suppress the occurrence of an impact.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B8, a second driving means for driving the abutted member, and a second transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the second driving means to the contact member, The abutted member is formed so as to be displaceable toward the first position, and the second transmission means is configured to have the velocity component of the abutted member in a state in which the driving state of the second drive means is constant. A game machine B9 characterized in that at least a component in a direction toward the displacement member decreases in the vicinity of the first position.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines B2 to B8, the abutted member is formed displaceably toward the first position, so the effect by bringing the pair of members into contact Can increase the effect of For example, by displacing the abutted member and the displacing member in the direction in which they adjoin each other and bringing them into contact (combined) at the first position, the pair of members can be integrated to form one character.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine B9, the second transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the second drive means to the abutted member is provided, and the second transmission means is at least at least one of the velocity components of the abutted members. The component in the direction toward the displacing member is formed to decrease near the first position, thereby suppressing the occurrence of an impact when the abutted member displaced to the first position abuts on the displacing member it can. Thus, for example, it can be suppressed that the abutted member and the displacement member bounce back each other, and the postures of the abutted member and the displacement member can be stabilized.

  Further, since the reduction of at least the component of the velocity component of the abutted member in the direction toward the displacement member is formed to decrease in the vicinity of the first position, the object is not moved until it reaches the vicinity of the first position. Since the speed of displacement of the contact member can be increased, the time taken to integrate the contact member with the displacement member to form one character is reduced for both the contact member and the displacement member. Can be suppressed. As a result, the effect of the presentation can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, the second transmission means is configured to reduce the decrease in the vicinity of the first position of at least the component in the direction toward the displacement member of the velocity components of the abutted members in a state where the drive state of the second drive device is constant. Since it can be performed, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as increasing or decreasing the driving state of the second driving means according to the displacement position of the abutted member. Therefore, the control of the second drive means can be simplified to reduce the control cost and improve the reliability.

  The abutted member, the second drive means and the second transmission means in the game machine B9 can be read as the displacement members, the drive means and the transmission means in the game machines B2 to B8, and these can be applied. Therefore, the interposed member in the gaming machine B5 or B6 may be interposed between the base member and the abutted member.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Projection Unit 700 as an Example>
Driving means, first and second members displaced by the driving force of the driving means, first transmitting means and second transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the first and second members And the first transmission means includes a first predetermined section in which a first driving force is loaded on the drive section, and the first drive to be loaded in the first predetermined section. And a second suppression unit configured to form a first suppression section in which a driving force smaller than a force is loaded on the driving unit, and the second transmission unit is configured to load a second driving force on the driving unit. And a second suppression section in which a driving force smaller than the second driving force loaded in the second predetermined section is loaded on the driving means, and the first transmission means is In the state where one predetermined section is formed, In a state in which the second transmission means forms the second suppression section at least in part and the second transmission means forms the second predetermined section, the second transmission section at least a part of the second predetermined section A game machine C1 characterized in that 1 transmission means forms the first suppression section.

  Here, the driving means, first and second members displaced by the driving force of the driving means, first transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the first member and the second member, and A gaming machine provided with a second transmission means is known (for example, JP-A-2015-53958). According to this gaming machine, since the two members (the first member and the second member) can be displaced by one driving means, it is possible to reduce the number of parts and to reduce the product cost. However, in the configuration in which the two members are displaced by one driving means, the driving force for driving both is overlapped, so that the load on the driving means becomes large and there is a problem that the durability is lowered. The On the other hand, in the configuration in which the two members (the first member and the second member) are displaced alternately (one by one), the load on the driving means is reduced, but a state in which the two members are displaced together can not be formed. The staging effect is hindered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the first transmitting means can form the first predetermined section and the first suppression section which can reduce the load of the driving means than the first predetermined section, and In a state in which the 2 transmission means can form the second predetermined section and the second suppression section capable of reducing the load of the driving means than the second predetermined section, and in the state where the first transmission section forms the first predetermined section, In a state in which the second transmission means forms a second suppression section in at least a part of the first predetermined section and the second transmission section forms a second predetermined section, at least a part of the second predetermined section When one transmission means forms a first suppression section, that is, one is relatively high-loaded, the other is relatively low-loaded and the other is relatively high-loaded, the other is The load can be relatively low. Therefore, since the load of the drive means can be dispersed, the load of the drive means can be reduced and the durability thereof can be improved.

  Furthermore, since it is not necessary to displace the first member and the second member alternately (one by one), it is possible to form a state in which the first member and the second member are displaced together, thereby reducing the load on the driving means. It is possible to improve the presentation effect.

  In the gaming machine C1, at least one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means is in contact with a cam member rotated by the driving force of the drive means and the circumferential surface of the cam member to be the first member or And a cam rubbing member for applying a displacement to the second member, wherein the displacement amount of the cam rubbing member per unit rotation of the cam member is the first predetermined amount in the first suppression section or the second suppression section. A game machine C2 characterized in that the load of the drive means is reduced by reducing the displacement amount of the cam rubbing member per unit rotation of the cam member in the section or the second predetermined section.

  In the gaming machine C1, at least one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means is a crank member having a main body portion rotated by the driving force of the drive means and a pin portion eccentrically located from the rotational center of the main body portion. And a crank rubbing member which has a guide groove in which a pin portion of the crank member slides and the displacement of the first member or the second member by the pin portion sliding along the guide groove. The displacement amount of the crank rubbing member per unit rotation of the crank member in the first suppression section or the second suppression section, the unit rotation of the crank member in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section A game machine C3 characterized in that the load of the drive means is reduced by reducing the displacement of the crank contact member.

  According to the gaming machine C2 or C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the first member or the second member is displaced by the interlocking of the cam member and the cam rubbing member or the interlocking of the crank member and the crank rubbing member. The unit rotation of the cam member and the crank member according to the outer shape of the cam member (the distance from the rotation center to the outer peripheral surface (abrasive surface)) and the outer shape of the guide groove of the crank rubbing member (the distance to the rotation center of the crank member) The amount of displacement of the first member or the second member in the vicinity can be changed. In other words, the load of the drive means can be changed. Therefore, for example, even when the driving state of the driving means (for example, the power supplied to the electric motor) is maintained constant, it is possible to apply a change to the speed of displacement of the first member and the second member. As a result, in the first or first predetermined section and the first or second suppression section, a change is generated in the displacement speed of the first member and the second member, and the rendering effect is enhanced while the first or second suppression is performed. In the section, it is possible to suppress the load of the drive means.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section, the displacement of the first member or the second member has a displacement component upward in the gravity direction, and the first suppression section or the first suppression section 2) A game machine C4 characterized in that the displacement of the first member or the second member in the suppression zone includes a displacement component downward in the direction of gravity.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section, the displacement of the first member or the second member causes the displacement component upward in the gravity direction. In the first suppression section or the second suppression section, since the displacement of the first member or the second member is provided with a displacement component downward in the direction of gravity, the first weight of the first member or the second member is used to The load of the drive means in the suppression section or the second suppression section can be smaller than the load of the drive means in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section.

  Further, as described above, by changing the load of the drive means using the weight of the first member or the second member, for example, interlocking of the cam member and the cam rubbing member or the crank member and the crank rubbing member As in the case of using interlocking, it is not necessary to change the speed of displacement of the first member or the second member when changing the load of the drive means, and the speed of displacement of the first member or the second member is constant. The load of the drive means can be changed while maintaining the

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the first transmission means is abraded against the cam member rotated by the driving force of the drive means and the circumferential surface of the cam member to impart displacement to the first member. And a crank member having a main body portion rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a pin portion eccentrically located from the rotation center of the main body portion, and the crank A crank rubbing member which has a guide groove in which a pin portion of the member slides and the displacement of the second member by the pin portion sliding along the guide groove; and the cam member and the cam member A game machine C5 characterized in that it is integrally formed with a crank member.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, since the cam member and the crank member are integrally formed, a space for separately arranging the cam member and the crank member Can be eliminated, and the size can be reduced accordingly. Moreover, compared with the case where it forms separately, the shift | offset | difference of the displacement of a 1st member and a 2nd member can be suppressed, and the precision of synchronization of both members can be raised.

  In any one of the game machines C1 to C5, at least one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means does not transmit the driving force of the drive means to the first member or the second member, or the first member or the second member does not transmit. A game machine C6 characterized in that it is possible to form a non-transmission section for keeping the two members in a stopped state, and displacement of the first member or the second member is started after passing through the non-transmission section.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, at least one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means does not drive the driving means to the first member or the second member. It is possible to form a non-transmission section which maintains the first member or the second member in the stop state as transmission, and since the displacement of the first member or the second member is started after passing through the non-transmission section, it is in the stop state. The first member or the second member can be displaced smoothly.

  That is, when the displacement of the first member or the second member in the stopped state is started, the load of the drive means becomes large under the influence of the inertia force, so the initial speed of the first member or the second member becomes slow. Where it is difficult to displace smoothly, since there is provided a non-transmission section for keeping the first member or the second member in the stopped state by not transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the first member or the second member, In the transmission means, the drive means can be idled and energized, and after application of force (i.e., after passing through the non-transmission section), displacement of the first member or the second member can be initiated. Therefore, the first member or the second member in the stopped state can be smoothly displaced.

  In the gaming machine C6, both the first transmission means and the second transmission means can simultaneously form the non-transmission sections, and displacement of the first member and the second member is started after passing through the respective non-transmission sections. Game machine C7 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C6, both of the first transmission means and the second transmission means can simultaneously form non-transmission sections, and after passing through the respective non-transmission sections, the first member and Since the displacement of the second member is started, it is not necessary to displace either the first member or the second member, and in the meanwhile, the drive means can be idled with a small load. As a result, the force of the drive means can be made stronger, and the first member or second member in the stopped state can be smoothly displaced.

  In the gaming machine C6, in a state where one of the first member or the second member is maintained in the stopped state by the non-transmission section, the other displacement of the first member or the second member is a displacement component downward in the gravity direction. A game machine C8 characterized by comprising:

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C6, when one of the first member or the second member is maintained in the stopped state by the non-transmission section, the other displacement of the first member or the second member Since the first component has a displacement component downward in the direction of gravity, when displacing the other while maintaining one of the first member or the second member in the stopped state, the driving force necessary for the displacement can be suppressed. As a result, the force of the drive means can be made stronger, and the first member or second member in the stopped state can be smoothly displaced. Also, while one of the first member or the second member is maintained in the stopped state, the other of the first member or the second member can be displaced, so both the first member and the second member stop. The effect can be improved by avoiding the state.

  In any one of game machines C6 to C8, at least one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means is a main body portion rotated by the driving force of the drive means and a pin eccentrically located from the rotation center of the main body portion. A crank member having a portion and a guide groove on which a pin portion of the crank member slides, the pin portion sliding along the guide groove imparts displacement to the first member or the second member And a section in which a guide groove of the crank rubbing member is formed in an arc shape concentric with a rotation center of the crank member is the non-transmission section, and a pin portion of the crank member is the non-transmission section. After passing through the transmission section, displacement of the first member or the second member is started, and the pin portion that has reached the predetermined position of the guide groove changes its sliding direction and slides toward the non-transmission section To be If, before the pin portion reaches the non-transmission interval, the gaming machine rotation of the crank member is characterized in that it is stopped C9.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C6 to C8, a section in which the guide groove of the crank rubbing member is formed in a circular arc concentric with the rotation center of the crank member The pin portion of the crank member passes through the non-transmission section, the displacement of the first member or the second member is started, and the pin section that has reached the predetermined position of the guide groove changes the sliding direction to the non-transmission section In the case of sliding in the direction, since the rotation of the crank member is stopped before the pin portion reaches the non-transmission section, it is possible to avoid an excessive load on the drive means.

  That is, by forming the guide groove of the crank contact member in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member, the driving force of the drive means can be made non-transferable (can form a non-transfer section). In the structure in which the guide part reciprocates in the guide groove, the shape of the non-transmission section is a convex arc toward the rotation center of the crank member from the state where the pin section passes through the non-transmission section and is turned at a predetermined position. It becomes. Therefore, when the pin portion after the direction change passes the non-transmission section, not only the sliding resistance increases, but also the displacement amount of the crank contact member per unit rotation of the crank member increases, and the driving means The load on the Therefore, by stopping the rotation of the crank member before the pin portion reaches the non-transmission section, it is possible to avoid that the load of the drive means becomes excessive.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Slide Unit 2400 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising a base member, a slide member slidably disposed on the base member, and a drive means for applying a driving force to the slide member to cause slide displacement, the slide member is rotatable And a conversion means for converting the slide displacement of the slide member with respect to the base member into the rotational movement of the rotation member, wherein the slide displacement is the rotation of the rotation member. A game machine D1 capable of forming a state not converted into exercise.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a base member, a slide member slidably disposed on the base member, and a drive means for applying a driving force to the slide member to cause slide displacement. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2013-236802). There is also known a gaming machine in which a slide member is provided with a rotary member and drive means for driving (rotating) the rotary member. According to this gaming machine, it is possible to rotationally move the rotary member disposed on the slide member while slidingly displacing the slide member (linear motion), thereby performing effects combining linear motion and rotational motion. Can.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the rotary member and the drive means for driving the rotary member are provided on the slide member, the weight as a whole of the slide member is increased, and the slide member is driven. There is a problem that the load of the driving means for (sliding displacement) becomes large.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the rotary member provided rotatably on the slide member and the conversion means for converting the slide displacement of the slide member relative to the base member into the rotational movement of the rotary member are provided. The rotating member can be rotated along with the slide displacement of the slide member. That is, since it is not necessary to provide the slide member with a drive means for driving (rotate) the rotation member, the weight of the slide member as a whole is reduced accordingly, and the slide member is driven (slide displacement) The load on the driving means for

  In this case, according to the gaming machine D1, since the conversion means can form a state in which the slide displacement is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotary member, only the form in which the rotary member is rotated with the slide displacement of the slide member Instead, for example, it is possible to form a configuration in which the slide member is slid and displaced while the rotation member is not rotated. As a result, the number of combinations of movements (linear movement and rotational movement) of the slide member and the rotary member can be increased, and accordingly, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine D1, the conversion means is formed so as to be able to mesh with the rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of slide displacement of the slide member, and rotatably disposed on the slide member. A game machine D2 comprising: a pinion gear; and release means formed so as to be able to release the engagement between the rack gear and the pinion gear and disposed on the base member.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the conversion means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of slide displacement of the slide member, and a pinion gear formed so as to be able to mesh with the rack gear and rotatably mounted on the slide member. In the state in which the pinion gear is meshed with the rack gear, the slide displacement can be converted into the rotational movement of the rotation member by the slide displacement of the slide member with respect to the base member. Further, since the converting means includes the releasing means for releasing the meshing between the rack gear and the pinion gear, it is possible to form a state in which the slide displacement is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member. That is, not only the form in which the rotary member is rotated with the slide displacement of the slide member, for example, it is possible to form a form in which the slide member is slide-displaced while the rotary member is not rotating. The number of combinations of member motion (linear and rotational) can be increased. As a result, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In this case, the releasing means is provided on the base member, and there is no need to provide means for releasing the engagement of the rack gear and the pinion gear on the slide member, so the weight of the entire slide member can be reduced accordingly. . As a result, it is possible to suppress the load of the drive means for driving (sliding) the slide member.

  In the gaming machine D2, the releasing means rotates the portion of the base member at which the rack gear is formed along a rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the rack gear, thereby meshing the rack gear with the pinion gear. A game machine D3 characterized by releasing.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the advantageous effects of the gaming machine D2, the releasing means rotates the rack gear by rotating at least a portion of the base member where the rack gear is formed along a rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the rack gear. Since the engagement with the pinion gear is released, the space required for the rotation (that is, the release of the engagement between the rack gear and the pinion gear) can be suppressed, and the downsizing can be achieved.

  In the gaming machine D3, at least one of the teeth of the rack gear or the pinion gear is formed in a shape in which the tooth thickness gradually decreases toward one side in the tooth width direction.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, at least one of the teeth of the rack gear or the pinion gear is formed in a shape in which the tooth thickness gradually decreases toward one side in the tooth width direction. The above-mentioned portion of the base member is rotated in the reverse direction after at least the portion where the rack gear is formed is rotated along the rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the rack gear and the gear engagement between the rack gear and the pinion gear is released. When the rack gear and the pinion gear are engaged with each other, such engagement can be smoothly performed.

  In the gaming machine D2, the releasing means releases the meshing between the rack gear and the pinion gear by displacing at least a portion of the base member on which the rack gear is formed in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack gear. A game machine D5 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the advantageous effects of the gaming machine D2, the releasing means displaces at least a portion of the base member where the rack gear is formed in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack gear. Since the engagement is released, after the release, the above-described portion of the base member is displaced in the reverse direction, and the engagement can be smoothly performed when the rack gear and the pinion gear are engaged.

  In the gaming machine D1, the conversion means is formed so as to be able to mesh with the rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of slide displacement of the slide member, and rotatably disposed on the slide member. And a pinion gear, and a tooth is missing at a part of the rack gear.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1, the conversion means is a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of slide displacement of the slide member, and a slide member formed to be able to mesh with the rack gear. Since the slide member is slidingly displaced with respect to the base member in a state in which the pinion gear is engaged with the rack gear, the slide displacement is converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member. can do.

  In this case, since the rack gear has teeth missing in part, it is possible to form a state in which the slide displacement is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member when the pinion gear passes through the tooth missing portion of the rack gear . That is, according to the present configuration, the rotary member can be rotated with the slide displacement of the slide member until the pinion gear reaches the portion where the teeth of the rack gear are missing, while the teeth of the rack gear can be rotated. By stopping the slide displacement of the slide member when the pinion gear reaches the portion where the dropout is missing, the rotation of the rotary member can be continued by its inertia force.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects exerted by the gaming machine D1, not only the form in which the rotary member is rotated with the slide displacement of the slide member but also the state in which the slide displacement of the slide member is stopped The form in which the rotation member is rotated can be formed, and the number of combinations of movement (linear movement and rotation movement) of the slide member and the rotation member can be increased. As a result, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  Further, according to the gaming machine D6, the teeth engagement of the rack gear and the pinion gear is released by removing some teeth of the rack gear, and the means for releasing the engagement of the rack gear and the pinion gear is a slide member. Therefore, the weight of the slide member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. As a result, it is possible to suppress the load of the drive means for driving (sliding) the slide member.

  In the gaming machine D6, a tooth adjacent to the missing part of the teeth of the rack gear is made more rigid than other teeth.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D6, the teeth adjacent to the missing part of the teeth of the rack gear are made more rigid than the other teeth, so the durability is improved. Can be That is, the teeth adjacent to the missing part collide with the teeth of the pinion gear which has passed the part where the teeth of the rack gear are missing, so that the durability is improved by making the rigidity high. be able to.

  In addition, as a means to raise rigidity, the form which enlarges the tooth width of a tooth is illustrated, for example. According to this example, the rigidity can be increased without deteriorating the meshing property with the pinion gear.

  In the gaming machine D1, the conversion means is formed so as to be able to mesh with the rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of slide displacement of the slide member, and rotatably disposed on the slide member. And a one-way clutch disposed in the rotation transmission path from the pinion gear or the pinion gear to the rotating member, the one-way clutch changing between a state in which rotation transmission is allowed and a state in which rotation is interrupted A game machine D8 characterized in that it can be formed.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1, the conversion means is a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of slide displacement of the slide member, and a slide member formed to be able to mesh with the rack gear. Since the slide member is slidingly displaced with respect to the base member in a state in which the pinion gear is engaged with the rack gear, the slide displacement is converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member. can do.

  In this case, since the one-way clutch is formed so as to be able to change the state of permitting rotation transmission and the state of disconnection, changing the one-way clutch to a state of cutting off rotation transmission causes the slide displacement to rotate. It is possible to form a state which is not converted into the rotational movement of the member. That is, the one-way clutch is in a state of permitting transmission of rotation, and not only the form in which the rotating member is rotated according to the slide displacement of the slide member, for example, the one-way clutch is in a state of blocking transmission of rotation The slide member is changed to a state in which the slide member is slide-displaced while non-rotation does not occur, or to a state in which the one-way clutch allows transmission of rotation when the displacement of the slide member is stopped. In the stopped state, the rotation of the rotating member can form a form that is continued by its inertial force.

  Thus, according to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, not only the form in which the rotary member is rotated with the slide displacement of the slide member but also the slide member is slid while the rotary member is not rotated It is possible to form the displacement form or the form in which the rotary member is rotated with the slide displacement of the slide member stopped, and the number of combinations of movement (linear movement and rotational movement) of the slide member and the rotary member It can be increased. As a result, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  The gaming machine D8 includes a displacement member disposed displaceably on the slide member and drive means for driving the displacement member and disposed on the slide member, and the one-way clutch transmits rotation. A game machine D9 comprising: an operation element operated to change a state of permitting and a state of interruption, the operation element being operated by the displaced displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D8, the displacement member disposed displaceably on the slide member and the drive means for driving the displacement member and disposed on the slide member are provided. In addition to the movement of the slide member and the rotation member (linear movement and rotation movement), the displacement of the displacement member can be combined, and the number of combinations can be increased. As a result, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In this case, since the operation element of the one-way clutch is operated by the displaced displacement member, the displacement member can share the role of rendering by displacement and the function of operating the operation element. That is, since it is not necessary to separately provide the slide member with means for operating the operation element of the one-way clutch, the weight of the slide member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. As a result, it is possible to suppress the load of the drive means for driving (sliding) the slide member.

  In the gaming machine D8, the one-way clutch includes an operation element operated to change a state of permitting transmission of rotation and a state of interrupting rotation, and the base member is used for sliding the slide member. A game machine D10, comprising: an engagement portion positioned on a displacement trajectory of the operation element, wherein the operation element is operated by the engagement portion when the slide member is slid.

  According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D8, the base member includes the engaging portion positioned on the displacement locus when the sliding member is slidingly displaced, and the sliding member is engaged when slidingly displaced. Since the operating element is operated by the joint portion, there is no need to provide means for switching the state of the one-way clutch (i.e., operating the operating element) on the slide member, and accordingly, the weight of the slide member as a whole Can be lightened. As a result, it is possible to suppress the load of the drive means for driving (sliding) the slide member.

  In addition, as long as the arrangement position of an engaging part is on the displacement locus of the above-mentioned operation element, it may be any position. For example, it may be one end or the other end on the displacement trajectory, or may be halfway on the displacement trajectory.

  The gaming machine D10 includes a second slide member slidably disposed on the base member, and a second drive unit for applying a driving force to the second slide member to cause a slide displacement, and the second slide A game machine D11 characterized in that the position of the engagement portion is changeable along the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member in accordance with the slide displacement of the member.

  According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D10, the position of the engaging portion is formed along the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member so as to be changeable along with the slide displacement of the second slide member. It is possible to change the position where the state of the clutch is switched, i.e. the position where the rotation of the rotating member is changed from the permitted state to the restricted state or from the restricted state to the permitted state. Thereby, the position where the rotational state of the rotary member is changed when the slide member is slide displaced, and the position where the rotary member is rotated in a state where the slide displacement of the slide member is stopped are, for example, according to the gaming state. It is possible to change, as a result, it is possible to enhance the rendering effect.

  Further, in addition to the slide displacement of the slide member, the second slide member is also capable of slide displacement, so that the rendering effect can be enhanced by that amount, and the role of the second slide member performing the rendering by displacement. Since the position of the engaging portion is also changed, it is not necessary to separately provide means for changing the position of the engaging portion. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  The gaming machine D10 includes a second slide member slidably disposed on the base member, and a second drive unit for applying a driving force to the second slide member to cause a slide displacement, and the second slide A game machine D12 characterized in that the position of the engaging portion is formed so as to be changeable between a position at which the operation element can be operated and a position at which the operation element can not be operated in accordance with the slide displacement of the member.

  According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D10, the position of the engaging portion can be changed between the position where the operating element can be operated and the position where the operation can not be performed with the slide displacement of the second slide member. Since it is formed, it is possible to form a form in which the state of the one-way clutch is switched and a form in which the state of the one-way clutch is not switched when the slide member is slidingly displaced. That is, a mode in which the rotational state of the rotary member is changed while the slide member is displaced from the start end to the end, and a state in which the rotational state of the rotary member is not changed while the slide member is displaced from the start end to the end It can be formed and its effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in addition to the slide displacement of the slide member, the second slide member is also capable of slide displacement, so that the rendering effect can be enhanced by that amount, and the role of the second slide member performing the rendering by displacement. Since the position of the engaging portion is also changed, it is not necessary to separately provide means for changing the position of the engaging portion. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine D11 or D12, the engaging portion may be disposed on the second slide member, or may be disposed on the base member. In the latter case, the engaging portion may be disposed displaceably on the base member, and the second slide member may displace the engaging portion directly or indirectly.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Slide Unit 8400 as an Example>
In the gaming machine provided with a base member, a shielding state for shielding a predetermined area of the base member, and a shielding opening means capable of forming an opening state for opening the predetermined area, the shielding opening means is A first member disposed linearly displaceably on the base member, a first side pinion gear rotatably disposed on the first member, and a second side rack gear engaged with the first side pinion gear And a base-side rack gear formed on the base member and meshed with the first side pinion gear, and having a second member disposed on the first member so as to be linearly displaced. Since the two members are linearly displaced to one side, the shielding state is formed, and the first and second members are linearly displaced to the other side opposite to the one side. An open state is formed Gaming machine E1, characterized in that it is.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a base member and a shield opening means capable of forming a shield state for shielding a predetermined area of the base member and an open state for opening the predetermined area. For example, in JP 2011-156058A, a plurality of plate-shaped rotary plates are rotatably disposed in a predetermined area, and the predetermined area is shielded by directing the plate surfaces of the plurality of rotary plates to the front. On the other hand, each rotating plate is rotated by 90 degrees and the plate thickness part (side surface) is directed to the front, thereby providing a gap between the rotating plates and opening a predetermined area (forming an open state) Is disclosed.

  However, according to the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, even if an open state is formed, each rotary plate in a state in which the plate thickness portion (side surface) is directed to the front remains in the predetermined area. However, there has been a problem that the area to be opened is reduced accordingly. Even if the thickness of each rotary plate is reduced, there is a limit to the reduction in thickness in order to secure the strength at the time of rotation.

  On the other hand, one plate-like body having the same area as the predetermined area is disposed displaceably, and the plate-like body is displaced (arranged) to the predetermined area to shield the predetermined area (shield On the other hand, a gaming machine having a configuration in which a predetermined area is opened (an open state is formed) is also known by retracting the plate-like body from the predetermined area (displacement from the predetermined area). There is. According to the gaming machine of this configuration, the predetermined area can be completely opened by retracting the plate-like body from the predetermined area.

  However, in the gaming machine having such a configuration, since the plate-like body has the same area as the predetermined area, a space having the same area as the predetermined area is provided as a space for arranging the plate-like body retracted from the predetermined area. There is a problem that it becomes necessary and causes an increase in size. Moreover, since it is a plate-like body having the same area as the predetermined area, it takes a relatively long time to retract such a plate-like body from the predetermined area or to arrange the retracted area from the retracted position to the predetermined area. There is a problem that it is difficult to quickly switch between the shielding state and the opening state.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine E1, the shield opening means includes a first member disposed linearly displaceably on the base member, a first side pinion gear rotatably disposed on the first member, and A base-side rack gear having a second side rack gear engaged with the first side pinion gear and a second member disposed linearly displaceably on the first member, and a base member formed on the base member and engaged with the first side pinion gear And the first member and the second member are linearly displaced to one side to form a shielding state, and the first member and the second member are linearly displaced to the other side opposite to the one side. As a result, an open state is formed.

  That is, since the first member and the second member are retracted from the predetermined area by the linear displacement to the other side, the predetermined area can be opened wider. In addition, since the first member and the second member are overlapped when the first member and the second member are retracted, the first member and the second member retracted from these predetermined areas are disposed accordingly Space can be reduced to achieve miniaturization.

  Furthermore, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state in which the second member is accelerated more than the first member. The time required to retract the second member from the predetermined area or to arrange the second member from the retracted position to the predetermined area can be shortened, and switching between the shielding state and the open state can be performed quickly.

  In the shielding state in which the predetermined area is shielded, the entire area of the predetermined area does not have to be completely shielded by the first member and the second member, and an area opened to a part of the predetermined area May exist. Similarly, in the open state in which the predetermined area is opened, the entire area of the predetermined area does not have to be completely open, and a part of the predetermined area may be part of the first member or the second member. There may be a shielded area. That is, in the shielding state, the shielded area may be relatively large with respect to the open state. In other words, in the open state, the opened area may be relatively large with respect to the shielding state.

  In the gaming machine E1, the first member includes a first main body portion supported by the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a first displacement portion connected to the main body portion, and the second member is configured to A second body portion having the second side rack gear engaged with the first side pinion gear and supported by the first member so as to be linearly displaceable; and a second displacement portion connected to the second body portion A game machine E2 characterized in that the first main body portion of the first member is supported by the base member outside the predetermined area.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1, the first member includes a first main body portion supported by the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a first displacement portion connected to the main body portion. And a second body portion coupled to the second body portion, the second body portion having a second side rack gear engaged with the first side pinion gear and supported by the first member so as to be linearly displaceable. And a second displacement portion, wherein the first body portion of the first member is supported by the base member outside the predetermined region, so that when the first member and the second member are linearly displaced to one side or the other side In the above, only the locus of the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion can be superimposed on the predetermined area. That is, it is possible to prevent the first body portion and the second body portion from passing outside the predetermined area, and to prevent the locus from overlapping the predetermined area. Thereby, when the open state is formed, the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion are completely retracted from the predetermined area, and a part of the first member and the second member does not remain in the predetermined area, The entire surface of the predetermined area can be completely released.

  In the gaming machine E2, the shield opening means comprises a drive gear disposed on the base member, and the first main body of the first member comprises a first side rack gear engaged with the drive gear. A game machine E3 characterized in that the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member by driving the first side rack gear by the drive gear.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E2, the shield opening means includes the drive gear disposed on the base member, and the first side rack gear engaged with the drive gear is a first member The first member has a structure in which the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member by driving the first side rack gear by the drive gear, so the structure for linearly displacing the first member is compact. Can be That is, of the space necessary outside the predetermined area of the base member, the space other than the space necessary for retracting the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion of the first member and the second member can be reduced.

  In any one of the game machines E1 to E3, the shield opening means is a second side pinion gear rotatably disposed on the second member and meshed with the base side rack gear, and the second side pinion gear A game machine E4 having a third side rack gear to be meshed and a third member disposed linearly displaceably on the second member.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the shield opening means is rotatably disposed on the second member and the second side pinion gear meshed with the base side rack gear And the third side rack gear engaged with the second side pinion gear, and the third member disposed linearly displaceably on the second member, and the second When the member is linearly displaced to one side, the third member can be linearly displaced to one side with displacement of the second member, and the second member is displaced to the other side with linear displacement of the first member. When the second member is displaced linearly, the third member can be displaced linearly to the other side with the displacement of the second member.

  Therefore, the first member, the second member, and the third member can be disposed in a predetermined area by linear displacement toward one side of the first member, the second member, and the third member to form a shielding state. With linear displacement to the other side of the first member, the second member and the third member, the first member, the second member and the third member are retracted from the predetermined area (displaced out of the predetermined area) ), Can form an open state.

  In this case, since the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from the predetermined area by the linear displacement to the other side, the predetermined area can be opened wider. Further, in a state where the first member, the second member and the third member are retracted, the first member, the second member and the third member are overlapped, and accordingly, the first member retracted from these predetermined areas. The space for disposing the member, the second member, and the third member can be reduced to achieve miniaturization.

  In particular, according to the structure in which the predetermined area is shielded by the three members (the first member, the second member, and the third member) in this manner, comparison with the case where the predetermined area of the same area is shielded by two members Thus, the space for arranging the three members retracted from the predetermined area can be further reduced. This is because the area can be made smaller if the three divided areas are overlapped than when the predetermined area divided into two areas is overlapped.

  Furthermore, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state in which the second member is accelerated more than the first member, and Since the third member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a further accelerated state, the first member, the second member and the third member are retracted from the predetermined area or from the retracted position Switching between the shielding state and the opening state can be performed more quickly by reducing the time required to place in a predetermined area.

  In the gaming machine E4, the third member has a third side rack gear on which the second side pinion gear is meshed, and a third main body portion supported by the second member so as to be linearly displaceable, and the third body portion A game machine E5 comprising: a third displacement portion connected to the main body portion.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E4, the third member has the third rack gear engaged with the second pinion gear and is supported by the second member in a linearly displaceable manner. Since the main body portion and the third displacement portion connected to the third main body portion are provided, when the first member, the second member and the third member are linearly displaced to one side or the other side, the first Only trajectories of the displacement portion, the second displacement portion, and the third displacement portion can be superimposed on the predetermined area. That is, the first main body portion, the second main body portion and the third main body portion are allowed to pass outside the predetermined area, and it is possible to prevent the locus from overlapping the predetermined area. Thereby, when the open state is formed, the first displacement portion, the second displacement portion, and the third displacement portion are completely retracted from the predetermined area, and the first member, the second member, and the third area are formed in the predetermined area. Since no part of the member remains, the entire surface of the predetermined area can be completely released.

  Note that the technical idea (the relationship of the third member to the second member) in the game machine E4 or E5 may be expanded to be a game machine further including a fourth member, a fifth member,.

  That is, the shield opening means has a second side pinion gear rotatably disposed on the second member and meshed with the base side rack gear, and a third side rack gear meshed with the second side pinion gear. The shield opening means is rotatably disposed on the nth member and the meshing of the base side rack gear is provided by expanding the configuration including the third member disposed linearly displaceably on the second member. It is also possible to further include an n-th side pinion gear to be made and an n + 1-th member having an (n + 1) th side rack gear meshed with the n-th side pinion gear and linearly displaceable on the n-th member ( (Where n is an integer of 3 or more).

  Similarly, the third member has a third side rack gear with which the second side pinion gear is meshed, and is connected to the third body portion supported by the second member in a linearly displaceable manner, and the third body portion Extending the configuration of including the third displacement portion, the n + 1th member has an n + 1th rack gear engaged with the nth side pinion gear and an n + 1th main portion supported linearly displaceably by the nth member And an (n + 1) th displacement portion connected to the (n + 1) th main portion (where n is an integer of 3 or more).

  In any one of the game machines E1 to E3, the shield opening means is a third member disposed linearly displaceably on the second member, and the first member and the second member face one side or the other side. And third relative displacement utilizing means for linearly displacing the third member to one side or the other side in accordance with relative displacement between the first member and the second member when being displaced linearly. A gaming machine E6 to be.

  According to the gaming machine E6, the shield opening means is a case where the third member disposed linearly displaceably on the second member, and the first member and the second member are linearly displaced toward one side or the other side. And third relative displacement utilizing means for linearly displacing the third member to one side or the other side in accordance with relative displacement between the first member and the second member. Therefore, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effects are exerted.

  That is, by linear displacement to one side of the first member, the second member and the third member, the first member, the second member and the third member can be arranged in a predetermined area to form a shielding state. With linear displacement to the other side of the first member, the second member and the third member, the first member, the second member and the third member are retracted from the predetermined area (displaced out of the predetermined area) ), Can form an open state.

  In this case, since the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from the predetermined area by the linear displacement to the other side, the predetermined area can be opened wider. Further, in a state where the first member, the second member and the third member are retracted, the first member, the second member and the third member are overlapped, and accordingly, the first member retracted from these predetermined areas. The space for disposing the member, the second member, and the third member can be reduced to achieve miniaturization.

  Note that, according to the structure in which the predetermined area is shielded by the three members (the first member, the second member, and the third member) in this manner, comparison with the case where the predetermined area of the same area is shielded by the two members Thus, the space for arranging the three members retracted from the predetermined area can be further reduced. This is because the area is smaller when the three divided areas are overlapped than when the predetermined area divided into two areas is overlapped.

  Furthermore, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state in which the second member is accelerated more than the first member. Therefore, when the third relative displacement utilizing means linearly displaces the third member in accordance with the relative displacement between the first member and the second member, the third member is accelerated by an amount corresponding to the acceleration of the second member. Linear displacement can be accelerated more than at least the first member. The time required for retracting the first member, the second member and the third member from the predetermined area or for arranging the first member, the second member and the third member from the retracted position to the predetermined area is shortened to switch between the shielding state and the opening state It can be done quickly.

<About the concept of the invention in which the slide unit 400, the protrusion unit 700, and the elevation unit 800 are an example>
In the gaming machine provided with a first member and a second member which are formed displaceably between the retracted position and the extended position, the first member is linearly displaced from the retracted position to the extended position. The game machine F1 is disposed at the overhanging position by being disposed, and being displaced in a mode including at least rotational displacement from the retracted position.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a first member and a second member formed to be linearly displaceable between a retracted position and an extended position, for example (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-252533). In this type of gaming machine, for example, the first member and the second member retracted to the retracted position are respectively displaced to the overhanging position and brought close to or into contact with each other to associate them (integrated) An effect of causing the player to visually recognize as one character is performed.

  In this case, in order to enhance the rendering effect, it is effective that a larger character can be formed when the first member and the second member are displaced to the overhanging position. For that purpose, it is necessary to form the 1st member and the 2nd member in a large size.

  However, in the prior art described above, since the first member and the second member are respectively displaced to the overhanging position by linear displacement, when the first member and the second member are enlarged, the overhanging position is obtained. There is a possibility that the two may interfere with each other on the way of displacement. Therefore, the displacement of the first member and the displacement of the second member can not be performed at the same time, and it is necessary to shift the respective displacements. There was a problem that the staging effect was hindered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the first member is disposed at the overhanging position by being linearly displaced from the retracted position, and the second member is displaced in a mode including at least rotational displacement from the retracted position. As a result, the first member and the second member can be prevented from interfering with each other in the middle of displacement to the overhanging position. Therefore, since the displacement of the first member and the displacement of the second member can be performed simultaneously, the time until the character is formed can be shortened, and the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine F1, the second member is disposed at the overhanging position by being displaced in a mode in which rotational displacement and linear displacement are combined.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1, the second member is disposed at the overhanging position by being displaced in a mode in which rotational displacement and linear displacement are combined, so that the curved shape is formed. Can form a locus of Therefore, interference with the first member can be easily suppressed during the displacement of the second member to the overhanging position.

  The gaming machine F2 includes a linear base member that is linearly displaced, and the second member is rotatably disposed on the linear base member, and is thus displaced in a combination of rotational displacement and linear displacement. Game machine F3 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, the linear base member which is linearly displaced is provided, and the second member is rotatably disposed on the linear base member, whereby rotational displacement and linear displacement are achieved. And the second member can be easily suppressed from interfering with the first member in the middle of the displacement to the overhanging position, and the attitude of the second member at the retracted position is free. The degree can be increased. That is, since the second member can rotate in relation to the first member while moving to the overhanging position by linear displacement of the linear base member, the rotation is not moved to the overhanging position, but It can be used as a displacement for avoiding interference with one member, and as a result, mutual interference can be easily suppressed. Further, since the attitude of the second member at the retracted position can be defined independently of the attitude at the extended position, the degree of freedom of the attitude of the second member at the retracted position can be enhanced.

  The gaming machine F2 or F3 includes a liquid crystal display device disposed in the gaming area, and the retracted position of the second member is set on one side or the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the gaming area A game machine F4 characterized in that the second member is arranged in a horizontally long attitude at the overhanging position and in a vertically long attitude at the retracted position.

  Here, in the configuration in which the second member is formed into a horizontally long shape, arranged in a horizontally long posture at the overhang position, and the character is formed together with the first member, a large character can not be formed, and a rendering effect is sufficiently achieved. I can not demonstrate. That is, while the game area is formed vertically, while the liquid crystal display device is formed horizontally, one side and the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area are relatively narrowed, and the member installation space It is difficult to secure Therefore, in order to prevent the second member from protruding into the display area of the liquid crystal display device at the retracted position, it has been necessary to form the second member in a small size.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2 or F3, the second member is disposed in a horizontally long attitude at the overhanging position, and is disposed in a vertically long attitude at the retracted position. Therefore, the second member can be increased in size by effectively utilizing the arrangement space of the member on one side or the other side of the liquid crystal display device, and as a result, the character formed with the first member at the overhanging position Can be made larger.

  The gaming machine F3 is characterized by comprising: driving means for applying a driving force to the linear base member for linear displacement; and a conversion mechanism for converting linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the second member. Game machine F5.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F3, driving means for applying a driving force to the linear base member for linear displacement, and a conversion mechanism for converting linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the second member And, since the linear displacement of the linear base member and the rotation of the second member can be synchronized, the relative positional accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member can be enhanced. As a result, interference with the first member can be easily suppressed during the displacement of the second member to the overhanging position.

  In addition, since it is not necessary to separately provide drive means for rotating the second member, the second member can be formed larger accordingly, and the character formed with the first member can be further enlarged at the overhang position. . For example, even if the area is relatively narrow and it is difficult to secure the space for arranging the members, such as one side and the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area, the second member is evacuated to the area The second member can be formed large while setting the position.

  In any one of the game machines F1 to F5, the game machine comprises a third member formed displaceably between the retracted position and the overhanging position, the third member being the first member and the second member in the overhanging position A game machine F6 characterized by being arranged with different positions in the front-rear direction.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, since the third member is formed so as to be displaceable between the retracted position and the extended position, the first member and the second member In addition, a larger character can be formed, and the effect can be enhanced accordingly. In this case, since the third member is disposed at a position where the first and second members are different from each other in the front-rear direction at the extended position, the third member does not abut on the first and second members at the extended position. That is, in the case where the members are brought into contact with each other at the overhang position or there is a possibility of coming into contact, the third member is required to set the displacement speed in consideration of breakage due to impact at the time of contact. Since the first member and the second member are not in contact with each other, the displacement speed can be made relatively fast. As a result, for example, it is possible to form an aspect such as displacing the subsequent third member so as to catch up with the first member and the second member at the overhang position, and to improve the rendering effect when forming the character. .

  In the game machine F6, a game machine F7 characterized in that the third member is provided with an overhang portion which is formed so as to project to the same position as the first member and the second member in the front-rear direction.

  Here, when the positions of the first and second members and the third member are different in the front-rear direction, the size in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine is increased by that amount. If the dimensions in the front-rear direction of the first member, the second member, and the third member are respectively reduced (thinned) in order to suppress the dimension in the front-rear direction, it is difficult to ensure rigidity.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F7, the third member includes the overhanging portion formed to project to the same position as the first member and the second member in the front-rear direction, so that the entire (first member And the second member and the third member), while reducing the size of the gaming machine in the back and forth direction, while increasing the dimension in the front and back direction of the third member, and securing its rigidity can do.

  A game machine F8 comprising an abutted member disposed on the first member in any one of the game machines F1 to F7 and having a part of the second member abutted at an extended position.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the first member is provided with the abutted member to which a part of the second member abuts at the overhang position. The displacement of the second member can be stopped by the contact with the contact member.

  The abutted member may be formed at a position at which the second member is constantly abutted when the first member and the second member are arranged at the extended position, or the first member and When the second member is disposed at the overhanging position, the second member may be formed in a position where the second member abuts when both approach closer than the reference position due to control variation and dimensional variation.

  In the gaming machine F8, the abutted member is formed so as to be displaceable in a direction toward and away from the first member, and the first member is in a state in which the abutted member is separated from the first member Game machine F9 characterized in that it is placed in the overhang position.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F8, the abutted member is formed displaceably in the direction approaching and separating from the first member, and the first member is the first abutted member. Since it arrange | positions in the extended position in the state spaced apart from the member, the reliable contact with the 2nd member in the extended position can be enabled. Further, at the extended position, the character formed by the first member and the second member can be made larger because the abutted member is displaced in the direction to be separated from the first member.

  In the gaming machine F9, the gaming machine F10 is characterized in that the abutted member is displaced in the direction approaching the first member after the first member is placed at the overhanging position.

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F9, after the first member is disposed at the overhanging position, the abutted member is displaced in the direction approaching the first member, so that the second A space can be formed for displacement of the member. That is, when the first member is disposed at the overhanging position, the abutted member is separated from the first member, and the first member is made to receive the displacement of the second member, and thereafter, to the first member The abutted member is displaced in the direction in which it abuts, and the space formed along with the displacement can be used as the displacement space of the second member, and the effect of the second member can be enhanced by the displacement of the second member.

  In the gaming machine F8, the abutted member is formed so as to be displaceable in a direction toward and away from the first member, and the first abutted member at least in the retracted position is the first member. A game machine F11 characterized in that the game machine is placed in proximity to the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F8, the abutted member is formed displaceably in the direction approaching and separating from the first member, and the first member is hit at least at the retracted position. Since the contact member is in the state of being in proximity to the first member, the arrangement space of the first member at the retracted position can be suppressed. In addition, when the abutted member is displaced in the direction of separating from the first member at the extended position, the character formed by the first member and the second member can be made larger by that much.

  In the gaming machine F11, the gaming machine F12 is characterized in that the abutted member is maintained in a state of being in proximity to the first member until the first member is placed at the overhanging position. .

  According to the gaming machine F12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F11, the first member is maintained in a state in which the abutted member is in proximity to the first member until it is arranged at the overhang position. Therefore, it is possible to suppress interference of the abutted member with the second member in the middle of the displacement to the extended position. Therefore, the time until the character is formed can be shortened, and the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In any one of game machines F9 to F12, two sets of the second member and the abutted member are provided, and in one set, when the second member is abutted against the abutted member, the abutment thereof The game machine is characterized in that, in the other group, the abutted member is formed to be displaced toward the second member.

  According to the gaming machine F13, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F9 to F12, two sets of the second member and the abutted member are provided, and in one set, the second member corresponds to the abutted member When contacted, the abutted member is formed to be displaced toward the second member in the other set with the contact, so that, for example, in one set, the second member is at the reference position When being displaced beyond A and abutted against the abutted member, the abutted member can be displaced toward the second member in the other set along with the abutment. Therefore, in the other set, the abutted member is abutted against the second member, so that the impact due to the contact of the second member with the abutted member in one set is received only by the first member. Instead, the second member in the other set can also be received. Thereby, kinetic energy can be dispersed, displacement of the second member in one set can be easily stopped, and breakage of each member can be suppressed.

  As a structure in which the abutted members in the other pair are displaced toward the second member in accordance with the abutment in one pair, for example, the displacement of the abutted members in one pair is subjected to the afflicted members in the other pair A structure which is transmitted to the abutting member and the abutted member in the other set is displaced toward the second member according to the transmission, and the displacement of the abutted member in one set is transmitted to the first member, With the transmission, the first member is displaced, whereby the abutted members in the other set are displaced toward the second member integrally with the first member, or a structure combining these, etc. Is illustrated.

  In any one of gaming machines F1 to F13, the gaming machine is characterized by comprising a periodic displacement member that is in contact with the first member and the second member at the overhang position and is capable of periodic displacement. Machine F14.

  According to the gaming machine F14, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F1 to F13, the gaming machine F14 includes a periodic displacement member formed to be able to abut on the first member and the second member at the overhang position. Since the cyclic displacement can be formed, the cyclic displacement of the cyclic displacement member can be used to periodically displace the first member and the second member. That is, the character formed by the first member and the second member and the periodic displacement member can be vibrated, thereby enhancing the rendering effect. Further, in this case, the periodic displacement members share the periodic displacement by bringing the members into contact with each other, and it is not necessary to provide a mechanism for periodically displacing the first and second members. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Note that the first member and the second member may be in contact with each other at the extended position, or may be in a separated state (non-contact).

  In the gaming machine F14, the periodic displacement member is disposed at a position where the longitudinal position in the overhanging position is in front of the first member and the second member.

  According to the gaming machine F15, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F14, the cyclic displacement member is disposed at a position where the longitudinal position in the overhanging position is in front of the first member and the second member. The member (periodically displacing member) disposed on the side closer to the person can be periodically displaced (vibrated). That is, since the character is vibrated by the member on the near side which is easy for the player to visually recognize as the vibration source, it is possible to perform the effect of easily transmitting the powerful force by the vibration to the player.

  In the gaming machine F14 or F15, the gaming machine F16 is characterized in that the first member and the second member are not in contact with each other at the overhanging position.

  According to the gaming machine F16, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F14 or F15, since the first member and the second member are not in contact with each other at the overhanging position, cyclic displacement of the periodic displacement member Transmission to one member and the second member can be facilitated. In addition, the first member and the second member can be periodically displaced (vibrated) in different modes without being associated with each other. That is, since the first member and the second member have different configurations (the number of parts and the shape of each part), even if the same vibration is transmitted from the periodic displacement member, they vibrate in different manners. Therefore, it is possible to vibrate the portion formed by the first member of one character and the portion formed by the second member in different modes. Therefore, the effect can be enhanced by that amount. Further, since it is not necessary to provide a plurality of different vibration sources, it is possible to reduce the product cost accordingly.

<About the concept of the invention taking the slide unit 400, the upper combining unit 700, and the lower combining unit 800 as an example>
A first group of displacement means formed displaceably between the retracted position and the overhanging position, and a second group consisting of displacement means formed displaceably between the retracted position and the overhanging position And when each displacement means of the first group is arranged at the overhang position, a first effect mode is formed by each displacement means of the first group, and the second group of In the gaming machine in which the second effect mode is formed by the respective displacement means of the second group when the respective displacement means is disposed at the overhang position, one of the displacement means of the first group and the one or more of the first group. A game machine G1 comprising a combination means which doubles as one displacement means in the second group.

  Here, the first group consisting of a plurality of displacement means formed displaceably between the retracted position and the overhanging position, and the plurality of displacement means formed displaceably between the retracted position and the overhanging position A gaming machine provided with a second group is known (e.g., JP-A-2014-176578).

  According to this gaming machine, when the respective displacement means of the first group are arranged at the overhanging position, the respective displacement means of the first group are associated (integrated) to form one character (first character) When each displacement means of the second group is arranged at the overhang position while making the player recognize it as the effect aspect), the respective displacement means of the second group are associated (integrated), and another character is An effect of causing the player to be recognized as (the second effect mode) is performed. That is, in the first gaming state, each displacement means of the second group is retracted to the retracted position, while each displacement means of the first group is disposed to the overhanging position, the respective groups of the first group are The first character is formed in the game area by the displacement means, and in the second gaming state, each displacement means of the first group is retracted to the retracted position, while each displacement means of the second group is extended to the overhanging position By arranging, the effect of forming the second character in the game area is performed by the respective displacement means of the second group.

  In this case, in order to enhance the rendering effect, it is effective that a larger character can be formed. For that purpose, it is necessary to form the displacement means of the first group and the displacement means of the second group to be large, respectively.

  However, if a plurality of characters (representation modes) are formed as in the above-described prior art, the total number of displacement means required to form a plurality of characters also increases accordingly, and each displacement means is retracted. There is a problem that it is difficult to upsize each displacement means because the area (space) to be kept is limited. Therefore, it is difficult to increase each character (representation mode).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, since the combined means is used which combines one displacement means in the first group and one displacement means in the second group, a plurality of them (the It is possible to reduce the total number of displacement means required to form the first and second) presentation modes, and to enlarge each displacement means. As a result, each rendering mode (character) can be enlarged.

  In the gaming machine G1, the combined use means is a position where the overhanging position disposed when forming the first effect mode is different from the overhanging position disposed when forming the second effect mode. A gaming machine G2 characterized by being.

  Here, the first effect mode and the second effect mode are formed when the combination means is disposed at the same overhang position in the case where the first effect mode is formed and the case where the second effect mode is formed. It becomes easy for the player to recognize that the common displacement means (shared means) is used in the effect mode, and the interest is hindered. In addition, when it is necessary to form the first effect mode and the second effect mode respectively using the combined means arranged at the same position (the overhang position), the degree of freedom is reduced accordingly. It becomes difficult to form the difference (shape and arrangement position) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the combination means also forms the overhanging position disposed when forming the first effect mode, and the second effect mode Since the extension position to be placed is different from the position at which the player is placed, it can be made difficult for the player to recognize that such combined means is shared by the first effect mode and the second effect mode. Can be suppressed. In addition, since the combination means can be arranged at different positions (overhanging positions) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the degree of freedom can be enhanced, and the first effect mode and the second effect mode Can be easily formed.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the combination means is characterized in that the attitude at the time of forming the first effect mode and the attitude at the time of forming the second effect mode are different. Gaming machine G3.

  Here, in the case where the first effect mode is formed and the case where the second effect mode is formed, the first effect mode and the second effect mode are common if the combined means has the same posture. This makes it easy for the player to recognize that the displacing means (shared means) is being used, and inhibits interest. In addition, when it is necessary to form the first effect mode and the second effect mode by using the same means with the same posture, the degree of freedom is reduced accordingly, and the first effect mode and the second effect mode are reduced. This makes it difficult to form a difference (shape or arrangement position) with the effect mode.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the combined means has an attitude when forming the first effect mode and an attitude when forming the second effect mode Can be made difficult for the player to recognize that such combined means are shared by the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and it is possible to suppress the inhibition of interest . In addition, the degree of freedom can be enhanced as long as the dual purpose means can be different postures in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the difference between the first effect mode and the second effect mode (shape and arrangement Can be easily formed.

  In the gaming machine G2 or G3, when the combined means is disposed at the overhanging position when forming the first effect mode, the combined means may back and forth with respect to at least one displacement means in the first group. A game machine G4 characterized in that directional positions are different and at least a part of them overlap in a front view.

  Here, the combination means has different overhanging positions or (and) different postures when the first effect mode is formed and the second effect is formed, and forms a plurality of stop states. Because of the necessity, the control or structure becomes complicated, and the stop state (arrangement position or (and) posture) is likely to vary accordingly. In this case, in a structure in which the dual purpose means abuts one displacement means at the overhang position (at least a part of the longitudinal direction matches), the disposition position or posture of the dual purpose means does not reach the target position. While a gap is formed between the displacing device and the displacing device, one displacing device is pushed out to cause a positional deviation when the disposition position or posture of the combined device exceeds the target position. Therefore, it becomes difficult to maintain the relationship with one displacement means.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2 or G3, when the combined means is disposed at the overhanging position at the time of forming the first effect mode, the first group of For at least one of the displacing means, the position in the front-rear direction is different, and at least a part overlaps in front view, so that even when the stop state (the overhang position or (and) posture) varies, The relationship between the displacement means and the combined means can be easily maintained. That is, by partially overlapping in a front view, even when displacement of the combined means is insufficient, formation of a gap with one of the displacement means can be suppressed, and the combined position is different. Even when the displacement of the means becomes excessive, it is possible to suppress that one displacement means is pushed out to cause positional deviation. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the association between the one displacement means and the combined means.

  In the gaming machine G4, the one displacement means and the other displacement means in the first group are brought into contact with each other when disposed at the overhanging position when forming the first effect mode. Game machine G5 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine G5, in the gaming machine G4, when one displacement means and the other displacement means in the first group are disposed at the overhanging position when forming the first effect mode, Since the single displacement means and the other displacement means are associated (integrated) with each other, the player can easily recognize the whole as a predetermined character.

  In this case, as described above, the combination means is likely to cause variation in the stopped state (the overhang position or (and) posture), and such a combination means is at the overhang position when forming the first effect mode. In the structure in which the first displacement means is in contact (at least a part of which has the same position in the front-rear direction), the gap between the second means and the first displacement means does not reach the target position. Is formed to inhibit association (unification). Similarly, even if the arrangement position or posture of the combined means exceeds the target position, one displacement means is pushed out to cause positional deviation, so that association (unification) is inhibited. That is, when the one displacement means and the other displacement means in the first group are brought into contact with each other at the extended position, the configuration of the gaming machine G4 (the position in the front-rear direction is different, and the front view In the above, some overlap is particularly effective.

  In the gaming machine G5, the combined means is positioned forward of the one displacement means and the other displacement means in the front-rear direction when disposed at the overhang position when forming the first effect mode. A game machine G6 characterized in that the first displacement means and the other displacement means overlap in a front view with respect to a portion in which the first displacement means and the other displacement means abut each other.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G5, the combination means is more than one displacement means and the other displacement means when disposed at the overhang position when forming the first effect mode. Since the one displacement means and the other displacement means overlap in a front view with respect to the portion abutted against each other while being located on the front side in the front-rear direction, for example, one displacement means or (and) other displacement means When a gap is formed between the two displacement means due to the occurrence of a deviation at the target position, the gap can be shielded by the dual means to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize. As a result, it is possible to prevent the relationship between the one displacement means and the other displacement means from being blocked, and to easily maintain the association between both the displacement means and the combined means.

  In any one of the game machines G2 to G6, the linear base member is linearly displaced, and the combined means is rotatably disposed on the linear base member, thereby combining rotational displacement and linear displacement. An overhanging position of the combined means which is displaced in a mode and is disposed when forming the first effect mode, and an overhanging position of the combined means which is disposed when forming the second effect mode Are different positions, and the posture of the combination means at the time of forming the first effect mode and the posture of the combination means at the time of forming the second effect mode are different. A game machine G7 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines G2 to G6, the gaming machine G7 is provided with a linear base member which is linearly displaced, and the combined means is rotatably disposed on the linear base member. Since the displacement and the displacement are combined in the combined manner, it is possible to increase the freedom of the overhanging position and the posture when forming the first rendering manner or the second rendering manner.

  In the gaming machine G7, a longitudinal direction position of one displacement means in the first group is set between the linear base member and the combined means.

  According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G7, the front-back direction position of one of the displacement means in the first group is set between the linear base member and the combination means. By positioning the means closer to the front side to make it easier for the player to visually recognize, it is possible to make the longitudinal direction positions of one displacing means and the combined means closer. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize the whole as a predetermined character by associating (integrating) one displacement means with the combination means.

  In the gaming machine G8, in a state in which one of the first group of displacement means and the combination means are disposed at the retracted position, the one displacement means is disposed at a position overlapping with the linear base member in front view Game machine G9 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine G9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G8, one displacement means and the linear base member are in a state in which one displacement means and combination means in the first group are disposed at the retracted position. Since the first displacement means and the linear base member (combined means) are displaced to the overhanging position so as to form the first effect mode, they are arranged at the overlapping position in the front view, the one displacement means is linear Contact with the side surface of the base member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine G9, in a state in which the other displacement means of the first group and the combined means are disposed at the retracted position, the other displacement means is disposed at a position not overlapping the linear base member in front view And the other displacement means is disposed at a position overlapping the linear base member in a front view while the other displacement means and the combined means are displaced toward the overhanging position, and the linear base member is A game machine G10 characterized in that at least an area where the other displacement means overlap in a front view is smaller in dimension in the front-rear direction than an area where the one displacement means overlaps in a front view.

  According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G9, in a state where the other displacing means and combination means in the first group are arranged at the retracted position, the other displacing means face the linear base member The displacement member is disposed at a position not overlapping in view, and in the middle of displacement of the other displacement means and the combination means toward the extended position, the other displacement means is disposed at a position overlapping in a front view with the linear base member In order to form the first effect mode, the area in which at least the other displacement means overlap in front view has a smaller dimension in the front-rear direction than the area in which one displacement means overlaps in front view. And when a linear base member (combination means) is displaced to an extended position, it can control that other displacement means abuts on the side of a linear base member.

  The gaming machine G10 includes driving means for applying driving force to the linear base member for linear displacement, and a conversion mechanism for converting linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the combined means, the conversion mechanism comprising A game machine G11 characterized in that the one displacement means of the linear base members is disposed in an area overlapping in a front view at a retracted position.

  According to the gaming machine G11, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G10, driving means for applying a driving force to the linear base member for linear displacement, and a conversion mechanism for converting linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the dual means Since the linear displacement of the linear base member and the rotation of the combined means can be synchronized, the relative positional accuracy (posture) of the combined means with respect to the linear base member can be enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the whole as a predetermined character by associating (integrating) the displacing means with the combined means.

  In addition, since it is not necessary to separately provide a drive means for rotating the dual purpose means, the dual purpose means can be made larger accordingly, and the character formed at the overhanging position can be made larger. For example, even if the area is relatively narrow and it is difficult to secure the space for arranging the members, such as one side and the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area, the member means is evacuated to the area The combined means can be formed in a large size while setting the position.

  In this case, the conversion mechanism is disposed in an area where one displacement means of the linear base members overlaps in a front view at the retracted position, and accordingly, another area of the linear base members (the conversion mechanism is not disposed Area) can be reduced. Therefore, when the other displacement means and the linear base member (combined means) are displaced to the overhanging position, it can be suppressed that the other displacement means abuts on the side surface of the linear base member.

<Feature H group> (Indicator display corresponding to mode transition)
Effect mode setting means capable of setting any of the effect modes among a plurality of effect modes, display means capable of displaying the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, and step information of a plurality of stages on the display means When the step information is changed to predetermined step information by the step information variable means for changing the step information displayed by the step information display means for displaying the step information, and the step information variable means for changing the step information variable means Switching means for switching the display mode of the stage information displayed by the stage effect display means to a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect on the display mode corresponding to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means And a game machine H1 characterized by having.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of effect modes can be set as effect modes displayed on the display device, and a predetermined score is given to the player when a specific effect mode is set, Some effects are executed based on the cumulative value of the assigned points (for example, JP 2007-215579 A).

  In such a conventional game machine, since the score is given only in a specific effect mode, the cumulative value of the points acquired when shifting to another effect mode is all discarded, so the player There was a problem that the motivation to get points decreased and the game got bored early. Moreover, in order to execute the rendering using the awarded score, it is necessary to fix the rendering mode to a specific rendering mode while the scoring is given until the rendering based on the score is executed. Yes, there was a problem that the production became monotonous.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine H1, one of the plurality of effect modes is set by the effect mode setting means, and the set effect mode is displayed on the display means. The stage information display means variably displays stage information of a plurality of stages on the display means by the stage information variable means, and when the stage information is changed to predetermined stage information, a specific effect is provided by the specific effect execution means Is executed. Then, the display mode of the stage information displayed by the stage information display means is switched by the switching means to a display mode corresponding to the presentation mode set by the presentation mode setting means.

  As a result, even if a different rendering mode is set, the stage information can be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the currently set rendering mode, so that even if the rendering mode is shifted, the stage information is continuously used. It becomes possible to carry out an effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early in the game.

  The gaming machine H1 has stage information storage means for storing the stage information displayed by the stage information display means, and the stage information display means switches the display mode by the switching means. A game machine H2, characterized in that the stage information is displayed based on the stage information stored in the stage information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are exerted. Stage information displayed by the stage information display means is stored by the stage information storage means. Then, when the display mode is switched by the switching means, the stage information is displayed by the stage information display means based on the stage information stored in the stage information storage means.

  Thereby, even when the display mode is switched by the switching means, it becomes possible to display the stage information based on the stage information stored in the stage information storage means. Therefore, even if different presentation modes are set, the presentation using the stage information can be executed continuously, so that it is possible to suppress the player from getting bored early in the game.

  Note that the display mode corresponding to the effect mode is, for example, a number, a character, a symbol used in the effect mode currently set, and a character appearing in the effect mode as identification information capable of identifying the score to be given. It is conceivable to use a display mode using. In addition, it is considered that the image attached to the identification information that can identify the score to be given is a display mode using an image corresponding to a motif (for example, sea or mountain) used in the currently set presentation mode. Be Thus, by displaying the step information in the display mode corresponding to the currently set effect mode, even if the effect mode is changed while the effect for displaying the step information is executed, the variable effect mode Stage information can be displayed without giving a sense of incongruity.

  In the gaming machine H2, a gaming machine H3 characterized in that the stage information storage means stores at least the predetermined stage information.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H2, at least predetermined stage information is stored by the stage information storage means, so different presentation modes are set in a state where the predetermined stage information is displayed, Even if the display mode is switched, predetermined step information can be displayed in the display mode after the switch. Therefore, even if the effect mode is switched while the effect in which the stage information is displayed is performed, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that the player can easily understand.

  In the gaming machine H2 or H3, the stage information storage means stores at least approximate stage information approximating the predetermined stage information.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2 or H3, approximate stage information that at least approximates predetermined stage information is stored by the stage information storage unit, so that the approximate stage information is displayed. Even if different presentation modes are set and the display modes are switched, it is possible to display the approximation step information in the display mode after the switching. Therefore, when the staging mode is switched in a state where the approximate stage information indicating that the predetermined stage information is displayed a little more is displayed, the stage information which does not approximate the predetermined stage information is displayed, There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

  Here, as the approximation step information in the gaming machine H4, for example, in the case of using an indicator capable of displaying step information in seven steps, step information indicating the seventh step (MAX) is set as predetermined step information, and approximation is performed. Stage information indicating a sixth stage may be set as the stage information.

  A plurality of pieces of approximation stage information may be set in accordance with the degree of approximation to predetermined stage information. As a result, different presentation modes are set, and it is possible to further suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort when the display mode is switched.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the effect mode setting means has a specific effect mode setting means for setting a specific effect mode when the specific step information is displayed by the step information display means. A game machine H5 characterized by being a game machine.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the specific stage information is displayed by the stage information display means, the specific effect mode is set by the specific effect mode setting means.

  As a result, since it is possible to switch the effect mode according to the displayed step information, there is an effect that the effect of the effect of displaying the step information can be enhanced.

  Here, if the configuration of the gaming machine H3 is provided, it is preferable to set predetermined stage information and specific stage information differently. By doing in this way, since the effect mode is switched in a state where the predetermined step information is not displayed, there is an effect that the effect of the effect of displaying the step information can be further enhanced.

  Furthermore, if the configuration of the gaming machine H4 is provided, the approximate level information and the specific level information may be set differently. By doing this, the effect mode is switched in a state where the approximate stage information is not displayed either, so that the effect of the effect of displaying the stage information can be further enhanced.

  In the gaming machine H5, the stage information display means is configured to display the predetermined stage information as the stage information when the specific effect mode is set by the specific effect mode setting means. A game machine H6.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H5, when the specific effect mode is set by the specific effect mode setting means, the predetermined step information is displayed as the step information by the step information display means .

  Thereby, when specific stage information is displayed, a specific presentation mode can be set, and when the display mode is switched, predetermined stage information can be displayed. Therefore, in the effect that the step information is displayed, it is possible to make the player expect the display mode to be switched, and it is possible to suppress the player from getting bored early in the game.

  Here, if the configuration of the gaming machine H3 is provided, it is preferable to set predetermined stage information and specific stage information differently. By doing this, the predetermined stage information is displayed by switching the effect mode in a state where the predetermined stage information is not displayed, so it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect, There is an effect that the effect can be further enhanced.

  Furthermore, if the configuration of the gaming machine H4 is provided, the approximate level information and the specific level information may be set differently. In this way, predetermined stage information is switched by switching the presentation mode in a state in which neither predetermined stage information nor approximation stage information is displayed, that is, in a state in which the expectation of the jackpot is low in the stage where the stage information is displayed. Is displayed, so that it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect, and it is possible to further enhance the effect of the effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H6, variable amount determining means for determining a variable amount of the step information variable by the step information changing means, and the variable amount determined by the variable amount determining means. A game machine H7 comprising: variable information display means for displaying variable information corresponding to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the following effects are exerted. That is, the variable amount of the step information to be changed by the step information changing means is determined by the variable amount determining means, and based on the determined variable amount, the variable information corresponding to the presentation mode set by the presentation mode setting means is It is displayed by the variable information display means.

  Thus, the player can easily grasp the variable amount in which the stage information is varied by grasping the variable information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

  Furthermore, since the variable amount in which the stage information is changed is displayed as variable information corresponding to the currently set effect mode, even if the effect mode is switched, the variable information is displayed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. It has the effect of being able to

  The variable information displayed based on the variable amount may be information specifically indicating the variable amount, or information suggesting the variable amount (for example, information such as variable amount large or variable amount small), and a plurality In the case where the stage information of is displayed, it may be information indicating the stage information to be changed among the plurality of stage information.

  The timing of displaying variable information may be appropriately set based on the displayed variable information. For example, in the case of displaying information specifically indicating a variable amount as variable information, the step information variable means The variable information may be displayed after the stage information is changed by the. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the aspect in which the stage information is variable, and it is possible to enhance the rendering effect.

  On the other hand, if the information indicating the variable amount and the information indicating the step information to be variable targets are displayed as variable information, the variable information may be displayed before the step information is changed by the step information changing unit. This makes it possible to focus on how the stage information is specifically varied after grasping the displayed variable information, so that the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine H7, a variable information differentiation means for differentiating the variable information displayed by the variable information display means into a plurality of small variable information, and a display for displaying the small variable information differentiated by the variable information differentiation means And a display timing setting unit configured to set the timing.

  According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H7, the following effects are exerted. That is, the variable information displayed by the variable information display means is differentiated into a plurality of small variable information by the variable information differentiation means, and the display timing at which the small variable information is displayed is displayed by the display timing setting means.

  As a result, it becomes possible to divide and display the variable information for changing the stage information plural times. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Here, as a differentiation method of variable information by the variable information differentiation means, when the variable information is to display a specific numerical value (for example, a score etc.), the numerical value (score) is divided into a plurality of numerical values (small points If the variable information is a display that suggests (for example, a variable degree or a variable target) variable content of the stage information, it may be divided so as to display the suggested content in stages. Just do it. As a result, the player can be kept watching closely with the effect that the stage information is changed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, when displaying variable information (small variable information) differentiated by the variable information differentiation means, variable information (step information changed to predetermined step information with high expectation) which is advantageous for the player Variable information) should be displayed later. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to perform an effect while giving the player a sense of expectation until the end.

  In the gaming machines H1 to H8, the effect mode setting means is characterized by having setting control means for restricting that the predetermined effect mode is set according to the effect mode being set. Game machine H9.

  According to the gaming machine H9, it is regulated by the setting regulation means that the predetermined effect mode is set according to the set effect mode, so that various effects can be executed by using a plurality of effect modes. In the configuration, it is possible to easily regulate the switching of the predetermined effect mode. Therefore, when the display mode of the stage information is switched by the switching means, it is suppressed that the presentation mode in which it is difficult for the player to continue to perform the stage information display is set. Is possible. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand presentation to the player.

  In the gaming machines H1 to H9, the effect mode setting means sets the effect mode based on the setting condition when any of a plurality of setting conditions is satisfied, and the plurality of setting conditions are set as the setting conditions. The priority setting means for setting the priority, and when the plurality of setting conditions are satisfied, the effect is set based on the setting condition having the high priority set by the priority setting means. A game machine H10 characterized in that the mode is set.

  According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H9, the following effects are exerted. That is, when any one of the plurality of setting conditions is established, the effect mode is set based on the setting conditions. Then, the priority setting means sets the priority for the plurality of setting conditions, and when the plurality of setting conditions are satisfied, the effect is set based on the setting condition having the high priority set by the priority setting means. An aspect is set.

  As a result, since the effect mode is set based on the setting condition with high priority, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<Feature J group> (effect display position setting)
A display means having a display area, a first effect execution means for executing a predetermined first effect on the display means for a predetermined period, and a predetermined one for the display means while the first effect execution means is being executed In the gaming machine provided with second effect execution means for executing two effects, the second effect execution means is configured to display the display area corresponding to the display mode of the first effect when the second effect is executed. A game machine J1 characterized in that the second effect is executed.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is one that executes an effect in which a point indicating a predetermined value is displayed on a display device, and gives a bonus effect when the point reaches a predetermined number (for example, , JP-A-2012-179176).

  In such a conventional game machine, a dedicated area for displaying points is provided in the display device, and there is a problem that an aspect in which the points are displayed becomes monotonous. In addition, if points are displayed without providing a dedicated area for displaying points on the display device, the display of another effect performed on the display device and the display of the points overlap, and the effect of rendering is reduced. There was a problem that you

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine J1, while the first effect executing means executes a predetermined first effect on the display means having the display area for a predetermined period, and while the first effect executing means is being executed, the second A predetermined second effect on the display means is executed in the display area corresponding to the display mode of the first effect by the effect execution means.

  Thereby, the position where the second effect is displayed can be displayed corresponding to the first effect being executed, and it is prevented that the first effect and the second effect are displayed in an overlapping manner. Has the effect of

  In the gaming machine J1, the second effect executing means executes the second effect in a predetermined allowable area of the display area in the display means, and the second effect is executed when the second effect is executed. A game machine J2 having area variable means for changing the allowable area based on a display mode of 1 effect.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the second effect is executed by the second effect execution means in a predetermined allowable area in the display area of the display means. Then, the allowable area is changed by the area changing means based on the display mode of the first effect when the second effect is executed.

  As a result, it is possible to change the allowable area for executing the second effect based on the display area in which the first effect is displayed. Therefore, the second effect can be performed in the area related to the first effect, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  The gaming machine J2 has first effect determination means for determining a main subject display area in which an image to be a main subject is displayed among the first effects displayed in the display area by the first effect execution means, The area changing means changes the permissible area in which the second effect can be performed, based on the display area determined to be the main subject display area by the first effect determining means. Machine J3.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J2, the following effects are exerted. That is, among the first effects displayed in the display area by the first effect execution means, the main effect display area in which the main image is displayed is determined by the first effect determination means. Then, the allowable area in which the second effect can be performed is changed based on the display area determined by the area changing means as the main display area by the first effect determining means.

  As a result, it is possible to change the allowable area for executing the second effect based on the display area in which the main image in the first effect is displayed. Therefore, since it is possible to execute the second effect in the area related to the first effect, there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be further enhanced.

  In the gaming machine J3, the area variable means sets the display area determined to be the main subject display area by the first effect determination means as a prohibited area where the second effect is difficult to execute, and permits the other than the main subject display area A game machine J4 characterized in that it is an area.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the display area determined to be the main display area by the first effect determination means is set as the prohibited area where the second effect is difficult to execute by the area changing means. Then, the area other than the main display area is set as the allowable area by the area changing means.

  As a result, the display area in which the main image in the first effect is displayed and the display area in which the second effect is executed overlap, and it can be suppressed that the effect of the effect is reduced. effective.

  In the gaming machine J3, a specific subject display area for determining a specific subject display area in which the image serving as the main subject is not displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed, among the display areas determined as the main subject display area. A game machine J5 having a judging means, wherein the area variable means sets a display area judged to be the specific subject display area by the specific subject display area judging means as the permissible area.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J3, the following effects are exerted. That is, among the display areas determined as the subject display area, the specific subject display area in which the specific subject display area for which the main subject image is not displayed after a predetermined period has not been displayed is determined by the specific subject display area determining means, and the display is determined as the specific subject display area The area is made into an allowable area by area variable means.

  Thereby, as the display area for executing the second effect, it is possible to set the display area after the elapse of the predetermined period as the allowable area. Therefore, it is possible to give a width to the timing of executing the second effect, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

  Value information setting means capable of setting first value information indicating at least a predetermined value as the second effect and second value information having a value higher than the first value information in any one of the game machines J2 to J5 And an allowable area setting means capable of setting the allowable area to a first allowable area and a second allowable area different from the first allowable area, wherein the second effect execution means A game machine J6 characterized by setting value information to be displayed in the first allowable area and displaying the second value information in the second allowable area.

  According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J2 to J5, the following effects are exerted. That is, first value information indicating at least a predetermined value as the second effect and second value information having a higher value than the first value information are set by the value information setting means, and the allowable area is set by the allowable area setting means. The first allowable area and the second allowable area different from the first allowable area are set. Then, the second effect execution means is set to display the first value information in the first allowable area and the second value information in the second allowable area.

  Thus, the value information can be displayed in a plurality of small areas, so that the value information can be displayed in a plurality of places in the display area, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Furthermore, because it is possible to display value information indicating different values in different small areas, for example, even when the same value is displayed in total, the first value information may be displayed multiple times in the first allowable area. A plurality of display methods can be set such as displaying or displaying the second value information only once in the second allowable area. Therefore, the player sees the portion where the value information is displayed and the value information displayed on the display means while paying attention to the number of times, so that it is possible to suppress the player from being bored early in the game There is.

  Any one of the game machines J1 to J7 has a display image creation means for creating a display image to be displayed on the display means, and the display image creation means is a first layer on which at least the first effect is displayed And the second image layer on which the second effect is displayed to create the display image, and a first composition process in which the first image layer is superimposed on the front side of the second image layer. And a second combining process for transmitting the display area corresponding to the display area in which the second effect is performed in the first image layer, and a game machine J8.

  According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J1 to J7, the following effects are exerted. That is, the display image displayed on the display means is created by combining the first image on which at least the first effect is displayed and the second image on which the second effect is displayed. . Then, the first image layer is superimposed on the front side of the second image layer by the first composition process, and the display area corresponding to the display area in which the second effect is executed in the first image layer is transmitted by the second image composition process. Be done.

  Thereby, the first effect and the second effect can be easily displayed on the display means at the same time, and the control load can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine J8, the second image layer is characterized in that the display area is divided into a plurality of small areas, and the second effect is displayed for each of the plurality of small areas. A gaming machine J9.

  According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J8, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the second image layer, the display area is divided into a plurality of small areas, and the second effect is displayed in each of the plurality of small areas.

  Thus, there is no need to change the display content of the second layer in accordance with the area for displaying the second effect, and the display area corresponding to the display area of the first layer transmitted in the second layer is displayed. Only the displayed second effect is visible to the player. Therefore, the first effect and the second effect can be easily displayed on the display means at the same time, and the control load can be reduced.

<Feature K group> (change the production navigation halfway)
Discrimination means for performing discrimination based on establishment of discrimination conditions, benefit giving means for giving a player a privilege when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a particular discrimination result, and result of discrimination by the discrimination means In a gaming machine comprising: an effect execution means for executing an effect based on the display means; and a display means for displaying an effect mode based on the effect executed by the effect execution means; Period information display means for displaying specific period information indicating a specific period of effect, progress information display means for displaying progress information indicating an elapsed period after the specific period is started, and the progress information display means Specific effect mode information display means for displaying specific effect mode information indicating a specific effect mode to be given to the player when the progress information satisfies the predetermined condition; Gaming machine K1, characterized in that it has a, a presentation mode varying means for varying the specific effect mode information based on the progress information is displayed by over-information display means.

  Here, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine provided with a time gauge for displaying the progress of the effect and displaying the progress of the effect to the player (for example, JP-A-2015-6280). In such a conventional game machine, the player plays a game by predicting the lottery result while observing the progress of the progress meter, but the variation ends in the middle of the meter, or from the end even if the end of the meter is reached Furthermore, since presentation is continued, there is a problem that the will to enjoy the game is reduced by looking at the progress meter.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine K1, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is the particular discrimination result, the bonus is awarded to the player by the bonus awarding means. A presentation is performed by the presentation execution means based on the result of discrimination by the discrimination means, and the presentation mode based on the presentation is displayed on the display means. Then, the specific period information indicating the specific period of the effect to be executed by the effect executing means is displayed by the period information display means, and the progress information indicating the elapsed period after the specific period is started is displayed by the progress information display means . Furthermore, when the progress information displayed by the progress information display means satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific effect mode information indicating the specific effect mode to be given to the player is displayed by the specific effect mode information display means, and the progress information The specific effect mode information is changed by the effect mode variable means based on the progress information displayed by the display means.

  Thereby, the specific effect mode information indicating the content of the specific effect mode to be added when the elapsed information indicating the elapsed period since the start of the specific period satisfies the predetermined condition can be varied based on the progress information It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation to play the game by looking at the progress information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine K1, the specific effect mode information display means displays, as the specific effect mode information, a specific effect mode indicating the specific effect mode and a plurality of pseudo specific effect modes different from the specific effect mode. A game machine K2 characterized in that the effect mode variable means changes the pseudo specific effect mode among the specific effect mode information.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the specific effect mode indicating means displays the specific effect mode indicating the specific effect mode and a plurality of pseudo specific effect modes different from the specific effect mode as the specific effect mode information, and the specific effect mode Of the information, the pseudo specific effect mode is varied by the effect mode variable means.

  As a result, since the pseudo specific effect mode displayed in a pseudo manner based on the progress information is changed, it is possible to make the player gaze at the display content based on the progress information. Therefore, it is possible to suppress decline in the will to play the game by looking at the progress information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, an expectation that can be displayed when the progress information displayed by the progress information display means satisfies the specific display condition is the degree of expectation that the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result. A game machine K3 having degree display means, wherein the effect mode variable means is capable of changing the specific effect mode information when the progress information satisfies the specific display condition.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the progress information displayed by the progress information display means satisfies the specific display condition, the expectation degree display means enables display by the expectation degree display means, and the progress information is the progress information. The specific effect mode information can be changed by the effect mode variable means when the specific display condition is satisfied.

  Thereby, it becomes possible to execute two of the expectation level display and the change of the specific effect mode information at the same timing. Therefore, it is possible to suppress decline in the will to play the game by looking at the progress information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, a gaming machine K4 characterized by having a specific period extending means for extending the specific period when a predetermined effect mode is given as the specific effect mode.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, when the predetermined effect mode is given as the specific effect mode, the specific period extending means extends the specific period. , It becomes possible to set a specific period according to the effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress decline in the will to play the game by looking at the progress information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The gaming machine K4 has extended period information display means for displaying the extended period extended by the specific period extension means using at least a part of the specific period information displayed by the specific period information display means. A gaming machine K5.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K4, the extension period extended by the specific period extension means is displayed by the extension period information display means using at least a part of the specific period information. There is an effect that the capacity of display data for displaying the extension period can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine K4 or K5, at least a part of the progress information displayed by the progress information display means is used as progress information indicating an elapsed period after the start of the extension period extended by the specific period extension means. A game machine K6 characterized in that it has an extended progress information display means for displaying.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K4 or K5, the elapsed period after the extension period extended by the specific period extension means is started is extended using at least a part of the progress information. Since the information is displayed by the information display means, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the display data for displaying the elapsed information of the extension period.

  In any one of the gaming machines K4 to K6, there is provided an expectation degree display conversion means capable of converting the expectation degree displayed by the expectation degree display means when the specific period is extended by the specific period extension means. A game machine K7 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines K4 to K6, when the specific period is extended by the specific period extension means, the expectation degree displayed by the expectation degree display means is converted by the expectation degree conversion means Therefore, it is possible to play the game while expecting the specific period to be extended. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the specific period information used when the extended period information display means displays the extended period in any one of the gaming machines K7, the specific display for the expectation degree display means to display the expectation degree The expectation degree is converted by the expectation degree conversion means when the establishment period in which the condition can be satisfied is included and the extension progress information display means passes the establishment period by the extension progress information display means. A game machine K8 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K7, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the extension period is displayed by the extension period information display means, specific period information including a formation period in which a specific display condition for the expectation degree display means to display the expectation degree can be used is used. The expected degree is converted by the expected degree converting means when the extended elapsed information passes the establishment period.

  Thereby, when the expectation degree is converted by the expectation degree conversion means, it is possible to use the same display as the expectation degree display displayed in the period in which the display by the period information display means and the progress information display means is executed. It becomes. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the degree of expectation is converted.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K8, the period information display means displays a time gauge indicating a period as the specific period information, and the progress information display means moves on the time gauge. A game machine K9 characterized by displaying a body.

  According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K8, the following effects are exerted. That is, the period information display means displays a time gauge indicating a period as specific period information, and the progress information display means displays a moving body moving on the progress information time gauge.

  As a result, it becomes possible to make the player easily grasp the specific period by the time gauge, and to make the player easily grasp the progress information by the movement status of the moving body. Therefore, there is an effect that the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine K9, the expectation degree display means is configured to satisfy the fulfillment condition and display the degree of expectation when the moving object reaches a specific position on the time gauge, and the extension period information display means The display means displays the extension period using a part of the time gauge, and the extension progress information display means moves the movable body to a predetermined position of the time gauge to display the extension progress information. A game machine K10 characterized by being displayed.

  According to the gaming machine K10, the fulfillment condition is satisfied when the moving object reaches a specific position on the time gauge, and the expectation degree display means displays the expectation degree. Then, the extension period information display means displays the extension period using a part of the time gauge. Further, the extension progress information is displayed by moving the movable body to a predetermined position of the time gauge by the extension progress information display means.

  This makes it possible to display the extension period using the time gauge and the moving object. Thus, the extended period can be displayed on the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, since display data for displaying a specific period can be diverted as display data for displaying an extended period, there is an effect that data volume can be reduced.

  In the game machine K9 or K10, a game machine K11 characterized in that the time gauge has a plurality of paths through which the mobile unit can move.

  According to the gaming machine K11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K9 or K10, since the moving body has a plurality of movable paths, it is possible for the player to predict which path the moving body moves. Can. Therefore, there is an effect that the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine K11, the extended progress information display means is characterized in that the moving body is moved to a position where the moving body can pass a branch position where the time gauge branches to the plurality of paths. Game machine K12.

  According to the gaming machine K12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K11, the extended progress information display means moves the movable body to a position where the movable body can pass the branch position where the time gauge branches into a plurality of paths. When the specific period is extended, it is possible to make the player predict which route the mobile body travels again. Therefore, there is an effect that the rendering effect can be enhanced.

<Feature L group> (Varying the effect modes of continuous slot effects)
Operation means operable by the player, effect execution means capable of executing an effect based on an operation on the operation means, display means for displaying an effect mode based on the effect executed by the effect execution means; The effect executing means executes a specific effect which can be executed a plurality of times within a specific period, in which an operation effect in which at least an operation effective period in which an operation to the operation means is determined to be effective is set is performed. Among the plurality of the operation effects performed during the specific effect, it is characterized by having effect mode variable means for changing the effect mode of the other operation effects based on the information regarding the operation for at least one operation effect. A gaming machine L1.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with operation means operable by the player, and by operating the operation means, there is a case where an effect of aligning predetermined symbols is executed (e.g. 2012-223651 gazette).

  In such a conventional game machine, an effective period for activating the operation of the operation means is set, and by operating the operation means within the effective period, only a specific effect is executed, and the game is monotonous. And there was a problem of getting bored early in the game.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine L1, the effect executing means executes the effect based on the operation on the operation means operable by the player, and the effect mode based on the effect executed by the effect executing means is displayed on the display means Is displayed. Furthermore, a specific effect that can be executed a plurality of times within a specific period is executed by the effect execution means, and an operation effect in which an operation effective period at which the operation to the operation means is determined to be effective is set is executed by the effect execution means Among the plurality of operation effects performed during the effect, the effect mode of the other operation effect is varied by the effect mode variable means based on the information on the operation for at least one operation effect.

  Thereby, in the specific effect in which a plurality of operation effects are executed, the effect mode of the other operation effects can be varied based on the content of the operation on the operation means in the one operation effect. Therefore, since various effects can be provided to the player, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being bored early in the game.

  In the game machine L1, a game mode L2 characterized in that the effect mode variable means changes the operation effective period of the other operation effect.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L1, since the operation effective period of the other operation effects is varied by the effect mode variable means, various effects can be provided to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored early in the game.

  In the game machine L1 or L2, the effect mode variable means changes the number of times of the other operation effect, and the game machine L3.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L1 or L2, the number of other operation effects can be changed by the effect mode changing means, so that various effects can be provided to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored early in the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the operation effect is to execute symbol effect for dynamically displaying a symbol to be displayed in a stopped state when the operation means is operated during the operation effective period, A gaming machine L4 comprising a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus to a player when the symbols stopped and displayed due to a plurality of the operation effects in the specific effect become a predetermined combination.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the following effects can be obtained. That is, a symbol effect that dynamically displays symbols stopped and displayed when the operation means is operated during the operation effective period is executed as the operation effect, and the symbols stopped and displayed by the plurality of operation effects in the specific effect are predetermined. In the case of combination, a bonus is awarded to the player by the bonus awarding means.

  As a result, it becomes possible to gaze at a symbol stopped and displayed individually for each of a plurality of operation effects performed during a specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress that the player gets bored early in the game during the period in which the specific effect is executed.

  One of the gaming machines L1 to L4 has operation timing determination means for determining the timing at which the operation means is operated during the operation effective period set in the operation effect, and the effect mode variable means includes A game machine L5 characterized in that the effect aspect of the other operation effect is varied based on the determination result of the operation timing determination means in the one operation effect.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L4, the following effects are exerted. That is, the timing at which the operation means is operated during the operation effective period set in the operation effect is determined by the operation timing determination means. Then, based on the determination result of the operation timing determination means in one operation effect, the effect mode of the other operation effect is varied by the effect mode variable means.

  This makes it possible to vary the effect aspect of other operation effects according to the operation timing of the operation means in one operation effect. Therefore, since various effects can be provided to the player, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being bored early in the game.

  In the gaming machine L5, the effect mode changing means determines that the operation means is operated within a predetermined period after the operation valid period of the one operation effect is started by the operation timing determination means. A game machine L6 characterized in that the number of times of the other operation effects is increased.

  According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L5, the following effects are exerted. That is, when it is determined that the operation means is operated within a predetermined period after the operation valid period of one operation effect is started by the operation timing determination means, the number of times of other operation effects is calculated by the effect mode change means. Be increased.

  This makes it possible to increase the number of operation effects by operating the operation means early. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to operate the operation means with enthusiasm, and there is an effect that the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine L5 or L6, the effect execution means can execute the other operation effect a plurality of times, and the operation timing determination means starts the operation effective period of the one operation effect When it is determined that the operation means is operated beyond the predetermined period, the first operation effect is executed as the other operation effect, and the operation timing determination means determines that the operation operation of the first operation effect is effective. When it is determined that the operation means has been operated within a predetermined period since the start of the period, it is determined that the operation means has been operated within a predetermined period after the operation effective period of the one operation effect is started. A game machine L7 characterized by performing the same number of operation effects as in the case.

  According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L5 or L6, the following effects are exerted. That is, when another operation effect is executed a plurality of times by the effect executing means, and it is determined by the operation timing judging means that the operation means is operated beyond the predetermined period after the operation effective period of one operation effect is started. Then, the first operation effect is executed as another operation effect by the effect executing means. Then, when it is determined that the operation means has been operated within a predetermined period after the operation effective period of the first operation effect is started, within the predetermined period after the operation effective period of one operation effect is started The same number of operation effects are performed as when it is determined that the operation means has been operated.

  Thereby, even if the operation means can not be operated within the predetermined period in the one operation effect, the one operation by operating the operation means within the predetermined period during the first operation effect to be executed next It becomes possible to execute the same number of operation effects as in the case where the operation means is operated within a predetermined period by the effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide an opportunity for increasing the number of operation effects to a player who does not notice that the operation effects have been executed or is too close to the operation effects and can not operate the operation means early. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored early in the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L7, when the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period of the one operation effect, the effect execution means does not set the normal operation effective period not set. A game machine L8 characterized in that it is to be executed.

  According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L7, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period of one operation effect, the effect execution means executes the normal effect in which the operation effective period is not set.

  Thus, the player's willingness to play may be lowered by repeatedly executing the operation effect for the player who did not operate the operation means during the operation effective period, that is, the player who does not like the operation effect. Has the effect of being able to

  In any one of the gaming machines L4 to L8, the privilege is more easily awarded by the privilege giving means as the number of times of the operation effect executed by the effect executing means is larger.

  According to the gaming machine L9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines L4 to L8, the benefit is more likely to be awarded by the benefit awarding means as the number of times of the operation effect executed by the effect executing means is increased. There is an effect that it is possible to operate the operation means, and to suppress that the player's willingness to play decreases.

<Feature M group> (changing the aspect of the slot effect based on the remaining period of the operation effective period)
Operation means operable by the player, operation effective period setting means for setting an operation effective period in which the operation on the operation means is effectively determined, and effect execution means for executing an effect in which the operation effective period is set And a display means for displaying an effect mode based on the effect executed by the effect execution means, in the game machine, the effect execution means dynamically generates a plurality of identification information in a predetermined dynamic display mode. The dynamic display effect is displayed to display predetermined identification information from the plurality of dynamically displayed identification information by operating the operation means when the operation effective period is set. When the operation effective period in the dynamic display effect becomes a predetermined remaining period, the dynamic display mode in the operation effective period is changed to a variable dynamic display mode to make a dynamic table Gaming machine M1, characterized in that it is intended to.

  Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which an operation means operable by a player is provided and an effect of aligning predetermined symbols is executed by operating the operation means (e.g. 223651 gazette).

  In such a conventional game machine, an effective period for activating the operation of the operation means is set, and by operating the operation means within the effective period, only a specific effect is executed, and the game is monotonous. And there was a problem of getting bored early in the game.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine M1, an operation effective period in which the operation on the operation means operable by the player is effectively determined is set by the operation effective period setting means, and an effect in which the operation effective period is set is executed The effect mode executed by the means and based on the effect is displayed on the display means. Then, a plurality of identification information is dynamically displayed in a predetermined dynamic display mode by the effect execution unit, and a plurality of identifications dynamically displayed by operating the operation unit when the operation valid period is set. The dynamic display effect for stopping and displaying predetermined identification information from information is executed, and when the operation effective period in the dynamic display effect becomes a predetermined remaining period, the dynamic display mode in the operation effective period is changed Dynamically displayed.

  As a result, the dynamic display mode to be displayed dynamically is changed according to the remaining period of the operation effective period in which the operation to the operation means becomes effective, so that the player can operate the operation means at various timings. It becomes. Therefore, since various effects can be provided to the player, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being bored early in the game.

  In the gaming machine M1, the effect executing means dynamically displays the plurality of pieces of identification information in a predetermined dynamic display mode determined in advance for a predetermined period, and the remaining of the operation effective period in the dynamic display effect When at least a part of the predetermined dynamic display mode is changed to the variable dynamic display mode when it is determined that the predetermined remaining period is determined by the remaining period determination means for determining a period and the remaining period determination means A game machine M2 having dynamic display mode variable means.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine M1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the effect execution means dynamically displays a plurality of identification information in a predetermined dynamic display mode predetermined for a predetermined period, and the remaining period of the operation effective period in the dynamic display effect is determined by the remaining period determination means Ru. Then, when it is determined by the remaining period determination means that the predetermined remaining period is set, at least a part of the predetermined dynamic display mode is changed into the variable dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode changing means.

  As a result, when the operation valid period becomes a predetermined remaining period, the dynamic display mode is changed, so that it is not necessary to set the dynamic display mode corresponding to the operation valid period in advance. Therefore, there is an effect that the data capacity at the time of executing the dynamic display mode can be reduced.

  The game machine M1 or M2 includes a specific effect executing unit that executes a specific effect when the specific identification information is stopped and displayed by the dynamic display effect, and the variable dynamic display mode includes the plurality of variable dynamic display modes. The game machine M3 is a dynamic display mode in which the specific identification information of the identification information is easier to identify than the other identification information.

  According to the gaming machine M3, when the specific identification information is stopped and displayed by the dynamic display effect by the specific effect execution means, the specific effect is executed, and the specific identification of the plurality of identification information is performed as the variable dynamic display mode It becomes a dynamic display mode in which the information is easier to identify than other identification information.

  As a result, since the specific identification information for which a specific effect is executed when the stop display is performed is a dynamic display mode that is easier to identify than other identification information, the player is motivated to operate the operation means. It is possible to enhance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early in the game.

  In the gaming machine M3, the effect execution means executes continuous dynamic display effect in which the dynamic display effect is set a plurality of times, and the specific effect execution means executes during the continuous dynamic display effect The specific effect is executed when the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed in the plurality of dynamic display effects to be performed satisfies a predetermined condition, and the variable dynamic display mode is the dynamic of 1). A gaming machine M4 characterized in that it is a dynamic display mode in which a variable symbol satisfying the predetermined condition is dynamically displayed by being stopped and displayed in a display effect.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M3, the following effects are exerted. That is, a continuous dynamic display effect in which a dynamic display effect is set a plurality of times is executed by the effect executing means, and symbols which are stopped and displayed in the plurality of dynamic display effects executed during the continuous dynamic display effect are executed A specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means when the combination of the above satisfies the predetermined condition. And it becomes a dynamic display mode by which a variable symbol which fulfills a predetermined condition is dynamically displayed by being stopped and displayed in one dynamic display effect as a variable dynamic display mode.

  Thereby, even if the remaining period of the operation effective period becomes a period in which it is difficult to execute a plurality of dynamic display effects, a variable symbol satisfying a predetermined condition is dynamically displayed in one of the dynamic display effects. Ru. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to operate the operation means during the continuous dynamic display effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early in the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines M2 to M4, the operation effective period setting unit sets the operation effective period a plurality of times during the period in which the dynamic display effect is being executed, and the remaining period judgment unit It is determined whether or not the remaining period is the predetermined remaining period based on the remaining number of the operation valid period.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M2 to M4, the following effects can be achieved. That is, the operation valid period setting unit sets the operation valid period a plurality of times during the period in which the dynamic display effect is performed. Then, a predetermined remaining period is determined by the remaining period determining means according to the remaining number of times of the operation valid period.

  As a result, the dynamic display mode is changed to the variable dynamic display mode based on the remaining number of times of the operation valid period, and therefore, the player is made to operate the operation means actively during the remaining operation valid period. It becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early in the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M5, an array information storage means for storing array information in which the plurality of identification information are set in a predetermined array, and the array information using the array information stored in the array information storage means And start position setting means for setting a start position of the dynamic display, wherein the predetermined identification information is set at a predetermined position of the arrangement information, and the start position setting means is operated by the operation valid period setting means. The first start position where the predetermined position of the array information is likely to be displayed on the display means and the second start position where the predetermined position of the array information is difficult to be displayed on the display means within the operation valid period to be set And a game machine M6 characterized in that it can be set.

  According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M1 to M5, the following effects are exerted. That is, sequence information in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are set in a predetermined sequence is stored by the sequence information storage unit, and the start position of dynamic display using the sequence information stored in the sequence information storage unit is the start position setting unit Set by Then, predetermined identification information is set at a predetermined position of the array information. Within the operation valid period set by the operation valid period setting means, a first start position where the predetermined position of the array information can be easily displayed on the display means, and a second start position where the predetermined position of the array information is difficult to be displayed on the display means Is set by the start position setting means.

  This makes it possible to execute dynamic display in which predetermined identification information is likely to be displayed on the display means and dynamic display in which it is difficult to be displayed, using the same arrangement information. Therefore, there is an effect that the data capacity of display data for performing dynamic display can be reduced.

  In any one of the game machines M1 to M6, the effect execution means includes a dynamic display speed variable means for changing the speed of the dynamic display.

  According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines M1 to M6, the speed of the dynamic display is changed by the dynamic display speed variable means, so the number of times to display predetermined identification information within the operation valid period Can be made variable. Therefore, various effects can be provided to the player, and the player can be prevented from getting bored early in the game.

<Feature N group> (determine the next button effect based on the content of the button operation)
Operation means operable by the player, signal output means for outputting a signal based on the operation when the operation means is operated, determination means for determining a signal output by the signal output means, and An operation effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation effect mode based on the judgment result by the judgment means, and a judgment result judged by the judgment means during a period when the operation effect mode is being executed by the operation effect execution means In the case where the second operation effect mode is executed by the operation effect executing means within a period in which a predetermined condition after the first operation effect mode is executed, the second operation effect mode is executed. A game having execution control means for switching and executing the second operation effect mode to a specific operation effect mode based on the determination result by the determination means N1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, as an operation effect using an operation button, an operation in which a continuous hitting operation is automatically executed by an operation of actually pressing the operation button and a depression of the operation button for a predetermined period (E.g., JP-A-2014-180364).

  In such a conventional game machine, in an operation effect (for example, continuous hit effect) in which the operation button needs to be operated a plurality of times, the operation button is actually pressed a plurality of times, or the operation button is continuously pressed for a predetermined period or more. Although it was possible to enjoy the operation effect by automatically executing the continuous hitting operation, in the case where the operation effect is performed a plurality of times consecutively, during the operation effect to be executed first. The operation performed on the frame button may be performed in an operation effect to be performed later, and there is a problem that the effect of the operation effect to be performed later is reduced.

  Furthermore, in the conventional game machine, the player is given an operation effect (for example, a timing depression effect) for operating the operation button at a predetermined timing or the above-described operation effect (continuous hitting effect) as an operation effect for operating the operation button. Some have an operation effect that causes different operations. In this case, when the timing pressing effect is executed after the continuous hitting effect is executed, the timing pressing effect is started while the operation (continuous hitting operation) executed during the continuous hit effect is continuously executed. There is a problem that the operation button is operated without aiming at a predetermined timing during the timing pressing effect, and the effect of the timing pressing effect is reduced.

  In addition, in conventional gaming machines, effects are generally executed based on the fluctuation period of the special symbol, so that a plurality of operation effects are performed within a limited period of the fluctuation period of the special symbol. In the above, it was necessary to shorten the intervals at which a plurality of operation effects are executed. Therefore, in order to solve the problem mentioned above, it could not be solved by the easy method of lengthening the space | interval by which several operation presentation is performed.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine N1, when the operation means operable by the player is operated, a signal based on the operation is output by the signal output means, and is determined by the determination means. A predetermined operation effect mode is executed by the operation effect execution means based on the determination result by the determination means. The determination result determined by the determination means is determined by the determination means while the operation effect aspect is being executed by the operation effect execution means. When the second operation effect mode is executed by the operation effect execution means within the period in which the predetermined condition after the first operation effect mode is executed, the execution control means causes the judgment result by the judgment means Based on the second operation presentation mode is switched to a specific operation presentation mode and executed.

  Thereby, when the second operation effect mode is executed within a period in which the predetermined condition after the first operation effect mode is executed, the first operation effect mode is being executed. It becomes possible to switch the second operation presentation mode to a specific operation presentation mode and execute it based on the content of the operation performed by the player to the operation means, and to suppress the decline in the game intention It has the effect of being able to

  In the gaming machine N1, the determination means determines that the determination result determined by the determination means is different from at least the first determination result and the first determination result during a period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed. A second determination result is determined, and the execution control means determines the first determination result as the specific operation effect mode when the determination means determines that the first determination result is obtained. A game machine N2 characterized by executing a corresponding operation effect mode.

  According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1, the following effects are exerted. That is, while the first operation effect mode is being executed, the determination result is determined by the determination means as the first determination result and the second determination result different from the first determination result by the determination means . Then, when it is determined by the determination means that the result is the first determination result, the execution control means executes the operation effect aspect based on the first determination result as the specific operation effect aspect.

  Thereby, it is possible to execute the operation effect mode corresponding to the determination result determined during the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed as the second operation effect mode. Therefore, when the operation presentation mode is continuously executed, the presentation effect does not decrease. Therefore, there is an effect that the rendering effect by making the operation presentation mode continuous can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine N2, the determination means determines that the operation of the operation means has been performed a plurality of times as the first determination result, and the execution control means determines the specific operation effect mode as the specific operation effect mode. A game machine N3 characterized by switching to an operation effect mode in which the operation means is operated a plurality of times.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the determination means determines that the operation of the operation means has been executed a plurality of times as the first determination result, and the execution control means switches to the operation effect mode for operating the operation means a plurality of times as a specific operation effect mode Be

  As a result, when the player operates the operation means a plurality of times in the first operation effect mode, an operation effect mode in which the operation means is operated a plurality of times is executed as a second operation effect mode. Therefore, even if the player continues to operate the operation means, the effect of the second operation effect mode does not decrease, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game intention. .

  In the gaming machine N3, during the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed, the number-of-operations measuring means for measuring the number of times the operating means is operated and the number of times measured by the number-of-operations measuring means are determined And determining the third determination result which is different from the first determination result based on the determination result of the number determination means. A gaming machine N4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N3, the following effects are exerted. That is, while the first operation effect mode is being executed, the number of times the operating means is operated is measured by the number-of-operations measuring means, and the number of times measured by the number-of-operations measuring means is determined by the number-of-times determining means . Then, based on the determination result of the number determination means, the determination means determines the first determination result and a third determination result different from the first determination result.

  Thereby, it is possible to switch the operation effect mode of the second operation effect mode based on the number of times the operation means is operated during the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed.

  In the gaming machine N4, when it is determined that the determination result of the number determination means is greater than a predetermined number, the determining means determines that the first determination result. .

  According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N4, when it is determined that the determination result of the number determination means is greater than the predetermined number, the determination means determines that the first determination result. Thereby, when the operation means is operated more than a predetermined number of times during the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed, the operation effect mode corresponding to the first determination result is executed as the second operation effect mode It is possible to Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to continue the state in which the player is actively operating the operation means.

  In the gaming machine N4, when it is determined that the determination result of the number determination means is smaller than a predetermined number, the determination means determines that the third determination result. .

  According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N4, when the discrimination result of the number discrimination means is smaller than the predetermined number, the discrimination means determines that the third judgment result. Thereby, when the operation means is operated a number of times smaller than the predetermined number of times during the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed, the operation effect mode corresponding to the first determination result is the second operation effect mode. It can be prevented from being executed.

  In the gaming machine N2, the determination means determines that the operation of the operation means is continuously performed for a predetermined period as the first determination result, and the execution control means is configured to perform the specific operation effect aspect The game machine N7 is characterized by switching to an operation effect mode for continuously operating the operation means.

  According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N2, the following effects are exerted. That is, it is determined by the determination unit that the operation of the operation unit is continuously performed for a predetermined period as the first determination result. And it is switched by the execution control means to the operation presentation mode which continues operating the operation means as a specific operation presentation mode.

  Thereby, when the player operates the operation means continuously for a predetermined period in the first operation effect mode, the operation effect mode for continuously operating the operation means is executed as the second operation effect mode. . Therefore, even if the player continues to operate the operation means, the effect of the second operation effect mode does not decrease, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game intention. .

  In any one of the gaming machines N1 to N7, the execution control means has notification means for notifying that the specific operation effect mode is executed, and the notification means executes the second operation effect mode Game machine N8 for notifying that the specific operation effect mode is executed by

  According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines N1 to N7, the following effects are exerted. That is, the notification means notifies that the specific operation effect mode is executed by the execution control means until the second operation effect mode is executed. Thereby, even when a specific operation effect mode is executed as the second operation effect mode, it is possible to execute the game without the player being confused. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to play from being reduced.

  In the gaming machine N8, the determination means performs the determination while the first operation effect mode is being executed, and the notification means performs the determination after the determination by the determination means. A gaming machine N9 characterized by notifying that the specific operation effect mode is executed before the operation effect mode 1 ends.

  According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N8, the following effects are exerted. That is, while the first operation effect mode is being performed, the determination of the determination means is performed, and the specific operation effect mode is performed after the determination is performed until the first operation effect mode is ended. The notification means notifies that the execution is to be performed.

  As a result, it is possible to reliably notify that the specific operation effect mode is executed before the second operation effect mode is started.

  In the gaming machine N8 or N9, an aspect display means for displaying the operation effect mode to be executed by the operation effect execution means, and an operation content display means for displaying the operation content of the operation means corresponding to the operation effect mode. The game machine N10, wherein the notification means displays the operation content of the operation means corresponding to the specific operation effect mode by the operation content display means.

  According to the gaming machine N10, the operation presentation mode executed by the operation presentation execution unit is displayed by the mode display unit, and the operation content of the operation unit corresponding to the operation presentation mode is displayed by the operation content display unit. Then, the operation content display means displays the operation content of the operation means corresponding to the specific operation effect mode.

  As a result, the operation content of the operation means corresponding to the specific operation effect mode is displayed, so that it is possible to execute the game without the player being confused. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to play from being reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines N1 to N10, the operation effect executing means is capable of executing a continuous operation effect mode in which the first operation effect mode and the second operation effect mode are continuously executed. A gaming machine N11 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine N11, the continuous operation effect mode is executed by the continuous operation effect mode in which the first operation effect mode and the second operation effect mode are continuously executed. As a result, it is possible to execute effects in which the player can operate the operation means in a short period of time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The gaming machine N11 has a presentation result display unit for displaying the presentation result of the operation presentation mode executed by the operation presentation execution unit, and the presentation result display unit includes the first operation presentation mode and the second operation presentation mode. A gaming machine N12 characterized by displaying the presentation result based on the operation presentation mode of (1).

  According to the gaming machine N12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N11, the following effects are exerted. That is, the effect result of the operation effect mode executed by the operation effect execution means is displayed by the effect result display means. Then, the presentation result is displayed based on the first operation presentation mode and the second operation presentation mode.

  As a result, it is possible to create an effect in which the first operation effect mode and the second operation effect mode are associated, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Feature P group> (change the interval between consecutive auto hits)
The operation means operable by the player, the signal output means for outputting a signal based on the operation of the operation means, the signal determination means for determining the signal output by the signal output means, and the signal When the determination result by the determination means satisfies the first condition, the signal determination in the state where the first setting means for setting the first effect mode in which the specific effect is executed, and the first effect mode is set In the case where the specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect every first period when the determination result by the means satisfies the second condition different from the first condition, and the first effect aspect is executed A period variable setting unit configured to variably set an execution period in the specific effect performed by the specific effect execution unit to a second period different from the first period based on the establishment of a predetermined variable condition; , Gaming machine P1, which is a shall.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is one in which a continuous hitting operation is automatically executed by pressing the operation button for a predetermined period as an operation effect using the operation button (for example, JP-A-2014-180364) Issue).

  In such a conventional type gaming machine, in an effect that requires operating the operation button a plurality of times (for example, a continuous hitting effect), the player can enjoy the continuous hitting effect only by continuously pressing the operation button. In the operation effects (for example, the timing press effect) other than the continuous hit effect, the automatic continuous hit operation is executed, so that the operation effects other than the continuous hit effect are impaired, and the player gets bored early in the game There was a problem of

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine P1, a signal is outputted by the signal output means based on the fact that the operation means operable by the player is operated, and the signal outputted is judged by the signal judgment means. And when the determination result by the signal determination means satisfies the first condition, the first effect mode in which the specific effect is executed is set by the first setting means, and the first effect mode is set. When the determination result by the signal determination means satisfies a second condition different from the first condition, a specific effect is performed by the specific effect execution means every first period. Furthermore, when the first effect mode is being executed, the execution period in the specific effect to be executed by the specific effect executing means is determined by the period variable setting means based on the establishment of the predetermined variable condition as the first period. Are variably set in different second periods.

  Thereby, it becomes possible to make the interval of the specific effect performed by the specific effect execution means different. Therefore, various effects using the operation means can be performed in the state where the specific effect executing means is being executed, and it is possible to suppress that the player gets bored early in the game.

  In the gaming machine P1, discrimination means for performing discrimination based on establishment of the discrimination condition, and privilege giving means for imparting a privilege to the player when the result of discrimination by the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result. A game machine P2 characterized in that a predetermined variable condition is established based on the result of discrimination by the discrimination means.

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and when the result of the discrimination is a predetermined discrimination result, the privilege is awarded to the player by the privilege giving means. Then, a predetermined variable condition is satisfied based on the determination result of the determination means.

  Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the determination result of the determination means by the execution period in the specific effect performed by the specific effect execution means. Therefore, the player pays attention to the specific effect to be executed based on the operation of the player, and it is possible to suppress the player from getting bored early in the game.

  A gaming machine P3 characterized in that the gaming machine P1 or P2 has notifying means for notifying that the second condition is satisfied by the signal judging means.

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1 or P2, the notification means reports that the second condition is satisfied by the signal determination means, so the player operates the operation means, When the conditions are satisfied, there is an effect that the player does not feel discomfort even if the execution period in the specific effect is changed.

  In the gaming machine P3, a gaming machine P4 characterized in that the notification means guides an execution period set by the period variable setting means.

  According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine P3, the notification means guides the execution period set by the period variable setting means, so the player can be given the next timing for executing a specific effect. It becomes possible to guide. Therefore, there is an effect that the player does not feel discomfort even if the execution period of the specific effect is changed.

  In any one of game machines P1 to P4, an effective period setting means for setting an effective period for effectively judging the operation of the operation means, and a remaining period for judging the remaining period of the effective period set by the effective period setting means The signal determination means determines that the second condition is satisfied when the operation means is operated continuously during a predetermined first determination period, and the remaining period is determined. In the case where the remaining period is determined to be a predetermined period by the determination means, the present invention is characterized by including determination period variable means for changing the first determination period to a second determination period shorter than the first determination period. A gaming machine P5.

  According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines P1 to P4, the following effects are exerted. That is, the effective period for effectively determining the operation of the operation means is set by the effective period setting means, and the remaining period of the effective period is determined by the remaining period determination means. When the operation means is operated continuously during the predetermined first determination period, the signal determination means determines that the second condition is satisfied, and the remaining period determination means determines the remaining period to be the predetermined period. The determination period changing means changes the first determination period into a second determination period shorter than the first determination period.

  Thereby, when the remaining period of the effective period in which the operation of the operation means is effectively determined becomes the predetermined period, it is possible to easily execute the specific effect varied in the second period, and the fun of the game can be realized. There is an effect that it can be improved.

  In the gaming machine P5, the predetermined period determined by the remaining period determining means is a period in which the remaining period is shorter than the first determination period.

  According to the gaming machine P6, since the remaining period determining means determines that the period whose remaining period is shorter than the first determination period is the predetermined period, the specified period is changed to the second period even if the effective period is short. It is possible to execute the rendition of d), and it is possible to enhance the rendition effect until the end of the effective period.

<Feature Q group> (connect multiple button operation effects)
Operation means operable by the player, determination means for determining that the operation means has been operated, and effective period setting means for setting an effective period in which the operation of the operation means is effectively determined by the determination means And notification means for notifying an operation notification mode for causing the player to operate the operation means, and operation effect execution means for executing an operation effect based on the fact that the operation of the operation means is determined by the determination means. When at least a first valid period and a second valid period are set under a predetermined condition by the valid period setting means, identification is performed over the first valid period and the second valid period. And a notification control means for notifying the operation notification aspect of the invention by the notification means.

  Here, there are gaming machines such as pachinko machines that can execute a plurality of operation effects using operation buttons (for example, JP-A-2014-180364).

  In such a conventional type gaming machine, since a plurality of operation effects are executed, the opportunity for the player to operate the operation button can be increased, and the gaming intention can be enhanced, but the plurality of operation effects are set frequently If this is done, the player frequently repeats the action of operating the operation button and the action of not operating the operation button, and there is a problem that the gaming intention is lowered.

  Furthermore, in the conventional game machine, an effective period in which the operation of the operation button can be accepted is set, and if it is within the effective period, effects based on the operation of the operation button are executed. For example, since the effect based on the operation of the operation button is not executed, when the player operates the operation button a plurality of times, a part of the plurality of operations is the operation in the ineffective period. Although the effect is not executed despite the operation of the operation button, there is a problem that the gaming intention is lowered.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine Q1, the determination means determines that the operation means operable by the player has been operated by the determination means, and the determination means sets the effective period in which the operation of the operation means is effectively determined. An operation notification mode which is set by the unit and causes the player to operate the operation unit is notified by the notification unit. Furthermore, the operation effect is executed by the operation effect execution means based on the fact that the operation of the operation means is determined by the determination means.

  Then, when at least the first valid period and the second valid period are set under the predetermined condition by the valid period setting means, the notification control means straddles the first valid period and the second valid period. To notify the notification means of the specific operation notification mode.

  Thereby, when the first valid period and the second valid period are set under a predetermined condition, the specific operation notification mode is broadcasted across the first valid period and the second valid period, and thus a plurality of operation notification modes are provided. It is possible to notify that the effective period is continuous. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from stopping the operation of the operation means between the first valid period and the second valid period. Therefore, by repeatedly repeating the act of operating the operation means and the act of not operating the operation means, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game.

  In this case, as a predetermined condition for setting the first valid period and the second valid period, it is desirable that the set interval be short (for example, within 5 seconds). By setting such conditions, there is an effect that it is possible to further suppress the decline in the game intention.

  Moreover, as a method of determining whether or not the first effective period and the second effective period are set under a predetermined condition, a method of determining an actual period may be used, and a plurality of operation effects are predetermined. You may use the method of discriminate | determining that it is set by the combination.

  Furthermore, as an operation effect in the gaming machine Q1, for example, a display mode displayed on a display device provided in the gaming machine, a driving mode of a driving object provided in the gaming machine, or an audio output device provided in the gaming machine The sound mode which is output from a light emitting device such as an LED or the like provided in a game machine can be considered. As described above, it is only required that the player who operates the operation means can recognize the effect to be performed based on the determination of the operation to the operation means.

  In addition, the operation means in the gaming machine Q1 may be any one that can be operated by the player, for example, a button device that the player can depress and operate, and a reaction or detection of contact or proximity of the player Sensor devices, dial devices that can be operated by the player, lever devices that can be operated by the player back and forth, and so on are conceivable.

  A gaming machine Q2 comprising: notification mode setting means for setting the specific operation notification mode based on the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means.

  According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine Q1, the specific operation notification mode is set by the notification mode setting means based on the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means, so the first effective period It is possible to set a specific operation notification mode to be notified over the second validity period based on the operation effect performed during the first validity period or the second validity period.

  As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the specific operation notification mode notified over the first and second effective periods to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In the gaming machine Q2, the notification mode setting means sets, as the specific operation notification mode, an extension effect mode based on the first operation effect to be executed when the first effective period is set. A game machine Q3 characterized by being a game.

  According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q2, the first operation effect to be executed when the first valid period is set as the specific operation notification mode by the notification mode setting means Since the extension effect mode based on is set, it is possible to make it appear that the first valid period continues until the second valid period starts. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play by frequently repeating the act of operating the operation means and the act of not operating the operation means.

  In the gaming machine Q2 or Q3, the notification mode setting means sets, as the specific operation notification mode, an advance effect mode based on a second operation effect to be executed when the second effective period is set. A game machine Q4 characterized by being set.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q2 or Q3, the second operation performed when the second valid period is set as the specific operation notification mode by the notification mode setting means. Since the pre-rendering aspect based on the rendition is set, it is possible to make the second valid period appear to be set continuously with the first valid period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to further suppress the decrease in the game intention due to the player repeatedly repeating the action of operating the operation button and the action of not operating the operation button.

  In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q4, during the ineffective period set between the first effective period and the second effective period, the operation effect to be executed by the operation effect executing means is simulated. A game machine Q5 characterized by having a pseudo effect execution means to be executed.

  According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q4, the following effects are exerted. That is, during the ineffective period set between the first effective period and the second effective period, the operation effect executed by the operation effect executing means is pseudo-executed by the pseudo effect executing means.

  Thus, by displaying the operation effect in a pseudo manner, it is possible to make it appear to the player as if the first valid period and the second valid period are continuously set. There is an effect that it is possible to further suppress the decline in the gaming intention due to the frequent repetition of the operation to operate and the operation not to operate.

  It should be noted that, as a pseudo operation effect in the gaming machine Q5, it is preferable to execute an effect in which the effect mode is variable. Thus, in the period between the first effective period and the second effective period in which the ineffective period is actually set, the operating means is operated to the player operating the operating means continuously. Therefore, it can be considered that the effect mode is variable, and there is an effect that the game intention can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, according to the configuration provided with the gaming machine Q3, it is possible to execute a pseudo operation effect as if the operation effect performed in the first effective period is extended, and it is possible to the player There is an effect that it is possible to provide a more easily understood presentation.

  Further, according to the configuration provided with the gaming machine Q4, the pseudo operation effect is performed as the operation effect performed in the second effective period is continuously performed with the first effective period. This is advantageous in that the player can be provided with an effect that is more understandable.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q5, the notification control means determines the specific operation notification mode based on the determination that the predetermined operation condition is satisfied by the determination means during the first effective period. A game machine Q6 characterized by being notified by the notification means.

  According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines Q1 to Q5, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the fact that the determination means determines that the predetermined operation condition is satisfied during the first effective period, the notification control means notifies the notification means of the specific operation notification mode.

  Thus, even if the first and second valid periods are set at short intervals, if the player does not operate the operation means during the first valid period, a specific operation notification is issued. An aspect is not alert | reported. Therefore, for example, it is possible to suppress unnecessary notification of a specific operation notification mode to a player who does not like the operation effect, and therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game intention.

  In addition, even when the first and second valid periods are set at short intervals, if the player does not operate the operation means during the first valid period, the above-described problem, that is, Since the problem itself that the game will decline is caused by the fact that the action to operate the operation means and the action not to operate are repeated frequently, there is no problem that the game will fall even though the specific operation notification mode is not notified There is no decline. Rather, it is possible to reduce the number of processes for notifying a specific operation notification mode, and to provide the player with an effect to be executed in a normal state.

  As the predetermined operation condition in the gaming machine Q6, for example, it may be set that the operation means is operated a plurality of times during the first effective period as the operation condition. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game intention of the player who is actively operating the operation means. Further, a remaining period determining means for determining the remaining period of the first effective period is provided, and the operating means is operated in a state where it is determined by the remaining period determining means that the predetermined remaining period (for example, within 5 seconds remaining) Means for setting the operation condition as the operation condition or determining the period until the second valid period starts, and the state determined to be a predetermined remaining period (for example, within 10 seconds) The fact that the operation means has been operated may be set as the operation condition. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming intention due to frequent repetition of the operation of operating the operation means and the operation of not operating the operation means.

  In the gaming machine Q6, the determination means has operation count measurement means capable of measuring the number of times the operation means has been operated, and the operation count measurement means measures a predetermined number of operations during the first validity period. The game machine Q7 is characterized in that the operation condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine Q7, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine Q6, the following effects are exerted. That is, the number of times the operation means has been operated is measured by the operation number measurement means of the determination means. The operation condition is satisfied when the number of operations measured by the number-of-operations measurement means reaches a predetermined number during the first valid period.

  As a result, when a predetermined number of operations are performed during the first valid period, a specific operation notification mode is notified. Therefore, for example, when the operation effect for continuously hitting the operation means is executed during the first effective period, a specific operation notification mode is notified to the player who is actively operating the operation means. It is possible to Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the player who is operating the operating means with desire to stop the operation of the operating means frequently, so that the player's willingness to play is suppressed from being reduced. It has the effect of being able to

  Furthermore, according to the configuration provided with the gaming machine Q5, the player is caused to execute the pseudo operation effect by executing the operation effect in which the effect mode is frequently changed as the pseudo operation effect to be performed. On the other hand, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving a sense of incongruity. In addition, it is preferable to be able to execute a plurality of operation effects corresponding to the number of times the simulated effect execution means changes the effect mode, and to set the operation effect based on the number of times the measurement operation means is operated by the operation number measurement means. .

  In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q7, the notification control means causes the notification means to notify the specific operation notification mode on the basis of the end timing of the first effective period. Machine Q8.

  According to the gaming machine Q8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q7, the notification control means causes the notification means to notify the specific operation notification mode based on the end timing of the first effective period. It is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether or not the second valid period is set until the first valid period ends. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the rendering effect due to the player grasping the operation rendering to be executed later.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, when at least the first valid period and the second valid period are set by the predetermined condition by the valid period setting means, the first valid period and the first valid period. A game machine Q9 characterized in that it has effective period changing means for changing the effective period so as to be continuous with the second effective period.

  According to the gaming machine Q9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, the following effects are exerted. That is, when at least the first valid period and the second valid period are set under the predetermined condition by the valid period setting means, the valid period is set such that the first valid period and the second valid period are continuous. The effective period is changed by the changing means.

  As a result, when a plurality of valid periods are set, it is possible to set the plurality of valid periods as consecutive valid periods. That is, since the ineffective period set between the first effective period and the second effective period can be eliminated, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game intention due to the effect not being changed although the operation means is operated. It has the effect of being able to

  Here, to make the effective period in the gaming machine Q9 continuous, a period in which the effect is not changed despite the player operating the operation means is set between the first effective period and the second effective period. The effective period may be changed so that the first effective period and the second effective period are actually connected, or the first effective period and the second effective period may be used. In the meantime, a period shorter than the period required to determine that the operation means has been operated may be idle.

  In the gaming machine Q9, the effective period changing means additionally sets a period between the first effective period and the second effective period as the effective period.

  According to the gaming machine Q10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q9, the effective period changing means additionally sets an effective period in the period between the first effective period and the second effective period. Thus, a plurality of valid periods can be made continuous without changing the first valid period and the second valid period, so that the control load of the valid period changing means can be reduced.

  A gaming machine Q11 characterized in that, in the gaming machine Q9 or Q10, the valid period changing means is for delaying the start of the first valid period.

  According to the gaming machine Q11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q9 or Q10, the effective period changing means delays the start of the first effective period. As a result, since the first effective period and the second effective period can be made continuous, there is no need to set a new effective period, and it is possible to reduce the control load of the effective period changing means.

  A gaming machine Q12 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines Q9 to Q11, the valid period changing means is for advancing the start of the second valid period.

  According to the gaming machine Q12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines Q9 to Q11, the start of the second effective period is advanced by the effective period changing means. As a result, since the first effective period and the second effective period can be made continuous, there is no need to set a new effective period, and it is possible to reduce the control load of the effective period changing means.

  In any one of the game machines Q9 to Q12, the notification means has an effective period display means for displaying the operation notification mode on the display means, and based on the effective period being changed by the effective period change means. A gaming machine Q13 characterized in that it has a valid period display changing means for changing the operation notification mode displayed by the valid period display means.

  According to the gaming machine Q13, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines Q9 to Q12, the following effects can be achieved. That is, the operation notification mode is displayed on the display unit by the valid period display unit, and the operation notification mode is changed by the valid period display changing unit based on the fact that the valid period is changed by the valid period changing unit.

  As a result, since the fact that the valid period has been changed can be displayed to the player by the valid period changing means, it is possible to provide an effect that the player can easily understand.

  In the gaming machine Q13, the effective period display changing means changes the operation notification mode based on the passage of the first effective period.

  According to the gaming machine Q14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q13, the operation notification mode is changed by the effective period display changing means based on the elapse of the first effective period. As a result, the player grasps the contents of the operation effect to be executed later (the operation effect for which the second effective period is set) in a state in which the first effective period has not elapsed, and the effect is reduced. There is an effect that it can control the situation where it does.

  Discrimination means for executing discrimination based on establishment of discrimination conditions in any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q14, and privilege provision for giving a bonus to the player when the result of discrimination by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result Means, and a period effect execution means for executing a period effect for a predetermined period based on the result of the determination by the determination means, wherein the period effect execution means executes a combined effect in which a plurality of effective periods are set The gaming machine Q15 is characterized in that the notification control means is capable of notifying the notification means of the specific operation notification mode based on the determination result of the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine Q15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines Q1 to Q14, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the result of the determination performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition is a specific determination result, the benefit is provided by the benefit providing means. And based on the result of the discrimination | determination by a discrimination means, the composite presentation by which multiple effective periods were set as a period production of a predetermined period by the period production execution means is performed.

  As a result, the combined effect based on the determination result by the determination means can be executed, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Discrimination means for executing discrimination based on establishment of discrimination conditions in any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q14, and privilege provision for giving a bonus to the player when the result of discrimination by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result Means, and a period effect executing means for executing a period effect for a predetermined period based on the result of determination by the determining means, wherein the notification control means is executed earlier among the continuous period effects When the first valid period set in the first period effect and the second valid period set in the second period effect to be executed later are set under predetermined conditions A game machine Q16, which causes the notification means to notify the specific operation notification mode.

  According to the gaming machine Q16, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines Q1 to Q14, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the result of the determination performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition is a specific determination result, the benefit is provided by the benefit providing means. Also, based on the result of the determination by the determination means, the period effect execution means executes a period effect for a predetermined period. Then, of the consecutive period effects, a first effective period set in the first period effect to be executed first and a second effective period set in the second period effect to be executed later If the user is set under a predetermined condition, the notification control means causes the notification means to notify of a specific operation notification mode.

  As a result, even when the first valid period and the second valid period are set across a plurality of effects, the player frequently repeats the action of operating the operating means and the action of not operating the operating means. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game intention due to the situation.

  A discrimination condition storage unit capable of storing a plurality of discrimination information based on the establishment of the discrimination condition in the gaming machine Q16; and a priori determination unit that discriminates in advance the discrimination information stored in the discrimination condition storage unit Game machine characterized in that the notification control means causes the notification means to notify the specific operation notification mode on the basis of the determination result of the prior determination means for the second period effect. Q17.

  According to the gaming machine Q17, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine Q16, the following effects are exerted. That is, the discrimination condition storage means stores a plurality of discrimination information based on the satisfaction of the discrimination condition, and the plurality of discrimination information stored is judged by the prior judgment means. Then, based on the determination result of the prior determination means for the second period effect, the notification control means notifies the notification means of the specific operation notification mode.

  Thereby, when the first effective period and the second effective period are set across the first period effect and the second period effect, the prior determination corresponding to the second period effect to be executed later A specific operation notification mode is notified based on the determination result of the means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Game machines A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16, G1 to G11, H1 to H10, J1 to J10, K1 to K9, L1 to L9, M1 to M7, In any one of N1 to N12, P1 to P6 and Q1 to Q17, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  Game machines A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16, G1 to G11, H1 to H10, J1 to J10, K1 to K9, L1 to L9, M1 to M7, A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that, in any one of N1 to N12, P1 to P6 and Q1 to Q17, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

Game machines A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16, G1 to G11, H1 to H10, J1 to J10, K1 to K9, L1 to L9, M1 to M7, In any one of N1 to N12, P1 to P6 and Q1 to Q17, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine, and a gaming machine Z3. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is one which executes an effect in which a point indicating a predetermined value is displayed on a display device and gives a benefit effect when the point reaches a predetermined number (for example, patent documents 1: JP 2012-179176)).
However, in the above-described pachinko machine, further improvement in interest has been desired.
The present technical concept is made to solve the problems and the like exemplified above, and aims to improve the interest of the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 includes a display means having a display area, a first effect execution means for executing a predetermined first effect on the display means for a predetermined period, and a first effect execution The display means has a second effect execution means for executing a predetermined second effect while the means is being executed, the second effect execution means performing the second effect The second effect is performed on the display area corresponding to the display mode of the first effect.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, wherein the second effect executing means executes the second effect in a predetermined allowable area of the display area in the display means. And an area changing unit configured to change the allowable area based on a display mode of the first effect when the second effect is executed.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 according to the invention, wherein a main subject is displayed on which an image to be a subject is displayed among the first effects displayed in the display area by the first effect executing means. The first effect determining means for determining an area is provided, and the area changing means is capable of executing the second effect based on the display area determined to be the main subject display area by the first effect determining means. The tolerance range is variable.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 4, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 3, the area variable means executes the second effect in the display area determined to be the main subject display area by the first effect determining means. A difficult prohibited area is used, and the area other than the main display area is used as the allowable area.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 5, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 3, the first effect determination unit determines that the main image after the predetermined period has elapsed among the display regions determined as the main display region. The specific subject display area judging means for judging the specific subject display area not to be displayed is provided, and the area variable means sets the display area judged to be the specific subject display area by the specific subject display area judging means as the allowable area. It is
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, while the first effect executing means executes the predetermined first effect on the display means having the display area for a predetermined period, and while the first effect executing means is being executed, A predetermined second effect is executed on the display area corresponding to the display mode of the first effect by the second effect execution means on the display means.
Thereby, the position where the second effect is displayed can be displayed corresponding to the first effect being executed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, the second effect is executed by the second effect execution means in a predetermined allowable area in the display area of the display means. Then, the allowable area is changed by the area changing means based on the display mode of the first effect when the second effect is executed.
As a result, it is possible to change the allowable area for executing the second effect based on the display area in which the first effect is displayed. Therefore, the second effect can be performed in the area related to the first effect, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the following effect is exerted. That is, among the first effects displayed in the display area by the first effect execution means, the main effect display area in which the main image is displayed is determined by the first effect determination means. Then, the allowable area in which the second effect can be performed is changed based on the display area determined by the area changing means as the main display area by the first effect determining means.
As a result, it is possible to change the allowable area for executing the second effect based on the display area in which the main image in the first effect is displayed. Therefore, since it is possible to execute the second effect in the area related to the first effect, there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be further enhanced.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, the following effect is exerted. That is, the display area determined to be the main display area by the first effect determination means is set as the prohibited area where the second effect is difficult to execute by the area changing means. Then, the area other than the main display area is set as the allowable area by the area changing means.
As a result, the display area in which the main image in the first effect is displayed and the display area in which the second effect is executed overlap, and it can be suppressed that the effect of the effect is reduced. effective.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, the following effect is exerted. That is, among the display areas determined to be the subject display area, the specific subject display area in which the specific subject display area for which the main subject image is not displayed after a predetermined period has not been displayed is determined The area is made to be an allowable area by area variable means.
Thereby, as the display area for executing the second effect, it is possible to set the display area after the elapse of the predetermined period as the allowable area. Therefore, it is possible to give a width to the timing of executing the second effect, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
S 2006 the first production run means S2038 the second demonstration execution hand stage

Claims (2)

At least a first aspect, a plurality of the second aspect, the first demonstration execution means for executing a first effect causes the variable one of the representation embodiment to the second embodiment differ from its first aspect,
Position setting means for setting an execution position of a second effect different from the first effect;
In a gaming machine provided with second effect execution means for executing the second effect at the execution position set by the position setting means,
The first demonstration execution means is adapted execution position of the first effect is to execute the first effect to hide the second effect when overlapping the execution position of the second effect,
The second demonstration execution means comprises a first state before Symbol first effect is the execution position of the first effect and the execution position of the second effect overlap when Ru Tei is performed in the first embodiment, and, wherein the run position where the execution position of the first effect and the execution position of the second effect is the second state hardly overlap than said first state when said first demonstration is executed in the second embodiment The second effect is to be executed,
If the first effect is said to have been executed during running in the first mode the second effect is that the first effect that is executed in the first embodiment is varied to the second aspect , Ri Monodea executed by the second demonstration execution means such that said second state from the first state,
It said position setting means, in response to said variable mode of the first effect that is performed by the first demonstration execution unit, the gaming machine characterized by settable der isosamples at different running position of the second effect . Having determination means capable of executing predetermined determination;
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the second effect executed by the second effect execution means includes suggestion information suggesting the determination result of the determination means.

Images